USER MANUAL

GFK-1645M
Dec 2019

PACSystemsTM VersaMax
MICRO PLC & NANO PLC
USER MANUAL
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction .......................................................... 1
1.1 VersaMax Micro, Micro PLUS and Nano PLC Models .............................................. 2
1.1.1 VersaMax Nano PLCs ................................................................................. 2
1.1.2 VersaMax Micro and Micro PLUS PLCs ........................................................ 3
1.1.3 VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Units ......................................................... 4
1.1.4 Option Modules ........................................................................................ 5
1.2 Comparison of Program and Data Memory Available ........................................... 6
1.3 Comparison of PLC Features ................................................................................ 7
1.4 Comparison of I/O and Power Features for PLCs ................................................... 9
1.5 Comparison of I/O and Power Features for Expansion Units ................................ 10
1.6 VersaMax Serial to Ethernet Adapter .................................................................. 12
1.6.1 Firmware Options.................................................................................... 12
1.6.2 Serial Interface ........................................................................................ 12
1.6.3 Network Interface ................................................................................... 12
1.6.4 Power Requirements ............................................................................... 12
1.7 Logic-Driven Read/Write Flash Memory Feature ................................................ 13
1.8 Online Program Changes ................................................................................... 13
1.8.1 Word for Word Changes .......................................................................... 13
1.8.2 Run Mode Store ...................................................................................... 13
1.9 Documentation ................................................................................................. 14
1.10 Revisions in this Manual ..................................................................................... 14

Chapter 2: VersaMax Nano PLCs ............................................ 15

2.1 VersaMax Nano PLC Features ............................................................................. 15
2.1.1 Nano PLC General Specifications ............................................................. 16
2.1.2 RS-232 Serial Port .................................................................................... 16
2.1.3 Status LEDs ............................................................................................. 16
2.1.4 High-Speed Counters .............................................................................. 17
2.2 IC200NAL110 Nano PLCs with 10 Discrete Points and 1 Analog Input: (6) 12Vdc In, (4)
Relay Out, 1 Analog Input, 12Vdc Power Supply ................................................ 17
2.2.1 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 17
2.2.2 Analog Input ........................................................................................... 17
2.2.3 Relay Outputs ......................................................................................... 18
2.2.4 Nano PLC IC200NAL110 Specifications .................................................... 18

Contents i
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

2.2.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200NAL110 ............................................................... 19

2.3 IC200NAL211 Nano PLC with 10 Discrete Points and 1 Analog Input: (6) 12Vdc In, (4) Relay
Out, 1 Analog Input, 24Vdc Power Supply .......................................................... 20
2.3.1 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 20
2.3.2 Analog Input ........................................................................................... 20
2.3.3 Relay Outputs ......................................................................................... 20
2.3.4 Nano PLC IC200NAL211 Specifications .................................................... 21
2.3.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200NAL211 ............................................................... 22
2.4 IC200NDD010 10 Point Nano PLC: (6) 12Vdc In, (4) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc Power Supply 23
2.4.1 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 23
2.4.2 Transistor Outputs .................................................................................. 23
2.4.3 Nano PLC IC200NDD010 Specifications ................................................... 23
2.4.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200NDD010 .............................................................. 25
2.5 IC200NDD101 10 Point Nano PLC: (6) 24Vdc In, (4) 12Vdc Out, 24Vdc Power Supply 25
2.5.1 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 25
2.5.2 Transistor Outputs .................................................................................. 25
2.5.3 Nano PLC IC200NDD101 Specifications ................................................... 26
2.5.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200NDD101 .............................................................. 27
2.6 IC200NDR001 ................................................................................................... 28
2.6.1 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 28
2.6.2 Relay Outputs ......................................................................................... 28
2.6.3 Nano PLC IC200NDR001 Specifications ................................................... 28
2.6.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200NDR001 ............................................................... 30
2.7 IC200NDR010 10 Point Nano PLC: (6) 24Vdc In, (4) Relay Out, 12Vdc Power Supply 30
2.7.1 Inputs ..................................................................................................... 30
2.7.2 Relay Outputs ......................................................................................... 30
2.7.3 Nano PLC IC200NDR010 Specifications ................................................... 31
2.7.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200NR010 ................................................................. 32

Chapter 3: VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs ............................. 33

3.1 VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLC Features .............................................................. 33
3.2 14-Point Micro PLC General Specifications ......................................................... 34
3.3 High-Speed Counters ........................................................................................ 34
3.4 IC200UAA003 14-Point Micro PLC, (8) 120Vac In, (6) 120Vac Out, 120/240Vac Power
Supply ............................................................................................................... 35
3.4.1 AC Inputs ................................................................................................ 35
3.4.2 AC Outputs ............................................................................................. 35

Contents ii
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.4.3 Micro PLC IC200UAA003 Specifications ................................................... 35

3.4.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UAA003 ............................................................... 36
3.5 IC200UAR014 14-Point Micro PLC, (8) 120Vac In, (6) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
.......................................................................................................................... 37
3.5.1 Inputs ..................................................................................................... 37
3.5.2 Relay Outputs ......................................................................................... 37
3.5.3 Micro PLC IC200UAR014 Specifications ................................................... 37
3.5.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UAR014 ............................................................... 39
3.6 IC200UDD104 14-Point Micro PLC, (8) 24Vdc In, (6) 24Vdc Source Out, 24Vdc Power
Supply ............................................................................................................... 39
3.6.1 DC Power ................................................................................................ 39
3.6.2 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 40
3.6.3 Outputs .................................................................................................. 40
3.6.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD104 Specifications .................................................. 40
3.6.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD104 .............................................................. 42
3.7 IC200UDD112 14 Point Micro PLC, (8) 12Vdc In, (6) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc Power Supply 43
3.7.1 DC Power ................................................................................................ 43
3.7.2 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 43
3.7.3 Transistor Outputs .................................................................................. 43
3.7.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD112 Specifications .................................................. 44
3.7.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD112 .............................................................. 45
3.8 IC200UDR001 14-Point Micro PLC, (8) 24Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
.......................................................................................................................... 46
3.8.1 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 46
3.8.2 Relay Outputs ......................................................................................... 46
3.8.3 Micro PLC IC200UDR001 Specifications ................................................... 46
3.8.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDR001 ............................................................... 48
3.9 IC200UDR002 14-Point Micro PLC, (8) 24Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply 49
3.9.1 DC Power ................................................................................................ 49
3.9.2 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 49
3.9.3 Relay Outputs ......................................................................................... 49
3.9.4 Micro PLC IC200UDR002 Specifications ................................................... 50
3.9.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDR002 ............................................................... 51
3.10 IC200UDR003 14-Point Micro PLC, (8) 12Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 12Vdc Power Supply 52
3.10.1 DC Power ................................................................................................ 52
3.10.2 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 52

Contents iii
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.10.3 Relay Outputs ......................................................................................... 52

3.10.4 Micro PLC IC200UDR003 Specifications ................................................... 53
3.10.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDR003 ............................................................... 54

Chapter 4: VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs .......... 55

4.1 Features of VersaMax 20-Point Micro PLCs ......................................................... 55
4.1.1 Run/Stop Switch...................................................................................... 56
4.1.2 Ports ....................................................................................................... 56
4.1.3 Analog Inputs .......................................................................................... 57
4.1.4 Removable Terminal Strips ...................................................................... 57
4.1.5 Status LEDs ............................................................................................. 57
4.1.6 Backup Battery ........................................................................................ 57
4.2 General Specifications of 20-Point VersaMax Micro PLCs .................................... 58
4.3 High-Speed Counters ........................................................................................ 58
4.4 IC200UDD020 20-Point Micro PLC, (12) 24Vdc In, (4) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, (4) LCDC Out,
24Vdc Power Supply .......................................................................................... 59
4.4.1 DC Power ................................................................................................ 59
4.4.2 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 59
4.4.3 DC Outputs ............................................................................................. 59
4.4.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD020 Specifications .................................................. 60
4.4.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD020 .............................................................. 61
4.5 IC200UDD220 20-Point Micro PLC, (12) 24Vdc In, (8) 24Vdc Out (Sink), 24Vdc Power
Supply ............................................................................................................... 62
4.5.1 DC Power ................................................................................................ 62
4.5.2 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 62
4.5.3 DC Outputs ............................................................................................. 62
4.5.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD220 Specifications .................................................. 63
4.5.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD220 .............................................................. 64
4.6 IC200UDR020 20-Point Micro PLC, (12) 24Vdc In, (8) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply 65
4.6.1 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 65
4.6.2 Relay Outputs ......................................................................................... 65
4.6.3 Micro PLC IC200UDR020 Specifications ................................................... 65
4.6.4 Wiring Diagram, PLC IC200UDR020 ........................................................ 67
4.7 IC200UDR120 20-Point Micro PLC, (12) 24Vdc In, (8) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
.......................................................................................................................... 67
4.7.1 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 67
4.7.2 Relay Outputs ......................................................................................... 68

Contents iv
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

4.7.3 Micro PLC IC200UDR120, Specifications .................................................. 68

4.7.4 Wiring Diagram, PLC IC200UDR120 ........................................................ 69

Chapter 5: Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels

70
5.1 VersaMax 23 Discrete / 3 Analog Micro PLC Features ......................................... 70
5.2 General Specifications for 23-Point VersaMax Micro PLCs .................................. 71
5.2.1 Run/Stop Switch...................................................................................... 72
5.2.2 Serial Ports .............................................................................................. 72
5.2.3 Analog Potentiometers ........................................................................... 72
5.2.4 Removable Terminal Strips ...................................................................... 73
5.2.5 Status LEDs ............................................................................................. 73
5.2.6 Backup Battery ........................................................................................ 73
5.3 High-Speed Counters ........................................................................................ 73
5.3.1 Analog I/O ............................................................................................... 73
5.4 IC200UAL004 Micro PLC, 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels: (13) 12Vdc In, (10)
Relay Out, (2) Analog In, (1) Analog Out, 12Vdc Power Supply ........................... 74
5.4.1 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 74
5.4.2 Normally-Open Relay Outputs ................................................................. 75
5.4.3 DC Power Supply ..................................................................................... 75
5.4.4 Micro PLC IC200UAL004 Specifications.................................................... 75
5.4.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UAL004................................................................ 76
5.5 IC200UAL005 Micro PLC, 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels: (13) 24Vdc In, (1)
24Vdc Out, (9) Relay Out, (2) Analog In, (1) Analog Out, 24Vdc Power Supply ... 77
5.5.1 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 77
5.5.2 DC Output (Q1) ....................................................................................... 77
5.5.3 Normally-Open Relay Outputs ................................................................. 77
5.5.4 DC Power Supply ..................................................................................... 77
5.5.5 Micro PLC IC200UAL005 Specifications.................................................... 78
5.5.6 Wiring Diagram, IC200UAL005................................................................ 80
5.6 IC200UAL006 Micro PLC, 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels: (13) 24Vdc In, (1)
24Vdc Out, (9) Relay Out, (2) Analog In, (1) Analog Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply 80
5.6.1 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 81
5.6.2 DC Output (Q1) ....................................................................................... 81
5.6.3 Normally-Open Relay Outputs ................................................................. 81
5.6.4 Micro PLC IC200UAL006 Specifications.................................................... 81
5.6.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UAL006................................................................ 83

Contents v
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

5.7 Analog Operation .............................................................................................. 84

5.7.1 Analog I/O Parameters ............................................................................ 84
5.7.2 Input/Output Values Compared to Process Data ..................................... 84
5.7.3 Analog Input Processing .......................................................................... 85
5.7.4 Analog Output Processing ....................................................................... 86
5.7.5 Adjusting the Calibration of Analog Channels .......................................... 87

Chapter 6: VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs ............................. 88

6.1 Features of VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs ......................................................... 88
6.1.1 Run/Stop Switch...................................................................................... 89
6.1.2 Serial Ports .............................................................................................. 90
6.1.3 Analog Potentiometers ........................................................................... 90
6.1.4 Removable Terminal Strips ...................................................................... 90
6.1.5 Status LEDs ............................................................................................. 90
6.1.6 Backup Battery ........................................................................................ 90
6.2 General Specifications for 28-Point VersaMax Micro PLCs .................................. 91
6.3 High-Speed Counters ........................................................................................ 91
6.4 IC200UAA007 28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 120Vac In, (12) 120Vac Out, 120/240Vac Power
Supply ............................................................................................................... 92
6.4.1 Inputs ..................................................................................................... 92
6.4.2 AC Outputs ............................................................................................. 92
6.4.3 Micro PLC IC200UAA007 Specifications ................................................... 93
6.4.4 Wiring Diagram IC200UAA007 ................................................................ 94
6.5 IC200UAR028 28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 120Vac In, (2/10) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power
Supply ............................................................................................................... 94
6.5.1 Inputs ..................................................................................................... 94
6.5.2 Relay Outputs ......................................................................................... 94
6.5.3 Micro PLC IC200UAR028 Specifications ................................................... 95
6.5.4 Wiring Diagram IC200UAR028 ................................................................ 96
6.6 IC200UDD110 28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
.......................................................................................................................... 96
6.6.1 DC Power ................................................................................................ 96
6.6.2 DC Inputs ................................................................................................ 97
6.6.3 Transistor Outputs .................................................................................. 97
6.6.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD110 Specifications .................................................. 97
6.6.5 Wiring Diagram IC200UDD110 ............................................................... 99

Contents vi
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.7 IC200UDD120 28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, 24Vdc Power
Supply ............................................................................................................. 100
6.7.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 100
6.7.2 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 100
6.7.3 Transistor Outputs ................................................................................ 100
6.7.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD120 Specifications ................................................ 101
6.7.5 Wiring Diagram IC200UDD120 ............................................................. 102
6.8 IC200UDD212 28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 12Vdc In, (12) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
........................................................................................................................ 103
6.8.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 103
6.8.2 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 103
6.8.3 Transistor Outputs ................................................................................ 103
6.8.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD212 Specifications ................................................ 104
6.8.5 Wiring Diagram IC200UDD212 ............................................................. 105
6.9 IC200UDR005 28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 24Vdc In, (1) 24Vdc Out, (11) Relay Out,
120/240Vac Power Supply ............................................................................... 106
6.9.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 106
6.9.2 DC Output (Q1) ..................................................................................... 106
6.9.3 Relay Outputs (Q2 – Q12) ..................................................................... 106
6.9.4 Micro PLC IC200UDR005 Specifications ................................................. 106
6.9.5 Wiring Diagram IC200UDR005 .............................................................. 108
6.10 IC200UDR006 28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 12Vdc In, (12) Relay Out, 12Vdc Power Supply 109
6.10.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 109
6.10.2 Inputs ................................................................................................... 109
6.10.3 Relay Outputs (Q1 – Q12) ..................................................................... 109
6.10.4 Micro PLC IC200UDR006 Specifications ................................................. 110
6.10.5 Wiring Diagram IC200UDR006 .............................................................. 111
6.11 IC200UDR010 28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 24Vdc In, (1) 24Vdc Out, (11) Relay Out, 24Vdc PS
IC200UDR228 28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 24 VC In, (1) 24Vdc Out, (11) Relay Out, 12/24Vdc
PS .................................................................................................................... 112
6.11.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 112
6.11.2 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 112
6.11.3 DC Output (Q1) ..................................................................................... 112
6.11.4 Relay Outputs (Q2 – Q12) ..................................................................... 113
6.11.5 Micro PLC IC200UDR010, IC200UDR228 Specifications ......................... 113
6.11.6 Wiring Diagram IC200UDR010, IC200UDR228 ...................................... 115

Contents vii
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 7: VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs ........ 116

7.1 Features of VersaMax 40-Point Micro PLCs ....................................................... 116
7.1.1 Run/Stop Switch.................................................................................... 117
7.1.2 Ports ..................................................................................................... 117
7.1.3 Analog Inputs ........................................................................................ 118
7.1.4 Removable Terminal Strips .................................................................... 118
7.1.5 Status LEDs ........................................................................................... 118
7.1.6 Backup Battery ...................................................................................... 118
7.2 General Specifications of 40-Point VersaMax Micro PLCs .................................. 119
7.3 High-Speed Counters ...................................................................................... 119
7.4 IC200UDD040 40-Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out with ESCP,(4) LCDC Out,
24Vdc Power Supply ........................................................................................ 120
7.4.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 120
7.4.2 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 120
7.4.3 DC Outputs ........................................................................................... 120
7.4.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD040 Specifications ................................................ 121
7.4.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD040 ............................................................ 122
7.5 IC200UDD240 40 Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (16) 24Vdc Out (Sink), 24Vdc Power
Supply ............................................................................................................. 123
7.5.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 123
7.5.2 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 123
7.5.3 DC Outputs ........................................................................................... 123
7.5.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD240 Specifications ................................................ 124
7.6 IC200UDR040 40 Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (16) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR140 40 Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (16) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power
Supply IC200UDR440 40 Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (16) Relay Out, 12/24Vdc Power
Supply ............................................................................................................. 126
7.6.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 126
7.6.2 Relay Outputs ....................................................................................... 126
7.6.3 Micro PLC IC200UDR040, IC200UDR140, IC200UDR440 Specifications . 127
7.6.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDR040, IC200UDR140, IC200UDR440 ............. 129

Chapter 8: VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs ........ 130

8.1 Features of VersaMax 64-Point Micro PLCs ....................................................... 130
8.2 General Specifications of 64-Point VersaMax Micro PLCs .................................. 131
8.3 High-Speed Counters ...................................................................................... 131
8.3.1 Run/Stop Switch.................................................................................... 132

Contents viii
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

8.3.2 Ports ..................................................................................................... 132

8.3.3 Analog Inputs ........................................................................................ 133
8.3.4 Removable Terminal Strips .................................................................... 133
8.3.5 Status LEDs ........................................................................................... 133
8.3.6 Backup Battery ...................................................................................... 133
8.4 IC200UDD064 64 Point Micro PLC, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) 24Vdc Out (Source), 24Vdc Power
Supply ............................................................................................................. 133
8.4.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 133
8.4.2 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 134
8.4.3 Transistor Outputs ................................................................................ 134
8.4.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD064 Specifications ................................................ 134
8.4.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD064 ............................................................ 136
8.5 IC200UDD164 64 Point Micro PLC, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) 24Vdc Out (Sink), 24Vdc Power
Supply ............................................................................................................. 136
8.5.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 136
8.5.2 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 136
8.5.3 DC Outputs ........................................................................................... 137
8.5.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD164 Specifications ................................................ 137
8.5.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD164 ............................................................ 138
8.6 IC200UDR064 64 Point Micro PLC, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply 139
8.6.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 139
8.6.2 Relay Outputs ....................................................................................... 139
8.6.3 Micro PLC IC200UDR064 Specifications ................................................. 139
8.6.4 Wiring Diagram, PLC IC200UDR064 ...................................................... 141
8.7 IC200UDR164 64 Point Micro PLC, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power
Supply ............................................................................................................. 141
8.7.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 141
8.7.2 Relay Outputs ....................................................................................... 141
8.7.3 Micro PLC IC200 UDR164, Specifications ............................................... 142
8.7.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDR164 ............................................................. 143

Chapter 9: VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units
144
9.1 Features of VersaMax 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units ............................. 145
9.1.1 Removable Terminal Strips .................................................................... 145
9.1.2 Expansion Connector ............................................................................ 145
9.1.3 Status LEDs ........................................................................................... 145
Contents ix
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.1.4 Cables ................................................................................................... 145

9.2 IC200UEC008 8 Point Expansion Unit, (4) 24Vdc Inputs, (4) 24Vdc Outputs with ESCP,
24Vdc Power Supply ........................................................................................ 146
9.2.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 146
9.2.2 Transistor Outputs ................................................................................ 146
9.2.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEC008 Specifications .......................................... 147
9.2.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEC008 ............................................................. 148
9.3 IC200UEC108 8 Point Expansion Unit, (4) 24Vdc Inputs, (4) 24VC Transistor Outputs,
24Vdc Power Supply ........................................................................................ 148
9.3.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 148
9.3.2 Transistor Outputs ................................................................................ 149
9.3.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEC108 Specifications .......................................... 149
9.4 IC200UEC208 8 Point Expansion Unit , (4) 24Vdc Inputs, (4) Relay Outputs, 24Vdc Power
Supply ............................................................................................................. 150
9.4.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 150
9.4.2 Relay Outputs ....................................................................................... 151
9.4.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEC208 Specifications .......................................... 151
9.4.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEC208 ............................................................. 152
9.5 IC200UEI008 8 Point Expansion Unit, (8) 24Vdc Inputs, 24Vdc Power Supply IC200UEI016
16 Point Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc Inputs, 24Vdc Power Supply .................... 153
9.5.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 153
9.5.2 Expansion Units IC200UEI008 and IC200UEI016 Specifications .............. 153
9.5.3 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEI008 ............................................................... 154
9.5.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEI016 ............................................................... 154
9.6 IC200UEO008 8 Point Expansion Unit, (8) 24Vdc Outputs with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEO016 16 Point Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc Outputs with ESCP, 24Vdc Power
Supply ............................................................................................................. 155
9.6.1 Transistor Outputs ................................................................................ 155
9.6.2 Expansion Units IC200UEO008 and IC200UEO016 Specifications .......... 156
9.6.3 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEO008 ............................................................. 157
9.6.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEO016 ............................................................. 157
9.7 IC200UEO108 8 Point Expansion Unit, (8) 24Vdc Transistor Outputs, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEO116 16 Point Expansion Unit, (16) Transistor Outputs, 24Vdc Power Supply 158
9.7.1 Transistor Outputs ................................................................................ 158
9.7.2 Expansion Units IC200UEO108 and IC200UEO116 Specifications .......... 158
9.7.3 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEO108 ............................................................. 159
9.7.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEO116 ............................................................. 160

Contents x
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.8 IC200UER008 8 Point Expansion Unit, (8) Relay Outputs, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UER016 16 Point Expansion Unit, (16) Relay Outputs, 24Vdc Power Supply161
9.8.1 Relay Outputs ....................................................................................... 161
9.8.2 Expansion Units IC200UER008 and IC200UER016 Specifications ........... 161
9.8.3 Wiring Diagram, IC200UER008 ............................................................. 162
9.8.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UER016 ............................................................. 162
9.9 IC200UEX009 14 Point Expansion Unit, (8) 120Vac In, (2) Relay Out at 10 Amps, (4) Relay
Out at 2 Amps, 120/240Vac Power Supply ....................................................... 163
9.9.1 AC Inputs .............................................................................................. 163
9.9.2 Relay Outputs ....................................................................................... 163
9.9.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX009 Specifications .......................................... 163
9.9.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX009 ............................................................. 164
9.10 IC200UEX010 14 Point Expansion Unit, (8) 120Vac In, (6) 120Vac Out, 120/240Vac Power
Supply ............................................................................................................. 165
9.10.1 AC Inputs .............................................................................................. 165
9.10.2 AC Outputs ........................................................................................... 165
9.10.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX010 Specifications .......................................... 165
9.10.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX010 ............................................................. 166
9.11 IC200UEX011 14-Point Expansion Unit with AC Power, (8) 24Vdc Inputs, (6) Relay Outputs
........................................................................................................................ 167
9.11.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 167
9.11.2 Relay Outputs ....................................................................................... 167
9.11.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX011 Specifications .......................................... 167
9.11.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX011 ............................................................. 168
9.12 IC200UEX012 14-Point Expansion Unit with 24DC Power, (8) 24Vdc Inputs, (6) Relay
Outputs ........................................................................................................... 169
9.12.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 169
9.12.2 Relay Outputs ....................................................................................... 169
9.12.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX012 Specifications .......................................... 169
9.12.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX012 ............................................................. 170
9.13 IC200UEX013 14-Point Expansion Unit with 12Vdc Power, (8) 12Vdc Inputs, (6) Relay
Outputs ........................................................................................................... 171
9.13.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 171
9.13.2 Relay Outputs ....................................................................................... 171
9.13.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX013 Specifications .......................................... 171
9.13.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX013 ............................................................. 172
9.14 IC200UEX014 14-Point Expansion Unit with 24DC Power, (8) 24DC Inputs, (2) High-
Current and (4) Low-Current Transistor Outputs .............................................. 173
Contents xi
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.14.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 173

9.14.2 Transistor Outputs ................................................................................ 173
9.14.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX014 Specifications .......................................... 174
9.14.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX014 ............................................................. 175
9.15 IC200UEX015 14-Point Expansion Unit with 12DC Power, (8) 12DC Inputs, (6) 12Vdc
Outputs ........................................................................................................... 176
9.15.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 176
9.15.2 Transistor Outputs ................................................................................ 176
9.15.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX015 Specifications .......................................... 177
9.15.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX015 ............................................................. 178
9.16 IC200UEX122 14-Point Expansion Unit with 24DC Power, (8) 24DC Inputs, (2) High-
Current and (4) Low-Current Transistor Outputs with ESCP .............................. 179
9.16.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 179
9.16.2 Outputs ................................................................................................ 179
9.16.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX122 Specifications .......................................... 180
9.16.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX122 ............................................................. 181

Chapter 10: VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units ... 182
10.1 Features of VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLC Expansion Units ............................... 182
10.1.1 Removable Terminal Strips .................................................................... 183
10.1.2 Expansion Connector ............................................................................ 183
10.1.3 Status LEDs ........................................................................................... 183
10.1.4 Cables ................................................................................................... 183
10.2 IC200UEX209 28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 120Vac In, (2/10) Relay Out,
120/240Vac Power Supply ............................................................................... 183
10.2.1 AC Inputs .............................................................................................. 183
10.2.2 Relay Outputs ....................................................................................... 183
10.2.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX209 Specifications .......................................... 184
10.2.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX209 ............................................................. 185
10.3 IC200UEX210 28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 120Vac In, (12) 120Vac Out,
120/240Vac Power Supply ............................................................................... 186
10.3.1 AC Inputs .............................................................................................. 186
10.3.2 AC Outputs ........................................................................................... 186
10.3.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX210 Specifications .......................................... 187
10.3.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX210 ............................................................. 188
10.4 IC200UEX211 28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) Relay Out,
120/240Vac Power Supply ............................................................................... 188

Contents xii
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.4.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 188

10.4.2 Relay Outputs (Q1 – Q12) ..................................................................... 188
10.4.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX211 Specifications .......................................... 189
10.4.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX211 ............................................................. 190
10.5 IC200UEX212 28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) Relay Out, 24Vdc
Power Supply................................................................................................... 191
10.5.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 191
10.5.2 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 191
10.5.3 Relay Outputs (Q1 – Q12) ..................................................................... 191
10.5.4 Expansion Unit IC200UEX212 Specifications .......................................... 191
10.5.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX212 ............................................................. 192
10.6 IC200UEX213 28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 12Vdc In, (12) Relay Out, 12Vdc
Power Supply................................................................................................... 193
10.6.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 193
10.6.2 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 193
10.6.3 Relay Outputs (Q1 – Q12) ..................................................................... 193
10.6.4 Expansion Unit IC200UEX213 Specifications .......................................... 193
10.6.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX213 ............................................................. 195
10.7 IC200UEX214 28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc
Power Supply................................................................................................... 196
10.7.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 196
10.7.2 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 196
10.7.3 Transistor Outputs ................................................................................ 196
10.7.4 Expansion Unit IC200UEX214 Specifications .......................................... 197
10.7.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX214 ............................................................. 198
10.8 IC200UEX215 28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 12Vdc In, (12) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc
Power Supply................................................................................................... 199
10.8.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 199
10.8.2 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 199
10.8.3 Transistor Outputs ................................................................................ 199
10.8.4 Expansion Unit IC200UEX215 Specifications .......................................... 200
10.8.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX215 ............................................................. 201
10.9 IC200UEX222 28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out with
ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply .............................................................................. 202
10.9.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 202
10.9.2 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 202
10.9.3 Transistor Outputs ................................................................................ 202

Contents xiii
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.9.4 Expansion Unit IC200UEX222 Specifications .......................................... 203

10.9.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX222 ............................................................. 204

Chapter 11: VersaMax Micro PLC 64-Point Expansion Units ... 205
11.1 Features of VersaMax 64-Point Micro PLC Expansion Units ............................... 205
11.1.1 Removable Terminal Strips .................................................................... 205
11.1.2 Expansion Connector ............................................................................ 206
11.1.3 Status LEDs ........................................................................................... 206
11.1.4 Cables ................................................................................................... 206
11.2 IC200UEX064 64 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit,(40) 24Vdc In, (24) Relay Out, 24Vdc
Power Supply................................................................................................... 206
11.2.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 206
11.2.2 Relay Outputs ....................................................................................... 206
11.2.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX064 Specifications .......................................... 207
11.2.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX064 ............................................................. 208
11.3 IC200UEX164 64 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) Relay Out,
120/240Vac Power Supply ............................................................................... 208
11.3.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 208
11.3.2 Relay Outputs ....................................................................................... 209
11.3.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX164 Specifications .......................................... 209
11.3.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX164 ............................................................. 210
11.4 IC200UEX264 64 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (24) 24Vdc In, (4) LCDC, (16) LCDC with
ESCP, (4) HCDC with ESCP Out, 24Vdc Power Supply ....................................... 210
11.4.1 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 210
11.4.2 DC Outputs ........................................................................................... 211
11.4.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX264 Specifications .......................................... 211
11.4.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX264 ............................................................. 212
11.5 IC200UEX364 64 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) LCDC Out, 24Vdc
Power Supply................................................................................................... 213
11.5.1 DC Power .............................................................................................. 213
11.5.2 DC Inputs .............................................................................................. 213
11.5.3 DC Outputs ........................................................................................... 213
11.5.4 Expansion Unit IC200UEX364 Specifications .......................................... 214
11.5.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX364 ............................................................. 215

Chapter 12: Analog Expansion Units ..................................... 216

12.1 Features of Analog Expansion Units ................................................................. 216

Contents xiv
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

12.1.1 Removable Terminal Strips .................................................................... 216

12.1.2 Expansion Connector ............................................................................ 216
12.1.3 Status LEDs ........................................................................................... 217
12.1.4 Cables ................................................................................................... 217
12.2 Analog Expansion Unit Specifications............................................................... 217
12.2.1 Power Specifications for Analog Expansion Units ................................... 217
12.2.2 Input and Output Specifications ............................................................ 217
12.3 Analog Operation ............................................................................................ 218
12.3.1 Analog I/O Parameters .......................................................................... 218
12.3.2 Input/Output Values Compared to Process Data ................................... 219
12.3.3 Count Resolution for Analog Expansion Units ........................................ 219
12.3.4 LED Indications ...................................................................................... 219
12.3.5 Analog Input Processing ........................................................................ 220
12.3.6 Analog Output Processing ..................................................................... 221
12.3.7 Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................... 222

Chapter 13: RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units ............ 223

13.1 Description of RTD and Thermocouple Modules .............................................. 223
13.1.1 Removable Terminal Strips .................................................................... 224
13.1.2 Expansion Connector ............................................................................ 224
13.1.3 Status LEDs ........................................................................................... 224
13.1.4 Cables ................................................................................................... 224
13.2 RTD Expansion Modules................................................................................... 224
13.2.1 Compatibility ........................................................................................ 225
13.2.2 RTD Module General Specifications ....................................................... 225
13.2.3 RTD Module Input Specifications ........................................................... 226
13.2.4 RTD Module Output Specifications ........................................................ 226
13.2.5 Scaling .................................................................................................. 227
13.2.6 Wiring for RTD Expansion Modules ........................................................ 228
13.3 Module Installation .......................................................................................... 229
13.3.1 DIP Switches ......................................................................................... 229
13.3.2 LED Indications ...................................................................................... 230
13.3.3 Data Conversion for RTD Expansion Units (in Compatible mode) ........... 230
13.4 Thermocouple Expansion Modules .................................................................. 233
13.4.1 Compatibility ........................................................................................ 233
13.4.2 Thermocouple Module General Specifications ....................................... 234

Contents xv
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

13.4.3 Analog Output Specifications (Model IC200UEX826) ............................. 234

13.4.4 Thermocouple Module Input Specifications ........................................... 235
13.4.5 Scaling for Thermocouple Module Data ................................................. 236
13.4.6 Scaling for Analog Outputs (Model IC200UEX826) ................................ 236
13.4.7 Thermocouple Module Configuration .................................................... 237
13.4.8 Wiring for Thermocouple Expansion Modules ........................................ 238
13.5 Module Installation .......................................................................................... 239
13.5.1 DIP Switch Settings ............................................................................... 239
13.5.2 LED Indications ...................................................................................... 240
13.5.3 Basic Temperature Conversion Logic ..................................................... 241
13.5.4 High-Resolution Temperature Conversion Logic for Thermocouple Units242

Chapter 14: CPU Option Modules .......................................... 244

14.1 Using Option Modules ..................................................................................... 244
14.2 IC200UMB001 Memory Pack Module............................................................... 244
14.2.1 Features ................................................................................................ 245
14.3 IC200USB001 RS232 Extra Port Option Module with 2 Analog Inputs ............... 246
14.3.1 Analog Inputs ........................................................................................ 247
14.4 IC200USB002 RS-422/485 Extra Port Option Module with 2 Analog Inputs ...... 248
14.4.1 Analog Inputs ........................................................................................ 249
14.5 IC200UUB001 USB / RS232 Conversion Option Module ................................... 249
14.6 IC200UEM001 RJ-45, 10/100 Mbit Ethernet Communications Module ............. 250
14.6.1 Module Specifications ........................................................................... 250
14.6.2 Status LEDs ........................................................................................... 251
14.6.3 Configuration Options ........................................................................... 251
14.6.4 Enhanced Data Throughput .................................................................. 252
14.6.5 Setting the IP Address ........................................................................... 252
14.6.6 Downloading Ethernet Drivers............................................................... 252
14.6.7 Modbus/TCP Client Support .................................................................. 252
14.6.8 Security Settings for the Ethernet Option Module .................................. 266
14.7 Installing Option Modules ................................................................................ 267

Chapter 15: Installation Instructions ..................................... 269

15.1 Preinstallation Check ....................................................................................... 269
15.2 Agency Approvals, Standards, and General Specifications ................................ 270
15.2.1 Immunity and Emission Specifications, Relevant Standards, and Level Passed 271
15.3 Installation Guidelines ..................................................................................... 271
Contents xvi
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.3.1 CE Mark Installation Requirement .......................................................... 272

15.3.2 UL Requirements for Class I Div 2 Installations ....................................... 272
15.3.3 Additional Environmental Guidelines ..................................................... 272
15.4 Mounting Dimensions ..................................................................................... 273
15.4.1 Dimensions of Nano PLCs ...................................................................... 273
15.4.2 Dimensions of 14-, 20-, 23-, 28-, 40-, and 64-Point Micro PLCs and Expansion Units
274
15.5 Grounding the Equipment ............................................................................... 274
15.5.1 Grounding the Programmer .................................................................. 275
15.6 Installing a PLC or Expansion Unit on a DIN Rail ................................................ 275
15.6.1 Mounting the PLC on a DIN Rail ............................................................. 276
15.6.2 Removing the PLC from a DIN Rail ......................................................... 276
15.6.3 Panel-Mounting .................................................................................... 276
15.6.4 Grounding the Metal Panel or DIN Rail ................................................... 277
15.7 Connecting an Expansion Unit to a Micro PLC................................................... 277
15.7.1 The Expansion Cable ............................................................................. 277
15.8 System Wiring Guidelines ................................................................................ 278
15.8.1 Safety Measures .................................................................................... 278
15.8.2 Installing Additional Suppression ........................................................... 278
15.9 I/O Installation and Wiring ............................................................................... 279
15.9.1 Wiring for Power Supply and I/O Connections........................................ 280
15.9.2 Removable Wiring Terminals ................................................................. 280
15.9.3 General Wiring Procedures .................................................................... 281
15.9.4 Providing Fusing for Outputs ................................................................. 282
15.9.5 Providing Suppression Circuits for Inductive Loads ................................ 283
15.9.6 Typical DC Input Circuits ....................................................................... 283
15.9.7 Typical DC Output Circuits .................................................................... 284
15.9.8 Typical High-Speed Counter Connections .............................................. 286
15.9.9 Added Resistance for 20-, 40-, and 64-Point Micro PLCS at Higher Count Rates 287
15.9.10 Typical AC Input and Output Circuits ............................................... 288
15.9.11 Typical Analog Input and Output Circuits ......................................... 289
15.10 Starting Up the PLC.......................................................................................... 290
15.10.1 Turning off Power to the PLC ........................................................... 290
15.10.2 Normal Power-up Sequence ............................................................ 291
15.11 Adjusting the Analog Potentiometers .............................................................. 292
15.12 DIP Switches .................................................................................................... 293

Contents xvii
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.12.1 4-Position DIP Switches on Micro PLC CPUs ...................................... 293

15.12.2 DIP Switches on an Analog Expansion Module Select Count Resolution293
15.12.3 DIP Switches on an RTD Expansion Module Select Update Rate ........ 293
15.12.4 DIP Switches on a Thermocouple Expansion Module Select Input Sensors/Mode
294
15.13 Installing/Replacing a Backup Battery .............................................................. 294
15.13.1 CPU Battery Consumption Data ....................................................... 294
15.14 Serial Port Connections.................................................................................... 295
15.14.1 Providing Power to an External Device from Port 1 or 2 .................... 295
15.14.2 Short Circuit Protection on 5Vdc for Units Later than June 2005 ....... 295
15.14.3 Cable Lengths and Baud Rates ......................................................... 296
15.14.4 Port 1: RS-232 ................................................................................. 296
15.14.5 Port 2 on 23-Point and 28-Point Micro PLCs: RS-485 ........................ 298
15.14.6 Port 2 RS-485 Option Module on 20-/ 40-/ 64-Point Micro PLCs ....... 300
15.14.7 RS-485 Multidrop Serial Connections ............................................... 301
15.14.8 RS-485 Port Isolator ......................................................................... 302
15.14.9 RS-232 to RS-485 Adapter ............................................................... 307
15.15 Replacing AC Output Module Fuses ................................................................. 310
15.15.1 AC Output Fuse Specifications ......................................................... 311

Chapter 16: Configuration .................................................... 312

16.1 Configuration Overview ................................................................................... 312
16.1.1 Autoconfiguration ................................................................................. 312
16.1.2 Software Configuration ......................................................................... 312
16.2 Storing a Configuration from a Programmer .................................................... 313
16.3 CPU Configuration ........................................................................................... 314
16.4 Port 1 Configuration ........................................................................................ 316
16.4.1 Timing Note for RTU Communications .................................................. 316
16.5 Port 2 Configuration ........................................................................................ 317
16.6 Configuring Analog I/O Parameters ................................................................. 318
16.7 Configuring High-Speed Counter, PWM or Pulse Train ..................................... 318
16.7.1 HSC, PWM, and PTO Settings ................................................................ 318
16.7.2 Channel #1, 2, 3, 4 Parameters .............................................................. 320

Chapter 17: PLC Operation .................................................... 323

17.1 Operating Modes............................................................................................. 323
17.2 Parts of the CPU Sweep .................................................................................... 324

Contents xviii
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

17.3 Standard CPU Sweep Operation....................................................................... 326

17.3.1 The Sweep Windows ............................................................................. 326
17.3.2 The Watchdog Timer............................................................................. 327
17.4 Constant Sweep Time Operation ..................................................................... 327
17.4.1 Changing the Configured Default for Constant Sweep Mode ................. 327
17.4.2 The Constant Sweep Timer .................................................................... 327
17.4.3 Enabling/Disabling Constant Sweep Time, Reading or Setting the Length of the
Timer .................................................................................................... 327
17.5 CPU Stop Modes .............................................................................................. 328
17.6 Controlling the Execution of a Program ........................................................... 328
17.6.1 Calling a Subroutine Block ..................................................................... 328
17.6.2 Creating a Temporary End of Logic ........................................................ 328
17.6.3 Executing Rungs of Logic without Logical Power Flow ............................ 328
17.6.4 Jumping to Another Part of the Program................................................ 329
17.7 Privilege Levels and Passwords ......................................................................... 329
17.7.1 Protection Level Request from Programmer .......................................... 330
17.7.2 The OEM Protection Feature .................................................................. 330
17.7.3 Clearing All Memory .............................................................................. 331
17.8 Run/Stop Mode Switch Operation.................................................................... 331
17.8.1 Run/Stop Mode Operation .................................................................... 331
17.8.2 Configurable Memory Protection .......................................................... 332
17.8.3 Configuration Parameters and Switch Position for Run/Stop Modes ...... 332
17.8.4 Configuration Parameters and Switch Position for Memory Protection .. 332
17.8.5 Configuration Parameters and Switch Position for Simultaneous Run/Stop
Operation and Memory Protection ........................................................ 333
17.8.6 Configuration Parameters and Switch Position for Fault Operations....... 333
17.9 Power-Up and Power-Down Sequence ............................................................. 333
17.9.1 Power-Up Sequence .............................................................................. 333
17.9.2 Flash Memory ........................................................................................ 334
17.9.3 Default Conditions for Micro PLC Output Points..................................... 334
17.9.4 Power-Down Conditions........................................................................ 335
17.9.5 Power Cycle .......................................................................................... 335
17.10 Input Filters ..................................................................................................... 336
17.10.1 Discrete Input Filtering .................................................................... 336
17.11 Hardware R/C Filters ........................................................................................ 337
17.12 Analog Potentiometer Input Filtering .............................................................. 339
17.12.1 Input Settings .................................................................................. 339
Contents xix
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

17.12.2 Default Filter Time ........................................................................... 339

17.12.3 Limitations of Analog Potentiometer Input Filtering ........................ 339

Chapter 18: High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation

340
18.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 340
18.1.1 Operation at Power-up and Mode Change ............................................. 341
18.1.2 Basic Setup ............................................................................................ 341
18.2 HSC/PWM/PTO Channels ................................................................................. 342
18.2.1 HSC/PWM/PTO Channels for Micro PLCs (14 Point/ 28 Point) ................. 342
18.2.2 HSC/PWM/PTO Channels for Micro-20, -40, or -64 PLC .......................... 343
18.2.3 HSC/PWM/PTO Channels for Nano PLCs ................................................ 343
18.3 Type A Counter................................................................................................ 344
18.3.1 Type A Counter Program References ..................................................... 344
18.3.2 Type A Counter Operation ..................................................................... 345
18.3.3 Type A High-Speed Counter Operation Details ...................................... 345
18.4 Type B Counter ................................................................................................ 347
18.4.1 Type B Counter Program References ..................................................... 348
18.4.2 Type B Counter Operation ..................................................................... 348
18.5 High-Speed Counter Outputs .......................................................................... 350
18.5.1 Pulldown Resistor .................................................................................. 350
18.5.2 Duty Cycle Limits: with 1.5k pulldown resistor - UDR005/006/010 &
UAL004/005/006 .................................................................................. 350
18.5.3 Duty Cycle Limits: with 1.5k pulldown resistor - UDD104/110 & NDD101351
18.5.4 Counter Output Presets......................................................................... 351
18.6 PWM Outputs .................................................................................................. 352
18.6.1 Enabling and Disabling a PWM Output .................................................. 352
18.6.2 PWM Frequency .................................................................................... 353
18.6.3 PWM Duty Cycle .................................................................................... 353
18.6.4 Load Correction for PWM Outputs ......................................................... 353
18.7 Pulse Train Outputs ......................................................................................... 354
18.7.1 Configuring a Pulse Train Output ........................................................... 354
18.7.2 Program References for Pulse Train Outputs .......................................... 354
18.7.3 Enabling and Disabling Pulse Train Operation ........................................ 355
18.7.4 Setting Up the Pulse Frequency ............................................................. 355
18.7.5 Setting Up the Number of Pulses ........................................................... 356

Contents xx
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.7.6 Load Correction Time ............................................................................ 356

18.8 Pulse Train with Ramp ..................................................................................... 357
18.8.1 Configuring Pulse Train with Ramp ........................................................ 357
18.8.2 Program References for Pulse Train with Ramp Outputs ........................ 357
18.8.3 Setting Up the Pulse Frequency for Pulse Train with Ramp ..................... 358
18.8.4 Setting Up the Number of Pulses ........................................................... 358
18.8.5 Changing the Acceleration and Deceleration ......................................... 358
18.8.6 Controlling Operation of a Pulse Train with Ramp Output ...................... 358
18.9 COMMREQs for the HSC/PWM/PTO Functions ................................................. 360
18.9.1 The COMMREQ Command Block ........................................................... 361
18.9.2 COMMREQ Example .............................................................................. 364
18.10 HSC Application Examples ............................................................................... 366
18.10.1 RPM Indicator .................................................................................. 366

Chapter 19: Motion Control Functions .................................. 367

19.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 368
19.1.1 Program References for Motion Features ............................................... 368
19.1.2 Position Registers .................................................................................. 368
19.1.3 Function Block Instance Registers .......................................................... 369
19.1.4 Error Codes and Warnings for Motion Features (Hexadecimal) ............... 371
19.1.5 Avoiding Abrupt Start/Stop of Motion ................................................... 374
19.2 Finding a Home Position .................................................................................. 374
19.2.1 Find Home Function Block ..................................................................... 376
19.2.2 Example Program Logic for Find Home .................................................. 379
19.3 Moving to the Home Position .......................................................................... 379
19.3.1 Go Home Function Block ....................................................................... 380
19.3.2 Example Program Logic for Go Home .................................................... 383
19.4 Jogging............................................................................................................ 383
19.4.1 Jogging Function Block .......................................................................... 384
19.4.2 Example Program Logic for Jogging ....................................................... 386
19.5 Blending .......................................................................................................... 387
19.5.1 Examples of Blended Moves .................................................................. 387
19.5.2 Blending Function Block ........................................................................ 390
19.5.3 Example Program Logic for Blending ..................................................... 393
19.6 Stopping Motion on an Axis ............................................................................. 394
19.6.1 Stop Motion Function Block ................................................................... 394

Contents xxi
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

19.6.2 Example Program Logic for Stop Motion ................................................ 396

Chapter 20: Fault Handling ................................................... 397

20.1 Faults and Fault Handling................................................................................. 397
20.1.1 Fault Handling ....................................................................................... 397
20.1.2 Classes of Faults .................................................................................... 397
20.2 System Responses to Faults ............................................................................. 397
20.2.1 Fault Actions ......................................................................................... 398
20.3 Fault References .............................................................................................. 399
20.3.1 Example Program Logic for Fault References ......................................... 399

Chapter 21: Elements of an Application Program .................. 400

21.1 Structure of an Application Program ................................................................ 400
21.2 Subroutines ..................................................................................................... 401
21.2.1 Declaring a Subroutine .......................................................................... 402
21.2.2 Calling a Subroutine .............................................................................. 402
21.2.3 Locking/Unlocking Subroutines ............................................................. 402
21.3 Program Languages ......................................................................................... 403
21.3.1 Ladder Diagram .................................................................................... 403
21.4 The Instruction Set .......................................................................................... 403
21.4.1 Contacts ............................................................................................... 404
21.4.2 Coils ...................................................................................................... 404
21.4.3 Timers and Counters ............................................................................. 405
21.4.4 Math Functions ..................................................................................... 405
21.4.5 Relational Functions .............................................................................. 406
21.4.6 Bit Operation Functions ......................................................................... 406
21.4.7 Data Move Functions ............................................................................. 406
21.4.8 Table Functions ..................................................................................... 407
21.4.9 Conversion Functions ............................................................................ 407
21.4.10 Control Functions ............................................................................ 407
21.4.11 Communication Function ................................................................ 408
21.4.12 Motion Functions ............................................................................ 408

Chapter 22: Program Data and References ............................ 409

22.1 Data Memory References ................................................................................ 409
22.1.1 Memory Allocation ................................................................................ 409
22.1.2 Word Memory References ..................................................................... 410

Contents xxii
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

22.1.3 Bit Memory References ......................................................................... 411

22.2 Fixed I/O Map Locations ................................................................................... 412
22.2.1 Reserved Bit Memory Locations: %I ........................................................ 412
22.2.2 Reserved Bit Memory Locations: %Q ...................................................... 413
22.2.3 Reserved Word Memory Locations: %AI ................................................. 414
22.2.4 Reserved Word Memory Locations: %AQ ............................................... 415
22.3 Retentiveness of Data ...................................................................................... 416
22.4 System Status References ................................................................................ 417
22.4.1 Using the System Status References ...................................................... 417
22.4.2 Time-Tick References ............................................................................ 417
22.4.3 %S References ....................................................................................... 418
22.4.4 %SA, %SB, and %SC References .............................................................. 419
22.5 How Program Functions Handle Numerical Data ............................................. 421
22.5.1 Real Numbers (Floating Point) ............................................................... 422
22.5.2 Errors in Real Numbers and Operations.................................................. 422

Chapter 23: Instruction Set Reference ................................... 423

23.1 Bit Operation Functions ................................................................................... 424
23.1.1 Data Lengths for the Bit Operation functions ......................................... 424
23.1.2 Bit Operation Functions Logical AND, Logical OR ................................... 425
23.1.3 Bit Operation Functions Exclusive OR..................................................... 426
23.1.4 Bit Operation Functions Logical Invert (NOT) ......................................... 427
23.1.5 Bit Operation Functions Shift Bits Right, Shift Bits Left ........................... 428
23.1.6 Bit Operation Functions Rotate Bits Right, Rotate Bits Left ..................... 431
23.1.7 Bit Operation Functions Bit Test ............................................................ 432
23.1.8 Bit Operation Functions Bit Set and Bit Clear .......................................... 433
23.1.9 Bit Operation Functions Masked Compare ............................................. 434
23.1.10 Bit Operation Functions Bit Position ................................................. 436
23.1.11 Bit Operation Functions Bit Sequencer ............................................. 438
23.2 Control Functions ............................................................................................ 440
23.2.1 Control Functions Do I/O ....................................................................... 440
23.2.2 Control Functions Call ........................................................................... 443
23.2.3 Control Functions End of Logic .............................................................. 443
23.2.4 Control Functions Master Control Relay (MCR) / End MCR ...................... 444
23.2.5 Control Functions Jump, Label ............................................................... 445
23.2.6 Control Functions Comment ................................................................. 446

Contents xxiii
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.2.7 Control Functions Drum Sequencer ....................................................... 447

23.3 Data Move Functions ....................................................................................... 449
23.3.1 Data Move Functions Move Data ........................................................... 450
23.3.2 Data Move Functions Block Move .......................................................... 451
23.3.3 Data Move Functions Block Clear ........................................................... 453
23.3.4 Data Move Functions Shift Register ....................................................... 454
23.3.5 Data Move Functions Communication Request ..................................... 456
23.4 Data Type Conversion Functions ...................................................................... 458
23.4.1 Data Type Conversion Functions Convert Signed Integer Data to BCD-4 458
23.4.2 Data Type Conversion Functions Convert to Signed Integer ................... 459
23.4.3 Data Type Conversion Functions Convert to Double Precision Signed Integer 460
23.4.4 Data Type Conversion Functions Convert to Real Data ........................... 461
23.4.5 Data Type Conversion Functions Convert Real Data to Word Data ......... 462
23.4.6 Data Type Conversion Functions Truncate Real Number ........................ 463
23.5 Math and Numerical Functions ........................................................................ 464
23.5.1 Converting Data for the Math and Numerical Functions ......................... 464
23.5.2 Math and Numerical Functions Add, Subtract, Multiply, Divide .............. 464
23.5.3 Math and Numerical Functions Add, Subtract, Multiply, Divide .............. 465
23.5.4 Math and Numerical Functions Modulo Division .................................... 466
23.5.5 Math and Numerical Functions Scaling .................................................. 467
23.5.6 Math and Numerical Functions Square Root .......................................... 469
23.5.7 Math and Numerical Functions Trigonometric Functions ....................... 470
23.5.8 Math and Numerical Functions Logarithmic / Exponential Functions ...... 472
23.5.9 Math and Numerical Functions Radian Conversion Functions ................ 473
23.6 Relational Functions ........................................................................................ 474
23.6.1 Data Types for Relational Functions ....................................................... 474
23.6.2 Relational Functions Equal, Not Equal, Less Than, Less/Equal, Greater Than,
Greater/Equal ........................................................................................ 475
23.6.3 Relational Functions Range ................................................................... 476
23.7 Relay Functions ............................................................................................... 477
23.7.1 Relay Functions Normally-open, Normally-closed, Continuation Contacts478
23.7.2 Relay Functions Coils ............................................................................. 479
23.8 Table Functions ............................................................................................... 483
23.8.1 Table Functions Array Move................................................................... 483
23.8.2 Table Functions Search for Array Values ................................................ 486
23.9 Timer and Counter Functions........................................................................... 488

Contents xxiv
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.9.1 Time-Tick Contacts ............................................................................... 488

23.9.2 Function Block Data Required for Timers and Counters .......................... 489
23.9.3 Timer and Counter Functions On Delay Stopwatch Timer ...................... 490
23.9.4 Timer and Counter Functions On Delay Timer ........................................ 492
23.9.5 Timer and Counter Functions Off Delay Timer ....................................... 494
23.9.6 Timer and Counter Functions Up Counter .............................................. 496
23.9.7 Timer and Counter Functions Down Counter ......................................... 498

Chapter 24: Service Request Function ................................... 500

24.1 SVCREQ Functions ........................................................................................... 501
24.2 Format of the SVCREQ Function....................................................................... 502
24.2.1 Parameters of the SVCREQ Function ...................................................... 502
24.3 SVCREQ 1: Change/Read Constant Sweep Timer ............................................. 503
24.3.1 Input Parameter Block for SCVREQ 1 ..................................................... 503
24.3.2 Disable Constant Sweep Mode .............................................................. 503
24.3.3 Enable Constant Sweep Mode ............................................................... 503
24.3.4 Change the Constant Sweep Time ......................................................... 503
24.3.5 Read the Constant Sweep State and Time.............................................. 503
24.4 SVCREQ 2: Read Window Times ....................................................................... 505
24.4.1 Output Parameter Block for SVCREQ 2 .................................................. 505
24.5 SVCREQ 3: Change Programmer Communications Window Mode ................... 506
24.5.1 Changing the Programmer Communications Window Mode ................. 506
24.6 SVCREQ 4: Change System Communications Window Mode ........................... 506
24.6.1 Changing the System Communications Window Mode ......................... 507
24.7 SVCREQ 6: Change/Read Number of Words to Checksum ................................ 507
24.7.1 Parameter Block Formats for SVCREQ 6 ................................................. 507
24.8 SVCREQ 7: Read or Change the Time-of-Day Clock .......................................... 508
24.8.1 Parameter Block Format for SVCREQ 7 .................................................. 508
24.9 SVCREQ 7 Parameter Block Content: BCD Format ............................................ 509
24.9.1 2-Digit Year ........................................................................................... 509
24.9.2 4-Digit Year ........................................................................................... 509
24.10 SVCREQ 7 Parameter Block Content: Packed ASCII Format ............................... 510
24.10.1 2-Digit Year ..................................................................................... 510
24.10.2 4-Digit Year ..................................................................................... 511
24.11 SVCREQ 8: Reset Watchdog Timer ................................................................... 512
24.11.1 Parameter Block Format for SVCREQ 8 ............................................. 512
24.12 SVCREQ 9: Read Sweep Time from Beginning of Sweep ................................... 513
Contents xxv
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.12.1 Output Parameter Block Format for SVCREQ 9................................. 513

24.13 SVCREQ 10: Read Folder Name ........................................................................ 514
24.13.1 Output Parameter Block Format for SVCREQ 10............................... 514
24.14 SVCREQ 11: Read PLC ID .................................................................................. 515
24.14.1 Output Parameter Block Format for SVCREQ 11............................... 515
24.15 SVCREQ 13: Shut Down (Stop) PLC .................................................................. 516
24.15.1 Parameter Block for SVCREQ 13 ....................................................... 516
24.16 SVCREQ 14: Clear Fault .................................................................................... 517
24.16.1 Input Parameter Block for SVCREQ 14 .............................................. 517
24.17 SVCREQ 15: Read Last-Logged Fault Table Entry .............................................. 518
24.17.1 Input Parameter Block for SVCREQ 15 .............................................. 518
24.18 SVCREQ 16: Read Elapsed Time Clock .............................................................. 520
24.18.1 Output Parameter Block for SVCREQ 16........................................... 520
24.19 SVCREQ 18: Read I/O Override Status .............................................................. 521
24.19.1 Output Parameter Block for SVCREQ 18........................................... 521
24.20 SVCREQ 23: Read Master Checksum ................................................................ 521
24.20.1 Output Parameter Block for SVCREQ 23........................................... 521
24.21 SVCREQ 26/ SVCREQ 30: Interrogate I/O ......................................................... 522
24.22 SVCREQ 29: Read Elapsed Power Down Time ................................................... 523
24.22.1 Output Parameter Block for SVCREQ 29........................................... 523
24.23 SVCREQ 34: Enter Analog Calibration Mode ..................................................... 523
24.24 SVCREQ 35: Store Analog Calibration .............................................................. 524
24.24.1 Input Parameter Block for SVCREQ 35 .............................................. 525
24.24.2 Output Parameter Block for SVCREQ 35........................................... 526
24.25 SVCREQ 52: Read from Flash ............................................................................ 527
24.25.1 Input Parameter Block for SVCREQ 52 .............................................. 528
24.25.2 Status Data for SVCREQ 52 .............................................................. 528
24.26 SVCREQ 53: Write to Flash ............................................................................... 529
24.26.1 Input Parameter Block for SVCREQ 53 .............................................. 530
24.26.2 Status Data for SVCREQ 53 .............................................................. 530

Chapter 25: Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols .......................... 531
25.1 Format of the Communication Request Function ............................................. 532
25.1.1 Parameters of the COMMREQ Function ................................................. 532
25.1.2 Command Block for the COMMREQ Function ........................................ 533
25.2 Configuring Serial Ports Using the COMMREQ Function ................................... 534
25.2.1 Timing .................................................................................................. 534

Contents xxvi
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.2.2 Sending Another COMMREQ to the Same Port ...................................... 534

25.2.3 Invalid Port Configurations .................................................................... 534
25.2.4 RTU Slave/SNP Slave Operation with Programmer Attached .................. 535
25.2.5 COMMREQ Command Block for Configuring SNP Protocol .................... 536
25.2.6 COMMREQ Command Block for Configuring RTU Protocol .................... 537
25.2.7 COMMREQ Command Block for Configuring Serial I/O Protocol............. 539
25.3 Calling Serial I/O COMMREQs from the PLC Sweep ........................................... 540
25.3.1 Compatibility ........................................................................................ 540
25.3.2 Status Word for Serial I/O COMMREQs ................................................... 541
25.4 Serial I/O COMMREQ Commands ..................................................................... 542
25.4.1 Overlapping COMMREQs ....................................................................... 542
25.4.2 Initialize Port Function (4300) ............................................................... 543
25.4.3 Set Up Input Buffer Function (4301) ...................................................... 544
25.4.4 Flush Input buffer Function (4302) ........................................................ 545
25.4.5 Read port status Function (4303) .......................................................... 545
25.4.6 Write port control Function (4304) ........................................................ 547
25.4.7 Cancel COMMREQ Function (4399) ....................................................... 548
25.4.8 Autodial Function (4400)....................................................................... 549
25.4.9 Write bytes Function (4401) .................................................................. 550
25.4.10 Read bytes Function (4402) ............................................................. 551
25.4.11 Read String Function (4403) ............................................................ 553

Chapter 26: PID Function ...................................................... 557

26.1 Format of the PID Function .............................................................................. 557
26.1.1 Parameters of the PID Function ............................................................. 558
26.2 Operation of the PID Function ......................................................................... 559
26.2.1 Automatic Operation ............................................................................ 559
26.2.2 Manual Operation ................................................................................. 559
26.2.3 Time Interval for the PID Function ......................................................... 560
26.2.4 Scaling Input and Outputs ..................................................................... 560
26.3 Parameter Block for the PID Function ............................................................... 561
26.3.1 Internal Parameters in RefArray ............................................................. 561
26.4 PID Algorithm Selection (PIDISA or PIDIND) and Gains ..................................... 567
26.4.1 Error Term ............................................................................................. 567
26.4.2 Derivative Term..................................................................................... 567
26.4.3 Delta Time ............................................................................................ 568

Contents xxvii
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

26.4.4 Independent Term Algorithm (PIDIND) ................................................. 569

26.4.5 Sample Period and PID Block Scheduling ............................................... 570
26.5 Determining the Process Characteristics .......................................................... 571
26.6 Setting Parameters Including Tuning Loop Gains ............................................. 572
26.6.1 Setting Loop Gains Using the Ziegler and Nichols Tuning Approach ...... 573
26.6.2 The Ideal Tuning Method ....................................................................... 573
26.7 Sample PID Call ............................................................................................... 574

Chapter 27: Reading and Writing Data in Flash Memory ....... 575
27.1 Logic-Driven Write to Flash .............................................................................. 575
27.1.1 Data Quantities ..................................................................................... 575
27.1.2 If Flash Memory Becomes Full ................................................................ 576
27.1.3 Important Note ..................................................................................... 576

Appendix A: Instruction Timing .............................................. 587

A-1 Notes on the Timing Information ..................................................................... 587
A-1.1 Execution Times with Function Block Enabled or Disabled ..................... 587
A-1.2 Additional Notes ................................................................................... 587
A-2 Typical Execution Times for Boolean Contacts ................................................. 588
A-2.1 Sweep Times for Micro-64 CPUs ............................................................ 588
A-3 Typical Execution Times for Release 4.0 CPUs .................................................. 589
A-4 Typical Execution Times for Release 3.8 CPUs .................................................. 593
A-5 Typical Execution Times for Release 3.0 CPUs .................................................. 598
A-6 Typical Execution Times for Release 2.0 CPUs .................................................. 603
A-7 Typical Execution Times for Release 1.1 CPUs .................................................. 608
A-8 Typical Execution Times for Release 1.0 CPUs .................................................. 613

Appendix B: Feature Comparison ............................................ 617

B-1 Operating Differences ..................................................................................... 617
B-2 VersaMax Nano/Micro PWM/Pulse Outputs ..................................................... 619
B-2.1 %AQ References for PWM ...................................................................... 619
B-2.2 %AQ References for Pulse Train ............................................................. 620
B-2.3 Enabling Outputs .................................................................................. 620
B-2.4 Load Correction..................................................................................... 620
B-2.5 Formulas for Converting Series 90 Micro Frequencies and Duty Cycles... 620
B-3 Functions Supported ....................................................................................... 621
B-4 Program References ........................................................................................ 625

Contents xxviii
User Manual Contents
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Appendix C: Battery Backup Options ...................................... 626

C-1 CPU Battery Consumption ............................................................................... 626
C-2 Backup Batteries for VersaMax Micro PLCs ....................................................... 626
C-3 Calculating the Life of a Battery ....................................................................... 627
C-3.1 For Standard Backup Battery IC200ACC403 ........................................... 627
C-3.2 For High Capacity Battery IC200ACC414 ............................................... 627

Appendix D: Input Simulators ................................................. 628

D-1 IC200ACC450 Input Simulator for DC-powered VersaMax Nano PLCs .............. 628
D-1.1 Compatibility ........................................................................................ 628
D-1.2 Installation Instructions ......................................................................... 629
D-2 IC200ACC451 Input Simulator for DC-powered VersaMax Micro PLCs and Expansion Units
........................................................................................................................ 629
D-2.1 Compatibility ........................................................................................ 629
D-2.2 Installation Instructions ......................................................................... 630

Appendix E: Relay Contact Ratings .......................................... 631

E-1 125Vac ............................................................................................................ 631
E-2 250Vac ............................................................................................................ 632
E-3 30Vdc.............................................................................................................. 632

Contents xxix
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Warnings, Caution Notes as Used in this Publication

Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages,
currents, temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury to exist in
this equipment or may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to
Warning equipment, a Warning notice is used.

Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Caution

Notes: Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating
the equipment.

These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every
possible contingency to be met during installation, operation, and maintenance. The information is supplied
for informational purposes only, and Emerson makes no warranty as to the accuracy of the information
included herein. Changes, modifications, and/or improvements to equipment and specifications are made
periodically and these changes may or may not be reflected herein. It is understood that Emerson may make
changes, modifications, or improvements to the equipment referenced herein or to the document itself at any
time. This document is intended for trained personnel familiar with the Emerson products referenced herein.

Emerson may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document. The
furnishing of this document does not provide any license whatsoever to any of these patents.

Emerson provides the following document and the information included therein as-is and without warranty of
any kind, expressed or implied, including but not limited to any implied statutory warranty of merchantability
or fitness for particular purpose.

xxx
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 1: Introduction
The VersaMax® PLC family of products includes a broad range of small-size programmable
logic controllers (PLCs) with big-PLC features. The VersaMax family includes Nano PLCs (10
points), Micro PLCs (up to 176 I/O points), and Micro PLUS PLCs (up to 320 I/O points) using
optional Expansion Units. These small PLCs are the perfect solution for applications such as
packaging machines, dispensing machines, and relay replacement.

Figure 1

These versatile controllers provide powerful programming features such as built-in high-
speed counter functionality, support for floating-point function blocks and subroutines,
ability to assign passwords and privilege levels to control access, and override capability.

Introduction 1
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

1.1 VersaMax Micro, Micro PLUS and Nano PLC

Models
Versions of these compact, powerful controllers are available for AC and DC power, and with
several different combinations of discrete and analog input and output points.

This chapter compares the features of the many VersaMax Nano, Micro and Micro PLUS PLC
models that are available.

Micro PLUS 20/40/64 CPUs have enhanced memory compared to earlier versions of these
CPUs. Firmware versions 4.00 and later cannot be used with the earlier hardware versions.

Figure 2

1.1.1 VersaMax Nano PLCs

VersaMax Nano PLCs have 10 points of discrete I/O. Two models also provide a 0V to 10V
analog input.

Model Number Description

IC200NAL110 10 Point (6) 12Vdc In, (4) 12 Relay Out, (1) Analog Input, 12Vdc Power
Supply
IC200NAL211 10 Point (6) 24Vdc In, (4) 24 Relay Out, (1) Analog Input, 24Vdc Power
Supply
IC200NDD010 10 Point (6) 12Vdc In, (4) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200NDD101 10 Point (6) 24Vdc In, (4) 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200NDR001 10 Point (6) 24Vdc In, (4) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200NDR010 10 Point (6) 12Vdc In, (4) Relay Out, 12Vdc Power Supply

Introduction 2
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

1.1.2 VersaMax Micro and Micro PLUS PLCs

VersaMax Micro PLCs are available with 14 to 64 points of I/O.

Micro PLUS PLCs are available with 20, 40 or 64 points of I/O.

Model Number Description

IC200UAA003 14 Point (8) 120Vac In, (6) 120Vac Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UAA007 28 Point (16) 120Vac In, (12) 120Vac Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UAL004 23 Point (13) 12Vdc In, (10) Relay Out, (2) Analog In and (1) Analog Out,
12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UAL005 23 Point (13) 24Vdc In, (1) 24Vdc Out, (9) Relay Out, (2) Analog In and (1)
Analog Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UAL006 23 Point (13) 24Vdc In, (9) Relay Out, (1) 24Vdc Out, (2) Analog In and (1)
Analog Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UAR014 14 Point (8) 120Vac In, (2) Relay Out at 10 Amp, (4) Relay Out at 2 Amp,
120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UAR028 28 Point (16) 120Vac In, (4) Relay Out at 10 Amp, (8) Relay Out at 2 Amp,
120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UDD020 20 Point (12) 24Vdc In, (4) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, (4) 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc
Power Supply
IC200UDD040 40 Point (24) 24Vdc In, (16) 24Vdc Out (source), 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDD064 64 Point (40) 24Vdc In, (24) 24Vdc Out with ESCP (source), 24Vdc Power
Supply
IC200UDD104 14 Point (8) 24Vdc In, (6) 24Vdc Out 2 at 1.0 Amp and 4 at 0.5 Amp, 24Vdc
Power Supply
IC200UDD110 28 Point (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out, 6 at 1.0 Amp and, 6 at 0.5 Amp,
24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDD112 14 Point (8) 12Vdc In, (6) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDD120 28 Point (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDD164 64 Point (40) 24Vdc In, (24) 24Vdc Out (sink), 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDD212 28 Point (16) 12Vdc In, (12) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDD220 20 Point, (12) 24Vdc In, (8) 24Vdc Out (sink), 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDD240 40 Point (24) 24Vdc In, (16) 24Vdc Out (sink), 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR001 14 Point (8) 24Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UDR002 14 Point (8) 24Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR003 14 Point (8) 12Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR005 28 Point (16) 24Vdc In, (11) Relay Out, (1) 24Vdc Out, 120/240Vac Power
Supply
IC200UDR006 28 Point (16) 12Vdc In, (12) Relay Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR010 28 Point (16) 24Vdc In, (11) Relay Out, (1) 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR020 20 Point, (12) 24Vdc In, (8) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR040 40 Point (24) 24Vdc In, (16) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR064 64 Point (40) 24Vdc In, (24) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply

Introduction 3
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Model Number Description

IC200UDR120 20 Point (12) 24Vdc In, (8) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UDR140 40 Point (24) 24Vdc In, (16) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UDR164 64 Point (40) 24Vdc In, (24) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UDR228 28 Point (16) 24Vdc In, (11) Relay Out, (1) 24Vdc Out, 12/24Vdc
Power Supply
IC200UDR440 40 Point (24) 24Vdc In, (16) Relay Out, 12/24Vdc Power Supply

1.1.3 VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Units

VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Units provide additional discrete points and analog I/O
channels for the PLC system. Up to four VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Units of any type can
be connected to a VersaMax Micro PLC.

Note: The 64-point Expansion Units are supported on Micro PLUS PLCs (20/40/64 point PLCs with
release 4.0 or later firmware).

Model Number Description

IC200UEC008 8 Point (4) 24Vdc In, (4) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEC108 8 Point (4) 24Vdc In, (4) 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEC208 8 Point (4) 24Vdc In, (4) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEI008 8 Point (8) 24Vdc In, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEI016 16 Point (16) 24Vdc In, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEO008 8 Point (8) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEO016 16 Point (16) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEO108 8 Point (8) 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEO116 16 Point (16) 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UER008 8 Point (8) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UER016 16 Point (16) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX009 14 Point (8) 120Vac In, (2) Relay Out @ 10 Amps (4) Relay Out @ 2 Amps,
120/240Vac P.S.
IC200UEX010 14 Point (8) 120Vac In, (6) 120Vac Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX011 14 Point (8) 24Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX012 14 Point (8) 24Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX013 14 Point (8) 12Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX014 14 Point (8) 24Vdc In, (6) 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX015 14 Point (8) 12Vdc In, (6) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX064 64 point (40) 24Vdc In; (24) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX122 14 Point (8) 24Vdc In, (6) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX164 64 point (40) 24Vdc In; (24) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX209 28 Point (16) 120Vac In, (4) Relay Out at 10 Amp, (8) Relay Out at 2 Amp,
120/240Vac P.S.
IC200UEX210 28 Point (16) 120Vac In, (12) 120Vac Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply

Introduction 4
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Model Number Description

IC200UEX211 28 Point (16) 24Vdc In, (12) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX212 28 Point (16) 24Vdc In, (12) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX213 28 Point (16) 12Vdc In, (12) Relay Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX214 28 Point (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out, 6 at 1.0 Amp and, 6 at 0.5 Amp,
24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX215 28 Point (16) 12Vdc In, (12) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX222 28 Point (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX264 64-point (40) 24Vdc In; (24) 24Vdc Source Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX364 64-point (40) 24Vdc In; (24) 24Vdc Sink Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX616 6 Point (4) Analog In and (2) Analog Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX624 4 Point (4) Analog In, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX626 6 Point (4) Analog In and (2) Analog Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX636 6 Point (4) Analog In and (2) Analog Out, 100-240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX724 4 RTD, Pt 100 In, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX726 4 RTD, Pt 100 In and (2) Analog Out, 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10Vdc,
24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX734 4 RTD, Pt 100 In, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX736 4 RTD, Pt 100 In and (2) Analog Out, 0 to 20mA, 4 to 20mA or 0 to 10Vdc,
120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX824 4 Thermocouple Input, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX826 4 Thermocouple In and (2) Analog Out, 0 to 20mA or 0 to10Vdc, 24Vdc
Power Supply
IC200UMM0021 2 Axis Servo Motion Module, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UMM1021 2 Axis Servo Motion Module, 120/240Vac Power Supply

1.1.4 Option Modules

Option Modules can be used to enhance the functionality of a 20, 40, or 64-point (release
3.6 or later) VersaMax Micro or Micro PLUS PLC.

Model Number Description

IC200USB001 RS232, Extra Port Option Module with 2 analog inputs
IC200USB002 RS485, Extra Port Option Module with 2 analog inputs
IC200UMB001 Memory Pack Module
IC200UUB001 USB / RS232 Conversion Option Module
IC200UEM001 Ethernet Option Module

1
For Motion Module operating details, refer to the VersaMax Micro PLC MicroMotion Modules Manual, GFK-2471A.

Introduction 5
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

1.2 Comparison of Program and Data Memory

Available
The following table compares the amounts of program and data memory available with
VersaMax Nano, Micro and Micro PLUS PLCs.

Reference Type Reference Range 10-Point 14-Point 23- and 20-, 40-,
Nano Micro 28-Point and 64-
PLCs PLCs Micro Point
PLCs Micro/
Micro
PLUS PLCs
User program logic Not applicable 2K words 9K words 9K words 24K words
Discrete inputs %I0001 - %I0512 512 bits 512 bits 512 bits 512 bits
Discrete outputs %Q0001 - %Q0512 512 bits 512 bits 512 bits 512 bits
Discrete global %G0001 - %G1280 1280 bits 1280 bits 1280 bits 1280 bits
references
Discrete internal %M0001 - %M1024 1024 bits 1024 bits 1024 bits 1024 bits
coils
Discrete temporary %T0001 - %T0256 256 bits 256 bits 256 bits 256 bits
coils
System status %S0001 - %S0032 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits
references
%SA0001 - %SA0032 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits
%SB0001 - %SB0032 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits
%SC0001 - %SC0032 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits
System register
references %R0001 - %R0256 256 words 256 words
10-pt, 14-pt PLCs %R0001 - %R2048 2K words
23-pt and 28-pt PLCs %R0001 - %R16384 32K words
20-pt and 40-pt PLCs %R0001 - %R32640 32K words
64-pt PLCs
Analog and High- %AI0001 - %AI0128 128 words 128 words 128 words 128 words
Speed Counter
inputs
Analog outputs %AQ0001 - %AQ0128 128 words 128 words 128 words 128 words

Introduction 6
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

1.3 Comparison of PLC Features

The table below compares the features of VersaMax Nano PLCs and Micro PLCs.

Feature 10-Point 14- 23-Point 28-Point 20-, 40-, and

Nano PLCs Point Micro PLCs Micro 64-Point
Micro PLCs Micro/
PLCs Micro PLUS
PLCs
Run/Stop Mode Select ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Switch
Connection for an external ✓
mode switch
Potentiometer Inputs (2) ✓ ✓ ✓ optional
Built-in Analog I/O 1 voltage 2 in (V/C) and
out on some 1 out (V/C)
models
Capacitor memory backup 3 days 3 days 30 minutes 30 minutes 30 minutes
time, minimum
(Hardware version C and
above)
External high capacity optional optional optional
battery to back up RAM
LEDs: PWR, RUN, OK, point ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
status
Removable wiring terminal ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
assemblies
Accepts Up to 4 Expansion ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Units
Maximum I/O Count with 126 135 140 20-point: 276
Expansion Units 40-point: 296
64-point: 320
RS-232 Port 1 with RJ-45 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Connector
SNP/SNPX Master ✓
SNP/SNPX Slave ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
2-Wire RTU Slave ✓ ✓ ✓
4-Wire RTU Slave ✓ ✓ ✓
Configurable for Serial I/O ✓ ✓ ✓
Modbus RTU Master ✓
Port 2 ✓ ✓ ✓
SNP/SNPX Slave ✓ ✓ ✓
SNP/SNPX Master ✓ ✓ ✓
2-Wire RTU Slave ✓ ✓ ✓

Introduction 7
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Feature 10-Point 14- 23-Point 28-Point 20-, 40-, and

Nano PLCs Point Micro PLCs Micro 64-Point
Micro PLCs Micro/
PLCs Micro PLUS
PLCs
4-Wire RTU Slave ✓ ✓ ✓
Modbus RTU Master ✓ ✓ ✓
(rel. 2.02 and (rel. 2.02
later) and later)
Configurable for Serial I/O ✓ ✓ ✓
RS-232, RS-485/422, USB, ✓
and Memory Option
Modules
VersaMax Serial to Ethernet ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
support
LD and Instruction List ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
programming
Program Functions ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
compatible with Series 90-
30 and Series 90 Micro PLCs
Subroutines 8 64 64 64 64
Floating Point functions ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
64-Point Expansion support ✓
(Rel 4.0 or
later)
Ethernet Communications ✓
module support
Motion Module support ✓
Online program changes ✓
(Rel 4.0 or
later)

Introduction 8
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

1.4 Comparison of I/O and Power Features for PLCs

Model Discrete Input Power DC Power for DC AC Analog Relay DC AC Analog
Number Points inputs and Inputs Inputs Inputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Output
field devices s
Nano PLCs
NAL110 10 12Vdc 6 1 4
NAL211 10 24Vdc 6 1 4
NDD010 10 12Vdc 6 4
NDD101 10 24Vdc 6 4
NDR001 10 24Vdc 6 4
NDR010 10 12Vdc 6 4
Micro and Micro PLUS PLCs
UAA003 14 100/240Vac 8 6
UAA007 28 100/240Vac 16 12
UAL004 23 12Vdc ✓ 13 2 10 1
UAL005 23 24Vdc ✓ 13 2 9 1 1
UAL006 23 100/240Vac ✓ 13 2 9 1 1
UAR014 14 100/240Vac ✓ 8 6 2

UAR028 28 100/240Vac ✓ 16 122

UDD020 20 24Vdc ✓ 12 4 LCDC,
4 ESCP
UDD040 40 24Vdc ✓ 24 16
UDD104 14 24Vdc ✓ 8 6
UDD064 64 24Vdc ✓ 40 24, ESCP
UDD110 28 24Vdc ✓ 16 12
UDD112 14 12Vdc ✓ 8 6
UDD120 28 24Vdc ✓ 16 12, ESCP
UDD164 64 24Vdc ✓ 40 24
UDD220 20 24Vdc ✓ 12 8
UDD212 28 12Vdc ✓ 16 12
UDD240 40 24Vdc ✓ 24 16
UDR001 14 100/240Vac ✓ 8 6
UDR002 14 24Vdc ✓ 8 6
UDR003 14 12Vdc ✓ 8 6
UDR005 28 100/240Vac ✓ 16 11 1
UDR006 28 12Vdc ✓ 16 12
UDR010 28 24Vdc ✓ 16 11 1
UDR020 20 100/240Vac ✓ 12 8

2
Two outputs rated 10 Amps
Introduction 9
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Model Discrete Input Power DC Power for DC AC Analog Relay DC AC Analog

Number Points inputs and Inputs Inputs Inputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Output
field devices s
UDR040 40 24Vdc ✓ 24 16
UDR064 64 24Vdc ✓ 40 24
UDR120 20 100/240Vac ✓ 12 8
UDR140 40 100/240Vac ✓ 24 16
UDR164 64 100/240Vac ✓ 40 24
UDR228 28 24Vdc ✓ 16 11 1
UDR440 40 12Vdc ✓ 24 16
24Vdc

1.5 Comparison of I/O and Power Features for

Expansion Units
Model Total Input DC Power DC AC Analog Relay DC AC Analog
Number Points Power for inputs Inputs Inputs Inputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Output
and field s
devices
UEC008 8 24Vdc ✓ 4 4, ESCP
UEC108 8 24Vdc ✓ 4 4
UEC208 8 24Vdc ✓ 4 4
UEI008 8 24Vdc ✓ 8
UEI016 16 24Vdc ✓ 16
UEO008 8 24Vdc ✓ 8, ESCP
UEO108 8 24Vdc ✓ 8 8
UEO016 16 24Vdc ✓ 16, ESCP
UEO116 16 24Vdc ✓ 16
UER008 8 24Vdc ✓ 8
UER016 16 24Vdc ✓ 16
UEX009 14 100/240Vac ✓ 8 62
UEX010 14 100/240Vac ✓ 8 6
UEX011 14 100/240Vac ✓ 8 6
UEX012 14 24Vdc ✓ 8 6
UEX013 14 12Vdc ✓ 8 6
UEX014 14 24Vdc ✓ 8 6
UEX015 14 12Vdc ✓ 8 6
UEX064 64 24Vdc ✓ 40 24
UEX122 14 24Vdc ✓ 8 6, ESCP
UEX164 64 24Vdc ✓ 40 24
UEX209 28 100/240Vac 16 122

Introduction 10
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Model Total Input DC Power DC AC Analog Relay DC AC Analog

Number Points Power for inputs Inputs Inputs Inputs Outputs Outputs Outputs Output
and field s
devices
UEX210 28 100/240Vac ✓ 16 12
UEX211 28 100/240Vac ✓ 16 12 1
UEX212 28 24Vdc ✓ 16 12 1
UEX213 28 12Vdc ✓ 16 12
UEX214 28 24Vdc ✓ 16 12
UEX215 28 12Vdc ✓ 16 12
UEX222 28 24Vdc ✓ 16 12, ESCP
UEX264 64 24Vdc ✓ 40 24
UEX364 64 24Vdc ✓ 40 24
UEX616 6 12Vdc 4 2
UEX624 4 24Vdc 4
UEX626 6 24Vdc 4 2
UEX636 6 100/240Vac 4 2
UEX724 4 24Vdc 4 RTD
UEX726 6 24Vdc 4 RTD 2
UEX734 4 100/240Vac 4 RTD
UEX736 6 100/240Vac 4 RTD 2
UEX824 4 24Vdc 4 TC
UEX826 6 24Vdc 4 TC 2
UMM002 24Vdc ✓
UMM102 100/240Vac ✓

Introduction 11
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

1.6 VersaMax Serial to Ethernet Adapter

The VersaMax™ IC200SET001 Serial to Ethernet Adapter (VMSE) can be used to connect a
VersaMax Micro, Micro PLUS or Nano PLC to an Ethernet network.

Figure 3

1.6.1 Firmware Options

By default, SRTP/SNP firmware is loaded in flash memory. Use SRTP/SNP to communicate
with VersaPro™, CIMPLICITY™ HMI, Series 90-30™, Series 90-70™, and other Emerson
products.

Additional firmware options are provided on the CD that is shipped with the VMSE. These
include Modbus TCP/RTU, and Pass Thru firmware, which can be used to send serial
communication via Ethernet.

1.6.2 Serial Interface

The RJ-45 port on the VMSE supports RS-232. The screw block port supports both RS-232
and RS 485/422. Setting the switch on the front of the VMSE and configuring the VMSE
setup selects RS 232 or RS-485/422. Only one port can be used at a time.

1.6.3 Network Interface

The VMSE supports 10/100 Mbit Ethernet through its RJ-45 (10BaseT) connector.

1.6.4 Power Requirements

The required input voltage can vary between 9Vdc and 30Vdc (or 24Vac) with a maximum
of 3 Watts. The VMSE can be powered from the 12- or 24-Volt supply on a VersaMax Micro
or Micro PLUS PLC (200mA available), or an external supply can be used. For a Nano PLC, an
external power supply is required.

Introduction 12
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

1.7 Logic-Driven Read/Write Flash Memory

Feature
Release 3.0 and later Micro and Micro PLUS PLCs support two Service Requests that can be
used in the application program to read data from and write data to flash memory.

The Logic-Driven Read/Write Flash feature can:

• Write selected data to flash using Service Request (SVCREQ) logic in the application
program
• Write / read one to ten consecutive Reference Variables of same type with one
Service Request
— Up to 10 words of %R, %AI, %AQ
— Up to 10 bytes of %I, %Q, %M, %T, %G
• Up to 8k bytes of reference memory can be stored in flash. If a request is made to
store more than 8k bytes in flash, a fault is logged in the PLC Fault Table.
See Chapter 24: for details and logic examples.

1.8 Online Program Changes

In release 4.0 or later Micro PLUS PLCs, you can perform online program changes to edit
and download logic to the PLC without putting the PLC into Stop mode. Online program
changes consist of:

• Word-for-word change
• Run mode store (RMS)

1.8.1 Word for Word Changes

Changes to the program that do not modify the size of the program are considered word-
for-word changes. Examples include changing the type of contact or coil or changing a
reference address used for an existing function block. Changing an operand is usually a
word-for-word change. A word-for-word change can be made and downloaded to the PLC
while online in programmer mode without having to download the entire block of logic.

1.8.2 Run Mode Store

Run Mode Store consists of downloading logic to a PLC while it is in Run mode. Changes in
logic can account for the same or a different amount of memory as the original logic.

The Run Mode Store operation requires the modified logic block(s) size to be within the
available free memory.

Example: In order to modify or add a logic block of 10 Kbytes and perform a Run Mode Store,
at least 10 Kbytes of free memory should be available. A Run Mode Store with the maximum
user logic (48K) is possible only when there is no user logic present in the PLC.

Introduction 13
User Manual Chapter 1
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Note: Online program changes should not be performed on active motion function blocks. Motion
functionality is not guaranteed if user performs word for word change or Run Mode Store on active
motion function blocks.

1.9 Documentation
VersaMax Manuals
VersaMax PLC User's Manual GFK-1503

VersaMax Modules, Power Supplies, and Carriers User's Manual GFK-1504

VersaMax System DeviceNet Communications Modules User's Manual GFK-1533

VersaMax System Profibus Slave Modules User's Manual GFK-1534

VersaMax System Genius Network Interface Unit User's Manual GFK-1535

VersaMax I/O and Industrial Networking Application Guide GFK-1563

VersaMax Micro PLCs and Nano PLCs User's Manual GFK-1645

VersaPro Programming Software User's Guide GFK-1670

VersaMax System AS-i Network Master Module User's Manual GFK-1697

VersaMax Serial to Ethernet Adapter User's Manual GFK-1852

VersaMax System Ethernet Network Interface Unit User Manual GFK-1860

VersaMax PLC Station Manager User's Manual GFK-1876

VersaMax IP Installation Manual GFK-2307

VersaMax MicroMotion Modules IC200UMM002/102 GFK-2471

VersaMax PROFINET Scanner (PNS) Manual GFK-2721

VersaMax PROFIBUS Master Module, IC200BEM003 GFK-2740

VersaMax Controllers Secure Deployment Guide GFK-2955

In addition to these manuals, datasheets and product update documents describe

individual modules and product revisions. The most recent PACSystems documentation is
available on the Emerson support websitehttps://www.emerson.com/Industrial-
Automation-Controls/support.

1.10 Revisions in this Manual

Rev Date Description
M Dec 2019 Following Emerson’s acquisition of this product,
changes have been made to apply appropriate
branding and registration of the product with required
certification agencies. No changes to material, process,
form, fit or functionality.
L Sep 2015 Correction to figure in section 9.7.4

Introduction 14
User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 2: VersaMax Nano PLCs

This chapter describes the features and specifications of VersaMax Nano PLCs.

IC200NAL110 Nano PLC with 10 Discrete-Points and 1 Analog Input:

11-Point (6) 12Vdc In, (4) Relay Out, 1 Analog input,

12Vdc Power Supply

IC200NAL211 Nano PLC with 10 Discrete-Points and 1 Analog Input:

(6) 24Vdc In, (4) Relay Out, 1 Analog input,

24Vdc Power Supply

IC200NDD010 10-Point Nano PLC: (6) 12Vdc In, (4) 12Vdc Out,

12Vdc Power Supply

IC200NDD101 10-Point Nano PLC: (6) 24Vdc In, (4) 24Vdc Out,

24Vdc Power Supply

IC200NDR001 10-Point Nano PLC: (6) 24Vdc In, (4) Relay Out,

24Vdc Power Supply

IC200NDR010 10-Point Nano PLC: (6) 12Vdc In, (4) Relay Out,

12Vdc Power Supply

2.1 VersaMax Nano PLC Features

VersaMax Nano PLCs offer the perfect solution for smaller packaging machines, dispensing
machines, and relay replacement applications with up to 6 inputs and 4 outputs. In spite of
their small size, these versatile controllers provide powerful programming features such as
built-in high-speed counter functionality, support for floating-point function blocks and
subroutines, ability to assign passwords and privilege levels, and override capability.

Figure 4

VersaMax Nano PLCs 15

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

All VersaMax Nano PLCs feature:

• Two non-removable recessed “box-style” terminal strips.

• An external Run/Stop switch can be wired to the Nano PLC. The switch can be
configured as a run/stop switch, or a memory protect switch, and used for clearing
faults when a fatal fault exists.
• Configurable to read configuration at power-up from either RAM or flash memory
(ROM). Can also be configured to read application program from flash at power-up.
• Capacitor backs up RAM for at least 30 minutes on hardware revisions C or above.
• Full-featured programming Instruction Set with floating point math.
• 2K words of program memory, 256 words of registers.

2.1.1 Nano PLC General Specifications

Typical Scan Rate 1.3 ms/K for Boolean logic (see Appendix A:)
Output Power Supplies +5Vdc on pin 7 of Serial Port, 100mA max
Maximum number of slave devices per RS-485 8 (can be increased with a repeater). Requires
network IC200ACC415.
Real-time clock accuracy (for timer functions) ±0.5%

2.1.2 RS-232 Serial Port

The RS-232 serial port has an RJ-45 connector. The serial port defaults to SNP protocol, and
can be configured for SNP/SNPX, slave or RTU slave using the configuration software. It can
also be configured for Serial I/O and controlled using COMMREQs from the application
program. The port automatically switches from RTU to SNP for programmer
communications.

2.1.3 Status LEDs

LEDs provide quick visual verification of operating status. In addition to LEDs for Power, OK,
and Run mode, there is an LED for each I/O point.

Figure 5

VersaMax Nano PLCs 16

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

2.1.4 High-Speed Counters

A VersaMax Nano PLC can be configured to provide built-in high-speed counter and pulse
operation.

When configured for High-Speed Counter operation, inputs can be set up as:

• Up to three Type A Counters or

• 1 Type A and 1 Type B Counter.
Each counter provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 10 kHz for industrial
control applications such as meter proving, turbine flowmeter, velocity measurement,
material handling, motion control, and process control.

Each counter can be enabled independently. Type A counters can be configured for up or
down counting (default is up) and for positive or negative edge detection (default is
positive). The type B counter provides an A Quad B counting function.

Nano PLCs with DC outputs provide up to 3 High-Speed Counter outputs, and/or Pulse Train
or Pulse-Width Modulated outputs.

Nano PLCs with relay outputs also provide up to 3 High-Speed Counter outputs. However,
relay outputs cannot be used as Pulse Train or Pulse-Width Modulated outputs.

2.2 IC200NAL110 Nano PLCs with 10 Discrete

Points and 1 Analog Input: (6) 12Vdc In, (4)
Relay Out, 1 Analog Input, 12Vdc Power
Supply
VersaMax Nano PLC IC200NAL110 has six DC inputs, one analog input, and four normally
open 2-Amp relay outputs that can control 5Vdc to 30Vdc or 5Vac to 250Vac output
devices. It uses +12Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

2.2.1 DC Inputs
The module’s six configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard
inputs or High-Speed Counter inputs. When used as standard inputs, the input
characteristics are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit
switches, and electronic proximity switches.

2.2.2 Analog Input

Input IN1 can be used as an analog input (8-bit resolution), for analog signals in the 0V to
10V range. The analog input cannot be software calibrated.

VersaMax Nano PLCs 17

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

2.2.3 Relay Outputs

The four Form A (SPST-single pole single throw) normally open relay outputs can control a
wide range of devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. Power for the
internal relay coils is provided by the +24-volt DC internal supply. An external source of AC
or DC power must be supplied to operate field devices.

The relay outputs can be used as up to three High-Speed Counter outputs. They cannot be
used as Pulse Train or Pulse-Width Modulated outputs. Connections and specifications for
High-Speed Counter outputs are the same as for standard relay outputs.

2.2.4 Nano PLC IC200NAL110 Specifications

Inputs Six 12Vdc positive/negative logic inputs, one analog input, 0 to 10V
Outputs Four normally open 2 Amp relay circuits
High-Speed Counters Three Type A or One Type A and One Type B
DC Power Specifications
Range 9.6Vdc - 15Vdc
Hold-up 3.0mS
Inrush Current 8A typical at 12Vdc
Inrush Time 200mS typical
Input Current 250mA typical at 12Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 3W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 6
Rated Input Voltage 12 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 volts DC
Input Current 9.0mA typical
Input Impedance 1.3 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 9.5Vdc minimum, OFF: 2.5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 6.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms (user configurable) as regular input; 100µs as HSC
input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between group
Analog Input Specifications
Number of Analog Inputs 1, single
Input range 0 to 10 V (10.24 maximum)
Resolution 8 bits
Accuracy 1% of full scale over temperature range
Voltage input impedance 100kΩ
Input filter time 200ms to reach 1% error for step input
Relay Output Specifications

VersaMax Nano PLCs 18

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac

Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side
500 V RMS between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
On Response Time 15 ms maximum
Off Response Time 15 ms maximum
Fuse None
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2A Solenoid 0.6A 200,000

High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications

Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 9V, OFF: 2.5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16bits
Outputs
Load Voltage 12V
Number of Pulse Outputs None

2.2.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200NAL110

Figure 6

VersaMax Nano PLCs 19

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

2.3 IC200NAL211
Nano PLC with 10 Discrete Points and 1 Analog
Input:
(6) 12Vdc In, (4) Relay Out, 1 Analog Input,
24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Nano PLC IC200NAL211 has six DC inputs, one analog input, and four normally
open 2 Amp relay outputs that can control 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac output devices. It uses
+24Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

2.3.1 DC Inputs
The module’s six configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard
inputs. Whether used as a standard or HSC input, each DC input can have positive or
negative logic characteristics. When used as standard inputs, the input characteristics are
compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches.

2.3.2 Analog Input

Input IN1 can be used as an analog input (8-bit resolution), for analog signals in the 0V to
10V range. The analog input cannot be software calibrated.

2.3.3 Relay Outputs

The four Form A (SPST-single pole single throw) normally open relay outputs can control a
wide range of devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. Power for the
internal relay coils is provided by the +24-volt DC internal supply. An external source of AC
or DC power must be supplied to operate field devices.

The relay outputs can be used as up to three High-Speed Counter outputs. They cannot be
used as Pulse Train or Pulse-Width Modulated outputs. Connections and specifications for
High-Speed Counter outputs are the same as for standard relay outputs.

VersaMax Nano PLCs 20

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

2.3.4 Nano PLC IC200NAL211 Specifications

Inputs Six 24Vdc positive/negative logic inputs, one analog input, 0 to 10V
Outputs Four normally open 2 Amp relay circuits
High-Speed Counters Three Type A or One Type A and One Type B
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc - 30.0Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.12 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 3W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 6
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Impedance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms (user configurable) as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between group
Analog Input Specifications
Number of Analog Inputs 1, single
Input range 0 to 10 V (10.24 maximum)
Resolution 8 bits
Accuracy 1% of full scale over temperature range
Voltage input impedance 100kΩ
Input filter time 200ms to reach 1% error for step input
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side
500 V RMS between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Maximum Resistive Load 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle

VersaMax Nano PLCs 21

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

On Response Time 15 ms maximum

Off Response Time 15 ms maximum
Fuse None
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Solenoid Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2A 0.6A 200,000
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter 10kHz
Frequency
Input Voltage ON: 15V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16bits
Outputs
Load Voltage 12/24V
Number of Pulse Outputs None

2.3.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200NAL211

Figure 7

VersaMax Nano PLCs 22

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

2.4 IC200NDD010
10 Point Nano PLC: (6) 12Vdc In, (4) 12Vdc Out,
12Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Nano PLC IC200NDD010 has six 12Vdc inputs and four DC transistor outputs. It
uses +12Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

2.4.1 DC Inputs
The module’s six configurable DC inputs can be used as standard inputs or High-Speed
Counter inputs. Whether used as a standard or HSC input, each input can have positive or
negative logic characteristics. When used as standard inputs, the input characteristics are
compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches.

2.4.2 Transistor Outputs

The four transistor output circuits can be used to switch devices like valves, lamps or
contactors. External fusing should be provided to protect the outputs. Fast fuses are
recommended.

The outputs can be configured as regular outputs or as outputs controlled by the High-
Speed Counters. Then can also be used as Pulse Train and/or Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
outputs.

All outputs are isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage. The
outputs have one common incoming supply (VC) and one common ground (COM). The
outputs are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected
against negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.

2.4.3 Nano PLC IC200NDD010 Specifications

Inputs Six 12Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Four transistor outputs
High-Speed Counters Three Type A or One Type A and One Type B
DC Power Specifications
Range 9.6Vdc - 15Vdc
Hold-up 3.0mS
Inrush Current 8A typical at 12Vdc
Inrush Time 200mS typical
Input Current 250mA typical at 12Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 3W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 6

VersaMax Nano PLCs 23

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Rated Input Voltage 12 volts DC

Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 volts DC
Input Current 9.0mA typical
Input Impedance 1.3 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 9.5Vdc minimum, OFF: 2.5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 6.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms (user configurable) as regular input; 100µs as HSC
input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between group
Transistor Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc (12Vdc +20%, -20%)
Maximum Load 0.7A per circuit, 4A per common
Maximum Inrush Current 4A for 20mS
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage 0.1mA maximum
Response OFF to ON: 0.1mS maximum 12Vdc 0.2A
ON to OFF: 0.1mS maximum 12Vdc 0.2A
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500Vac between field side and
logic side
External power supply 12Vdc +10%, -20%
Fuse Outputs should be fused externally. Otherwise, a load short can
damage the module output transistor, which is not user
replaceable.
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 9V, OFF 2.5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16bits
Outputs
Number of Outputs Up to three HSC/PT and/or PWM outputs
Load Voltage 12V
Maximum Pulse/PWM 5kHz
Frequency

VersaMax Nano PLCs 24

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

2.4.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200NDD010

Figure 8

2.5 IC200NDD101
10 Point Nano PLC: (6) 24Vdc In, (4) 12Vdc Out,
24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Nano PLC IC200NDD101 has six 24Vdc inputs and four DC transistor outputs. It
uses +24Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

2.5.1 DC Inputs
Six configurable DC inputs can be used as standard inputs or High-Speed Counter inputs.
Whether used as a standard or HSC input, each input can have positive or negative logic
characteristics. When used as standard inputs, the input characteristics are compatible with
a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity
switches.

2.5.2 Transistor Outputs

The four transistor output circuits can be used to switch devices like valves, lamps or
contactors. External fusing should be provided to protect the outputs. Fast fuses are
recommended.

The outputs can be configured as regular outputs or as outputs controlled by the High-
Speed Counters. Then can also be used as Pulse Train and/or Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
outputs.

VersaMax Nano PLCs 25

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

All outputs are isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage. The
outputs have one common incoming supply (VC) and one common ground (COM). The
outputs are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected
against negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive
loads.

2.5.3 Nano PLC IC200NDD101 Specifications

Inputs Six 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Four transistor outputs
High-Speed Counters Three Type A or One Type A and One Type B
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc - 30.0Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.12 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 3W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 6
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Impedance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms (user configurable) as regular input; 100µs as HSC
input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side
500V RMS between group
Transistor Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc/24Vdc (24Vdc +10% / -43% input at V1,C1)
Maximum Load 0.75A per point (Q1 - Q4) at 24Vdc at 100 % ON duration
0.5A per point (Q1 - Q4) at 12Vdc at 100 % ON duration
Maximum Inrush Current 8A for 20ms, 1 pulse (0.75A outputs)
4A for 20ms, 1 pulse (0.5A outputs)
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage 100A maximum
Response OFF to ON: 0.1mS maximum 24Vdc 0.2A
ON to OFF: 0.1mS maximum 24Vdc 0.2A
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500Vac between field side and
logic side

VersaMax Nano PLCs 26

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

External power supply 16-30Vdc required to power the outputs.

Fuse Outputs should be fused externally. Otherwise, a load short can
damage the module output transistor, which is not user
replaceable.
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 15V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16bits
High-Speed Counter Outputs
Number of Outputs Up to three HSC/PT and/or PWM outputs
Load Voltage 12/24V
Maximum Pulse/PWM 5kHz
Frequency

2.5.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200NDD101

Figure 9

VersaMax Nano PLCs 27

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

2.6 IC200NDR001
10-Point Nano PLC: (6) 24Vdc In, (4) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply

VersaMax Nano PLC IC200NDR001 has six 24Vdc inputs, and four normally-open 2-Amp
relay outputs that can control 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac output devices. It uses +12Vdc
nominal input power for PLC operation.

2.6.1 DC Inputs
The module’s six configurable DC inputs can be used as standard inputs or High-Speed
Counter inputs. Whether used as a standard or High-Speed Counter input, each input can
have positive or negative logic characteristics. When used as standard inputs, the input
characteristics are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit
switches, and electronic proximity switches.

2.6.2 Relay Outputs

The four Form A (SPST-single pole single throw) normally open relay outputs can control a
wide range of devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. Power for the
internal relay coils is provided by the +24-volt DC internal supply. An external source of AC
or DC power must be supplied to operate field devices.

Connections and specifications for HSC outputs are the same as for standard relay outputs.

2.6.3 Nano PLC IC200NDR001 Specifications

Inputs Six 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Four normally open 2 Amp relay circuits
High-Speed Counters Three Type A or One Type A and One Type B
DC Power Specifications
Range 24 –20%/+25%Vdc
Hold-up 10 ms at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1A maximum at 24Vdc
Inrush Time 10 ms for 1 A
Input Current 0.12A typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 3W
Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 6
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum

VersaMax Nano PLCs 28

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Response Time 0.5 to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS between
groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Maximum Resistive Load 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Fuse None
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Solenoid Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2A 0.6A 200,000
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter 10kHz
Frequency
Input Voltage ON: 15V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16bits
High-Speed Counter Outputs
Load Voltage refer to relay output specifications
Number of Pulse Outputs None

VersaMax Nano PLCs 29

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

2.6.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200NDR001

Figure 10

2.7 IC200NDR010
10 Point Nano PLC: (6) 24Vdc In, (4) Relay Out,
12Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Nano PLC IC200NDR010 has six 24Vdc inputs, and four normally open 2-Amp
relay outputs that can control 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac output devices. It uses +12Vdc
nominal input power for PLC operation.

2.7.1 Inputs
The module’s six configurable DC inputs can be used as standard inputs or High-Speed
Counter inputs. Whether used as a standard or High-Speed Counter input, each input can
have positive or negative logic characteristics. When used as standard inputs, the input
characteristics are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit
switches, and electronic proximity switches.

2.7.2 Relay Outputs

The four Form A (SPST-single pole single throw) normally open relay outputs can control a
wide range of devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. Power for the
internal relay coils is provided by the +24-volt DC internal supply. An external source of AC
or DC power must be supplied to operate field devices.

Connections and specifications for High-Speed Counter outputs are the same as for
standard relay outputs.

VersaMax Nano PLCs 30

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

2.7.3 Nano PLC IC200NDR010 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Six 12Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Four normally open 2 Amp relay circuits
High-Speed Counters Three Type A or One Type A and One Type B
DC Power Specifications
Range 9.6Vdc - 15Vdc
Hold-up 3.0mS
Inrush Current 8A typical at 12Vdc
Inrush Time 200mS typical
Input Current 250mA typical at 12Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 3W
Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 6
Rated Input Voltage 12 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 volts DC
Input Current 9.0mA typical
Input Resistance 1.3 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 9.5Vdc minimum, OFF: 2.5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 6.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS between
groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Maximum Resistive Load 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Minimum Load 10mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Fuse None
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Solenoid Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2A 0.6A 200,000

VersaMax Nano PLCs 31

User Manual Chapter 2
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter 10kHz
Frequency
Input Voltage ON: 9V, OFF: 2.5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16bits
Outputs
Load Voltage refer to relay output specifications
Number of Pulse Outputs None

2.7.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200NR010

Figure 11

VersaMax Nano PLCs 32

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 3: VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs

IC200UAA003 14 Point Micro PLC, (8) 120Vac In, (6) 120Vac Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UAR014 14 Point Micro PLC, (8) 120Vac In, (2) Relay Out at 10 Amps, (4) Relay Out at 2
Amps, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UDD104 14 Point Micro PLC, (8) 24Vdc Source In, (6) 24Vdc Source Out, 24Vdc Power
Supply
IC200UDD112 14 Point Micro PLC, (8) 12Vdc In, (6) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR001 14 Point Micro PLC, (8) 24Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UDR002 14 Point Micro PLC, (8) 24Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR003 14 Point Micro PLC, (8) 12Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 12Vdc Power Supply

3.1 VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLC Features

Figure 12

All VersaMax 14 Point Micro PLCs feature:

• Two removable screw-down “barrier-style” terminal strips with protective covers.

• RS-232 serial port that supports SNP/SNPX, RTU slave protocols, and Serial I/O.
• Run/Stop mode switch that can be configured as a run/stop switch, a memory
protect switch, and also used for clearing faults when a fatal fault exists.
• Two analog potentiometers.
• Full-featured programming Instruction Set with floating point math. The application
program can be either Ladder Diagram (LD) or Instruction List (IL) format.
• 9K words of program memory, 256 words of registers.
• Support for up to four Expansion Units in any combination.
• Flash memory (ROM) for non-volatile program storage and for system firmware.
• Configurable to read configuration at power-up from either RAM or flash memory
(ROM). Can also be configured to read application program from flash at power-up.
• Capacitor backs up RAM for at least 3 days.

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 33

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.2 14-Point Micro PLC General Specifications

Typical Scan Rate 1.3 ms/K for Boolean logic (see Appendix A:)
Output Power Supplies +5Vdc on pin 7 of Serial Port, 100mA max
Maximum number of slave devices per RS-485 8 (can be increased with a repeater). Requires
network IC200ACC415.
Real-time clock accuracy (for timer functions) ± 0.5%

3.3 High-Speed Counters

All VersaMax Micro with DC power can be configured to provide built-in high-speed counter
and pulse operation.

When configured for High-Speed Counter operation, inputs can be set up as:

• Up to four Type A Counters or

• One Type A and one Type B Counter.
Each counter provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 10 kHz for industrial
control applications such as meter proving, turbine flowmeter, velocity measurement,
material handling, motion control, and process control.

Each counter can be enabled independently. Type A counters can be configured for up or
down counting (default is up) and for positive or negative edge detection (default is
positive). The type B counter provides an A Quad B counting function.

Models with DC outputs can be configured to provide up to four counter, Pulse Train or
PWM outputs.

Figure 13

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 34

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.4 IC200UAA003
14-Point Micro PLC, (8) 120Vac In, (6) 120Vac
Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC model IC200UAA003 accepts eight AC inputs and provides six AC
outputs. It uses 100Vac to 240Vac nominal input power.

3.4.1 AC Inputs
The module’s eight 120Vac input circuits are reactive (resistor/capacitor) inputs. Inputs are
compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic
proximity switches. Power to operate the field devices must be supplied. The input circuits
require an AC power source: they cannot be used with a DC power source.

3.4.2 AC Outputs
The 120/240Vac, 0.5 Amp triac outputs are provided in isolated groups. The commons are
not tied together inside the module. This allows each group to be used on different phases
of the AC supply or to be powered from the same supply. Each group is protected with a
replaceable 3.15-amp fuse for its common. Also, an RC snubber is provided for each output
to protect against transient electrical noise on the power line.

This module provides a high degree of inrush current (10x the rated current) which makes
the outputs suitable for controlling many types of inductive and incandescent loads. AC
power to operate loads connected to outputs must be supplied from an external source.

3.4.3 Micro PLC IC200UAA003 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight AC inputs
Outputs Six AC outputs
High-Speed Counters None
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10mS at 85 to 100Vac, 20mS at 100 to 264Vac
Inrush Time 2mS for 40 Amp
Inrush Current 18 Amp maximum at 120Vac
30 Amp maximum at 200Vac
40 Amp maximum at 265Vac
Input Current 0.05 Amp typical at 200Vac, 0.10 Amp Typical at 100Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 11 VA
AC Input Specifications
Points/Common 4 (I1–I4) and (I5–I8)

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 35

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Rated Load Voltage 85–132Vac, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Maximum Input Voltage 132V rms, 50/60 Hz
Input Current 8mA rms (100Vac, 60 Hz)
Voltage ON: minimum 80V rms, 4.5mA rms, OFF: maximum 30V rms,
2mA rms
Response Time OFF to ON: maximum 25mS, ON to OFF: maximum 30mS
Isolation 1500V rms field side to logic side, 500V rms between groups
AC Output Specifications
Rated Load Voltage 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Maximum Resistive Load Current 0.5 Amp per point
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 0.5 Amp per point at 240Vac
0.6 Amp maximum on C1
1.2 Amps maximum on C2
Maximum Inrush Current 5A (1 period)/point, 10A (1 period)/common
Maximum voltage drops when ON 1.5 V RMS
Maximum leak current when OFF 1.8 mA RMS (115Vac), 3.5 mA RMS (230Vac)
Response Time (Maximum) OFF to ON: 1 mS, ON to OFF: 1/2 cycle + 1 mS
Isolation 1500V RMS field side to logic side 500V RMS between groups

3.4.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UAA003

Figure 14

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 36

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.5 IC200UAR014
14-Point Micro PLC, (8) 120Vac In, (6) Relay
Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC model IC200UAR014 accepts eight AC inputs and provides six relay
outputs: 2 at 10 Amps and 4 at 2 Amps. It uses 100Vac to 240Vac nominal input power.

3.5.1 Inputs
The module’s 120Vac input circuits are reactive (resistor/capacitor) inputs. The input
circuits require an AC power source: they cannot be used with a DC power source. Inputs are
compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic
proximity switches. Power to operate the field devices must be supplied.

3.5.2 Relay Outputs

The six normally open relay outputs can control many types of devices such as motor
starters, solenoids, and indicators. There are two individual 10 Amp relay outputs and one
group of four 2-Amp relay outputs. Power for the internal relay coils is provided by the
internal supply. Separate external sources of AC or DC power must be supplied to operate
field output devices.

3.5.3 Micro PLC IC200UAR014 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight AC inputs
Outputs Six Relay outputs
High-Speed Counters None
Output Power Supplies 24Vdc for input circuits & user devices, 200mA max.
+5Vdc on pin 7 of Serial Port, 100mA max.
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10mS at 85 to 100Vac, 20mS at 100 to 264Vac
Inrush Time 2mS for 40 Amp
Inrush Current 18 Amp maximum at 120Vac
30 Amp maximum at 200Vac
40 Amp maximum at 265Vac
Input Current 0.05 Amp typical at 200Vac, 0.10 Amp Typical at 100Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 11 VA
AC Input Specifications
Points/Common 4 (I1–I4) and (I5–I8)
Rated Load Voltage 85–132Vac, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 37

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Maximum Input Voltage 132V rms, 50/60 Hz
Input Current 8 mA rms (100Vac, 60 Hz)
Voltage ON: minimum 80V rms, 4.5 mA rms, OFF: maximum 30V rms, 2 mA
rms
Response Time OFF to ON: maximum 25mS, ON to OFF: maximum 30mS
Isolation 1500V rms field side to logic side, 500V rms between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS between
groups
Leakage Current 15 mA maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Q1 – Q4: 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac,
Rating Q5, Q6: 10 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Q1 – Q4: 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac,
Rating Q5, Q6: 10 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush Q1 – Q4: 5 amps per half cycle, Q5, Q6: 14 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Fuse None
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Solenoid Typical Operations:
Voltage: 2A 0.6A 200,000
10A 4A 100,000
4A 1A 200,000

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 38

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.5.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UAR014

Figure 15

3.6 IC200UDD104
14-Point Micro PLC, (8) 24Vdc In, (6) 24Vdc
Source Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDD104 accepts eight DC inputs and provides four low-current
and two high-current DC transistor outputs. It uses +24Vdc nominal input power for PLC
operation.

3.6.1 DC Power
If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains its nominal voltage (24Vdc).
The power source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the
inrush current of the power supply and to maintain the nominal voltage level (see power
supply specifications for inrush requirements).

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 39

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.6.2 DC Inputs
The module’s eight configurable DC inputs can be used as standard or High-Speed Counter
inputs. Each input can have positive or negative logic characteristics. When used as standard
inputs, they are compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit
switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC DC supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input circuits at
about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device current
must not exceed 200 mA.

3.6.3 Outputs
All outputs are isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage.

The outputs can be configured as regular outputs or as outputs controlled by the High-
Speed Counters. Some outputs can be used as pulse train or pulse width modulation (PWM)
outputs.

External fusing should be provided to protect the outputs. Fast fuses are recommended.

The outputs share one common incoming DC supply and one common ground. The outputs
are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected against
negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.

3.6.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD104 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Four low-current and two high-current DC output circuits
High-Speed Counters Four Type A or One Type A and One Type B
Output Power Supplies 24Vdc for input circuits & user devices, 200mA max.
+5Vdc on pin 7 of Serial Port, 100mA max.
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10 ms at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1A maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10 ms for 1 A
Input Current 0.16 A typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 4W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 8
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 40

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc/24Vdc (24Vdc +10% / -43% input at V1,C1)
Maximum Load 1.0A per point (Q1 - Q2) at 24Vdc at 100% ON duration
0.75A per point (Q3 - Q6) at 24Vdc at 100 % ON duration
0.5A per point (Q3 - Q6) at 12Vdc at 100 % ON duration
Maximum Inrush Current Q1, Q2: 8A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Q3, Q4, Q5, Q6: 4A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage 100A maximum
Response OFF to ON: 0.1ms maximum (24Vdc, 0.2A), ON to OFF: 0.1ms
maximum (24Vdc, 0.2A)
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Fuse Outputs should be fused externally. Otherwise, a load short
damage the module output transistor, which is not user
replaceable.
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 15V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16bits
Outputs
Load Voltage 12/24V
Maximum Pulse/PWM 5kHz
Frequency
Number of Pulse Outputs 4
Types available HSC, PT, PWM

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 41

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.6.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD104

Figure 16

The maximum current that can be used for output points Q1 and Q2 is lower for ambient
temperatures above 50°C.

Figure 17

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 42

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.7 IC200UDD112
14 Point Micro PLC, (8) 12Vdc In, (6) 12Vdc
Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDD112 accepts eight DC inputs and provides four low-current
and two high-current DC transistor outputs. It uses +12Vdc nominal input power for PLC
operation.

3.7.1 DC Power
If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after
the voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains its nominal voltage. The
power source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the
inrush current of the power supply and to maintain the nominal voltage level (see power
supply specifications for inrush requirements).

3.7.2 DC Inputs
Eight configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard or High-
Speed Counter inputs. When used as standard inputs, they are compatible with a wide
range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC DC supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input circuits
at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 200 mA.

3.7.3 Transistor Outputs

Micro PLC IC200UDD112 has two high-current transistor outputs (Q1 and Q2) and four
low-current transistor outputs (Q3 to Q6). All outputs are isolated between field and logic
and are switching positive voltage.

The outputs can be configured as regular outputs or as outputs controlled by the High-
Speed Counters. Some outputs can be used as pulse train or pulse width modulation
(PWM) outputs.

External fusing should be provided to protect the outputs. Fast fuses are recommended.

The outputs share one common incoming DC supply and one common ground. The
outputs are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected
against negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive
loads.

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 43

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.7.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD112 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight 12Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Four low-current and two high-current DC output circuits
High-Speed Counters Four Type A or One Type A and One Type B
Output Power Supplies 12Vdc for input circuits & user devices, 200mA max. +5Vdc on
pin 7 of Serial Port, 100mA max.
DC Power Specifications
Range 9.6Vdc to 15Vdc
Hold-up 3.0mS
Inrush Current 9.2A typical
Inrush Time 200mS typical
Input Current 300mA typical at 12Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 3W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 8
Rated Input Voltage 12 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 volts DC
Input Current 9.0mA typical
Input Resistance 1.3 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 9.5Vdc minimum, OFF: 2.5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 6.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc –20%, +20%
Maximum Load 0.7A per circuit, 4A per common
Maximum Inrush Current 4A for 20mS
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage 0.1mA maximum
Response OFF to ON: 0.1mS maximum 12Vdc 0.2A, ON to OFF: 0.1mS
maximum 12Vdc 0.2A
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Fuse Outputs should be fused externally. Otherwise, a load short
may damage the module output transistor, which is not user
replaceable.
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 15V, OFF: 5V

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 44

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16bits
Outputs
Load Voltage 12V
Maximum Pulse/PWM Frequency 5kHz
Number of Pulse Outputs 4
Types available HSC, PT, PWM

3.7.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD112

Figure 18

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 45

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.8 IC200UDR001
14-Point Micro PLC, (8) 24Vdc In, (6) Relay Out,
120/240Vac Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDR001 accepts eight DC inputs and provides six normally-
open 2 Amp relay outputs that can control 5-30Vdc or 5-250Vac output devices. It uses
100Vac to 240Vac nominal input power.

3.8.1 DC Inputs
Eight configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard or High-
Speed Counter inputs. When used as standard inputs, they are compatible with a wide
range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC provides a +24Vdc supply that can be used for input devices and to power
the DC input circuits at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current
and external device current must not exceed 200 mA.

3.8.2 Relay Outputs

The six Form A relay outputs (SPST-single pole single throw) normally-open relay outputs
can control many types of devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. Power
for the internal relay coils is provided by the internal supply. An external source of AC or
DC power must be supplied to operate field devices.

The relay outputs can be configured as up to four counter outputs. They cannot be used as
Pulse Train or PWM outputs.

Connections and specifications for HSC outputs are the same as for standard relay outputs.

3.8.3 Micro PLC IC200UDR001 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Six normally open 2 Amp relay circuits
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B
Output Power Supplies 24Vdc for input circuits & user devices, 200mA max.
+5Vdc on pin 7 of Serial Port, 100mA max.
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10mS at 85 to 100Vac. 20mS at 100 to 264Vac
Inrush Time 2mS for 40A
Inrush Current 18 Amp maximum at 120Vac
30 Amp maximum at 200Vac
40 Amp maximum at 265Vac

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 46

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Input Current 0.06 Amp typical at 200Vac, 0.10 Amp typical at 100Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 13 VA
Isolation 1500Vac RMS field-side to logic (power supply input).
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 8
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS
between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Fuse None
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2A Solenoid 200,000
0.6A
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Available High-Speed Counters Four Type A or One Type A and One Type B
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 15V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16 bits
Outputs
Available Pulse Outputs None
Load Voltage Refer to relay output specifications

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 47

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.8.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDR001

Figure 19

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 48

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.9 IC200UDR002
14-Point Micro PLC, (8) 24Vdc In, (6) Relay Out,
24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDR002 accepts eight DC inputs and provides six normally open
2 Amp relay outputs that can control 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac output devices. It uses
+24Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

3.9.1 DC Power
The DC power supply requires more current at startup voltage (approximately 4Vdc) than
at rated input voltage. A minimum of 2.0 A is required to start up the DC power supply.

If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24Vdc. The 24Vdc power
source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage level (see power supply
specifications for inrush requirements).

3.9.2 DC Inputs
Eight configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs or
High-Speed Counter inputs. When used as standard inputs, they are compatible with a wide
range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC 24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input circuits
at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 200 mA.

3.9.3 Relay Outputs

Six Form A (SPST-single pole single throw) normally open relay outputs can control many
types of devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. Power for the internal
relay coils is provided by the internal supply. An external source of AC or DC power must be
supplied to operate field devices.

The relay outputs can be configured as HSC outputs. They cannot be used as Pulse Train or
PWM outputs. Connections and specifications for HSC outputs are the same as for standard
relay outputs.

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 49

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.9.4 Micro PLC IC200UDR002 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Six normally open 2 Amp relay circuits
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B
Output Power Supplies 24Vdc for input circuits & user devices, 200mA max. +5Vdc on
pin 7 of Serial Port, 100mA max.
DC Power Specifications
Range 24 –20%/+25%Vdc
Hold-up 10 ms at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 A maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10 ms for 1 A
Input Current 0.16 A typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 4W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 8
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS
between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2A Solenoid 200,000
0.6A

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 50

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 15V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16 bits
Outputs
Available Pulse Outputs None
Load Voltage Refer to relay specifications

3.9.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDR002

Figure 20

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 51

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.10 IC200UDR003
14-Point Micro PLC, (8) 12Vdc In, (6) Relay Out,
12Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDR003 accepts eight DC inputs and provides six normally open
2 Amp relay outputs that can control 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac output devices. It uses
+12Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

3.10.1 DC Power
The DC power supply requires more current at startup voltage (approximately 4Vdc) than
at rated input voltage. A minimum of 2.0 A is required to start up the DC power supply. If
configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24Vdc. The 24Vdc power
source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage level (see power supply
specifications for inrush requirements).

3.10.2 DC Inputs
Eight configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard or High-
Speed Counter inputs. When used as standard inputs, they are compatible with a wide range
of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC 12Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input circuits
at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 200 mA.

3.10.3 Relay Outputs

The six normally-open Form A relay outputs (SPST-single pole single throw) can control
many types of devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. Power for the
internal relay coils is provided by the internal supply. An external source of AC or DC power
must be supplied to operate field devices.

The relay outputs can be configured as HSC outputs. They cannot be used as Pulse Train or
PWM outputs. Connections and specifications for HSC outputs are the same as for standard
relay outputs.

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 52

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

3.10.4 Micro PLC IC200UDR003 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight 12Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Six normally open 2 Amp relay circuits
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B
Output Power Supplies 12Vdc for input circuits & user devices, 200mA max.
+5Vdc on pin 7 of Serial Port, 100mA max.
DC Power Specifications
Range 9.6Vdc - 15Vdc
Hold-up 3.0mS
Inrush Current 9.2A typical at 12Vdc
Inrush Time 200μS typical
Input Current 200mA typical at 12Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 3W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 8
Rated Input Voltage 12 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 volts DC
Input Current 9.0mA typical
Input Resistance 1.3 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 9.5Vdc minimum, OFF: 2.5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 6.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side
500 V RMS between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2A Solenoid Operations
0.6A 200,000

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 53

User Manual Chapter 3
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 9V, OFF: 2.5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16 bits
Outputs
Available Pulse Outputs None
Load Voltage Refer to relay specifications

3.10.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDR003

Figure 21

VersaMax 14-Point Micro PLCs 54

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 4: VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro

PLUS PLCs
This chapter describes the features, specifications, and field wiring for 20-point VersaMax
Micro and VersaMax Micro PLUS PLCs.

IC200UDD020 20-point, (12) 24Vdc In, (4) 24Vdc Outputs with ESCP, (4) 24Vdc Transistor
Outputs, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDD220 20-point, (12) 24Vdc In, (8) 24Vdc Transistor Outputs, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR020 20-point, (12) 24Vdc In, (8) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR120 20-point, (12) 24Vdc In, (8) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply

Note: Firmware releases 4.00 and later require a Micro PLUS CPU, which has enhanced memory.
Firmware versions 4.00 cannot be used with the earlier hardware versions.

• Micro and Micro PLUS PLCs support the same user logic memory size
• The specifications given in this chapter for Micro PLCs also apply to Micro PLUS
PLCs.

4.1 Features of VersaMax 20-Point Micro PLCs

Figure 22

All VersaMax Micro-20 PLCs feature:

• Removable screw-down “barrier-style” terminal strips with protective covers.

• Built-in serial communications port that supports SNP/ SNPX master and slave,
Modbus RTU master and slave, and Serial I/O.
• Removable Memory Pack Module available.
• Optional Port 2.
• Run/Stop mode switch that can be configured as a run/stop switch, a memory
protect switch, and also used for clearing faults when a fatal fault exists.
• Full-featured programming Instruction Set with floating point math. The application
program can be either Ladder Diagram (LD) or Instruction List (IL) format.

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 55

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

• 24K words of program memory, 32K words of registers.

• Flash memory (ROM) for non-volatile program storage and for system firmware.
• Configurable to read configuration and application program at power up from either
RAM or flash memory (ROM).
• Capacitor backup for RAM and the Time-of-Day clock for at least 30 minutes at 25°
C
• Optional lithium battery backup for RAM and real-time clock.
• Enhanced High-Speed Counter / Pulse Train commands for Jogging, Blending, and
Homing, plus configurable 32-bit Counters /PTO/ and 32-bit function blocks.

Figure 23

4.1.1 Run/Stop Switch

The Run/Stop switch can be configured as a run/stop switch or a memory protect switch and
used for clearing faults when a fatal fault exists.

4.1.2 Ports
Port 1 is a built-in RS-232 serial port with an RJ-45 connector.

A second port can be added to a Micro-20 PLC using one of the port Option Modules
described in Chapter 14:. If a second port is installed, both ports can be used for
programming. Only one port can be used at a time for programming, but both ports can be
used for monitoring at the same time.

Port 1 and the optional Port 2 are individually configurable for SNP master/slave, RTU
master/slave, and Serial I/O protocols. Both 4-wire and 2-wire RTU are supported when the
RS-485 Port Option module is installed as port 2. Port 2 does not support hardware flow
control. When either port is being used for RTU slave, it automatically switches to SNP slave
mode when that port is being used by the programmer. If a port is configured for Serial I/O,

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 56

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

RTU Master, or SNP Master operation, that port defaults to SNP slave and automatically
reverts to SNP slave when the CPU is in Stop mode.

Either port can be software-configured to set up communications between the CPU and
various serial devices. An external device can obtain power from the port if it requires
200mA or less at 5Vdc.

4.1.3 Analog Inputs

The RS232 Option Module (IC200USB001) or the RS485 Option Module (IC200USB002) can
provide two 0-10V analog inputs. See Chapter 14: for more information about option
modules. The two inputs can be used to adjust the values in analog registers %AI016 (input
1) and %AI017 (input 2). An example use for the analog inputs would be to set threshold
values for use in logical relationships with other inputs/outputs.

4.1.4 Removable Terminal Strips

The removable terminal assemblies are protected by hinged covers. After turning off power
to the Micro PLC, a terminal assembly and attached field wiring can be separated from the
Micro PLC by removing two screws.

4.1.5 Status LEDs

LEDs on the Micro PLC provide quick visual verification of operating status. In addition to
LEDs for Power, OK, and Run mode, there is an LED for each I/O point.

4.1.6 Backup Battery

The Micro PLC uses a large value capacitor to provide memory retention current to the
System/User RAM and the Time-of-Day clock when the power supply is either not present
or not powered up. The capacitor retains memory contents for at least 30 minutes.

To maintain memory for longer than this, a replaceable battery assembly can be installed in
the battery holder, as described in Chapter 15:. The Micro PLC reports the battery state to
the PLC Fault Table and also uses Status Bits %SA011 and %S0014 to indicate the battery
state.

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 57

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

4.2 General Specifications of 20-Point VersaMax

Micro PLCs
Module Dimensions Height: 90mm (3.6 inches)
Depth: 76mm (3.0 inches)
Width: 150mm (6.0 inches)
Typical Scan Rate 1.7 ms/K for Boolean logic (see Appendix A:)
Real Time Clock accuracy (for Timer ±0.5%
contacts and Timer function blocks)
Time-of-Day Clock accuracy ±5 sec/day @10°C, ±5 sec/day @25°C, and
±11 sec/day @ 55°C or across full temperature range
Maximum number of slave devices per 8 (can be increased with a repeater)
RS-485 network
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 435mA maximum
(for input circuits and user devices)
+5Vdc output of Serial Ports 200mA per port, 400mA total for both ports, maximum

4.3 High-Speed Counters

All VersaMax Micro PLCs with DC power can be configured to provide built-in High-Speed
Counter and pulse operation.

When configured for High-Speed Counter operation, inputs can be set up as:

• Up to four Type A Counters or

• One Type A and one Type B Counter.
• Up to four Type A_32 Counters or
• One Type A and one Type B_32 Counter
Each counter provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 100 kHz for industrial
control applications such as meter proving, turbine flow meter, velocity measurement,
material handling, motion control, and process control.

Each counter can be enabled independently. Type A counters can be configured for up or
down counting (default is up) and for positive or negative edge detection (default is
positive). The type B counter provides an A Quad B counting function.

See Chapter 18: for information about High-Speed Counter features.

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 58

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

4.4 IC200UDD020
20-Point Micro PLC, (12) 24Vdc In, (4) 24Vdc
Out with ESCP, (4) LCDC Out, 24Vdc Power
Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDD020 accepts twelve DC inputs and provides four ESCP
outputs and four 24Vdc low-current outputs. It uses +24Vdc nominal input power for PLC
operation.

4.4.1 DC Power
If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains its nominal voltage (24Vdc).
The power source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the
inrush current of the power supply and to maintain the nominal voltage level (see power
supply specifications for inrush requirements).

4.4.2 DC Inputs
The twelve configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs.
Eight of these inputs can be used for High-Speed Counter inputs. When used as standard
inputs, they are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit
switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 435 mA.

4.4.3 DC Outputs
Outputs 1 – 4 can be used as standard, High-Speed Counter, Pulse-Width Modulated, Pulse
Train Outputs, or Pulse Train Outputs with Ramping. All standard outputs are all source-
type. Outputs can be used to switch devices like valves, lamps or contactors.

Outputs 5 – 8 provide Electronic Short-Circuit Protection.

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 59

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

4.4.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD020 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Twelve 24Vdc positive or negative logic inputs
Outputs Eight 24Vdc outputs. Outputs 5-8 with ESCP
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B, or four
Type A_32, or one Type A_32 and one Type B_32
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I 3, I 5, I 7: 8mA typical; Other inputs: 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I 3, I 5, I 7: 2.7 kΩ; Other inputs: 4.7 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other Inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA
minimum
Response Time 0.5ms to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as
HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between
groups
Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc / 24Vdc
External Power Supply 12/24Vdc –10%, +20%
Maximum Load Current 0.5A per point (Q1 – Q4) at 24Vdc at 100 % ON duration
0.7A per point (Q5 – Q8) at 24Vdc at 100 % ON duration
Minimum Switching Current 10mA
Maximum Inrush Current Q1-Q4: 2A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Q5-Q8: 4A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage current 0.1mA maximum
Response Time OFF to ON, ON to OFF: 1ms maximum (24Vdc)
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side,
500V RMS between groups
Fuse None, outputs Q5 – Q8 are ESCP protected

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 60

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Under-voltage shutdown Q5 – Q8: 5V minimum, 8V maximum
DC short circuit current Q1 – Q4: 5A typical
Q5 – Q8: 0.7A minimum, 2A maximum
Peak short circuit current Q5 – Q8: 4A maximum
Delay time of peak short circuit current 100 µS
Delay time of current limit 100 µS
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 100kHz
Input Voltage ON : 18V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% of duty cycle at 100kHz
Count Registers 16/32 bits
Outputs
Load Voltage 12/24Vdc
Maximum Pulse/Pulse Train with PWM and PTO: 65kHz
Ramping/PWM Frequency Pulse Train with Ramping: 65kHz
Types available Up to four HSC, PTO, PTO with Ramping and/or PWM
outputs

4.4.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD020

Figure 24

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 61

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

4.5 IC200UDD220
20-Point Micro PLC, (12) 24Vdc In, (8) 24Vdc
Out (Sink), 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDD220 accepts twelve DC inputs and provides eight DC
outputs. It uses +24Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

4.5.1 DC Power
If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24Vdc. The 24Vdc power
source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage level (see power supply
specifications for inrush requirements).

4.5.2 DC Inputs
Twelve configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs.
Eight of these inputs can be used for High-Speed Counter inputs. When used as standard
inputs, they are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit
switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 435mA.

4.5.3 DC Outputs
Micro PLC IC200UDD220 has eight Sink-type DC outputs. All outputs are isolated between
field and logic and are switching positive voltage. The outputs are able to drive high inrush
currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected against negative voltage pulses. This
makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.

DC outputs can be used as standard, High-Speed Counter, Pulse-Width Modulated, Pulse

Train Outputs, or Pulse Train Outputs with Ramping.

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 62

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

4.5.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD220 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Twelve 24Vdc positive or negative logic inputs
Outputs Eight transistor outputs, 24Vdc.
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B, or four Type
A_32, or one Type A_32 and one Type B_32
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I 3, I 5, I 7: 8mA typical; Other inputs: 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I 3, I 5, I 7: 2.7 kΩ; Other inputs: 4.7 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other Inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 0.5ms to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc/24Vdc
External Power Supply 12/24Vdc –10%, +20%
Maximum Load Current 0.5A per point (Q1 – Q8) at 24Vdc
Minimum Switching Current 10mA
Maximum Inrush Current Q1-Q8: 2A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Output Voltage Drop 0.3Vdc maximum
OFF state leakage current 0.1mA maximum
Response Time OFF to ON, ON to OFF: 1ms maximum @ 24Vdc
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side, 500V RMS between
groups
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 100kHz
Input Voltage ON : 18V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% of duty cycle at 100kHz
Count Registers 16/32 bits

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 63

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Outputs
Load Voltage 12/24Vdc
Maximum Pulse/PWM PWM and PTO: 65kHz
Frequency Pulse Train with Ramping: 65kHz
Types available Up to four HSC, PTO, PTO, and/or PWM outputs

4.5.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD220

Figure 25

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 64

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

4.6 IC200UDR020
20-Point Micro PLC, (12) 24Vdc In, (8) Relay
Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDR020 accepts twelve DC inputs and provides eight normally
open 2 Amp relay outputs. It uses +24Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

4.6.1 DC Inputs
Twelve configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs.
Eight of these inputs can be used for High-Speed Counter inputs. When used as standard
inputs, they are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit
switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 435mA.

4.6.2 Relay Outputs

The eight normally open Form A relay outputs (SPST-single pole single throw) can control
many types of load devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. The switching
capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps. An external source of AC or DC power must be
supplied to operate field devices.

The relay outputs can be configured as up to four HSC outputs. Relay outputs cannot be
used as Pulse Train or PWM outputs.

4.6.3 Micro PLC IC200UDR020 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Twelve 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Eight normally open 2 amp relay circuits
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B, or four Type
A_32, or one Type A_32 and one Type B_32
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 435mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
+5Vdc output of Serial Port Serial Port 1, pin 7:100mA maximum
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 65

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I3, I5, I7: 8mA typical; other inputs 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I3, I5, I7: 2.7 kΩ; other inputs: 4.7kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA maximum
Response Time 0.5ms to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS
between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 1.5A,10ms
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2.0A Solenoid 200,000
0.6A
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 100kHz
Input Voltage ON: 18V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% of duty cycle at 100kHz
Count Registers 16/32 bits
Outputs
Load Voltage Q1: 5/12/24V, Q2-Q4: See relay output specifications
Type available Up to four HSC outputs. Pulse outputs are not available.

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 66

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

4.6.4 Wiring Diagram, PLC IC200UDR020

Figure 26

4.7 IC200UDR120
20-Point Micro PLC, (12) 24Vdc In, (8) Relay
Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDR120 accepts twelve DC inputs and provides eight normally
open 2 Amp relay outputs. It uses 100Vac to 240Vac nominal input power for PLC operation.

4.7.1 DC Inputs
Twelve configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs.
Eight of these inputs can be used for High-Speed Counter inputs. When used as standard
inputs, they are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit
switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 435mA.

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 67

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

4.7.2 Relay Outputs

The eight normally open Form A relay outputs (SPST-single pole single throw) can control
many types of load devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. The switching
capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps. An external source of AC or DC power must be
supplied to operate field devices.

The relay outputs can be configured as up to four HSC outputs. Relay outputs cannot be
used as Pulse Train or PWM outputs.

4.7.3 Micro PLC IC200UDR120, Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Twelve 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Eight normally open 2 amp relay circuits
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B, or four Type
A_32, or one Type A_32 and one Type B_32
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 435mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
+5Vdc output of Serial Port Serial Port 1, pin 7:100mA maximum
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10mS at 85 to 100Vac, 20mS at 100 to 265Vac
Inrush Current 30 Amp maximum at 200Vac, 40 Amp maximum at 265Vac
Inrush Time 2 ms for 40Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 200Vac 0.10 Amp typical at 100Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 26 VA
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I3, I5, I7: 8mA typical; other inputs 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I3, I5, I7: 2.7 kΩ; other inputs: 4.7kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA maximum
Response Time 0.5ms to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS
between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 68

User Manual Chapter 4
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 9.4A, 20mSec
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2.0A Solenoid 200,000
0.6A
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 100kHz
Input Voltage ON: 18V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% of duty cycle at 100kHz
Count Registers 16/32 bits
Outputs
Load Voltage Q1: 5/12/24V, Q2-Q4: See relay output specifications
Type available Up to four HSC outputs. Pulse outputs are not available.

4.7.4 Wiring Diagram, PLC IC200UDR120

Figure 27

VersaMax 20-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 69

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 5: Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete

Points and 3 Analog Channels
This chapter describes the features and specifications of the VersaMax Micro PLCs with 23
Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels. It also provides additional information about
analog operation and calibration.

IC200UAL004 Micro PLC with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels:

(13) 12Vdc In, (10) Relay Out,
(2) Analog In and (1) Analog Out, 12Vdc Power Supply

IC200UAL005 Micro PLC with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels:

(13) 24Vdc In, (1) 24Vdc Out, (9) Relay Out,
(2) Analog In and (1) Analog Out, 24Vdc Power Supply

IC200UAL006 Micro PLC with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels:

(13) 24Vdc In, (1) 24Vdc Out, (9) Relay Out,
(2) Analog In and (1) Analog Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply

5.1 VersaMax 23 Discrete / 3 Analog Micro PLC

Features
Figure 28

• Supports up to four Expansion Units in any combination.

• Four removable screw-down “barrier-style” terminal strips with protective covers.
• Two Serial communications ports. Port 1 (RS-232) supports SNP/SNPX slave
protocols. Port 2 (RS-485) supports SNP/ SNPX master and slave, RTU master and
slave, and Serial I/O.
• Run/Stop mode switch that can be configured as a run/stop switch, a memory
protect switch, and also used for clearing faults when a fatal fault exists.
• Time-of-Day Clock.

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 70

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

• Two analog potentiometers.

• Full-featured programming Instruction Set with floating point math. The application
program can be either Ladder Diagram (LD) or Instruction List (IL) format.
• 9K words of program memory, 2048 words of registers.
• Flash memory (ROM) for non-volatile program storage and for system firmware.
• Configurable to read configuration at power-up from either RAM or flash memory
(ROM). Can also be configured to read application program from flash at power-up.
• Capacitor backs up RAM and the Time-of-Day clock for at least 30 minutes.
• Optional lithium battery backup for RAM and real-time clock.

5.2 General Specifications for 23-Point VersaMax

Micro PLCs
Item Description
Weight 600 grams (1.32lbs)
Module Dimensions Height: 90mm (3.6 inches)
Depth: 76mm (3.0 inches)
Width: 150mm (6.0 inches)
Typical Scan Rate 1.1 ms/K for Boolean logic (see Appendix A:)
Real Time Clock accuracy ±0.5%
(for Timer contacts and Timer
function blocks)
Time-of-Day Clock accuracy ±5 sec/day @10°C, ±5 sec/day @25°C, and
±11 sec/day @55°C or across full temperature range
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B
Maximum number of slave 8 (can be increased with a repeater)
devices per RS-485 network
+5Vdc Output of Serial Ports Port 1, pin 7: 100mA maximum3
Port 2, pin 5: 100mA maximum3
Lithium battery Storage: Up to 5 years typical at 30°C
(IC200ACC403) Installed: Up to 3 years typical at 55°C
4 months battery backup time (powered down) minimum at 55°C

3
Combined port 1 and port 2 total not to exceed 100mA max.

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 71

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

5.2.1 Run/Stop Switch

The Run/Stop switch can be configured as a run/stop switch, a memory protect switch,
and used for clearing faults when a fatal fault exists.

Figure 29

5.2.2 Serial Ports

Port 1 is an RS-232 serial port with an RJ-45 connector.

Port 2, located behind a removable door on the front of the Micro PLC, is an RS-485 serial
port with a DB-15 connector.

Both ports can be used for programming. Only one port can be used at a time for
programming, but both ports can be used for monitoring at the same time. Port 1 uses SNP
slave protocol. Port 2 is software-configurable for SNP master/slave RTU slave or Serial I/O
operation. CPUs with firmware version 2.02 or later support Modbus RTU Master on port 2.
4-wire and 2-wire RTU are supported. If Port 2 is being used for RTU, it automatically
switches to SNP slave mode if necessary. Port 2 defaults to SNP slave and automatically
reverts to SNP slave when the CPU is in Stop mode, if configured for Serial I/O.

Either port can be software-configured to set up communications between the CPU and
various serial devices. An external device can obtain power from both ports if it requires
100mA or less at 5Vdc.

5.2.3 Analog Potentiometers

The two potentiometers can be used to adjust the values in analog registers %AI016 and
%AI017. An example use would be to set thresholds for use in logical relationships with other
inputs/outputs.

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 72

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

5.2.4 Removable Terminal Strips

The removable terminal assemblies are protected by hinged covers. After turning off power
to the Micro PLC, a terminal assembly and attached field wiring can be separated from the
Micro PLC by removing two screws.

5.2.5 Status LEDs

LEDs for Power, OK, and Run mode, plus individual LEDs for each I/O point.

5.2.6 Backup Battery

The Micro PLC uses a large value capacitor to provide memory retention current to the
System/User RAM and the Time-of-Day clock when the power supply is either not present
or not powered up. The capacitor retains memory contents for at least 30 minutes.

To maintain memory for longer than this, a lithium coin cell assembly (IC200ACC403) can
be installed in the battery holder. The Micro PLC reports the battery state to the PLC Fault
Table and also uses Status Bits %SA011 and %S0014 to indicate the battery state.

5.3 High-Speed Counters

These VersaMax Micro PLCs can be configured to provide built-in high-speed counter
operation.

When configured for High-Speed Counter operation, inputs can be set up as:

• Up to four High-Speed Counters or

• One Type A and one Type B Counter.
Each counter provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 10kHz for industrial
control applications such as meter proving, turbine flowmeter, velocity measurement,
material handling, motion control, and process control.

Each counter can be enabled independently. Type A counters can be configured for up or
down counting (default is up) and for positive or negative edge detection (default is
positive). The type B counter provides an A Quad B counting function.

The relay outputs of IC200UAL004 and IC200UAL005 can be configured as up to four

counter outputs. They cannot be used as Pulse Train or PWM outputs.

5.3.1 Analog I/O

All VersaMax 23-Point Micro PLCs provide two analog input channels that can be configured
to accept inputs from 0 to +10V or from 0 to 20mA or 4 to 20mA input signals. They also
have one analog output configurable for the same voltage or current ranges. See Chapter
15 for information about configuring voltage/current operation and range. See Chapter 16
for details of analog operation, automatic gain and offset adjustment, automatic program
reference configuration, and calibration procedures.

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 73

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Analog I/O Specifications

Input and output ranges 0 to 10V (10.24V maximum)
0 to 20mA (20.5mA maximum)
4 to 20mA (20.5mA maximum)
Resolution 12 bits over 0 to 10V range (1 LSB=2.5mV)
12 bits over 0 to 20mA range (1 LSB=5µA)
11+ bits over 4 to 20mA range (1 LSB=5µA)
Accuracy ±1% of full scale over full operating temperature range
Analog Inputs 2, differential
Factory calibrated to: 2.50mV per count on 0 to 10V range
5.00µA per count on 0 to 20mA and 4 to 20mA ranges
Linearity ±3 LSB maximum
Isolation non-isolated
Common mode voltage ±200 V maximum
Current input impedance 249 Ω
Voltage input impedance 100 kΩ
Input filter time 20ms to reach 1% error for step input
Analog Output 1, single-ended, non-isolated
Current: maximum terminal voltage 10V (at 20mA output)
user load range 0 to 500 Ω
output load capacitance 2000 pF maximum
output load inductance 1 Henry maximum
Voltage: output loading 2 kΩ minimum at 10 volts
output load capacitance 1 µF maximum

5.4 IC200UAL004
Micro PLC, 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog
Channels:
(13) 12Vdc In, (10) Relay Out, (2) Analog In, (1)
Analog Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UAL004 accepts thirteen 12Vdc inputs and two analog inputs. It
provides ten normally open 2 Amp relay outputs and one analog output. It uses +12Vdc
nominal input power.

5.4.1 DC Inputs
Thirteen configurable 12Vdc inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard or
High-Speed Counter inputs. Inputs are compatible with a wide range of devices, such as
pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 74

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

5.4.2 Normally Open Relay Outputs

Ten Form A relay outputs (SPST-single pole single throw) can control many types of load
devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. The switching capacity of each
relay output is 2 amps. An external source of AC or DC power must be supplied for field
devices. External fusing is recommended to protect the relay contacts. Relay outputs can be
configured as regular outputs or as outputs controlled by High-Speed Counters. They
cannot be used as Pulse Train or PWM outputs.

5.4.3 DC Power Supply

The DC power supply requires more current at startup voltage (approximately 4Vdc) than
at rated input voltage. A minimum of 2.0 A is required to start up the DC power supply.

If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 12Vdc. The 12Vdc power
source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain a 12Vdc voltage level (see power supply
specifications for inrush requirements).

5.4.4 Micro PLC IC200UAL004 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs 13 DC inputs and 2 Analog inputs
Outputs 10 relay outputs and 1 analog output
+12Vdc Output Power Supply 200 mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B
DC Power Specifications
Range 9.6Vdc - 15Vdc
Hold-up 3.0mS
Inrush Current 9.6A typical at 12Vdc
Inrush Time 200mS typical
Input Current 480mA typical at 12Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 8W
Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 13
Rated Input Voltage 12 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 volts DC
Input Current 9.0mA typical
Input Impedance 1.3 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 9.5Vdc minimum, OFF: 2.5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 6.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms (user configurable) as regular input; 100µs as HSC
input

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 75

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS
between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 1 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
2A Solenoid 200,000
0.6A
High-Speed Counter Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 9V, OFF: Off: 2.5V
Count Registers 16 bits
Available Pulse Outputs None

5.4.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UAL004

Figure 30

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 76

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

5.5 IC200UAL005
Micro PLC, 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog
Channels:
(13) 24Vdc In, (1) 24Vdc Out, (9) Relay Out, (2)
Analog In, (1) Analog Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UAL005 accepts thirteen 24Vdc inputs and two analog inputs. It
provides one 24Vdc output, nine normally-open 2 Amp relay outputs, and one analog
output. It uses +24Vdc nominal input power.

5.5.1 DC Inputs
Thirteen configurable 24Vdc inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard or
High-Speed Counter inputs. Inputs are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such
as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The module provides +24Vdc output power available for field devices.

5.5.2 DC Output (Q1)

The DC output circuit (Q1) can be configured to be a standard, High-Speed Counter, Pulse
Train or PWM output.

5.5.3 Normally Open Relay Outputs

Nine Form A relay outputs (SPST-single pole single throw). The nine isolated 2-Amp,
normally open outputs can control many types of user-supplied load devices such as motor
starters, solenoids, and indicators. The switching capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps.
AC or DC power to operate field devices must be supplied from an external source. External
fusing is recommended to protect the relay contacts. Relay outputs can be configured as
regular outputs or as outputs controlled by High-Speed Counters. They cannot be used as
Pulse Train or PWM outputs.

5.5.4 DC Power Supply

The DC power supply requires more current at startup voltage (approximately 4Vdc) than
at rated input voltage. A minimum of 2.0 A is required to start up the DC power supply.

If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24Vdc. The 24Vdc power
source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage level (see power supply
specifications for inrush requirements).

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 77

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

5.5.5 Micro PLC IC200UAL005 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs 13 DC inputs and 2 analog inputs
Outputs 9 relay outputs, 1 analog output, 1 24Vdc output
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200 mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
DC Power Specifications
Range 24 -20%, +25%Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 A
Input Current 0.30 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 8W
High-Speed Counter Specifications
Available High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 15V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16 bits
High-Speed Counter Outputs Up to four HSC outputs or one Pulse/PWM output plus three
HSC outputs.
Load Voltage Q1: 5/12/24V
Maximum Pulse/PWM Frequency (Q1 only) 5kHz
Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 13
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms (user configurable) as regular input;
100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
DC Output (Q1) Specifications
Output logic Positive Logic
Operating Voltage 24Vdc / 12Vdc / 5Vdc
Voltage Range 24Vdc, +20%, -80%
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 0.75A at 24Vdc

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 78

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 0.75A at 24Vdc
0.5A at 12Vdc
0.25A at 5Vdc
Output Voltage Drop 0.3Vdc maximum
Response ON 0.1ms maximum (24Vdc, 0.2A)
OFF 0.1ms maximum (24Vdc, 0.2A)
OFF state leakage 0.1mA maximum
Isolation 1500Vac between field side and logic side
500Vac between groups
Fuse Output should be fused externally. Otherwise, a load short can
damage the module output transistor, which is not user
replaceable.
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side
500 V RMS between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
On Response Time 15 ms maximum
Off Response Time 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2A Solenoid 200,000
0.6A

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 79

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

5.5.6 Wiring Diagram, IC200UAL005

Figure 31

24VDC Power Supply 2 Voltage or Current Analog Inputs,

Connect Jumper in Current Mode

+ +

- -
24+ I2 I4 I5 I7 C2 I9 I 11 I 13 IN 1+ IN 2- IN2JP

24- I1 I3 C1 I6 I8 C3 I 10 I 12 IN 1- IN1JP IN 2+

24VDC, 200mA Power Output 250 250

-V Q1 V1 Q3 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9 C6 IO VO

+V C1 Q2 Q4 C2 C3 C4 C5 Q10 IC VC

FUSE
FUSE
FUSE

FUSE
FUSE
FUSE
FUSE

FUSE

FUSE
FUSE

LOAD
LOAD
+

LOAD
LOAD
LOAD

LOAD
LOAD
LOAD
LOAD

LOAD

LOAD
LOAD

-
+
GND
1 Analog
Power Source
- Voltage or
DC Power AC or DC AC or DC Power Sources Current Output
24VDC
Source Power Source

The resistors illustrated are internal.

5.6 IC200UAL006
Micro PLC, 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog
Channels:
(13) 24Vdc In, (1) 24Vdc Out, (9) Relay Out, (2)
Analog In, (1) Analog Out, 120/240Vac Power
Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UAL006 accepts thirteen DC inputs and two analog inputs. It
provides one DC output, nine normally open 2 Amp relay outputs, and one analog output.
It uses 100Vac to 240Vac nominal input power.

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 80

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

5.6.1 DC Inputs
Thirteen configurable 24Vdc inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard or
High-Speed Counter inputs. Inputs are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such
as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches. Power to operate field
devices and the input circuits is supplied by an isolated +24Vdc supply.

5.6.2 DC Output (Q1)

Output circuit Q1 is a 24Vdc transistor output. It can be used as a normal DC output or as a
High-Speed Counter-controlled output, Pulse Train output, or Pulse Width Modulation
(PWM) output.

5.6.3 Normally Open Relay Outputs

Nine isolated 2-amp, normally open Form A relay outputs (SPST-single pole single throw can
control many types of user-supplied load devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and
indicators. The switching capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps. AC or DC power to
operate field devices must be supplied from an external source. External fusing is
recommended to protect the relay contacts. Relay outputs can be configured as regular
outputs or as outputs controlled by High-Speed Counters. They cannot be used as Pulse
Train or PWM outputs.

5.6.4 Micro PLC IC200UAL006 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs 13 DC inputs and 2 Analog inputs
Outputs 1 DC output, 9 relay outputs, 1 analog output
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200 mA maximum
(for input circuits and user devices)
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10 ms at 85 to 100Vac, 20mS at 100 to 265Vac
Inrush Time 2mS for 40A
Inrush Current 35 Amp maximum at 200Vac
46 Amp maximum at 265Vac
Input Current 0.13 Amp typical at 200Vac
0.20 Amp typical at 100Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 34 VA
Isolation 1500Vac rms field-side to logic (power supply input).
Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 13
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 81

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms (user configurable) as regular input;
100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between
groups
DC Output Specifications
Output logic Positive Logic
Operating Voltage 24Vdc / 12Vdc / 5Vdc
Voltage Range 24Vdc, +20%, -80%
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 0.75A at 24Vdc
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 0.75A at 24Vdc
0.5A at 12Vdc
0.25A at 5Vdc
Output Voltage Drop 0.3Vdc maximum
Response Time ON: 0.1ms maximum (24Vdc, 0.2A), OFF: 0.1ms maximum
(24Vdc, 0.2A)
OFF state leakage 0.1mA maximum
Isolation 1500Vac between field side and logic side, 500Vac between
groups
Fuse Output should be fused externally. Otherwise, a load short
can damage the module output transistor, which is not user
replaceable.
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS
between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2A Solenoid Operations
0.6A 200,000

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 82

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
High-Speed Counter Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 15V, OFF: Off: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16 bits
Available Pulse Outputs None
Outputs
Load Voltage Q1: 5/12/24V
Maximum Pulse/PWM Frequency (Q1 only) 5kHz
Types available Up to four HSC outputs or one Pulse/PWM output plus three
HSC outputs.

5.6.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UAL006

Figure 32

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 83

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

5.7 Analog Operation

This section explains how a VersaMax Micro PLC with analog channels processes analog
data.

5.7.1 Analog I/O Parameters

Each analog channel can be configured to operate in either voltage or current mode. If
current mode operation is selected, the range can then be configured as either 4-20mA or
0-20mA.

Parameter Choices Default Value

Voltage or current mode Voltage, Current Voltage
Current range selection 4–20mA, 0–20mA 4–20mA

5.7.2 Input/Output Values Compared to Process Data

The Micro PLC processes analog channels using gain and offset values for both current and
voltage mode operation. Default gain and offset values are loaded into the Micro PLC flash
memory at the factory. For these 23-point Micro PLCs (only) gain and offset can be
recalibrated if necessary, as explained later in this section.

The table below shows the relationship between the analog input and output values used
by the application program, and the actual analog input or output for each mode. These
values include the automatic adjustments for offset and gain.

In this This is the Analog This is the Equivalent For the Default
Configured Signal Range Process Data %AI or Calibration, the Value in
Mode: %AQ Range the
%AI or %AQ Reference
Equals:
Voltage 0 to +10V 0 to 10,000mV 0 to 32000 3.2 x mV
Current 0 to 20mA 0 to 20,000µA 0 to 32000 1.6 x µA
Current 4 to 20mA 4,000 to 20,000µA 0 to 32000 2 x µA –8000

The following pages explain how the Micro PLC performs the necessary data conversions
between the analog signal levels and the numeric values used by the application program.

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 84

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

5.7.3 Analog Input Processing

The Micro PLC processes analog input channels with a 12-bit successive-approximation A/D
converter. It converts the analog value into a digital count, calculates the %AI value as
described below, then places the result into the configured %AI input reference.

Figure 33

Automatic Conversion of Analog Voltage or Current to Counts

In voltage mode, the Micro PLC first converts the 0 to 10,000mV input signal to a count in
the range of 0 to 4,000. The fixed multiplier for this conversion is 2.5.

In current mode, the Micro PLC first converts the 0 to 20,000µA input signal to a count value
in the range of 0 to 4,000. The fixed multiplier for this conversion is 5. The conversion for
both current modes (0-20mA and 4-20mA) is the same.

Automatic Gain and Offset Adjustment for Analog Inputs

The Micro PLC then converts the A/D converter's input count value from the range of 0 to
4000 to a final %AI input value in the range of 0 to 32,000. It multiplies the count value by a
stored gain value and adds an offset value to get the final analog input ($AI):

(input count X Gain) + Offset = %AI value

The default input gain used for this conversion is 8 (32000 / 4000) and the default offset is
0. These can be changed as described later. Any calculated value above 32,767 is clamped
at that maximum value. Any calculated value less than 0 is clamped at 0.

Analog Input Conversion Summary

The table below summarizes the conversion of voltage or current inputs to counts and then
to %AI values.

Input Signal Conversi A/D Converter Default Default %AI

on Factor Value Gain Offset Range
Voltage Mode (0–10,000mV) 2.5 0–4000 counts 8 0 0–32,000
Current Mode (0–20mA) 5 0–4000 counts 8 0 0–32,000
or (4–20mA)

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 85

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

5.7.4 Analog Output Processing

To generate the analog output signal, the Micro PLC converts the value in the %AQ output
reference into a count value for the 12-bit D/A converter, which then drives the analog
output.

Figure 34

Automatic Gain and Offset Adjustment for Analog Outputs

The application's %AQ output range of 0 to 32000 corresponds to the D/A converter's
output count range of 0 to 4000. The Micro PLC first multiplies the %AQ value from the
program by a gain value and adds a predefined offset to produce the count value for the D/A
converter:

(%AQ X Gain) + Offset = D/A count

Any calculated value that exceeds 4095 (212-1) is clamped at that maximum value. Any
calculated value less than 0 is clamped at 0. The range 0 to 4095 corresponds to %AQ values
between 0 and 32,767.

The default output gain used for this conversion is 0.125 (4000 / 32000) and the default
offset is 0. These can be changed as described later.

Automatic Conversion of Counts to Analog Voltage or Current

In voltage mode, the D/A converter then converts the count value in the range of 0 to 4,000
counts to an analog signal from 0 to 10,000mV. The output voltage gain (ratio) for this
conversion is 2.5.

In current mode, the D/A converter converts the count value to an analog signal from 0 to
20,000µA. The output current gain for this conversion is 5. The conversion for both current
modes (0-20mA and 4-20mA) is the same.

Analog Output Data Conversion Summary

The table below summarizes the conversion of %AQ values to counts and then to voltage or
current levels.

%AQ Range Default Gain, %AQ Default D/A Converter Conversion Output Signal
to Counts Offset Range Factor
0– 32,000 0.125 0 0–4,000 counts 2.5 Voltage Mode (0–10,000mV)
0–32,000 0.125 0 0–4,000 counts 5 Current Mode (0–20mA)
or (4–20mA)

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 86

User Manual Chapter 5
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

5.7.5 Adjusting the Calibration of Analog Channels

For the 23-point Micro PLCs with analog channels, it is possible to adjust the calibration of
the analog channels as described below. Analog channels on Expansion Units and 10-point
Nano PLCs cannot be recalibrated. A set of default gains and offsets is maintained in the PLC
firmware if you want to restore the original values.

To perform the calibration procedures, you will need a precision analog meter (1mV voltage
accuracy and 1µA current accuracy). Do not try the procedures in this section unless you are
familiar with the operation of D/A and A/D converters.

Recalibrating Input Channels

1. Apply a reference voltage or current at a low range to the input. (The reference signal
must be measured accurately by a precision analog meter.) Record the value.
2. For the channel being calibrated, read the %AI register and record the low value.
3. Apply a reference voltage or current at a high range to the input. Precisely measure
the reference signal and record the value.
4. For the channel being calibrated, read the %AI register and record the high value.
5. Store the calculated gain and offset values in RAM or flash memory using SVCREQ
functions 34 and 35 as instructed in Chapter 23:.
The Micro PLC automatically calculates the calibration gain and offset:

Recalibrating Output Channels

1. Write a low value to the %AQ register.
2. At the output, measure the voltage or current using a precision analog meter and
record the value.
3. Write a high value to the %AQ register.
4. At the output, measure the voltage or current using a precision analog meter and
record the value.
5. Store the calculated gain and offset values in RAM or flash memory using SVCREQ
functions 34 and 35 as instructed in Chapter 23:.
6. The Micro PLC automatically calculates the calibration gain and offset:

Micro PLCs with 23 Discrete Points and 3 Analog Channels 87

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 6: VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs

This chapter describes the features, specifications, and field wiring of these VersaMax
Micro PLCs:

IC200UAA007 28 Point Micro PLC, (16) 120Vac In, (12) 120Vac Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UAR028 28 Point Micro PLC, (16) 120Vac In, (2) Relay Out at 10 Amps, (10) Relay Out at
2 Amps, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UDD110 28 Point Micro PLC, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDD120 28 Point Micro PLC, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDD212 28 Point Micro PLC, (16) 12Vdc In, (12) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR005 28 Point Micro PLC, (16) 24Vdc In, (1) 24Vdc Out, (11) Relay Out, 120/240Vac
Power Supply
IC200UDR006 28 Point Micro PLC, (16) 12Vdc In, (12) Relay Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR010 28 Point Micro PLC, (16) 24Vdc In, (1) 24Vdc Out, (11) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power
Supply
IC200UDR228 28 Point Micro PLC, (16) 24Vdc In, (1) 24Vdc Out, (11) Relay Out, 12/24Vdc Power
Supply

6.1 Features of VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs

Figure 35

• Supports up to four Expansion Units in any combination.

• Four removable screw-down “barrier-style” terminal strips with protective covers.
• Two Serial communications ports. Port 1 (RS-232) supports SNP/SNPX slave
protocols. Port 2 (RS-485) supports SNP/ SNPX master and slave, RTU master and
slave protocol, and Serial I/O.
• Run/Stop mode switch that can be configured as a run/stop switch, a memory
protect switch, and also used for clearing faults when a fatal fault exists.
• Time-of-Day Clock.
• Two analog potentiometers.

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 88

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

• Full-featured programming Instruction Set with floating point math. The application
program can be either Ladder Diagram (LD) or Instruction List (IL) format.
• 9K words of program memory, 2048 words of registers.
• Flash memory (ROM) for non-volatile program storage and for system firmware
• Configurable to read configuration at power-up from either RAM or flash memory
(ROM). Can also be configured to read application program from flash at power-up.
• Capacitor backs up RAM and the Time-of-Day clock for at least 30 minutes.
• Optional lithium battery backup for RAM and real-time clock.

Figure 36

6.1.1 Run/Stop Switch

The Run/Stop switch can be configured as a run/stop switch, a memory protect switch, and
used for clearing faults when a fatal fault exists.

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 89

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.1.2 Serial Ports

Port 1 is an RS-232 serial port with an RJ-45 connector. Port 2, located behind a removable
door, is an RS-485 serial port with a standard DB-15 connector. Both ports can be used for
programming. Only one port can be used at a time for programming, but both ports can be
used for monitoring at the same time. Port 1 uses SNP slave protocol. Port 2 is software-
configurable for SNP master/slave or RTU slave operation. CPUs with firmware version 2.02
or later support Modbus RTU Master on port 2. 4-wire and 2-wire RTU are supported. If Port
2 is being used for RTU, it automatically switches to SNP slave mode if necessary. Port 2
defaults to SNP slave and automatically reverts to SNP slave when the CPU is in Stop mode,
if configured for Serial I/O.

Either port can be software-configured to set up communications between the CPU and
various serial devices. An external device can obtain power from both ports if it requires
100mA or less at 5Vdc.

6.1.3 Analog Potentiometers

The two potentiometers on the front of a Micro PLC can be used to adjust the values in
analog registers %AI016 and %AI017. An example use for the potentiometers would be to
set threshold values for use in logical relationships with other inputs/outputs.

6.1.4 Removable Terminal Strips

The removable terminal assemblies are protected by hinged covers. After turning off power
to the Micro PLC, a terminal assembly and attached field wiring can be separated from the
Micro PLC by removing two screws.

6.1.5 Status LEDs

LEDs on the Micro PLC provide quick visual verification of operating status. In addition to
LEDs for Power, OK, and Run mode, there is an LED for each I/O point.

6.1.6 Backup Battery

The Micro PLC uses a large value capacitor to provide memory retention current to the
System/User RAM and the Time-of-Day clock when the power supply is either not present
or not powered up. The capacitor retains memory contents for at least 30 minutes.

To maintain memory for longer than this, a replaceable battery assembly can be installed in
the battery holder, as described in Chapter 14:. The Micro PLC reports the battery state to
the PLC Fault Table and also uses Status Bits %SA011 and %S0014 to indicate the battery
state.

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 90

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.2 General Specifications for 28-Point VersaMax

Micro PLCs
Module Dimensions Height: 90mm (3.6 inches)
Depth: 76mm (3.0 inches)
Width: 150mm (6.0 inches)
Typical Scan Rate 1.1 ms/K for Boolean logic (see Appendix A:)
Real Time Clock accuracy (for Timer ±0.5%
contacts and Timer function blocks)
Time of Day Clock accuracy ±5 sec/day @10°C, ±5 sec/day @25°C, and
±11 sec/day @55°C or across full temp. range
Maximum number of slave devices 8 (can be increased with a repeater)
per network
+5Vdc output of Serial Ports Serial Port 1, pin 7: 100mA maximum4
Serial Port 2, pin 5: 100mA maximum4

Lithium battery (IC200ACC403):

shelf life Up to 5 years typical at 30 °C, Up to 3 years typical at 55 °C
installed 4 months battery backup time (powered down) minimum at
55 °C

6.3 High-Speed Counters

VersaMax Micro PLCs with DC inputs can be configured to provide built-in high-speed
counter and pulse operation.

When configured for High-Speed Counter operation, inputs I1 to I8 can be set up as:

• Up to four Type A Counters or

• One Type A and one Type B Counter.
Each counter provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 10kHz for industrial
control applications such as meter proving, turbine flowmeter, velocity measurement,
material handling, motion control, and process control.

Each counter can be enabled independently. Type A counters can be configured for up or
down counting (default is up) and for positive or negative edge detection (default is
positive). The Type B counter provides an A Quad B counting function.

Models with DC outputs can be configured to provide up to a total of four counter, Pulse
Train, or PWM outputs. Relay outputs cannot be used as Pulse Train or PWM outputs.

4
Combined port 1 and port 2 total not to exceed 100mA max.

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 91

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.4 IC200UAA007
28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 120Vac In, (12)
120Vac Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC model IC200UAA007 accepts sixteen AC inputs and provides twelve AC
outputs. It uses 100Vac to 240Vac nominal input power for PLC operation.

This module does not provide High-Speed Counter, PWM or Pulse Train operation.

6.4.1 Inputs
The sixteen 120Vac input circuits are reactive (resistor/capacitor) inputs. The input circuits
require an AC power source: they cannot be used with a DC power source.

Inputs are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit
switches, and electronic proximity switches. Power to operate the field devices must be
supplied.

6.4.2 AC Outputs
The 120/240Vac, 0.5 Amp triac outputs are provided in isolated groups. The commons are
not tied together inside the module. This allows each group to be used on different phases
of the AC supply or to be powered from the same supply. Each group is protected with a
replaceable 3.15 amp fuse for its common. Also, an RC snubber is provided for each output
to protect against transient electrical noise on the power line.

AC power to operate loads connected to outputs must be supplied from an external source.

This module provides a high degree of inrush current (10x the rated current) which makes
the outputs suitable for controlling many types of inductive and incandescent loads.

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 92

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.4.3 Micro PLC IC200UAA007 Specifications

Item Description
Weight 600 grams (1.32 lbs.)
Inputs 16 AC inputs
Outputs 12 AC outputs
High-Speed Counters None
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10mS at 85-100Vac, 20mS at 100-264Vac
Inrush Time 2mS for 40 Amp
Inrush Current 30 Amp maximum at 200Vac, 40 Amp maximum at 265Vac
Input Current 0.10 Amp typical at 100Vac, 0.06 Amp typical at 200Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 16 VA
AC Input Specifications
Points/Common 4 (I1–I4) and (I5–I8)
Rated Load Voltage 85–132Vac, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Maximum Input Voltage 132V rms, 50/60 Hz
Input Current 8 mA rms (100Vac, 60 Hz)
Voltage ON: minimum 80V rms, 4.5 mA rms, OFF: maximum 30V rms,
2 mA rms
Response Time OFF to ON: maximum 25 ms, ON to OFF: maximum 30 ms
Isolation 1500V rms field side to logic side, 500V rms between groups
AC Output Specifications
Rated Load Voltage 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Maximum Resistive Load Current 0.5 Amp per point
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 0.5 Amp per point at 240Vac
0.6 Amp maximum on C1 and C3
1.2 Amps maximum on C2 and C4
Maximum Inrush Current 5A (1 period)/point, 10A (1 period)/common
Maximum voltage drop when ON 1.5 V RMS
Maximum leak current when OFF 1.8 mA RMS (115Vac), 3.5 mA RMS (230Vac)
Response Time (Maximum) OFF to ON: 1ms, ON to OFF: 1/2 cycle + 1 ms
Isolation 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 93

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.4.4 Wiring Diagram IC200UAA007

Figure 37

6.5 IC200UAR028
28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 120Vac In, (2/10)
Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC model IC200UAR028 accepts sixteen AC inputs and provides two relay
outputs at 10 Amps and ten relay outputs at 2 Amps. It uses 100Vac to 240Vac nominal
input power for PLC operation.

This module does not provide High-Speed Counter, PWM or Pulse Train operation.

6.5.1 Inputs
The sixteen 120Vac input circuits are reactive (resistor/capacitor) inputs. The input circuits
require an AC power source: they cannot be used with a DC power source.

Inputs are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit
switches, and electronic proximity switches. Power to operate the field devices must be
supplied.

6.5.2 Relay Outputs

The Micro PLC relay outputs can control a wide range of load devices such as motor starters,
solenoids, and indicators. The switching capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps. An
external source of AC or DC power must be supplied to operate field devices.
VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 94
User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.5.3 Micro PLC IC200UAR028 Specifications

Item Description
Weight 600 grams (1.32 lbs.)
Inputs 16 AC inputs
Outputs 2 relay outputs at 10 Amps and 10 relay outputs at 2 Amps
High-Speed Counters None
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10mS at 85-100Vac, 20mS at 100-264Vac
Inrush Time 2mS for 40 Amp
Inrush Current 30 Amp maximum at 200Vac, 40 Amp maximum at 265Vac
Input Current 0.10 Amp typical at 100Vac, 0.06 Amp typical at 200Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 16 VA
AC Input Specifications
Points/Common 4 (I1–I4) and (I5–I8)
Rated Load Voltage 85–132Vac, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Maximum Input Voltage 132V rms, 50/60 Hz
Input Current 8 mA rms (100Vac, 60 Hz)
Voltage ON: minimum 80V rms, 4.5 mA rms, OFF: maximum 30V rms, 2
mA rms
Response Time OFF to ON: maximum 25 ms, ON to OFF: maximum 30 ms
Isolation 1500V rms field side to logic side, 500V rms between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS
between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac 10 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac 10 amps at24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle 14 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
Resistive Solenoid 100,000
2.0A 0.6A 100,000
10.0A 4.0A 200,000
4.0A 1.0A

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 95

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.5.4 Wiring Diagram IC200UAR028

Figure 38

6.6 IC200UDD110
28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc
Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC model IC200UDD110 accepts sixteen DC inputs and provides twelve
24Vdc outputs. It uses +24Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

6.6.1 DC Power
If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24Vdc. The 24Vdc power
source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage level (see power supply
specifications for inrush requirements).

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 96

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.6.2 DC Inputs
The module has sixteen configurable DC inputs that can be used as positive or negative logic
standard inputs. As standard inputs, they are compatible with a wide range of input devices,
such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches. Eight of the inputs
can be used for High-Speed Counter inputs.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external
device current must not exceed 200 mA.

6.6.3 Transistor Outputs

The module provides twelve transistor output circuits that can be used to switch devices like
valves, lamps or contactors. External fusing should be provided to protect the outputs. Fast
fuses are recommended.

The outputs can be configured as regular outputs or as outputs controlled by the High-
Speed Counters. Some outputs can be used as pulse train or pulse width modulation (PWM)
outputs.

All outputs are isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage. The
outputs have one common incoming supply (VC) and one common ground (COM). The
outputs are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected
against negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.

6.6.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD110 Specifications

Item Description
Weight 460 grams (1.01 lbs.)
Inputs Sixteen 24Vdc positive logic inputs in four groups of four
Outputs Twelve transistor outputs, 24Vdc. Outputs are grouped in two
groups with separated incoming supply. Each group contains 4
outputs with a maximum load of 0.5A and 2 outputs with a
maximum load of 1A.
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 97

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc/24Vdc (24Vdc +10% / -43% input at V1, C1)
Maximum Load Current 1.0A per point (Q1, Q2, Q11, Q12) at 24Vdc at 100% ON
duration
0.75A per point (Q3 - Q10) at 24Vdc at 100 % ON duration
0.5A per point (Q3 - Q10) at 12Vdc at 100 % ON duration
Maximum Inrush Current Q1, Q2,Q15,Q16: 1A, Q3-Q13: 0.7A
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage current 100A maximum
Response Time OFF to ON, ON to OFF 0.1ms maximum (24Vdc, 0.2A)
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side, 500V RMS
between groups
Fuse Outputs should be fused externally. Otherwise, a load short
can damage the module output transistor, which is not user
replaceable.
High-Speed Counter Input / PWM and Pulse Train Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON : 15V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16bits
Outputs
Load Voltage Q1-Q4: 12/24Vdc
Maximum Pulse/PWM Frequency 5kHz
Types available Up to four HSC, PT, and/or PWM outputs

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 98

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.6.5 Wiring Diagram IC200UDD110

Figure 39

The maximum current that can be used for output points Q1, Q2, Q11 and Q12 is lower for
ambient temperatures above 50°C

Figure 40

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 99

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.7 IC200UDD120
28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc
Out with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC model IC220UDD120 accepts sixteen DC inputs and provide twelve
24Vdc outputs. The outputs have electronic short-circuit protection. The module uses
+24Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

6.7.1 DC Power
If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24Vdc. The 24Vdc power
source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage level (see power supply
specifications for inrush requirements).

6.7.2 DC Inputs
The module’s sixteen configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic
standard inputs. Eight of these inputs can be used for High-Speed Counter inputs.

When used as standard inputs, they are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such
as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external
device current must not exceed 200 mA.

6.7.3 Transistor Outputs

The twelve transistor outputs can be configured as regular outputs or as outputs controlled
by the High-Speed Counters. Some outputs can be used as pulse train or pulse width
modulation (PWM) outputs.

The output circuits can be used to switch devices like valves, lamps or contactors.

Outputs require no fusing; they provide electronic short-circuit protection.

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 100

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.7.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD120 Specifications

Item Description
Weight 460 grams (1.01 lbs.)
Inputs Sixteen 24Vdc positive logic inputs in four groups of four
Outputs Twelve transistor outputs, 24Vdc. Outputs are grouped in two
groups with separated incoming supply. Each group contains 4
outputs with a maximum load of 0.5A and 2 outputs with a
maximum load of 1A.
High-Speed Counters Four Type A or One Type A and One Type B
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
DC Output Specifications
Voltage Range Q1 – Q12: 12/24Vdc +10%, -15%
External Power Supply (for 12/24V -10%, +20%
supplying power to the V
terminal)
Maximum Load Current Q1 and Q2: 1A per point, Q3 - Q12: 0.7A per point
Minimum Switching Current 10mA
Maximum Inrush Current Q1, Q2,Q11,Q12: 8A for 20ms, 1 pulse, Q3-Q10: 4A for 20ms,
1 pulse
Output Voltage Drop Q1– Q12: 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage current 0.1mA
Response Time OFF to ON, ON to OFF: 0.05mS maximum @ 24Vdc
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side, 500V RMS
between groups

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 101

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Fuse Not required
Under-voltage shutdown Q1 - Q12: 5V minimum, 8V maximum
DC short circuit current Q1 – Q12: 0.7A minimum, 2A maximum
Peak short circuit current 4A maximum
Delay time of peak short circuit 100μS
current
Delay time of current limit 100μS
High-Speed Counter Input / PWM and Pulse Train Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON : 15V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16bits
Outputs
Load Voltage Q1-Q4: 12/24Vdc
Maximum Pulse/PWM Frequency 5kHz
Types available Up to four HSC, PT, and/or PWM outputs

6.7.5 Wiring Diagram IC200UDD120

Figure 41

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 102

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.8 IC200UDD212
28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 12Vdc In, (12) 12Vdc
Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC model IC200UDD212 accepts sixteen 12Vdc inputs and provides
twelve DC transistor outputs. It uses +12Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

6.8.1 DC Power
If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 12Vdc. The 12Vdc power
source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain a 12Vdc voltage level (see power supply
specifications for inrush requirements).

6.8.2 DC Inputs
Sixteen configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs.
Eight of the inputs can be configured as four Type A Counters or one Type A and one Type B
Counter. When used as standard inputs, they are compatible with a wide range of input
devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +12Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external
device current must not exceed 200 mA.

6.8.3 Transistor Outputs

Micro PLC IC200UDD212 has twelve transistor outputs (Q1 to Q12) with maximum output
load of 0.7A per output.

All outputs are isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage.

The output circuits can be used to switch devices like valves, lamps or contactors. External
fusing should be provided to protect the outputs. Fast fuses are recommended.

The outputs can be configured as regular outputs or as outputs controlled by the High-
Speed Counters. Some outputs can be used as pulse train or pulse width modulation (PWM)
outputs.

Each group of 6 outputs has one common incoming supply (V1, V2) and one common
ground (C1, C2). The outputs are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated
current) and are protected against negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch
lamps and inductive loads.

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 103

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.8.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD212 Specifications

Item Description
Weight 460 grams (1.01 lbs.)
Inputs Sixteen 12Vdc positive logic inputs in four groups of four
Outputs Twelve transistor outputs, 12Vdc. Outputs are grouped in two
groups with separated incoming supply. Each group contains 4
outputs with a maximum load of 0.5A and 2 outputs with a
maximum load of 1A.
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B
+12Vdc Output Power Supply) 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices
DC Power Specifications
Range 9.6Vdc to 15Vdc
Hold-up 3.0mS
Inrush Current 9.6A typical at 12Vdc
Inrush Time 200mS typical
Input Current 480mA typical at 12Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 8W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 16
Rated Input Voltage 12 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 volts DC
Input Current 9.0mA typical
Input Resistance 1.3 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 9.5Vdc minimum, OFF: 2.5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 6.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms (user configurable) as regular input; 100µs as HSC
input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
DC Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc (+20%, -20%)
Maximum Load 0.7A per point (Q1 - Q12) at 24Vdc at 100 % ON duration, 4A
per common
Maximum Inrush Current 4A for 20mS
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage 0.1mA maximum
Response OFF to ON: 0.1mS maximum (12Vdc), ON to OFF 0.1mS
maximum (12Vdc)
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side, 500V RMS
between groups

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 104

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Fuse Outputs should be fused externally. Otherwise, a load short
can damage the module output transistor, which is not user
replaceable.
High-Speed Counter Input / PWM & Pulse-Train Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 9V, OFF: 2.5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16bits
Outputs
Load Voltage Q1-Q4: 12Vdc
Maximum Pulse/PWM Frequency 5kHz
Types available Up to four HSC, PT, and/or PWM outputs

6.8.5 Wiring Diagram IC200UDD212

Figure 42

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 105

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.9 IC200UDR005
28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 24Vdc In, (1) 24Vdc
Out, (11) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDR005 accepts sixteen DC inputs and provides one 24Vdc
output and eleven normally open 2 Amp relay outputs. It uses 100Vac to 240Vac nominal
input power for PLC operation.

6.9.1 DC Inputs
The sixteen configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs,
including up to four High-Speed Counter inputs. Inputs are compatible with a wide range of
devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches. The module
provides +24Vdc output power for field devices, up to 200mA maximum.

6.9.2 DC Output (Q1)

The DC output circuit (Q1) can be configured to be a standard, High-Speed Counter, pulse
train, or PWM output.

6.9.3 Relay Outputs (Q2 – Q12)

The module has eleven Form A relay outputs (SPST-single pole single throw). The normally
open relay outputs can control a wide range of load devices such as motor starters,
solenoids, and indicators. The switching capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps. An
external source of AC or DC power must be supplied to operate field devices.

The relay outputs can be configured as up to three High-Speed Counter outputs. Relay
outputs cannot be used as Pulse Train or PWM outputs.

6.9.4 Micro PLC IC200UDR005 Specifications

Item Description
Weight 580 grams (1.28lbs)
Inputs Sixteen 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Eleven normally open 2 amp relay circuits and One DC Output (Q1)
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10mS at 85 to 100Vac, 20mS at 100 to 265Vac
Inrush Current 30 Amp maximum at 200Vac, 40 Amp maximum at 265Vac
Inrush Time 2 ms for 40Amp

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 106

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 200Vac, 0.10 Amp typical at 100Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 26 VA
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 16
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
DC Output Specifications
Output logic Positive Logic
Operating Voltage 24Vdc / 12Vdc / 5Vdc
Voltage Range 24Vdc, +20%, -80%
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 0.75A at 24Vdc
Maximum Resistive Load 0.75A at 24Vdc
Rating 0.5A at 12Vdc
0.25A at 5Vdc
Output Voltage Drop 0.3Vdc maximum
Response ON: 0.1ms maximum (24Vdc, 0.2A), OFF: 0.1ms maximum
(24Vdc, 0.2A)
OFF state leakage 0.1mA maximum
Isolation 1500Vac between field side and logic side, 500Vac between
groups
Fuse Output should be fused externally. Otherwise, a load short can
damage the module output transistor, which is not user
replaceable.
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS between
groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 107

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Current: Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
Voltage Resistive Solenoid 200,000
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2.0A 0.6A
High-Speed Counter / PWM and Pulse Train Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 15V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16bits
Outputs
Type available Up to four HSC outputs or three HSC outputs plus one PT or PWM
output.
Load Voltage Q1: 5/12/24V, Q2-Q4: See relay output specifications
Maximum Pulse/PWM 5kHz (Q1 only)
Frequency

6.9.5 Wiring Diagram IC200UDR005

Figure 43

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 108

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.10 IC200UDR006
28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 12Vdc In, (12) Relay
Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDR006 accepts sixteen 12Vdc inputs and provides twelve
normally open 2 Amp relay outputs. It uses +12Vdc nominal input power.

6.10.1 DC Power
The DC power supply requires more current at startup voltage (approximately 4Vdc) than
at rated input voltage. A minimum of 2.0 A is required to start up the DC power supply.

If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 12Vdc. The 12Vdc power
source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain a 12Vdc voltage level (see power supply
specifications for inrush requirements).

6.10.2 Inputs
The sixteen configurable 12Vdc inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard
inputs or High-Speed Counter inputs. Inputs are compatible with a wide range of devices
such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +12Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external
device current must not exceed 200 mA.

6.10.3 Relay Outputs (Q1 – Q12)

The module’s twelve Form A relay outputs (SPST-single pole single throw) can be configured
as normal or High-Speed Counter outputs. Relay outputs cannot be used as Pulse Train or
PWM outputs. The 12 normally open relay outputs can control many types of devices such
as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. The switching capacity of each of these circuits
is 2 amps. An external source of AC or DC power must be supplied for field devices.

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 109

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.10.4 Micro PLC IC200UDR006 Specifications

Item Description
Weight 500 grams (1.10 lbs.)
Inputs Sixteen 12Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Twelve normally open 2 amp relay circuits
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B
+12Vdc Output Power 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
Supply
DC Power Specifications
Range 9.6Vdc - 15Vdc
Hold-up 3.0mS
Inrush Current 9.6A typical at 12Vdc
Inrush Time 200mS typical
Input Current 480mA typical at 12Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 8W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 16
Rated Input Voltage 12 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 volts DC
Input Current 9.0mA typical
Input Impedance 1.3 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 9.5Vdc minimum, OFF: 2.5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 6.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms (user configurable) as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS between
groups
Leakage Current 15 mA maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Maximum Resistive Load 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Minimum Load 1 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 110

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Contact Life: Electrical Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Solenoid Typical Operations
Voltage 2A 0.6A 200,000
High-Speed Counter Input / PWM and Pulse Train Output Specifications
Maximum Counter 10kHz
Frequency
Input Voltage ON: 9V, OFF: 2.5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16 bits
Outputs
Available Pulse Outputs None
Load Voltage Refer to relay specifications

6.10.5 Wiring Diagram IC200UDR006

Figure 44

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 111

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.11 IC200UDR010
28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 24Vdc In, (1) 24Vdc
Out, (11) Relay Out, 24Vdc PS
IC200UDR228
28-Point Micro PLC, (16) 24 VC In, (1) 24Vdc
Out, (11) Relay Out, 12/24Vdc PS
VersaMax Micro PLCs IC200UDR010 and IC200UDR228 accept sixteen DC inputs and
provide one DC output and eleven normally open 2 Amp relay outputs. The only differences
between these modules are their power supplies and the output current rating of their Q1
DC output. Micro-28 IC200UDR010 uses +24Vdc nominal input power, and provides a
450mA, 24Vdc output. Micro-28 IC200UDR228 uses +12/24Vdc nominal input power, and
provides a 100mA, 24Vdc output.

6.11.1 DC Power
The DC power supply requires more current at startup voltage (approximately 4Vdc) than
at rated input voltage. A minimum of 2.0 A is required to start up the DC power supply.

If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains nominal DC power. The
power source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the
inrush current of the power supply and to maintain an adequateVdc voltage level (see
specifications for inrush requirements).

6.11.2 DC Inputs
The sixteen configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs
or up to three High-Speed Counter inputs. Inputs are compatible with a wide range of input
devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external
device current must not exceed 200 mA.

6.11.3 DC Output (Q1)

The DC output circuit (Q1) can be configured to be a standard, High-Speed Counter, pulse
train, or PWM output.

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 112

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6.11.4 Relay Outputs (Q2 – Q12)

Eleven Form A relay outputs (SPST-single pole single throw) can control a wide range of load
devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. The switching capacity of each of
these circuits is 2 amps. An external source of AC or DC power must be supplied to operate
field devices. Relay outputs cannot be used as Pulse Train or PWM outputs.

6.11.5 Micro PLC IC200UDR010, IC200UDR228 Specifications

Item Description
Weight 500 grams (1.10 lbs.)
Inputs Sixteen 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Eleven normally-open 2 amp relay circuits and One DC Output
(Q1)
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
Thermal Derating IC200UDR010: none. IC200UDR228: no derating to 45 degrees C.
Above 45 degrees C, number of points on at the same time must
not exceed 50%.
DC Power Specifications
Range IC200UDR010: 24Vdc -20%, +25%
IC200UDR228: 9.2 to 30Vdc
Hold-up IC200UDR010: 10ms at 19.2Vdc
IC200UDR028: 5ms
Inrush Current IC200UDR010: 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
IC200UDR228: 13 Amps at 12Vdc, 27 Amps at 24Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 A
Input Current IC200UDR010: 0.30 Amp typical at 24Vdc
IC200URD228: 1.1 Amp typical at 12Vdc; 0.55 Amp typical at
24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 8W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 16
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 113

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
DC Output Specifications
Output logic Positive Logic
Operating Voltage IC200UDR010: 24Vdc / 12Vdc / 5Vdc; IC200UDR228:
24Vdc / 12Vdc
Voltage Range IC200UDR010: 24Vdc, +20%, -80%; IC200UDR228: 23.5 -
24.5Vdc
Output Current IC200UDR010: 450mA; IC200UDR228:
100mA
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 0.75A at 24Vdc
Maximum Resistive Load 0.75A at 24Vdc; 0.5A at 12Vdc; 0.25A at 5Vdc
Rating
Output Voltage Drop 0.3Vdc maximum
Response ON: 0.1ms maximum (24Vdc, 0.2A), OFF: 0.1ms maximum
(24Vdc, 0.2A)
OFF state leakage 0.1mA maximum
Isolation 1500Vac between field side and logic side, 500Vac between
groups
Fuse Output should be fused externally. Otherwise, a load short can
damage the module output transistor, which is not user
replaceable.
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS between
groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Minimum Load 1 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical
Voltage 2A Solenoid Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 0.6A 200,000
High-Speed Counter Input / PWM and Pulse-Train Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 10kHz
Input Voltage ON: 15V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% duty cycle at 10kHz
Count Registers 16bits

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 114

User Manual Chapter 6
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Outputs
Load Voltage Q1: IC200UDR010 = 5/12/24V; IC200UDR228 = 12/24V
Q2-Q4: See Relay output specifications
Maximum Pulse/PWM (Q1 only) 5kHz
Frequency
Types available Up to four HSC outputs or three HSC outputs plus one PT/PWM
output.

6.11.6 Wiring Diagram IC200UDR010, IC200UDR228

Figure 45

VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLCs 115

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 7: VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro

PLUS PLCs
This chapter describes the features, specifications, and field wiring for 40-point VersaMax
Micro and VersaMax Micro PLUS PLCs.

IC200UDD040 40 Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (16) 24Vdc Out (Source), 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDD240 40 Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, (4) 24V LCDC Out,
24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR040 40 Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (16) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR140 40 Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (16) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UDR440 40 Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (16) Relay Out, 12/24Vdc Power Supply

Note: Firmware releases 4.00 and later require a Micro PLUS CPU, which has enhanced memory.
Firmware versions 4.00 cannot be used with the earlier hardware versions.

• Micro and Micro PLUS PLCs support the same user logic memory size.
• The specifications given in this chapter for Micro PLCs also apply to Micro PLUS PLCs.

7.1 Features of VersaMax 40-Point Micro PLCs

Figure 46

• Supports up to four Expansion Units in any combination.

• Removable screw-down “barrier-style” terminal strips with protective covers.
• Built-in serial communications port supports SNP/ SNPX master and slave, Modbus
RTU master and slave, and Serial I/O.
• Removable Memory Pack Module available.
• Optional Port 2.
• Run/Stop mode switch that can be configured as a run/stop switch, a memory
protect switch, and also used for clearing faults when a fatal fault exists.
• Resettable calendar clock.

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 116

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

• Full-featured programming Instruction Set with floating point math. The application
program can be either Ladder Diagram (LD) or Instruction List (IL) format.
• 24K words of program memory, 32K words of registers.
• Flash memory (ROM) for non-volatile program storage and for system firmware.
• Configurable to read configuration and application program at power-up from
either RAM or flash memory (ROM).
• Capacitor backs up RAM and the Time-of-Day clock for at least 30 minutes at 25
degrees C
• Optional lithium battery backup for RAM and real-time clock.
• Enhanced High-Speed Counter / Pulse Train commands for Jogging, Blending, and
Homing, plus configurable 32-bit Counters /PTO/ and 32-bit function blocks.

Figure 47

7.1.1 Run/Stop Switch

The Run/Stop switch can be configured as a run/stop switch or a memory protect switch and
used for clearing faults when a fatal fault exists.

7.1.2 Ports
Port 1 is a built-in RS-232 serial port with an RJ-45 connector.

A second port can be added to a 40-Point Micro PLC using one of the port Option Modules
described in Chapter 14:. If a second port is installed, both ports can be used for
programming. Only one port can be used at a time for programming, but both ports can be
used for monitoring at the same time.

Port 1 and the optional Port 2 are individually configurable for SNP master/slave, RTU
master/slave, and Serial I/O protocols. Both 4-wire and 2-wire RTU are supported when the

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 117

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

RS-485 Port Option module is installed as port 2. Port 2 does not support hardware flow
control. When either port is being used for RTU slave, it automatically switches to SNP slave
mode when that port is being used by the programmer. If a port is configured for Serial I/O,
RTU Master, or SNP Master operation, that port defaults to SNP slave and automatically
reverts to SNP slave when the CPU is in Stop mode.

Either port can be software-configured to set up communications between the CPU and
various serial devices. An external device can obtain power from the port if it requires
200mA or less at 5Vdc.

7.1.3 Analog Inputs

The RS232 Option Module (IC200USB001) or the RS485 Option Module (IC200USB002) can
provide two 0-10V analog inputs. See Chapter 14: for more information about option
modules. The two inputs can be used to adjust the values in analog registers %AI016 (input
1) and %AI017 (input 2). An example use for the analog inputs would be to set threshold
values for use in logical relationships with other inputs/outputs.

7.1.4 Removable Terminal Strips

The removable terminal assemblies are protected by hinged covers. After turning off power
to the Micro PLC, a terminal assembly and attached field wiring can be separated from the
Micro PLC by removing two screws.

7.1.5 Status LEDs

LEDs on the Micro PLC provide quick visual verification of operating status. In addition to
LEDs for Power, OK, and Run mode, there is an LED for each I/O point.

7.1.6 Backup Battery

The Micro PLC uses a large value capacitor to provide memory retention current to the
System/User RAM and the Time-of-Day clock when the power supply is either not present
or not powered up. The capacitor retains memory contents for at least 30 minutes.

To maintain memory for longer than this, a replaceable battery assembly can be installed in
the battery holder, as described in Chapter 15:. The Micro PLC reports the battery state to
the PLC Fault Table and also uses Status Bits %SA011 and %S0014 to indicate the battery
state.

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 118

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

7.2 General Specifications of 40-Point VersaMax

Micro PLCs
Module Dimensions Height: 90mm (3.6 inches), Depth: 76mm (3.0 inches)
Width: 150mm (6.0 inches)
Typical Scan Rate 1.7 ms/K for Boolean logic (see Appendix A:)
Real Time Clock accuracy (for Timer ±0.5%
contacts and Timer function blocks)
Time-of-Day Clock accuracy ±5 sec/day @10°C, ±5 sec/day @25°C, and
±11 sec/day @ 55°C or across full temperature range
Maximum number of slave devices per 8 (can be increased with a repeater)
RS-485 network
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 435mA maximum
(for input circuits and user devices)
+5Vdc output of Serial Ports 200mA per port, 400mA total for both ports, maximum

7.3 High-Speed Counters

VersaMax 40-Point Micro PLCs can be configured to provide built-in High-Speed Counter
and pulse operation. When configured for High-Speed Counter operation, inputs I1 to I8 can
be set up as:

• Up to four Type A Counters or

• One Type A and one Type B Counter or
• Up to four Type A_32 Counters or
• One Type A and one Type B_32 Counter
Each counter provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 100kHz for industrial
control applications such as meter proving, turbine flow meter, velocity measurement,
material handling, motion control, and process control.

Each counter can be enabled independently. Type A counters can be configured for up or
down counting (default is up) and for positive or negative edge detection (default is
positive). The type B counter provides an A Quad B counting function.

See Chapter 18: for information about High-Speed Counter operation.

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 119

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

7.4 IC200UDD040
40-Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc
Out with ESCP, (4) LCDC Out, 24Vdc Power
Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDD040 accepts twenty-four DC inputs and provides twelve 24V
ESCP outputs and four 24Vdc low current outputs. It uses +24Vdc nominal input power for
PLC operation.

7.4.1 DC Power
If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24Vdc. The 24Vdc power
source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage level (see power supply
specifications for inrush requirements).

7.4.2 DC Inputs
The twenty-four configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard
inputs. Eight of these inputs can be used for High-Speed Counter inputs. When used as
standard inputs, they are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as
pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 435 mA.

7.4.3 DC Outputs
Outputs 1 – 4 can be used as standard, High-Speed Counter, Pulse-Width Modulated, Pulse
Train Outputs, or Pulse Train Outputs with Ramping. All standard outputs are all source-
type. Outputs can be used to switch devices like valves, lamps or contactors.

Outputs 5 – 16 provide Electronic Short-Circuit Protection.

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 120

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

7.4.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD040 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Twenty-four 24Vdc positive or negative logic inputs
Outputs Sixteen 24Vdc outputs. Outputs 5-16 with ESCP
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B, or
four Type A_32, or one Type A_32 and one Type B_32
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I3, I5, I7: 8mA typical; other inputs 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I3, I5, I7: 2.7 kΩ; other inputs: 4.7kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA maximum
Response Time 1ms to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc / 24Vdc
External Power Supply 12/24Vdc –10%, +20%
Maximum Load Current 0.5A per point (Q1 – Q4) at 24Vdc at 100 % ON duration
0.7A per point (Q5 – Q16) at 24Vdc at 100 % ON duration
Minimum Switching Current 10mA
Maximum Inrush Current Q1-Q4: 2A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Q5-Q16: 4A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage current 0.1mA maximum
Response Time OFF to ON, ON to OFF: 1 ms maximum (24Vdc)
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side
500V RMS between groups
Fuse None, outputs 5-16 are ESCP protected
Under-voltage shutdown Q5 – Q16: 5V minimum, 8V maximum
DC short circuit current Q1 – Q4: 5A maximum
Q5 - Q16: 0.7A maximum ESCP

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 121

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Peak short circuit current Q5 - Q16:4A maximum
Delay time of peak short circuit 100 µS
current
Delay time of current limit 100 µS
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 100kHz
Input Voltage ON : 18V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% of duty cycle at 100kHz
Count Registers 16/32 bits
Outputs
Load Voltage 12/24Vdc
Maximum Pulse/Pulse Train with PWM and PTO: 65kHz
Ramping/PWM Frequency Pulse Train with Ramping: 65kHz
Types available Up to four HSC, PTO, PTO with Ramping and/or PWM outputs

7.4.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD040

Figure 48

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 122

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

7.5 IC200UDD240
40 Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (16) 24Vdc
Out (Sink), 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDD240 accepts twenty-four DC inputs and provides sixteen DC
outputs. It uses +24Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

7.5.1 DC Power
If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24Vdc. The 24Vdc power
source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage level (see power supply
specifications for inrush requirements).

7.5.2 DC Inputs
Twenty-four configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard
inputs. Eight of these inputs can be used for High-Speed Counter inputs. When used as
standard inputs, they are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as
pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 435mA.

7.5.3 DC Outputs
Micro PLC IC200UDD240 has 16 Sink-type DC outputs. All outputs are isolated between field
and logic and are switching positive voltage. The outputs have one common incoming
supply (VC) and one common ground (COM). The outputs are able to drive high inrush
currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected against negative voltage pulses. This
makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.

DC outputs can be used as standard, High-Speed Counter, Pulse-Width Modulated, Pulse

Train Outputs, or Pulse Train Outputs with Ramping.

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 123

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

7.5.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD240 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Twenty-four 24Vdc positive or negative logic inputs
Outputs Sixteen transistor outputs, 24Vdc.
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B, or four Type A_32,
or one Type A_32 and one Type B_32
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I3, I5, I7: 8mA typical; other inputs 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I3, I5, I7: 2.7 kΩ; other inputs: 4.7kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA maximum
Response Time 1ms to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc/24Vdc
External Power Supply 12/24Vdc –10%, +20%
Maximum Load Current 0.5A per point (Q1 – Q24) at 24Vdc
Minimum Switching Current 10mA
Maximum Inrush Current Q1-Q16: 2A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Output Voltage Drop Q1– Q16: 0.3Vdc
OFF state leakage current 0.1mA
Response Time OFF to ON, ON to OFF: 1 mS maximum @ 24Vdc
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side, 500V RMS between
groups
Fuses None
Under-voltage shutdown Q1 – Q16: 5V minimum, 8V maximum
DC short circuit current Q1 – Q16: 0.7A minimum, 2A maximum

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 124

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter 100kHz
Frequency
Input Voltage ON : 18V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% of duty cycle at 100kHz
Count Registers 16/32 bits
Outputs
Load Voltage 12/24Vdc
Maximum Pulse/PWM PWM and PTO: 65kHz
Frequency Pulse Train with Ramping: 65kHz
Types available Up to four HSC, PTO, PTO with Ramping and/or PWM outputs

Figure 49

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 125

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

7.6 IC200UDR040
40 Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (16) Relay
Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR140
40 Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (16) Relay
Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UDR440
40 Point Micro PLC, (24) 24Vdc In, (16) Relay
Out, 12/24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLCs IC200UDR040, IC200UDR140, and IC200UDR440 each accept
twenty-four DC inputs and provide sixteen normally open 2 Amp relay outputs.

• IC200UDR040 uses +24Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

• IC200UDR140 uses 100Vac to 240Vac nominal input power for PLC operation.
• IC200UDR440 uses +12/24Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

7.6.1 DC Inputs
Twenty-four configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard
inputs. Eight of these inputs can be used for High-Speed Counter inputs. When used as
standard inputs, they are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as
pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external
device current must not exceed 435mA.

7.6.2 Relay Outputs

The sixteen normally open Form A relay outputs (SPST-single pole single throw) can
control many types of load devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. The
switching capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps. An external source of AC or DC
power must be supplied to operate field devices.

The relay outputs can be configured as up to four HSC outputs. Relay outputs cannot be
used as Pulse Train or PWM outputs.

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 126

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

7.6.3 Micro PLC IC200UDR040, IC200UDR140, IC200UDR440

Specifications
Item Description
Inputs Twenty-four 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Sixteen normally open 2-amp relay circuits
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B, or four Type
A_32, or
one Type A_32 and one Type B_32
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 435mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
+5Vdc output of Serial Port Serial Port 1, pin 7:100mA maximum
Power Supply Specifications
Range IC200UDR040, IC200UDR440: 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
IC200UDR140: 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency IC200UDR140: 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up IC200UDR040, IC200UDR440:10mS at 19.2Vdc
IC200UDR140: 10mS at 85 to 100Vac, 20mS at 100 to 265Vac
Inrush Current IC200UDR040, IC200UDR440:1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
IC200UDR140: 30 Amp maximum at 200Vac,
40 Amp maximum at 265Vac
Inrush Time IC200UDR040, IC200UDR440:10mS for 1 Amp
IC200UDR140: 2 ms for 40Amp
Input Current IC200UDR040, IC200UDR440:0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
IC200UDR140: 0.20 Amp typical at 200Vac
0.10 Amp typical at 100Vac
Input Power Supply Rating IC200UDR040, IC200UDR440: 5W
IC200UDR140: 26 VA
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I3, I5, I7: 8mA typical; other inputs 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I3, I5, I7: 2.7 kΩ; other inputs: 4.7kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA maximum
Response Time 1ms to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 100kHz
Input Voltage ON: 18V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% of duty cycle at 100kHz

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 127

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Count Registers 16/32 bits
Outputs
Load Voltage Q1: 5/12/24V, Q2-Q4: See relay output specifications
Type available Up to four HSC outputs. Pulse outputs not available.
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS
between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush IC200UDR040: 1.5A, 10ms
IC200UDR140: 9.4A, 20ms
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2.0A Solenoid 200,000
0.6A

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 128

User Manual Chapter 7
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

7.6.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDR040, IC200UDR140,

IC200UDR440
Figure 50

VersaMax 40-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 129

User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 8: VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro

PLUS PLCs
This chapter describes the features, specifications, and field wiring for 64-Point VersaMax
Micro and VersaMax Micro PLUS PLCs.

IC200UDD064 64 Point Micro PLC, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) 24Vdc Out (Source), 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDD164 64 Point Micro PLC, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) 24Vdc Out (Sink), 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR064 64 Point Micro PLC, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UDR164 64 Point Micro PLC, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply

Note: Firmware releases 4.00 and later require a Micro PLUS CPU, which has enhanced memory.
Firmware versions 4.00 cannot be used with the earlier hardware versions.

• Micro and Micro PLUS PLCs support the same user logic memory size.
• The specifications given in this chapter for Micro PLCs also apply to Micro PLUS PLCs.

8.1 Features of VersaMax 64-Point Micro PLCs

Figure 51

• Supports up to four Expansion Units in any combination.

• Removable screw-down “barrier-style” terminal strips with protective covers.
• Built-in serial communications port supports SNP/ SNPX master and slave, Modbus
RTU master and slave, and Serial I/O.
• Removable Memory Pack Module available.
• Optional Port 2.
• Run/Stop mode switch that can be configured as a run/stop switch, a memory
protect switch, and also used for clearing faults when a fatal fault exists.
• Resettable calendar clock.
• Full-featured programming Instruction Set with floating point math. The application
program can be either Ladder Diagram (LD) or Instruction List (IL) format.
• 24K words of program memory, 32K words of registers.
• Flash memory (ROM) for non-volatile program storage and for system firmware.

VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 130

User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

• Configurable to read configuration and application program at power-up from

either RAM or flash memory (ROM).
• Capacitor backs up RAM and the Time-of-Day clock for at least 30 minutes at 25
degrees C
• Optional lithium battery backup for RAM and real-time clock.
• Release 3.6 and later Micro-64 PLCs support enhanced High-Speed Counter / Pulse
Train commands for Jogging, Blending, and Homing, plus configurable 32-bit
Counters /PTO/ and 32-bit function blocks.

8.2 General Specifications of 64-Point VersaMax

Micro PLCs
Module Dimensions Height: 90mm (3.6 inches), Depth: 76mm (3.0 inches)
Width: 195mm (7.68 inches)
Typical Scan Rate 1.7 ms/K for Boolean logic (see Appendix A:)
Real Time Clock accuracy (for Timer ±0.5%
contacts and Timer function blocks)
Time-of-Day Clock accuracy ±5 sec/day @10°C, ±5 sec/day @25°C, and
±11 sec/day @ 55°C or across full temperature range
Maximum number of slave devices per 8 (can be increased with a repeater)
RS-485 network
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 435mA maximum
(for input circuits and user devices)
+5Vdc output of Serial Ports 200mA per port, 400mA total for both ports, maximum

8.3 High-Speed Counters

VersaMax 64-Point Micro PLCs can be configured to provide built-in high-speed counter and
pulse operation. When configured for High-Speed Counter operation, inputs I1 to I8 can be
set up as:

• Up to four Type A Counters or

• One Type A and one Type B Counter or
• Up to four Type A_32 Counters or
• One Type A and one Type B_32 Counter
Each counter provides direct processing of rapid pulse signals up to 100kHz for industrial
control applications such as meter proving, turbine flow meter, velocity measurement,
material handling, motion control, and process control.

Each counter can be enabled independently. Type A counters can be configured for up or
down counting (default is up) and for positive or negative edge detection (default is
positive). The type B counter provides an A Quad B counting function.

VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 131

User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

The DC output (Q1) can be configured as a counter, Pulse Train, Pulse Train with Ramp, or
PWM output. The relay outputs can be configured as up to four HSC outputs. Relay outputs
cannot be used as Pulse Train, Pulse Train with Ramp, or PWM outputs.

Figure 52

8.3.1 Run/Stop Switch

The Run/Stop switch can be configured as a run/stop switch, a memory protect switch, and
used for clearing faults when a fatal fault exists.

8.3.2 Ports
Port 1 is a built-in RS-232 serial port with an RJ-45 connector.

A second port can be added to a 64-Point Micro PLC using one of the port Option Modules
described in this section. If a second port is installed, both ports can be used for
programming. Only one port can be used at a time for programming, but both ports can be
used for monitoring at the same time.

Port 1 and the optional Port 2 are individually-configurable for SNP master/slave, RTU
master/slave, and Serial I/O protocols. Both 4-wire and 2-wire RTU are supported when the
RS-485 Port Option module is installed as port 2. Port 2 does not support hardware flow
control. When either port is being used for RTU slave, it automatically switches to SNP slave
mode when that port is being used by the programmer. If a port is configured for Serial I/O,
RTU Master, or SNP Master operation, that port defaults to SNP slave and automatically
reverts to SNP slave when the CPU is in Stop mode.

Either port can be software-configured to set up communications between the CPU and
various serial devices. An external device can obtain power from the port if it requires
200mA or less at 5Vdc.

VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 132

User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

8.3.3 Analog Inputs

If an Option Module with analog inputs is installed as described in this section, the two
inputs can be used to adjust the values in analog registers %AI016 (input 1) and %AI017
(input 2). An example use for the analog inputs would be to set threshold values for use in
logical relationships with other inputs/outputs.

8.3.4 Removable Terminal Strips

The removable terminal assemblies are protected by hinged covers. After turning off power
to the Micro PLC, a terminal assembly and attached field wiring can be separated from the
Micro PLC by removing two screws.

8.3.5 Status LEDs

LEDs on the Micro PLC provide quick visual verification of operating status. In addition to
LEDs for Power, OK, and Run mode, there is an LED for each I/O point.

8.3.6 Backup Battery

The Micro PLC uses a large value capacitor to provide memory retention current to the
System/User RAM and the Time-of-Day clock when the power supply is either not present
or not powered up. The capacitor retains memory contents for at least 30 minutes.

To maintain memory for longer than this, a replaceable battery assembly can be installed in
the battery holder, as described in Chapter 15:. The Micro PLC reports the battery state to
the PLC Fault Table and also uses Status Bits %SA011 and %S0014 to indicate the battery
state.

8.4 IC200UDD064
64 Point Micro PLC, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) 24Vdc
Out (Source), 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDD064 accepts forty DC inputs and provides twenty-four DC
outputs. It uses +24Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

8.4.1 DC Power
If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24Vdc. The 24Vdc power
source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage level (see power supply
specifications for inrush requirements).

VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 133

User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

8.4.2 DC Inputs
The forty configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs.
Eight of these inputs can be used for High-Speed Counter inputs. When used as standard
inputs, they are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit
switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 435 mA.

8.4.3 Transistor Outputs

Outputs 1 – 4 can be used as standard, High-Speed Counter, Pulse-Width Modulated, Pulse
Train Outputs, or Pulse Train Outputs with Ramping. All standard outputs are source-type.
Outputs can be used to switch devices like valves, lamps or contactors.

Outputs 5 – 24 provide Electronic Short-Circuit Protection. No external fuses are required.

8.4.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD064 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Forty 24Vdc positive or negative logic inputs
Outputs Twenty-four transistor outputs, 24Vdc.
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B, or four Type
A_32, or
one Type A_32 and one Type B_32
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1,I3,I5,I7: 8mA typical, Others : 4.8 mA typical
Input Impedance I1,I3,I5,I7 2.7 kΩ, Others: 4.7 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other Inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 1ms to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups

VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 134

User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc/24Vdc
External Power Supply 12/24Vdc –10%, +20%
Maximum Load Current 0.5A per point (Q1 – Q4) at 24Vdc at 100 % ON duration
0.7A per point (Q5 – Q20) at 24Vdc at 100 % ON duration
1.0A per point (Q21 – Q24) at 24Vdc at 100% ON duration
Minimum Switching Current 10mA
Maximum Inrush Current Q1-Q4: 2A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Q5-Q20: 4A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Q21-Q24: 8A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage current 0.1mA maximum
Response Time OFF to ON, ON to OFF: 1ms maximum (24Vdc)
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side,
500V RMS between groups
Fuse None, outputs 5–24 are ESCP protected
Under-voltage shutdown Q5 – Q20: 5V minimum, 8V maximum
DC short circuit current Q1 – Q4, Q21 – Q24: 5A typical
Q5 – Q20: 0.7A minimum, 2A maximum
Peak short circuit current Q5 – Q20: 4A maximum
Delay time of peak short 100 µS
circuit current
Delay time of current limit 100 µS
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter Frequency 100kHz
Input Voltage ON: 18V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% of duty cycle at 100kHz
Count Registers 16/32 bits
Outputs
Load Voltage 12/24Vdc
Maximum Pulse/Pulse Train PWM and PTO: 65kHz
with Ramping/PWM Pulse Train with Ramping: 65kHz
Frequency
Types available Up to four HSC, PTO, PTO with Ramping and/or PWM outputs

VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 135

User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

8.4.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD064

Figure 53

8.5 IC200UDD164
64 Point Micro PLC, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) 24Vdc
Out (Sink), 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDD164 accepts forty DC inputs and provides twenty-four DC
outputs. It uses +24Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

8.5.1 DC Power
If configured to disable power-up diagnostics, the PLC begins logic solution 100ms after the
voltage level of the power supply input reaches and maintains 24Vdc. The 24Vdc power
source for the PLC must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage level (see power supply
specifications for inrush requirements).

8.5.2 DC Inputs
Forty configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs. Eight
of these inputs can be used for High-Speed Counter inputs. When used as standard inputs,
they are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches,
and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 435mA.

VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 136

User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

8.5.3 DC Outputs
Micro PLC IC200UDD164 has 24 Sink-type DC outputs. All outputs are isolated between field
and logic and are switching positive voltage. The outputs have one common incoming
supply (VC) and one common ground (COM). The outputs are able to drive high inrush
currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected against negative voltage pulses. This
makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.

DC outputs can be used as standard, High-Speed Counter, Pulse-Width Modulated, Pulse

Train Outputs, or Pulse Train Outputs with Ramping.

8.5.4 Micro PLC IC200UDD164 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Forty 24Vdc positive or negative logic inputs
Outputs Twenty-four transistor outputs, 24Vdc.
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B or four Type A_ 32 or
one Type A_ 32 and one Type B_32
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I3, I5, I7: 8mA typical; Other inputs: 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I3, I5, I7: 2.7 kΩ; Other inputs: 4.7 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other Inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 1ms to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc/24Vdc
External Power Supply 12/24Vdc –10%, +20%
Maximum Load Current 0.5A per point (Q1 – Q24) at 24Vdc
Minimum Switching 10mA
Current
Maximum Inrush Current Q1–Q24: 2A for 20ms, 1 pulse

VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 137

User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Output Voltage Drop Q1– Q24: 0.3Vdc
OFF state leakage current 0.1mA
Response Time OFF to ON, ON to OFF: 1 mS maximum @ 24Vdc
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side, 500V RMS between
groups
Fuses None
Under-voltage shutdown Q1–Q24: 5V minimum, 8V maximum
DC short circuit current Q1–Q24: 0.7A minimum, 2A maximum
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter 100kHz
Frequency
Input Voltage ON: 18V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% of duty cycle at 100kHz
Count Registers 16/32 bits
Outputs
Load Voltage 12/24Vdc
Maximum Pulse/PWM PWM and PTO: 65kHz
Frequency
Types available Up to four HSC, PTO, PTO with Ramping and/or PWM outputs

8.5.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDD164

Figure 54

VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 138

User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

8.6 IC200UDR064
64 Point Micro PLC, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) Relay
Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDR064 accepts forty DC inputs and provides twenty-four
normally open 2 Amp relay outputs. It uses +24Vdc nominal input power for PLC operation.

8.6.1 DC Inputs
Forty configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs. Eight
of these inputs can be used for High-Speed Counter inputs. When used as standard inputs,
they are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches,
and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 435mA.

8.6.2 Relay Outputs

The twenty-four normally open Form A relay outputs (SPST-single pole single throw) can
control many types of load devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. The
switching capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps. An external source of AC or DC power
must be supplied to operate field devices.

The relay outputs can be configured as up to four HSC outputs. Relay outputs cannot be
used as Pulse Train or PWM outputs.

8.6.3 Micro PLC IC200UDR064 Specifications

Item Description
Weight 580 grams (1.28lbs)
Inputs Forty 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Twenty-four normally open 2 amp relay circuits
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B or four Type A_ 32 or
one Type A_ 32 and one Type B_32
+24Vdc Output Power 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
Supply
+5Vdc output of Serial Serial Port 1, pin 7:100mA maximum
Port
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc

VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 139

User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I3, I5, I7: 8mA typical; Other inputs: 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I3, I5, I7: 2.7 kΩ; Other inputs: 4.7 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other Inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 1ms to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS between
groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Maximum Resistive Load 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Solenoid Typical Operations
Voltage 2.0A 0.6A 200,000
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter 100kHz
Frequency
Input Voltage ON: 18V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% of duty cycle at 100kHz
Count Registers 16/32 bits
Outputs
Load Voltage Q1: 5/12/24V, Q2-Q4: See relay output specifications
Type available Up to four HSC outputs. Pulse outputs are not available.

VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 140

User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

8.6.4 Wiring Diagram, PLC IC200UDR064

Figure 55

8.7 IC200UDR164
64 Point Micro PLC, (40) 24Vdc In, (24) Relay
Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC IC200UDR164 accepts forty DC inputs and provides twenty-four
normally open 2 Amp relay outputs. It uses 100Vac to 240Vac nominal input power for PLC
operation.

8.7.1 DC Inputs
Forty configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs. Eight
of these inputs can be used for High-Speed Counter inputs. When used as standard inputs,
they are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches,
and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 435mA.

8.7.2 Relay Outputs

The twenty-four normally open Form A relay outputs (SPST-single pole single throw) can
control many types of load devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. The
switching capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps. An external source of AC or DC power
must be supplied to operate field devices.
VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 141
User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

The relay outputs can be configured as up to four HSC outputs. Relay outputs cannot be
used as Pulse Train or PWM outputs.

8.7.3 Micro PLC IC200 UDR164, Specifications

Item Description
Weight 580 grams (1.28lbs)
Inputs Forty 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Twenty-four normally open 2-amp relay circuits
High-Speed Counters Up to four Type A or one Type A and one Type B or four Type A_ 32 or
one Type A_ 32 and one Type B_32
+24Vdc Output Power 435mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
Supply
+5Vdc output of Serial Serial Port 1, pin 7:100mA maximum
Port
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10mS at 85 to 100Vac, 20mS at 100 to 265Vac
Inrush Current 30 Amp maximum at 200Vac, 40 Amp maximum at 265Vac
Inrush Time 2 ms for 40Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 200Vac 0.10 Amp typical at 100Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 26 VA
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I 3, I 5, I 7: 8mA typical; Other inputs: 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I 3, I 5, I 7: 2.7 kΩ; Other inputs: 4.7 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other Inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 1ms to 20ms configurable as regular input; 100µs as HSC input
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS between
groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating

VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 142

User Manual Chapter 8
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Maximum Resistive Load 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Solenoid Typical Operations
Voltage 2.0A 0.6A 200,000
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc
High-Speed Counter Input and Output Specifications
Maximum Counter 100kHz
Frequency
Input Voltage ON: 18V, OFF: 5V
Count Pulse Width 20% to 80% of duty cycle at 100kHz
Count Registers 16/32 bits
Outputs
Load Voltage Q1: 5/12/24V, Q2-Q4: See relay output specifications
Type available Up to four HSC outputs. Pulse outputs are not available.

8.7.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UDR164

Figure 56

VersaMax 64-Point Micro/Micro PLUS PLCs 143

User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 9: VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and

16-Point Expansion Units
This chapter consists of module datasheets for the following VersaMax Micro PLC
Expansion Units:

IC200UEC008 8 Points, (4) 24Vdc In, (4) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEC108 8 Points, (4) 24Vdc In, (4) 24Vdc Transistor Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEC208 8 Points, (4) 24Vdc In (4) Relay Out 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEI008 8 Points, (8) 24Vdc In, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEI016 16 Points, (16) 24Vdc In, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEO008 8 Points, (8) 24Vdc Output with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEO108 8 Points, (8) 24Vdc Transistor Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEO016 16 Points, (16) 24Vdc Output with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEO116 16 Points, (16) 24Vdc Transistor Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UER008 8 Points, (8) Relay Outputs, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UER016 16 Points, Relay Outputs, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX009 14 Points, (8) 120Vac In, (2) Relay Out at 10 Amps, (4) Relay Out at 2 Amps,
120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX010 14 Points, (8) 120Vac In, (6) 120Vac Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX011 14 Points, (8) 24Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX012 14 Points, (8) 24Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX013 14 Points, (8) 12Vdc In, (6) Relay Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX014 14 Points, (8) 24Vdc In, (6) 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX015 14 Points, (8) 12Vdc In, (6) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX122 14 Points, (8) 24Vdc In, (6) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 144
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.1 Features of VersaMax 8-, 14-, and 16-Point

Expansion Units
Modular Expansion Units can be used to increase the total I/O count of a Micro PLC. Up to
4 Expansion Units in any combination can be used with any 14-point to 64-point Micro PLC.
Expansion Units can be located up to 2 meters from the Micro PLC.

Figure 57

9.1.1 Removable Terminal Strips

VersaMax Expansion Units provide the wiring flexibility of removable terminal assemblies.
After turning off power to the Micro PLC, a terminal assembly and attached field wiring can
be separated from the Micro PLC by loosening two screws.

9.1.2 Expansion Connector

The connector on the left side of the Expansion Unit is used to connect to the Micro PLC or
to the outgoing connector on the previous Expansion Unit. The connector on the right side
of the Expansion Unit can be used to attach to the next Expansion Unit.

9.1.3 Status LEDs

LEDs on the Expansion Unit provide quick visual verification of operating status. In addition
to LEDs for Expansion Unit local Power and OK mode, there is an LED for each I/O point.

9.1.4 Cables
A 0.1-meter ribbon cable (IC200CBL501) is provided with each Expansion Unit. Cables are
also available in 0.5-meter (IC200CBL505) and 1 meter (IC200CBL510) lengths.

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 145
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.2 IC200UEC008
8 Point Expansion Unit, (4) 24Vdc Inputs, (4)
24Vdc Outputs with ESCP, 24Vdc Power
Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEC008 accepts four 24Vdc inputs and provides
four 24Vdc source-type transistor outputs with Electronic Short Circuit Protection. The
module requires +24Vdc nominal input power.

9.2.1 DC Inputs
The four 24 volt DC input circuits can have positive or negative logic characteristics. Inputs
are compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches.

The built-in +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input circuits.
The combination of input circuit current and external device current must not exceed 200
mA.

9.2.2 Transistor Outputs

Expansion Unit IC200UEC008 has four source-type high-current transistor outputs. All
outputs are isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage.

All outputs have electronic short-circuit protection; no fuses are needed to protect the
outputs.

An external source of 12/24Vdc power must be provided to power the outputs. The outputs
share this common incoming 24Vdc supply and one common ground. The outputs are able
to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected against negative
voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 146
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.2.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEC008 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Four 24Vdc input circuits
Outputs Four 24Vdc source-type transistor outputs with ESCP
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum(for input circuits and user devices)
DC Power Specifications
Range 24 –20%/+25%Vdc
Hold-up 3ms
Inrush Current 1 A maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10 ms for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.16 A typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 4W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time OFF to ON or ON to OFF: 4ms typical
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
DC Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12/24Vdc +10%/-15% (at VC)
Maximum Load Current 0.7A per point, 3A per common
Maximum Inrush Current
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V
OFF state Leakage Current 0.1mA
Response Time OFF to ON or ON to OFF: 0.05ms maximum at 24Vdc 0.2A
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500Vac between field side and
logic side
External power supply 12/24Vdc –10%, +20%
Fuse Not required
Minimum switching current 10mA

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 147
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.2.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEC008

Figure 58

9.3 IC200UEC108
8 Point Expansion Unit, (4) 24Vdc Inputs, (4)
24VC Transistor Outputs, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEC108 accepts four 24Vdc inputs and provides
four 24Vdc sink-type transistor outputs. It requires +24Vdc nominal input power.

9.3.1 DC Inputs
The four 24-volt DC input circuits can have positive or negative logic characteristics. Inputs
are compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches.

The built-in +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input circuits.
The combination of input circuit current and external device current must not exceed 200
mA.

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 148
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.3.2 Transistor Outputs

Expansion Unit IC200UEC108 has four sink-type high-current transistor outputs. All outputs
are isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage.

External fusing should be provided to protect the outputs. Otherwise, a load short can
damage the module output transistor, which is not user replaceable. Fast fuses are
recommended.

The outputs share one common incoming 24Vdc supply and one common ground. The
outputs are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected
against negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.

9.3.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEC108 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Four 24Vdc input circuits
Outputs Four 24Vdc sink-type transistor outputs
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
DC Power Specifications
Range 24 –20%/+25%Vdc
Hold-up 10ms at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 A maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10 ms for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.16 A typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 4W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time OFF to ON or ON to OFF: 4ms typical
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Transistor Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12/24Vdc +10%/-15% (at VC)
Maximum Load 0.7A per point, 3A per common
Maximum Inrush Current
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V
OFF state leakage 0.1mA
Response OFF to ON or ON to OFF: 0.05ms maximum at 24Vdc 0.2A

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 149
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500Vac between field side and
logic side
External power supply 12/24Vdc –10%, +20%
Fuses Not required
Minimum Switching Current 10mA

Figure 59

9.4 IC200UEC208
8 Point Expansion Unit, (4) 24Vdc Inputs, (4)
Relay Outputs, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEC208 accepts four 24Vdc inputs and provides
four normally open 2 Amp relay outputs that can control 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac output
devices. It requires +24Vdc nominal input power.

9.4.1 DC Inputs
The four DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs. Inputs are
compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic
proximity switches.

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 150
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

The Expansion Unit’s +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external
device current must not exceed 200 mA.

9.4.2 Relay Outputs

Four Form A (SPST: single-pole, single-throw) normally open relay outputs can control many
types of devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. An external source of AC
or DC power must be supplied to operate field devices.

9.4.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEC208 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Four 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Four normally open 2 amp relay circuits
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
DC Power Specifications
Range 24Vdc –20% / +25%
Hold-up 10 ms at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10 ms for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.16 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 4W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time OFF to ON or ON to OFF: 4ms typical
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side
500 V RMS between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA maximum
Maximum Load Current 2 Amps per point, 5 Amps per common
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Response Time ON to OFF, or OFF to ON: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 151
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage, Current: Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc Resistive 2A Solenoid 0.6A 200,000

9.4.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEC208

Figure 60

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 152
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.5 IC200UEI008
8 Point Expansion Unit, (8) 24Vdc Inputs,
24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEI016
16 Point Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc Inputs,
24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Units IC200UEI008 and IC200UEI016 accept 24Vdc inputs.
The modules require +24Vdc nominal input power.

9.5.1 DC Inputs
The DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs. Inputs are
compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic
proximity switches.

The Expansion Unit’s +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external
device current must not exceed 200 mA.

9.5.2 Expansion Units IC200UEI008 and IC200UEI016

Specifications
Item Description
Inputs IC200UEI008: Eight 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuit
IC200UEI016: Sixteen 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs None
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
DC Power Specifications
Range 24Vdc –20% / +25%
Hold-up 10 ms at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10 ms for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.16 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 4W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 4.8mA typical
Input Resistance 4.8 kΩ

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 153
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 3.0mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time ON to OFF or OFF to ON: 2ms typical
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups

9.5.3 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEI008

Figure 61

9.5.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEI016

Figure 62

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 154
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.6 IC200UEO008
8 Point Expansion Unit, (8) 24Vdc Outputs
with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEO016
16 Point Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc Outputs
with ESCP, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Units IC200UEO008 and IC200UEO016 provide 8 or 16 DC
source-type high-current transistor outputs, respectively. Outputs have Electronic Short
Circuit Protection. The modules require +24Vdc nominal input power.

9.6.1 Transistor Outputs

All outputs are isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage.
Outputs have electronic short-circuit protection; no fuses are needed to protect the
outputs.

An external source of 12/24Vdc power must be provided to power the outputs. The
outputs share one common incoming 24Vdc supply and one common ground. The
outputs are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected
against negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive
loads.

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 155
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.6.2 Expansion Units IC200UEO008 and IC200UEO016

Specifications
Item Description
Inputs None
Outputs IC200UEO008: Eight source-type 24Vdc transistor output circuits with ESCP
IC200UEO016: Sixteen source-type 24Vdc transistor output circuits with ESCP
DC Power Specifications
Range 24 –20%/+25%Vdc
Hold-up 10ms at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 A maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10 ms for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.16 A typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply 4W
Rating
Transistor Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12/24Vdc +10%/-15% (at VC)
Maximum Load 0.7A per point , 3A per common
Maximum Inrush 5.6 Amps
Current
Output Voltage 0.3V maximum
Drop
OFF state leakage 0.1mA
Response OFF to ON or ON to OFF: 0.05ms maximum at 24Vdc 0.2A
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500Vac between field side and logic side
External power 12/24Vdc –10%, +20%
supply
Fuses Not required
Minimum 10mA
switching current

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 156
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.6.3 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEO008

Figure 63

9.6.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEO016

Figure 64

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 157
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.7 IC200UEO108
8 Point Expansion Unit, (8) 24Vdc Transistor
Outputs, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEO116
16 Point Expansion Unit, (16) Transistor
Outputs, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Units IC200UEO108 and IC200UEO116 provide 8 and 16
DC sink-type outputs, respectively. These modules require +24Vdc nominal input power.

9.7.1 Transistor Outputs

The sink-type transistor outputs are isolated between field and logic and are switching
positive voltage.

External fusing should be provided to protect the outputs. Otherwise, a load short can
damage the module output transistor, which is not user replaceable. Fast fuses are
recommended.

The outputs share one common incoming 24Vdc supply and one common ground. The
outputs are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected
against negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive
loads.

9.7.2 Expansion Units IC200UEO108 and IC200UEO116

Specifications
Item Description
Inputs None
Outputs IC200UEO108: Eight sink-type DC transistor output circuits
IC200UEO116: Sixteen sink-type DC transistor output circuits
DC Power Specifications
Range 24 –20%/+25%Vdc
Hold-up 10ms at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 A maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10 ms for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.16 A typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 4W
Transistor Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12/24Vdc +10%/-15% (at VC)
Maximum Load 0.5A per point, 3A per common

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 158
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Maximum Inrush Current 5.6 Amps
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage 0.1mA maximum
Response OFF to ON or ON to OFF: 0.5ms
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500Vac between field side and
logic side
External power supply 10-30Vdc required to power the outputs.
Fuses Outputs should be fused externally.
Minimum Switching Current 1mA

9.7.3 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEO108

Figure 65

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 159
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.7.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEO116

Figure 66

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 160
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.8 IC200UER008
8 Point Expansion Unit, (8) Relay Outputs,
24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UER016
16 Point Expansion Unit, (16) Relay Outputs,
24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Units IC200UER008 and IC200UER016 provide 8 or 16
normally-open 2 Amp relay outputs, respectively. The outputs can control 5 to 30Vdc or 5
to 250Vac output devices. The unit requires +24Vdc nominal input power.

9.8.1 Relay Outputs

The Form A (SPST: single-pole, single-throw) normally-open relay outputs can control
many types of devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. An external source
of AC or DC power must be supplied to operate field devices.

9.8.2 Expansion Units IC200UER008 and IC200UER016

Specifications
Item Description
Inputs None
Outputs IC200UER008: Eight normally open 2 amp relay circuits
IC200UER016: Sixteen normally open 2 amp relay circuits
DC Power Specifications
Range 24 –20%/+25%Vdc
Hold-up 10ms at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 A maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10 ms for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.16 A typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 4W
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side
500 V RMS between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA maximum
Maximum Load Current 2 Amps per point, 5 Amps per common
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Response Time ON to OFF, or OFF to ON: 15 ms maximum

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 161
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage, Current: Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc Resistive 2A Solenoid 0.6A 200,000

9.8.3 Wiring Diagram, IC200UER008

Figure 67

9.8.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UER016

Figure 68

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 162
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.9 IC200UEX009
14 Point Expansion Unit, (8) 120Vac In, (2)
Relay Out at 10 Amps, (4) Relay Out at 2 Amps,
120/240Vac Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX009 accepts eight AC inputs and provides six
relay outputs: 2 at 10 Amps and 4 at 2 Amps. It requires 100Vac to 240Vac nominal input
power.

9.9.1 AC Inputs
The 120Vac input circuits are reactive (resistor/capacitor) inputs. The input circuits require
an AC power source: they cannot be used with a DC power source. Inputs are compatible
with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity
switches. Power to operate the field devices must be supplied.

9.9.2 Relay Outputs

The six normally open relay outputs can control many types of devices such as motor
starters, solenoids, and indicators. There are two individual 10 Amp relay outputs and one
group of four 2-Amp relay outputs. Power for the internal relay coils is provided by the
internal supply. Separate external sources of AC or DC power must be supplied to operate
field output devices.

9.9.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX009 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight AC inputs
Outputs Six relay outputs
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10 ms at 85 to 100Vac
Inrush Time 2 ms for 40Amp
Inrush Current 18 A maximum at 120Vac, 30 A maximum at 200Vac, 40 A
maximum at 265Vac
Input Current 0.05 A typical at 200Vac, 0.10 A typical at 100Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 11 VA
AC Input Specifications
Points/Common 4 (I1–I4) and (I5–I8)
Rated Load Voltage 85–132Vac, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 163
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Maximum Input Voltage 132V rms, 50/60 Hz
Input Current 8 mA rms (100Vac, 60 Hz)
Voltage ON: minimum 80V rms, 4.5 mA rms, OFF: maximum 30V rms, 2
mA rms
Response Time OFF to ON: maximum 25mS, ON to OFF: maximum 30mS
Isolation 1500V rms field side to logic side, 500V rms between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS
between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac 10 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac 10 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
On Response Time 15 ms maximum
Off Response Time 15 ms maximum
Fuse None
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Current: Lamp and Typical
Resistive Solenoid Operations
2.0A 0.6A 200,000
10.0A 4.0A 100,000
4.0A 1.0A 200,000

9.9.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX009

Figure 69

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 164
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.10 IC200UEX010
14 Point Expansion Unit, (8) 120Vac In, (6)
120Vac Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX010 accepts eight AC inputs and provides six
AC outputs. The module requires 100Vac to 240Vac nominal input power.

9.10.1 AC Inputs
The eight 120Vac input circuits are reactive (resistor/capacitor) inputs. The input circuits
require an AC power source: they cannot be used with a DC power source. Inputs are
compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic
proximity switches. Power to operate the field devices must be supplied.

9.10.2 AC Outputs
The six 120/240Vac, 0.5 Amp triac outputs are provided in isolated groups. The commons
are not tied together inside the module. This allows each group to be used on different
phases of the AC supply or to be powered from the same supply. Each group is protected
with a replaceable 3.15 amp fuse for its common. Also, an RC snubber is provided for each
output to protect against transient electrical noise on the power line.

AC power to operate loads connected to outputs must be supplied from an external source.

This module provides a high degree of inrush current (10x the rated current) which makes
the outputs suitable for controlling a wide range of inductive and incandescent loads.

9.10.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX010 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight AC inputs
Outputs Six AC outputs
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10 ms at 85 to 100Vac, 20 ms at 100 to 264Vac
Inrush Time 2 ms for 40Amp
Inrush Current 18 A maximum at 120Vac, 30 A maximum at 200Vac, 40 A
maximum at 265Vac
Input Current 0.05 A typical at 200Vac, 0.10 A typical at 100Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 11 VA
AC Input Specifications
Points/Common 4 (I1–I4) and (I5–I8)
Rated Load Voltage 85–132Vac, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 165
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Maximum Input Voltage 132V rms, 50/60 Hz

Input Current 8 mA rms (100Vac, 60 Hz)
Voltage ON: minimum 80Vac rms, 4.5 mA rms, OFF: maximum 30Vac rms, 2
mA rms
Response Time OFF to ON: maximum 25mS, ON to OFF maximum 30mS
Isolation 1500V rms field side to logic side, 500V rms between groups
AC Output Specifications
Rated Load Voltage 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Maximum Resistive Load 0.5 Amp per point
Current
Maximum UL Pilot Duty 0.5 Amp per point at 240Vac, 0.6 Amp maximum on C1, 1.2 Amps
Rating maximum on C2
Maximum Inrush Current 5A (1 period)/point, 10A (1 period)/common
Maximum voltage drop 1.5 V RMS
when ON
Maximum leak current when 1.8 mA RMS (115Vac), 3.5 mA RMS (230Vac)
OFF
Response Time (Maximum) OFF to ON: 1 mS, ON to OFF: 1/2 cycle + 1 mS
Isolation 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups

9.10.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX010

Figure 70

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 166
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.11 IC200UEX011
14-Point Expansion Unit with AC Power, (8)
24Vdc Inputs, (6) Relay Outputs
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX011 accepts eight DC inputs and provides six
normally-open 2 Amp relay outputs that can control 5-30Vdc or 5-250Vac output devices.
The module requires 100Vac to 240Vac nominal input power.

9.11.1 DC Inputs
The eight DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs. Inputs are
compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic
proximity switches.

Isolated +24Vdc output power is available for field devices, up to 200mA maximum.

9.11.2 Relay Outputs

The six Form A (SPST: single-pole, single-throw) normally open relay outputs can control
many types of devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. Power for the
internal relay coils is provided by the 24Vdc internal supply. An external source of AC or DC
power must be supplied to operate field devices.

9.11.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX011 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Six normally open 2 Amp relay circuits
+24Vdc Output Power 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
Supply
Relay Output Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10 ms at 85 to 100Vac
Inrush Time 2 ms for 40Amp
Inrush Current 18 A maximum at 120Vac, 30 A maximum at 200Vac, 40 A maximum
at 265Vac
Input Current 0.05 A typical at 200Vac, 0.10 A typical at 100Vac
Input Power Supply 13 VA
Rating
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 167
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups, if one
group is powered by an external 24V power supply.
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS between
groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Maximum Resistive Load 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Minimum Load 1mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
On Response Time 15 ms maximum
Off Response Time 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Solenoid Typical Operations
Voltage 240Vac, 2A 0.6A 200,000
120Vac, 24Vdc

9.11.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX011

Figure 71

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 168
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.12 IC200UEX012
14-Point Expansion Unit with 24DC Power, (8)
24Vdc Inputs, (6) Relay Outputs
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX012 accepts eight DC inputs and provides six
normally open 2 Amp relay outputs that can control 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac output
devices. The module requires +24Vdc nominal input power.

9.12.1 DC Inputs
The eight DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs. Inputs are
compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic
proximity switches.

The Expansion Unit’s isolated +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the
DC input circuits at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and
external device current must not exceed 200 mA.

9.12.2 Relay Outputs

The six Form A (SPST: single-pole, single-throw) normally-open relay outputs can control
many types of devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. An external source
of AC or DC power must be supplied to operate field devices.

9.12.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX012 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Six normally open 2 amp relay circuits
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
DC Power Specifications
Range 24Vdc –20% / +25%
Hold-up 10 ms at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10 ms for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.16 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 4W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 169
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side
500 V RMS between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 1mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
On Response Time 15 ms maximum
Off Response Time 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage, Current: Resistive 2A Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc Solenoid 0.6A 200,000

9.12.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX012

Figure 72

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 170
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.13 IC200UEX013
14-Point Expansion Unit with 12Vdc Power, (8)
12Vdc Inputs, (6) Relay Outputs
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX013 accepts eight 12Vdc inputs and
provides six normally-open 2 Amp relay outputs that can control 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
output devices. The module requires +12Vdc nominal input power.

9.13.1 DC Inputs
The eight 12Vdc inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs. Inputs
are compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches.

The Expansion Unit’s isolated +12Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power
the DC input circuits at about 7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current
and external device current must not exceed 200 mA.

9.13.2 Relay Outputs

The six Form A (SPST: single-pole, single-throw) normally-open relay outputs can control
many types of devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. Power for the
internal relay coils is provided by the internal supply. An external source of AC or DC power
must be supplied to operate field devices.

9.13.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX013 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight 12Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Six normally open 2 amp relay circuits
+12Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
DC Power Specifications
Range 9.6Vdc - 15Vdc
Hold-up 3.0mS
Inrush Current 9.2A typical at 12Vdc
Inrush Time 200ms typical
Input Current 300mA typical at 12Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 4W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 8
Rated Input Voltage 12 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 volts DC

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 171
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Input Current 9.0mA typical
Input Impedance 1.3 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 9.5Vdc minimum, OFF: 2.5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 6.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms (user configurable)
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side
500 V RMS between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
On Response Time 15 ms maximum
Off Response Time 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
2A Solenoid 0.6A 200,000

9.13.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX013

Figure 73

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 172
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.14 IC200UEX014
14-Point Expansion Unit with 24DC Power, (8)
24DC Inputs, (2) High-Current and (4) Low-
Current Transistor Outputs
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX014 accepts eight DC inputs and provides two
low-current and four high-current DC transistor outputs. It requires +24Vdc nominal input
power.

9.14.1 DC Inputs
The eight 24 volt DC input circuits can have positive or negative logic characteristics. Inputs
are compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches.

The built-in isolated +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits. The combination of input circuit current and external device current must not
exceed 200 mA.

9.14.2 Transistor Outputs

Expansion Unit UEX014 has two high-current transistor outputs (Q1 and Q2) and four low-
current transistor outputs (Q3 to Q6). All outputs are isolated between field and logic and
are switching positive voltage.

External fusing should be provided to protect the outputs. Otherwise, a load short can
damage the module output transistor, which is not user replaceable. Fast fuses are
recommended.

The outputs share one common incoming 24Vdc supply and one common ground. The
outputs are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected
against negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 173
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.14.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX014 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Four low-current and two high-current DC transistor output circuits
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum, (for input circuits and user devices)
DC Power Specifications
Range 24 –20%/+25%Vdc
Hold-up 10ms at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 A maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10 ms for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.16 A typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 4W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Transistor Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12/24Vdc +10%/-15% (at VC)
Maximum Load (see below) 1A per point (Q1 - Q2) at 100 % ON duration at 24Vdc
0.5A per point (Q3 - Q6) at 100 % ON duration at 12Vdc
0.75A per point (Q3 - Q6) at 100 % ON duration at 24Vdc
Maximum Inrush Current Q1, Q2: 8A for 20ms, 1 pulse, Q3, Q4, Q5, Q6: 4A for 20ms, 1
pulse
Output Voltage Drop 0.5V maximum
OFF state leakage 100A maximum
Response OFF to ON or ON to OFF: 0.1ms maximum at 24Vdc, 0.2A
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500Vac between field side and
logic side
External power supply 10-30Vdc required to power the outputs.
Fuses Outputs should be fused externally.

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 174
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.14.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX014

Figure 74

The maximum current that can be used for output points Q1 and Q2 is lower for ambient
temperatures above 50°C.

Figure 75

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 175
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.15 IC200UEX015
14-Point Expansion Unit with 12DC Power, (8)
12DC Inputs, (6) 12Vdc Outputs
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX015 accepts eight DC inputs and provides six
DC transistor outputs. It requires +12Vdc nominal input power.

9.15.1 DC Inputs
The eight 12 volt DC inputs can have positive or negative logic characteristics. Inputs are
compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic
proximity switches.

The built-in isolated +12Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits. The combination of input circuit current and external device current must not
exceed 200 mA.

9.15.2 Transistor Outputs

All outputs are isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage.

External fusing should be provided to protect the outputs. Otherwise, a load short can
damage the module output transistor, which is not user replaceable. Fast fuses are
recommended.

The outputs share one common incoming 12Vdc supply and one common ground. The
outputs are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected
against negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 176
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.15.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX015 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight 12Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Six 12Vdc output circuits
+12Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
DC Power Specifications
Range 9.6Vdc to 15Vdc
Hold-up 3.0mS
Inrush Current 9.2A typical at 12Vdc
Inrush Time 200ms typical
Input Current 300mA typical at 12Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 4W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 8
Rated Input Voltage 12 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 volts DC
Input Current 9.0mA typical
Input Impedance 1.3 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 9.5Vdc minimum, OFF: 2.5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 6.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms (user configurable)
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Transistor Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc +20%, -20%
Maximum Load 0.7A per circuit, 4A per common
Maximum Inrush Current 4A for 20mS
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage 0.1mA
Response OFF to ON or ON to OFF: 0.1ms maximum 12Vdc 0.2A
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500Vac between field side and
logic side
External power supply 12Vdc required to power the outputs.
Fuse Outputs should be fused externally.

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 177
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.15.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX015

Figure 76

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 178
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.16 IC200UEX122
14-Point Expansion Unit with 24DC Power, (8)
24DC Inputs, (2) High-Current and (4) Low-
Current Transistor Outputs with ESCP
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX122 accepts eight DC inputs and provides two
low-current and four high-current DC transistor outputs. The outputs have electronic short
circuit protection. The module requires +24Vdc nominal input power.

9.16.1 DC Inputs
The 24 volt DC input circuits can have positive or negative logic characteristics. Inputs are
compatible with a wide range of devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic
proximity switches.

The built-in isolated +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits. The combination of input circuit current and external device current must not
exceed 200 mA.

9.16.2 Outputs
Expansion Unit UEX122 has two high-current transistor outputs (Q1 and Q2) and four low-
current transistor outputs (Q3 to Q6). They can be used as positive or negative logic
standard inputs.

All outputs are isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage.

All six outputs have electronic short-circuit protection; no fuses are needed to protect the
outputs.

An external source of 12/24Vdc power must be provided to power the outputs. The outputs
share this common incoming 24Vdc supply and one common ground. The outputs are able
to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected against negative
voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 179
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.16.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX122 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Eight 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Four low-current and two high-current DC transistor output
circuits with ESCP
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10ms at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 A maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10 ms for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.16 A typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 4W
DC Input Specifications
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Impedance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
DC Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12/24Vdc +10%/-15% (at VC)
Maximum Load Current Q1 and Q2: 1A, 3.4A per common, Q3 to Q6: 0.7A per point , 3.4A
per common
Maximum Inrush Current Q1, Q2: 8A for 20ms, 1 pulse, Q3, Q4, Q5, Q6: 4A for 20ms, 1
pulse
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V
OFF state Leakage Current 0.1mA
Response Time OFF to ON or ON to OFF: 0.05ms maximum at 24Vdc
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500Vac between field side and
logic side
External power supply 12/24Vdc –10%, +20%
Fuse Not required
Minimum switching current 10mA

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 180
User Manual Chapter 9
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

9.16.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX122

Figure 77

VersaMax Micro PLC 8-, 14-, and 16-Point Expansion Units 181
User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 10: VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point

Expansion Units
This chapter consists of module datasheets for the following VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion
Units:

IC200UEX209 28 Point Expansion Unit, (16) 120Vac In, (2) Relay Out at 10 Amps, (10) Relay Out
at 2 Amps, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX210 28 Point Expansion Unit, (16) 120Vac In, (12) 120Vac Out, 120/240Vac Power
Supply
IC200UEX211 28 Point Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX212 28 Point Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX213 28 Point Expansion Unit, (16) 12Vdc In, (12) Relay Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX214 28 Point Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX215 28 Point Expansion Unit, (16) 12Vdc In, (12) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX222 28 Point Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc In, (12) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, 24Vdc Power
Supply

10.1 Features of VersaMax 28-Point Micro PLC

Expansion Units
Modular 28-point Expansion Units can be used to increase the total I/O count of a Micro PLC.
Expansion Units can be used with any 14- to 64-point Micro PLC. Expansion Units can be
located up to 2 meters from the Micro PLC.

Figure 78

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 182

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.1.1 Removable Terminal Strips

The removable terminal assemblies are protected by hinged covers. After turning off power
to the Expansion Unit, a terminal assembly and attached field wiring can be separated from
the Expansion Unit by removing two screws.

10.1.2 Expansion Connector

The connector on the left side of the Expansion Unit is used to connect to the Micro PLC or
to the outgoing connector on the previous Expansion Unit. The connector on the right side
of the Expansion Unit can be used to attach to the next Expansion Unit.

10.1.3 Status LEDs

LEDs on the Expansion Unit provide quick visual verification of operating status. In addition
to LEDs Expansion Unit local Power and OK mode, there is an LED for each I/O point.

10.1.4 Cables
A 0.1 meter ribbon cable (IC200CBL501) is provided with each Expansion Unit. Cables are
also available in 0.5 meter (IC200CBL505) and 1 meter (IC200CBL510) lengths.

10.2 IC200UEX209
28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 120Vac
In, (2/10) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX209 accepts sixteen AC inputs and provides
two relay outputs at 10 Amps and ten relay outputs at 2 Amps. It uses 100Vac to 240Vac
nominal input power.

10.2.1 AC Inputs
The 120Vac input circuits are reactive (resistor/capacitor) inputs. The input circuits require
an AC power source: they cannot be used with a DC power source. Inputs are compatible
with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic
proximity switches. Power to operate the field devices must be supplied.

10.2.2 Relay Outputs

The relay outputs can control many types of load devices such as motor starters, solenoids,
and indicators. The switching capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps. An external source
of AC or DC power must be supplied to operate field devices.

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 183

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.2.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX209 Specifications

Inputs 16 AC inputs
Outputs 2 relay outputs at 10 Amps, 10 relay outputs at 2 Amps
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 –15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 –5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10ms at 85-100Vac, 20ms at 100-264Vac
Inrush Time 2ms for 40 Amp
Inrush Current 30 Amp maximum at 200Vac, 40 Amp maximum at 265Vac
Input Current 0.10 Amp typical at 100Vac, 0.06 Amp typical at 200Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 16 VA
AC Input Specifications
Points/Common 4 (I1–I4) and (I5–I8)
Rated Load Voltage 85–132Vac, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Maximum Input Voltage 132V rms, 50/60 Hz
Input Current 8 mA rms (100Vac, 60 Hz)
Voltage ON: minimum 80V rms, 4.5 mA rms, OFF: maximum 30V rms, 2
mA rms
Response Time OFF to ON: maximum 25 ms, ON to OFF: maximum 30 ms
Isolation 1500V rms field side to logic side, 500V rms between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side
500 V RMS between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac 10 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac 10 amps at24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle 14 amps per half cycle
On Response Time 15 ms maximum
Off Response Time 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Solenoid Typical
Voltage 2.0A 0.6A Operations
10.0A 4.0A 100,000
4.0A 1.0A 100,000
200,000

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 184

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.2.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX209

Figure 79

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 185

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.3 IC200UEX210
28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16)
120Vac In, (12) 120Vac Out, 120/240Vac
Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX210 accepts sixteen AC inputs and provides
twelve AC outputs. It uses 100Vac to 240Vac nominal input power.

10.3.1 AC Inputs
The 120Vac input circuits are reactive (resistor/capacitor) inputs. The input circuits require
an AC power source: they cannot be used with a DC power source. Inputs are compatible
with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic
proximity switches. Power to operate the field devices must be supplied.

10.3.2 AC Outputs
The 120/240Vac, 0.5 Amp triac outputs are provided in isolated groups. The commons are
not tied together inside the module. This allows each group to be used on different phases
of the AC supply or to be powered from the same supply. Each group is protected with a
replaceable 3.15 amp fuse for its common. Also, an RC snubber is provided for each output
to protect against transient electrical noise on the power line.

AC power to operate loads connected to outputs must be supplied from an external

source.

This module provides a high degree of inrush current (10x the rated current) which makes
the outputs suitable for controlling a wide range of inductive and incandescent loads.

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 186

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.3.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX210 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs 16 AC inputs
Outputs 12 AC outputs
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10ms at 85-100Vac, 20ms at 100-264Vac
Inrush Time 2ms for 40 Amp
Inrush Current 30 Amp maximum at 200Vac, 40 Amp maximum at 265Vac
Input Current 0.10 Amp typical at 100Vac, 0.06 Amp typical at 200Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 16 VA
AC Input Specifications
Points/Common 4 (I1–I4) and (I5–I8)
Rated Load Voltage 85–132Vac, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Maximum Input Voltage 132V rms, 50/60 Hz
Input Current 8 mA rms (100Vac, 60 Hz)
Voltage ON minimum 80V rms, 4.5 mA rms, OFF: maximum 30V rms, 2
mA rms
Response Time OFF to ON: maximum 25 ms< ON to OFF: maximum 30 ms
Isolation 1500V rms field side to logic side, 500V rms between groups
AC Output Specifications
Rated Load Voltage 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac, 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Maximum Resistive Load 0.5 Amp per point
Current
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 0.5 Amp per point at 240Vac
0.6 Amp maximum on C1 and C3
1.2 Amps maximum on C2 and C4
Maximum Inrush Current 5A (1 period)/point, 10A (1 period)/common
Maximum voltage drop when 1.5 V RMS
ON
Maximum leak current when 1.8 mA RMS (115Vac), 3.5 mA RMS (230Vac)
OFF
Response Time (Maximum) OFF to ON: 1 mS, ON to OFF: 1/2 cycle + 1 ms
Isolation 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 187

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.3.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX210

Figure 80

10.4 IC200UEX211
28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc
In, (12) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX211 accepts sixteen DC inputs and provides
twelve normally-open 2 Amp relay outputs. It uses 100Vac to 240Vac nominal input power.

10.4.1 DC Inputs
The sixteen configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic inputs. Inputs
are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches. The +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to
power the DC input circuits. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 200 mA.

10.4.2 Relay Outputs (Q1 – Q12)

The twelve Form A (SPST-single pole single throw) normally open relay outputs can control
many types of load devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. The switching
capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps. An external source of AC or DC power must be
supplied to operate field devices.

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 188

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.4.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX211 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Sixteen 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Twelve normally open 2 amp relay circuits
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10ms at 85 to 100Vac, 20ms at 100 to 265Vac
Inrush Current 30 Amp maximum at 200Vac, 40 Amp maximum at 265Vac
Inrush Time 2 ms for 40Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 200Vac, 0.10 Amp typical at 100Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 26 VA
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 16
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms configurable
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS
between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Solenoid Typical
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2.0A 0.6A Operations
200,000

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 189

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.4.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX211

Figure 81

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 190

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.5 IC200UEX212
28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc
In, (12) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX212 accepts sixteen DC inputs and provides
twelve normally-open 2 Amp relay outputs. It uses +24Vdc nominal input power.

10.5.1 DC Power
The 24Vdc power source must have enough transient current capability to support the
inrush current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage. The +24Vdc supply can
be used for input devices and to power the DC input circuits at about 7.5 mA per input. The
combination of input circuit current and external device current must not exceed 200 mA.

10.5.2 DC Inputs
Sixteen configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic inputs. Inputs are
compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches.

10.5.3 Relay Outputs (Q1 – Q12)

Twelve Form A (SPST-single pole single throw) normally-open relay outputs can control
many types of load devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. The switching
capacity of each of these circuits is 2A. An external source of AC or DC power must be
supplied to operate field devices.

10.5.4 Expansion Unit IC200UEX212 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Sixteen 24Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Twelve normally open 2 amp relay circuits
DC Power Specifications
Range 24 -20%, +25%Vdc
Hold-up 10ms at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10ms for 1 A
Input Current 0.30 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 8W
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 16
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 191

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms configurable
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side
500 V RMS between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 1 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2A Solenoid 0.6A 200,000

10.5.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX212

Figure 82

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 192

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.6 IC200UEX213
28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 12Vdc
In, (12) Relay Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX213 accepts sixteen 12Vdc inputs and
provides twelve normally open 2 Amp relay outputs. It uses +12Vdc nominal input power.

10.6.1 DC Power
The 12Vdc power source must have enough transient current capability to support the
inrush current of the power supply and to maintain a 12Vdc voltage level.

10.6.2 DC Inputs
Sixteen configurable 12Vdc inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs.
Inputs are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit
switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The 12Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input circuits at about
7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device current must
not exceed 200 mA.

10.6.3 Relay Outputs (Q1 – Q12)

Twelve Form A (SPST-single pole single throw) normally open relay outputs can control
many types of load devices such as motor starters, solenoids, and indicators. The switching
capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps. An external source of AC or DC power must be
supplied to operate field devices.

10.6.4 Expansion Unit IC200UEX213 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Sixteen 12Vdc positive/negative logic input circuits
Outputs Twelve normally open 2 amp relay circuits
DC Power Specifications
Range 9.6Vdc - 15Vdc
+12Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
Hold-up 3.0mS
Inrush Current 9.6A typical at 12Vdc
Inrush Time 200ms typical
Input Current 480mA typical at 12Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 8W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 16

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 193

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Rated Input Voltage 12 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 volts DC
Input Current 9.0mA typical
Input Impedance 1.3 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON : 9.5Vdc minimum, OFF: 2.5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 6.5mA maximum , OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms (user configurable)
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side
500 V RMS between groups
Leakage Current 15 mA maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Minimum Load 1 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
On Response Time 15 ms maximum
Off Response Time 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical Operations
2A Solenoid 0.6A 200,000

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 194

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.6.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX213

Figure 83

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 195

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.7 IC200UEX214
28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc
In, (12) 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX214 accepts sixteen DC inputs and provides
four low-current and eight high-current DC transistor outputs. It uses +24Vdc nominal input
power.

10.7.1 DC Power
The 24Vdc power source must have enough transient current capability to support the
inrush current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage level.

10.7.2 DC Inputs
Sixteen configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic inputs. The inputs
are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches.

The 24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input circuits at about
7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device current must
not exceed 200 mA.

10.7.3 Transistor Outputs

Twelve positive-logic transistor output circuits can be used to switch devices like valves,
lamps or contactors. External fusing should be provided to protect the outputs. Otherwise,
a load short could damage the module output transistor, which is not user replaceable. Fast
fuses are recommended.

Outputs are grouped in two groups with separated incoming supply. Each group contains 4
outputs with a maximum load of 0.5A and 2 outputs with a maximum load of 1A.

All outputs are isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage. The
outputs have one common incoming supply (VC) and one common ground (COM). The
outputs are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected
against negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 196

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.7.4 Expansion Unit IC200UEX214 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Sixteen 24Vdc positive logic inputs in four groups of four
Outputs Twelve transistor outputs, 24Vdc.
DC Power Specifications
Range 24 -20%, +25%Vdc
Hold-up 10ms at 19.2Vdc
+24Vdc Output Power Supply 200mA maximum (for input circuits an user devices)
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10ms for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Transistor Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc/24Vdc (24Vdc +10% / -43% input at V1,C1)
Maximum Load (See below) 1.0A per point (Q1, Q2, Q11, Q12) at 24Vdc at 100% ON duration
0.75A per point (Q3 - Q10) at 24Vdc at 100 % ON duration
0.5A per point (Q3 - Q10) at 12Vdc at 100 % ON duration
Maximum Inrush Current Q1,Q2,Q11,Q12: 8A for 20ms, 1 pulse, Q3-Q10: 4A for 20ms, 1
pulse
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage 100A maximum
Response Time OFF to ON : 0.1ms maximum (24Vdc, 0.2A)
ON to OFF : 0.1ms maximum (24Vdc, 0.2A)
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side, 500V RMS between
groups
External Fuse Recommended

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 197

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

The maximum current that can be used for output points Q1, Q2, Q11 and Q12 is lower for
ambient temperatures above 50°C, as indicated in the following figure:

Figure 84

10.7.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX214

Figure 85

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 198

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.8 IC200UEX215
28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 12Vdc
In, (12) 12Vdc Out, 12Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX215 accepts sixteen 12Vdc inputs and
provides twelve DC transistor outputs. It requires +12Vdc nominal input power.

10.8.1 DC Power
The 12Vdc power source must have enough transient current capability to support the
inrush current of the power supply and to maintain a 12Vdc voltage level.

10.8.2 DC Inputs
Sixteen configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic inputs. The inputs
are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches.

The 12Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input circuits at about
7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device current must
not exceed 200 mA.

10.8.3 Transistor Outputs

Expansion Unit IC200UEX215 has four high-current transistor outputs (Q1, Q2, Q11, and
Q12) and eight low-current transistor outputs (Q3 to Q10). All outputs are isolated between
field and logic and are switching positive voltage.

Outputs are grouped in two groups with separated incoming supply. Each group contains 4
outputs with a maximum load of 0.5A and 2 outputs with a maximum load of 1A. Each group
of 6 outputs has one common incoming supply (V1, V2) and one common ground (C1, C2).
The outputs are able to drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are
protected against negative voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and
inductive loads.

Outputs should be fused externally. Otherwise, a load short can damage the module output
transistor, which is not user replaceable. Fast fuses are recommended.

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 199

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.8.4 Expansion Unit IC200UEX215 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Sixteen 12Vdc positive logic inputs in four groups of four
Outputs Twelve transistor outputs, 12Vdc.
+12Vdc Output Power 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
Supply
DC Power Specifications
Range 9.6Vdc to 15Vdc
Hold-up 3.0mS
Inrush Current 9.6A typical at 12Vdc
Inrush Time 200ms typical
Input Current 480mA typical at 12Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 8W
DC Input Specifications
Number of Inputs 16
Rated Input Voltage 12 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 15 volts DC
Input Current 9.0mA typical
Input Resistance 1.3 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 9.5Vdc minimum, OFF: 2.5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 6.5mA maximum , OFF: 1.6mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms (user configurable)
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
DC Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc (+20%, -20%)
Maximum Load 0.7A per point (Q1 - Q12) at 24Vdc at 100 % ON duration, 4A per
common
Maximum Inrush Current 4A for 20mS
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage 0.1mA maximum
Response Time OFF to ON or ON to OFF : 0.1ms maximum (12Vdc)
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side, 500V RMS between
groups
Fuse Outputs should be fused externally.

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 200

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.8.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX215

Figure 86

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 201

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.9 IC200UEX222
28 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (16) 24Vdc
In, (12) 24Vdc Out with ESCP, 24Vdc Power
Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX222 accepts sixteen DC inputs and provides
twelve 24Vdc outputs. The outputs have electronic short circuit protection. The module
uses +24Vdc nominal input power.

10.9.1 DC Power
The 24Vdc power source must have enough transient current capability to support the
inrush current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage level. 24Vdc output
power is available for field devices, up to 200mA maximum.

10.9.2 DC Inputs
Sixteen configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic inputs. The inputs
are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches.

The +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input circuits at about
7.5 mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device current must
not exceed 200 mA.

10.9.3 Transistor Outputs

Twelve positive-logic DC outputs can be used to switch devices like valves, lamps or
contactors. Outputs provide electronic short-circuit protection.

Outputs are grouped in three groups with separated incoming supply. Each group contains
4 outputs with a maximum load of 0.5A and 4 outputs with a maximum load of 1A.

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 202

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

10.9.4 Expansion Unit IC200UEX222 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Sixteen 24Vdc positive logic inputs in four groups of four
Outputs Twelve transistor outputs, 24Vdc
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10ms at 19.2Vdc
24Vdc Output Power 200mA maximum (for input circuits and user devices)
Supply
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10ms for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current 7.5mA typical
Input Resistance 2.8 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 15Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.5mA minimum
Response Time 0.5 to 20ms.
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
DC Output Specifications
Voltage Range Q1 – Q12: 12/24Vdc +10%, -15%
External Power Supply (for 12/24V -10%, +20%
supplying power to the V
terminal)
Maximum Load Current Q1 and Q2: 1A per point, Q3 - Q12: 0.7A per point
Minimum Switching 10mA
Current
Maximum Inrush Current Q1, Q2,Q11,Q12: 8A for 20ms, 1 pulse, Q3-Q10: 4A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Output Voltage Drop Q1– Q12: 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage current 0.1mA
Response Time OFF to ON or ON to OFF: 0.05ms maximum @ 24Vdc
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side
500V RMS between groups
Fuses Not required
Under-voltage shutdown Q1 - Q12: 5V minimum, 8V maximum
DC short circuit current Q1 – Q12: 0.7A minimum, 2A maximum

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 203

User Manual Chapter 10
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Peak short circuit current 4A maximum
Delay time of peak short 100μS
circuit current
Delay time of current limit 100μS

10.9.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX222

Figure 87

VersaMax Micro PLC 28-Point Expansion Units 204

User Manual Chapter 11
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 11: VersaMax Micro PLC 64-Point

Expansion Units
This chapter consists of module datasheets for the following VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion
Units:

IC200UEX064 64-point (40) 24Vdc In; (24) Relay Out; 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX164 64-point (40) 24Vdc In; (24) Relay Out; 120/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX264 64-point (40) 24Vdc In; (4) LCDC 24Vdc Out; (16) LCDC 24Vdc Out with ESCP; (4)
HCDC 24Vdc with ESCP; 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX364 64-point (40) 24Vdc In; (24) LCDC 24Vdc Out, 24Vdc Power Supply

Note: The 64-point Expansion Units are supported on Micro PLUS PLCs (20/40/64-point Micro PLCs with
release 4.0 or later firmware).

11.1 Features of VersaMax 64-Point Micro PLC

Expansion Units
Modular 64-point Expansion Units can be used to increase the total I/O count of a Micro PLC.
The 64-point Expansion Units can be used with any 20, 40 or 64-point Micro PLC. Expansion
Units can be located up to 2 meters from the Micro PLC.

Input filtering is not supported for 64-point Expansion Units.

Figure 88

11.1.1 Removable Terminal Strips

The removable terminal assemblies are protected by hinged covers. After turning off power
to the Expansion Unit, a terminal assembly and attached field wiring can be separated from
the Expansion Unit by removing two screws.

VersaMax Micro PLC 64-Point Expansion Units 205

User Manual Chapter 11
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

11.1.2 Expansion Connector

The connector on the left side of the Expansion Unit is used to connect to the Micro PLC or
to the outgoing connector on the previous Expansion Unit. The connector on the right side
of the Expansion Unit can be used to attach to the next Expansion Unit.

11.1.3 Status LEDs

LEDs on the Expansion Unit provide quick visual verification of operating status. In addition
to LEDs Expansion Unit local Power and OK mode, there is an LED for each I/O point.

11.1.4 Cables
A 0.1 meter ribbon cable (IC200CBL501) is provided with each Expansion Unit. Cables are
also available in 0.5 meter (IC200CBL505) and 1 meter (IC200CBL510) lengths.

11.2 IC200UEX064
64 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (40) 24Vdc
In, (24) Relay Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX064 accepts forty DC inputs and provides
twenty-four relay outputs. It uses 24Vdc nominal input power.

11.2.1 DC Inputs
The forty configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs.
When used as standard inputs, they are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such
as pushbuttons, limit switches, and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 435mA.

11.2.2 Relay Outputs

The relay outputs can control many types of load devices such as motor starters, solenoids,
and indicators. The switching capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps. An external source
of AC or DC power must be supplied to operate field devices.

VersaMax Micro PLC 64-Point Expansion Units 206

User Manual Chapter 11
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

11.2.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX064 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Forty 24Vdc positive or negative logic inputs
Outputs Twenty-four normally open 2-Amp relay circuits
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I3, I5, I7: 8mA typical
Other inputs: 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I3, I5, I7: 2.7 kΩ
Other inputs: 4.7 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON: 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other inputs: ON: 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA maximum
Response Time (Input Lag) I1, I3, I5, I7: 1.5ms maximum
Other inputs: 2ms maximum
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side,
500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS between
groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Maximum Resistive Load 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations

VersaMax Micro PLC 64-Point Expansion Units 207

User Manual Chapter 11
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Contact Life: Electrical Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical
Voltage 2.0A Solenoid Operations
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 0.6A 200,000

11.2.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX064

Figure 89

11.3 IC200UEX164
64 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (40) 24Vdc
In, (24) Relay Out, 120/240Vac Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX164 accepts forty DC inputs and provides
twenty-four relay outputs. It uses 100Vac to 240Vac nominal input power.

11.3.1 DC Inputs
The forty configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs.
They are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches,
and electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power the DC input
circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 435 mA.

VersaMax Micro PLC 64-Point Expansion Units 208

User Manual Chapter 11
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

11.3.2 Relay Outputs

The relay outputs can control many types of load devices such as motor starters, solenoids,
and indicators. The switching capacity of each of these circuits is 2 amps. An external
source of AC or DC power must be supplied to operate field devices.

11.3.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX164 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Forty 24Vdc positive or negative logic inputs
Outputs Twenty-four relay outputs
AC Power Specifications
Range 100 -15% to 240 +10%Vac
Frequency 50 -5% to 60 +5% Hz
Hold-up 10ms at 85–100Vac, 20ms at 100–265Vac
Inrush Time 2ms for 40 Amp
Inrush Current 30 Amp maximum at 200Vac, 40 Amp maximum at 265Vac
Input Current 0.10 Amp typical at 100Vac, 0.20 Amp typical at 200Vac
Input Power Supply Rating 26 VA
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I3, I5, I7: 8mA typical
Other inputs: 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I3, I5, I7: 2.7 kΩ
Other inputs: 4.7 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA maximum
Response Time (Input Lag) I1, I3, I5, I7: 1.5ms maximum
Other inputs: 2ms maximum
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Relay Output Specifications
Operating Voltage 5 to 30Vdc or 5 to 250Vac
Isolation 1500 V RMS between field side and logic side, 500 V RMS between
groups
Leakage Current 15 mA at 240Vac maximum
Maximum UL Pilot Duty Rating 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Maximum Resistive Load 2 amps at 24Vdc and 240Vac
Rating
Minimum Load 10 mA
Maximum Inrush 5 amps per half cycle

VersaMax Micro PLC 64-Point Expansion Units 209

User Manual Chapter 11
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Response Time ON: 15 ms maximum, OFF: 15 ms maximum
Contact Life: Mechanical 20 x 106 mechanical operations
Contact Life: Electrical Voltage Current: Resistive Current: Lamp and Typical
240Vac, 120Vac, 24Vdc 2.0A Solenoid Operations
0.6A 200,000

11.3.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX164

Figure 90

11.4 IC200UEX264
64 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (24) 24Vdc
In, (4) LCDC, (16) LCDC with ESCP, (4) HCDC
with ESCP Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX264 accepts forty DC inputs and provides
twenty-four transistor outputs. It uses 24Vdc nominal input power.

11.4.1 DC Inputs
The forty configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic inputs. Inputs are
compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches. The +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to
power the DC input circuits. The combination of input circuit current and external device
current must not exceed 200 mA.

VersaMax Micro PLC 64-Point Expansion Units 210

User Manual Chapter 11
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

11.4.2 DC Outputs
Outputs 1 – 4 are standard LCDC source-type outputs. Outputs can be used to switch
devices like valves, lamps or contactors.

Outputs 5 – 20 are low current (LCDC) source-type outputs with ESCP.

Outputs 21 – 24 are high current (HCDC) source-type outputs with ESCP.

11.4.3 Expansion Unit IC200UEX264 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Forty 24Vdc positive or negative logic inputs
Outputs Twenty-four transistor outputs, 24Vdc.
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I3, I5, I7: 8mA typical
Other inputs: 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I3, I5, I7: 2.7 kΩ
Other inputs: 4.7 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA maximum
Response Time (Input Lag) I1, I3, I5, I7: 1.5ms maximum
Other inputs: 2ms maximum
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc/24Vdc
External Power Supply 12/24Vdc –10%, +20%
Maximum Load Current 0.5A per point (Q1 – Q4) at 24Vdc at 100% ON duration
0.7A per point (Q5 – Q20) at 24Vdc at 100% ON duration
1.0A per point (Q21 – Q24) at 24Vdc at 100% ON duration
Minimum Switching Current 10mA

VersaMax Micro PLC 64-Point Expansion Units 211

User Manual Chapter 11
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Maximum Inrush Current Q1-Q4: 2A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Q5-Q20: 4A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Q21-Q24: 8A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Output Voltage Drop 0.3V maximum
OFF state leakage current 0.1mA maximum
Response Time (OFF-to-ON and Q1–Q4: 5μs maximum, 24Vdc
ON-to-OFF) Q5–Q20: 0.5ms maximum, 24Vdc
Q21–Q24: 0.5ms maximum, 24Vdc
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side,
500V RMS between groups
Fuse None, outputs 5–24 are ESCP protected
Under-voltage shutdown Q5 – Q20: 5V minimum, 8V maximum
DC short circuit current Q1 – Q4, Q21 – Q24: 5A typical
Q5 - Q20: 0.7A minimum, 2A maximum
Peak short circuit current Q5 - Q20: 4A maximum
Delay time of peak short circuit 100 µS
current
Delay time of current limit 100 µS

11.4.4 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX264

Figure 91

VersaMax Micro PLC 64-Point Expansion Units 212

User Manual Chapter 11
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

11.5 IC200UEX364
64 Point Micro PLC Expansion Unit, (40) 24Vdc
In, (24) LCDC Out, 24Vdc Power Supply
VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX364 accepts forty DC inputs and provides
twenty-four low current (LCDC) transistor outputs. It uses 24Vdc nominal input power.

11.5.1 DC Power
The 24Vdc power source for the Expansion Unit must have enough transient current
capability to support the inrush current of the power supply and to maintain a 24Vdc voltage
level (see power supply specifications for inrush requirements).

11.5.2 DC Inputs
Forty configurable DC inputs can be used as positive or negative logic standard inputs. They
are compatible with a wide range of input devices, such as pushbuttons, limit switches, and
electronic proximity switches.

The Micro PLC Expansion Unit’s +24Vdc supply can be used for input devices and to power
the DC input circuits at about 8mA per input. The combination of input circuit current and
external device current must not exceed 435mA.

11.5.3 DC Outputs
The Micro PLC Expansion Unit IC200UEX364 has 24 sink-type DC outputs. All outputs are
isolated between field and logic and are switching positive voltage. The outputs have one
common incoming supply (VC) and one common ground (COM). The outputs are able to
drive high inrush currents (8 times the rated current) and are protected against negative
voltage pulses. This makes it possible to switch lamps and inductive loads.

VersaMax Micro PLC 64-Point Expansion Units 213

User Manual Chapter 11
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

11.5.4 Expansion Unit IC200UEX364 Specifications

Item Description
Inputs Forty 24Vdc positive or negative logic inputs
Outputs Twenty-four transistor outputs, 24Vdc.
DC Power Specifications
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Hold-up 10mS at 19.2Vdc
Inrush Current 1 Amp maximum at 30Vdc
Inrush Time 10mS for 1 Amp
Input Current 0.20 Amp typical at 24Vdc
Input Power Supply Rating 5W
DC Input Specifications
Rated Input Voltage 24 volts DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 30 volts DC
Input Current at 24Vdc I1, I3, I5, I7: 8mA typical
Other inputs: 4.8mA typical
Input Impedance I1, I3, I5, I7: 2.7 kΩ
Other inputs: 4.7 kΩ
Input Threshold Voltage ON: 18Vdc minimum, OFF: 5Vdc maximum
Input Threshold Current I1, I3, I5, I7: ON 4.5mA maximum, OFF: 1.8mA minimum
Other inputs: ON 3.3mA maximum, OFF: 1.6mA maximum
Response Time (Input Lag) I1, I3, I5, I7: 1.5ms maximum
Other inputs: 2ms maximum
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS field side to logic side, 500V RMS between groups
Output Specifications
Voltage Range 12Vdc/24Vdc
External Power Supply 12/24Vdc –10%, +20%
Maximum Load Current 0.5A per point (Q1 – Q24) at 24Vdc
Minimum Switching Current 10mA
Maximum Inrush Current Q1-Q24: 2A for 20ms, 1 pulse
Output Voltage Drop Q1– Q24: 0.3Vdc
OFF state leakage current 0.1mA
Response Time 1mS maximum @ 24Vdc
(OFF-to-ON and ON-to-OFF)
Isolation Voltage 1500V RMS between field side and logic side, 500V RMS between
groups
Fuses None
Under-voltage shutdown Q1 – Q24: 5V minimum, 8V maximum
DC short circuit current Q1 – Q24: 0.7A minimum, 2A maximum

VersaMax Micro PLC 64-Point Expansion Units 214

User Manual Chapter 11
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

11.5.5 Wiring Diagram, IC200UEX364

Figure 92

VersaMax Micro PLC 64-Point Expansion Units 215

User Manual Chapter 12
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 12: Analog Expansion Units

This chapter describes the following VersaMax Micro PLC Analog Expansion Units:

IC200UEX616 6 Point Analog Expansion Unit, (4) Analog In and (2) Analog Out, 12Vdc Power
Supply
IC200UEX624 4 Point Analog Expansion Unit, (4) Analog In, 24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX626 6 Point Analog Expansion Unit, (4) Analog In and (2) Analog Out, 24Vdc Power
Supply
IC200UEX636 6 Point Analog Expansion Unit, (4) Analog In and (2) Analog Out, 100/240Vac
Power Supply

12.1 Features of Analog Expansion Units

Analog, Expansion Units have the features shown below. Expansion Units can be located
up to 2 meters from the Micro PLC.

Figure 93

12.1.1 Removable Terminal Strips

The removable terminal assemblies are protected by hinged covers. After turning off power
to the Expansion Unit, a terminal assembly and attached field wiring can be separated from
the Expansion Unit by removing two screws.

12.1.2 Expansion Connector

The connector on the left side of the Expansion Unit is used to connect to the Micro PLC or
to the outgoing connector on the previous Expansion Unit. The connector on the right side
of the Expansion Unit can be used to attach to the next Expansion Unit.

Analog Expansion Units 216

User Manual Chapter 12
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

12.1.3 Status LEDs

LEDs on the Expansion Unit provide quick visual verification of operating status. Expansion
Unit LEDs indicate local Power and OK mode.

12.1.4 Cables
A 0.1-meter ribbon cable (IC200CBL501) is provided with each Expansion Unit. Cables are
also available in 0.5-meter (IC200CBL505) and 1 meter (IC200CBL510) lengths.

12.2 Analog Expansion Unit Specifications

Module Dimensions Height: 90mm (3.6”), Depth: 76mm (3.0”) Width: 150mm (6.0 “)
Inputs 4 analog inputs
Outputs 2 analog outputs (all models except UEX624)

12.2.1 Power Specifications for Analog Expansion Units

IC200UEX616 IC200UEX624, IC200UEX636
UEX626
Power voltage 12Vdc 24Vdc 100/110/120/200/210/220V
(50/60Hz)Vac
Range 9.6Vdc - 15Vdc 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc 85 to 264Vac
Hold-up 10.1ms at 9.6V 24.5ms at 19.2V 223ms at 85V
Inrush Current/Time 0.9A / 1ms at 15V 2.5V / 1ms at 30V 4A / 5ms at 264V
Input Current 0.15A at 15V 0.1A at 30V 0.06A at 264V
Input Power Supply Rating 2.25W 3W 15VA

The DC power source must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush
current of the power supply and to maintain the nominal voltage level.

12.2.2 Input and Output Specifications

Item Description
Analog Input Channels (IC200UEX6**) 4, differential
Input ranges 0 to 10V (10.23V maximum)
-10V to +10V (-10.23V min. and +10.23V max.)
0 to 20mA (20.47mA maximum)
4 to 20mA (20.47mA maximum)
Resolution 12 bits
Accuracy ±1% of full scale over full operating temperature range
Linearity ±3 LSB maximum
Isolation non-isolated
Common mode voltage ±40 V maximum
Current input impedance 249 Ω

Analog Expansion Units 217

User Manual Chapter 12
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Item Description
Voltage input impedance 200 kΩ
Input filter time 20ms to reach 1% error for step input
Analog Output Channels 2, single-ended, non-isolated
Output ranges 0 to 10V (10.23V maximum)
0 to 20mA (20.47mA maximum)
4 to 20mA (20.47mA maximum)
Resolution 12 bits
Accuracy ±1% of full scale over operating temperature range
Current: maximum terminal voltage 10V (at 20mA output)
user load range 10 to 500 Ω
output load capacitance 2000 pF maximum
output load inductance 1 Henry maximum
Voltage: output loading 10 kΩ minimum at 10 volts
output load capacitance 1 µF maximum

12.3 Analog Operation

This section explains how a VersaMax Micro PLC Expansion Unit with analog channels
processes analog data. Unlike discrete expansion units, if one analog unit fails all subsequent
analog expansion units will stop communicating. However, expansion units before the
failed unit continue to be available. If an analog expansion fails at power up, no expansion
units (discrete or analog) will be functional.

12.3.1 Analog I/O Parameters

Each analog channel can be configured to operate in either voltage or current mode. If
current mode operation is selected, the range can then be configured as either 4-20mA or
0-20mA. If voltage mode operation is selected (inputs only), the range can then be
configured as either 0-10V or –10V to +10V.

Parameter Choices Default Value

Voltage or current mode Voltage, Current Voltage
Current range selection 4–20mA, 0–20mA 4–20mA
Voltage range selection (Inputs Only) 0-10V, -10-+10V 0-10V

Analog Expansion Units 218

User Manual Chapter 12
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

12.3.2 Input/Output Values Compared to Process Data

The Expansion Unit processes analog channels using fixed conversion values for both
current and voltage mode operation. The table below shows the relationship between the
analog input and output values used by the application program, and the actual analog
input or output for each mode. These values include the automatic adjustments for gain.

In this This is the This is the Equivalent For the Default

Configured Analog Signal Process Data %AI or Calibration, the Value in
Mode: Range %AQ Range the
%AI or %AQ Reference
Equals:
Voltage 0 to +10V 0 to 10,000mV 0 to 32000 3.2 x mV
Voltage –10 to -10,000mv to -32000 to 32000 3.2 x mV
+10V (Inputs Only) +10,0000mV
Current 0 to 20mA 0 to 20,000µA 0 to 32000 1.6 x µA
Current 4 to 20mA 4,000 to 20,000µA 0 to 32000 2 x µA –8000

12.3.3 Count Resolution for Analog Expansion Units

For analog expansion units, count resolution is controlled by a DIP switch 6, which is set to
ON by default. If unexpected results are observed, check the position of switch 6. If switch 6
is not ON, power down the system and set switch 6 to ON, as shown in the following figure.
Do NOT change any of the other switches.

Figure 94

12.3.4 LED Indications

The module’s LEDs indicate the status of the module and of the analog inputs.

IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4

POW
OK

If an initialization error occurs, the OK LED blinks rapidly. During normal operation, the
analog input LEDs should be off.

Analog Expansion Units 219

User Manual Chapter 12
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

12.3.5 Analog Input Processing

The Expansion Unit processes analog input channels with a 12-bit successive-approximation
A/D converter. It converts the analog value into a digital count, calculates the %AI value as
described below, then places the result into the appropriate %AI input reference (these
references are described in Chapter 22:).

Figure 95

Automatic Conversion of Analog Voltage or Current to

Counts
In voltage mode, the Expansion Unit first converts the 0 to 10,000mV input signal to a count
in the range of 0 to 4,000 (or –10,000mV to 10,000mV signal to a range of –4,000 to 4,000).
The fixed multiplier for this conversion is 2.5.

In current mode, the Expansion Unit first converts the 0 to 20,000µA input signal to a count
value in the range of 0 to 4,000. The fixed multiplier for this conversion is 5. The conversion
for both current modes (0-20mA and 4-20mA) is the same.

Automatic Gain and Offset Adjustment for Analog Inputs

The Expansion Unit then converts the A/D converter's input count value from the range of 0
to 4000 to a final %AI input value in the range of 0 to 32,000. It multiplies the count value by
8 (32000 / 4000) to get the final analog input ($AI):

(input count X 8) = %AI value

Any calculated value above 32,767 is clamped at that maximum value. Any calculated value
less than 0 is clamped at 0.

Analog Input Conversion Summary

The table below summarizes the conversion of voltage or current inputs to counts and then
to %AI values.

Conversion A/D Converter Gain

Input Signal %AI Range
Factor Value Factor
Voltage Mode
2.5 0–4000 counts 8 0–32,000
(0 to 10,000mV)
Voltage Mode
2.5 -4000 to 4000 counts 8 -32,000 to 32,000
(-10,000 to 10,000mV)
Current Mode
5 0–4000 counts 8 0–32,000
(0–20mA) or (4–20mA)

Analog Expansion Units 220

User Manual Chapter 12
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

12.3.6 Analog Output Processing

To generate the analog output signal, the Expansion Unit converts the value in the %AQ
output reference into a count value for the 12-bit D/A converter, which then drives the
analog output.

Figure 96

Automatic Gain and Offset Adjustment for Analog Outputs

The application's %AQ output range of 0 to 32000 corresponds to the D/A converter's
output count range of 0 to 4000. The Expansion Unit first multiplies the %AQ value from the
program by .125 (4000 / 32000) to produce the count value for the D/A converter:

(%AQ X .125) = D/A count

Any calculated value that exceeds 4095 (212-1) is clamped at that maximum value. Any
calculated value less than 0 is clamped at 0. The range 0 to 4095 corresponds to %AQ values
between 0 and 32,767.

Automatic Conversion of Counts to Analog Voltage or

Current
In voltage mode, the D/A converter then converts the count value in the range of 0 to 4,000
counts to an analog signal from 0 to 10,000mV. The output voltage gain (ratio) for this
conversion is 2.5.

In current mode, the D/A converter converts the count value to an analog signal from 0 to
20,000µA. The output current gain for this conversion is 5. The conversion for both current
modes (0-20mA and 4-20mA) is the same.

Analog Output Data Conversion Summary

The table below summarizes the conversion of %AQ values to counts and then to voltage or
current levels.

%AQ Gain D/A Converter Conversion Output Signal

Range Factor Range Factor
0– 32,000 0.125 0–4,000 counts 2.5 Voltage Mode (0–10,000mV)
0–32,000 0.125 0–4,000 counts 5 Current Mode (0–20mA)
or (4–
20mA)

Analog Expansion Units 221

User Manual Chapter 12
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

12.3.7 Wiring Diagram

Figure 97

On modules IC200UEX616, UEX626 and UEX 636, voltage and current outputs are present
on their respective output terminals at the same time. For proper module operation, only
the output terminals that correspond to the voltage / current output configuration should
be connected.

Analog Expansion Units 222

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 13: RTD and Thermocouple

Expansion Units
This chapter describes the following VersaMax Micro PLC RTD and Thermocouple
Expansion Units:

IC200UEX724 4 RTD, Pt 100 In,

24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX726 4 RTD, Pt 100 In and 2 Analog Out,
0 – 20mA, 4 – 20mA or 0 – 10Vdc,
24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX734 4 RTD, Pt 100 In,
100/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX736 4 RTD, Pt 100 In and 2 Analog Out,
0 – 20mA, 4 – 20mA or 0 – 10Vdc,
100/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX824 4 Thermocouple Inputs,
24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX826 4Thermocouple Inputs and 2 Analog Out,
0 – 20mA or 0 – 10Vdc,
24Vdc Power Supply

13.1 Description of RTD and Thermocouple

Modules
RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units have the features shown below. Expansion Units
can be located up to 2 meters from the Micro PLC.

Figure 98

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 223

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

13.1.1 Removable Terminal Strips

The removable terminal assemblies are protected by hinged covers. After turning off
power to the Expansion Unit, a terminal assembly and attached field wiring can be
separated from the Expansion Unit by removing two screws.

13.1.2 Expansion Connector

The connector on the left side of the Expansion Unit is used to connect to the Micro PLC or
to the outgoing connector on the previous Expansion Unit. The connector on the right side
of the Expansion Unit can be used to attach to the next Expansion Unit.

13.1.3 Status LEDs

LEDs on the Expansion Unit provide quick visual verification of operating status. Expansion
Unit LEDs indicate local Power and OK mode.

The input channel LEDs should be OFF during proper operation.

13.1.4 Cables
A 0.1-meter ribbon cable (IC200CBL501) is provided with each Expansion Unit. Cables are
also available in 0.5-meter (IC200CBL505) and 1 meter (IC200CBL510) lengths.

13.2 RTD Expansion Modules

VersaMax Micro PLC RTD Expansion Units are used for applications that require
temperature monitoring and control. Four types are available:

IC200UEX724 4 RTD, Pt 100 In,

24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX726 4 RTD, Pt 100 In and
2 Analog Out, 0 – 20mA, 4 – 20mA, or 0 – 10Vdc,
24Vdc Power Supply
IC200UEX734 4 RTD, Pt 100 In,
100/240Vac Power Supply
IC200UEX736 4 RTD, Pt 100 In and
2 Analog Out, 0 – 20mA, 4 – 20mA, or 0 – 10Vdc, 100/240Vac Power
Typical applications include oven control, motor monitoring, refrigerant control, and
environmental control. One VersaMax Micro PLC can monitor up to sixteen RTDs (four
RTDs per expansion module, four expansion modules per Micro PLC).

Note:
• RTD Expansion Modules support DOIO for inputs and outputs.
• If an RTD Expansion module is auto configured with DIP switch 3 OFF (Compatibility Mode), it
reports its identity as a standard analog expansion module (IC200UEX616/626/636). This has
no effect on module operation.
• For Micro release 4.0 and later, if the RTD Expansion module is auto-configured with DIP switch
3 ON (High-Accuracy Mode), it reports as IC200UEX726/736.

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 224

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

13.2.1 Compatibility
RTD Expansion Units are compatible with Micro PLCs having a firmware version of 2.01 or
greater.

They are compatible with Logic Developer 2.60 or above and with VersaPro software 2.03
and above. Some compatible software versions do not list these modules separately but
allow them to be configured as analog expansion units. Current software versions list these
modules by number and description.

13.2.2 RTD Module General Specifications

Module Dimensions Height: 90mm (3.6 inches)
Depth: 76mm (3.0 inches)
Width: 150mm (6.0 inches)
Inputs 4 RTD inputs
Outputs 2 analog outputs (all models except UEX724 and UEX734)
Power Supply Type DC Power Supply5 AC Power Supply
Power voltage 24Vdc 100/110/120/200/210/220Vac (50/60Hz)
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc 85 to 264Vac
Allowable momentary power 10ms 85 to 100V: 10ms
failure 100 to 264V: 20ms
Operating ambient temperature 0 to 55 C (Storage ambient temperature –10 to 75 C)
Operating ambient humidity 5 to 95 % RH (no condensation)
(Storage ambient humidity 5 to 95 % RH (no condensation))
Vibration resistance Complies with JIS C 0911
Noise resistance Noise voltage 1500 Vpp; Noise pulse width 100 ns, 1 micro sec
Static noise: 3000 V at metal exposed area
Insulation resistance 20 M or more between the AC external terminal and case
ground (PE) terminal
(based on 500 VDC mega)
Dielectric withstand voltage 500V DC 1500Vac
Grounding Class D (100) independent grounding
Usage environment No corrosive gases, no excessive dirt
Structure Attaches to an open wall
Cooling Natural air cooling
Protection against electrical Class 1 equipment
shock hazard Open equipment

5
The DC power source must have enough transient current capability to support the inrush current of the power supply and to maintain
the nominal voltage level.

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 225

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

13.2.3 RTD Module Input Specifications

Compatible High Accuracy
RTD Input Channels 4, differential
Input Sensor Types 2- and 3-wire types, PT 100
Input ranges -100.0 to +600.0°C -100.0 to +600.0°C
-150.0 to +1050.0°F -148 to +1112.0°F
Input Resolution 0.2°C / 0.3°F 0.1°C / 0.1°F
Accuracy ±0.5% of full scale over operating temperature range
Data Format 0 to 32000 for °F, or 0 to 28000 for °C
Constant Current Approximately 1mA
Channel Update Time 141/563ms (selectable) for all channels
Diagnostics LED on module blinks when input LED on module blinks when input
values at –100°C (-150°F) or less, values at –110°C (-166°F) or less,
or 600°C (+1050°F) or more or 610°C (+1130°F) or more
(includes cable disconnection) (includes cable disconnection)
Also, the channel input data will Also, the channel input data will
contain 7FF8H contain 7FFFH
Digital Resolution 15 bits + sign
Open Circuit Detection Time 141ms or 563ms, excluding logic execution
Channel to Channel Isolation None
Maximum Lead Resistance 100Ω
Converter Type Successive approximation
Excitation Current Source 1.0mA

13.2.4 RTD Module Output Specifications

Only modules IC200UEX 726 and UEX736 have outputs.

Analog Output Channels 2, single-ended, non-isolated

Output ranges 0 to 10V (10.23V maximum)
0 to 20mA (20.47mA maximum)
4 to 20mA (20.47mA maximum)
Resolution 12 bits
Accuracy ±1% of full scale over operating temperature range
Current: maximum terminal voltage 10V (at 20mA output)
user load range 10 to 500 Ω
output load capacitance 2000 pF maximum
output load inductance 1 Henry maximum
Voltage: output loading 10 kΩ minimum at 10 volts
output load capacitance 1 µF maximum
Response Time 8.8ms

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 226

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

13.2.5 Scaling

Scaling for RTD Inputs

An RTD Expansion Unit (in the Compatible mode) processes input channels with a 12-bit
successive-approximation A/D converter. It converts the input value into a digital count,
calculates the %AI value as described below, then places the result into the appropriate %AI
input reference (these references are described in Chapter 22:).

Figure 99

The table below lists equivalent decimal and hexadecimal conversion values for Celsius and
Fahrenheit inputs.

Input Signal A/D Converter Value Gain Factor %AI Range

Celsius Mode (-100°C to 600°C) 0 – 3500 counts 8 0 - 28000
Fahrenheit Mode (-150 F to 0 – 4000 counts 8 0 - 32000
1050°F)

Scaling for Analog Outputs

To generate the analog output signal, the RTD Expansion Unit converts the value in the %AQ
output reference into a count value for the 12-bit D/A converter, which then drives the
analog output.

Figure 100

Automatic Gain and Offset Adjustment for Analog Outputs

If DIP switch 6 is in the ON position (default) the D/A Converter’s output range is 4,000
counts. If this DIP switch is set to the OFF position, the output range is 4,096 counts.

The application's %AQ output range of 0 to 32000 corresponds to the D/A converter's
output count range. The Expansion Unit first multiplies the %AQ value from the program by
(output range / 32000) to produce the count value for the D/A Converter:
4000
Compatible resolution mode: (%AQ × 32000 ) = (%AQ × 0.125) = D/A count

4096
Maximum resolution mode: (%AQ × 32000 ) = (%AQ ×X 0.128) = D/A count

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 227

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Any calculated value that exceeds 4095 (212-1) is clamped at that maximum value. Any
calculated value less than 0 is clamped at 0. The range 0 to 4095 corresponds to %AQ values
between 0 and 32,760.

Automatic Conversion of Counts to Analog Voltage or Current

In voltage mode, the D/A Converter converts the count value in the range of
0–4,000 or 0–4,096 counts to an analog signal from 0 to 10,000mV. The output voltage
gain (ratio) for this conversion is 2.5.

In compatible resolution mode (D/A Converter range is 0–4,000), loading a count value of
32760 results in an analog output value of 10.23V.

In maximum resolution mode (D/A Converter range is 0–4,096), loading a count value of
32760 results in an analog output value of 10.00V

In current mode, the D/A converter converts the count value to an analog signal from 0 to
20,000µA. The output current gain for this conversion is 5. The conversion for both current
modes (0-20mA and 4-20mA) is the same.

Range 0000 2000 H07D0 4000 H0FA0 4095 H0FFF

0-10V 0V 5V 10V 10.23V
0-20mA 0mA 10mA 20mA 20.47mA
4-20mA 4mA 12mA 20mA 20.38mA

13.2.6 Wiring for RTD Expansion Modules

Figure 101

On modules IC200UEX726 and UEX736, voltage and current outputs are present on their
respective output terminals at the same time. For proper module operation, only the
output terminals that correspond to the voltage / current output configuration should be
connected.
RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 228
User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

13.3 Module Installation

1. To avoid risk of electric shock, turn off power to the Micro PLC and disconnect the
main power before connecting the RTD expansion modules.
2. Loosen the screws on the terminal block and attach unit power, RTD wires and
analog outputs. Tighten all screws securely. The RTD wires should be the same type
and length (except for the jumper used in a two-wire RTD) to ensure accuracy. Do
not use the shield or drain wire for the third connection.
3. If all RTD channels are not used, a 100 to 300 Ω resistor can be connected across
terminal A to B with a jumper connected from B to b. The resistor will disable the
diagnostics and stop the channel LED from flashing.
4. Connect the expansion cable to the Micro PLC or expansion unit to the left of the
RTD Expansion Unit.
5. Turn power on. Check the LEDs as shown on the next page. The Power and OK LEDs
should be ON. The LEDs for channels 1 to 4 should be OFF during normal operation
if the RTDs are connected properly.

13.3.1 DIP Switches

The default DIP switch settings for the RTD units are switches 1-5 and 7-8 OFF and switch 6
ON.

For RTD expansion units, DIP switch 2 selects the RTD channels update rate. In the factory
default OFF position, switch 2 selects a 562ms update rate. The update rate can be changed
to 141ms by moving switch 2 to the ON position.

From Release 4.0 and above, DIP Switch 3 can be used to select between Compatible
(Switch 3 OFF) and High Accuracy (Switch 3 ON) modes. In the PME configuration of RTD
module, selection for “Conversion mode” parameter should match this DIP switch
selection.

Default DIP Switch Settings for RTD Expansion Module

Figure 102

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 229

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Note:
• Do NOT change the settings of any of the other DIP switches.
• The module must be powered OFF before changing the DIP switch settings.

13.3.2 LED Indications

The module’s LEDs indicate the status of the module and of the RTD inputs.

RTD1 RTD2 RTD3 RTD4

POW

OK

If an initialization error occurs, the OK LED blinks rapidly.

During normal operation, the RTD input LEDs should be off. If an RTD input is outside the
range of -100°C (-150°F) to +600°C (1050°F), its LED blinks.

13.3.3 Data Conversion for RTD Expansion Units (in Compatible

mode)
Individual channels on an RTD Expansion Units can be individually configured for either
Celsius or Fahrenheit

If Celsius is configured, the range of data for a channel is 0 to 28,000.

If Fahrenheit is configured, the range of data for the channel is 0 to 32,000.

• Values below 0 indicate shorted cable.

• Values above 28,000 (when configured for Celsius) or 32,000 (when configured for
Fahrenheit) indicate disconnected (open) or shorted cable.

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 230

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Basic Temperature Conversion Logic

Figure 103

The Scaling function (see Chapter 23:) can be use in the application program to convert the
raw counts value for a channel to a temperature measurement in degrees. The ranges are
100 to +600 degrees C and 150 to +1050 degrees F. The example logic shown here applies
to Compatible mode only.

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 231

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

High-Resolution Temperature Conversion Logic for RTD

Units
For accuracy in tenths of degrees, the Data Type Conversion functions (see Chapter 23:)
can be added to the program logic. See the examples (for the Compatible mode) below.

Figure 104

Celsius Conversion

Line 15: Converts RTD to Real Value. Data will be stored in two consecutive Registers 100
and 101

Line 16: Divides the raw value by 40.0 (28000/700) 700 comes from the full temperature
range of 600 to –100 C. Result is placed in R102 and R103

Line 17: Subtracts 100 for conversion. This is to offset the –100 and the result is in R104 and
R105

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 232

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Fahrenheit Conversion

Line 18: Converts RTD to Real Value. Data will be stored in two consecutive Registers 110
and 111

Line 19: Divides the raw value by 26.66667 (32,000/1200) 1200 comes from the full
temperature range of 1050 to –150 F. Result is placed in R112 and R113

Line 20: Subtracts 150 for conversion. This is to offset the –150 and the result is in R114 and
R115

13.4 Thermocouple Expansion Modules

VersaMax Micro PLC Thermocouple Expansion modules are used for applications such as
food and beverage production, process control, and environmental control. The following
types of Thermocouple expansion module are available:

• IC200UEX824 4 Thermocouple Inputs, 24Vdc Power Supply

• IC200UEX826 4 Thermocouple Inputs and 2 Analog Outputs, 24Vdc Power Supply
One VersaMax Micro PLC can monitor up to sixteen thermocouples (four thermocouples per
expansion module, four expansion modules per Micro PLC).

Note:
• Thermocouple Expansion modules support DOIO for inputs and outputs.
• If a Thermocouple Expansion module is auto configured with DIP switch 6 OFF (Compatibility
Mode), it reports its identity as a standard analog expansion module (IC200UEX616/626/636).
This has no effect on module operation.
• For Micro release 4.0 and later, if the Thermocouple Expansion module is auto-configured with
DIP switch 6 ON (High-Accuracy Mode), it reports as IC200UEX826.

13.4.1 Compatibility
Thermocouple Expansion modules are compatible with:

• VersaMax Micro-20, -40, and -60 CPUs version 3.81 or later.

• VersaMax Micro-23 and –28 CPUs version 3.55 or later.
• VersaMax Micro-14 CPUs version 3.56 or later.
They are configurable using Logic Developer 5.70 and above. Some compatible software
versions do not list these modules separately but allow them to be configured as RTD
expansion units, as described later in this section.

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 233

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

13.4.2 Thermocouple Module General Specifications

Module Dimensions Height: 90mm (3.6 inches)
Depth: 76mm (3.0 inches)
Width: 150mm (6.0 inches)
Inputs 4 Thermocouple inputs
Outputs Model IC200UEX826 only: 2 analog outputs
Power voltage 24Vdc
Range 19.2Vdc to 30Vdc
Inrush Current/Time 2.5A / 1ms at 30V
Input Current 0.1A at 30V
Input Power Supply Rating 3W
Allowable momentary power failure 10ms
Operating ambient temperature 0°C to 55°C (Storage ambient temperature –10°C to 75°C)
Operating ambient humidity 5 to 95 % RH (no condensation)
(Storage ambient humidity 5 to 95 % RH (no condensation))
Vibration resistance Complies with JIS C 0911
Noise resistance Noise voltage 1500 Vpp Noise pulse width 100 ns, 1 µs
Static noise: 3000 V at metal exposed area
Insulation resistance 20 M or more between the AC external terminal and case
ground (PE) terminal
Dielectric withstand voltage 500V DC
Grounding Class D (100) independent grounding
Usage environment No corrosive gases, no excessive dirt
Structure Attaches to an open panel
Cooling Natural air cooling
Protection against electrical shock Class 1 equipment
hazard Open equipment

13.4.3 Analog Output Specifications (Model IC200UEX826)

Analog Output Channels 2, single
Output Ranges 0-10 V (10.24 V maximum), 0-20 mA (20.48 mA maximum)
Resolution 0-10 V, 12 bits, 0-20 mA, 12 bits
Accuracy ±1% of full scale over temperature range
Current Outputs Max. Voltage at 20 mA: 10 V
User Load Range: 10 to 500
Output Load Capacitance: 2000 pF Maximum
Output Load Inductance: 1 Henry Maximum
Voltage Outputs Output Loading: 10 k Minimum at 10 V
Output Load Inductance: 1 µF Maximum
Response time 8.8 ms

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 234

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

13.4.4 Thermocouple Module Input Specifications

Input Channels 4, differential
Following JIS C 1602-1995
Sensor type
Type K, J, E, S, T, B, N, -/+50mV, -/+100mV
Type Accuracy range 6 Input range 7
-200 to 1200°C (-328 to 2192F) -270 to 1370°C (-454 to
K
0.4%(FS) 2498°F)
-40 to 750°C ( -40 to 1382°F) -210 to 1200°C (-316 to
J
0.3%(FS) 2192°F)
-200 to 900°C (-328 to 1652°F) -270 to 1000°C (-454 to
E
0.3%(FS) 1832°F)
Temperature
-50 to 1760°C (-58 to
range and S 0 to 1600°C ( 32 to 2912°F) 1.0%(FS)
3200°F)
accuracy
(±%) at 0 to -200 to 350C (-328 to 662F) -270 to 400°C (-454 to
T
55°C 0.8%(FS) 752°F)
600 to 1700°C (1112 to 3092°F)
B 0 to 1820°C (32 to 3308°F)
1.0%(FS)
-200 to 1200°C (-328 to 2192°F) -270 to 1300°C (-454 to
N
0.4%(FS) 2372°F)

±50mV -50 to 50mV 0.5%(FS) -50 to 50mV

±100mV -100 to 100mV 0.5%(FS) -100 to 100mV

TC mode High Accuracy Mode Compatible Mode

K,J,E,T,N 0.1°C/0.2°F 0.5C/1°F
B,S 1.0°C/1.0°F 1.0°C/1°F
Resolution
±50mV 0.01mV 0.025mV
±100mV 0.02mV 0.05mV
0.1°C/0.1°F 0.5°C/1°F
Units of data output
0.01mV 0.025mV, 0.05mV
Conversion data 15 bits + sign
Cold junction
Less than ±2°C (ambient temperature is 0 to 55°C)
compensation accuracy
Cold junction input range -20°C to 80°C
Diagnostics (Broken LED indication (per channel) LED indication (per channel)
Wire/Under or Over range Channel input data is 7FFF Channel input data is 7FF8
reporting) hexadecimal hexadecimal
K, J, E, T, N,
Conversi 563ms (4ch. total)
B, S
on time
±50, 100mV 141ms (4ch. total)

6
Accuracy Range represents measurements within which operation of the module is guaranteed.
7
The Input Range represents an extended range for which operation cannot always be guaranteed.

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 235

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

13.4.5 Scaling for Thermocouple Module Data

Scaling for Inputs

A Thermocouple Expansion Unit (in the Compatibility mode) processes input channels with
a 12-bit successive-approximation A/D converter. It converts the input value into a digital
count, calculates the %AI value as described below, then places the result into the
appropriate %AI input reference (these references are described in Chapter 22:).

Figure 105

The table below lists equivalent decimal and hexadecimal conversion values for Celsius and
Fahrenheit inputs.

Input Signal A/D Converter Counts Value Gain Factor %AI Range
Celsius mode (-249.5°C to 1 – 4020 counts 8 8 - 32160
1760°C)
Fahrenheit mode (-499°F to 1 – 3808 counts 8 8 - 30464
3308°F)
Voltage mode (±50mV) 48 – 4048 counts 8 384 – 32384
Voltage mode (±100mV) 48 – 4048 counts 8 384 - 32384

13.4.6 Scaling for Analog Outputs (Model IC200UEX826)

To generate the analog output signal, the Thermocouple Expansion Unit converts the value
in the %AQ output reference into a count value for the 12-bit D/A converter, which then
drives the analog output.

Figure 106

Automatic Gain and Offset Adjustment for Analog Outputs

The application's %AQ output range of 0 to 32000 corresponds to the D/A converter's
output count range of 0 to 4000. The Expansion Unit first multiplies the %AQ value from the
program by 0.125 (=4000/32000) to produce the count value for the D/A converter:

(%AQ X 0.125) = D/A count

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 236

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Any calculated value that exceeds 4095 (212-1) is clamped at that maximum value. Any
calculated value less than 0 is clamped at 0. The range 0 to 4095 corresponds to %AQ values
between 0 and 32,760.

Automatic Conversion of Counts to Analog Voltage or Current

In voltage mode, the D/A converter then converts the count value in the range of 0 to 4,000
counts to an analog signal from 0 to 10,000mV. The output voltage gain (ratio) for this
conversion is 2.5.

In current mode, the D/A converter converts the count value to an analog signal from 0 to
20,000µA. The output current gain for this conversion is 5.

2000 4000 4095

Range 0000
H07D0 H0FA0 H0FFF
0-10V 0V 5V 10V 10.24V
0-20mA 0mA 10mA 20mA 20.48mA

13.4.7 Thermocouple Module Configuration

Micro PLC firmware versions 4.0 and above provide complete support to Thermocouple
modules including the High-Accuracy mode. Also PME versions 6.0 SIM1 and above
completely support the Thermocouple modules (i.e. no workaround with RTD modules
needed for thermocouple configuration). Each channel of a Thermocouple Expansion Unit
can be individually configured for Sensor selection, Mode (Celsius or Fahrenheit) and Cold
Junction Compensation (Enable or Disable)

The following description of this section is applicable only for CPU and PME versions prior to
that of the above mentioned.

With Logic Developer (PME) 5.70 and above, Thermocouple module can easily be
configured by selecting the corresponding RTD module in the Module window.

Thermocouple Module Corresponding RTD Module

IC200UEX824 IC200UEX724
IC200UEX826 IC200UEX726
The Input Channel Mode for each of the Thermocouple channels can be configured as
Celsius or Fahrenheit.

For IC200UEX826, the Output Channel Mode parameter can be used to configure the
Voltage/Current values of a Thermocouple module.

• If the selection is Voltage, the Output Channel Range is not available.

• If the selection is Current, the Output Channel Range MUST be 0 to 20 mA.

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 237

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 107

Also, for versions earlier than 4.0, the Cold Junction Compensation is always enabled by
default and cannot be disabled either through PME or through DIP switch settings.

13.4.8 Wiring for Thermocouple Expansion Modules

Figure 108

On module IC200UEX826, voltage and current outputs are present on their respective
output terminals at the same time. For proper module operation, only the output terminals
that correspond to the voltage / current output configuration should be connected.

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 238

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

13.5 Module Installation

1. To avoid risk of electric shock, turn off power to the Micro PLC and disconnect the
main power before connecting Thermocouple expansion modules.
2. Connect the expansion cable to the Micro PLC or expansion unit to the left of the
Thermocouple Expansion Unit.
3. Check the DIP switch settings as shown on the next page.
4. Turn power on. Check the LEDs as shown on the next page. The Power and OK LEDs
should be ON. The LEDs for channels 1 to 4 should be OFF during normal operation
if the thermocouple inputs are connected properly.
5. Connect the Cold Junction sensor. If that is not done, all four module LEDs flash
continuously.

13.5.1 DIP Switch Settings

Micro PLC firmware versions 4.0 and above provide complete support to Thermocouple
modules including the High-Accuracy mode. DIP Switch 6 can be used to select between
Compatible (Switch6 OFF) and High Accuracy (Switch 6 ON) modes. In the PME
configuration of Thermocouple module, selection for “Conversion mode” parameter
should match this DIP switch selection. As PME versions 6.0 SIM1 and above completely
support the Thermocouple modules, (when the Micro PLC firmware version is 4.0 and
above) Sensor/ mV selection should be done using PME instead of through DIP Switches as
PME settings always override the DIP switch settings. Hence the following description
applies only to the CPU and PME versions prior to that of the above mentioned.

The sensor selection for all input channels can be configured ONLY using DIP switches 1 to
3, it cannot be done using Logic Developer. If DIP switches 1-3 are set for mV selection (all
On), the settings take precedence over the Logic Developer configuration of Input Channel
Mode and Range. The module must be powered OFF before changing the DIP switch
settings.

Switch Default Function K J E S T B N mV

1 off off on off on off on off on
Input Sensor
2 off off off on on off off on on
selection (Ch1-4)
3 off off off off off on on on on
mV selection
(Valid when DIP
4 off Off => 50mV On => 100mV
Switches 1,2,3
are all On.)

Do NOT change settings of any of the other DIP switches. The default setting for all other
DIP switches is Off.

For Thermocouple units, setting switch 6 to On causes a System Configuration Mismatch

fault in the PLC Fault Table. For these modules, auto-configuration with specified switch On
will flash error code 12-2 on the CPU’s OK LED. If this error occurs, the CPU OK LED will
repeatedly follow the sequence:
RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 239
User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

• Blink 12 times
• Go Off (short)
• Blink 2 times
• Go Off (long pause)
To restore normal functionality, turn off power to the PLC and expansion units and set the
DIP switch to Off. Turn On power to the PLC and expansion units again.

13.5.2 LED Indications

The module’s LEDs indicate the status of the module and the inputs.

TC1 TC2 TC3 TC4

POW
OK

1. If an initialization error occurs, the OK LED blinks rapidly.

2. If an input signal is out of range or the cable is disconnected, its corresponding LED
blinks every 1 second with almost equal On and Off time. In addition, in this case the
channel input data contains the value 7FF8 (7FFF in High Accuracy mode).
3. If cold junction signal is out of range or the cable is disconnected, all four LEDs blink
simultaneously every 1 second with a short on time and longer Off time.
During normal operation, the thermocouple input LEDs should be Off. If any of the four LEDs
is On, it indicates a communication error with the PLC CPU.

If multiple errors occur, input signal errors (2 above) have priority over cold junction signal
errors (3 above). For example:

Input signal for channel 2 is out of range, for channel 3 cable is disconnected and the cold
junction compensation signal is out of range. In this case, LEDs 2 and 3 blink with almost
equal On and Off time. LEDs 1 and 4 blink with shorter On time and longer Off time.

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 240

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

13.5.3 Basic Temperature Conversion Logic

The Scaling function (see Chapter 23:) can be use in the application program to convert the
raw counts value for a channel to a temperature measurement in degrees. The example
logic shown here applies to Compatible mode only.

Figure 109

Figure 110

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 241

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

13.5.4 High-Resolution Temperature Conversion Logic for

Thermocouple Units
For accuracy in tenths of degrees, the Data Type Conversion functions (see Chapter 23:) can
be added to the program logic. See the examples (for the Compatible mode) below.

Figure 111

Celsius Conversion

Line 6: Converts thermocouple input to Real Value. Data will be stored in two consecutive
Registers 100 and 101

Line 7: Divides the raw value by 16.0 ((32160-8)/ 2009.5).

The value 2009.5 comes from the full temperature range of 1760 to –249.5 C. Result is
placed in R102 and R103

Line 8: Subtracts 250 for conversion. This is to offset the –250 and the result is in R104 and
R105

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 242

User Manual Chapter 13
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 112

Fahrenheit Conversion

Line 10: Converts thermocouple input to Real Value. Data will be stored in two consecutive
Registers 200 and 201

Line 11: Divides the raw value by 8 ((30464-8)/ (3807))

The value 3807 comes from the full temperature range of 3308 to –449 F. Result is placed
in R202 and R203

Line 12: Subtracts 500 for conversion. This is to offset the –500 and the result is in R204 and
R205

RTD and Thermocouple Expansion Units 243

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 14: CPU Option Modules

This chapter describes option modules for 20, 40 and 64-Point VersaMax Micro PLCs.

IC200UMB001 Memory Pack Module

IC200USB001 RS232, Extra Port Option Module
IC200USB002 RS485, Extra Port Option Module
IC200UUB001 USB/RS232 Conversion Option Module
IC200UEM001 10/100 Mbit Ethernet Communications Module

14.1 Using Option Modules

Option Modules can be used to enhance the functionality of a 20-, 40-, or 64-Point VersaMax
Micro PLC. These option modules install in the front of the Micro PLC. One Port module
(UEM001, USB001, USB002, or UUB001), and/or a Memory Pack module (UMB001) can be
installed.

Option modules, except the Memory Pack Module, are configured using the Machine
Edition software. The Memory Pack Module does not require software configuration. If the
configuration and installed option modules are different, the PLC logs a fault in the Fault
Table (System Configuration Mismatch).

Note: If the configured module is RS232/USB and the physically connected module is Ethernet
communication module (upon downloading configuration), a system configuration mismatch
fault will not be logged. The converse is also true.

14.2 IC200UMB001
Memory Pack Module
The VersaMax Micro PLC Memory Pack Module, IC200UMB001, can be used to store and
update the configuration, application program, and reference table data of a 20, 40, or 64-
Point Micro PLC.

Figure 113

The Memory Pack Module plugs directly into port 2 on the Micro PLC. Power for the device
comes from port 2.

A programmer and PLC CPU are used to initially write data to the Memory Pack Module. In
addition to writing data to the Memory Pack, the programmer can read data already stored
on the Memory Pack and can compare that data with files already present in the
programmer.
CPU Option Modules 244
User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

After the data is stored on the Memory Pack, the data can be copied to one or more other
PLC CPUs of the same type, with no programmer needed. To do that, the Memory Pack
Module is removed from the Micro PLC, and installed on another Micro PLC (Micro PLCs must
be powered down to remove or install an option module). When the second Micro PLC is
powered up, all of the data on the Memory Pack is written into the corresponding PLC
reference addresses.

14.2.1 Features
• Store 128kB of data.
• Read the data at Power up.
• Read/Write/Verify the data through programmer command.
With the programmer present, the PLC CPU can read, write, or verify a program,
configuration and tables in the Memory Pack Module. When reading or verifying data, it is
possible to select hardware configuration, logic, and/or reference tables data. However,
when writing data to the Memory Pack Module, all the data (logic, configuration and
reference tables) must be written. Individual data types cannot be selected for writing.

Reading Data from the Memory Pack Module at Startup

If the Memory Pack Module is connected to the port 2 when the PLC is switched on, the PLC
automatically reads all the data (program, configuration, and tables) in the Memory Pack
Module. The Micro PLC stores the data in its RAM/FLASH and flash based on the options that
have been set in the hardware configuration.

The OK LED keeps blinking while the data is being transferred from the Memory Pack
Module to the PLC. Wait until the OK LED stops blinking to do any further operations.

Data Read, Write, Verify Operations Using the Programming

Software
Read/Write/Verify operations can be done on the Memory Pack Module using the
programming software. The PLC must be placed in Stop mode.

The path for write /read/ verify through programming software is:

Targets -> online commands -> Flash/EEPROM

The popup window for write/read/verify appears. Select the memory storage board option
from the two choices (memory storage board or flash memory) to transfer data between
the Memory Pack module and the CPU. Then select the write/read/verify operation. The
programming software shows the status of the data transfer.

The Memory Pack Module and PLC must both have either no OEM key password or the same
OEM key password for the data to be transferred. The Memory Pack Module does not
perform special processing for other type of passwords.

CPU Option Modules 245

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Write Protect Switch

Figure 114

The Write Protect switch on the Memory Pack Module prevents writing data to the module
when it is in the ON position.

CAUTION
If the Write Protect switch is in ON position and the programming software tries to write
data to the Memory Pack Module, the data is NOT written to the module. However, no error
message is generated, and there is no indication that the data has not been written. This
should be considered before setting the Write Protect switch.

14.3 IC200USB001
RS232 Extra Port Option Module with 2 Analog
Inputs
VersaMax Micro PLC Option Module IC200USB001 can be used with a 20, 40, or 64-Point
Micro PLC to provide an extra RS232 Port and two analog inputs.

Figure 115

When installed on the Micro PLC, the RS232 Port Option Module becomes port 2. It supports
the following communications protocols:

• Modbus Master/Slave
• Serial Read/Write
• SNP/SNPX Master/Slave
Use of the Port Option module as port 2, and the protocol selection must be set up in the
configuration software. After making those selections, the communications parameters
can also be configured.

CPU Option Modules 246

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Pin assignments for Port 2 are

Figure 116

An external device can obtain power from the 5Vdc output pin if it requires 200mA or less
at 5Vdc.

14.3.1 Analog Inputs

The terminals on the Port Option Module can be used for analog inputs with the following
characteristics:

Input Ranges 0-10 V (10.24 V Max)

Resolution 0-10 V, 10 bits
Accuracy ±1%
Linearity ±3 LSB Maximum
Voltage Input Impedance 100kΩ
Channel to channel: none
Isolation
CPU to analog signal: none
Solid wire: 0.14mm2 to 1.5mm2
Analog Terminal Wiring
Stranded wire: 0.14mm2 to 0.10mm2

Figure 117

CPU Option Modules 247

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

14.4 IC200USB002
RS-422/485 Extra Port Option Module with 2
Analog Inputs
VersaMax Micro PLC Option Module IC200USB002 can be used with a 20, 40, or 64-Point
Micro PLC to provide an extra RS-422/485 Port and two analog inputs.

Figure 118

When installed on the Micro PLC, the RS-422/485 Port Option Module becomes port 2. It
supports the following communications protocols:

• Modbus Master/Slave
• Serial Read/Write
• SNP/SNPX Master/Slave
Use of the Port Option module as port 2, and the protocol selection must be set up in the
configuration software. After making those selections, the communications parameters
can also be configured.

Pin assignments for Port 2 are:

Figure 119

An external device can obtain power from the 5Vdc output pin if it requires 200mA or less
at 5Vdc.

CPU Option Modules 248

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

14.4.1 Analog Inputs

The terminals on the Port Option Module can be used for analog inputs with the following
characteristics:

Input Ranges 0-10 V (10.24 V maximum

Resolution 0-10 V, 10 bits
Accuracy ±1%
Linearity ±3 LSB Maximum
Voltage Input Impedance 100kΩ
Channel to channel: none
Isolation
CPU to analog signal: none
Solid wire: 0.14mm2 to 1.5mm2
Analog Terminal Wiring
Stranded wire: 0.14mm2 to 0.10mm2

Figure 120

14.5 IC200UUB001
USB / RS232 Conversion Option Module
VersaMax Micro PLC Option Module IC200UUB001 can be used with a 20, 40, or 64-Point
Micro PLC to provide a USB Port.

Figure 121

Characteristics of the USB Port are:

Connector Straight B type

USB version 2.0
Power Self-powered
4800 through 38400 only.
Baud Rates
Do not configure other baud rates for Port 2 when using the USB Conversion
Supported
Option Module.

CPU Option Modules 249

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Connecting to the USB board from windows should automatically download the correct
driver from Microsoft. To download directly, go to http://www.ftdichip.com/Drivers/FT232-
FT245Drivers.htm

14.6 IC200UEM001
RJ-45, 10/100 Mbit Ethernet Communications
Module
The VersaMax Micro PLC Option Module IC200UEM001 can be used with a Micro 20, 40, or
64-Point PLC to provide an Ethernet Port.

Figure 122

When installed on the PLC, the Ethernet Port Option Module becomes Port 2. It supports the
following communications protocols:

• SRTP Server
• Modbus Server/Client (separate download)
• Pass- through port (separate download).
Protocol options are available on https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-Automation-
Controls/support

14.6.1 Module Specifications

Processor Speed DSTni-EX CPU, 48MHz
Memory 256 kByte RAM, 512 kByte FLASH
Connection Type RJ 45 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet
Entity Type Server/Client
Bus Speed 10/100Mbaud
Number of Connections Supports up to 8 TCP/IP connections (4 for SRTP, 8 for Modbus
Supported TCP, 1 for Tunneling)
Mode Full Duplex

CPU Option Modules 250

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

14.6.2 Status LEDs

Link LED (Amber) Solid Amber: Connection to Micro 64 established and network is connected
Activity (Green) Flashing Green when there is any activity on the network
Status (Red) OFF: No errors
Red ON: Duplicate IP address present or network controller error
Red BLINK (2x/sec): No DHCP response or Setup menu active

14.6.3 Configuration Options

The option port should be configured for Ethernet. Configuration options are:

Protocol Parameters Value

SRTP Server Port Mode SNP
Port Type Slave
Data Rate 19.2, 38.4 or 175.0 kbps (default)
Flow Control None
Parity Odd (default), Even, None
Stop bits 1 (default), 2
Time Out Long
Turnaround Time 0
Modbus TCP Client/Server Port Mode RTU
Port Type Slave
Data Rate 19.2, 38.4 or 175.0 kbps (default)
Flow Control None
Parity Odd (default), Even, None
Station Address 0–247. Default = 1.
Modbus/TCP Client Disabled (default) or Enabled.
Support (see page 252). Enabling Modbus/TCP Client Support
sets the %I00488 status bit ON.
Pass-Through or Tunneling Port Mode Serial I/O
Data Rate 19.2, 38.4 or 175.0 kbps (default)
Flow Control None
Parity Odd (default), Even, None
Stop bits 1 (default), 2
Bits/Characters 7 or 8
Station Address 0 (default) –FF
(Byte 1 to Byte 8)

For detailed information on the Telnet configuration of the Ethernet Option Module for
each protocol, refer to GFK-2436E or later.

CPU Option Modules 251

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

14.6.4 Enhanced Data Throughput

The versions 3.83 of Micro and later, and versions 2.0 and later of the Ethernet Option
Module firmware provide Enhanced Data Throughput on Port 2 with the Ethernet Option
Module.

• Data rates supported for the Ethernet Option Module are: 19,200bps, 38,400bps
and 175,000bps. Firmware releases 3.82 and earlier supported data rates 300bps
through 38400 on Ethernet Module. Release 3.83 and later do not support 300bps
through 9,600bps data rates, but support for a higher data rate of 175,000bps is
added.
• The default baud rate for Port 2 with the Ethernet Option module is 175000bps. This
is the baud rate for which the Micro Port 2 will be configured during auto-
configuration with Ethernet module connected.
• When 175,000bps data rate is selected, a value of 2ms is automatically selected
internally for SNP T1 timer value (default T1 value is 5 ms). This will result in
increased throughput for communication with SNP protocol.

14.6.5 Setting the IP Address

There are two steps to setting the module’s IP address, as described in the datasheet that is
packaged with the module:

• First, a temporary IP address and the MAC address must be entered using PAC
Machine Edition Logic Developer.
• Second, the permanent IP address must be set using Ethernet commands.
The permanent IP address setting must be saved to the Flash on the Ethernet board or it will
be lost during power cycle.

14.6.6 Downloading Ethernet Drivers

The Ethernet drivers for the Ethernet Option Module are downloaded from
https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-Automation-Controls/support. Filenames and
passwords are listed in the module datasheet. Downloading is done using the PumpKIN
utility, which is included.

14.6.7 Modbus/TCP Client Support

The versions 3.83 and later of the Micro PLC firmware and version 2.0 of the Ethernet Option
Module provide Modbus TCP Client Support, which allows you to generate read or write
requests to the Modbus TCP server device. To use this feature, the CPU’s Port 2 must be
configured for Modbus RTU Slave. The Ethernet Option Module acts as Modbus RTU master
on serial side. Because the Micro PLC is configured as RTU Slave, it cannot send the
commands directly to the Ethernet Module. For this reason Micro updates, the Modbus TCP
request at a specified reference memory location, which is read by the Ethernet module to
process the command sent.

CPU Option Modules 252

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

The Ethernet module reads the Modbus command framed by the Micro PLC. The Ethernet
module then communicates with the server device and updates the response back to the
Micro PLC, along with the status. In the Ethernet module, one channel can be configured for
Modbus TCP Client. The remaining channels are used for Modbus TCP Server. The server
should not use the channel configured for client. Similarly, the client should not reclaim the
channels configured for server. Channels should not be switched between client/server
dynamically until you reconfigure the Ethernet module.

To trigger the Modbus/TCP Client request, complete the following steps.

1. Hardware configuration in Machine Edition. This creates the Sequence and

Command data address configurations.
2. Configure Modbus/TCP Client and serial parameters in TELNET.
3. Create logic in Machine Edition to process the Read/Write request.

Note: The MODBUS_TCP_RW function block should be triggered in the logic only when %I00488 is on.
(When on, the status bit %I488 indicates the Ethernet Option Module is configured for Modbus
Client operation and is ready to accept Modbus Client commands.) Otherwise error “85B0H” will
be output in the function block status.

Hardware Configuration
In the CPU Settings, set Port 2 Configuration to Ethernet.

Figure 123

On the Port 2 (Ethernet) tab, set the parameters as follows:

Port Mode: RTU

Port Type: Slave
Data Rate: Select data rate (Max: 175000bps).
For details on data rates supported on Port 2, refer to
“Enhanced Data Throughput” on page 252.
Modbus/TCP Client Support: Enabled
Sequence Numbers Start Address: Assign %R memory. Occupies 5 words
Command Data Start Address: Assign %R memory. Occupies 12 words

Note: Sequence Number and Command Data addresses should not overlap or conflict with any other
variables used in the logic.

CPU Option Modules 253

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Telnet Configuration
Note: The Ethernet option module will be power cycled and reset under the following conditions:
• A connection to the Ethernet option module is established through TELNET and disconnected
immediately.
• A connection to the Ethernet option module through is established through TELNET, the
configuration is edited, and you press "Q" (Quit without Save).

1. Connect the PLC with Port 2 to the Ethernet Option Module in the network.
2. Type TELNET <Ethernet Option Module IP: x.x.x.x> 9999 at the command prompt.
3. Configure the Modbus/TCP to RTU Bridge as follows:
Sample Modbus/TCP to RTU Bridge Setup

1) Network/IP Settings:

IP Address……………… <x.x.x.x>

Default Gateway ............ <x.x.x.x>

Netmask ................…..... <x.x.x.x>

SNMP is enabled

2) Serial & Mode Settings:

Protocol ...............Modbus/RTU, Slave(s) attached

Modbus/TCP Client .......... disabled

Serial Interface ........…….. 175000,8,O,1

4) Advanced Modbus Protocol settings:

Slave Addr/Unit Id Source: Modbus/TCP header

Modbus Serial Broadcasts

Disabled (Id=0 auto-mapped to 1)

MB/TCP Exception Codes

Yes (return 00AH and 00BH)

Char, Message Timeout ......

00050msec, 05000msec
D)efault settings, S)ave, Q)uit without save

Select Command or parameter set (1..4) to change: 2

Attached Device (1=Slave 2=Master) 1

Modbus/TCP Client Enabled (N) Y

Close Idle TCP sockets after (3-60 sec, 0=leave open)

10 Press Enter

Serial Protocol (1=Modbus/RTU 2=Modbus/ASCII) 1

Press Enter

CPU Option Modules 254

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Enter serial parameters (38400,8,0,1) 175000,8,O,1

Modbus/TCP to RTU Bridge Setup

After entering all the values, the Modbus/TCP to RTU Bridge Setup screen appears showing
the configured values.

1) Network/IP Settings:

IP Address 3.212.218.12

Default Gateway 003.212.218.001

Netmask 255.000.000.000

SNMP is enabled

2) Serial & Mode Settings:

Protocol Modbus/RTU, Slave(s) attached

Modbus/TCP Client enabled

Serial Interface 175000,8,O,1

4) Advanced Modbus Protocol settings:

Slave Addr/Unit Id Source Modbus/TCP header

Modbus Serial Broadcasts

Disabled (Id=0 auto-mapped to 1)

MB/TCP Exception Codes

Yes (return 00AH and 00BH)

Char, Message Timeout 00050msec, 05000msec

D)efault settings, S)ave, Q)uit without save

Select Command or parameter set (1..4) to change: S

To save the parameters, press S.

Logic to Process Read/Write Requests

The MODBUS_TCP_RW function block is used to process read/write requests.

CPU Option Modules 255

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 124

Parameters of MODBUS_TCP_RW
Parameter Data Type, Memory Area Description
Inputs
???? DWord, R Control word. Requires two bytes in %R memory. Do
not write or clear this memory during operation of
the MODBUS_TCP_RW function.
Enable Flow When the function is enabled, the operation is
performed.
EX Flow Execute. A low to high transition starts command
processing.
CH Word, Constant Channel number on which the request will be
processed. Should be 1.
FC Word, AI, AQ, R, Constant Function code. Modbus RTU function to be carried
out. See page 258 for valid function codes.
LMR Word, AI, AQ, R, Constant Segment selector for Local reference memory type.
Destination memory type for a Read operation;
Source memory type for a Write operation.

LMR Description
Value
18 %Q discrete output memory (Byte mode)
72 %Q discrete output memory (Bit mode)
8 %R register memory (Word mode)

CPU Option Modules 256

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameter Data Type, Memory Area Description

LMO Word, AI, AQ, R, Constant Local PLC reference memory address for
Modbus/TCP Client device’s location. Destination
for a read operation; Source for a write operation.
RMO Word, AI, AQ, R, Constant Remote PLC reference memory address for
Modbus/TCP Server device’s location. Source for a
read operation this memory; Destination for a write
operation.
DL Word, AI, AQ, R, Constant For valid lengths refer to the comments in the table
“Modbus/TCP Function Codes Supported by VMNM
PLCs” on page 258.
IP Word, AI, AQ, R IP Start address. This is the IP Address of the Server
device. Starting from this address, four words would
contain four octets of the IP.
UI Word, AI, AQ, R, Constant Unit Identifier. A control code used in a Modbus/TCP
message. This value is 1 for most Modbus/TCP
devices except for an Ethernet to Serial bridge used
to multi-drop to Modbus RTU devices.
Valid values: 0—255
Outputs
ENO Flow Enable output.
CMPL Bool, I, Q, M, G, T Complete. Set when the read or write operation has
been successfully completed.
BUSY Bool, I, Q, M, G, T Busy. Set when the read or write process is in
operation and has not been completed.
ERR Bool, I, Q, M, G, T Error. Set when an error is identified during
operation.
STS Word, AI, AQ, R Status. May include the following:
Remote Server exceptions
Function block parameter errors
Client application errors
For a list of status/error codes, refer to page 258.

CPU Option Modules 257

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

MODBUS/TCP Function Codes Supported by VersaMax Micro PLCs

Function Function Server Reference Data Unit Size Comments
Code Memory Type
Read Coils 1 Coils Bit Read up to 2,000 bits
Read Input 2 Discrete Inputs Bit Read up to 2,000 bits
Discrete
Read Multiple 3 Register Register Read up to 125 words
Registers (16-bit word)
Read Analog Input 4 Analog Input Register Read up to 125 words
Registers Registers (16-bit word)
Write Coil 5 Coil Bit Write one bit
Write Single 6 Register Register Write one word
Register (16-bit word)
Read Exception 7 -NA- Byte -NA-
Status
Write Multiple 15 Coil Bit Write multiple bits, up
coils to 2000
Write Multiple 16 Register Register Write to a maximum
Registers (16-bit word) of 100 words

Status/Error Codes
Status codes are reported in the following format:

Figure 125

Major Status Codes

Error Status Major Status Description
(Hex)
01H Successful completion. No minor status code (value can be ignored.)
91H Modbus TCP Status codes at the server. An error was detected at the Modbus
TCP server. See the table on page 259 for the associated Minor Status Codes.
B0H Client Application Error. See the table on page 259 for the associated Minor
Status Codes.
B1H Serial link error codes between Micro and Ethernet Module. See the table on
page 261 for the associated Minor Status Codes.

CPU Option Modules 258

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Minor Status Codes for Major Status 91H

The following table lists minor status codes that can be reported for status code 91H,
Remote Server Device error.

Error Status Error Description

(Hex)
0191H Illegal Function. The function code received in the request is not allowed for the
server. Causes may be:
The function code is not implemented in the unit selected. For example, it may
be a function that applies only to newer controllers.
The server is in the wrong state to process a request of this type, for example
because it was not configured and is being asked to return register status.
Modbus exception code 01H.
0291H Illegal data address. The data address received in the query is not an allowable
address for the server. More specifically, the combination of reference number
and transfer length is invalid. MODBUS exception code 02.
0391H Illegal data value. A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable
value for server. This indicates a fault in the structure of the remainder of a
complex request, such as that the implied length is incorrect. It specifically does
NOT mean that a data item submitted for storage in a register has a value outside
the expectation of the application program, since the MODBUS protocol is
unaware of the significance of any particular value of any particular register.
MODBUS exception code 03.
0491H Slave Device Failure. An unrecoverable error occurred while the server was
attempting to perform the requested action.
0691H Slave Device Busy. Server service request queue full. MODBUS exception code 06.
0791H Negative Acknowledge. Internal server error occurred. MODBUS exception
code 07

Minor Status Codes for Major Status B0H

The following table lists minor status codes that can be reported for status code B0H,
Client Application Error.

Error Status (Hex) Error Description

85B0H Client device not yet ready to send the request.
86B0H Server unit data size of zero is not allowed. The data unit size for
read/write operations should be greater than zero.
87B0H Server unit data size is too large. The data unit size for read/write
operations should not cross the maximum value.
Example: If the data length specified for Read/Write coil is greater than
1, this error code is returned.
88B0H Invalid Channel Number
8BB0H This error will be triggered when the server reference memory address is
zero, which is not allowed.

CPU Option Modules 259

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Error Status (Hex) Error Description

8CB0H Invalid Client Memory Type. This error is triggered when the specified
client reference memory type is invalid. Refer to page 256 for valid
memory types.
8EB0H Invalid IP address integer. All four octets of the IP address should be in the
range 0 to 255.
8FB0H Invalid IP address class.
90B0H Insufficient TCP connection resources to perform request.
91B0H Zero local starting address is not allowed, The starting address of the
client PLC memory location should be greater than zero.
95B0H Internal Error. This problem may occur due to the Ethernet Interface being
asked to perform beyond its capacity.
96B0H Underlying TCP connection aborted (reset) by server end point. The
server is not responding within the timeout value.
97B0H Underlying TCP connection aborted (reset) by Client end point.
9CB0H Invalid frame format. Data response did not arrive in a proper order.
9DB0H Data response had unexpected size. For example received more data than
expected.
9FB0H Invalid Client PLC Memory reference address.
B6B0H Unrecognized Function code. The Client device does not support the
function code or operation.
B7B0H Invalid Unit Identifier.
A0B0H Invalid Server Reference Memory Address.
A2B0H Failed to update the Micro reference memory. Ethernet Module was
unable to write to the Client memory specified in the command data.
A7B0H Unable to connect to remote device after successful channel
establishment.
AAB0H An attempt to establish a TCP connection with a remote server failed. This
error can be caused by the following conditions:
Server is not turned on
Cables are not properly connected
If using a switch, switch is not turned on
This error can occur while establishing the connection with the server
device.
ACB0H A protocol error occurred while communicating with the local PLC. This
error can occur when a break in the frame or check sum error occurred.
ADB0H A TCP timeout occurred while communicating with the remote PLC.

CPU Option Modules 260

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Minor Status Codes for Major Status B1H

The following table lists the minor status codes that can be reported for the major status
code B1H, which indicates a Serial Link error in the communications between the Ethernet
module and the Micro PLC.

If communication between the Ethernet Module and the Micro CPU is not functional, the
Ethernet Module indicates the problem by LED blink patterns and through the TELNET
connection. If the error codes reported by the Ethernet Module, by LEDs or through TELNET,
are different, the Serial Link error code has the highest priority.

Error Status (Hex) Error Description

01B1H Unable to read the Sequence Number Data Structure.
02B1H Unable to read the Command Data Structure
03B1H Unable to read/write Client PLC reference memory (segment
selector/offset specified in command data structure).
04B1H Unable to update the response status/sequence number
05B1H Serial Communication error (Parity, Baud rate, framing, Over run etc.)
with the Micro CPU.

Examples for MODBUS_TCP_RW

For the following examples:

1. The IP address is stored as integer values in the four words starting at %R1001.

Figure 126

2. When %I00488 is on, the MODBUS_TCP_RW function block is executed on the

rising transition of %T0001. For parameter definitions, refer to page 256.

CPU Option Modules 261

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Function Sample Rung

Reading Coils (FC=1)

Reads a coil at offset 10
(RMO=10) in the remote Modbus
TCP server and store the value at
the location %Q10 (LMR=72,
LMO=10).

Reading Discrete Inputs (FC=2)

Read nine discrete inputs from
offset 5 (RMO=5) in the remote
Modbus TCP server and store the
values in bit mode at %Q3
(LMR=72, LMO=3).

CPU Option Modules 262

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Function Sample Rung

Reading Multiple Registers (FC=3)

Read 125 registers from the
remote server device. The
Remote server reference address
is %R0101 (LMR=8, LMO=101).
The Client or Local PLC reference
memory address is %R5001
(LMR=8, RMO=5001).

Reading Analog Inputs (FC=4)

Read nine analog input registers
at offset 200 (RMO=200) in the
remote Modbus TCP device and
store the values in the Client PLC
memory location %R0020
(LMR=8, LMO=20).

CPU Option Modules 263

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Function Sample Rung

Writing a Coil (FC=5)

Write the value at %Q4 (LMR=72,
LMO=4) in the Client PLC memory
location to coil %Q5 (RMO=5) in
the remote Modbus TCP device.

Writing a Single Register (FC=6)

Write one register from %R10
(LMR=8, LMO=10) to a holding
register at offset 200 (RMO=200)
in the remote Modbus TCP
server.

CPU Option Modules 264

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Function Sample Rung

Reading Status (FC=7)

Read the Status from the remote
Modbus TCP server and store the
Status data in bit mode at
location %Q4 (LMR=72, LMO=4).

Writing Multiple Coils (FC=15)

Write the eight values starting
from %Q1 (LMR=72, LMO=1) in
the Client reference memory to
eight coils starting at offset 1
(RMO=1) in the Remote Modbus
TCP device.

CPU Option Modules 265

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Function Sample Rung

Writing Multiple Registers

(FC=16)
Write 100 registers from the
Client reference memory address
%R5001 (LMR=8, LMO=5001) to
the remote server reference
address %R101 (RMO=101).

14.6.8 Security Settings for the Ethernet Option Module

Security settings can be changed to prevent unauthorized entry into Ethernet Option
Module configuration mode.

Two security settings are supported for the Ethernet Option Module (firmware version 2.0
and later): Password support for Telnet configuration and SNMP (Enable/Disable)
configuration.

Security settings are provided for the three protocols: SNP/SRTP, Modbus TCP and
Tunneling.

For Modbus TCP and SRTP protocols, these security settings options are present in the
"Network/IP Settings" menu for. For Tunneling (Pass-through), these security settings are
present in the "basic parameters/server" menu.

By default, there is no password and Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is

enabled.

Disabling or Enabling the SNMP is configurable.

The maximum password length is 16 characters. These characters can be alphanumeric or

special characters. The password requires a minimum length of 8 characters.

A password set on a particular protocol’s firmware remains in effect if the firmware is

changed to that of a different protocol. For example, if a password is set on Modbus TCP
firmware and later the firmware is changed to SNP/SRTP, the same password set on Modbus
TCP firmware will still apply.

CPU Option Modules 266

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

If the password is set, it will be required before entering to the Telnet configuration Setup
Mode. After prompting for password, if the password is not entered within 30 seconds, the
Telnet session will expire.

14.7 Installing Option Modules

CAUTION
Power to the VersaMax Micro PLC MUST BE TURNED OFF when installing or removing
Option Modules.

1. Access the option connector on the front of the unit, as shown below for a Micro-
64 PLC.

Figure 127

2. If a port-type Option Module is being installed, orient the connector on the Option
Module with the connector in the Micro PLC. Be careful to avoid contact with the
exposed components in the module.

Figure 128

3. Press the Option Module downward until it clicks into place.

4. Install the screws provided with the Option Module into the corners as shown
above.

CPU Option Modules 267

User Manual Chapter 14
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 129

5. If a Memory Pack Module is being installed, orient the connector on the back of the
Memory Pack Module with the connector on the Micro PLC or port-type Option
Module. Press the Memory Pack Module downward until it clicks into place.
6. Install the protective cover(s). If only the Memory Pack Module is used, both covers
may be installed. If a port module is used, the right-hand cover is not installed, and
the port connector remains accessible.

CPU Option Modules 268

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 15: Installation Instructions

This chapter describes the procedures for installing a VersaMax Nano PLC or VersaMax Micro
PLC and preparing the system for use. Included in this chapter are instructions for
unpacking, inspecting, and installing the PLC. Instructions are also provided for connecting
cables to programming devices.

• Pre-installation check
• Agency Approvals, Standards, and General Specifications
• Immunity and Emission Specifications, Relevant Standards, and Level Passed
• Installation Guidelines
• Mounting Dimensions
• Grounding the Equipment
• Installing a PLC or Expansion Unit on a DIN Rail
• Connecting an Expansion Unit to a Micro PLC
• System Wiring Guidelines
• Starting Up the PLC
• Adjusting the Analog Potentiometers
• DIP Switches
• Installing/Replacing a Backup Battery
• Serial Port Connections
• RS485 Port Isolator
• RS-232 to RS-485 Adapter
• Replacing AC Output Module Fuses

15.1 Preinstallation Check

Carefully inspect all shipping containers for damage during shipping. If any part of the
system is damaged, notify the delivery service immediately. The damaged shipping
container should be saved as evidence for inspection by the delivery service. As the
consignee, it is your responsibility to register a claim with the delivery service for damage
incurred during shipment. However, Emerson will fully cooperate with you, should such
action be necessary. After unpacking the equipment, record all serial numbers. Serial
numbers are required if you should need to contact Product Service during the warranty
period of the equipment. All shipping containers and all packing material should be saved
should it be necessary to transport or ship any part of the system.

Keep Micro PLC modules in their boxes during storage and transport.

Installation Instructions 269

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.2 Agency Approvals, Standards, and General

Specifications
The Micro PLC products supplied by Emerson are global products designed and
manufactured for use throughout the world. They should be installed and used in
conformance with product-specific guidelines as well as the following agency approvals,
standards and general specifications:

Agency Approvals Comments

Industrial Control Equipment UL508, Certification by Underwriters
[Safety] CSA C22.2 No 142-M1987 Laboratories for Revision B and later
models
Hazardous Locations [Safety] UL1604 Certification by Underwriters
Class I, Div II, A, B, C, D CSA C22.2 No 142-M1987 Laboratories for Revision B and later
models
European EMC & LVD CE Mark All models
Directives

Environmental Conditions
Vibration IEC68-2-6, JISC0911 1G @57-500Hz, 0.15mm p-p @10-
57Hz
Shock IEC68-2-27, JISC0912 15G, 11ms
Operating Temperature 0°C to 55°C [ambient]
Storage Temperature –10°C to +75°C
Humidity 5% to 95%, non-condensing
Enclosure Protection IEC529 Enclosure per IP54; protection from
dust & splashing water
Isolation: Dielectric UL508, UL840, IEC664 1.5kV for modules rated from 51V to
Withstand 250V

Installation Instructions 270

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.2.1 Immunity and Emission Specifications, Relevant

Standards, and Level Passed
Description Standards Specifications
Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-2  4.0 kV (Contact);  8.0 kV (Air)
RF Susceptibility EN 61000-4-3 10 V/m (unmodulated), 80-1000 MHz, 80% AM,
1 kHz sine wave
RF Susceptibility from ENV 50204 10 V/m (unmodulated), 9005MHz, 100% AM (200
Digital Radio Telephones Hz square wave, 50% duty cycle)
Fast Transient EN 61000-4-4  2.2 kV (PS);  1.1 kV (I/O)
Voltage Surge EN 61000-4-5  2.2 kV, common mode (PS)
 1.1 kV, differential (PS)
Conducted RF EN 61000-4-6 10 Vrms, 0.15-80 MHz, 80% AM, 1 kHz sine wave
(PS, I/O)
Voltage Dip EN 61000-4- 30% Nom., 10 ms
Voltage Interrupt 11 >95% Nom., 10ms
Voltage Variation 20% Nom., 10 sec.
Radiated Emissions EN 55011 8 30 dBV/m, 30 – 230 MHz (measured @ 30m)
37 dBV/m, 230 – 1000 MHz (measured @ 30m)
Conducted Emissions EN 550118 79/66 dBV, 0.15 – 0.5 MHz
73/60 dBV, 0.5 – 30 MHz

15.3 Installation Guidelines

• This equipment is intended for use in typical industrial environments that utilize
anti-static materials such as concrete or wood flooring. If the equipment is used in
an environment that contains static material such as carpets, personnel should
discharge themselves by touching a safely grounded surface before accessing the
equipment.
• If the AC mains are used to provide power for I/O, these lines should be suppressed
prior to distribution to the I/O so that immunity levels for the I/O are not exceeded.
Suppression for the AC I/O power can be made using line-rated MOVs that are
connected line-to-line, as well as line-to-ground. A good high-frequency ground
connection must be made to the line-to-ground MOVs.
• Installation should be indoors with primary facility surge protection on the incoming
AC power lines.

8
EN 55011 limits are equivalent to limits specified in EN 55022, CISPR 11, CISPR 22, and 47 CFR 15.

Installation Instructions 271

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.3.1 CE Mark Installation Requirement

For compliance to the Low Voltage Directive, VersaMax Nano and VersaMax Micro systems
are considered ‘open equipment’ (i.e. live electrical parts may be accessible to users) and
must be installed in an enclosure. IEC 1131-2:1991 (sect. 4.2, item 2) states: “Open
equipment is not required to meet IP2x requirement…. Opening of the enclosure shall only
be possible by means of a key or tool.” The PLC equipment should be installed in a location
that meets the specifications listed on the previous page.

15.3.2 UL Requirements for Class I Div 2 Installations

Equipment labeled with reference to Class 1 Div. 2 Groups A, B, C & D, hazardous locations
is suitable for use in Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D or non-hazardous locations only.

Equipment labeled with reference to Class 1 Zone 2 Groups A, B, C & D, hazardous locations
is suitable for use in Class 1, Zone 2, Groups A, B, C, D or non-hazardous locations only.

WARNING
• Explosion hazard - substitution of components may impair suitability for Class 1,
Division 2.

• Explosion hazard - do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off
or the area is known to be non-hazardous.

15.3.3 Additional Environmental Guidelines

• The temperature must not change so rapidly that condensation could form on or
inside the unit.
• There should be no combustible, corrosive or flammable gases.
• The environment should not have excessive dust, salty air, or conductive materials
(iron powder, etc.) that could cause internal shorts.
• The PLC should not be installed where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
• The PLC should not be exposed to water, oil or chemicals.
• Provide adequate ventilation space. Recommended minimum space allowances are
approximately: 50mm (2 inches) top, sides and bottom.
• The PLC should not be installed above equipment that generates a large amount of
heat.
• If the ambient temperature exceeds 55°C, provide a ventilation fan or air
conditioner.
• The equipment should not be installed within 200mm (8 inches) of any high voltage
(more than 1000V) or high current (more than 1A) line (except for outputs
controlled by the PLC).
• For ease of maintenance and safety, locate the PLC equipment as far away from high
voltage equipment and power generation equipment as possible.
Installation Instructions 272
User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

• Take appropriate measures when installing systems in locations:

— subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.
— subject to strong electromagnetic fields.
— close to power supplies.

15.4 Mounting Dimensions

15.4.1 Dimensions of Nano PLCs
Figure 130

Installation Instructions 273

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.4.2 Dimensions of 14-, 20-, 23-, 28-, 40-, and 64-Point Micro
PLCs and Expansion Units
Figure 131

15.5 Grounding the Equipment

Equipment grounding procedures must be properly followed for safe operation of your PLC
equipment.

The maximum recommended resistance to ground is 200m (equivalent to 100 feet of

AWG #12 – 3.29mm2 – copper cable).

• Grounding installation must conform to National Electrical Code (NEC) standards.

• Ground conductors should be connected with separate branches routed to a central
earth ground point.

Figure 132

Installation Instructions 274

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

• Ground conductors should be as short and as large in size as possible. Braided straps
or ground cables – AWG #12 (3.29mm2) or larger – can be used to minimize
resistance. Conductors must always be large enough to carry the maximum short
circuit current of the path being considered.
• Install an external earth leakage breaker and take other safety measures according
to external wiring standards.

15.5.1 Grounding the Programmer

For proper operation, the computer for the programming software must have a ground
connection in common with the PLC. Normally, this common ground connection is
provided by connecting the programmer’s power cord to the same power source (with the
same ground reference point) as the PLC. If that is not possible, use a port isolator
(IC690ACC903) between the programmer PLC serial connection. If the programmer ground
is at a different potential than the PLC ground, a shock hazard could exist. Also, damage to
the ports or converter (if used) could occur when the programmer serial cable is connected
between the two.

WARNING
Failure to follow programmer grounding recommendations could result in personal injury,
equipment damage, or both.

15.6 Installing a PLC or Expansion Unit on a DIN Rail

VersaMax Nano PLC and Micro PLC equipment can be mounted on a 35mm DIN rail as
described below, or mounted on a metal panel using screws as described on the next page.
The equipment must be mounted on a vertical surface. Do not mount it on a horizontal
surface.

Figure 133

The DIN rail must be electrically grounded to provide EMC protection as described on the
next page. DIN rails compliant with DIN EN50032 are preferred.

For vibration resistance, the DIN rail should be installed on a panel using screws spaced
approximately 5.24cm (6 inches) apart.

Installation Instructions 275

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.6.1 Mounting the PLC on a DIN Rail

Units mount on a 35 mm DIN rail as shown below. Using a small flat screwdriver or similar
tool, pull out the retaining clip on the bottom of the unit. Press the unit back and release the
retaining clip. Be sure the clip is holding the unit securely.

Figure 134

15.6.2 Removing the PLC from a DIN Rail

Pull down the retaining clip on the bottom of the module then pull the unit away from the
DIN rail.

15.6.3 Panel-Mounting
For greatest resistance to mechanical vibration and shock, units should be installed on a
metal panel.

Following the dimensions shown in this chapter or using the module itself as a template,
mark the location of the module’s panel-mount holes on the panel. Drill the hole in the
panel. Install the module using 65x70 M4 (#8-32) screws at least 20mm (0.79 in.) long in
the panel-mount holes.

Figure 135

1.1 to 1.4Nm (10 to 12 in/lbs) of torque should be applied to M4 (#8-32) steel screws
threaded into material containing internal threads and having a minimum thickness of
2.4mm (0.093in).

Installation Instructions 276

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.6.4 Grounding the Metal Panel or DIN Rail

To prevent the risk of electric shock, the metal panel on which the PLC is installed must be
properly grounded to protective earth.

Connect the ground wire to the metal panel using a star washer. Where connections are
made to a painted panel, the paint should be removed so clean, bare metal is exposed.

Connect the metal plate, duct, pipe, door and sideboard etc. to protective earth.

15.7 Connecting an Expansion Unit to a Micro PLC

Up to four expansion units can be connected in series to a Micro PLC.

CAUTION
Power down the Micro PLC before connecting an Expansion Unit. Connecting an Expansion
Unit with the Micro PLC powered up will damage the unit.

Note: The Micro PLC and Expansion Unit(s) should be wired to a common power source and powered up
together. If an attached Expansion Unit is left unpowered, the Micro PLC may not power up
properly.

15.7.1 The Expansion Cable

A 0.1-meter ribbon cable (IC200CBL501) is provided with each expansion unit. Cables are
also available in 0.5-meter (IC200CBL505) and 1 meter (IC200CBL510) lengths. The
maximum total overall length is 2 meters. This cable has keyed connectors to prevent
incorrect installation. Powering up the system with the cable improperly installed can
damage the Expansion Unit. Do not substitute a different cable. If you need to order
replacements, expansion cables are available in various lengths. Connect the units as shown
below.

Figure 136

The Expansion Unit(s) and Micro PLC must be connected in the same orientation.
Connecting an Expansion Unit “upside down” will damage the DC input circuit when the
system is powered up. After installing the ribbon cable on a unit, close the hinged door.
Installation Instructions 277
User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.8 System Wiring Guidelines

In addition to the following wiring suggestions, we strongly urge that you follow all wiring
and safety codes that apply to your area or to your type of equipment. Failure to do so could
lead to personal injury or death, property damage or destruction, or both.

Four types of wiring may be encountered in a typical factory installation:

• Power wiring – the plant power distribution, and high-power loads such as high
horsepower motors. These circuits may be rated from tens to thousands of kVA at
220Vac or higher.
• Control wiring – usually either low voltage DC or 120Vac of limited energy rating.
Examples are wiring to start/stop switches, contactor coils, and machine limit
switches. This is generally the interface level of discrete I/O.
• Analog wiring – transducer outputs and analog control voltages. This is the interface
level to I/O analog blocks.
• Communications and signal wiring – the communications network that ties
everything together, including computer LANs, MAP, and field busses.
These four types of wiring should be separated as much as possible to reduce the hazards
from insulation failure, miss-wiring, and interaction (noise) between signals. A typical
control system may require some mixing of the latter three types of wiring, particularly in
cramped areas inside motor control centers and on control panels.

Wiring which is external to equipment and in cable trays should be separated following
National Electrical Code practices.

15.8.1 Safety Measures

Appropriate emergency stop circuitry, interlock circuitry and similar safety measures should
be added to the system in accordance with accepted practices.

Appropriate safety measures should be included in the design of the overall system to
ensure safety in the event of incorrect, missing or abnormal signals caused by broken signal
lines, momentary power interruptions or other causes.

15.8.2 Installing Additional Suppression

External MOV suppression can be installed at the power line input of a system enclosure (see
below). The axial leaded ZA series of MOVs from Harris is often used. The MOV should be
able to handle most line transients. Measurement of actual transients may be required in
extreme cases to decide what MOV is best.

Ideally, MOVs should be used at each cabinet in the system for maximum protection. The
following illustration shows suppression on both power lines and a communications bus
entering an enclosure.

Installation Instructions 278

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 137

Periodic Inspection and Replacement of MOVs

MOVs do a good job of absorbing transients on communications, control, and power lines,
provided the total energy of those transients does not exceed the rating of the device.
However, if the energy of the transient exceeds the rating of the device, the MOV may be
either damaged or destroyed. This failure may not be visibly or electrically evident. MOVs
should be regularly inspected for signs of damage to assure continued protection against
transients. For some applications, periodic replacement of critical MOVs is recommended,
even if they do not show signs of damage.

15.9 I/O Installation and Wiring

Wiring diagrams are located in the individual module sections of this manual.

WARNING
• The PLC must be grounded to minimize electrical shock hazard. Failure to do so could
result in injury to personnel.

• You should calculate the maximum current for each wire and observe proper wiring
practices. Failure to do so could cause injury to personnel or damage to equipment.

CAUTION
When connecting stranded conductors, ensure that there are no projecting strands of
wire. These could cause a short circuit, thereby damaging equipment or causing it to
malfunction.

Installation Instructions 279

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.9.1 Wiring for Power Supply and I/O Connections

• Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires, but the wires into any given
terminal must be of the same type and size.
• Use copper conductors rated for 75°C (167°F) for all wiring.
• Micro PLC wire sizes: one AWG #14 (2.1 mm2) conductor or two smaller conductors
– AWG #16 (1.3 mm2) through AWG #20 (0.36mm2) per terminal. The suggested
torque for the terminal connections is 5 in-lbs (5.76 kg-cm).
• Nano PLC wire sizes: each terminal accommodates one AWG #14 (avg. 2.1mm 2
cross section) to AWG #22 wire (avg. 0.36mm2 cross section), or two wires up to
AWG #18 (avg. 0.86mm2 cross section). The suggested torque for the terminal
connections is 3 in-lbs (3.75 kg-cm).

15.9.2 Removable Wiring Terminals

Figure 138

The terminal block assemblies of a Micro PLC can be removed to perform wiring. For
example, a 14-point unit (shown above) has two removable terminal assemblies.

CAUTION
Do not insert or remove a terminal assembly with power applied to the PLC/Expansion Unit
OR TO FIELD DEVICES. Injury to personnel and damage to the equipment may result.
Potentially dangerous voltages from field devices may be present on the screw terminals
even though power to the PLC or Expansion Unit is turned off. Care must be taken any time
you handle the removable terminal assembly, or any wires connected to it.

A new Micro PLC or Expansion Unit is shipped with its terminal block assemblies firmly
installed. To remove a terminal assembly, use a small Phillips or flat screwdriver to
alternately loosen the two captive retaining screws. Hold onto the terminal assembly; when
the screws have been backed out of the holes, the terminal assembly is completely
detached from the module.

Installation Instructions 280

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 139

When re-installing terminal assemblies, be sure to place each one in the correct location to
avoid miss-wiring the module. The terminal assemblies are not keyed or labeled.

15.9.3 General Wiring Procedures

Follow the procedures below when routing and connecting field wiring from user devices to
the PLC inputs and outputs. The individual PLC and Expansion Unit sections of this manual
provide detailed wiring information for connecting input and output devices and power
sources.

• Turn off power to the PLC before connecting field wiring.

• All low-level signal wires should be run separately from other field wiring.
• All channels must be fed from the same phase for AC power lines.
• Install AC power cables and signal or data lines in separate cable trays or bunches
from DC field wiring.
• Field wiring should not be routed close to any device that could be a potential source
of electrical interference.
• Route the signal and data lines as close as possible to grounded surfaces such as
cabinet elements, metal bars and cabinets panels.
• If severe noise problems are present, additional power supply filtering or an isolation
transformer may be required.
• Ensure that proper grounding procedures are followed to minimize potential safety
hazards to personnel.
• Label all wires to and from I/O devices.
• Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or modify any part of the PLC.
• Do not pull on cables or bend cables beyond their natural limit. The lines may break.
• Always use the power supply voltage listed in the module specifications. Using other
voltages may damage the equipment.
• Do not apply voltages to the inputs in excess of the rated input voltage. The
equipment may be damaged if the rated voltage is exceeded.

Installation Instructions 281

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

• Do not use voltages with outputs in excess of the maximum switching capacity. The
PLC may be damaged if the maximum switching capacity is exceeded.
• Use shielded cable for analog inputs and outputs and connect shields to a functional
earth ground.

Wiring Connections
The following types of wiring terminals are recommended for use with VersaMax Micro PLC
modules:

Figure 140

When using wiring terminals, be sure to tighten screws adequately, so the wiring terminals
will not become loose.

Alternatively, each module screw can accept:

• One wire, size AWG14 to AWG22 (2.1 to 0.36 mm2) or:

• Two wires, size AWG16 to AWG22 (1.3 to 0.36 mm2)

Terminal Screws
Should any of the terminal screws be lost or damaged, they can be replaced with M3 x
0.6mm pitch screws of the type shown below.

Figure 141

15.9.4 Providing Fusing for Outputs

Outputs with electronic short-circuit protection are available on several Micro PLCs and
Expansion Units. All other module outputs should be externally fused (1 Amp to 2 Amp fuse)
to protect the output point contacts. For lighter loads, the internal common fuse (3.15
Amp) can be replaced with a 1 amp fuse to protect the output point without adding the
external fusing.

Installation Instructions 282

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.9.5 Providing Suppression Circuits for Inductive Loads

Figure 142: Typical Relay Output Circuit

Installing suitable suppression across inductive loads enhances reliability of relay contacts.
When switching inductive loads, relay contact life approaches resistive load contact life if
suppression circuits are used. The 1A, 100V diode shown in the typical DC load suppression
circuit is an industry standard 1N4934.

15.9.6 Typical DC Input Circuits

All DC inputs can be connected as either positive or negative logic.

Figure 143: Typical 12/24Vdc Positive/Negative Logic Input Circuit

Installation Instructions 283

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Positive and Negative Logic Definitions

The IEC definitions for positive logic and negative logic, as applied to the PLC I/O circuits, are
shown below.

Input Points– Positive Logic Input Points – Negative Logic

• Equivalent to IEC sink input points. • Equivalent to IEC source inputs.

• Sink current from the input device to • Source current through the input device
the user common or negative power to the user common or positive power
bus. bus.
The input device is connected between the The input device is connected between the
positive power bus and the input terminal. The negative power bus and the input terminal. The
negative bus is connected to the input circuit positive bus is connected to the input circuit
common. common.

15.9.7 Typical DC Output Circuits

Typical Transistor Output Circuit 12Vdc

Figure 144

Installation Instructions 284

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Typical Transistor Output Circuit 24Vdc

Figure 145

For Micro 10-, 14-, 23- and 28- PLCs, when using the outputs as PWM or Pulse Train Outputs,
and for duty cycles in the lower ranges (5% and lower), a pulldown resistor must be
connected between the output point (Q1-Q3) and the common terminal (C1). A 1.5 kΩ,
0.5-watt resistor is recommended.

Micro 20-, 40-, and 64- PLCs do not require a pulldown resistor.

Output Points – Positive Logic

Figure 146

• Equivalent to IEC source output points.

• Source current to the loads from the user common or positive power bus.
The load is connected between the negative power bus and the module output.

Installation Instructions 285

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Output Points – Negative Logic

Figure 147

• Equivalent to IEC sink output points

• Load is connected between positive power bus and module output.

15.9.8 Typical High-Speed Counter Connections

High-Speed Counter Circuit – Positive Logic Connection

Figure 148

High-Speed Counter Circuit – Negative Logic Connection

Figure 149

Installation Instructions 286

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

When I1-I6 on a Micro PLC are used as High-Speed Counter inputs, the input switches should
be solid state to prevent switch bouncing, which could cause unintended High-Speed
counter counts or strobe input signals.

15.9.9 Added Resistance for 20-, 40-, and 64-Point Micro PLCS
at Higher Count Rates
When using count rates about 30kHz on a 20-, 40-, or 64-Point Micro PLC, a 1k, 3W resistor
should added between the common and the Count input as shown below.

High-Speed Counter Circuit – Positive Logic Connection

Figure 150

High-Speed Counter Circuit – Negative Logic Connection

Figure 151

Installation Instructions 287

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.9.10 Typical AC Input and Output Circuits

Typical 120Vac Input Circuit

Figure 152

Typical 120/240Vac Triac Output Circuit

Figure 153

Installation Instructions 288

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.9.11 Typical Analog Input and Output Circuits

Analog Input Circuit

Figure 154

Analog Output Circuit

Figure 155

Installation Instructions 289

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.10 Starting Up the PLC

Before applying power to the PLC:

• Be sure all mounting screws, terminal screws, cables and other items are properly
tightened and secured.

WARNING
• On a Micro PLC CPU or Expansion Unit, be sure the protective covers are installed over
terminals when power is applied to the unit. The covers protect against accidental
shock hazard that could cause severe or fatal injury.

• Double-check all wiring. Faulty wiring may damage the PLC.

• Do not turn on the power supply to a broken PLC.

• Be sure that Expansion Units connected to the Micro PLC are wired to the same power
source and that the PLC and Expansion Units will power up together. If an attached
Expansion Unit is left unpowered, the Micro PLC may not power up properly.

WARNING
Always turn off the power supply to the PLC before attempting any of the following.
Performing any of these acts may result in electrical shock, damage to the PLC or faulty
operation.

A. Assembling the PLC.

B. Connecting or disconnecting cables or wiring.

C. Connecting a Frame Ground (earth) terminal to the metal plate or metal case.

15.10.1 Turning off Power to the PLC

CAUTION
During a gradual power down, when the input power supply voltage is below the minimum
operating voltage, the PLC may power off and then power on again until the input voltage
drops low enough to prevent power on again. You should take precautions if this type of
behavior cannot be tolerated in your application.

Installation Instructions 290

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.10.2 Normal Power-up Sequence

Apply the required power to the power inputs and observe the LEDs. A 14-point Micro PLC
is shown below. Other PLC models and expansion units have different LEDs.

Figure 156

• The PWR LED should light.

• The OK LED blinks during power-up diagnostics. (Micro PLCs that do not have
expansion units can be configured to skip power-up diagnostics, as explained in
Chapter 16:.) When diagnostics have successfully completed, the OK LED changes
to a steady on state. The RUN LED goes ON if the unit is configured to run on power-
up. If the Run LED does not light when you go to Run mode, the cause could be
invalid configuration or a fatal error in the CPU fault table.
• If any input points have been wired to field devices that energize those circuits, the
corresponding input LEDs should also be ON. (On Analog, RTD and Thermocouple
Expansion Units, the input 1-4 LEDs should be OFF during normal operation). Refer
to Chapter 12: for details of LED operation for analog expansion units. Refer to
Chapter 13: for details of LED operation for RTD and Thermocouple units.
• If the RUN LED on the Micro PLC CPU is not ON, all output LEDs should be OFF (in
STOP with I/O Disabled mode).
• After power-up and program download, check the program for proper execution.

Installation Instructions 291

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Micro PLC LEDs

Symptom Action
PWR LED does not light. 1. Check that the proper power source is provided and is on.
2. With power supply off, check wiring to the module unit to be sure it
is connected correctly.
PWR LED is ON (This indicates that the power source is good and that the CPU has
OK LED is OFF detected an internal fault. Be sure all the DIP switches are in the “OFF”
position (down).
PWR LED is ON. The PLC is in system bootloader mode and is awaiting a system
OK and RUN blink firmware download from the WinLoader tool.
together.
PWR LED is ON. The PLC features built-in blink codes to assist in troubleshooting.
OK is blinking.

15.11 Adjusting the Analog Potentiometers

Two potentiometers located behind the left door of a 14-, 23-, or 28-point Micro PLC can be
adjusted to lower or raise the values in analog registers %AI16 and %AI17. The left
potentiometer, labeled VR1, adjusts the value in register %AI16. The right potentiometer,
VR2, adjusts the value in %AI17.

To adjust the potentiometers, use a small screwdriver. Turning a potentiometer clockwise

increases the value.

Figure 157

Installation Instructions 292

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.12 DIP Switches

15.12.1 4-Position DIP Switches on Micro PLC CPUs
The DIP switches located behind the removable door on the front of a 14-, 20-, 23-, 28-,
40-, or 64-point Micro PLC are factory-set to OFF (down position) as shown below, and
should not be changed.

Figure 158

15.12.2 DIP Switches on an Analog Expansion Module Select

Count Resolution
For analog expansion units, count resolution is controlled by DIP switch 6, which should be
set to ON by default. If unexpected results are observed, check the position of switch 6. If
switch 6 is not ON, power down the system and set switch 6 to ON. Do NOT change any of
the other switches.

For details, refer to “Count Resolution for Analog Expansion Units” in Chapter 12:.

15.12.3 DIP Switches on an RTD Expansion Module Select Update

Rate
For RTD expansion units, DIP switch 2 can be changed to select channel update rate. For
firmware versions 4.0 and higher, DIP switch 3 can be used to select between Compatible
and High Accuracy modes.

For IC200UEX726 and UEX736 modules with firmware version 4.0 and higher, DIP switch 6
can be used to select output range.

For details, refer to “DIP Switches” in Chapter 13:.

Installation Instructions 293

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.12.4 DIP Switches on a Thermocouple Expansion Module

Select Input Sensors/Mode
On Thermocouple modules, DIP switches 1–3 can be used to select input sensors for
channels 1–4.

On Thermocouple modules with firmware versions 4.0 and higher, DIP switch 6 can be used
to select between Compatible and High Accuracy modes.

If these settings are configured using Machine Edition software version 6.0 or later, the
software configuration will override the DIP switch setting.

For details, refer to “DIP Switches” in Chapter 13:.

15.13 Installing/Replacing a Backup Battery

For 20-, 23-, 28-, 40-, and 64-point Micro PLCs, a backup battery can be installed to protect
the RAM memory contents of the PLC when the PLC power supply is removed or turned off.
It also backs up the CPU’s real-time clock. Note: Use of another battery type may present a
risk of fire or explosion.

Important: The Micro PLC power must be OFF when installing/replacing the battery.

IC200ACC414 Nominal Voltage 3.6Vdc @ 790 mAh

Battery shelf life, not Up to 5 years typical at 30 °C
installed Up to 3 years typical at 55 °C
Backup time with For units with serial number For units with serial number after
battery installed, Micro before 07000069274 07000069274
PLC continuously 13 months minimum at 70°C 19 months minimum at 70°C
powered down 30 months minimum at 20°C 121 months minimum at 20°C

This battery replaces an earlier coin-type battery, IC200ACC403.

15.13.1 CPU Battery Consumption Data

Battery Consumption per Hour
Micro PLC with a serial Micro PLC with a serial
Power 20-, 40-, and 64-Point
number before number after
Micro PLCs
07000069274 07000069274
ON 30 µA 3 µA 0 µA
OFF 83 µA @ 70°C 56 µA @ 70°C 31 µA @ 55°C
36 µA @ 20°C 9 µA @ 20°C 3 µA @ 25°C

To replace a previously-installed battery, open the battery compartment door and remove
the old battery assembly.

Insert the battery plug into the connector at the bottom of the battery compartment. Press
it in until it clicks. Do not force the connection – the plug is keyed to prevent accidentally
installing the battery in a reverse polarity.

Installation Instructions 294

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 159

For a cylinder-type battery, tuck in the wires and snap the battery holder (see the illustration
above) onto the VersaMax Micro PLC. The original battery compartment door is no longer
needed.

For a coin-type battery, place the battery into the holder on the left side of the battery
compartment and tuck in the wires. Close the battery compartment door securely.

CAUTION
Battery may explode if mistreated.

Do not recharge, disassemble, heat above 100°C (212°F), or incinerate.

15.14 Serial Port Connections

15.14.1 Providing Power to an External Device from Port 1 or 2
If either port is set up for communications with a serial device that requires 100mA or less
at 5Vdc, the device can obtain power from either Port 1 or Port 2. The total current drawn
from both ports added together cannot exceed 100mA.

15.14.2 Short Circuit Protection on 5Vdc for Units Later than June
2005
In the event that a short occurs across 5Vdc on any serial port on a VersaMax Micro or Nano
PLC manufactured after June 2005, date code 523 (the date code is a three-digit code
located on side of unit) the unit will power down until the short is removed. By removing
the short, the unit will recover fully.

Micro and Nano PLCs prior to date code 523 have a non-replaceable internal fuse for 5Vdc.
On those units, if the fuse blows, the RS-232 continues to function but the port no longer
provides 5Vdc to external devices. The 5Vdc is also lost on the RS-485 port.

Installation Instructions 295

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.14.3 Cable Lengths and Baud Rates

Maximum cable lengths (the total number of feet from the CPU to the last device attached
to the cable) are:

Port 1 (RS-232) = 15 meters (50 ft.)

Port 2 (RS-485) = 1200 meters (4000 ft.)

Both ports support configurable baud rates from 300 to 19.2k bps (4800 bps to 38.4k bps
for Micro 20/40/64 PLCs).

15.14.4 Port 1: RS-232

Port 1 is an RS-232 port with an 8-pin RJ-45 vertical jack. In addition to be a general serial
communications port, this port is also used as the boot loader port for upgrading the PLC
firmware.

Figure 160

Note: There is no shield or frame-ground or shield pin on this connector.

Pin Signal Direction Function

1 RTS Output Request to Send output
2 CTS Input Clear to Send input
3 RXD Input Receive Data input
4 TXD Output Transmit Data output
5 DCD Input Data Carrier Detect input
6 DTR Output Data Terminal Ready output
7 +5V Output +5Vdc output to power external protocol converters
8 GND -- 0V/Gnd signal reference

Installation Instructions 296

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Port 1 Cable Wiring to a 9-pin D-sub PC-style RS-232 Port

An RJ-45 to DB9F adapter can be used to connect Port 1 to the standard 9-pin D-Sub port
found on most PCs. Programmer wiring to an RJ-45 to DB9F adapter is shown below. For a
PC that is not used as a programmer, only the Transmit, Receive, and Ground wires are
needed on Port 1 and Port 2.

Figure 161

RJ-45 to DB9F Adapter Wiring

The color codes shown below are standard for most RJ-45 to DB9F adapter kits but be sure
to review your kit’s particular documentation. Wire the adapter kit following the pin
numbers as shown.

Adapter Wire DB9F pin RJ45 pin Micro PLC signal DB9F (PC Serial Port) signal
Color
n/c 1 - n/c DCD (in)
Green 2 4 TxD (out) RxD (in)
Yellow 3 3 RxD (in) TxD (out)
Red 4 5 DCD (in) DTR (out)
Blue 5 8 Ground Ground
Black 6 6 DTR (out) DSR (in)
Brown 7 2 CTS (in) RTS (out)
White 8 1 RTS (out) CTS (in)
Orange 9 7 +5V (out) RI (in)

Installation Instructions 297

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.14.5 Port 2 on 23-Point and 28-Point Micro PLCs: RS-485

Pin Assignments for Port 2

Port 2 on 23-point and 28-point VersaMax Micro PLCs is an RS-485 port with a 15-pin female
D-sub connector.

Figure 162

This can be attached directly to an RS-485 to RS-232 adapter (IC693ACC901 or similar).

Pin Signal Direction Function

1 SHLD -- Cable Shield Drain wire connection
2, 3, 4 n/c
5 P5V Output +5Vdc to power external devices (100mA max.)
6 RTSA Output Request to Send (A) output
7 GND -- 0V/GND reference signal
8 CTSB’ Input Clear to Send (B) input
9 RT -- Resistor Termination (120Ω) for RDA’
10 RDA’ Input Receive Data (A) input
11 RDB’ Input Receive Data (B) input
12 SDA Output Transmit Data (A) output
13 SDB Output Transmit Data (B) output
14 RTSB Output Request to Send (B) output
15 CTSA’ Input Clear to Send (A) input
Shell SHLD -- Cable Shield wire connection / 100% (Continuous ) shielding
cable shield connection

Installation Instructions 298

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Connector and Cable Specifications for Port 2 on 23-Point

and 28-Point Micro PLCs
Vendor Part numbers below are provided for reference only. Any part that meets the same
specification can be used.

Cable: Low Capacitance Computer cable, overall braid over foil shield
Belden 8105 5 Twisted-pairs 9
Shield Drain Wire 9
30 Volt / 80C (176F)
24 AWG tinned copper, 7x32 stranding
Velocity of Propagation = 78%
Nominal Impedance = 100 9
15 Pin Male Type: Vendor: Plug: Pin:
Connector: Crimp ITT/Cannon DAA15PK87F0 030-2487-017
AMP 205206-1 66506-9
Solder ITT/Cannon ZDA15P --
AMP 747908-2 --
Connector Shell: Kit 10 – ITT Cannon DA121073-50 [15-pin size backshell kit]:
Metal-Plated Plastic (Plastic with Nickel over Copper) 9
Cable Grounding Clamp (included)
40 cable exit design to maintain low-profile installation
Plus – ITT Cannon 250-8501-009 [Extended Jackscrew]:
Threaded with (metric) M3x0.5 for secure attachment 9
Order Qty 2 for each cable shell ordered

RS-485 Point to Point Connection with Handshaking

In point-to-point configuration, two devices are connected to the same communication
line. For RS-485, the maximum cable length is 1200 meters (4000 feet). Modems can be
used for longer distances.

Figure 163

9
Critical Information – any other part selected should meet or exceed this criteria.
10
Use of this kit maintains the 70mm (2.76in) installed depth.

Installation Instructions 299

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.14.6 Port 2 RS-485 Option Module on 20-/ 40-/ 64-Point

Micro PLCs
See Chapter 13: for more information about communications option modules.

Figure 164

Connections: Peripheral Device to RS-485 Option Module

Figure 165

Note:
• The connection to peripheral device is through 232/485 converter. Diagram gives the RS 485
communication part of the PLC with the converter.
• On the RS-232 side of the converter peripheral device needs to be connected.

Installation Instructions 300

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Connections: Micro 28- PLC to Micro20-, 40- or -64- PLC

Master/Slave

Figure 166

15.14.7 RS-485 Multidrop Serial Connections

The Micro PLC supports a maximum of eight devices on a single serial link per network. This
number can be increased with the use of a repeater. For additional information on serial
communications, refer to the Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual, GFK-
0582.

In the multi-drop configuration, the host device is configured as the master and one or more
PLCs are configured as slaves. The maximum distance between the master and any slave
may not exceed 4000 feet (1200 meters). Any installation with PLCs over 50 feet (15.2
meters) apart must include optical isolation.

Figure 167

The RS-485 line must include handshaking and use wire type specified earlier. Reflections
on the transmission line can be reduced by daisy-chaining the cable as shown. Make
connections inside the connector to be attached to the PLC. Avoid using terminal strips to
other types of connectors along the length of the transmission line.

Termination resistance for the Receive Data (RD) signal must be connected only on units at
the ends of lines. This termination is made at the CPU by connecting a jumper between pin
9 and pin 10 inside the D-shell connector.

Ground Potential: Multiple units not connected to the same power source must have
common ground potential or ground isolation for proper operation of the system.

Installation Instructions 301

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.14.8 RS-485 Port Isolator

The IC690ACC903 RS-485 Port Isolator can be connected directly to the Micro PLC RS-485
serial port, or panel-mounted and connected to the Micro PLC using a short extender cable.
The extender cable is intended for use in applications where direct connection to the port is
obstructed by surrounding equipment or where it is not acceptable for the device to
protrude from the Micro PLC. The Port Isolator can operate in either single- or multi-drop
mode, which is selected by a slide switch on the top of the module. The Port Isolator
provides the following features:

• Four opto-isolated signal channels: SD, RD, RTS, and CTS

• Electrical compatibility with RS-485
• Single- or multi-drop operation
• Input termination consistent with standard for serial channels
• A 5V DC/DC converter for power isolation
• Hot insertion is supported

Figure 168

Port Isolator Specifications

Mechanical
RS-485 15-pin D shell male for direct mounting to serial port on the CPU
15-pin D shell female for communication cable
Installation Hardware Two M3 thread connector thumbscrews. Recommended torque:
8 in./lbs. (supplied with Isolator). Two #6/32 thread panel mounting
screws. Recommended torque: 12 in./lbs. (user supplied)
Electrical
Voltage Supply +5Vdc (supplied by port)
Typical Current 25 mA; 100 mA available for external equipment
Ground Isolation 500 Volts
Conformance EIA-422/485 Balanced Line
Operating Temperature 0C - 70C (32F - 158F)
Baud Rate Those supported by PLC

Installation Instructions 302

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Port Isolator Connectors

The Isolator has two connectors, one 15-pin male D-type (PL1) and one 15-pin female D-
type (PL2). The pin assignments are identical, except that pin 4 on PL2 is connected to the
module ID resistor.

RS-485 Connector Pin Assignments

Pin Pin Name Pin Type Description
PL1 1 SHLD - Chassis Ground
2 NC -
3 NC -
4 NC -
5 5V - +5V power
6 RTS (A) In Request to send -
7 0V - Signal Ground
8 CTS (B') Out Clear to send +
9 NC -
10 RD (A') Out Read data -
11 RD (B') Out Read data +
12 SD (A) In Send data -
13 SD (B) In Send data +
14 RTS (B) In Request to send +
15 CTS (A') Out Clear to send -
PL2 1 NC -
2 NC -
3 NC -
4 TESTID - ID resistor
5 5V - +5V power
6 RTS (A) Out Request to send -
7 0V - Signal Ground
8 CTS (B') In Clear to send +
9 RT - Terminating Resistor*
10 RD (A') In Read data -
11 RD (B') In Read data +
12 SD (A) Out Send data -
13 SD (B) Out Send data +
14 RTS (B) Out Request to send +
15 CTS (A') In Clear to send -

Installation Instructions 303

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

• Use the terminating resistor if the Port Isolator is used in port-to-port mode or at the
end of a multi-drop configuration. To terminate the RD balanced line, place a jumper
wire from pin 9 to pin 10.
• A denotes – and B denotes +. A and B denote outputs and A' and B' denote inputs.

Installing the Port Isolator

The Isolator is packaged in a contoured plastic enclosure designed for either direct
attachment to a serial port or through a 12” extender cable for panel-mounted equipment.
Two M3 thumbscrews secure the device to its mating connector. It can be easily inserted
into an existing communication channel with no additional hardware.

Figure 169

When installing the Port Isolator on a panel, you will need to provide two #6-32 mounting
screws.

Figure 170

When installing the Isolator, tighten the connector screws and panel mounting screws (if
used) to the following torque values:

Screws Type Torque

Connector Thumbscrews (supplied with Isolator) M3 8 in/lbs
Panel Mounting Screws (user-supplied) #6/32 12 in/lbs

The RS-485 Port Isolator supports both port-to-port and multi-drop configurations.

Installation Instructions 304

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Multi-drop Cable Connecting Devices with 15-Pin Ports and 25-Pin Ports

Figure 171

Installation Instructions 305

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Cable for Supplying External Power Through the Port Isolator

If the Isolator is powered by a source other than the host port, you will need to build a
custom cable as shown below.

Figure 172

Installation Instructions 306

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.14.9 RS-232 to RS-485 Adapter

Figure 173

The RS-232 to RS-485 Adapter (IC200ACC415) connects a VersaMax Nano PLC or VersaMax
Micro PLC to an RS-485 communications bus. It supports RS-485 multi-drop connections.

In conjunction with an RJ45 to DB9 Female cable (IC200CBL500), the adapter converts from
the RS-232 (9-pin D-sub male) connector on the Nano/Micro PLC to an RS-485 (15-pin D-
sub female) connector.

Two LEDs on the adapter indicate activity on the transmit and receive lines.

Power for this adapter is provided by the Micro/Nano PLC.

Dimensions of the Adapter are shown below.

Figure 174

Installation Instructions 307

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Specifications
Temperature Rating 0ºC to 55ºC
Storage Temp. Rating -10ºC to 75ºC
Humidity 5 to 95%
Shock MIL-STD 810C, 15G
Noise Immunity ANSI/EE C37.90A, 801.2 ESD L3, 801.3 L3, 801.6 RF, 801.4 Fast
Transient L3, 801.5 Surge, EN55011 Emissions
Agency Approvals UL (Class 1, Div 2) for Nano/Micro PLC version B and higher , CUL and CE

Adapter 15-pin RS-485 Port Connector

The adapter’s RS-485 port is a standard SNP Port (15-pin D-sub female) connector. It
supports EIA/TIA-485 (RS-485) compatible signal levels. The pin assignments of the RS-485
connector are shown below.

Figure 175

Adapter RS-485 Port Pin Assignments

Pin Function Dir. Pin Function Dir.
1 Shield / Frame GND - 9 RT (RD Term) 11
-
2 N/C 10 RD(A’) In
3 N/C 11 RD(B’) In
4 N/C 12 SD(A) Out
5 +5Vdc Out 13 SD(B) Out
6 RTS(A) Out 14 RTS(B) Out
7 GND - 15 CTS(A’) In
8 CTS(B’) In [Shell] Frame GND

11
RT pin is connected with a 120 resistor to pin 11: RD(B') to provide a simple end-of-line termination through a jumper in the back
shell between pin 10 and pin 9.
Installation Instructions 308
User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Adapter 9-pin RS-232 (D-sub Male) Port Connector

The Adapter’s RS-232 port matches the industry standard PC 9-pin male serial port. This
port accepts the same cable (IC200CBL500) used to communicate directly from the
Micro/Nano’s RJ-45 jack to a PC. This port supports EIA/TIA-232 (RS-232) compatible signal
levels. The +5Vdc output from the Nano/Micro PLC is routed to pin 9 on this cable and is
used to power the converter.

Figure 176

Adapter RS-232 Port Pin Assignments

Pin Signal Dir. Function
1 DCD Input (No Connect)
2 RXD Input Receive Data
3 TXD Output Transmit Data
4 DTR Output (No Connect)
5 GND -- 0V/Gnd signal
6 DSR Input (No Connect)
7 RTS Output Request to Send
8 CTS Input Clear to Send
9 +5V Input +5Vdc power in
SHELL SHLD -- Cable Shield wire connection

Installation Instructions 309

User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

15.15 Replacing AC Output Module Fuses

CAUTION
There are no user-replaceable parts in the DC In/Relay Out or DC In/DC Out Micro PLCs.

The AC In/AC Out model Micro PLCs (IC200UAA003/IC200UAA007) provide user-

replaceable fuses for their AC output points. Because each output fuse is on the common of
several circuits, a blown fuse will prevent the entire group associated with it from working.

WARNING
Remove power from the unit before removing field wiring or removing the front cover.
Failure to remove power from the unit before disassembling it could cause severe or fatal
injury to personnel.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove the circuit boards from the Micro PLC assembly, or to replace
fuses on the power supply board. Any disassembly beyond removing the front cover and
replacing AC output fuses could damage the unit and will invalidate the warranty.

Fuse replacement should only be performed by qualified service personnel.

The plug-in fuses are located on the I/O circuit board, which is accessible after removing the
Micro PLC front cover. To replace these fuses:

1. Remove power from the unit and I/O devices.

2. Remove terminal blocks with attached field wiring from the module
3. Remove front cover from the unit. (Gently press inward on both tabs on the sides of
the unit and pull the cover straight off.

Note: The CPU board assembly should remain captive inside the front cover as you remove it.)

Figure 177

4. Replace each blown fuse with the appropriate fuse type.

Installation Instructions 310
User Manual Chapter 15
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 178: 14-Point Micro PLC (IC200UAA003)

Figure 179: 28-Point Micro PLC (IC200UAA007)

15.15.1 AC Output Fuse Specifications

IC200UAA003/007 F1 Q1-Q2
F2 Q3-Q6
IC200UAA007 F3 Q7-Q8
F4 Q9-Q12
Rated Load Voltage 250 V
Current Rating 3.15 A
Manufacturer WICKMANN USA, Inc. http://www.wickmannusa.com/
Manufacturer Part Number TR5-F-373 series, 3.15A / 250V, Short Leads

Note: The fuses listed above are only for the output points on the AC In/AC Out Micro PLCs
(IC200UAA003/IC200UAA007). Do not attempt to replace any other parts in any other Micro PLC
unit.

Installation Instructions 311

User Manual Chapter 16
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 16: Configuration

This chapter explains how a VersaMax Nano PLC or Micro PLC is configured.

• Configuration Overview
• CPU Configuration
• Port 1 Configuration
• Port 2 Configuration
• Configuring Analog I/O Parameters
• Configuring High-Speed Counter, PWM or Pulse Output Operation
Configuration selects the characteristics of module operation. It also establishes program
references that will be used for each I/O point.

The PLC supports either auto-configuration or storing a configuration from a programmer.

16.1 Configuration Overview

16.1.1 Autoconfiguration
A VersaMax Nano or Micro PLC automatically configures its default parameters every time
it is powered on if no expansion modules are connected. If expansion modules are
connected, auto configuration occurs the first time it is powered on and is then disabled
after the initial auto configuration completes. Auto configuration may be re-enabled in a
system that was previously auto configured with expansion modules by turning the Micro
PLC and expansion modules off, disconnecting all expansion modules, and turning the Micro
PLC on.

Auto configuration is also disabled when the Nano or Micro PLC receives a valid
configuration from Logic Developer. Once auto configuration is disabled, it remains
disabled and configuration is retained at power on until configuration is cleared with Logic
Developer or the PLC is powered on with the battery removed and the memory backup
capacitor discharged.

16.1.2 Software Configuration

Most PLC systems use a customized configuration that is created using configuration
software and stored to the CPU from a programmer.

The CPU retains a software configuration across power cycles. After a software
configuration is stored to the CPU, the CPU will not auto-configure when power-cycled.

The configuration software can be used to:

• Create a new configuration

• Store (write) a configuration to the CPU
• Load (read) an existing configuration from a CPU

Configuration 312
User Manual Chapter 16
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

• Compare the configuration in a CPU with a configuration file stored in the

programmer
• Clear a configuration that was previously stored to the CPU
The CPU stores a software configuration in its non-volatile RAM. Storing a configuration
disables auto-configuration, so the PLC will not overwrite the configuration during
subsequent startups.

However, actually clearing a configuration from the programmer does cause a new auto-
configuration to be generated. In that case, auto-configuration is enabled until a
configuration is stored from the programmer again.

For a Nano or Micro PLC, one of the parameters that can be controlled by the software
configuration is whether the CPU reads the configuration and program from Flash at power-
up, or from RAM. If Flash is the configured choice, the CPU will read a previously-stored
configuration from its Flash memory at power-up. If RAM is the choice, the CPU will read a
configuration and application program from its RAM memory at power-up.

16.2 Storing a Configuration from a Programmer

A configuration can be stored from a programmer via the CPU port. The configuration takes
place whether I/O scanning is enabled or not.

Storing a configuration disables auto-configuration.

Note: If a hardware configuration is stored to the CPU, the configuration for the serial port to which the
programmer is connected is not actually installed until the programmer is removed. After removal
of the programmer, there is a delay before the new protocol begins operating. This delay is equal
to the configured T3’ time.

Clearing a configuration from the programmer causes a new auto-configuration to be

generated. Auto-configuration will be enabled until the configuration is stored from the
programmer again.

When a programmer is first connected to a Nano or Micro PLC, the PLC communicates using
the default communications parameters: 19,200 baud, odd parity, one start bit, one stop
bit, and eight data bits. If these parameters are re-configured, the new settings will be used
at power-up instead.

Configuration 313
User Manual Chapter 16
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

16.3 CPU Configuration

CPU configuration establishes the basic operating characteristics of the PLC, such as
whether it scans I/O while in Stop mode and how it behaves at power-up.

Feature Description Default Choices

I/O Scan-Stop Determines whether I/O is to be scanned while the No Yes, No
PLC is in STOP mode.
Power-up Power-up mode for Nano PLC Power-up mode for Stop Last Stop, Run
Mode Micro PLC Last, Stop,
Run
Logic/ Source of program and configuration when the Flash for RAM, Flash
Configuration Micro PLC is powered up. Nano, RAM
from for others
Registers Selects source of register data when PLC is Flash for RAM, Flash
powered up. Nano, RAM
for others
Passwords Determines whether passwords are enabled or Enabled Enabled,
disabled. (If passwords are disabled, the only way Disabled
to enable them is to clear the Micro PLC memory.)
Checksum The number of words in the program to be 8 8 to 32
Words checksummed each sweep. Entering 0 disables the
checksum function.
Default Modem Modem turnaround time (10ms/unit) This is the 0mS 0–255mS
Turnaround time required for the modem to start data
Time transmission after receiving the transmit request.
Default Idle Time (in seconds) the CPU waits to receive the next 10 1–60
Time message from the programming device before it
assumes that the programming device has failed
and proceeds to its base state. Communication
with the programmer is terminated and will have
to be reestablished.
SNP ID The ID used for SNP communications if a serial port Editable
is configured for RTU Slave or Serial I/O. SNP value
communications will occur between the
programmer and the CPU when the CPU is in Stop
mode.
Switch Determines whether the switch will control Enabled Enabled,
Run/Stop Run/Stop mode operation. Disabled
Switch Memory Determines whether the switch will control RAM Disabled Enabled,
Protect memory protection. Disabled

Configuration 314
User Manual Chapter 16
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Feature Description Default Choices

Diagnostics Micro PLCs can be configured to power up more Enabled Enabled,
quickly by turning off the normal power-up Disabled
diagnostics. However, unless your application
requires unusually fast power up, leave this setting
ENABLED. The DISABLED setting causes the Micro
PLC to power up without running diagnostics.
If power-up diagnostics are disabled, no expansion
units can be used. (If expansion units are
connected while power-up diagnostics are
disabled, faults are logged in the I/O tables.)
Micro PLC IC200UDR010 is guaranteed to power
up within 100mS when power-up diagnostics is
disabled.
Fatal Fault If the PLC powers up with fatal faults, it Disabled Enabled,
Override automatically sets fault references. If this Disabled
parameter is set to Disabled, the CPU will then go
to Stop mode. If this parameter is set to Enabled,
the CPU can then be power cycled from Stop/Fault
mode and it will go to Run/Stop mode.
Memory Board (for 20/40/64-Point Micro PLCs only) Sets up use of RAM Only RAM and
an optional memory module in the 64 Point Micro Flash
PLC.
Port 2 (for 20/40/64-Point Micro PLCs only) Sets up the None RS232/USB,
Configuration use of a Port 2 option module in the PLC. The port Ethernet,
2 options can then be configured. RS485. None
Sweep Mode Normal: sweep runs until it is complete. Normal Normal,
Constant: sweep runs for time specified in Sweep Constant
Timer.
Constant If Constant Sweep mode was selected, a Constant 100mS 5–200mS
Sweep Time Sweep Time (in milliseconds) can be specified.

Configuration 315
User Manual Chapter 16
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

16.4 Port 1 Configuration

Port 1, an RS-232 compatible serial port, is used to communicate with the programmer or
for other communications. Configuration options for Port 1 are described below. See
Chapter 24: for more information about port protocols for the Micro PLC. Note that
VersaMax Micro PLC and Nano PLC models prior to Release 3.0 do not support all port
modes.

Feature Description Default Choices

Port Mode Defines the protocol for Port 1. This selection SNP SNP, RTU only, Serial
determines which of the additional I/O
parameters below are configurable.
Port Type SNP, RTU: Configures the serial port as the Slave Master, Slave
slave or master device.
Data Rate Data transmission rate (in bits per second). 19200 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
(bps) 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400
Flow Control The type of flow control used on the port. Not None None
editable.
Parity Determines whether parity is added to words Odd Odd, Even, None
Stop Bits Number of stop bits used in transmission. 1 1, 2
(Most serial devices use one stop bit; slower
devices use two.)
Bits / Determines whether the CPU recognizes 8-bit 8 bits 7 bits, 8 bits
Character or 7-bit characters.
Timeout SNP only: Specifies the timeout value used by Long Long, Medium,
the protocol. Short, None
Turn Around SNP only: Turnaround delay time in ms 0 0-255
Delay
SNP ID SNP only: 8-byte network identifier for Port 1. (none) (none)
Station RTU: Station address of the slave on the RTU 1 1 to 247
Address network
Serial I/O: A hexadecimal identifier used for 0 0 to FF hex
Serial I/O protocol.

16.4.1 Timing Note for RTU Communications

When using RTU communications, it may be necessary to increase the RTU timeout
configured on the master device as the PLC slave scan time increases. It is not necessary to
change the configuration of the VersaMax CPU when the port is used in RTU slave mode.

Configuration 316
User Manual Chapter 16
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

16.5 Port 2 Configuration

On 23- and 28-point Micro PLCs, the built-in Port 2 provides general-purpose
communications using SNP, SNPX, RTU slave and Serial I/O protocols. Port 2 can also be
configured as an SNP/SNPX master. On 20-, 40-, and 64-point Micro PLCs, an optional RS-
232, RS-485, or USB port module can be installed and configured as Port 2.

Port 2 configuration can be changed through the configuration utility, or by using the
COMMREQ (communications request) function block within a logic program.

Feature Description Default Choices

Port Mode Defines the protocol for Port 2. This SNP RS232/USB: SNP, Serial
selection determines which of the I/O, RTU Only
additional parameters below are RS485: SNP, Serial I/O,
configurable. RTU Only
Port Type For Port Modes SNP and RTU Only: Slave Slave, Master
Configures the serial port as a slave (the
responding device) or a master (the
initiating device) in a master/slave
system.
Data Rate (bps) Data transmission rate (in bits per 19200 RS-232/USB and RS-485:
second). 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200,
38400
Ethernet: 19200, 38400,
175000
Flow Control The type of flow control used on the port. None None
Not editable.
Parity Determines whether parity is added to Odd Odd, Even, None
words
Stop Bits For SNP, Serial I/O and Modbus with RS- 1 1, 2
485: Number of stop bits used in
transmission. (Most serial devices use one
stop bit; slower devices use two.)
For Modbus RTU, when using no parity,
Stop Bits should be set to 2. If using Even
or Odd parity, Stop Bits should be set to 1.
Bits / Character For Serial I/O: Determines whether the 8 bits 7 bits, 8 bits
CPU recognizes 8-bit or 7-bit characters.
Timeout For SNP: Specifies the timeout value used Long Long, Medium,
by the protocol. Short, None
Turn Around For SNP: Turnaround delay time in ms 0 0-255
Delay
SNP ID For SNP and RTU only: 8-byte network (none) 1 to 247
identifier for Port 2.
Station Address For Serial I/O: A hexadecimal identifier 0 0 to FF
used for Serial I/O protocol.

Configuration 317
User Manual Chapter 16
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Feature Description Default Choices

Duplex Mode For RS485 RTU 2-Wire 2-Wire, 4-Wire
For RS485 Serial I/O Point to 2-Wire, 4-Wire,
Point Point to Point

16.6 Configuring Analog I/O Parameters

For Micro PLC and Expansion Units with analog I/O, each analog channel can be individually
configured to operate in either voltage or current mode. If current mode operation is
selected, the range can then be configured as either 4-20mA or 0-20mA.

For Nano PLCs with one analog input, the mode is always voltage. Reference addresses can
also be selected as described above.

Mode Parameters Default

Voltage or current mode Voltage, Current Voltage
Current range selection 4–20mA 4–20mA
0–20mA
Voltage range selection 0 to 10,000mV 0 to 10,000mV
(Expansion Inputs Only) -10,000 to 10,000mV

16.7 Configuring High-Speed Counter, PWM or

Pulse Train
All Nano PLCs and Micro PLCs with DC inputs are configurable for a mix of High-Speed
Counting features. Nano PLCs and Micro PLCs with DC outputs can also be configured with
Pulse-Width Modulation and Pulse Train/Ramping Pulse Train features (only for 20-, 40-, or
64-point Micro PLC).

Configuring High-Speed Counter, Pulse Train, Ramping Pulse Train, Motion Support, or
PWM operation enables specific features and assigns them to dedicated references on the
PLC. You can mix high-speed counting and regular I/O functions on the same Micro PLC, as
long as there are references available.

16.7.1 HSC, PWM, and PTO Settings

First, the basic High-Speed Counter, Pulse-Width Modulated, or Pulse Train Output
Settings should be selected by double-clicking on HSC/PWM/PTO*.

Figure 180

Configuration 318
User Manual Chapter 16
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Selecting the Counter Type

Selecting a Counter Type sets up how the module’s internal High-Speed Counter features
will be used. The choice for Counter Type determines which of the subsequent parameters
can be configured. Counter Type choices depend on the type of Micro or Nano PLC being
configured:

Counter Type Configuration for PLC Module Configurable for Each Channel
PLC 3 Type A 4 Type A 1 Type 4 Type A 1 Type A, Standard Counter PWM Pulse Pulse Motion
A, 32 1 Type B Train Train Support
1 Type B 32 with
Ramp
All Nano PLCs Yes - Yes - - Yes Yes Yes Yes - -
All Micro PLCs - Yes Yes - - Yes Yes Yes Yes - -
except UAA003
and UAA007
UAA003, 007 Feature Not Available
20-/40-/64- - Yes Yes Yes 12 Yes 12 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 12
Point Micro
PLCs

The Counter Type selection made for the module determines, in turn, the features that can
be configured for the channels.

• 3 Type A (for Nano PLCs only). Configures a Nano PLC High-Speed Counter
functionality as three separate channels. Each channel can then be configured as a
Type A Counter, OR as a standard, Pulse Train, or Pulse-Width Modulated output.
• 1 Type A / 1 Type B. Combines the functionality of channels 1, 2, and 3 into one Type
B counter. For Micro PLCs, channel 4 can then be independently configured as a Type
A Counter, OR as a standard, Pulse Train, or Pulse-Width Modulated output. Micro-
20, -40, and -64 PLCs also provide Pulse Train with Ramp channel configuration.
• 4 Type A (for all Micro PLCs). Configures the Micro PLC High-Speed Counter
functionality as four separate channels. Each channel can then be configured as a
Type A Counter, OR as a standard, Pulse Train, or Pulse-Width Modulated output.
Micro-20, -40, and -64 PLCs also provide Pulse Train with Ramp channel
configuration.
• 1 Type A / 1 Type B_32) (for all Micro-20 and Micro-40 PLCs, and for Release 3.60 or
later Micro-64 PLCs only). Combines the functionality of channels 1, 2, and 3 into
one Type B counter. Channel 4 can then be independently configured as a Type A
Counter, OR as a standard, Pulse Train, Pulse-Width Modulated, or Motion Support
output.
• 4 Type A_32 (for all Micro-20 and Micro-40 PLCs, and for Release 3.60 or later Micro-
64 PLCs only). Configures the Micro PLC High-Speed Counter functionality as four

12
Rel. 3.6 or later.

Configuration 319
User Manual Chapter 16
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

separate channels. Each channel can then be configured as a Type A Counter, OR as

a standard, Pulse Train, Pulse-Width Modulated, or Motion Support output.

Output Stop Mode

This setting determines what outputs will do when the system is in Stop mode.

Normal means that High-Speed Counter outputs continue to respond to the counter inputs
and standard outputs turn off. Preset outputs continue to operate as though the CPU were
present, changing state to reflect the counter Accumulators. Ramp Pulse and Motion
outputs (for Micro-20, -40, and -64 PLCs) stop immediately when the PLC is put into Stop
Mode.

Force Off means all Preset outputs are turned off and remain off until the CPU returns to
normal operation.

Hold Last means Preset outputs retain current levels and do not reflect the counter
Accumulators.

Reference Address, Length

The range of CPU memory references that will be used by the High-Speed Counter features.
Many of these memory references have specific defined functions as described in Chapter
17:. They can be used by the application program to send parameters and commands to a
High-Speed Counter, and to monitor counter operation.

16.7.2 Channel #1, 2, 3, 4 Parameters

After selecting the Counter Type on the HSC/PWM/PTO Settings tab, each channel can be
configured on its Channel tab:

Figure 181

The Channel Functions that can be configured here depend on the Counter Type and Micro
PLC type, as explained previously. Parameters for all Channel Functions are described below.

Configuration 320
User Manual Chapter 16
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Channel Function: Counter

In Counter mode, the channel will operate as a High-Speed Counter (Type A or Type B). See
Chapter 17: for a description of this feature. The following additional parameters can then
be configured:

Counter Status: specifies whether the counter output is enabled.

Count Direction: for a Type A Counter only, this specifies whether count inputs increment
(Up) or decrement (Down) the accumulator.

Count Mode: defines whether the counter wraps if the count limit is reached (Continuous)
or if it stops at the counter limit (Single Shot).

Preload/Strobe: selects the function of the Preload/Strobe Input.

Preload/Strobe Input Edge: for Type A counters only. This non-editable parameter specifies
that the Zero to Positive transition is used for a preload or strobe input.

Count Input Edge: for Type A counters only, this parameter specifies which transition of the
counter is used as the count input. Zero to Positive is a low-to-high transition. Positive to
Zero is a high-to-low transition.

Time Base (mSec): specifies the timebase for the Counts-per-Timebase register: The default
is 1000mS. Range is 10mS to 65530mS.

High Limit: the counter’s upper limit. It must be greater than the low limit.

Low Limit: the counter’s lower limit.

ON Preset: defines the counter’s ON preset.

OFF Preset: defines the counter’s OFF preset.

Preload Value: the Preload value for the counter.

Channel Function: PWM

Selecting PWM as the Channel Function sets up the channel as a Pulse-Width Modulated
output. See Chapter 17: for a description of this feature.

The Counter Status parameter enables or disables the channel’s PWM output.

Channel Function: Pulse Train

Selecting Pulse Train as the Channel Function sets up the channel as a Pulse-Train output.
See Chapter 17: for a description of this feature.

The Counter Status parameter enables or disables the channel’s Pulse Train Output.

Channel Function: Standard

Selecting Standard as the Channel Function sets up the channel as a standard output.

The Counter Status parameter enables or disables the Standard output.

Configuration 321
User Manual Chapter 16
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Channel Function: Pulse Train with Ramp

(Micro-20, Micro-40, and Micro-64 PLCs). If the Counter Type is configured as either 4 Type
A or 1 Type A / 1 Type B (this choice is not available for 4 Type A_32 or 1 Type A / 1 Type
B_32), selecting Pulse Train with Ramp sets up the channel as a Pulse Train output with the
ability to accelerate and decelerate. See Chapter 17: for a description of this feature.

The Counter Status parameter enables or disables the pulse output.

PTR Acceleration sets up the Pulse Train acceleration rate, from stop to full speed. For
channels 1, 2, and 3, the range is 10 through 1,000,000. For channel 4, the range is 90 to
1,000,000.

PTR Deceleration sets up the Pulse Train deceleration rate, from full speed to stop. For
channels 1, 2, and 3, the range is 10 through 1,000,000. For channel 4, the range is 90 to
1,000,000.

Channel Function: Motion Support

(Micro-20, -40, and -64 PLCs only. This feature requires Machine Edition version 5.5 SP2,
Sim2 or later). Selecting Motion Support as the Channel Function sets up the channel as a
Pulse Train output with the ability to accelerate and decelerate. See Chapter 18: for a
description of this feature.

The Counter Status parameter enables or disables the pulse output.

The User Units and Counts parameters set up a scaling factor for the Acceleration and
Deceleration parameters of a motion profile. The possible ratio of User Units to Counts is
1:16 through 8:1.

Configuration 322
User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 17: PLC Operation

This chapter describes the operating modes of the VersaMax Nano and Micro PLCs and
shows the relationship between the application program execution and other tasks
performed by the PLC CPU.

17.1 Operating Modes

The application program in a PLC executes repeatedly. In addition to executing the
application program, the PLC regularly obtains data from input devices, sends data to
output devices, performs internal housekeeping, and performs communications tasks. This
sequence of operations is called the sweep.

• The basic operating mode of the PLC is called Standard Sweep mode. In this mode,
the CPU performs all parts of its sweep normally. Each sweep executes as quickly as
possible with a different amount of time consumed each sweep.
• The PLC may instead operate in Constant Sweep Time mode. In this mode, the CPU
performs the same series of actions but each sweep takes the same amount of time.
• The PLC may also be in either of two Stop modes:
— Stop with I/O Disabled mode
— Stop with I/O Enabled mode

PLC Operation 323

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

17.2 Parts of the CPU Sweep

Figure 182

PLC Operation 324

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parts of the CPU Sweep

Start of Sweep Housekeeping includes the tasks necessary to prepare for the start of the
Housekeeping sweep. Before starting the actual sweep, the CPU:
• calculates the sweep time
• Schedules the start of the next sweep
• Determines the mode of the next sweep
• Updates the fault reference tables
• Resets the Watchdog timer
If the PLC is in Constant Sweep Time mode, the sweep is delayed until the
required sweep time elapses. If the required time has already elapsed, the
OV_SWP %SA0002 contact is set, and the sweep continues without delay.
Next, the CPU updates timer values (hundredths, tenths, and seconds).
Input Scan When the sweep starts, the CPU first scans inputs in ascending reference
address order. The CPU stores this new input data in the appropriate
memories.
If the CPU has been configured to not scan I/O in Stop mode, the input scan is
skipped when the CPU is in Stop mode.
Application Next, the CPU solves the application program logic. It always starts with the
Program Logic first instruction in the program. It ends when the END instruction is executed.
Scan Solving the logic creates a new set of output data.
Output Scan Immediately after the logic solution, the CPU scans all outputs in ascending
reference address order. The output scan is completed when all output data
has written.
If the CPU has been configured to not scan I/O in Stop mode, the output scan
is also skipped when the CPU is in Stop mode.
Programmer If there is a programming device attached, the CPU next executes the
Communications programmer communications window.
Window In the default limited window mode, each sweep the CPU honors one service
request. The time limit for programmer communications is 6 ms. If the
programmer makes a request that requires more than 6 ms to process, the
processing is spread out over multiple sweeps.
In Run to Completion mode, the length of the system communications
window is limited to 50 ms. If a module makes a request that requires more
than 50 ms to process, the request is spread out over multiple sweeps
System Next, the CPU processes communications requests. In default (“Run to
Communications Completion”) mode, the length of the system communications window is
Window limited to 200 ms. If a request requires more than 200 ms to process, the
request is spread out over multiple sweeps.
In Limited mode, if a request requires more than 6 ms to process, the
processing is spread out over multiple sweeps. The result is that
communications using the system window have less impact on sweep time,
but response is slower.

PLC Operation 325

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parts of the CPU Sweep

Logic Program A checksum calculation is performed on the application program at the end
Checksum of every sweep. You can specify the number of words from 8 to 32 to be
Calculation checksummed.
If the calculated checksum does not match the reference checksum, the
program checksum failure exception flag is raised. This causes a fault entry
to be inserted into the PLC fault table and the PLC mode to be changed to
Stop. If the checksum calculation fails, the programmer communications
window is not affected.

17.3 Standard CPU Sweep Operation

Standard Sweep operation is the normal operating mode of the PLC CPU. In Standard
Sweep operation, the CPU repeatedly executes the application program, updates I/O, and
performs communications and other tasks shown in the diagram:

1. The CPU performs its start-of-sweep housekeeping tasks.

2. It reads inputs.
3. It executes the application program.
4. It updates outputs
5. If a programming device is present, the CPU communicates with it.
6. It communicates with other devices.
7. It performs diagnostics
Except for communicating with a programmer, all these steps execute every sweep.
Programmer communications occur only when needed.

In this mode, the CPU performs all parts of its sweep normally. Each sweep executes as
quickly as possible with a different amount of time consumed each sweep.

17.3.1 The Sweep Windows

The programmer communications window and the system communications window have
two operating modes:

Limited Mode The execution time of the window is 6ms. The window
terminates when it has no more tasks to complete or when
6ms has elapsed.

Run to Completion Mode Regardless of the time assigned to a particular window, the
window runs until all tasks within that window are
completed (up to 200ms for the System Communications
Window and up to 50ms for the Programmer
Communications Window).

SVCREQ 2 can be used in the application program to obtain the current times for each
window.

PLC Operation 326

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

17.3.2 The Watchdog Timer

When the CPU is in Standard Sweep mode, the watchdog timer catches failure conditions
that could cause an unusually long sweep. The length of the watchdog timer is 200ms. It
restarts from zero at the beginning of each sweep.

If the sweep takes longer than 200mS, the OK LED on the CPU module goes off. The CPU
resets, executes its power-up logic, generates a watchdog failure fault, and goes to Stop
mode. Communications are temporarily interrupted.

17.4 Constant Sweep Time Operation

If the application requires that each CPU sweep take the same amount of time, the CPU can
be configured to operate in Constant Sweep Time mode. This operating mode assures that
the inputs and outputs in the system are updated at constant intervals. This mode can also
be used to implement a longer sweep time.

17.4.1 Changing the Configured Default for Constant Sweep

Mode
If the PLC is in STOP mode, its Configured Constant Sweep mode can be edited. After this is
done, the configuration must be stored to the CPU for the change to take effect. Once
stored, Constant Sweep Time mode becomes the default sweep mode.

17.4.2 The Constant Sweep Timer

During operation in Constant Sweep Time mode, the CPU’s constant sweep timer controls
the length of the sweep. The timer length can be 5 to 200 ms. The time should be at least
10 ms longer than the CPU’s sweep time when it is in Standard Sweep mode, to prevent
extraneous over-sweep faults.

If the constant sweep timer expires before the sweep completes, the CPU still completes the
entire sweep, including the windows. However, it automatically provides notice than a too-
long sweep has occurred. On the next sweep after the over-sweep, the CPU places an over-
sweep alarm in the PLC fault table. Then, at the beginning of the following sweep, the CPU
sets the OV_SWP fault contact (%SA0002). The CPU automatically resets the OV_SWP
contact when the sweep time no longer exceeds the Constant Sweep Timer. The CPU also
resets the OV_SWP contact if it is not in Constant Sweep Time mode.

As with other fault contacts, the application program can monitor this contact to keep
informed about the occurrence of over-sweep conditions.

17.4.3 Enabling/Disabling Constant Sweep Time,

Reading or Setting the Length of the Timer
SVCREQ 1 can be included in the application program to enable or disable Constant Sweep
Time mode, change the length of the Constant Sweep Time, read whether Constant Sweep
Time is currently enabled, or read the Constant Sweep Time length.

PLC Operation 327

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

17.5 CPU Stop Modes

The Nano or Micro PLC may be in either of two Stop modes:

• Stop with I/O Disabled mode

• Stop with I/O Enabled mode
When the PLC is in Stop mode, the CPU does not execute the application program logic. You
can configure whether or not the I/O will scanned during Stop mode. Communications with
the programmer and intelligent option modules continue in Stop mode. In addition, faulted
board polling and board reconfiguration execution continue in Stop mode.

SVCREQ 13 can be used in the application program to stop the PLC at the end of the next
sweep. All I/O will go to the OFF state and a diagnostic message will be placed in the PLC
Fault Table.

17.6 Controlling the Execution of a Program

The VersaMax CPU Instruction Set contains several powerful Control functions that can be
included in an application program to limit or change the way the CPU executes the
program and scans I/O.

17.6.1 Calling a Subroutine Block

The CALL function can be used to cause program execution to go to a specific subroutine.
Conditional logic placed before the Call function controls the circumstances under which
the CPU performs the subroutine logic. After the subroutine is finished, program execution
resumes at the point in the logic directly after the CALL instruction.

17.6.2 Creating a Temporary End of Logic

The END function can be used to provide a temporary end of logic. It can be placed
anywhere in a program. No logic beyond the END function is executed, and program
execution goes directly back to the beginning. This ability makes the END function useful
for debugging a program.

The END function should not be placed in logic associated with or called by a Sequential
Function Chart control structure. If this occurs, the PLC will be placed in STOP/FAULT mode
at the end of the current sweep and an SFC_END fault will be logged.

17.6.3 Executing Rungs of Logic without Logical Power Flow

The nested Master Control Relay can be used to execute a portion of the program logic with
no logical power flow. Logic is executed in a forward direction and coils in that part of the
program are executed with negative power flow. Master Control Relay functions can be
nested to 8 levels deep.

PLC Operation 328

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

17.6.4 Jumping to Another Part of the Program

The Jump function can be used to cause program execution to move either forward or
backward in the logic. When a nested Jump function is active, the coils in the part of the
program that is skipped are left in their previous states (not executed with negative power
flow, as they are with a Master Control Relay). Jump functions can also be nested.

Jumps cannot span blocks, SFC actions, SCF transitions, or SFC pre- or post-processing logic.

17.7 Privilege Levels and Passwords

Passwords are an optional configurable feature of the Micro PLC (passwords are not
available on Nano PLCs). Passwords provide different levels of access privilege to the PLC
when the programmer is in Online or Monitor mode. Passwords are not used if the
programmer is in Offline mode. Passwords can restrict:

• Changing I/O and PLC configuration data

• Changing programs
• Reading PLC data
• Reading programs
There is one password for each privilege level in the PLC. Each password may be unique or
the same password can be used for more than one level. Passwords are one to seven ASCII
characters in length.

By default, there is no password protection. Passwords are set up, changed, or removed
using the programming software. After passwords have been set up, access to the PLC is
restricted unless the proper password is entered. Entering a correct password allows access
to the requested level and to all lower levels. For example, the password for level 3 allows
access to levels 1, 2, and 3. If PLC communications are suspended, protection automatically
returns to the highest unprotected level. For example: If a password is set at levels 2 & 3, but
none at level 4, if the software disconnects and reconnects, the access level is 4. Privilege
level 1 is always available because no password can be set for this level.

Level Access Description

4 Least • Write to all configuration or logic. Configuration may only be written in Stop
Protected mode; logic may be written in Stop or Run mode (if run-mode store is
supported).
• Set or delete passwords for any level.
• Plus all access from levels 3,2 and 1

Note: This is the default if no passwords are defined.

3 • Write to all configuration and logic when the CPU is in Stop mode, including
word-for-word changes (when supported), the addition/deletion of program
logic, and the overriding of discrete I/O.
• Read/Write/Verify user flash.
• Store reference/override tables.
• Change sweep mode.
• Plus all access from levels 2 and 1

PLC Operation 329

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Level Access Description

2 • Write to any data memory, but this does not include storing tables.
• This includes the toggle/force of reference values but does not include
overriding discrete I/O.
• The PLC can be started or stopped.
• PLC and I/O fault tables can be cleared.
• Plus all access from level 1
1 Most Read any PLC data except for passwords. This includes reading fault tables, current
Protected status, performing datagrams, verifying logic/config, and loading program and
configuration from the PLC. No PLC memory may be changed.

17.7.1 Protection Level Request from Programmer

Upon connection to the CPU, the programming software automatically requests the CPU to
move to the highest unprotected level. That gives the programmer access to the highest
unprotected level without having to specifically request a particular level.

A privilege change may be to a lower level or to a higher level. The privilege level is changed
from the programmer by entering the new level and the correct password for that level. If
the wrong password is entered, the change is denied and a fault is logged in the PLC fault
table. A request to change to a privilege level that is not password-protected is made by
supplying the new level and an empty password.

Notes on Using Passwords

To re-enable passwords after passwords have been disabled, the PLC must be power-cycled
with the battery removed for long enough to completely discharge the super-capacitor and
erase the PLC memory.

If the passwords prevent changing the run/stop mode, firmware upgrades cannot be
performed if the PLC is in run mode.

The Run/Stop switch (if configured) will place the PLC in run or stop mode regardless of the
passwords.

17.7.2 The OEM Protection Feature

The OEM protection feature is similar to the passwords and privilege levels and provides an
even higher level of security. The feature is enabled or disabled using a 1 to 7 character
password called the OEM key. When OEM protection is enabled, no write-access to the PLC
program and configuration is permitted. Reading the configuration from the PLC is
permitted. In this mode, no user flash operations are allowed.

When the OEM key password has been created, the OEM key can be locked in two ways: by
choosing the locked setting from the programming software or by power-cycling the PLC.
(The OEM key locked status does not change when PLC communications are suspended.)

PLC Operation 330

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

17.7.3 Clearing All Memory

It is possible to Clear All memory from the programmer with the CPU at any privilege level,
even with the OEM key locked. Operators can clear CPU memory and store a new application
program to the CPU without knowing passwords.

If passwords and/or the OEM key have been set and written to flash, a read from flash
updates the protection level. In this case, it is not necessary to re-enter the password to gain
access to a particular level. A Clear All does not clear user flash.

17.8 Run/Stop Mode Switch Operation

The CPU Run/Stop mode switch on a VersaMax Micro PLC can be used as a Run/Stop switch,
as a memory protect switch, and for clearing faults when a fatal fault exists.

A 10-Point VersaMax Nano PLC can provide the same functionality by adding a Single Pole,
Single Throw (SPST) switch. An external switch on a Nano PLC is read as a normal 24Vdc
input. The specifications for the RUN input are the same as the other DC inputs on the Nano
PLC.

17.8.1 Run/Stop Mode Operation

If Run/Stop operation is enabled, the Run/Stop switch is use to control the operating mode
of the PLC. The PLC monitors the state of the Run/Stop switch and stores the current state
in status bit %S0022. The application program can check the state of this bit if necessary,
and activate logic based on its setting (in Run mode, the bit is =1, and in Stop mode, it is =0).

If Run/Stop mode switch operation is enabled, the switch can be used to place the Micro PLC
CPU in Run mode if a fatal fault condition exists in the CPU. Note that the switch overrides
any restrictions on mode selection that have been set up using password protection.

• If the CPU has non-fatal faults and is not in Stop/Fault mode, placing the switch in
Run position causes the CPU to go to Run mode. Faults are NOT cleared.
• If the CPU has fatal faults and is in Stop/Fault mode and Run/Stop Enabled is
configured, placing the switch in Run position causes the Run LED to blink for 5
seconds. While the Run LED is blinking, the CPU switch can be used to clear the fault
table and put the CPU in Run mode. After the switch has been in Run position for at
least ½ second, move it to Stop position for at least ½ second. Then move it back to
Run position. The faults are cleared and the CPU goes to Run mode. The LED stops
blinking and stays on. This can be repeated if necessary.
• If the switch is not toggled as described, after 5 seconds the Run LED goes off and
the CPU remains in Stop/Fault mode. Faults stay in the fault table.
• If Run/Stop operation is NOT enabled by configuration and a fatal fault occurs, it is
not possible to restore operation using the switch as described above. The CPU
remains in Stop/Fault mode and faults stay in the fault table.

PLC Operation 331

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

17.8.2 Configurable Memory Protection

Operation of the Micro PLC Run/Stop switch (or Nano Run/Stop input) can be configured to
prevent writing to program memory and configuration, and to prevent forcing or overriding
discrete data.

17.8.3 Configuration Parameters and Switch Position for

Run/Stop Modes
Switch I/O Scan Stop Switch Allowed PLC Operation
Run/Stop Configuration Position Mode
Enabled
Configuration
Disabled has no effect has no effect All PLC Programmer modes
operate the same
Enabled has no effect Run/On All PLC Programmer modes
operate the same
Enabled No Stop/Off Stop/ No I/O PLC not allowed to go to
Run mode.
Enabled Yes Stop/Off Stop/No I/O, PLC not allowed to go to
Stop I/O Run mode.
Enabled has no effect Toggle Switch n/a PLC goes to Run mode
from Stop to
Run
Enabled No Toggle switch n/a PLC goes to STOP–NO IO
from Run to
Stop
Enabled Yes Toggle switch n/a PLC goes to STOP–IO
from Run to
Stop

17.8.4 Configuration Parameters and Switch Position for

Memory Protection
Memory Protect Enabled Switch Position PLC Operation
Configuration
Off n/a Normal PLC operation
On Protect/On No storing/clearing/loading of PLC allowed
On Protect/Off Normal PLC operation

PLC Operation 332

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

17.8.5 Configuration Parameters and Switch Position for

Simultaneous Run/Stop Operation and Memory
Protection
Memory Protect Run/Stop Switch Position PLC Operation
Configuration Configuration
Enabled Disabled Toggled from OFF to ON Memory Protected
Enabled Enabled Toggled from OFF to ON Memory Protected
PLC is in Run Mode
Enabled Enabled Toggled from ON to OFF Memory Protected
PLC is in Stop Mode
PLC cannot be put in Run
Mode with Programmer

17.8.6 Configuration Parameters and Switch Position for Fault

Operations
Run/Stop Switch Position Faults Present PLC Operation
Enabled in the PLC
Configuration
Disabled n/a n/a Normal PLC operation
Enabled Toggle Switch from Stop to Run Non-fatal Places PLC in Run mode
Faults are NOT cleared
Enabled Toggle Switch from Stop to Run Fatal Run LED blinks for 5 sec
Enabled While the Run LED is blinking and Fatal PLC goes to Run mode
ON for at least ½ second, toggled and all faults are cleared
from Run to Stop, and then, after
another ½ second, toggled from
Stop to Run

17.9 Power-Up and Power-Down Sequence

17.9.1 Power-Up Sequence
The power-up sequence for the Nano/Micro PLC consists of the following events:

1. The CPU runs self-diagnostics. This includes checking a portion of RAM to determine
whether or not the RAM is functional. (For DC Micro PLCs, power-up diagnostics can
be disabled by configuration. It is recommended that you not use this feature unless
your application requires unusually rapid power-up. For details, see “Installation
Instructions”.)
2. The hardware configuration is compared with the software configuration. Any
mismatches detected constitute faults and are alarmed.
3. If there is no software configuration, the CPU uses the default configuration.

PLC Operation 333

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

4. The mode of the first sweep is determined based on CPU configuration. The PLC can
either copy the program from flash memory into RAM (see below), or power up in
Stop or Run mode. See “Flash Memory”.

Nano PLC or 14- 23-Point or 28-Point Micro PLC

Point Micro PLC No Backup Battery Backup Battery
Default Power- Stop Mode Stop Mode Last Mode
up Mode
Configurable Run Mode or Stop Run Mode or Stop Run, Stop, or Last Mode
Power-up Mode Mode
Modes

17.9.2 Flash Memory

A VersaMax Nano or Micro PLC provides non-volatile flash memory to store the application
program and system firmware.

Only one application program at a time can be present in non-volatile flash memory.
Separate copies of the user data (program, configuration, and retentive data) are
maintained in FLASH memory.

During configuration of a Nano or Micro PLC, you can choose whether, in the future, the PLC
will read its user data from flash or from RAM.

In addition, Micro PLCs that use the optional backup battery can read their user data from
RAM if the unit has been powered down for an extended period of time. If there is no battery
backup, RAM may be invalid on power-up. In that case, the default program is installed, or
the user data must be read from flash.

User Data
Configuration Program Retentive Data
Default Settings
Read From RAM X X X
Read From FLASH – -- –
Recommended Settings
Read From RAM – -- X
Read From FLASH X X X
(If battery is not used)

If the application uses SVCREQ 53 to write additional data to flash memory (supported in
firmware rev 3.0), retentive data will be updated. If the retentive data is read from flash on
power-up, these updated values will be used instead of the original data values.

17.9.3 Default Conditions for Micro PLC Output Points

At power-up, output points default to off. They stay off until the first output scan.

PLC Operation 334

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

17.9.4 Power-Down Conditions

System power-down occurs automatically if the power supply detects that incoming AC
power has dropped. The minimum hold time is one half cycle.

Note: During a gradual power down, when the input power supply voltage drops below the minimum
operating voltage, the PLC will transition to a state where all outputs are disabled. In this state,
the Run LED and the OK LED are also turned off. The PLC remains in this state until power is lost
completely (the PLC shuts off), or until power is restored (above the minimum operating voltage).
In the latter case, the PLC will reset itself and start the normal power-up sequence.

17.9.5 Power Cycle

The table below lists the effects that a power cycle can have on Micro PLC operation under
specific conditions.

Condition Effects
PLC loses power while storing a program On the ensuing power-up the program will be deleted
to RAM from either the programming from RAM. You will need to store the program again
software or flash memory. from the programmer.
PLC loses power while storing a On the ensuing power-up, the configuration will be
configuration to RAM from either the deleted from RAM. You will need to store the
programming software or flash memory. configuration again from the programmer.
PLC loses power while storing the On the ensuing power-up, the reference table data
reference tables to RAM from either the will be deleted from RAM. You will need to store the
programming software or flash memory. data again from the programmer.
PLC loses power while storing a program, The flash memory area used to store the program,
configuration, or reference table data to configuration, or reference table data will be
flash memory. considered invalid. You will need to store the
program, configuration, or reference tables to flash
memory again.
If system includes expansion unit(s):
Micro PLC base unit loses power before the Expansion units will be reset (all outputs will be set to
expansion unit(s) zero)
Expansion unit(s) lose power before the A Loss of Expansion Module fault may be logged.
Micro PLC base unit while Micro PLC is
scanning I/O
Micro PLC base unit powers up before the If expansion units do not power up at the same time
expansion unit(s) as the Micro PLC, a Loss of Expansion Module fault
may be logged.
Expansion unit(s) power up before the Expansion unit outputs remain off until the Micro
Micro PLC base unit base unit completes power-up and begins scanning
I/O.

If the application uses SVCREQ 53 to write additional data to flash memory (supported in
firmware rev 3.0), retentive data will be updated. If the retentive data is read from flash on
power-up, these updated values will be used instead of the original data values.

PLC Operation 335

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

17.10 Input Filters

17.10.1 Discrete Input Filtering
Nano and Micro PLCs with DC inputs can provide discrete input filtering, to compensate for
switch bounce and other application conditions. This input filtering also applies to discrete
expansion units connected to the PLC.

Filter Control Reference

Discrete input filter time can be changed on the fly by simply adjusting the value in reserved
reference %AQ11. The filter time can be 0.5mS to 20mS in 0.5mS increments. The value in
%AQ11 represents the number of 0.5mS increments in the total filter time.

For 20/40/64-point Micro PLCs, input filtering is configurable in 1ms increments only. Use
the values shown below (1ms = 2, 2ms = 4, 3ms = 6 and so on).

Note that input filtering is not provided for 64-point expansion units.

Filter Value to Filter Value to Filter Value to Filter Value to

Time in Put in Time in Put in Time in Put in Time in Put in
mS %AQ11 mS %AQ11 mS %AQ11 mS %AQ11
0.5mS 1 5.5mS 11 10.5mS 21 15.5mS 31
1.0mS 2 6.0mS 12 11.0mS 22 16.0mS 32
1.5mS 3 6.5mS 13 11.5mS 23 16.5mS 33
2.0mS 4 7.0mS 14 12.0mS 24 17.0mS 34
2.5mS 5 7.5mS 15 12.5mS 25 17.5mS 35
3.0mS 6 8.0mS 16 13.0mS 26 18.0mS 36
3.5mS 7 8.5mS 17 13.5mS 27 18.5mS 37
4.0mS 8 9.0mS 18 14.0mS 28 19.0mS 38
4.5mS 9 9.5mS 19 14.5mS 29 19.5mS 39
5.0mS 10 10.0mS 20 15.0mS 20 20.0mS 40

The input filter recognizes signals that have a duration within ±0.5mS (±1.0mS for 20-/40-
/64-point Micro PLCs) of the filter time. For example, if the filtering time is 5mS, any input
that lasts more than 4.5mS (5.0mS for 20-/40-/64-point Micro PLCs) is recognized. What
will be read on an input is not only based on the input filter setting. It is also based on the
scan time. An input will always be seen if it is longer than both the scan time and the filter
time.

Because %AQ11 is used to control the discrete input filtering time, it should not be used for
any other purpose.

PLC Operation 336

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

17.11 Hardware R/C Filters

In addition to Discrete Input Filters, all the VersaMax Nano/Micro modules have simple
Hardware R/C Filters for the inputs. The following table provides the filter constants of the
simple hardware R/C filter present on each module.

Module I1 to I4 I5 to I6 I7 to I8 I9 to I12 I13 I14 to I16 I17 to I24 I25 to I40

IC200NDR001 200nS 1μS
IC200NAL211 200nS 1μS
IC200NDD101 200nS 1μS
IC200NDR010 200nS 1μS
IC200NAL110 200nS 1μS
IC200NDD010 200nS 1μS
IC200UAR014 20 mS 20 mS 20 mS
IC200UAA003 20 mS 20 mS 20 mS
IC200UDR001 200nS 1μS 1μS
IC200UDR002 200nS 1μS 1μS
IC200UDD104 200nS 1μS 1μS
IC200UDR003 200nS 1μS 1μS
IC200UDD112 200nS 1μS 1μS
IC200UDR120 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS
IC200UDR020 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS
IC200UDD220 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS
IC200UDD020 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS
IC200UAL006 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UAL005 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UAL004 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UAR028 20mS 20mS 20mS 20mS 20mS 20mS
IC200UAA007 20mS 20mS 20mS 20mS 20mS 20mS
IC200UDR005 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UDR010 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UDD110 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UDD120 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UDR006 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UDD212 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UDR228 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UDR140 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS
IC200UDR040 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS
IC200UDD240 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS
IC200UDD040 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS
IC200UDR440 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS

PLC Operation 337

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Module I1 to I4 I5 to I6 I7 to I8 I9 to I12 I13 I14 to I16 I17 to I24 I25 to I40

IC200UDR164 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS
IC200UDR064 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS
IC200UDD164 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS
IC200UDD064 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS
IC200UEX009 20mS 20mS 20mS
IC200UEX010 20mS 20mS 20mS
IC200UEX011 200nS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEX012 200nS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEX014 200nS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEX122 200nS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEX013 200nS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEX015 200nS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEI016 3mS 3mS 3mS 3mS 3mS 3mS
IC200UEX209 20mS 20mS 20mS 20mS 20mS 20mS
IC200UEX210 20mS 20mS 20mS 20mS 20mS 20mS
IC200UEX211 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEX212 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEX214 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEX222 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEX213 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEX215 200nS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEX164 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS
IC200UEX064 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS
IC200UEX364 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS
IC200UEX264 100nS 100nS 100nS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS 5μS
IC200UEI008 3mS 3mS 3mS
IC200UEC208 200nS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEC108 200nS 1μS 1μS
IC200UEC008 200nS 1μS 1μS

PLC Operation 338

User Manual Chapter 17
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

17.12 Analog Potentiometer Input Filtering

17.12.1 Input Settings
VersaMax Micro-14, Micro-23, and Micro-28 PLCs have two potentiometers, located below
the Run/Stop switch, that can be used to manually set input values that are stored in %AI16
and %AI17. The left potentiometer controls %AI16, and the right one controls %AI17.

Filter Control Reference

Due to the nature of analog input, the values seen in %AI16 and %AI17 will have some
fluctuation. This variation could make these inputs less suitable for certain applications. The
Micro PLC uses an averaging filter that samples the values of these inputs once per sweep.
When a selected number of samples has been read, it averages them and stores the result
in %AI16 and %AI17.

The value in memory reference %AQ1 controls the number of samples to be averaged,
calculated as follows:

Number of samples = 2%AQ1

The value in %AQ1 can be from 0 to 7 (indicating 0 through 128 samples).

For example, if 4 is placed in %AQ1, 16 samples are averaged to determine the values to
place in %AI16 and %AI17. If 5 is placed in %AQ1, 32 samples are averaged.

The analog value from the potentiometer is not reported until the number of sweeps
determined by the value in AQ1 has occurred. If you want to receive a value from the
potentiometer on every sweep, including the first sweep, %AQ1 must contain 0.

17.12.2 Default Filter Time

The default value in %AQ1 is 4, meaning that 16 samples will be averaged.

17.12.3 Limitations of Analog Potentiometer Input Filtering

As with any filter, the longer the filter time (i.e., the more samples that are taken), the longer
the response time. Although the maximum value of 7 could be used in %AQ1, this value
might cause a long response time on larger programs. For example, if the sweep time of a
program is 100ms, and if the potentiometer value is changed, the new value would not
show up for 12.8 seconds.

PLC Operation 339

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 18: High-Speed Counter, PWM, and

Pulse Train Operation
This chapter describes the configuration and operation of the High-Speed Counter, Pulse-
Width Modulated Output, and Pulse Train Output features of VersaMax Micro and Nano
PLCs.

• Overview
• HSC/PWM/PTO Channels
• Type A Counter Operation
• Type B Counter Operation
• High-Speed Counter Outputs
• PWM Outputs
• Pulse Train Outputs
• Pulse Train with Ramp
• COMMREQs for HSC/PWM/PTO Functions
• HSC Application Examples
For a Micro-20, Micro-40, or Micro-64 (Release 3.6 or later) PLC, individual channels can
perform the basic Motion Control functions of: Jogging, Homing, Blended Move, and Stop
Motion. Details of these features are provided in Chapter 19:.

18.1 Overview
All VersaMax Nano PLCs and Micro PLCs with DC inputs are configurable for a mix of High-
Speed Counting features. Nano PLCs and Micro PLCs with DC outputs can also be configured
with Pulse-Width Modulation, Pulse Train, and Pulse Train with Ramp features.

For added flexibility, the operating parameters of these features can be fine-tuned during
operation by including special function blocks in the application program.

Micro-20, Micro-40 and Release 3.6 and later Micro-64 PLCs provide Jog, Homing, and
Blended (multi-velocity move) functionality commanded by function blocks in the
application program. They also feature configurable 32-bit resolution for both Type A and
Type B counters.

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 340

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.1.1 Operation at Power-up and Mode Change

High-Speed Counters (except PTO with Ramp) run independently of the PLC application
program. When the PLC goes from Run to Stop mode, the High-Speed Counters continue
to operate (as specified in the configuration). High-Speed Counters remain in running mode
through a power cycle. If a High-Speed Counter is running when power is lost, it will start
again as soon as power is restored. When power is cycled or the PLC is placed in Run mode,
the Accumulator register is loaded with the configured Preload value.

If the PLC goes into Stop mode when the PTO with Ramp is running, the ramp output stops
immediately.

If a new configuration has been stored to the PLC, the PLC continues with the existing
HSC/PTO/PWM/Pulse Train with Ramp/Motion Features configuration. When the PLC is
switched to Run mode, the HSC begins using the new configuration and the Preload value
is placed in the Accumulator register.

18.1.2 Basic Setup

There are three basic steps to setting up High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train
features.

• With the configuration software, enable each feature you want to use.
• If you want a counter to control an output you must enable the output, also using
the configuration software.
• Finally, you can provide application program control over operation of the output by
setting or clearing its associated Enable Output bit from the program or in the data
tables. For example, if a High-Speed Counter is configured with its output enabled
and its Output Enable bit is set, it will control the output. The Output Enable bits are
assigned to fixed reference addresses: Q505 through Q508.
A sample ladder logic rung that sets the Output Enable bit for a High-Speed Counter is
shown below.

Figure 183

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 341

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.2 HSC/PWM/PTO Channels

A Micro PLC (which has 14 – 64 points) can be set up to have either four 16-bit Type A
counters, or one 16-bit Type A counter and one 16-bit Type B counter. Micro-20, -40, and -
64 PLCs can also be set up to have either four 32-bit Type A counters, or one 32-bit Type A
and one 32-bit Type B counter.

A Nano PLC (which has 10 points) can be set up to have either three 16-bit Type A counters,
or one 16-bit Type A counter and one 16-bit Type B counter).

• Each channel can be configured for High-Speed Counter, PWM, Standard, Pulse
Train, Pulse Train with Ramping operation (in 16-bit mode) or Motion support (in 32-
bit mode).
• A channel that uses High-Speed Counter inputs can use its associated output(s) as
either High-Speed Counter or standard output(s).
• A channel that uses PWM or Pulse Train or Pulse Train with Ramping or Motion
support outputs can use its associated inputs as standard inputs.
• High-Speed Counter inputs cannot be mixed with PWM, PTO, PTO with Ramping or
Motion support outputs on the same channel.

18.2.1 HSC/PWM/PTO Channels for Micro PLCs (14 Point/ 28

Point)
Channel Creates Number of Type A Number of Type B Number of PWM /
Configuration this Counters Counters Pulse Train
Choice Number Configured Outputs
of
Channels
Four Type A Four 4 0 0
3 0 1
2 0 2
1 0 3
0 0 4
One Type A and Two 1 1 0
One Type B 0 1 1

For Micro PLCs that have only one DC output, only one PWM or Pulse Train output can be
configured.

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 342

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.2.2 HSC/PWM/PTO Channels for Micro-20, -40, or -64 PLC

The following HSC/PWM/PTO features are available for Micro-20, Micro-40, or Micro-64
(Release 3.6 or later) PLCs:

Channel Creates Number of Type A Number of Type B Number of PWM

Configuration this Counters Counters / Pulse
Choice Number Configured Train/Ramp
of Pulse
Channels Train/Motion
Support
Four Type A Four 4 0 0
3 0 1
2 0 2
1 0 3
0 0 4
One Type A and Two 1 1 0
One Type B 0 1 1
Four Type A_32 Four 4 0 0
3 0 1
2 0 2
1 0 3
0 0 4
One Type A and Two 1 1 0
One Type B_32 0 1 1

For Micro PLCs that have only one DC output, only one PWM or Pulse Train/Ramp Pulse Train
Or Motion output can be configured.

Ramp Pulse Train Outputs are available for Four Type A / One Type A and One Type B. Motion
Support is available for Four Type A / One Type A and One Type B in 32-bit mode.

18.2.3 HSC/PWM/PTO Channels for Nano PLCs

Channel Creates Number of Type A Number of Type B Number of PWM
Configuration this Counters Counters / Pulse Train
Choice Number Configured Outputs
of
Channels
Three Type A Three 3 0 0
2 0 1
1 0 2
0 0 3
One Type A and Two 1 1 0
One Type B 0 1 1

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 343

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.3 Type A Counter

The Type A counter is one counter that can count up or down. Configurable high and low
limits set the counter’s range. The Type A counter has an Accumulator register, a Counts
per Timebase register, a Strobe register, high limit, low limit, and ON/OFF Preset values.
These are signed numbers. The values selected for the Preload, Accumulator, On Preset, and
Off Preset registers must be within the counter limits.

Figure 184

18.3.1 Type A Counter Program References

The following program references are used for Type A Counter data. The Clear Strobe and
Clear Preload output bits are used to clear (reset) the Strobe and Preload status bits within
the module (they do not initiate a strobe or preload to the counter).

Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4

Count Input I0001 I0003 I0005 I0007
Preload or Strobe Input I0002 I0004 I0006 I0008
Strobe Status Bits I0497 I0498 I0499 I0500
Preload Status I0501 I0502 I0503 I0504
Output Status I0505 I0506 I0507 I0508
Counter Output Q0001 Q0002 Q0003 Q0004
Clear Strobe Bits Q0497 Q0498 Q0499 Q0500
Clear Preload Bits Q0501 Q0502 Q0503 Q0504
Enable Output Q0505 Q0506 Q0507 Q0508
Counts per Timebase Register AI002 AI003 AI004 AI005
Accumulator Registers: 16-Bit mode AI006 AI008 AI010 AI012
32-Bit mode AI006-007 AI010-011 AI020-021 AI024-025
Strobe Registers : 16-Bit mode AI007 AI009 AI011 AI013
32-Bit mode AI008-009 AI012-013 AI 022-023 AI026-027

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 344

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.3.2 Type A Counter Operation

The counter can either count continuously within its limits, or count to either limit then stop
(one-shot mode). In continuous counting, the Accumulator wraps when the count limit is
reached and continues counting. For example, if the Count Direction is up, when the count
exceeds the High Limit by 1, the Accumulator value wraps to the Low Limit. In one-shot
mode, the counter stops at Limit N+1 for up counters or N-1 for down counters if within the
range.

In the example below, the counter has been configured to count on the low to high
transition of the Pulse input. The Count signal represents an internal signal that indicates
where counting occurs with respect to the pulse input.

Figure 185

High-Speed Counters run independently of the application program. When the PLC goes
from Run to Stop mode, its High-Speed Counters continue to operate. High-Speed Counters
remain in run mode through a power cycle. If a High-Speed Counter is running when power
is lost, it will start again as soon as power is restored. Counters will stop on a store of logic
or configuration and a write to the user storage device. When power is cycled or the PLC is
placed in Run mode, the Accumulator is loaded with the Preload value and the registers start
updating.

18.3.3 Type A High-Speed Counter Operation Details

The Count Pulse input increments or decrements the counter’s accumulator. The count
input can be configured to be positive or negative edge-sensitive. The configured On/Off
Preset values determine when the counter output is activated or deactivated. For example:

Lo Limit = 0 Hi Limit = 200

On Preset = 150 Off Preset = 160

Figure 186: Count Direction = Up

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 345

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 187: Count Direction = Down

Depending on the configuration for Preload/Strobe, the Preload/Strobe Input can either
preload a value into the Accumulator or strobe the accumulator value into a register.
Preload/Strobe signals are always positive edge-sensitive.

• If the Preload/Strobe input is configured as a Preload input, the configured Preload

value is transferred to the Accumulator Register when the input transitions from low
to high. When a preload occurs, the PLC sets the Preload Status bit. The application
program can reset the bit before the next preload.
The Preload input always loads the Accumulator regardless of the state of the
Preload Status bit. The value in the Preload register can be configured to any value
in the counter’s range. This selection is part of the PLC configuration. However, the
value can be changed during operation using a COMMREQ function in the program.
Also, The program can also use a COMMREQ to load an adjustment value to the
Accumulator register. The adjustment value can be between -128 and +127.
• If the Preload/Strobe Input is configured as a Strobe input, when its Strobe input
signal goes active the PLC places the current value in that counter’s Accumulator
into its Strobe register. The PLC sets the associated Strobe Status bit to indicate that
a Strobe value was captured. The Strobe value remains in the Strobe register until
the Strobe signal goes active again, at which time it is overwritten by a new value.
The Strobe status bit stays on until the program clears it.
The Strobe input always loads the Strobe register with the Accumulator value
regardless of the state of the Strobe bit. Strobe inputs can be used as Pulse Capture
Inputs by using the Strobe status bits as a latch.
Timebase is a span of time used to measure the rate of counting. For example, the program
could monitor the number of counts that occur in 30 seconds. Timebase is configurable in
1mS increments from 10mS to 65530mS. The Counts-per-Timebase register contains the
number of counts that occurred during the last completed timebase interval. The number
of counts is a signed number. The sign indicates up (+) or down (-) counts. If the configured
timebase is too large, the Counts per Timebase register will lose the overflow values.

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 346

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Error Status and Status Code: The program should monitor the Error Status bit %I0512 to
check for error conditions. When this bit is 1, the program can look at the Status Code
register %AI001 to learn what caused the error. After taking any necessary corrective action,
the program logic should clear the error status by clearing the Clear Error output bit
(%Q0512). See “Command Word Error Responses” later in this chapter for more
information.

18.4 Type B Counter

The Type B counter uses two counter input signals for A-Quad-B counting. The phase
relationship between the counter inputs (A & B) determines whether the accumulator is
incremented or decremented on a transition of either counter input.

Figure 188: The count direction is up if A leads B.

Figure 189: The count direction is down if A lags B.

The Type B counter can have one output that is activated based on selected On and Off
preset values.

Figure 190

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 347

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

The counter counts continuously within its limits. The Accumulator wraps when the count
limit is reached and continues counting. For example, if the Count Direction is up, when the
count exceeds the High Limit by 1, the Accumulator value wraps to the Low Limit.

18.4.1 Type B Counter Program References

The following program references are used for Type B Counter data. The Clear Strobe and
Clear Preload output bits are used to clear (reset) the Strobe and Preload status bits within
the module (they do not initiate a strobe or preload to the counter).

Type B Counter
Count Inputs Phase 1: I0001
Phase 2: I0003
Preload or Strobe Input I0006
Strobe Status Bit I0497
Preload Status Bit I0501
Counter Output Q0003
Clear Strobe Bit Q0497
Clear Preload Bits Q0501
Counts per Timebase Register AI002
Accumulator Registers: 16-Bit mode AI006
32-Bit mode AI006-007
Strobe Registers : 16-Bit mode AI007
32-Bit mode AI008-009

18.4.2 Type B Counter Operation

The Type B counter has a Strobe register, an Accumulator and a Counts-per-Timebase
register. Except for the Counts per Timebase Register, these operate as described for Type
A counters.

For a B-type counter, the Counts per Timebase value represents the relative shift over the
sample time, not an exact number of counts. For example, if the counter starts at 10, counts
up to 20, and then counts back to 15, the resulting counts per timebase value is 5.

Figure 191

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 348

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Type B Counter Examples

Low Limit = 0 High Limit = 200

On Preset = 150 Off Preset = 160

Figure 192

Figure 193

Figure 194

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 349

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.5 High-Speed Counter Outputs

Four high-speed outputs (three for a Nano PLC) can be individually configured as High-
Speed Counter outputs, PWM outputs, or Pulse Train outputs.

When the Counter Type configured is both Type A and Type B, PWM and Pulse Train outputs
1-3 are not available because A-QUAD-B counting uses output channels 1–3, as shown
earlier in this chapter.

If the configurations are changed for HSC, PWM, and Pulse outputs, the new outputs take
effect when the PLC changes from Stop to Run mode and the enable output bit is ON. When
the transition to Run mode occurs, the currently configured output stops running and the
new configuration takes over.

Results vary with temperature, but the maximums and minimums shown below apply
across the entire operating range for the unit (both temperature and DC output voltage).

18.5.1 Pulldown Resistor

For Micro -10, -14, -23 and -28 PLCs, a pulldown resistor, connected between the output
(Q1, 2, 3, or 4) and Common, is required for high frequency Pulse and PWM (up to 5kHz)
outputs and for duty cycles in the lower ranges (5% and lower). A 1.5 kΩ, 0.5-watt resistor is
recommended.

Micro -20, -40, and -64 do not require a pulldown resistor.

18.5.2 Duty Cycle Limits: with 1.5k pulldown resistor -

UDR005/006/010 & UAL004/005/006
Figure 195

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 350

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.5.3 Duty Cycle Limits: with 1.5k pulldown resistor -

UDD104/110 & NDD101
Figure 196

18.5.4 Counter Output Presets

Each counter output has a Preset on and off point. Both points must lie between the
counter’s configured high and low limits. Both the Presets and the High/Low limits are
initially set up as part of the PLC configuration. The Presets can be changed during operation
by using a COMMREQ function as explained later in this chapter.

The output state indicates when the Accumulator value is between the Preset on and off
points. For example, using the Type B counter:

Figure 197

If the output is enabled for the High-Speed Counter being used, the output turns on as
described in the Type A and Type B counter sections.

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 351

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

The minimum span that should be configured between the On and Off Presets depends on
the count frequency.

For this Count Frequency: Minimum Span Between On Preset and Off Preset
Should Be:
100kHz 100 counts
90kHz 90 counts
80kHz 80 counts
70kHz 70 counts
60kHZ 60 counts
50kHz 50 counts
40kHz 40 counts
30kHz 30 counts
25kHz 25 counts
20kHz 20 counts
15kHz 15 counts
10kHz 10 counts
5kHz 5 counts
2kHz 2 counts
1kHz 1 count
less than 1kHz no gap required

Note: Count frequencies above 10 kHz are supported only on 20-, 40-, and 64-point Micro PLCs.

18.6 PWM Outputs

Pulse Width-Modulated outputs can be used to control DC and stepper motors. Channels
are set up for PWM output operation in the PLC configuration by setting the Channel
Function to PWM. If a channel is configured as a PWM output, then references %I0001
through %I0008, which are normally reserved for High-Speed Counter inputs, can be used
as standard inputs in the application.

18.6.1 Enabling and Disabling a PWM Output

A PWM output is turned on from the application program by setting its Enable Output bit to
1. The output is turned off by setting its Enable Output bit to 0.

When a PWM output starts operating, it continues until a new configuration is received, a
store occurs (logic and/or configuration), a write to the user storage device occurs, or the
Output Enable bit is cleared. A PWM output stops if an invalid frequency or duty cycle value
is commanded.

If a PWM output is running when power is lost and the Output Enable bit remains set to 1,
the output starts again as soon as power is restored and the PLC transitions to Run mode.

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 352

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

PWM Frequency AQ002 AQ004 AQ006 AQ008
PWM Duty Cycle AQ003 AQ005 AQ007 AQ009
Enable Output Q0505 Q0506 Q0507 Q0508

18.6.2 PWM Frequency

The frequency of a PWM output (15Hz to 65kHz for Micro-20, -40, and -64 PLCs and 15Hz
to 5kHz for other models) is specified from the application program by writing a value (15
to 65000 for Micro-20, -40, -64 PLC or 15 to 5000 for other Micro PLCs) to the associated
frequency reference, as shown above. The actual frequency output can have a tolerance of
1%.

18.6.3 PWM Duty Cycle

The PWM duty cycle is set up by writing a value (0 to 10000) to the channel’s Duty Cycle
reference, as shown above. Both frequency and duty cycle can be changed while the output
is enabled. The minimum and maximum duty cycle values depend on the frequency.

18.6.4 Load Correction for PWM Outputs

The PLC optical isolators can skew the duty cycle, depending on temperature and load. To
compensate for this, the Micro PLC automatically applies an additional load correction time
to the zero-output time of each pulse. The default load correction time is: 2µS for 20/40/64-
point Micro PLCs with DC outputs, 35µS for other Micro PLCs with DC outputs, 10µS for
20/40/64-point Micro PLCs with relay outputs, or 85µS for other Micro PLCs with relay
outputs.

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 353

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Changing the Load Correction Time

The Load Correction time can be changed within the range 0 to 200µS by sending the new
value in a COMMREQ, as explained later in this chapter.

An example is illustrated below.

In the diagram, T0 is the OFF Time, which is

where f is the pulse frequency. ,

T2 = Optical Isolator Delay,

and T1+T2 = ON Time.

Figure 198

18.7 Pulse Train Outputs

Pulse Train Outputs can be used to control stepper motors.

18.7.1 Configuring a Pulse Train Output

Configuring a channel as a Pulse Train Output is done by setting the Channel Function to
Pulse Train in the PLC configuration.

18.7.2 Program References for Pulse Train Outputs

The following program references are assigned for use by Pulse Train Outputs.

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

Pulse Train Complete I0494 I0495 I0496 I0511
Enable Output Q0505 Q0506 Q0507 Q0508
Start Pulse Train Q0494 Q0495 Q0496 Q0511
Frequency:16 Bit Mode AQ123 AQ125 AQ127 AQ121
32 Bit Mode AQ120 AQ123 AQ126 AQ117
Number of Pulses: 16 bit mode AQ124 AQ126 AQ128 AQ122
32 Bit Mode AQ 121-122 AQ124-125 AQ127-128 AQ 118-119

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 354

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.7.3 Enabling and Disabling Pulse Train Operation

Pulse Train operation starts when the channel’s Enable Output bit is set to 1 and the
channel’s Start Pulse Train bit transitions from 0 to 1. This automatically clears the Pulse
Train Complete bit to 0. Pulse Train operation continues until the specified number of pulses
have occurred. A Pulse Train Output can be stopped before the requested number of pulses
has been completed by setting its Enable Output bit to 0. If the Enable Output bit transitions
from 1 to 0, the Pulse Train stops immediately. When the last pulse is completed, the
channel’s Pulse Train Complete bit goes to 1.

A Pulse Train Output continues to operate when the Micro PLC goes from Run mode to Stop
mode. If a Pulse Train Output is running when power is lost, it will restart after power is
restored when the PLC transitions with Run mode if both the Enable Output bit and the Start
Pulse Train output bits are set to 1.

18.7.4 Setting Up the Pulse Frequency

The application program sets up the frequency of a Pulse Train Output by writing a value to
the channel’s Frequency reference. The frequency range is 15Hz to 65kHz for Micro 20-/40-
/64- PLCs, and 15Hz to 5kHz for other models).

The sum total of frequency configured for all Pulse Train Outputs on a Micro PLC should be
less than or equal to 65kHz (this frequency is available for a Micro-20/40/64 only). The
minimum frequency that can be configured on each channel is 15Hz. For example: If all the
channels are to be configured for Pulse Train with Ramp for maximum possible frequency,
the frequencies on each channel can be 15kHz, 15kHz, 15kHz, and 20kHz.

The frequency of a Pulse Train Output can be changed while the Pulse Train is operating.
One application of this feature would be to ramp up at the beginning of the Pulse Train
operation, and ramp down at the end. For a Micro-20, -40, -64 PLC, Pulse Ramping can also
be done by configuring the channel for Pulse Train with Ramp.

The actual frequency output can have a tolerance of 1%.

If the maximum count speed is more than 30 kHz for a Type B Counter, or more than 60 kHz
for Type A, resistance must be added to the encoder input as shown in the example below:

Figure 199

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 355

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.7.5 Setting Up the Number of Pulses

The application program sets up the number of pulses to be output (0 to 65535) by writing
the value to the channel’s Number of Pulses reference.

18.7.6 Load Correction Time

Pulse Train Outputs have a nominal duty cycle of 50%, but the PLC optical isolators can skew
the duty cycle, depending on temperature and load. To compensate for this, the PLC applies
an additional load correction time to the zero-output time of each pulse. The default load
correction time depends on the Micro PLC type. The default times are: 2µS for 20-/40-/64-
point Micro PLCs with DC outputs, 35µS for other Micro PLCs with DC outputs, 10µS for 20-
/40-/64-point Micro PLCs with relay outputs, or 85µS for other Micro PLCs with relay outputs

Changing the Load Correction Time

The Load Correction time can be changed within the range 0 to 200µS by sending the new
value in a COMMREQ, as explained later in this chapter.

An example is illustrated below.

In the diagram, T0 is the OFF Time, which is

where f is the pulse frequency. ,

T2 = Optical Isolator Delay, and

T1+T2 = ON Time.

Figure 200

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 356

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.8 Pulse Train with Ramp

The Pulse Train with Ramp feature of Micro-20, -40, and -64 PLCs combines the basic
operation of a Pulse Train Output with configurable acceleration and deceleration times to
produce Pulse-Train profile like the example shown below.

Figure 201

18.8.1 Configuring Pulse Train with Ramp

An output can be set up as a Pulse Train with Ramp by selecting 4 Type A or 1 Type A / 1 Type
B as the Counter Type and selecting Pulse Train with Ramp as the Channel Function.

A Pulse Train with Ramp has configurable acceleration and deceleration rates. The default
for both is 1,000,000 (the maximum). Both acceleration and deceleration can be selected
during configuration from the range of 90 to 1,000,000. Acceleration and deceleration do
not need to be the same. Appropriate values depend on the application and the capability
of the stepper motor being driven by the module. Acceleration and Deceleration can also
be temporarily changed from the application program.

18.8.2 Program References for Pulse Train with Ramp Outputs

The following program references are used by Pulse Train with Ramp Outputs (Can only be
configured in 4TypeA/1TypeA 1TypeB configuration).

Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4

Pulse Train Complete I0494 I0495 I0496 I0511

Start Pulse Train Q0494 Q0495 Q0496 Q0511

Enable Output Q0505 Q0506 Q0507 Q0508
Frequency AQ123 AQ125 AQ127 AQ121
Number of pulses AQ124 AQ126 AQ128 AQ122

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 357

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.8.3 Setting Up the Pulse Frequency for Pulse Train with

Ramp
The application program sets up the frequency of a Pulse Train with Ramp by writing a value
to the channel’s Frequency reference. The frequency range is 15Hz to 65kHz.

The sum total of frequency configured for Pulse Train with Ramp channels should be less
than or equal to 65kHz. The minimum frequency that can be configured on each channel is
15Hz. For example: If all the channels are to be configured for Pulse Train with Ramp for
maximum possible frequency, the frequencies on each channel can be 15kHz, 15kHz,
15kHz, and 20kHz.

The frequency, acceleration, deceleration, and number of counts of a Pulse Train with Ramp
cannot be changed when the ramp output has started. If the frequency is changed in the
%AQ references after the ramp output has started, the new frequency is used for the next
ramp that is generated.

The actual frequency output can have a tolerance of 1%.

18.8.4 Setting Up the Number of Pulses

The application program sets up the number of pulses to be output (0 to 65535) by writing
the value to the channel’s Number of Pulses reference.

18.8.5 Changing the Acceleration and Deceleration

Acceleration and deceleration are set up in the channel configuration. The configured
acceleration and deceleration can also be temporarily changed in the rage of 90 to 1,000,00
using a COMMREQ in the application program, as explained later in this chapter.
Acceleration and deceleration cannot be changed while the function is operating.

18.8.6 Controlling Operation of a Pulse Train with Ramp Output

A Pulse Train with Ramp starts when the channel’s Enable Output bit is 1 and the channel’s
Start Pulse Train bit transitions from 0 to 1.

When the Pulse Train begins, the channel’s Pulse Train Complete bit is set to 0. The channel
outputs the specified number of pulses in varying pulse widths, to produce a velocity profile
similar to the one shown below. After the last pulse is completed, the channel’s Pulse Train
Complete bit is set to 1.

After a Pulse Train with Ramp function has started, it continues until either all of its pulses
have been generated or its Output Enable bit changes from1 to 0.

The ramp up or ramp down motion occurs in steps of 100ms; so the velocity gradient
changes every 100ms until the desired frequency is reached (provided there is a sufficient
number of pulses to ramp up to the desired frequency).

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 358

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 202

For the example above, the ramp up time is 500ms (1/2 second), so the ramp up takes place
in 5 steps: 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms with frequencies of 1kHz, 2kHz, 3kHz,
4kHz, and 5kHz respectively.

The application program can stop a Pulse Train with Ramp before the requested number of
pulses has been completed by setting its Enable Output bit to 0. When the Enable Output
bit transitions from 1 to 0, the output starts decelerating. The channel outputs a number of
pulses based on: (1) the configured deceleration and (2) the velocity at the time the Enable
Output bit goes Off. When the last pulse is completed, the channel’s Pulse Train Complete
bit is set to 1.

Stop Ramp with Deceleration

If the Enable Bit set to 0 during the “at velocity” part of the Pulse Train, the output ramps
down normally as shown at left below. If the Enable Bit is set 0 during the acceleration
phase, ramping up stops and ramping down begins immediately as shown at right. The
deceleration occurs at the configured or commanded rate.

Figure 203

If the Ramp output is already decelerating (because the number of pulses has been
reached) when the Enable Output bit transitions from 1 to 0, the Pulse Train output
continues decelerating at the same rate.

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 359

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Stop Ramping Immediately

When the Micro PLC powers up or receives a new configuration, it automatically sets up all
Ramp channels to decelerate when the Output Enable bit goes to 0.

If a Pulse Train with Ramp output should stop immediately, a COMMREQ can be used, as
described later in this chapter.

18.9 COMMREQs for the HSC/PWM/PTO Functions

The application program can use the COMMREQ function to provide data or send the
following commands to High-Speed Counters, Pulse Train outputs, or PWM outputs that are
currently enabled:

• Load Accumulator
• Load High and Low Limits
• Load Accumulator Increment
• Set Counter Direction
• Load Timebase
• Load ON and Off Presets
• Load Preload
• Load Stop Mode or Resume Decelerate Mode (for Micro-20, -40, -64 CPUs only)
• Load Acceleration and Load Deceleration (for Micro-20, -40, -64 CPUs only)
• Load Correction
Program logic should be set up to assure that the command is sent to the module once, not
repeatedly. These changes are temporary; they lost when the PLC is powered down and
when a new configuration is stored from the programmer.

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 360

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.9.1 The COMMREQ Command Block

The command data must be placed in the correct order (in a command block) in CPU
memory before the command is executed. The command block is composed of 14 words
as shown below. All values are hexadecimal unless otherwise indicated. The command block
can be placed in any word-oriented area of memory that is not reserved (see Chapter 22: for
a list of reserved areas).

Offset Data Description

address 0004 Always 0004
address +1 don’t care Not used (always zero). The Micro PLC ignores the Wait flag for all
COMMREQ junctions.
address +2 don’t care not used
address +3 don’t care not used
address +4 don’t care not used
address +5 don’t care not used
address +6 don’t care not used
address +7 don’t care not used
address +8 0008 Data type (8 = registers)
address +9 000A Start location of Command Word –1 (%R0011)
address +10 nnnn Command Word (see next page)
address +11 nnnn LS Data Word
address +12 nnnn MS Data Word used only for ramping in 4 Type A 32-bit or
One Type A, One Type B 32-bit mode in Micro 20-/40-/64-CPU.
Not used by other Micro PLCs

Contents of the Command

The last three words of the Command contain the command parameters. These words are
treated as independent bytes. They can be entered in hexadecimal or decimal format. The
format for the last three words is:

Figure 204

The Command Word, located at “address +10” of the command, identifies the action to be
performed. The MSB of the command word specifies the channel number (1 – 4 for Type
A, always 1 for Type B).

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 361

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example: To set Counter 1 to 1234H, load command registers with:

Command word: 0101

LS data word: 1234

MS data word: 0

Example: To set Counter 1 to 200,000 (30D40H) in 32-bit mode, load command

registers with:

Command word: 0101

LS data word: 0D40

MS data word: 0003

Negative values must be entered in 32-bit two’s complement format.

Example: To set the Load Preload to a value of –1000 decimal,

enter the hex value FFFF FC18 for command word 01nF.

Command Command Description

Word (hex)
0n01 Load Loads any value within a counter’s limits directly into the
Accumulator Accumulator. If a count is received at the same time, the count is lost.
0n02 Load High Sets the High and Low limit to any value in the counter range. Move
Limit the Low Limit first when shifting down or the High Limit first when
0n03 Load Low shifting up. Loading limits in the wrong order can cause an error. The
Limit command is successful if all parameters are within the new range.

0n04 Load Offsets a counter Accumulator by up to +127 or –128 counts. Only

Accumulator the LSB data is used with this command. This can be done at any time,
Increment even while the counter is counting at maximum rate. However, if a
count is received at the same time the CPU updates the Accumulator
value, the count is lost. If the offset causes the counter to exceed its
limits, this parameter is rejected.
0n05 Set Counter (Type A only) Changes the count direction. Only the LSB of the first
Direction data word is used for this command (00 = up, 01 = down).
0n06 Load Changes the time interval used for the counts/timebase word data.
Timebase The range is 10 to 1000mS in 10mS intervals.
0n0B Load ON Sets up the output turn on points within the counter range. There is
Preset one output associated with each counter. See the previous
information about Presets for appropriate settings.
0n15 Load OFF Sets up the output turn off points within the counter range. There is
Preset one output associated with each counter. See the previous
information about Presets for appropriate settings.
0n1F Load Changes the count value loaded into the counter Accumulator when
Preload the Preload input is activated.

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 362

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Command Command Description

Word (hex)
0n3B Load Stop (Micro-20/40/64 CPU only) Changes a Pulse Train output’s
Mode (or deceleration to stop the Ramp immediately when the Output Enable
Resume bit goes Off. The Ramp function must be enabled.
Decelerate The same command can be used to reset the output to Decelerate
Mode) mode (the default) by entering the value 0001 in the LS data word.
0n3C Load (Micro-20/40/64 CPU only) Changes a Pulse Train output’s
Acceleration acceleration. The Pulse Train with Ramp function must be enabled.
For channels 1 – 3, acceleration and deceleration can be selected
from the range of 10 p/s2 to 1,000,000 p/s2. For channel 4, the
range is 90 p/s2 to 1,000,000 p/s2 . The default for both is
1,000,000.
In the acceleration and deceleration commands, the data value is a
32-bit number. These are the ONLY Data Commands that should
have any value other than 0 in the MS data word.
Example: to change the acceleration rate of Pulse Train output 1 to
200,000 (30D40H), load:
Command word: 013C
LS data word: 0D40
MS data word: 0003
0n3D Load (Micro-20/40/64 CPU only) Changes a Pulse Train output’s
Deceleration deceleration. The Ramp function must be enabled. See Load
Acceleration above for details.
0n3E Load Sets the change (in µS) that should be applied to the duty cycle of a
Correction Pulse Train output to compensate for the slow turn-off time of the
optical isolator circuit (35µS – DC outputs; 85µS relay outputs). The
range is 0 to 200µS.

Note:
1. If a Load Accumulator command is executed with the ON Preset value, the Preset will be turned on
for that instance only.
2. If a Load Accumulator command is executed with the OFF Preset value, the Preset will be turned
off for that instance only.

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 363

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.9.2 COMMREQ Example

The example uses a COMMREQ to load the value 1234 into the Accumulator for Counter 3.

Figure 205

The first rung in the example includes a one-shot coil (%T0002) that executes the COMMREQ
once. This prevents multiple messages from being sent.

The next rung uses a Block Move Word function to load the commands. In this example,
%R0101 through %R0114 are used for the COMMREQ Command Block. Any registers can be
used.

The COMMREQ function has four inputs and one output.

Parameter Description
enable %T0002 to enables the COMMREQ function.
IN Points to the starting address of the Command Block, which is %R0101.
SYSID Indicates which rack and slot to send the message to (physical location of HSC
module). The SYSID is always 0004 for the Micro PLC.
TASK This parameter is ignored and should be set to zero.
FT This output is energized if an error is detected during processing of the
COMMREQ.

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 364

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Command Word Error Responses

If the module receives an invalid command parameter in a Command Word, it returns an
error code in the first word of its word input (AI) data. The following error codes are used for
High-Speed Counter COMMREQs:

Note: If the program issues a COMMREQ that changes count direction, the counter will go immediately
into the new mode. Remember that the output does not change states at exactly the same points
on an Up-counter as it does on a Down-counter.

Error Code Description Definition

Decimal Hex
3 3 Invalid Command Command number received was invalid for
the HSC.
6 6 Invalid Counter Number or Counter number in the Data Command
Channel Word was not a valid counter based on the
current configuration.
11 0b Counter/Channel 1 Limit Error Invalid Low or High limit value
12 0c Counter/Channel 2 Limit Error New limit places Preload value out of range

13 0d Counter/Channel 3 Limit Error New limit places Off Preset out of range
New limit places Accumulator value out of
14 0e Counter/Channel 4 Limit Error
range
Accumulator value is out of range
Preload value is out of range
On Preset value is out of range
Off Preset value is out of range
19 13 Load Stop Mode/Reset Invalid value. Must be 1 (decelerate) or 2
Decelerate Mode (stop).
20 14 Load Acceleration Acceleration too low. Must be > 10 for
channels 1-3 and >90 for channel 4.
21 15 Load Acceleration Acceleration too high. Must be
< 1,000,000
22 16 Load Deceleration Deceleration too low. Must be > 10. for
channel 1-3 and >90 for channel 4.
23 17 Load Deceleration Deceleration too high. Must be
< 1,000,000

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 365

User Manual Chapter 18
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

18.10 HSC Application Examples

18.10.1 RPM Indicator
The HSC can be used as a position/motion indicator when connected to a feedback device
(such as an encoder) that is coupled to a rotary motion. RPM indication can be obtained
directly from the counter’s Counts/Timebase register (CTB) or derived from it by a simple
calculation.

The RPM calculation is:

where: CTB = counts/timebase reading from the counter

PPR = pulses/revolution produced by the feedback device

T= timebase expressed in minutes

If the number of pulses per revolution is an integer power of 10, setting the timebase for 6,
60, 600, 6000, or 60,000 produces a direct reading of RPM in the Counts per Timebase
register with an assumed decimal placement.

Example
If feedback produces 1000 pulses/revolution, CTB reading = 5210, and the timebase is
configured for 60ms, which gives:

T = 60/60000 = .0001 and 1/T = 1000.

The Counts per Timebase reading equals 521 and

CTB reading is RPM with 1 RPM resolution.

Input Capture
The High-Speed Counter strobe inputs can act as pulse catch inputs for inputs 2, 4, 6, and 8
by using the Strobe Status bits as a latch.

To use this feature:

1. Configure a Type A Counter on any channel.

2. Set the Preload//Strobe parameter to “Strobe”.
The corresponding Strobe Status bit will be latched if there is a pulse of at least 100 µsec in
width. The Reset Strobe bits can be used as clear functions for the latched status bits.

High-Speed Counter, PWM, and Pulse Train Operation 366

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 19: Motion Control Functions

Micro-20, Micro-40 and Micro-64 PLCs (release 3.6 or later) can perform basic Motion
Control functions of Jogging, Homing, Blended Move, and Stop Motion. This chapter
describes the use of motion control functions.

• Overview
— Program References for Motion Features
— Position Registers
— Function Block Instance Registers
— Error Codes for Motion Features
• Finding a Home Position
— Find Home Function Block
— Stopping Find Home
— Example Program Logic for Find Home
• Moving to the Home Position
Go Home Function Block

Stopping Go Home

Example Program Logic for Go Home

• Jogging
— Jogging Function Block
— Stopping Jogging
— Example Program Logic for Jogging
• Blending
— Blending Function Block
— Stopping Blending
— Example Program Logic for Blending
— Examples of Blended Moves
• Stopping Motion on an Axis
— Stop Motion Function Block
— Example Program Logic for Stop Motion

Motion Control Functions 367

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

19.1 Overview
The High-Speed Counter outputs of a Micro-20, Micro-40. or Micro-64 PLC can be
independently configured for motion support. Use of these features requires PAC Machine
Edition version 5.5, SP2, SIM 6 or later.

The channel’s configured HSC/PWM/PTO setting must be either 4 Type A_32, or 1 Type A /
1 Type B_32. The channel’s Counter Function must be configured as Motion Support.
Configuration is described in Chapter 16:.

Function blocks can be used in the application program to set up and control motion
operations. The same function blocks supply additional parameters for the operation.

19.1.1 Program References for Motion Features

Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4
Position Register (REAL) AI006-007 AI010-011 AI020-021 AI024-025
Mode Select Bit (BOOL) Q497 Q498 Q499 Q500
Rotary Mode High Limit Register AQ117-118 AQ121-122 AQ125-126 AQ113-114
(DWORD)
Rotary Mode Low Limit Register (REAL) AQ119-120 AQ123-124 AQ127-128 AQ115-116
Motion Enable (BOOL) Q505 Q506 Q507 Q508
Axis error register (WORD) AI002 AI003 AI004 AI005
Axis error reset bits (BOOL) Q489 Q490 Q491 Q492

19.1.2 Position Registers

The Micro PLC stores the cumulative motor position in the channel’s Position Register,
where it can be read from the application program. The capacity of the Position Register is
a 32-bit real value. When used for motion support, the 32-bit Position Registers are used as
shown in the table above.

All commanded moves increment or decrement the value in the Position Register, so it
reflects the actual motor position. For example, the Position Register is set at 0. A 10,000-
count move is commanded in the forward direction. At the end of this move, the Position
Register contains the value 10,000. Now a 2,000-count move is commanded in the reverse
direction. At the end of this move, the Position Register contains the value 8,000 (10,000–
2,000).

The Position Register is automatically cleared: at power-up, when a new configuration is

downloaded, when PLC memory is cleared, when the configuration is cleared, and when the
CPU transitions from STOP to RUN mode. It is set to zero after a successful Find Home
operation. When the Position Register is cleared, the cleared value appears in the reference
memory window only when the PLC is put into RUN mode.

Motion Control Functions 368

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Operating Modes of the Position Registers

The position register can function in either Rotary mode or Linear Mode.

Rotary Mode Operation of the Position Registers

In Rotary mode, the Position Register wraps when the configured high limit or low limit is
reached and continues incrementing or decrementing based on the direction of operation.
Rotary mode is selected by setting output bit %Q497, Q498, Q499, or Q500 to 1, for channel
1, 2, 3, or 4, respectively. The high limit and the low limits for Rotary mode can be set up
using the references shown on the previous page.

Position Register transitions for both clockwise and counterclockwise motions always start
at the configured low limit. For example, if the low limit = -100.0 and the high limit = +100.0,
a movement of 5 units in the clockwise direction sets the Position Register value to –95.0,
and a movement of 5 units in the counter-clockwise direction sets the position register value
to +96.

If the configured High Limit is less than the Low Limit, the error is displayed in
%AI0001/2/3/4 memory for each of the channels and the High Limit defaults to the Low
Limit +1.

Linear Mode Operation of the Position Registers

In Linear mode, any configured Rotary limits are not used. The Position Registers increment
or decrement from zero after power-up, and on every Stop to Run transition. At other times,
the Position Registers increment or decrement from the last move position.

Output bits %Q0497-Q0500 can be used to provide inputs for this mode for each of the four
channels respectively. A value of 0 selects Linear mode and 1 selects Rotary mode.

Limits of the Position Register value in Linear mode are +3.4e38 and –3.4e38. If either limit
is reached, the value stops changing.

19.1.3 Function Block Instance Registers

Figure 206

Motion Control Functions 369

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Each instance of a motion function block in the program requires a separate memory area
for its internal status and control data. This must be set up by assigning two contiguous
words of %R memory during programming. The reference address location is initially
indicated by ???? in the function block.

During operation, the data in these assigned status and control references should not be
overwritten by user logic. Overlapping reference addresses may cause erratic operation of
the motion function block.

Each instance of a motion function block in the program requires a separate memory area
for its internal status and control data. This must be set up by assigning two contiguous
words of %R memory during programming. The reference address location is initially
indicated by ???? in the function block.

During operation, the data in these assigned status and control references should not be
overwritten by user logic. Overlapping reference addresses may cause erratic operation of
the motion function block.

The first word of this data area is used for 16 status and control bits. As the table below
shows, the Find Home, Go Home, Blending, and Stop Motion function blocks use the same
bit definitions. Jogging uses some different bit definitions. Most of this data is for internal
use only; it is not of interest to the application program. The exceptions to this are bit 1
(Active output), which can be monitored for a Jogging function block, and bit 2 (Done
output), which can be monitored for the other function block types. See the function block
descriptions in this chapter for more information.

Find Home, Go Home,

Bit Description Jogging
Blending, Stop Motion
Least significant word
0 Execute input, previous execution ■ reserved
1 Active output ■ ■
2 Done output ■ reserved
3 Error output ■ ■
4 Warning output ■ ■
5 Motion Started reserved reserved
6 Enable input, previous execution ■ ■
7 Execute Triggered reserved reserved
8 Jogging, Enable Backward active = 1 reserved ■
9 Jogging, Enable Forward active = 1 reserved ■
10 Previous Enable Backward Value reserved ■
11 Previous Enable Forward Value reserved ■
12 Runtime Error Occurred reserved ■
13-15 Not Used reserved reserved
Most significant word
Word Error ID / Warning ID of the function block error that occurred. See next page.

Motion Control Functions 370

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

19.1.4 Error Codes and Warnings for Motion Features

(Hexadecimal)
The following error codes are used for the motion function blocks. These error codes appear
in word 2 of the function block’s 2 words of instance data, as described on the previous page.
They also appear in each function block’s Error ID output and in the channel, error
references: %AI002, 003, 004, and 005 for channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 respectively. The
application program should monitor error status using those references.

Error Code Error Description

(hex)
14 Specified acceleration below minimum limit of 10 for channels 1, 2, 3 or below
minimum limit of 90 for channel 4
15 Specified acceleration above maximum limit of 1,000,000
16 Specified deceleration is below minimum limit of 10 for channels 1, 2, 3, or below
minimum limit of 90 for channel 4
17 Specified deceleration above maximum limit of 1,000,000
18 Specified Velocity is below minimum limit of 10
19 Specified Velocity is above maximum limit of 65000
1B Specified home offset is negative, which is not valid
1D Axis not configured for motion In the hardware configuration for HSC/PWM/PTO
settings, channel function should be selected as ‘Motion Support’ to be able to
initiate any motion command.
1E Axis busy with Ramping. User logic issued a motion command on a channel that
had Ramping already in progress.
1F13 Axis busy with Jogging.
Only one motion function block is allowed to be active at a time, but user logic has
issued another motion command while jogging command is still in progress.
2113 Axis busy with Blending.
Only one motion function block is allowed to be active at a time, but user logic has
issued another motion command while blending command is still in progress.
22 Find Home cannot be started because Final Home velocity is greater than Find
Home velocity
23 Home switch Input is already on at the time of triggering Find Home command.
24 Go Home function block triggered without a previously successful Find Home
being completed.
25 Specified number of profiles is above the maximum limit of 4.
26 Specified number of profiles is below the minimum limit of 1.
27 Configured pulse count is less than the minimum limit of 2.
29 13
Axis busy with Find Home.
Only one motion function block is allowed to be active at a time but user logic has
issued another motion command while Find Home is still in progress.

13
If an active (not complete) function block instance is re-enabled while motion is still in progress, this condition is recorded as a
warning. If a different function block is enabled while motion is in progress, this condition is recorded as an error.
Motion Control Functions 371
User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Error Code Error Description

(hex)
2A13 Axis busy with Go Home.
Only one motion function block is allowed to be active at a time, but user logic has
issued another motion command while Go Home is still in progress.
2B Motion function block issued before the axis was enabled (i.e. %Q0505,
506,507,508 bits are low on respective axis)..
2C No motion is in progress when Stop motion function block triggered.
2E Channel not configured to support motion function blocks. For the motion features
to be supported, the counter type should be either 4 Type A_32 or 1 Type A / 1 Type
B_32 counters on settings tab.
2F In continuous/rotary mode operation of the position register, high limit is less than
or equal to low limit.
30 Blending motion parameters array exceeds reference memory size. For example:
Each profile in blending contains four parameters (acceleration, deceleration,
velocity, and distance). Each parameter occupies two words. So, for each profile 8
words of memory is required. Suppose %AI120 is assigned for blending motion
parameters input. If the number of profiles is 4, then 32 words of memory, starting
from %AI120, needs to be reserved for blending motion parameters. But %AI
memory can only be up to %AI128.
31 Stop motion function block is re-triggered before function block has finished
stopping motion. This is a warning.
33 Both enable forward, enable backward inputs are high on Jogging, which is invalid.
34 Motion cannot be started for the following reasons:
Either motion function block was triggered while Stop Motion function block is still
active (not complete), or the axis is blocked by the Stop Motion function block
(Execute input on Stop Motion function block is high). Axis error.
35 Stop Motion function block is issued while another motion function block is
pending to start on same axis. This error occurs if a motion function block (Jogging,
Blending, or Homing) is triggered on an axis and a Stop Motion function block is
triggered before motion can start on that axis.
37 More than one instance of Stop motion function block triggered on the same axis.
38 Motion stopped due to stop mode (PLC has transitioned from Run mode to Stop
mode), or power fail. Axis error.
39 Axis error present on the channel. Check %AI002, 3, 4, and 5 for axis error details
on respective channel. Axis errors can be cleared by a low-to-high transition of
output bits %Q489, 490,491, or 492 for channels 1, 2, 3, or 4 respectively.

Motion Control Functions 372

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Axis and Function Block Errors

Of the errors listed above, errors 2B, 34, and 38 are axis errors. All other errors are function
block errors. If any axis error is present on an axis, no motion can be initiated on that axis by
any function block.

Clearing Axis Errors

Axis errors can be cleared by a low-to-high transition of output bits %Q489, 490, 491, or 492
for channel 1, 2, 3, or 4.

Axis errors are also cleared by any of the following:

• clearing/downloading a hardware configuration

• clearing/ downloading logic
• clearing of all memory
• clearing of initial values
After axis errors are cleared in %AI memory, motion can be started by any function block.

Operation of the Instance Registers

While the function block’s Enable input is receiving power flow, function block inputs are
stored to the Instance Registers, and function block outputs are updated continuously.

When the function block’s Enable is not receiving power flow, the function block outputs
are not updated. However, they are still updated to the Instance Registers.

The next time Enable receives power flow, the output status data stored in the Instance
Registers is updated to function block outputs.

The Instance Register references should not be overwritten by user logic. Overlapping
reference addresses may cause erratic function block operation.

Motion Function Block Operation in PLC Run-Stop-Run

Transition or Loss of Power
If power is lost or if the Micro PLC goes to Linear mode while a motion function is being
executed, the motion stops immediately.

When power returns or when the Micro PLC goes to Run mode, the error 0x38 (see above)
is logged in the channel’s %AI memory reference. The same error is generated on the
function block output when its Enable input receives power flow. Error 0x38 is an axis error;
no motion will occur on the axis until the error is cleared.

Motion Control Functions 373

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

19.1.5 Avoiding Abrupt Start/Stop of Motion

The following condition must be satisfied in order to avoid abrupt start/stop of motion:

n≥1, where

or

If n<1, abrupt start/stop of motion can happen.

Example:
For the Find Home function:

Find Home Velocity = 1000

Final Home Velocity = 500

Acceleration = 10000

Deceleration = 10000

Offset = 0

With these parameters, the values for Final Home Velocity and Deceleration yield a value of
n=0.5, which does not satisfy the requirement n≥1. Instead of decelerating to home
position, the axis goes immediately to zero velocity. To avoid this, select values for Velocity,
Acceleration and Deceleration that satisfy the above condition.

19.2 Finding a Home Position

The Find Home function defines a Home (zero) position for the axis, relative to a physical
location on a machine. The location is represented by a Home Switch, which is connected
to a specific input on the Micro PLC. The Home Switch input must come from a normally
open contact. A normally closed contact cannot be used.

The Home Switch input is assigned to input reference %I002, %I004, %I006, or %I008
depending on the channel. The input reference cannot be used as a standard input when
the channel is used for Homing.

When a Find Home Cycle is requested, the following sequence is executed:

Figure 207

Motion Control Functions 374

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

1. After accelerating to the configured Find Home Velocity, the axis moves in the
specified direction until the Home Input signal is detected.
2. When the rising edge of Home Input signal is detected, the axis decelerates at the
deceleration rate and stops.
3. The axis then accelerates in the opposite direction at the Final Home Velocity until
the Home Input signal goes to 0.
4. Once the falling edge of the Home Input signal is detected (Home Input off as shown
above), the axis decelerates and stops.
5. At the falling edge of the Home Input, the CPU starts capturing the motor position
value. This continues until the motion stops and the axis makes a final move to the
Home switch or to the Home Offset.
6. Zero Home Offset: the axis accelerates to the Final Home velocity. It then
decelerates and stops at the edge transition of the Home Input. This is the Home
position. The position register is automatically zeroed upon completion of the Find
Home cycle.
7. Non-zero Home Offset: Depending on the value of the Home Offset and the motor
position captured by the CPU, the axis accelerates to the Final Home Velocity in
either forward or reverse direction. The axis moves until it decelerates again to reach
the Home Offset position. The position register is set to 0 when the axis reaches the
Home Offset position.

Figure 208

Motion Control Functions 375

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

19.2.1 Find Home Function Block

The application program uses the following function block to set up and control a Find
Home operation.

Figure 209

The channel’s Output Enable bit (for example, Q0505 for channel 1) must be set to 1 to use
this or any other motion function block on the channel. If the Output Enable bit is not 1, the
function will not execute, and a Channel Enable error will be reported.

When the Enable input receives power flow and the Execute input transitions to 1, the
function block parameters are loaded. If the parameters are not valid, a warning is
generated, and the function does not start. If the parameters are valid, the motion starts in
the direction (CW or CCW) specified by Axis Direction input, and the Active output is set to
1. Active returns to 0 when the function complete, or is stopped.

If the Enable input continues passing power flow after the motion completes, Find Home
can be restarted with the same parameters by again generating a low to high transition on
the Execute input. To execute the function block with different parameters, the Enable input
must stop passing power flow. After changing the parameter values, the function block can
be executed by again passing power flow to the Enable input and generating a low to high
transition on the Execute input.

The function block’s Enable output remains high as long as Enable Input is high.

If the Enable input stops receiving power flow while motion is in progress, the function
block’s Done output will not indicate when motion stops. In this case, the application
program should monitor the Done output bit (bit 2) at address +0 of the function block’s
assigned Instance data to determine when the motion is completed.

Transitions of the Execute input are only monitored while the Enable input is receiving
power flow. While the Enable input receives power flow, the Execute input is monitored for
a change in its status from the previous logic scan; if Enable and Execute transition in the
same scan, the transition of Execute is not detected. Therefore, the application logic must
not set both Enable and Execute either low or high in the same scan. If Enable and Execute
were made low in the same scan, the Find Home function block would still see the Execute
as high. If Execute and Enable were made high in the same scan, the Find Home function
block would not see the transition in Execute status and motion would not start.
Motion Control Functions 376
User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Stopping Find Home

Find Home can be stopped by:

• Executing a Stop Motion function block, as described later in this chapter. This stops
any motion on the channel while leaving the channel active.
• Disabling the channel by setting its High-Speed Counter enable output bit to 0. No
motion functions will operate on the channel while it is disabled.

CAUTION
To avoid abrupt starting and stopping of motion, the ratio of Velocity/Acceleration or
Velocity/Deceleration must be ≥ 0.1. For details, refer to page 420.

Inputs to the Find Home Function Block

Enable The Enable input provides power flow to the function block.

Axis A Constant representing the channel (1, 2, 3, or 4) on which Find Home will
be done.

Execute Power flow to this input controls execution of the function.

Motion Starting address of 6-word reference location in AI, AQ, or R memory for
Parameters the motion speeds, which are specified in the channel’s configured units:

Words 1, 2 Homing acceleration:

10 to 1,000,000 for channels 1, 2, and 3
90 to 1,000,000 for channel 4.

Words 3, 4 Homing deceleration:

10 to 1,000,000 for channels 1, 2, and 3
90 to 1,000,000 for channel 4

Word 5, 6 Find Home velocity, from 15 to 65,000. . The velocity used

to reach Home position, the Find Home velocity is usually
high, to reach Home position quickly. The sum of velocities
on all channels must not exceed 65,000.

Final Home Dword variable (%AI, AQ, R) or Constant representing the velocity used
Velocity after the home switch is detected once. Final Home Velocity ranging from
15 to 65,000 is slower than the Find Home velocity, for greater precision in
arriving at the final Home Position.

Home Real variable (%AI, AQ, R) or constant representing the Offset from the
Offset Home Switch.

Axis Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T) or Constant specifying the axis direction.

Direction 0 = Clockwise (CW), 1 = Counter-Clockwise (CCW). Note that the actual
Input direction depends on the field connections and drive settings.

Motion Control Functions 377

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Outputs of the Find Home Function Block

Enable Power flow output, passes power flow when it receives power flow from the
output Enable input.

Axis Boolean variable (Q0005 to Q0024). The Micro PLC output point for which
Direction direction is to be set. 0 = clockwise, 1 = counterclockwise. The actual
Output direction depends on the field connections and drive settings. The
application program should not override the direction output during the
Homing operation.

Done Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T) for the Find Home completion status. Goes
to 1 when motion is completed. If the Execute input is a pulse, rather than
staying continuously on, done remains 1/on for one scan after motion
completes.

Active Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T). Set to 1 when motion starts on the channel.
Resets to 0 when motion stops.

Error Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T) . Set to 1 if an error has occurred within

function block. See Error ID below.

Error ID Word variable (%AI, AQ, R). If Error (ER) =1, this is an error ID. If Warning (WR)
=1, this is the Warning ID. See the list of error definitions on page 371.

Warning Optional parameter. Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T). Set to 1 when a

warning has occurred. See Error ID above. Warning is generated when the
same motion is triggered again while it is already in progress.

Motion Control Functions 378

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

19.2.2 Example Program Logic for Find Home

Figure 210

19.3 Moving to the Home Position

The Go Home function moves the motor to a Home position that has been defined by the
Find Home function.

Figure 211

Motion Control Functions 379

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

If a Home Offset was set up during execution of the Find Home function, the Go Home
function causes the motor to move to the Home Offset position instead.

Figure 212

The number of pulses or the distance and the direction of motion are automatically
detected based on the Position Register value.

19.3.1 Go Home Function Block

The application program uses the following function block to set up and control a Go Home
operation:

Figure 213

The channel’s Output Enable bit (for example, Q0505 for channel 1) must be set to 1 to use
this or any other motion function block. If the Output Enable bit is not 1, the function will
not execute, and a Channel Enable error will be reported.

When the Enable input receives power flow and the Execute input transitions to 1, the
function’s parameters are loaded. If the parameters are not valid, an error code is generated,
and the function does not start. If the parameters are valid, function execution starts and
sets the Active output to 1. Active returns to 0 when the function complete, or is stopped.

If the Enable input continues passing power flow after the function completes, Go Home
can be restarted with the same parameters by generating a low to high transition on Execute
input again. To execute the function block with different parameters, first stop motion and
then stop passing power flow to the Enable input. Then, change the parameter values. The
function block can then be executed by passing power flow to the Enable input and
generating a low-to-high transition on the Execute input.

Motion Control Functions 380

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

The function block’s Enable output remains high as long as Enable Input is high.

If the Enable input stops receiving power flow while motion is in progress, the function
block’s Done output will not indicate when motion stops. In this case, the application
program should monitor the Done output bit (bit 2) at address +0 of the function block’s
assigned Instance data to determine when the motion is completed.

Transitions of the Execute input are monitored only while the Enable input is receiving
power flow. While the Enable input receives power flow, the Execute input is monitored for
a change in its status from the previous logic scan; if Enable and Execute transition in the
same scan, the transition of Execute is not detected. Therefore, the application logic must
not set both Enable and Execute either low or high in the same scan. If Enable and Execute
were made low in the same scan, the Go Home function block would still see the Execute as
high. If Execute and Enable were made high in the same scan, the Go Home function block
would not see the transition in Execute and motion would not start.

Stopping Go Home
Go Home can be stopped by:

• Executing a Stop Motion function block, as described later in this chapter. This stops
any motion on the channel while leaving the channel active.
• Disabling the channel by setting its High-Speed Counter enable output bit to 0. No
motion functions will operate on the channel while it is disabled.

CAUTION
To avoid abrupt starting and stopping of motion, the ratio of Velocity/Acceleration or
Velocity/Deceleration must be ≥ 0.1. For details, refer to page 374.

Motion Control Functions 381

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Inputs to the Go Home Function Block

Enable The Enable input provides power flow to the function block.

Axis A Constant representing the channel (1, 2, 3, or 4) on which Go Home will

be done.

Execute Power flow to this input controls execution of the function. Rising edge is
detected to load the parameters and start execution of the function block.

Acceleratio Dword variable or Constant representing the acceleration rate, from 10 to

n 1,000,000. 90 to 1,000,000 for channel 4.

Deceleratio Dword variable or Constant representing the deceleration rate, from 10 to

n 1,000,000. 90 to 1,000,000 for channel 4.

Go Home Dword variable or Constant representing the velocity at which the Go

Velocity Home function is to be carried out. From 15 to 65,000. The sum of
velocities on all channels must not exceed 65,000.

Outputs of the Go Home Function Block

Enable Power flow output, passes power flow when it receives power flow from
output the Enable input.

Axis Boolean variable (Q0005 to Q0024). The Micro PLC output point for
Direction which direction is to be set. 0 = clockwise, 1 = counterclockwise. The
Output actual direction depends on the field connections and drive settings. The
application program should not override the direction output during the
Homing operation.

Done Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T) for the GO Home completion status.

Goes to 1 when motion is completed and remains 1 until the next homing
cycle is started and Execute is continuously on. If the Execute input is a
pulse, rather than staying continuously on, Done remains 1/on for one
scan after motion completes.

Active Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T) for the Go Home Active status. 1 =

Homing in progress. 0 if motion is complete or has been stopped.

Error Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T) for the Go Home function block error
status. Set to 1 if an error has occurred within function block. See Error ID
below.

Error ID Word variable. If Error (ER) =1, this is an Error ID. If Warning (WR) =1, this
is the Warning ID. See the list of error definitions on page 371.

Warning Optional parameter. Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T). Set to 1 when a

warning has occurred. See Error ID above. Warning is generated when the
same motion is triggered again while it is already in progress.

Motion Control Functions 382

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

19.3.2 Example Program Logic for Go Home

Figure 214

19.4 Jogging
A Jogging move consists of Ramp Up (acceleration), At Velocity and Ramp Down
(deceleration) velocities.

Figure 215

Motion Control Functions 383

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

19.4.1 Jogging Function Block

The application program uses the following function block to set up and control Jogging.

Figure 216

The channel’s Output Enable bit (for example, Q0505 for channel 1) must be set to 1 to use
this or any other motion function block. If the Output Enable bit is not 1, the function will
not execute, and a Channel Enable error will be reported.

When the Enable input receives power flow, if no motion is active on the channel and either
Enable Forward (EF) or Enable Backward (EB) begins passing power flow, the function’s
parameters are loaded. If the parameters are not valid, an error code is generated, and the
function does not start. If the parameters are valid and the Enable input is high, execution
starts in the forward (clockwise) direction if Enable Forward is high, or in the reverse
(counterclockwise) direction if Enable backward is high. The Active output is set to 1. Motion
starts at the specified input Acceleration value and continues at the specified input Velocity
until power flow is removed from EF or EB. The axis then decelerates at the Deceleration
value. Active returns to 0 when the function is fully stopped.

If both Enable Forward and Enable Backward pass power flow, an error is returned. When
either input subsequently goes low, motion starts in the other direction and the error clears
automatically.

If the Enable input continues passing power flow, Jogging can be restarted with the same
parameters by passing power flow to the EF or EB input again. To execute the function block
with different parameters, first stop motion. The Enable Forward or Enable Backward input
must stop passing power flow. After changing the parameter values, the application logic
can again pass power flow to the Enable Forward or Enable Backward input.

Enable Forward / Backward input level is not monitored unless the Enable input is receiving
power flow. The Enable Forward / Enable Backward inputs are level-triggered, not edge-
triggered.

The function block’s Enable output transitions to 0 automatically when EN input becomes
0.

If the Enable input stops receiving power flow while motion is in progress, the function
block’s Active output will not indicate when motion stops. In this case, the application
program should monitor the Active output bit (bit 1) at address +0 of the function block’s
assigned Instance data to determine when the motion is completed.

Motion Control Functions 384

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Stopping Jogging
Jogging can be stopped by:

• Executing a Stop Motion function block, as described later in this chapter. This stops
any motion on the channel while leaving the channel active.
• Disabling the channel by setting its High-Speed Counter enable output bit to 0. No
motion functions will operate on the channel while it is disabled.

CAUTION
To avoid abrupt starting and stopping of motion, the ratio of Velocity/Acceleration or
Velocity/Deceleration must be ≥ 0.1. For details, refer to page 374.

Inputs to the Jogging Function Block

Enable The Enable input provides power flow to the function block.

Axis A Constant representing the channel (1, 2, 3, or 4) on which Jogging will

be done.

Enable If the Enable input is passing power flow, power flow to EF enables
Forward forward motion (clockwise) of the specified axis and starts the Jogging
operation. If Jogging is already in progress, removing power flow to EF
stops motion.

Enable If the Enable input is passing power flow, power flow to EB enables
Backward backward motion (counter-clockwise) of the specified axis and starts the
jogging operation. If Jogging is already in progress, removing power flow
to EB stops motion.

Acceleration Dword variable (AI, AQ, R) or Constant representing the jogging

acceleration rate, between 10 and 1,000,000 for channel 1 to 3 and 90 to
1,000,000 for channel 4.

Deceleration Dword variable (AI, AQ, R) variable or Constant representing the jogging
deceleration rate, between 10 and 1,000,000 for channel 1 to 3 and 90
to 1,000,000 for channel 4.

Velocity Dword variable (AI, AQ, R) or Constant representing the velocity rate,
between 15 and 65,000. The sum of velocities on all channels must not
exceed 65,000.

Motion Control Functions 385

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Outputs of the Jogging Function Block

Enable Power flow output passes power flow when it receives power flow from
output the Enable input.

Axis Direction Boolean Variable (Q0005 to Q0024). The Micro PLC output point for
Output which direction is to be set. 0 = clockwise, 1 = counterclockwise. The
actual direction depends on the field connections and drive settings.
The application program should not override the direction output during
the motion operation.

Active Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T) for the Jogging Active status. 1 = Jogging
in progress. 0 = Jogging complete or stopped,

Error Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T) for the error status. Set to 1 if an error
has occurred within function block. See Error ID below.

Error ID Word variable (%AI, AQ, R). If Error (ER) =1, this is an Error ID. If Warning
(WR) =1, this is the Warning ID. See the list of error definitions on page
371.

Warning Optional parameter. Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T). Set to 1 when a

warning has occurred. See Error ID above. Warning is generated when
the same motion is triggered again while it is already in progress.

19.4.2 Example Program Logic for Jogging

Figure 217

Motion Control Functions 386

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

19.5 Blending
A Blended Move consists of up to four successive moves that are executed without the
output value returning to zero between moves. The speed (pulse rate) and distance
(number of pulses) for each of the blended moves can be defined. Transition to the speed
of the next move uses ramping. At the end of each blended move, when the motor has
moved the defined number of pulses, the motor must be at the speed set for the next move
in the sequence.

The simplest form of blended move is shown below.

Figure 218

Because each Blend profile is equal to a normal ramping profile, a Pulse train with Ramp can
be done using a Blended move with just one blending profile. Use this method if the
hardware configuration selected is 4 Type A_32 or 1 Type A/1 Type B_32.

Each move can use any of the combinations of Ramp up (acceleration), At Velocity and
Ramp Down (deceleration) states. These combinations depend on velocity of the next
move in the sequence.

The parameters of each profile are used until the velocity of the next move is reached.

Based upon the Number of Pulses and the input parameters, the acceleration, deceleration
and the flat regions of the profile are calculated in order to reach the target frequency of
next profile. The motion is then performed with the calculated parameters.

19.5.1 Examples of Blended Moves

This section describes some different Blended Move operations.

Example 1
In this example, all of the moves have sufficient number of pulses and acceleration to
reach the desired velocity.

Figure 219

Motion Control Functions 387

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

In this example, segments 1, 2, and 3 use the profile 1 parameters:

• The number of pulses for segments 1, 2, and 3 are from distance 1.

• Segment 1 accelerates at acceleration 1.
• Segment 2 moves at velocity 1.
• Segment 3 decelerates at deceleration 1. For segment 3, while calculating the
number of pulses, the velocity of profile 2 (segment 4) is taken as the final velocity.
Segments 4 and 5 use the profile 2 parameters:

• Segment 4 moves at velocity 2.

• Segment 5 accelerates at acceleration 2.
The final aim of each move is to reach the next move desired velocity. So in Profile 1, first
the acceleration pulses are calculated for segment 1, then the deceleration pulses are
calculated for segment 3. The remaining pulses are generated at the profile 1 desired
velocity.

Example 2
In this example, the distance 1 value in profile 1 is not enough to reach velocity 1. So in
profile 2 (segment 2), accel2 and pulses2 are used to reach velocity 2. Velocity 2 and velocity
3 are configured as equal.

Figure 220

Example 3

Figure 221

Motion Control Functions 388

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

In this example, for profile 1:

1. The acceleration to reach velocity 1 is calculated,

2. Then the acceleration needed to reach velocity 2 from velocity 1 is calculated.
3. The remainder of profile 1 is run at velocity 1. In this example, all of profile 1 is
required for acceleration, so there is no constant velocity (dotted line) in profile 1.
Profile 3 – Like profile 1, distance 3 is just sufficient to accelerate to velocity 4, so profile 3
has no motion at velocity 3.

Profile 4 consists entirely of deceleration.

Example 4
In this example, in Profile 1, the acceleration is just enough to reach velocity 1. In profile 2,
segment 2, deceleration 2 is used to reach velocity 2. Segment 3 of profile 2 is at velocity 2.
Segment 4, ramps up at acceleration 2 to reach velocity 3.

Figure 222

Example 5
In profile 1, segment 1 accelerates from zero to velocity 1 then decelerates down to
velocity 2 from velocity 1 in segment 2. Since the distance is just enough for these
segments, profile 1 has no motion at velocity 1.

Figure 223

Motion Control Functions 389

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

19.5.2 Blending Function Block

The application program uses the following function block to set up and control Blended
Moves operation:

Figure 224

The channel’s Output Enable bit (for example, Q0505 for channel 1) must be set to 1 to use
this or any other motion function block. If the Output Enable bit is not 1, the function will
not execute, and a Channel Enable error will be reported.

When the Enable input receives power flow, if the Execute input is set to 1, the function’s
parameters are loaded. If the parameters are not valid, an error code is generated, and the
Blending function does not start. If the parameters are valid, the function block starts
execution and sets the Active output to 1. The Active output returns to 0 when the function
completes, or is stopped.

If the Enable input continues passing power flow, Blending can be restarted with the same
parameters by generating a low to high transition on Execute input again. To execute the
function block with different parameters, stop the motion. Then, remove power flow from
the Enable input. After changing the parameter values, the function can be executed by
reapplying power flow to the Enable input and generating a low to high transition on the
Execute input.

The function block’s Enable output transitions to 0 automatically when EN input becomes
low.

Transitions of the Execute input are only monitored while the Enable input is receiving
power flow. While the Enable input receives power flow, the Execute input is monitored for
a change in its status from the previous logic scan; if Enable and Execute transition in the
same scan, the transition of Execute is not detected. Therefore, the application logic must
not set both Enable and Execute either low or high in the same scan. If Enable and Execute
were made low in the same scan, the Blending function block would still see the Execute
input as high. If Execute and Enable were made high in the same scan, the Blending function
block would not see the transition in Execute status and motion would not start.

The motion status can be monitored by the Active output of the function block. If the Active
output is 1, motion is in progress. While motion is in progress, the Done, Error, and Warning
outputs should be 0. After the completion of the motion, the Active output is set to 0 and
the Done output is set to 1.
Motion Control Functions 390
User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

If the Enable input stops receiving power flow while motion is in progress, the function
block’s Done output will not indicate when motion stops. In this case, the application
program should monitor the Done output bit (bit 2) at address +0 of the function block’s
assigned Instance data to determine when the motion is completed.

When there is any error during the motion or at the start of the motion, the Error indication
and the Error Number are updated to the Error output and the Error ID specified in the
function block.

Stopping Blending
Blending can be stopped by:

• When the PLC has gone through Run-Stop transition. After coming back to Run
mode, an axis error (0x38) is logged into the %AI002 register and also at the Blending
function block's Error ID output. The error in %AI002 must be cleared using the
predefined reset bits for any other motion to start on that axis.
• When the PLC is power cycled.
• Executing a Stop Motion function block, as described later in this chapter. This stops
any motion on the channel while leaving the channel active.
• Disabling the channel by setting its enable output bit to 0. No motion functions will
operate on the channel while it is disabled.

CAUTION
To avoid abrupt starting and stopping of motion, the ratio of Velocity/Acceleration or
Velocity/Deceleration must be ≥ 0.1. For details, refer to page 374.

Inputs to the Blending Function Block

Because some of the profiles in a Blended Move may not have Ramp Up, At Velocity, and
Ramp Down segments, some parameters may not be used.

Enable The Enable input provides power flow to the function block.

Axis A Constant representing the channel (1, 2, 3, 4) on which the Blended Move
will be done.

Execute Power flow to this input starts execution of the function. Rising edge is
detected to load the parameters and start execution of the function block.

Number of Word variable or Constant representing the number of profiles (1, 2, 3, or

Profiles 4). Data for each profile must be present in the Motion Parameters
references (below).

Axis Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T) or a Constant specifying the axis direction.

Direction 0 = Clockwise (CW), 1 = Counter-Clockwise (CW). The actual direction
Input depends on the field connections and drive settings.

Motion Control Functions 391

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Motion Starting address of 32-word reference location in AI, AQ, or R memory that
Parameter will be used for the Motion Parameters of each profile. Acceleration,
s deceleration and velocity are specified in the channel’s configured units.

Words 1, 2 Profile 1 acceleration, from 10 to 1,000,000 for channels

1, 2, and 3; 90 to 1,000,000 for channel 4

Words 3, 4 Profile 1 deceleration, from 10 to 1,000,000 for channels

1, 2, and 3; 90 to 1,000,000 for channel 4

Words 5, 6 Profile 1 velocity, from 15 to 65,000

Words 7, 8 Real value. Distance in user units for profile 1

Words 9 to 16 Profile 2 acceleration, deceleration, velocity, and

distance, as above for Profile 1

Words 17 to Profile 3 acceleration, deceleration, velocity, and

24 distance, as above for Profile 1

Words 25 to Profile 4 acceleration, deceleration, velocity, and

32 distance, as above for Profile 1

Outputs of the Blended Moves Function Block

Enable Power flow output, passes power flow when it receives power flow from
Output the Enable input.

Axis Boolean variable (Q0005 to Q0024). The Micro PLC output point for which
Direction direction is to be set. 0 = clockwise, 1 = counterclockwise. The application
Output program should not override the direction output during the motion
operation.

Done Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T) for the Blending completion status. Goes
to 1 or passes power flow when motion is complete. If the Execute input is
a pulse, rather than continuously on, Done remains 1/on for one scan after
motion completes.

Active Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T). Set to 1 when motion starts on the
channel. Resets to 0 when motion stops.

Error Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T). Set to 1 if an error has occurred within
function block. See Error ID below.

Error ID Word variable (%AI, AQ, R). If Error (ER) =1, this is an Error ID. If Warning
(WR) =1, this is the Warning ID. See the list of error definitions on page
371.

Warning Optional parameter. Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T). Set to 1 when a

warning has occurred. See Error ID above. Warning is generated when the
same motion is triggered again while it is already in progress.

Motion Control Functions 392

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

19.5.3 Example Program Logic for Blending

Figure 225

Motion Control Functions 393

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

19.6 Stopping Motion on an Axis

As mentioned for the individual functions, motion can be stopped by:

• Disabling the channel by setting its High-Speed Counter enable output bit to 0. This
stops all motion functions on the channel.
• Executing a Stop Motion function block as described below. This stops any motion
on the channel while leaving the channel active.

19.6.1 Stop Motion Function Block

The application program can use the Stop Motion function block to stop any motion
operation:

Figure 226

When the Execute input receives power flow and the Enable input is high, and there is no
stop motion instance on the axis, the parameters are loaded. If the parameters are valid, a
low to high transition on the Execute input starts execution, stops the axis with the specified
input deceleration value (or immediately) based on the value of Stop mode input, and sets
the Active output to 1. The Done output goes to 1 when the axis stops and the Active output
returns to 0. Done remains high until the Execute input transitions low. If Execute is a pulse,
Done remains high for one scan after the axis stops (Active becomes low). If the parameters
are not valid, an error code is generated, and the function does not start.

To execute the function block with different parameters, remove power flow from the
Enable and Execute inputs. Then, change the parameters. The function block will execute
with the new parameters when power flow is applied to the Enable input and a low to high
transition occurs on the Execute input.

Execute input transitions are not monitored unless the Enable input is receiving power flow.
When the Enable input receives power flow, the Execute input is monitored for a change in
status from the previous logic scan. Therefore, Enable and Execute should not be made low
in the same scan or be made high in the same scan. If both Enable and Execute were set to
low in the same logic scan, the change to the Execute state would not be seen by the Stop
Motion function block because Enable is already low. So although the function block’s
Execute input is low, it still controls the axis and no motion can occur on that axis.

If the Enable input stops receiving power flow while motion is in progress, the function
block’s Done output will not indicate when motion stops. In this case, the application

Motion Control Functions 394

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

program should monitor the Done output bit (bit 2) at address +0 of the function block’s
assigned Instance data to determine when the motion is completed.

More than One Stop Motion Function Block for an Axis

If the application logic contains more than one Stop Motion function block for an axis, the
state of the Execute input of the last Stop Motion function block in the scan that has positive
power flow determines whether the Stop Motion function block controls motion on the axis.

For example, suppose the logic contains two Stop Motion function blocks for the same axis,
and jogging is running on that axis. Execute is triggered for the first Stop Motion function
block, but the Execute input of the second Stop Motion function block is 0. The first instance
of the Stop Motion function block takes control of the axis and stops the current jogging.
After jogging stops, because the Execute input of second (or last) Stop Motion function
block is still 0, Stop Motion is not controlling the axis and jogging can again be started on
the axis.

CAUTION
To avoid abrupt starting and stopping of motion, the ratio of Velocity/Acceleration or
Velocity/Deceleration must be ≥ 0.1. For details, refer to page 374.

Inputs to the Stop Motion Function Block

Enable The Enable input provides power flow to the function block.

Axis A Constant representing the channel (1, 2, 3, or 4) on which motion will

stop.

Execute Power flow to this input controls execution of the Function Block.

Stop Mode Boolean variable (%I, Q, T, M, G) or Constant to control the Stop Mode. 0
= decelerate to stop (normal stop mode). 1 = stop immediately.

Deceleration Optional Dword variable or Constant representing the jogging

deceleration rate, between 10 and 1,000,000 for channels 1, 2, and 3. 90
to 1,000,000 for channel 4.

Motion Control Functions 395

User Manual Chapter 19
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Outputs from the Stop Motion Block

Enable output Boolean power flow output, passes power flow when it receives power
flow from the Enable input.

Done Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T). Goes to 1 when motion is has stopped.
If the Execute input is a pulse, rather than continuously on, Done
remains 1/on for one scan.

Active Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T) for the function status. 1 = Stopping in

progress.

Error Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T). Set to 1 if an error has occurred within
function block. See Error ID below.

Error ID Word variable (%AI, AQ, R). If Error (ER) =1, this is an Error ID. If Warning
(WR) =1, this is the Warning ID . See the list of error definitions on page
374.

Warning Optional parameter. Boolean variable (%I, Q, M, G, T). Set to 1 when a

warning has occurred. See Error ID above. Warning is generated when
the same motion is triggered again while it is already in progress.

19.6.2 Example Program Logic for Stop Motion

Figure 227

Motion Control Functions 396

User Manual Chapter 20
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 20: Fault Handling

This chapter discusses how the Micro PLC handles system faults.

20.1 Faults and Fault Handling

A fault is a failure or condition that can affect the operation and performance of the system.
A fault may impair the ability of the PLC to control a machine or process.

20.1.1 Fault Handling

When a fault is detected, the PLC processes the fault and sets the corresponding system
bit(s) (See ‘System Bit Reference Table’). The PLC logs the fault into a fault table. There are
two different fault tables:

• The I/O Fault Table

• The PLC Fault Table
Contents of the fault tables can be monitored and cleared from the programmer.

20.1.2 Classes of Faults

The Micro PLC detects several classes of faults, including:

• Internal Failures
— Non-responding circuit boards
— Memory checksum errors
• External Failures
— Sequence fault
• Operational Failures
— Communication failures
— Configuration failures
— Password access failures

20.2 System Responses to Faults

Some faults can be tolerated, while others require that the PLC shut down. I/O failures may
be tolerated by the PLC, but not be acceptable for the application. Operational failures can
normally be tolerated.

Fault Handling 397

User Manual Chapter 20
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

20.2.1 Fault Actions

The PLC categorizes different groups of faults as:

• Informational
• Diagnostic
• Fatal
The PLC logs all faults in the appropriate fault table. For diagnostic and fatal faults, the PLC
sets any associated diagnostic variables. The following table lists the fault action, associated
fault table, and diagnostic variables for different types of faults. In addition, if the fault is a
fatal fault, the PLC halts the system (STOP/FAULTED mode) to prevent possible damage to
the equipment, or personal injury.

Fault Group Action Fault Table Diagnostic Variables

System Configuration Fatal PLC Fault Table sy_flt(%SC10) any_flt(%SC9) sy_pres(%SC12) cfg_mm(%SA9)
Mismatch
Expansion Unit Fatal PLC Fault Table sy_flt(%SC10) any_flt(%SC9) sy_pres(%SC12) cfg_mm(%SA9)
Configuration
Mismatch
PLC CPU Hardware Fatal PLC Fault Table sy_flt(%SC10) any_flt(%SC9) sy_pres(%SC12) hrd_cpu(%SA10)
Failure
PLC Software Failure Fatal PLC Fault Table sy_flt(%SC10) any_flt(%SC9) sy_pres(%SC12) sft_cpu(%SB13)
(see below)
PLC Store Failure (see Fatal PLC Fault Table sy_flt(%SC10) any_flt(%SC9) sy_pres(%SC12) stor_er(%SB14)
below)
Program Checksum Fatal PLC Fault Table sy_flt(%SC10) any_flt(%SC9) sy_pres(%SC12) pb_sum(%SA1)
Failure
No User Program on Diagnostic PLC Fault Table sy_flt(%SC10) any_flt(%SC9) no_prog(%SB9)
Power-up
Corrupted User RAM Fatal PLC Fault Table sy_flt(%SC10) any_flt(%SC9) sy_pres(%SC12) bad_ram(%SB10)
Unknown PLC Fault Fatal PLC Fault Table sy_flt(%SC10) any_flt(%SC9) sy_pres(%SC12)
Unknown I/O Fault Fatal I/O Fault Table io_flt(%SC11) any_flt(%SC9) io_pres(%SC13)
PLC Fault Table Full Diagnostic - sy_flt(%SC10)
I/O Fault Table Full Diagnostic - io_full(%S10)
Application Fault Diagnostic PLC Fault Table sy_flt(%SC10) any_flt(%SC9) sy_pres(%SC12) apl_flt(%SA3)
Password Access Diagnostic PLC Fault Table sy_flt(%SC10) any_flt(%SC9) sy_pres(%SC12) bad_pwd(%SB11)
Failure
Constant Sweep Time Diagnostic PLC Fault Table sy_flt(%SC10) any_flt(%SC9) sy_pres(%SC12) ov_swp(%SA2)
Exceeded
Loss of Expansion Unit Diagnostic I/O Fault Table io_flt(%SC11) any_flt(%SC9) io_pres(%SC13) los_iom(%SA14)
Addition of Expansion Diagnostic I/O Fault Table io_flt(%SC11) any_flt(%SC9) io_pres(%SC13) add_iom(%SA19)
Unit

Fault Handling 398

User Manual Chapter 20
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

PLC If a PLC Software Failure is logged, the PLC immediately goes into Error
Software Sweep mode. The only way to clear this condition is to cycle power.
Failure

PLC Store A sequence store is the storage of program blocks and other data
Failure preceded by the special Start-of-Sequence command and ending with the
End-of-Sequence command. If communications with the programmer are
interrupted or if any other failure terminates the download, the PLC Store
Failure fault is logged. As long as this fault is present in the system, the PLC
will not transition to Run mode.

20.3 Fault References

The PLC defines a set of special fault references that can be included in the application
program to check for fault conditions, and allow appropriate action to be taken should one
of these faults occur.

These special fault references remain set until the PLC is cleared or until the application
program clears the fault.

20.3.1 Example Program Logic for Fault References

This example ladder logic shows how the fault reference ov_swp can be programmed to
check for an over-sweep condition, then cleared. In this example, an indicator light_01 is
turned on to alert the operator that an over-sweep has occurred. After fixing any problem in
the application, the operator presses a pushbutton. This causes program input %I0035
contact to pass power flow to the ov_swp reference, which clears the associated memory
location.

Figure 228

Fault Handling 399

User Manual Chapter 21
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 21: Elements of an Application

Program
This chapter provides basic information about the application program.

• Structure of an application program

• Subroutines
• Program languages
• Instruction set

21.1 Structure of an Application Program

The application program consists of all the logic needed to control the operation of the
Nano or Micro PLC.

Application programs are created using the programming software and transferred to the
PLC. Programs are stored in non-volatile memory.

During the CPU Sweep (described in Chapter 17:), the Micro PLC reads input data and stores
the data in its configured input memory locations. The Micro PLC then executes the entire
application program once, utilizing this fresh input data. Executing the application program
creates new output data that is placed in the configured output memory locations.

After completing the end of the application program, the CPU provides the output data to
the output points.

Figure 229

Elements of an Application Program 400

User Manual Chapter 21
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

21.2 Subroutines
The program can consist of one Main program that executes completely during each CPU
sweep.

Figure 230

Or a program can be divided into subroutines. The maximum size of a main program block
or subroutine block is 16K bytes. A Nano PLC application program can include up to 8
subroutine declarations. A Micro PLC application program can include up to 64 subroutine
declarations.

Subroutines can simplify programming and reduce the overall amount of logic. Each
subroutine can be called as needed. The main program might serve primarily to sequence
the subroutine blocks.

Figure 231

A subroutine block can be called many times as the program executes. Logic that should be
repeated can be placed in a subroutine block, reducing total program size.

Figure 232

In addition to being called from the program, subroutine blocks can also be called by other
subroutine blocks. A subroutine block can even call itself.

Elements of an Application Program 401

User Manual Chapter 21
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 233

The main program is level 1. The program can include up to eight additional nested call
levels.

21.2.1 Declaring a Subroutine

A subroutine must be declared through the block declaration editor of the programming
software.

21.2.2 Calling a Subroutine

A subroutine invoked in the program is using a CALL instruction. Up to 64 subroutine block
declarations are allowed for Micro CPUs. Up to 8 subroutine block declarations are allowed
for NANO CPUs. Regardless of the CPU model, 64 CALL instructions are allowed for each
block in the program.

Figure 234

21.2.3 Locking/Unlocking Subroutines

Subroutine blocks can be locked and unlocked from the programming software. There are
four levels of locking:

Type of Lock Description

View When locked, the subroutine cannot be viewed.
Edit When locked, the information in the subroutine cannot be changed.
Perm View The subroutine is permanently locked and cannot be unlocked.
Perm Edit The subroutine is permanently locked and cannot be unlocked.

Permanently locked subroutines cannot be unlocked, even if the program is copied, backed
up, or restored. A previously view-locked or edit-locked subroutine can be unlocked.

Elements of an Application Program 402

User Manual Chapter 21
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

21.3 Program Languages

Application programs for VersaMax Nano PLCs and Micro PLCs can be created in Ladder
Diagram or Instruction List format.

21.3.1 Ladder Diagram

This traditional PLC programming language, with its rung-like structure, executes from top
to bottom. The logic execution is thought of as “power flow”, which proceeds down along
the left “rail” of the ladder, and from left to right along each rung in sequence.

Figure 235

The flow of logical power through each rung is controlled by a set of simple program
functions that work like mechanical relays and output coils. Whether or not a relay passes
logical power flow along the rung depends on the content of a memory location with which
the relay has been associated in the program. For instance, a relay might pass power flow if
its associated memory location contained the value 1. The same relay would not pass power
flow if the memory location contained the value 0.

If a relay or other function in a rung does not pass logical power flow, the rest of that rung is
not executed. Power then flows down along the left rail to the next rung.

A rung contains complex functions that can be used for operations like moving data stored
in memory, performing math operations, and controlling communications between the
Micro PLC and other devices in the system.

Some program functions, such as the Jump function and Master Control Relay, can be used
to control the execution of the program itself.

Together, this large group of Ladder Diagram relays, coils, and functions is called the
“Instruction Set” of the Micro PLC.

21.4 The Instruction Set

A VersaMax Nano PLC or Micro PLC provides a powerful Instruction Set for building
application programs.

As a guide to the programming capabilities of the VersaMax Micro PLC, all of the relays, coils,
functions, and other elements of the Instruction Set are listed on the following pages.
Complete reference information is included in Chapter 23: and in the online help for the
programming software.

Elements of an Application Program 403

User Manual Chapter 21
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

21.4.1 Contacts
–| |– Normally Open Passes power if the associated reference is ON.
–|/|– Normally Closed Passes power if the associated reference is OFF.
–|+|– Continuation Passes power to the right if the preceding continuation coil is set ON.

21.4.2 Coils
–( )– Normally Open Sets the associated reference ON if the coil receives power. Otherwise
OFF.
–(/)– Negated Sets the associated discrete reference ON if the coil does not receive
power. Otherwise OFF.
–( )– Positive If power flow was OFF to this coil the last time it was executed and is
Transition ON this time, then the coil is turned ON. Otherwise, the coil is turned
OFF.
–( )– Negative If power flow was ON to this coil the last time it was executed and is
Transition OFF this time, then the coil is turned ON. Otherwise, the coil is turned
OFF.
–(S)– SET Sets the associated discrete reference ON if the coil receives power. It
remains set until reset by an –(R)– coil.
–(R)– RESET Sets the associated discrete reference OFF if the coil receives power. It
remains reset until set by an –(S)– coil.
–(SM)– Retentive SET Sets the associated reference ON if the coil receives power. The
reference remains set until reset by an –(RM)– coil. Its state is retained
through power failure and STOP-TO-RUN transition.
–(RM)– Retentive Resets the associated discrete reference OFF if the coil receives power.
RESET The reference remains reset until set by an –(SM)– coil. Its state is
retained through power failure and STOP-TO-RUN transition.
–(/M)– Negated Sets the associated discrete reference ON if the coil does not receive
Retentive power. The state is retained through power failure and STOP-TO-RUN
transition. Otherwise OFF.
–(M)– Retentive Sets the associated discrete reference ON if the coil receives power.
The state is retained through power failure and STOP-TO-RUN
transition. Otherwise OFF.
– (+)– Continuation If power to the coil is ON, the continuation coil sets the next
continuation contact ON. If power is OFF, the continuation coil sets the
next continuation contact OFF.

Elements of an Application Program 404

User Manual Chapter 21
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

21.4.3 Timers and Counters

ONDTR On-Delay Accumulates time while receiving power. The current value is reset
Stopwatch Timer to zero when the reset input receives power.
OFDT Off-Delay Timer Accumulates time while NOT receiving power. The current value is
reset to zero when there is power flow.
TMR On-Delay Timer Accumulates time while receiving power. The current value is reset
to zero when there is no power flow.
UPCTR Up Counter Increments by 1 each time the function receives transitional power.
DNCTR Down Counter Counts down from a preset value every time the function receives
transitional power.

21.4.4 Math Functions

ADD Addition Adds two numbers.
SUB Subtraction Subtracts one number from another.
MUL Multiplication Multiplies two numbers.
DIV Division Divides one number by another, yielding a quotient.
MOD Modulo Division Divides one number by another, yielding a remainder.
EXPT Power of X Raises X to the power specified by IN and places the result in Q.
SIN Sine Finds the trigonometric sine of a real number.
COS Cosine Finds the trigonometric cosine of a real number.
TAN Tangent Finds the trigonometric tangent of a real number.
ASIN Inverse Sine Finds the inverse sine of a real number.
ACOS Inverse Cosine Finds the inverse cosine of a real number.
ATAN Inverse Tangent Finds the inverse tangent of a real number.
DEG Convert to Degrees Performs a RAD_TO_DEG conversion on a real radian value.
RAD Convert to Radians Performs a DEG_TO_RAD conversion on a real degree value.
SCALE Scaling Scales an input constant or word value.
SQRT Square Root Finds the square root of an integer or real value.
LOG Base 10 Logarithm Finds the base 10 logarithm of a real value.
LN Natural Logarithm Finds the natural logarithm base of a real number.
EXP Power of e Raises the natural logarithm base to the power specified by input.

Elements of an Application Program 405

User Manual Chapter 21
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

21.4.5 Relational Functions

EQ Equal Tests for equality between two numbers.
NE Not Equal Tests for non-equality between two numbers.
GT Greater Than Tests whether one number is greater than another.
GE Greater Than or Equal Tests whether one number is greater than or equal to another
To
LT Less Than Tests whether one number is less than another.
LE Less Than or Equal To Tests whether one number is greater than or equal to another.
RANGE Range Test the input value against a range of two numbers.

21.4.6 Bit Operation Functions

AND Logical AND Performs Logical AND of two bit strings.
OR Logical OR Performs Logical OR of two bit strings.
XOR Logical Exclusive OR Performs Logical Exclusive OR of two bit strings.
NOT Logical Invert Performs a logical inversion of a bit string.
SHL Shift Left Shifts a bit string left.
SHR Shift Right Shifts a bit string right.
ROL Rotate Left Rotates a bit string left.
ROR Rotate Right Rotates a bit string right.
BIT_TEST Bit Test Test a bit within a bit string to determine whether that bit is
currently 1 or 0.
BIT_SET Bit Set Sets one bit within a string to true.
BIT_CLR Bit Clear Sets one bit within a string to false.
BIT_POS Bit Position Locates a bit set to true within a bit string.
MASK_COMP Masked Compare Performs a masked compare of two arrays.

21.4.7 Data Move Functions

MOVE Move Moves one or more bits of data.
BLKMOV Block Move Moves a block of up to 7 constants.
BLK_CLR Block Clear Clears to zero one or more bytes/words of memory.
SHFR Shift Register Shifts one or more words or bits of data through a block
of memory.
BIT_SEQ Bit Sequencer Sequences a 1 through a group of bits in PLC memory.
COMMREQ Communication Sends a communications request.
Request

Elements of an Application Program 406

User Manual Chapter 21
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

21.4.8 Table Functions

ARRAY_MOVE Array Move Copies a specified number of data elements from a
source array to a destination array.
SEARCH_EQ Search Equal Searches array for values equal to a specified value.
SEARCH_NE Search Not Equal Searches array for values not equal to a specified value.
SEARCH_GT Search Greater Than Searches array for values greater than a specified value.
SEARCH_GE Search Greater Than or Searches array for values greater than or equal to a
Equal specified value.
SEARCH_LT Search Less Than Searches array for values less than a specified value.
SEARCH_LE Search Less Than or Searches array for values less than or equal to a
Equal specified value.

21.4.9 Conversion Functions

INT_TO_BCD4 Convert to BCD-4 (From INT) Converts a number to 4-digit BCD format.
REAL_TO_WORD Convert to Word (From REAL) Converts a Real value to Word format.
BCD4_TO_INT Convert to INT (From BCD-4 or Converts a number to signed integer format.
BCD4_TO_REAL REAL)
BCD4_TO_DINT Convert to DINT Converts a number to double precision integer
REAL_TO_DINT (From BCD-4 or REAL) format.
INT_TO_REAL Convert to Real Converts a value to real value format.
DINT_TO_REAL (From INT, DINT, BCD-4 or
BDC4_TO_REAL WORD)
WORD_TO_REAL
REAL_TO_INT Truncate to INT (from REAL) Truncates to a 16-bit signed number. The
range is –32,768 to +32,767.
REAL_TO_INT Truncate to Double Precision Truncates to a 32-bit signed number. The
INT (from REAL) range is -2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647.

21.4.10 Control Functions

CALL Call Causes a program execution to go to a specified
subroutine block.
DO_IO Do I/O Services a specified range of inputs or outputs
immediately (all inputs or outputs on a module will be
serviced if any addresses on that module are included
in the function – partial I/O module updates are not
performed
PID_IND Independent PID Algorithm Selects the non-interacting independent PID algorithm.
PID_ISA ISA PID Algorithm Selects the ISA PID algorithm.
END Temporary End of Logic The program executes from the first rung to the last
rung or the END instruction, whichever is encountered
first. This instruction is useful for debugging purposes.
COMMENT Comment A rung explanation.

Elements of an Application Program 407

User Manual Chapter 21
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

SVCREQ Service Request A special PLC service function.

MCRN Master Control Relay Starts a master control relay range. An MCR causes all
rungs between the MCR and its subsequent ENDMCR to
be executed with no power flow. Up to 8 MCRs can be
nested.
ENDMCR End Master Control Relay Ends a master control relay range.
JUMP Jump Jumps to a specified location indicated by a LABEL in
the logic.
LABEL Label The target location of a JUMP instruction. Multiple
Jump instructions can reference the same label.
DRUM Drum Sequencer Operates like a mechanical drum sequencer, selecting a
16-bit output pattern from an array of stored patterns,
and sending it to a set of outputs.

21.4.11 Communication Function

MODBUS_TCP_RW MODBUS/TCP Processes read and write requests for MODBUS/TCP
read/write Client support

21.4.12 Motion Functions

FIND_HOME Find Home Defines a Home (zero) position for an axis.
GO_HOME Go Home Moves the motor to a position that has been
defined by the Find Home function.
JOGGING Jogging Jogs the axis backward or forward at the specified
acceleration and velocity.
BLENDING Blending Executes up to four successive moves without the
distance and velocity output values retuning to zero
between moves.
STOP_MOTION Stop Motion Stops all motion on the channel while leaving the
channel active.

Elements of an Application Program 408

User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 22: Program Data and References

This chapter describes the types of data that can be used in an application program, and
explains how that data is stored in memory by a VersaMax Nano PLC or VersaMax Micro PLC.

• Data memory references

• Fixed I/O map locations
• Retentiveness of data
• System status references
• Time tick contacts
• How program functions handle numerical data

22.1 Data Memory References

Data in PLC programs is referenced by memory addresses that specify both a memory type
and a precise address within that memory type. For example:

%I00001 specifies address 1 in Input memory.

%R00256 specifies address 256 in Register memory.

The letter prefix indicates where data is stored in PLC memory.

22.1.1 Memory Allocation

The following table shows the types and sizes of available memory in VersaMax Micro and
Nano PLCs. (See Appendix B: for a further comparison with the Series 90 Micro PLC.)

Reference Type Reference Range 10-Point 14- 23- and 20-/40-

Nano PLCs Point 28-Point /64-Point
Micro Micro Micro
PLCs PLCs PLCs
User program logic Not applicable 2K words 9K words 9K words 48K bytes
Discrete inputs %I0001 - %I0512 512 bits 512 bits 512 bits 512 bits
Discrete outputs %Q0001 - %Q0512 512 bits 512 bits 512 bits 512 bits
Discrete global %G0001 - %G1280 1280 bits 1280 bits 1280 bits 1280 bits
references
Discrete internal coils %M0001 - %M1024 1024 bits 1024 bits 1024 bits 1024 bits
Discrete temporary coils %T0001 - %T0256 256 bits 256 bits 256 bits 256 bits
System status %S0001 - %S0032 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits
references %SA0001 - %SA0032 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits
%SB0001 - %SB0032 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits
%SC0001 - %SC0032 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits

System register %R0001 - %R0256 or 256 words 256 2K words 32640

references %R0001 - %R2042 words (close to
32k) words

Program Data and References 409

User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Reference Type Reference Range 10-Point 14- 23- and 20-/40-

Nano PLCs Point 28-Point /64-Point
Micro Micro Micro
PLCs PLCs PLCs
Analog and High-Speed %AI0001 - %AI0128 128 words 128 128 words 128 words
Counter inputs words
Analog outputs %AQ0001 - 128 words 128 128 words 128 words
%AQ0128 words

* For viewing only; cannot be referenced in a user logic program.

22.1.2 Word Memory References

Each word memory address (reference) is on a 16-bit word boundary. The PLC uses three
types of references for data stored in word memory.

%AI Normally used for analog inputs

%AQ Normally used for analog outputs.

%R Registers are normally used to store program data in word format.

An example is represented below. The example shows ten addresses. Each has 16 bits that
together contain one value. The PLC cannot directly access individual bits in word memory.

%R Addresses Example Value

0001 12467

0002 12004

0003 231

0004 359

0005 14

0006 882

0007 24

0008 771

0009 735

0010 0000

Program Data and References 410

User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

22.1.3 Bit Memory References

The PLC uses six types of references for data stored in bit memory.

%I Normally used for discrete inputs, and viewable in the Input Status Table.
%Q Normally used for physical output references, and viewable in the Output Status Table. A
%Q reference may be either retentive or non-retentive, depending on its use in the
program.
%M Normally used to represent internal references. A specific %M reference may be either
retentive or non-retentive, depending on its use in the program.
%T Used for temporary references that can be used many times in a program. Data with %T
references is not retained through loss of power or RUN-TO-STOP-TO-RUN transitions.
%T references cannot be used with retentive coils.
%S System status references, which have specific predefinitions.
%S, %SA, %SB, and %SC can be used for any type of logic contact.
%SA, %SB, and %SC can be used for retentive coils.
%S can be used as inputs to functions or function blocks.
%SA, %SB, and %SC can be used as inputs or outputs of functions and function blocks.
%G Used for Global Data. Data in %G references is retained through power loss. %G
references can be used with contacts and retentive coils, but not on non-retentive coils.

Each bit memory address (reference) is on a bit boundary. Data is stored in bit memory as
represented below. The example shows 160 individually addressed bits, with address 1 in
the upper left and address 160 in the lower right.

Figure 236

Transition Bits and Override Bits

%I, %Q, %M, and %G references have associated transition and override bits.

%T, %S, %SA, %SB, and %SC references have associated transition bits only.

The CPU uses transition bits for transitional coils. When override bits are set, the
associated references can only be changed from the programmer.

Program Data and References 411

User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

22.2 Fixed I/O Map Locations

A Nano/Micro PLC automatically reserves some memory locations for specific functions. Use
of these addresses for other purposes is not recommended.

22.2.1 Reserved Bit Memory Locations: %I

Micro PLCS (14- thru 64-Point) Nano PLCs (10-Point)
Address Standard 4 Type A 1 Type A and Standard 3 Type A 1 Type A and
Inputs Counters 1 Type B Inputs Counters 1 Type B
%I 0001 Input 1 Count 1 Type B counter Input 1 Count 1 Type B counter
(Phase 1) (Phase 1)
0002 Input 2 Preload/Strobe 1 Not used Input 2 Preload/ Not used
or Home Input 114 Strobe 1
0003 Input 3 Count 2 Type B counter Input 3 Count 2 Type B counter
(Phase 2) (Phase 2)
0004 Input 4 Preload/Strobe 2 Not used Input 4 Preload/ Preload/Strobe for
or Home Input 214 Strobe 2 Type B counter
0005 Input 5 Count 3 Not used Input 5 Count 3 Type A counter:
Count Input
0006 Input 6 Preload/Strobe 3 Preload/Strobe Input 6 Preload/ Type A counter:
or Home Input 314 for Type B Strobe 3 Preload/Strobe
0007 Input 7 Count 4 Type A counter: --
Count 4

0008 Input 8 Preload/Strobe 4 Preload/ --

or Home Input 414 Strobe 4
0009-16 Inputs for 23-/28-point Micros, Default first discrete input for 14-pt PLCs, configurable.
0017 Default first discrete input from expansion unit (28/23pt PLCs), can be reconfigured.
0488 Micro 20-, 40-, 60-: Ethernet Option Module NA
configured for Modbus/TCP Client operation.
0494 to 0496 Pulse Train Complete for channels 1 to 3 Pulse Train Complete for channels 1 to 3
0497 to 0499 Strobe status bits for channels 1 to 3 Strobe status bits for channels 1 to 3
00500 Strobe status bit for channels 4 --
0501 to 0503 Preload status bits for channels 1 to 3 Preload status bits for channels 1 to 3
0504 Preload status bit for channel 4 --
0505 to 0507 Output status bits for channels 1 to 3 Output status bits for channels 1 to 3
0508 Output status bit for channel 4 --
0511 Pulse Train Complete for channel 4 --
0512 Counter Error status

14
%I0002, I0004, I0006, and I0008 are reserved as Home Inputs only for Micro-20, -40, and –64 CPUs that are configured for 32-bit
counter operation (either 4 Type A Counters, 32 bits, or 1 Type A and 1 Type B counter 32 bits).
Program Data and References 412
User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

22.2.2 Reserved Bit Memory Locations: %Q

Micro PLCS (14- thru 64-Point) Nano PLCs (10-Point)
Address Standard 4 Type A 1 Type A and Standard 3 Type A 1 Type A and 1
Outputs Counters 1 Type B Outputs Counters Type B
%Q 0001 Output 1 Counter 1 Output 1 Counter 1 Type B Counter
Output/PWM/PT1 Output/PWM/PT1 Output
0002 Output 2 Counter 2 Output 2 Counter 2 Standard Output
Output/PWM/PT2 Output/PWM/PT2 2
0003 Output 3 Counter 3 Standard Output Output 3 Counter 3 Type A Counter
Output/PWM/PT3 3 Output/PWM/PT3 Output
0004 Output 4 Counter 4 Type A Counter Output 4 Standard Standard Output
Output/PWM/PT4 Output 4
0005 Output 5
0006 Output 6
0007-0009 Outputs 7-9
0007-0016 Outputs for 23- and 28-point Micro PLCs, Default
first discrete output for 14-pt PLCs (can be
reconfigured).
0017 Default first discrete output for expansion unit
(28/23pt PLCs), can be reconfigured.
0489-0492 Input Direction for Channel 1 to Channel 4 Reserved
0493 Reserved
0494 Start Q1 Pulse Train
0495 Start Q2 Pulse Train
0496 Start Q3 Pulse Train
0497 Clear Strobe bit for HSC 1
0498 Clear Strobe bit for HSC 2
0499 Clear Strobe bit for HSC 3
0500 Clear Strobe bit for HSC 4 Reserved
0501 Reset Preload bit HSC 1
0502 Reset Preload bit HSC 2
0503 Reset Preload bit HSC 3
0504 Reset Preload bit HSC 4 Reserved
0505 Enable Output HSC 1/PTO/PTM
0506 Enable Output HSC 2/PTO/PTM
0507 Enable Output HSC 3/PTO/PTM
0508 Enable Output HSC 4/PTO/PTM Reserved
0509-510 Not used but unavailable
0511 Start Q4 Pulse Train Reserved
0512 Clear Error (all counters)

Program Data and References 413

User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

22.2.3 Reserved Word Memory Locations: %AI

Micro PLCS (14- thru 64-Point) Nano PLCs (10-Point)
Address 4 Type A Counter or 4 Type A Counter 32 Bits Standard 3 Type A 1 Type A and
1 Type A / 1 Type B: 16 Bits 1 Type A / 1 Type B: Outputs Counters 1 Type B
32 Bits (Micro-20/-40/-64)
%AI 001 Module Status code
002 Counts per timebase HSC 1
003 Counts per timebase HSC 2
004 Counts per timebase HSC 3
005 Counts per timebase HSC 4
006 Accumulator HSC 1 channel 1 Accumulator or Position Accumulator HSC 1
007 Strobe Register HSC 1 channel 2 Register, channel 1 Strobe Register HSC 1
008 Accumulator HSC 2 channel 3 or Strobe Register HSC 1 Accumulator HSC 2
Position Register, channel 1
009 Strobe Register HSC 2 channel 4 Strobe Register HSC 2
010 Accumulator HSC 3 Accumulator or Position Accumulator HSC 3
011 Strobe Register HSC 3 Register, channel 2 Strobe Register HSC 3
012 Accumulator HSC 4 Strobe Register HSC 2
013 Strobe Register HSC 4
014 Not used (set to 0)
015 Not used (set to 0)
016 Analog potentiometer 1
017 Analog potentiometer 2
018 Analog input channel 1
019 Analog input channel 2
020-021 Inputs 1 - 4 from 1st analog Accumulator or Position
expansion unit15 Register, channel 3
022-023 Strobe Register HSC 3
024-025 Inputs 1 - 4 from 2nd analog Accumulator or Position
expansion unit15 Register, channel 4
026-027 Strobe Register HSC 4
028-029 Inputs 1 - 4 from 3rd analog Inputs 1 - 4 from 1st analog
030-031 expansion unit15 expansion unit15

032-033 Inputs 1 - 4 from 4th analog Inputs 1 - 4 from 2nd analog

034-035 expansion unit15 expansion unit15

036-039 Available references Inputs 1 - 4 from 3rd analog

expansion unit15
040-043 Inputs 1 - 4 from 4th analog
expansion unit15

15
can be reconfigured.

Program Data and References 414

User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Micro PLCS (14- thru 64-Point) Nano PLCs (10-Point)

Address 4 Type A Counter or 4 Type A Counter 32 Bits Standard 3 Type A 1 Type A and
1 Type A / 1 Type B: 16 Bits 1 Type A / 1 Type B: Outputs Counters 1 Type B
32 Bits (Micro-20/-40/-64)
044-128 Available references

22.2.4 Reserved Word Memory Locations: %AQ

Micro PLCS (14- thru 64-Point) Nano PLCs (10-Point)
Address 4 Type A Counter or 4 Type A Counter 32 Bits Standar 3 Type A 1 Type A
1 Type A / 1 Type B: 1 Type A / 1 Type B: d Counters and
16 Bits 32 Bits (Micro-20/-40/-64) Outputs 1 Type B
%AQ 001 Controls the number of input samples for analog Available
potentiometer input filtering.
002 PWM Frequency Q1 Available PWM Frequency Q1
003 PWM Duty Cycle Q1 Available PWM Duty Cycle Q1
004 PWM Frequency Q2 Available PWM Frequency 2 Available
005 PWM Duty Cycle Q2 Available PWM Duty Cycle 2 Available
006 PWM Frequency Q3 Available PWM Frequency 3 Available
007 PWM Duty Cycle Q3 Available PWM Duty Cycle 3 Available
008 PWM Frequency Q4 Available
009 PWM Duty Cycle Q4 Available
011 Discrete input filtering time value Available
012 Analog output channel 1 Available
013,014 Outputs 1, 2 for 1st analog expansion unit, can be Available
reconfigured
015,016 Outputs 1, 2 for 2nd analog expansion unit, can be Available
reconfigured
017,018 Outputs 1, 2 for 3rd analog expansion unit, can be Available
reconfigured
019,020 Outputs 1, 2 for 4th analog expansion unit, can be Available
reconfigured
117-120 Available Available Available
121 Frequency of Q4 pulse train Available
122 Number of pulses to send to Q4 output (0 to 65535)
123 Frequency of Q1 pulse train Available PT Frequency Q1
124 Number of pulses to send to Q1 output (0 to 65535) Available Number of Pulses Q1
125 Frequency of Q2 pulse train Available Frequency 2 Available
126 Number of pulses to send to Q2 output (0 to 65535) Available Pulses 2 Available
127 Frequency of Q3 pulse train Available Frequency 3 Available
128 Number of pulses to send to Q3 output (0 to 65535) Available Pulses 3 Available

Program Data and References 415

User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

22.3 Retentiveness of Data

Data is called “retentive” if it is automatically saved when the PLC is stopped. Retentive data
is also saved when the PLC is power cycled on units that have capacitor or battery-backed
memory. The following data is retentive:

• Program logic
• Fault tables and diagnostics
• Overrides
• Word data (%R, %AI, %AQ)
• Bit data (%I, %SC, %G, fault bits and reserved bits)
• Word data stored in %Q and %M.
• Data in %Q or %M references that are used as function block outputs or with
retentive coils:
-(M)- retentive coils

-(/M)- negated retentive coils

-(SM)- retentive SET coils

-(RM)- retentive RESET coils

The last time a %Q or %M reference is used with a coil, the coil type determines whether the
data is retentive or non-retentive. For example, if %Q0001 was last programmed as the
reference of a retentive coil, the %Q0001 data is retentive. However, if %Q0001 was last
programmed on a non-retentive coil, then the %Q0001 data is non-retentive.

• %Q or %M references that have been made retentive by specifically declaring them

to be retentive. %Q and %M references default to non-retentive.
The following data is non-retentive:

• %T data
• %S, %SA, and %SB data (but %SC bit data IS retentive).
• %Q and %M references that have not been declared to be retentive.
• %Q and %M references that are used with non-retentive coils:
-( )- coils

-(/)- negated coils

-(S)- SET coils

-(R)- RESET coils

Program Data and References 416

User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

22.4 System Status References

The Nano/Micro PLC stores status and other system data in predefined references in %S,
%SA, %SB, and %SC memory. Tables on the following pages list all of the System Status
References.

22.4.1 Using the System Status References

System status references can be used as needed in application programs. For easier
programming, each system status reference has a descriptive nickname. For example, the
following function block uses the FST_SCN (first scan) status reference to control power flow
to a Block Clear function.

Figure 237

Other system status reference nicknames include T_10MS, T_100MS, T_SEC, and T_MIN
(see below), FST_SCN, ALW_ON, and ALW_OFF.

22.4.2 Time-Tick References

Time-tick contacts represent specific locations in %S memory. They can be used to provide
regular pulses of power flow to other program functions. The four time-tick contacts have
time durations of 0.01 second, 0.1 second, 1.0 second, and 1 minute.

The state of these contacts does not change during the execution of the sweep. These
contacts provide a pulse having an equal on and off time duration.

The contacts are referenced as T_10MS (0.01 second), T_100MS (0.1 second), T_SEC (1.0
second), and T_MIN (1 minute).

The following timing diagram represents the on/off time duration of these contacts.

Figure 238

Program Data and References 417

User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

22.4.3 %S References
References in %S memory are read only.

Reference Nickname Definition

%S0001 FST_SCN Set to 1 when the current sweep is the first sweep.
%S0002 LST_SCN Reset from 1 to 0 when the current sweep is the last sweep.
%S0003 T_10MS 0.01 second timer contact.
%S0004 T_100MS 0.1 second timer contact.
%S0005 T_SEC 1.0 second timer contact.
%S0006 T_MIN 1.0-minute timer contact.
%S0007 ALW_ON Always ON.
%S0008 ALW_OFF Always OFF.
%S0009 SY_FULL Set when the PLC fault table fills up. Cleared when an entry is
removed and when the PLC fault table is cleared.
%S0010 IO_FULL Set when the I/O fault table fills up. Cleared when an entry is
removed from the I/O fault table and when the I/O fault table is
cleared.
%S0011 OVR_PRE Set when an override exists in %I, %Q, %M, or %G memory.
%S0012 reserved
%S0013 PRG_CHK Set when background program check is active. Cleared when the
background program check is inactive.
%S0014 PLC_BAT Set to indicate a bad battery in the CPU. The contact reference is
updated once per sweep. This bit is supported by 28-point Micro
PLCs only.
%S0015, 16 reserved
%S0017 SNPXACT SNP-X host is actively attached to CPU port 1. (Port 2 defaults to
disabled and must be activated with a CRQ).
%S0018 SNPX_RD SNP-X host has read data from CPU port 1.
%S0019 SNPX_WT SNP-X host has written data to CPU port 1.
%S0020 Set ON when a relational function using REAL data executes
successfully. It is cleared when either input is NaN (Not a Number).
%S0021 FF_OVR Set to report a Fatal Fault Override.
%S0022 USR_SW Set to reflect the state of the CPU mode switch.
1 = Run/On
0 = Stop/Off
%S0023-32 reserved

Program Data and References 418

User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

22.4.4 %SA, %SB, and %SC References

References in %SA, %SB, and %SC memory can be both read and written to.

Reference Nickname Definition

%SA0001 PB_SUM Set when a checksum calculated on the application program does not
match the reference checksum. If the fault was due to a temporary
failure, the discrete bit can be cleared by again storing the program
to the Micro PLC. If the fault was due to a hard RAM failure, the Micro
PLC must be replaced.
%SA0002 OV_SWP Set when a Micro PLC in CONSTANT SWEEP mode detects that the
previous sweep took longer than the time specified. Cleared when
the PLC detects that the previous sweep did not take longer than
specified. Also cleared during transition from STOP to RUN mode.
%SA0003 APL_FLT Set when an application fault occurs. Cleared when the Micro PLC
transitions from STOP to RUN mode.
%SA0004-8 reserved
%SA0009 CFG_MM Set when a configuration mismatch is detected during power-up or a
configuration store. Cleared by powering up the Micro PLC after
correcting the condition.
%SA0010 HRD_CPU Set when the diagnostics detects a problem with the Micro PLC TOD
clock.
This bit is not supported by Nano and 14-point Micro PLCs.
%SA0011 LOW_BAT Set when a low battery fault occurs. Cleared by replacing the battery
then powering up the Micro PLC.
This bit is not supported by Nano and 14-point Micro PLCs.
%SA0012,13 reserved
%SA0014 LOS_IOM Set when an expansion module stops communicating with the CPU.
Cleared by replacing the module and cycling system power.
%SA0015-18 reserved
%SA0019 ADD_IOM Set when an expansion module is added. Cleared by cycling PLC
power and when the configuration matches the hardware after a
store.
%SA0020-31 reserved
%SB0001-8 reserved
%SB0009 NO_PROG Set when an attempt is made to put the PLC in Run mode when there
is no executable application program stored in the CPU. Cleared by
storing an application program to the CPU and putting the PLC in Run
mode.
%SB0010 BAD_RAM Set when the Micro PLC detects corrupted RAM memory at power-
up. Cleared when RAM memory is valid at power-up.
%SB0011 BAD_PWD Set when a password access violation occurs. Cleared when the PLC
fault table is cleared.
%SB0012 reserved
%SB0013 SFT_CPU Set when the Micro PLC detects an unrecoverable error in the
software. Cleared by clearing the PLC fault table.

Program Data and References 419

User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Reference Nickname Definition

%SB0014 STOR_ER Set when an error occurs during a programmer store operation.
Cleared when a store operation is completed successfully.
%SC0001-8 reserved
%SC0009 ANY_FLT Set when any fault occurs. Cleared when both fault tables are cleared.
%SC0010 SY_FLT Set when any fault occurs that causes an entry to be placed in the PLC
fault table. Cleared when the PLC fault table is cleared.
%SC0011 IO_FLT Set when any fault occurs that causes an entry to be placed in the I/O
fault table. Cleared when the I/O fault table is cleared.
%SC0012 SY_PRES Set as long as there is at least one entry in the PLC fault table. Cleared
when the PLC fault table has no entries.
%SC0013 IO_PRES Set as long as there is at least one entry in the I/O fault table. Cleared
when the I/O fault table has no entries.
%SC0014 HRD_FLT Set when a hardware fault occurs. Cleared when both fault tables
have no entries.
This bit is not supported by Nano and 14-point Micro PLCs.
%SC0015 SFT_FLT Set when a software fault occurs. Cleared when both fault tables have
no entries.

Program Data and References 420

User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

22.5 How Program Functions Handle Numerical

Data
Regardless of where data is stored in memory—in one of the bit memories or one of the
word memories—the application program can handle it as different data types.

Type Name Description Data Format

BIT Bit A Bit data type is the smallest unit of memory. It
has two states, 1 or 0.
BYTE Byte A Byte data type has an 8-bit value. The valid
range is 0 to 255 (0 to FF in hexadecimal).
WORD A Word data type uses 16 consecutive bits of data
memory that are not separately addressable to
hold a value in the range of 0 to +65,535 (FFFF).

DWORD Double Has the same characteristics as a single word data

Word type, except that it uses 32 consecutive bits in
data memory instead of only 16 bits.

BCD-4 Four-Digit Four-digit BCD numbers use 16-bit data memory

Binary locations. Each BCD digit uses four bits and can
Coded represent numbers between 0 and 9. This BCD
Decimal coding of the 16 bits has a value range of 0 to
9999.
REAL Floating- Real numbers use two consecutive 16-bit
Point memory locations. The range of numbers that
can be stored in this format is ± 1.401298E-45 to
± 3.402823E+38. See the next page for more
information.
INT Signed Signed integer data uses 16-bit memory
Integer locations. Signed integers are represented in 2's
complement notation. Bit 16 is the sign bit, (0 =
positive, 1 = negative).
Range is -32,768 to +32,767.

DINT Double Double precision signed integers data uses two

Precision consecutive 16-bit memory locations. They are
Signed represented in 2's complement notation. Bit 32 is
Integer the sign bit, (0 = positive, 1 = negative). The range
is
-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647.

Program Data and References 421

User Manual Chapter 22
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

22.5.1 Real Numbers (Floating Point)

The REAL data type, which can be used for some Math functions and Numerical functions, is
actually floating point data. Floating-point numbers are stored in single precision
IEEE-standard format. This format requires 32 bits, which occupy two (adjacent) 16-bit PLC
words.

Figure 239

For example, if the floating-point number occupies registers %R0005 and %R0006, then
%R0005 is the least significant register and %R0006 is the most significant register.

The range of numbers that can be stored in this format is from ± 1.401298E–45 to
± 3.402823E+38 and the number zero.

22.5.2 Errors in Real Numbers and Operations

Overflow occurs when a number greater than 3.402823E+38 or less than -3.402823E+38 is
generated by a REAL function. The ok output of the function is set OFF; and the result is set
to positive infinity (for a number greater than 3.402823E+38) or negative infinity (for a
number less than –3.402823E+38). You can determine where this occurs by testing the
sense of the ok output.

POS_INF = 7F800000h – IEEE positive infinity representation in hex.

NEG_INF = FF800000h – IEEE negative infinity representation in hex.

If the infinities produced by overflow are used as operands to other REAL functions, they
may cause an undefined result. This result is referred to as NaN (Not a Number). For
example, the result of adding positive infinity to negative infinity is undefined. When the
ADD_REAL function is invoked with positive infinity and negative infinity as its operands, it
produces NaN for its result.

Program Data and References 422

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 23: Instruction Set Reference

This section is a reference to the functions in the VersaMax Nano PLC and Micro PLC
Instruction Set:

Bit Operation Functions Math and Numerical Functions

Logical AND, Logical OR Add, Subtract, Multiply, divide
Exclusive OR, Logical Invert (NOT) Modulo Division
Shift Right/Shift Left Scaling
Rotate Right/Rotate Left Square Root
Bit Test, Bit Set, Bit Clear Trigonometric Functions
Masked Compare Logarithmic/Exponential
Bit Position
Functions
Bit Sequencer
Convert Radians / Degrees
Control Functions
Do I/O Motion Functions (See Chapter 19:)
Call Find Home
End Go Home
Comment Jogging
Jump Blending
Master Control Relay Stop Motion
Drum Sequencer Relational Functions
Service Request (see Chapter 24:) Equal
PID (see Chapter 26:) Not Equal
Communication Greater Than
MODBUS_TCP_RW (see Chapter Less Than
14:) Greater or Equal
Less or Equal
Data Move Functions
Range
Move
Block Move Relay Functions
Block Clear Contacts, Coils
Shift Register Fault and No Fault Contacts
Communication Request Alarm Contacts

Data Type Conversion Functions Table Functions

Convert to BCD-4 Array Move
Convert to Signed Integer Search
Convert to Double Precision Signed Timer and Counter Functions
Integer Time-tick Contacts
On Delay Stopwatch Timer
Convert to Real
On Delay Timer
Convert Real to Word
Off Delay Timer
Truncate Real Number
Up Counter
Down Counter

Instruction Set Reference 423

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.1 Bit Operation Functions

The Bit Operation functions perform comparison, logical, and move operations on bit
strings. The Bit Operation functions are:

• Logical AND • Bit Test

• Logical OR • Bit Set, Bit Clear

• Exclusive OR • Masked Compare

• Logical Invert (NOT) • Bit Position

• Shift Right/Shift Left • Bit Sequencer

• Rotate Right/Rotate Left

23.1.1 Data Lengths for the Bit Operation functions

The Logical AND, OR, XOR, and NOT (Invert) functions operate on a single word of data.
The other Bit Operation functions may operate on up to 256 words.

All Bit Operation functions require Word-type data. However, they operate on data as a
continuous string of bits, with bit 1 of the first word being the Least Significant Bit (LSB).
The last bit of the last word is the Most Significant Bit (MSB). For example, if you specified
three words of data beginning at reference %R0100, it would be operated on as 48
contiguous bits.

%R0100 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1  bit 1 (LSB)

%R0101 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
%R0102 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33

(MSB)

Overlapping input and output reference address ranges in multi-word functions is not
recommended, it can produce unexpected results.

Instruction Set Reference 424

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.1.2 Bit Operation Functions

Logical AND, Logical OR
Each scan that power is received, a Logical AND or Logical OR function examines each bit in
bit string IN1 and the corresponding bit in bit string IN2, beginning at the least significant
bit in each. A string length of 256 words can be selected.

Logical AND
If both bits examined by the Logical AND function are 1, a 1 is placed in the corresponding
location in output string Q. If either or both bits are 0, a 0 is placed in string Q in that location.
The Logical AND function can be used to build masks or screens, where only certain bits are
passed through (bits opposite a 1 in the mask), and all other bits are set to 0. The Logical
AND function can also be used to clear an area of word memory by ANDing the bits with
another bit string known to contain all 0s. The IN1 and IN2 bit strings specified may overlap.

Logical OR
If either or both bits examined by the Logical OR function is 1, a 1 is placed in the
corresponding location in output string Q. If both bits are 0, a 0 is placed in string Q in that
location. The Logical OR function can be used to combine strings or to control many outputs
with one simple logical structure. The Logical OR function is the equivalent of two relay
contacts in parallel multiplied by the number of bits in the string. It can be used to drive
indicator lamps directly from input states, or to superimpose blinking conditions on status
lights.

Figure 240

Parameters of the Logical AND and Logical OR Functions

Input/ Choices Description

Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the operation is
performed.
I1 I, Q, M, T, S, G, R, AI, AQ, constant Constant or reference for the first word of the first
string.
I2 I, Q, M, T, S, G, R, AI, AQ, constant Constant or reference for the first word of the
second string.
ok flow, none The OK output is energized whenever enable is
energized.
Q I, Q, M, T, SA, SB, SC (not S), G, R, Output Q contains the result of the operation.
AI, AQ

Instruction Set Reference 425

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example of the Logical AND Function

In the example, when input %I0001 is set, the 16-bit strings represented by nicknames
WORD1 and WORD2 are examined. The results of the Logical AND are placed in output
string RESULT.

Figure 241

23.1.3 Bit Operation Functions

Exclusive OR
The Exclusive OR function compares each bit in bit string IN1 with the corresponding bit in
string IN2. If the bits are different, a 1 is placed in the corresponding position in the output
bit string.

Figure 242

Each scan that power is received, the Exclusive OR function examines each bit in string IN1
and the corresponding bit in string IN2, beginning at the least significant bit in each. For
each two bits examined, if only one is 1, then a 1 is placed in the corresponding location in
bit string Q. The Exclusive OR function passes power flow to the right whenever power is
received.

If string IN2 and output string Q begin at the same reference, a 1 placed in string IN1 will
cause the corresponding bit in string IN2 to alternate between 0 and 1, changing state with
each scan as long as power is received. Longer cycles can be programmed by pulsing the
power flow to the function at twice the desired rate of flashing; the power flow pulse should
be one scan long (one-shot type coil or self-resetting timer).

The Exclusive OR function is useful for quickly comparing two-bit strings, or to blink a group
of bits at the rate of one ON state per two scans.

Instruction Set Reference 426

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameters of the Exclusive OR Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the operation is
performed.
IN1 I, Q, M, T, S, G, R, AI, AQ, Constant or reference for the first word to be XORed.
constant
IN2 I, Q, M, T, S, G, R, AI, AQ, Constant or reference for the second word to be
constant XORed.
ok flow, none The OK output is energized whenever enable is
energized.
Q I, Q, M, T, SA, SB, SC (not S), G, R, Output Q contains the result of the operation.
AI, AQ

Example
In the example, whenever %I0001 is set, the bit string represented by the nickname WORD3
is cleared (set to all zeros).

Figure 243

IN1 (WORD3) 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
IN2 (WORD3) 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

Q (WORD3) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

23.1.4 Bit Operation Functions

Logical Invert (NOT)
The Logical Invert (NOT) function sets the state of each bit in the output bit string Q to the
opposite of the state of the corresponding bit in bit string IN1.

All bits are altered on each scan that power is received, making output string Q the logical
complement of IN1. The function passes power flow to the right whenever power is
received. A length of 256 words can be selected.

Figure 244

Instruction Set Reference 427

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameters of the Logical Invert Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the operation is
performed.
IN I, Q, M, T, S, G, R, AI, AQ, constant Constant or reference for the word to be negated.
ok flow, none The OK output is energized whenever enable is
energized.
Q I, Q, M, T, SA, SB, SC (not S), G, R, Output Q contains the result of the operation.
AI, AQ

Example
In the example, whenever input %I0001 is set, the bit string represented by the nickname
TAC is set to the inverse of bit string CAT.

Figure 245

23.1.5 Bit Operation Functions

Shift Bits Right, Shift Bits Left
The Shift Left function shifts all the bits in a word or group of words to the left by a specified
number of places. When the shift occurs, the specified number of bits is shifted out of the
output string to the left. As bits are shifted out of the high end of the string, the same
number of bits is shifted in at the low end.

MSB LSB
B2  1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 B1

The Shift Right function is used to shift all the bits in a word or group of words a specified
number of places to the right. When the shift occurs, the specified number of bits is shifted
out of the output string to the right. As bits are shifted out of the low end of the string, the
same number of bits is shifted in at the high end.

MSB LSB
B1 → 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 →B2

Instruction Set Reference 428

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

A string length of 1 to 256 words can be selected for either function.

Figure 246

If the number of bits to be shifted (N) is greater than the number of bits in the array * 16,
the array (Q) is filled with copies of the input bit (B1), and the input bit is copied to the output
power flow (B2). If the number of bits to be shifted is zero, then no shifting is performed;
the input array is copied into the output array; and input bit (B1) is copied into the power
flow.

The bits being shifted into the beginning of the string are specified via input parameter B1.
If a length greater than 1 has been specified as the number of bits to be shifted, each of the
bits is filled with the same value (0 or 1). This can be:

• The Boolean output of another program function.

• All 1s. To do this, use the special reference nickname ALW_ON as a permissive to
input B1.
• All 0s. To do this, use the special reference nickname ALW_OFF as a permissive to
input B1.
The function passes power flow to the right, unless the number of bits specified to be shifted
is zero.

Output Q is the shifted copy of the input string. If you want the input string to be shifted,
the output parameter Q must use the same memory location as the input parameter IN.
The entire shifted string is written on each scan that power is received. Output B2 is the last
bit shifted out. For example, if four bits were shifted, B2 would be the fourth bit shifted out.

Instruction Set Reference 429

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Bit Operation Functions

Shift Bits Right, Shift Bits Left

Parameters of the Shift Right / Left Functions

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the shift is performed.
IN I, Q, M, T, S, G, R, AI, AQ IN contains the first word to be shifted.
N I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, constant N contains the number of places (bits) that the array is
to be shifted.
B1 flow B1 contains the bit value to be shifted into the array.
B2 flow, none B2 contains the bit value of the last bit shifted out of
the array.
Q I, Q, M, T, SA, SB, SC, G, R, AI, Output Q contains the first word of the shifted array.
AQ

Example
In the example, whenever input %I0001 is set, the output bit string contained in the memory
location represented by the nickname WORD2 is made a copy of the bits in location
WORD1. The output string is left-shifted by 8 bits, as specified by the input LENGTH. The
resulting open bits at the beginning of the output string are set to the value of %I0002.

Figure 247

Instruction Set Reference 430

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.1.6 Bit Operation Functions

Rotate Bits Right, Rotate Bits Left
The Rotate Left function rotates all the bits in a string a specified number of places to the
left. When rotation occurs, the specified number of bits is rotated out of the input string to
the left and back into the string on the right.

The Rotate Right function rotates the bits in the string to the right. When rotation occurs,
the specified number of bits is rotated out of the input string to the right and back into the
string on the left.

A length of 1 to 256 words can be selected for either function. The number of places to
rotate must be more than zero and less than the number of bits in the string.

The Rotate Bits function passes power flow to the right, unless the number of bits specified
to be rotated is greater than the total length of the string or is less than zero. The result is
placed in output string Q. If you want the input string to be rotated, the output parameter
Q must use the same memory location as the input parameter IN. The entire rotated string
is written on each scan that power is received.

Figure 248

Parameters of the Rotate Bits Right / Left Functions

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the rotation is performed.
IN I, Q, M, T, S, G, R, AI, AQ IN contains the first word to be rotated.
N I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, N contains the number of places the array is to be rotated.
constant
ok flow, none The OK output is energized when the rotation is energized,
and the rotation length is not greater than the array size.
Q I, Q, M, T, SA, SB, SC, G, R, Output Q contains the first word of the rotated array.
AI, AQ

Example
In the example, whenever input %I0001 is set, the input bit string in location %R0001 is
rotated 3 bits. The result is placed in %R0002. The input bit string %R0001 is not changed by
the function. If the same reference is used for IN and Q, a rotation will occur in place.

Instruction Set Reference 431

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 249

23.1.7 Bit Operation Functions

Bit Test
The Bit Test function tests a bit within a bit string to determine whether that bit is currently
1 or 0. The result of the test is placed in output Q.

Each sweep power is received, the Bit Test function sets its output Q to the same state as
the specified bit. If a register rather than a constant is used to specify the bit number, the
same function block can test different bits on successive sweeps.

If the value of BIT is outside the range (1 < BIT < (16 * length) ), then Q is set OFF.

A string length of 1 to 256 words can be selected.

Figure 250

Parameters of the Bit Test Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the bit test is performed.
IN I, Q, M, T, S, G, R, AI, AQ IN contains the first word of the data to be operated on.
BIT I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, BIT contains the bit number of IN that should be tested.
constant Valid range is (1 < BIT < (16 * length)).
Q flow, none Output Q is energized if the bit tested was a 1.

Example
In the example, whenever input %I0001 is set, the bit at the location contained in reference
PICKBIT is tested. The bit is part of string PRD_CDE. If it is 1, output Q passes power flow
and the coil %Q0001 is turned on.

Instruction Set Reference 432

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 251

23.1.8 Bit Operation Functions

Bit Set and Bit Clear
The Bit Set function sets a bit in a bit string to 1. The Bit Clear function sets a bit in a string
to 0.

Each sweep that power is received, the function sets the specified bit. If a variable (register)
rather than a constant is used to specify the bit number, the same function block can set
different bits on successive sweeps.

A string length of 1 to 256 words can be selected. The function passes power flow to the
right, unless the value for BIT is outside the range (1 < BIT < (16 * length) ); then, OK is set
OFF.

Figure 252

Parameters of the Bit Set and Bit Clear Functions

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the bit operation is performed.
IN I, Q, M, T, SA, SB, SC, G, IN contains the first word of the data to be operated on.
R, AI, AQ
BIT I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, BIT contains the bit number of IN that should be set or
constant cleared. Valid range is (1 < BIT < (16 * length) ).
ok flow, none The OK output is energized whenever the bit input is valid
and enable is energized.

Instruction Set Reference 433

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example
In the example, whenever input %I0001 is set, bit 12 of the string beginning at reference
%R0040 is set to 1.

Figure 253

23.1.9 Bit Operation Functions

Masked Compare
The Masked Compare function compares the contents of two separate bit strings. It
provides the ability to mask selected bits. Input string 1 might contain the states of outputs
such as solenoids or motor starters. Input string 2 might contain their input state feedback,
such as limit switches or contacts.

Figure 254

When the function receives power flow, it begins comparing the bits in the first string with
the corresponding bits in the second string. Comparison continues until a miss-compare is
found or until the end of the string is reached.

The BIT input stores the bit number where the next comparison should start (a 0 indicates
the first bit in the string). The BN output stores the bit number where the last comparison
occurred (where a 1 indicates the first bit in the string). Using the same reference for BIT
and BN causes the compare to start at the next bit position after a miss-compare; or, if all
bits compared successfully upon the next invocation of the function block, the compare
starts at the beginning.

To start the next comparison at some other location in the string, you can enter different
references for BIT and BN. If the value of BIT is a location that is beyond the end of the string,
BIT is reset to 0 before starting the next comparison.

Instruction Set Reference 434

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameters of the Masked Compare Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow Permissive logic to enable the function.
IN1 R, AI, AQ Reference for the first bit string to be compared.
For WORD only: I, Q, M, T, S, G
IN2 R, AI, AQ Reference for the second bit string to be compared.
For WORD only: I, Q, M, T, S, G
M R, AI, AQ Reference for the bit string mask.
For WORD only: I, Q, M, T, SS,
SB, SC, G
BIT I, Q, M, T, S, G, R, AI, AQ, Reference for the bit number where the next
constant comparison should start.
MC flow, none User logic to determine if a miscompare has occurred.
Q R, AI, AQ Output copy of the mask (M) bit string.
For WORD only: I, Q, M, T, SA,
SB, SC, G
BN I, Q, M, T, S, G, R, AI, AQ Bit number where the last miscompare occurred.
length Constant The number of words in the bit string. Max. is 4095 for
WORD and 2047 for DWORD.

Operation of the Masked Compare

If all corresponding bits in strings IN1 and IN2 match, the function sets the “miss-compare”
output MC to 0 and BN to the highest bit number in the input strings. The comparison then
stops. On the next invocation of a Masked Compare Word, it is reset to 0. When the two bits
currently being compared are not the same, the function checks the correspondingly
numbered bit in string M (the mask). If the mask bit is a 1, the comparison continues until
it reaches another miss-compare or the end of the input strings. If a miss-compare is
detected and the corresponding mask bit is a 0, the function does the following:

1. Sets the corresponding mask bit in M to 1.

2. Sets the miss-compare (MC) output to 1.
3. Updates the output bit string Q to match the new content of mask string M
4. Sets the bit number output (BN) to the number of the miss-compared bit.
5. Stops the comparison.

Example
In the example, after first scan the Masked Compare Word function executes. It compares
%M0001–16 with %M0017–32. %M0033–48 contains the mask. The value in %R0001
determines the bit position in the two input strings where the comparison starts.

Instruction Set Reference 435

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 255

Before the function block is executed, the contents of the above references are:

Figure 256

The contents of these references after the function block executes are:

Figure 257

In this example, contact %T1 and coil %M100 force one and only one execution; otherwise
the function would repeat with possibly unexpected results.

23.1.10 Bit Operation Functions

Bit Position
The Bit Position function locates a bit set to 1 in a bit string.

Each sweep that power is received, the function scans the bit string starting at IN. When
the function stops scanning, either a bit equal to 1 has been found or the entire length of
the string has been scanned.

POS is set to the position within the bit string of the first non-zero bit; POS is set to zero if
no non-zero bit is found.

A string length of 1 to 256 words can be selected. The function passes power flow to the
right whenever enable is ON.

Instruction Set Reference 436

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 258

Parameters for the Bit Position Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, a bit search operation is
performed.
IN I, Q, M, T, S, G, R, AI, AQ IN contains the first word of the data to be operated on.
ok flow, none The OK output is energized whenever enable is energized.
POS I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ The position of the first non-zero bit found, or zero if a
non-zero bit is not found.

Example
In the example, if %I0001 is set, the bit string starting at %M0001 is searched until a bit equal
to 1 is found. Coil %Q0001 is turned on. If a bit equal to 1 is found, its location within the bit
string is written to %AQ001. If %I0001 is set, bit %M0001 is 0, and bit %M0002 is 1, then the
value written to %AQ001 is 2

Figure 259

Instruction Set Reference 437

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.1.11 Bit Operation Functions

Bit Sequencer
The Bit Sequencer function performs a bit sequence shift through an array of bits.

Figure 260

The operation of the function depends on the previous value of the parameter EN:

R Current EN Previous EN Current

Execution Execution Execution Bit Sequencer Execution
OFF OFF OFF Bit sequencer does not execute.
OFF OFF ON Bit sequencer increments/decrements
by 1.
OFF ON OFF Bit sequencer does not execute.
OFF ON ON Bit sequencer does not execute.
ON ON/OFF ON/OFF Bit sequencer resets.

The reset input (R) overrides the enable (EN) and always resets the sequencer. When R is
active, the current step number is set to the value passed in via the step number parameter.
If no step number is passed in, step is set to 1. All of the bits in the sequencer are set to 0,
except for the bit pointed to by the current step, which is set to 1.

When Enable is active and Reset is not active, the bit pointed to by the current step number
is cleared. The current step number is incremented or decremented, based on the direction
parameter. Then, the bit pointed to by the new step number is set to 1.

The parameter ST is optional. If it is not used, the Bit Sequencer function operates as
described above, except that no bits are set or cleared. The function just cycles the current
step number through its legal range.

Memory Required for a Bit Sequencer

Each bit sequencer uses three words (registers) of %R memory to store the information:

word 1 current step number

word 2 length of sequence (in bits)
word 3 control word
Word 3 (the control word) stores the state of the Boolean inputs and outputs of its
associated function block, in the following format:

Instruction Set Reference 438

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 261

Parameters for the Bit Sequencer Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
address R Address is the location of the bit sequencer’s current step,
length, and the last enable and OK status.
enable flow When the function is enabled, if it was not enabled on the
previous sweep and if R is not energized, the bit sequence
shift is performed.
R flow When R is energized, the bit sequencer’s step number is set
to the value in STEP (default = 1), and the bit sequencer is
filled with zeros, except for the current step number bit.
DIR flow When DIR is energized, the bit sequencer’s step number is
incremented prior to the shift. Otherwise, it is
decremented.
STEP I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, When R is energized, the step number is set to this value.
constant, none
ST I, Q, M, T, SA, SB, SC, G, R, ST contains the first word of the bit sequencer. Optional.
AI, AQ, none
ok flow, none The OK output is energized whenever the function is
enabled.

Example
In the example, the Bit Sequencer operates on register memory %R0001. Its static data is
stored in registers %R0010–12. When CLEAR is active, the sequencer is reset and the current
step is set to step number 3. The first 8 bits of %R0001 are set to zero.

When NXT_CYC is active and CLEAR is not active, the bit for step number 3 is cleared and
the bit for step number 2 or 4 (depending on whether DIR is energized) is set.

Figure 262

Instruction Set Reference 439

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.2 Control Functions

This section describes the control functions, which may be used to limit program execution
and to change the way the CPU executes the application program.

• Service specified I/O: DO IO

• Go to a subroutine block: CALL
• Temporary program end: END
• Execute a group of logic rungs without power flow: MCR
• Go to a specified location in the program: JUMP, LABEL
• Place a text explanation in the program logic: COMMENT
• Provide predefined On/Off patterns to a set of 16 discrete outputs in the manner of
a mechanical DRUM SEQUENCER.
The more complex Control Functions; Service Request and the PID algorithms, are
described in other chapters of this manual.

23.2.1 Control Functions

Do I/O
The Do I/O function updates inputs or outputs for one scan while the program is running.
The Do I/O function can also be used to update selected I/O during the program in addition
to the normal I/O scan.

Figure 263

Execution of the function continues until all inputs in the selected range have reported or all
outputs have been serviced. Program execution then returns to the next function.

The function passes power to the right whenever power is received, unless:

• Not all references of the type specified are present within the selected range.
• The Micro PLC is not able to properly handle the temporary list of I/O created by the
function.
• The range specified includes modules associated with a “Loss of I/O" fault.

Instruction Set Reference 440

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Using DO I/O with Expansion Units

The Do I/O function always correctly updates the reference addresses of the I/O being
scanned, even if some I/O addresses have been skipped in auto-configuring the PLC. If a 14-
point Micro PLC with attached expansion I/O is auto-configured, I/O addresses I0009
through I0016 and Q0009 through Q0016 are skipped and the I/O addresses of the first
expansion unit will start at I0017 and Q0017. The Do I/O function updates these I/O
correctly, without reserving the skipped memory areas. The reference memory at the Do
I/O ALT parameter contains 16 points of data: 8 points for the module and 8 points for the
expansion unit.

Note: Using DO_IO with the ALT parameter to expansion modules IC200UDD06, UEC208, UEI016,
UEO008, and UER016 is not supported.

Parameters of the Do I/O Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, a limited input or output scan is
performed.
ST I, Q, AI, AQ The starting address of the I/O to be serviced.
END I, Q, AI, AQ The ending address of the I/O to be serviced.
ALT I, Q, M, T, G, R, For the input scan, ALT specifies the address to store scanned input
AI, AQ, none point/word values. For the output scan, ALT specifies the address to
get output point/word values from. If a constant value is specified for
ALT, it is ignored.
ok flow, none OK is energized when the scan completes normally.

Do I/O for Inputs

If input references are specified, when the function receives power flow, the PLC scans input
points from the starting reference (ST) to the END reference. If a reference is specified for
ALT, copies of the new input values are placed in memory beginning at that reference, and
the real input values are not updated. ALT must be the same size as the reference type
scanned. If a discrete reference is used for ST and END, ALT must also be discrete.

If no reference is specified for ALT, the real input values are updated. This allows inputs to
be scanned one or more times during the program execution portion of the CPU sweep.

Instruction Set Reference 441

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example Do I/O for Inputs:

In this example, when the function receives power flow, the PLC scans references %I0001-
64 and %Q0001 is turned on. Copies of the scanned inputs are placed in internal memory
from %M0001-64. Because a reference is specified for ALT, the real inputs are not updated.
This allows the current values of inputs to be compared with their values at the beginning of
the scan.

Figure 264

Do I/O for Outputs

If output references are specified, when the function receives power flow, the PLC writes the
latest output values from the starting reference (ST) to the END reference to the output
points. If outputs should be written to the output points from internal memory other than
%Q or %AQ, the beginning reference can be specified for ALT.

Example Do I/O For Outputs:

In the next example, when the function receives power flow, the PLC writes values from
references %R0001-0004 to analog output channels %AQ001-004 and %Q0001 is turned on.
Because a reference is entered for ALT, the values at %AQ001-004 are not written to.

Figure 265

If no reference were specified for ALT, the PLC would write values at references %AQ001-
004 to analog output channels.

Instruction Set Reference 442

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.2.2 Control Functions

Call
The Call function causes program execution to go to a specified subroutine block.

Figure 266

When the Call function receives power flow, it causes the scan to go immediately to the
designated subroutine block and execute it. After the subroutine block execution is
complete, control returns to the point in the logic immediately following the Call
instruction.

Example

Figure 267

23.2.3 Control Functions

End of Logic
The End of Logic function provides a temporary end of logic. The program executes from
the first rung to the last rung or the End of Logic function, whichever is encountered first.

The End of Logic function unconditionally terminates program execution. There can be
nothing after the end function in the rung. No logic beyond the End of Logic function is
executed, and control is transferred to the beginning of the program for the next sweep.

The End of Logic function is useful for debugging purposes because it prevents any logic
which follows from being executed.

The programming software provides an [ END OF PROGRAM LOGIC ] marker to indicate the
end of program execution. This marker is used if no End of Logic function is programmed in
the logic.

Figure 268

Instruction Set Reference 443

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example
In the example, an End of Logic function is programmed to terminate the end of the current
sweep.

Figure 269

23.2.4 Control Functions

Master Control Relay (MCR) / End MCR
All rungs between an active Master Control Relay (MCRN) and its corresponding End Master
Control Relay (ENDMCRN) function are executed without power flow to coils. The
ENDMCRN associated with the Master Control Relay is used to resume normal program
execution. Unlike Jump functions, Master Control Relays can only move forward; the
ENDMCRN must appear after its corresponding Master Control Relay instruction in a
program.

Nested MCR
A Nested Master Control Relay function can be nested completely within another
MCRN/ENDMCRN pair.

There can be multiple Master Control Relay functions with a single ENDMCRN.

The Master Control Relay function has an enable input and a name. This name is used again
with the ENDMCRN. The Master Control Relay has no outputs; there can be nothing after it
in a rung.

Figure 270

With a Master Control Relay, function blocks within the scope of the Master Control Relay
are executed without power flow, and coils are turned off.

The ENDMCRN function must be tied to power rail; there can be no logic before it in the
rung. The name of the ENDMCRN associates it with the corresponding Master Control
Relay(s). The ENDMCRN function has no outputs; there can be nothing after it in a rung.

Figure 271

Instruction Set Reference 444

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example Master Control Relay and ENDMCRN Functions

In the example, when %I0002 is ON, the Master Control Relay is enabled. When the Master
Control Relay is enabled--even if %I0001 is ON--the Addition function block is executed
without power flow (i.e., it does not add 1 to %R0001), and %Q0001 is turned OFF.

If %I0003 and %I0004 are ON, %Q0003 is turned OFF and %Q0004 remains ON.

Figure 272

23.2.5 Control Functions

Jump, Label
The Nested Jump instruction causes a portion of the program logic to be bypassed. Program
execution continues at the Label specified. When the Jump is active, all coils within its scope
are left at their previous states. This includes coils associated with timers, counters, latches,
and relays.

The Nested Jump instruction has the form ----->>LABEL01, where LABEL01 is the name of the
corresponding nested Label instruction.

A nested Jump can be placed anywhere in a program.

There can be multiple nested Jump instructions corresponding to a single nested Label.
Nested Jumps can be either forward or backward Jumps.

There can be nothing after the Jump instruction in the rung. Power flow jumps directly from
the instruction to the rung with the named label.

CAUTION
To avoid creating an endless loop with forward and backward Jump instructions, a backward
Jump must contain a way to make it conditional.

Instruction Set Reference 445

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Label
The Label instruction is the target of a Jump. Use the Label instruction to resume normal
program execution. There can be only one Label with a particular name in a program.

The Label instruction has no inputs and no outputs; there can be nothing either before or
after a Label in a rung.

Example Jump and Label Instructions

In the example, whenever Jump TEST1 is active, power flow is transferred to Label TEST1.

With a Jump, any function blocks between the Jump and the Label are not executed, and
coils are not affected. In the example, when %I0002 is ON, the Jump is taken. Since the logic
between the Jump and the Label is skipped, %Q0001 is unaffected (if it was ON, it remains
ON; if it was OFF, it remains OFF).

Figure 273

23.2.6 Control Functions

Comment
The Comment function is used to enter a comment (rung explanation) in the program. A
comment can have up to 2048 characters of text. Longer text can be included in printouts
using an annotation text file.

It is represented in the ladder logic like this:

Figure 274

Instruction Set Reference 446

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.2.7 Control Functions

Drum Sequencer
The Drum Sequencer function is a program instruction that operates like a mechanical drum
sequencer. The Drum Sequencer steps through a set of potential output bit patterns and
selects one based on inputs to the function block. The selected value is copied to a group of
16 discrete output references.

Figure 275

Power flow to the Enable input causes the Drum Sequencer to copy the content of a selected
reference to the Out reference.

Power flow to the Reset input or to the Step input selects the reference to be copied.

The Control Block input is the beginning reference for the Drum Sequencer function’s
parameter block, which includes information used by the function.

Parameters of the Drum Sequencer Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow The Enable input controls execution of the function.
Step flow The Step input can be used to go one step forward in the sequence.
When the Enable input receives power flow and the Step input makes
an Off to on transition, the Drum Sequencer moves one step. When
Reset is active, the function ignores the Step input.
Reset flow The Reset input can be used to select a specific step in the sequence.
When Enable and Reset both receive power flow, the function copies
the Preset Step value in the Control Block to the active Step reference,
also in the Control Block. Then the function block copies the value in
the Preset Step reference to the Out-reference bits. When Reset is
active, the function ignores the Step input.
Pattern R, AI, AQ The starting address of an array of words, each representing one step
of the Drum Sequencer. The value of each word represents the desired
combination of outputs for a particular value of Active Step. The
number of elements in the array is equal to the length input.

Instruction Set Reference 447

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Input/ Choices Description

Output
Dwell R, AI, AQ, none This optional input array of words has one element for each element in
Time the Pattern array. Each value in the array represents the dwell time for
the corresponding step of the Drum Sequencer in 0.1 second units.
When the dwell time expires for a given step the Dwell Timeout bit is
set.
If a Dwell Time is specified, the drum cannot sequence into its next step
until the Dwell Time has expired.
Fault R, AI, AQ, none This optional input array of words has one element for each element in
Timeout the Pattern array. Each value in the array represents the fault timeout
for the corresponding step of the Drum Sequencer in 0.1 second units.
When the fault timeout has expired the Fault Timeout bit is set.
Control R The beginning reference address of the function’s parameter block.
Block The length of the Control Block is 5 words. A more complete
description of what is contained within this block is listed below.
Length CONST Value between 1 and 128 that specifies the number of steps.
ok flow, none OK is energized if Enable is On and no error condition is detected. If
Enable is Off, this output will always be Off.
OUT I, Q, M, T, G, R, A word of memory containing the element of the Pattern Array that
AI, AQ corresponds to the current Active Step.
Drum I, Q, M, T, G, This optional bit reference is set whenever the function block is
Coil none enabled, and Active Step is not equal to Preset Step.
Dwell I, Q, M, T, G, This optional bit reference is set if the dwell time for the current step
Timeout none has expired.
Timeout I, Q, M, T, G, This optional bit reference is set if the drum has been in a particular step
Fault none longer than the step’s specified Fault Timeout.
First I, Q, M, T, G, This optional array of bits has one element for each step of the Drum
Follower none Sequencer. No more than one bit in the array is On at any time and that
bit corresponds to the value of the Active Step

Parameter Block for the Drum Sequencer Function

The parameter block (control block) for the Drum Sequencer function contains
information needed to operate the Drum Sequencer.

address Active Step

address + 1 Preset Step
address + 2 Step Control
address + 3 Timer Control

Active Step The active step value specifies the element in the Pattern array to copy to
the Out output memory location. This is used as the array index into the Pattern, Dwell
Time, Fault Timeout, and First Follower arrays.

Preset Step A word input that is copied to the Active Step output when the Reset is On.

Instruction Set Reference 448

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Step Control A word that is used to detect Off to On transitions on both the Step input and
the Enable input. The Step Control word is reserved for use by the function block, and must
not be written to.

Timer Control Two words of data that hold values needed to run the timer. These values are
reserved for use by the function block and must not be written to.

Notes on Using the Drum Sequencer Function

1. The Dwell Timeout Output bit is cleared the first time the drum is in a new step. This
is true:
— Whether the drum is introduced to a new step by changing the Active Step or
by using the Step Input.
— Regardless of the Dwell Time Array value associated with the step
(even if it is 0).
— During the first sweep the Active Step is initialized.
2. The Active and Preset Step of the Drum Sequencer’s control block must be initialized
for the Drum Sequencer to work or to pass power flow. Even if the Active Step is in
the correct range (between 1 and length of the Pattern array) and the Preset Step is
not used, the drum will not function if the Preset Step is not in the proper range.

23.3 Data Move Functions

The Data Move functions of the Instruction Set provide basic data move capabilities.

• MOVE Data. This function copies data as individual bits, so the new location does not
have to be the same data type.
• Block Move. This function places constants into seven specified memory locations.
• Block Clear. This function fills an area of memory with zeros.
• Shift Register. This function shifts one or more data words or data bits from a
reference location into a specified area of memory. Data already in the area is shifted
out.
• Communication Request (COMMREQ). This important function allows the CPU to
communicate with intelligent modules in the system, for example, communications
modules. The basic format of the COMMREQ function is shown in this chapter. The
detailed parameters needed to program specific communications tasks are
provided in the documentation for each module.

Instruction Set Reference 449

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.3.1 Data Move Functions

Move Data
The MOVE function copies data as individual bits from one location to another. Because the
data is copied in bit format, the new location does not need to be the same data type as the
original.

When the Move function receives power flow, it copies data from input parameter IN to
output parameter Q as bits. If data is moved from one location in discrete memory to
another, (for example, from %I memory to %T memory), the transition information
associated with the discrete memory elements is updated to indicate whether or not the
Move operation caused any discrete memory elements to change state. Data at the input
parameter does not change unless there is an overlap in the source and destination.

Figure 276

Note that if an array of Bit-type data specified in the Q parameter does not include all the
bits in a byte, the transition bits associated with that byte (which are not in the array) are
cleared when the Move function receives power flow.

The input IN can be either a reference for the data to be moved or a constant. If a constant
is specified, then the constant value is placed in the location specified by the output
reference. For example, if a constant value of 4 is specified for IN, then 4 is placed in the
memory location specified by Q. If the length is greater than 1 and a constant is specified,
then the constant is placed in the memory location specified by Q and the locations
following, up to the length specified. Do not allow overlapping of IN and Q parameters.

The result of the Move depends on the data type selected for the function, as shown below.
For example, if the constant value 9 is specified for IN and the length is 4, then 9 is placed in
the bit memory location specified by Q and the three locations following:

Figure 277

The function passes power to the right whenever power is received.

Instruction Set Reference 450
User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameters for the Move Data Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the move is performed.
Length The number of bits, words, or double words of data to be
copied. This is the length of IN. Length must be from 1 to 256
for all types except BOOL. If IN is a constant and Q is type BOOL,
the length must be between 1 and 16. If IN is type BOOL, the
length must be between 1 and 256 bits.
IN I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, IN contains the value to be moved. For MOVE BOOL, any
constant discrete reference may be used; it does not need to be byte
For bit or word data aligned. However, 16 bits, beginning with the reference
only: S address specified, are displayed online.
For real data: R, AI, AQ
ok flow, none The OK output is energized whenever the function is enabled.
Q I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, When the move is performed, the value at IN is written to Q.
For bit/ word data: SA, For MOVE BOOL, any discrete reference may be used; it does
SB, SC not need to be byte aligned. However, 16 bits, beginning with
For real data: R, AI, AQ the reference address specified, are displayed online.

23.3.2 Data Move Functions

Block Move
The Block Move function copies a block of seven constants to a specified location. When the
Block Move function receives power flow, it copies the constant values into consecutive
locations beginning at the destination specified in output Q. The function passes power to
the right whenever power is received.

Figure 278

Instruction Set Reference 451

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameters of the Block Move Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the block move is performed.
IN1 to constant IN1 through IN7 contain seven constant values.
IN7
ok flow, none The OK output is energized whenever the function is enabled.
Q I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ Output Q contains the first element of the moved array. IN1 is
For Word data: SA, SB, moved to Q.
SC
For Real data: R, AI,
AQ

Revision 2.6 and later Micro-64 PLCs, Micro-20 PLCs and Micro-40 PLCs support both
DWORD and DINT data types for a Block Move. Other Micro PLC models do not support 32-
bit data types.

Example
In the example, when the enabling input represented by the nickname FST_SCN is ON, the
Block Move function copies the input constants into memory locations %R0010–16.

Figure 279

Instruction Set Reference 452

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.3.3 Data Move Functions

Block Clear
The Block Clear function fills a specified block of data with zeros. When the function receives
power flow, it writes zeros into the memory location beginning at the reference specified by
IN. When the data to be cleared is from discrete memory (%I, %Q, %M, %G, or %T), the
transition information associated with the references is also cleared.

The function passes power to the right whenever power is received.

Figure 280

Parameters of the Block Clear Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the array is cleared.
IN I, Q, M, T, SA, SB, SC, G, IN contains the first word of the array to be cleared. The
R, AI, AQ length of IN must be between 1 and 256 words.
Length The number of words that will be cleared. This is the length
of IN.
ok flow, none The OK output is energized whenever the function is
enabled.

Example
In the example, at power-up, 32 words of %Q memory (512 points) beginning at %Q0001
are filled with zeros. %Q is defined as WORD of length 32.

Figure 281

Instruction Set Reference 453

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.3.4 Data Move Functions

Shift Register
The Shift Register function shifts one or more data words or data bits from a reference
location into a specified area of memory. For example, one word might be shifted into an
area of memory with a specified length of five words. As a result of this shift, another word
of data would be shifted out of the end of the memory area.

The reset input (R) takes precedence over the function enable input. When the reset is
active, all references beginning at the shift register (ST) up to the length specified for LEN,
are filled with zeros.

If the function receives power flow and reset is not active, each bit or word of the shift
register is moved to the next highest reference. The last element in the shift register is
shifted into Q. The highest reference of the shift register element of IN is shifted into the
vacated element starting at ST. The contents of the shift register are accessible throughout
the program because they are overlaid on absolute locations in logic addressable memory.

Figure 282

Parameters of the Shift Register Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When enable is energized and R is not, the shift is performed.
Length 1 to 256 bits The length of the shift register in bits or words. Length is defined as the
or words. length of IN.
R flow When R is energized, the shift register located at ST is filled with zeros.
IN I, Q, M, T, S, G, IN contains the value to be shifted into the first bit or word of the shift
R, AI, AQ, register. For SHFR BIT, any discrete reference may be used; it does not
constant need to be byte aligned.
ST I, Q, M, T, SA, ST contains the first bit or word of the shift register. For SHFR BIT, any
SB, SC, G, R, discrete reference may be used; it does not need to be byte aligned.
AI, AQ
ok flow, none OK is energized whenever the function is enabled and R is not enabled.
Q I, Q, M, T, SA, Output Q contains the bit or word shifted out of the shift register. For
SB, SC, G, R, SHFR BIT, any discrete reference may be used; it does not need to be
AI, AQ byte aligned.

Instruction Set Reference 454

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

CAUTION
The use of overlapping input and output reference address ranges in multi-word functions
is not recommended; it may produce unexpected results.

Example 1:
In the example, the shift register operates on register memory locations %R0001 through
%R0100. (%R0001 is defined as type Word of length 100). When the reset reference CLEAR
is active, the Shift Register words are set to zero.

When the NXT_CYC reference is active and CLEAR is not active, the word from output status
table location %Q0033 is shifted into the Shift Register at %R0001. The word shifted out of
the Shift Register from %R0100 is stored in output %M0005.

Figure 283

Example 2:
In this example, the Shift Register operates on memory locations %M0001 through
%M0100. (%M0001 is defined as type Boolean of length 100). When the reset reference
CLEAR is active, the Shift Register function fills %M0001 through %M0100 with zeros.

When NXT_CYC is active and CLEAR is not, the Shift Register function shifts the data in
%M0001 to %M0100 down by one bit. The bit in %Q0033 is shifted into %M0001 while the
bit shifted out of %M0100 is written to %M0200.

Figure 284

Instruction Set Reference 455

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.3.5 Data Move Functions

Communication Request
The Communication Request (COMMREQ) function is use for specialized communications.
Many types of COMMREQs have been defined. The information below describes only the
basic format of the function.

When the function receives power flow, a command block of data is sent to the specified
module. After sending the COMMREQ, the program can either suspend execution, and wait
for a reply for a maximum waiting period specified in the command, or resume immediately.

Figure 285

Parameters of the COMMREQ Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is energized, the communications request is
performed.
IN R, AI, AQ IN contains the first word of the command block.
SYSID I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, SYSID contains the rack number (most significant byte) and slot
constant number (least significant byte) of the target device.
TASK R, AI, AQ, constant TASK contains the task ID of the process on the target device.
FT flow, none FT is energized if an error is detected processing the COMMREQ:
The specified target address is not present (SYSID).
The specified task is not valid for the device (TASK).
The data length is 0.
The device’s status pointer address (in the command block) does
not exist.

Instruction Set Reference 456

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Command Block for the COMMREQ Function

The Command Block starts at the reference specified in COMMREQ parameter IN. The
length of the Command Block depends on the amount of data sent to the device.

The Command Block contains the data to be communicated to the other device, plus
information related to the execution of the COMM REQ. The Command Block has the
following structure:

address Length (in words)

address + 1 Wait/No Wait Flag
address + 2 Status Pointer Memory
address + 3 Status Pointer Offset
address + 4 Idle Timeout Value
address + 5 Maximum Communication Time
address + 6 to Data Block
address + 133

Example
In the example, when enabling input %M0020 is ON, a Command Block starting at %R0016
is sent to communications task 1 in the device located at rack 1, slot 2 of the PLC. If an error
occurs processing the COMMREQ, %Q0100 is set.

Figure 286

Instruction Set Reference 457

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.4 Data Type Conversion Functions

The Data Type Conversion functions are used to change a data item from one number type
to another. Many programming instructions, such as math functions, must be used with
data of one type.

• Convert data to BDC-4

• Convert data to signed integer
• Convert data to double-precision integer
• Convert data to Real
• Convert data to Word
• Round a Real number toward zero (TRUN)

23.4.1 Data Type Conversion Functions

Convert Signed Integer Data to BCD-4
The Convert to BCD-4 function outputs the four-digit BCD equivalent of signed integer data.
The original data is not changed by this function. The output data can be used directly as
input for another program function.

Data can be converted to BCD format to drive BCD-encoded LED displays or presets to
external devices such as high-speed counters.

When the function receives power flow, it performs the conversion, making the result
available via output Q. The function passes power flow when power is received, unless the
specified conversion would result in a value that is outside the range 0 to 9999.

Figure 287

Parameters of the Convert to BCD-4 Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the conversion is performed.
IN I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, IN contains a reference for the integer value to be converted to
constant BCD-4.
OK flow, none The OK output is energized when the function is performed
without error.
Q I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ Output Q contains the BCD-4 form of the original value in IN.

Instruction Set Reference 458

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example
In the example, whenever input %I0002 is set and no errors exist, the integer at input
location %I0017 through %I0032 is converted to four BCD digits, and the result is stored in
memory locations %Q0033 through %Q0048. Coil %Q1432 is used to check for successful
conversion.

Figure 288

23.4.2 Data Type Conversion Functions

Convert to Signed Integer
The Convert to Signed Integer function outputs the integer equivalent of BCD-4 or Real
data. The original data is not changed by this function. The output data can be used as input
for another program function.

When the function receives power flow, it performs the conversion, making the result
available via output Q. The function always passes power flow when power is received,
unless the data is out of range.

Figure 289

Parameters of the Convert to Signed Integer Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the conversion is
performed.
IN For BCD-4: I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, IN contains a reference for the BCD-4, REAL, or
constant Constant value to be converted to integer.
For REAL: R, AI, AQ
ok flow, none The OK output is energized whenever enable is
energized, unless the data is out of range or NaN
(Not a Number).
Q For BCD-4: I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ Output Q contains the integer form of the original
For REAL: R, AI, AQ value in IN.

Instruction Set Reference 459

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example
In the example, whenever input %I0002 is set, the BCD-4 value in PARTS is converted to a
signed integer and passed to the Addition function, where it is added to the signed integer
value represented by the reference RUNNING. The sum is output by the Addition function
to the reference TOTAL.

Figure 290

23.4.3 Data Type Conversion Functions

Convert to Double Precision Signed Integer
The Convert to Double Precision Signed Integer function outputs the double precision
signed integer equivalent of real data. The original data is not changed by this function. The
output data can be used directly as input for another program function.

When the function receives power flow, it performs the conversion, making the result
available via output Q. The function always passes power flow when power is received,
unless the real value is out of range.

Figure 291

Note that loss of precision can occur when converting from Real-type data to Double-
Precision Integer, because Real data has 24 significant bits.

Parameters of the Convert to Double Precision Signed

Integer Function
Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the conversion is performed.
IN I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, Constant or reference for the value to be converted
constant
ok flow, none OK is energized whenever enable is energized, unless the real
value is out of range.
Q R, AI, AQ Reference that contains the double precision signed integer
form of the original value.

Instruction Set Reference 460

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example
In the example, whenever input %I0002 is set, the integer value at input location %I0017 is
converted to a double precision signed integer and the result is placed in location %R0001.
The output %Q1001 is set whenever the function executes successfully.

Figure 292

23.4.4 Data Type Conversion Functions

Convert to Real Data
The Convert to Real function outputs the real value equivalent of the input data. The original
data is not changed by this function. The output data can be used directly as input for
another program function.

When the function receives power flow, it performs the conversion, making the result
available via output Q. The function passes power flow when power is received, unless the
specified conversion would result in a value that is out of range.

Note that loss of precision can occur when converting from Double-Precision Integer to Real
data, because since the number of significant bits is reduced to 24.

Figure 293

Parameters of the Convert to Real Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the conversion is performed.
IN R, AI, AQ, constant IN contains a reference for the integer value to be converted to
For INT only: I, Q, M, Real.
T, G
ok flow, none OK is energized when the function is performed without error.
Q R, AI, AQ The Real form of the original value in IN.

Instruction Set Reference 461

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example
In the example, the integer value of input IN is 678. The result value placed in %T0016 is
678.000.

Figure 294

23.4.5 Data Type Conversion Functions

Convert Real Data to Word Data
The Convert to Word function outputs the Word equivalent of Real data. The original data
is not changed by this function.

When the function receives power flow, it performs the conversion, making the result
available via output Q. The function passes power flow when power is received, unless the
specified conversion would result in a value that is outside the range 0 to FFFFh.

Figure 295

Parameters of the Convert to Word Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the conversion is performed.
IN R, AI, AQ, constant IN contains a reference for the value to be converted to Word
type.
ok flow, none OK is energized when the function is performed without error.
Q I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ Contains the unsigned integer form of the original value in IN.

Example

Figure 296

Instruction Set Reference 462

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.4.6 Data Type Conversion Functions

Truncate Real Number
The Truncate function copies a Real number and rounds the copied number down to an
integer or double precision integer. The original data is not changed by this function. The
output data can be used directly as input for another program function.

When the function receives power flow, it performs the conversion, making the result
available via output Q. The function passes power flow when power is received, unless the
specified conversion would result in a value that is out of range or unless IN is not a number.

Figure 297

Parameters of the Truncate Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the conversion is performed.
IN R, AI, AQ, constant IN contains a reference for the real value to be truncated.
ok flow, none The OK output is energized when the function is performed
without error, unless the value is out of range or IN is NaN.
Q R, AI, AQ Q contains the truncated INT or DINT value of the original
For integer only: I, Q, M, value in IN.
T, G

Example
In the example, the displayed constant is truncated, and the integer result 562 is placed in
%T0001.

Figure 298

Instruction Set Reference 463

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.5 Math and Numerical Functions

This section describes the Math and Numerical functions of the Instruction Set:

• Standard Math Functions: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division

• Modulo Division
• Scaling Function
• Square Root
• Trigonometric functions
• Logarithmic/Exponential functions
• Convert to Degrees
• Convert to Radians

23.5.1 Converting Data for the Math and Numerical Functions

The program may need to include logic to convert data to a different type before using a
Math or Numerical function. The description of each function includes information about
appropriate data types. The section Data Type Conversion Functions explains how to
convert data to a different type.

23.5.2 Math and Numerical Functions

Add, Subtract, Multiply, Divide
The standard math functions are Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, and Division. The
Division function rounds down; it does not round to the closest integer. (For example, 24
DIV 5 = 4.)

When a math function receives power flow, the appropriate operation is performed on input
parameters IN1 and IN2. Parameters IN1, IN2, and the output Q must be the same data
type.

Figure 299

The standard math functions pass power if there is no math overflow. If an overflow occurs,
the result is the largest value with the proper sign and no power flow.

Instruction Set Reference 464

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameters of the Standard Math Functions

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the operation is performed.
IN1 All data types: R, AI, AQ, IN1 contains a constant or reference for the first value used
constant in the operation. (IN1 is on the left side of the
INT data type only: I, Q, mathematical equation, as in IN1 + IN2).
M, T, G Range for constants in double-precision signed integer
operations is minimum/maximum DINT.
IN2 All data types: R, AI, AQ, IN2 contains a constant or reference for the second value
constant used in the operation. (IN2 is on the right side of the
INT data type only: I, Q, mathematical equation, as in IN1 + IN2). Range for
M, T, G constants in double-precision signed integer operations is
minimum/maximum DINT.
ok flow, none The OK output is energized when the function is performed
without overflow, unless an invalid operation occurs.
Q All data types: R, AI, AQ Output Q contains the result of the operation.
INT only: I, Q, M, T, G

Data Types for Standard Math Functions

Standard math functions operate on these types of data:

INT Signed integer

DINT Double precision signed integer
REAL Floating Point

The input and output parameter data types must be the same (16 bits or 32 bits).

23.5.3 Math and Numerical Functions

Add, Subtract, Multiply, Divide
Avoiding Overflows
Be careful to avoid overflows when using Multiplication and Division functions.

If you have to convert Integer to Double-Precision Integer values, remember that the CPU
uses standard 2’s complement with the sign extended to the highest bit of the second word.
You must check the sign of the low 16-bit word and extend it into the second 16 bit word. If
the most significant bit in a 16-bit INT word is 0 (positive), move a 0 to the second word. If
the most significant bit in a 16-bit word is –1 (negative), move a –1 or hex 0FFFFh to the
second word.

Converting from Double-Precision Integer to Integer data is easier, because the low 16-bit
word (first register) is the integer portion of a Double-Precision Integer 32-bit word. The
upper 16 bits or second word should be either a 0 (positive) or –1 (negative) value or the
Double-Precision Integer number will be too big to convert to 16 bits.

Instruction Set Reference 465

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example
This example uses the Addition and Subtraction functions to keep track of the number of
parts in a temporary storage area. Each time a part enters the storage area, power flows
through relay %I0004 to a positive transition coil with reference %M0001. Relay %M0001
then enables the Addition function, adding the (constant) value 1 to the current total value
in %R0201.

Each time a part leaves the storage area, power flows through relay %I0005 to a positive
transition coil with reference %M0002. Relay %M0002 then enables the Subtraction
function, subtracting the (constant) value 1 from the current total value in %R0201.

Figure 300

23.5.4 Math and Numerical Functions

Modulo Division
The Modulo Division function divides one value by another of the same data type, to obtain
the remainder. The sign of the result is always the same as the sign of input parameter IN1.
The Modulo function operates on these types of data:

INT Signed integer

DINT Double precision signed integer

When the function receives power flow, it divides input IN1 by input IN2. These parameters
must be the same data type. Output Q is calculated using the formula:

Q = IN1-((IN1 DIV I2) * I2)

The division produces an integer number. Q is the same data type as inputs IN1 and IN2. OK
is always ON when the function receives power flow, unless there is an attempt to divide by
zero. In that case, it is set OFF.

Figure 301

Instruction Set Reference 466

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameters of the Modulo Division Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the operation is performed.
IN1 All data types: R, AI, AQ, IN1 contains a constant or reference for the value to be
constant divided by IN2. Range for constants in double precision
INT data type only: I, Q, signed integer operations is minimum/maximum DINT.
M, T, G
IN2 All data types: R, AI, AQ, IN2 contains a constant or reference for the value to be
constant divided into IN1. Range for constants in double precision
INT data type only: I, Q, signed integer operations is minimum/maximum DINT.
M, T, G
ok flow, none The OK output is energized when the function is performed
without overflow.
Q All data types: R, AI, AQ Output Q contains the result of dividing IN1 by IN2 to
INT data type only: I, Q, obtain a remainder.
M, T, G

Example
In the example, the remainder of the integer division of BOXES into PALLETS is placed into
NT_FULL whenever %I0001 is ON.

Figure 302

23.5.5 Math and Numerical Functions Scaling

The Scaling function scales an input parameter and places the result in an output location.
For integer-type data, all parameters must be integer-based (signed). For word-type data,
all parameters must be word-based (unsigned).

Figure 303

Instruction Set Reference 467

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameters of the Scaling Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the operation is performed.
IHI R ,AI, AQ, IHI and ILO contain a constant or reference for the upper and lower limits
ILO constant of the unscaled data. These limits, together with the values for OHI and
OLO, are used to calculate the scaling factor that will be applied to the input
value IN.
OHI R ,AI, AQ, OHI and OLO contain a constant or reference for the upper and lower limits
OLO constant of the scaled data.
IN R, AI, AQ, IN contains a constant or reference for the actual value to be scaled.
constant
ok flow, none The OK output is energized when the function is performed without
overflow.
OUT R, AI, AQ Output OUT contains the scaled equivalent of the input value.

Example
In the example, the registers %R0120 through %R0123 are used to store the high and low
scaling values. The input value to be scaled is analog input %AI0017. The scaled output data
is used to control analog output %AQ0017. The scaling is performed whenever %I0001 is
ON.

Figure 304

Instruction Set Reference 468

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.5.6 Math and Numerical Functions Square Root

The Square Root function finds the square root of a value. When the function receives power
flow, the value of output Q is set to the integer portion of the square root of the input IN.
The output Q must be the same data type as IN.

The Square Root function operates on these types of data:

INT Signed integer

DINT Double precision signed integer
REAL Floating Point

OK is set ON if the function is performed without overflow, unless one of these invalid REAL
operations occurs:

• IN < 0
• IN is NaN (Not a Number)
Otherwise, OK is set OFF.

Figure 305

Parameters of the Square Root Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the operation is
performed.
IN All data types: R, AI, AQ, constant A constant or reference for the value whose square
INT data type only: I, Q, M, T, G root is to be calculated. If IN is less than zero, the
function will not pass power flow. Range for
constants is minimum/maximum DINT for double
precision signed integer operations.
ok flow, none The OK output is energized when the function is
performed without overflow, unless an invalid
operation occurs.
Q All data types: R, AI, AQ Output Q contains the square root of IN.
INT data type only: I, Q, M, T, G

Instruction Set Reference 469

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example
In the example, the square root of the integer number located at %AI001 is placed into the
result located at %R0003 whenever %I0001 is ON.

Figure 306

23.5.7 Math and Numerical Functions Trigonometric Functions

There are six Trigonometric functions: Sine, Cosine, Tangent, Inverse Sine, Inverse Cosine,
and Inverse Tangent.

Sine, Cosine, and Tangent

When a Sine, Cosine, or Tangent function receives power flow, it operates on IN, whose units
are radians, and stores the result in output Q. Both IN and Q are floating-point values.

Figure 307

The Sine, Cosine, and Tangent functions accept a broad range of input values, where

–263 < IN <+263, (263 = 9.22x1018)

Instruction Set Reference 470

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Inverse Sine, Cosine, and Tangent

When an Inverse Sine, Cosine, or Tangent function receives power flow, it operates on IN
and stores the result in output Q, whose units are radians. Both IN and Q are floating-point
values.

The Inverse Sine and Cosine functions accept a narrow range of input values, where

-1 < IN < 1.

Given a valid value for the IN parameter, the Inverse Sine Real function produces a result Q
such that:

ASIN(IN) = -π/2 ≤ Q ≤ π/2.

The Inverse Cosine Real function produces a result Q such that:

ACOS(IN) = 0 ≤ Q ≤ π.

The Inverse Tangent function accepts the broadest range of input values, where

-∞ ≤ IN ≤ +∞.

Given a valid value for the IN parameter, the Inverse Tangent Real function produces a
result Q such that:

ATAN(IN) = -π/2 ≤ Q ≤ π/2.

Parameters of the Trigonometric Functions

Input/Output Choices Description
enable flow When the function is enabled, the operation is performed.
IN R, AI, AQ, IN contains the constant or reference real value to be operated
constant on.
ok flow, none OK is energized when the function is performed without
overflow, unless an invalid operation occurs and/or IN is NaN.
Q R, AI, AQ Output Q contains the trigonometric value of IN.

Example
In the example, the Cosine of the value in %R0001 is placed in %R0033.

Figure 308

Instruction Set Reference 471

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.5.8 Math and Numerical Functions Logarithmic /

Exponential Functions
When a Logarithmic or Exponential function receives power flow, it performs the
appropriate logarithmic/exponential operation on the Real value in input IN and places the
result in output Q.

• For the Base 10 Logarithm (LOG) function, the base 10 logarithm of IN is placed in
Q.
• For the Natural Logarithm (LN) function, the natural logarithm of IN is placed in Q.
• For the Power of E (EXP) function, e is raised to the power specified by IN and the
result is placed in Q.
• For the Power of X (EXPT) function, the value of input IN1 is raised to the power
specified by the value IN2 and the result is placed in output Q. (The EXPT function
has three input parameters and two output parameters.)
The OK output receives power flow unless the input is NaN (Not a Number) or is negative.

Figure 309

Parameters of the Logarithmic/Exponential Functions

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the operation is performed.
IN or R, AI, AQ, For EXP, LOG, and LN, IN contains the real value to be operated on.
IN1, IN2 constant The EXPT function has two inputs, IN1 and IN2. For EXPT, IN1 is the
base value and IN2 is the exponent.
ok flow, none OK is energized when the function is performed without overflow,
unless an invalid operation occurs and/or IN is NaN or is negative.
Q R, AI, AQ Output Q contains the logarithmic/exponential value of IN.

Example of the EXPT Function

In the example, the value of %AI001 is raised to the power of 2.5 and the result is placed in
%R0001.

Figure 310

Instruction Set Reference 472

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.5.9 Math and Numerical Functions Radian Conversion

Functions
When Degree/Radian Conversion function receives power flow, the appropriate conversion
(radians to degrees or degrees to radians) is performed on the Real value in input IN and the
result is placed in output Q.

The OK output will receive power flow unless IN is NaN (Not a Number).

Figure 311

Parameters of the Radian Conversion Function

Input/Output Choices Description

enable flow When the function is enabled, the operation is performed.
IN R, AI, AQ, constant IN contains the real value to be operated on.
ok flow, none The OK output is energized when the function is
performed without overflow, unless IN is NaN.
Q R, AI, AQ Output Q contains the converted value of IN.

Example
In the example, +1500 is converted to DEG and is placed in %R0001.

Figure 312

Instruction Set Reference 473

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.6 Relational Functions

The Relational functions can be used to compare two numbers and to determine whether a
number lies within a specified range.

• Equal Test two numbers for equality

• Not Equal Test two numbers for non-equality

• Greater Than Test whether one number is greater than another

• Greater Than or Equal Test whether one number is greater than or equal to
another

• Less Than Test whether one number is less than another

• Less Than or Equal Test whether one number is less than or equal to another

• Range Tests whether one number lies between two other

numbers

When the function receives power flow, it compares input IN1 to input IN2. These
parameters must be the same data type.

Figure 313

If inputs IN1 and IN2 match the specified relational condition, output Q receives power
flow and is set ON (1); otherwise, it is set OFF (0).

23.6.1 Data Types for Relational Functions

Relational functions operate on these types of data:

INT Signed integer

DINT Double precision signed integer
REAL Floating Point

The %S0020 bit is set ON when a relational function using Real data executes successfully.
It is cleared when either input is NaN (Not a Number).

Instruction Set Reference 474

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.6.2 Relational Functions Equal, Not Equal, Less Than,

Less/Equal, Greater Than, Greater/Equal
Parameters for the Relational Functions
Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the operation is performed.
IN1 R, AI, AQ, constant IN1 contains a constant or reference for the first value to be
For INT data only: I, Q, compared. IN1 must be a valid number. Constants must be
M, T, G integers for double precision signed integer operations.
IN1 is on the left side of the relational equation, as in IN1 < IN2.
IN2 R, AI, AQ, constant IN2 contains a constant or reference for the second value to be
For INT data only: I, Q, compared. IN2 must be a valid number. Constants must be
M, T, G integers for double precision signed integer operations.
IN2 is on the right side of the relational equation, as in IN1 <
IN2.
Q flow, none Output Q is energized when IN1 and IN2 match the specified
relation.

Example
In the example, two double precision signed integers are tested for equality. When the relay
%I0001 passes power flow to the LE (Less or Equal) function, the value presently in the
reference nicknamed PWR_MDE is compared to the value presently in the reference
BIN_FUL. If the value in PWR_MDE is less than or equal to the value in BIN_FUL, coil %Q0002
is turned on.

Figure 314

Instruction Set Reference 475

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.6.3 Relational Functions Range

The Range function determines if a value is within the range of two numbers.

Data Types for the Range Function

The Range function operates on these types of data:

INT Signed integer (default).

DINT Double precision signed integer.
WORD Word data type.

When the Range function is enabled, it compares the value of input IN against the range
specified by limits L1 and L2. Either L1 or L2 can be the high or low limit. When the value is
within the range specified by L1 and L2, inclusive, output parameter Q is set ON (1).
Otherwise, Q is set OFF (0).

Figure 315

Parameters for the Range Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the operation is performed.
L1 R, AI, AQ, constant L1 contains the start point of the range.
INT and WORD only: I, Q, Constants must be integer values for double precision
M, T, G signed integer operations.
L2 R, AI, AQ, constant L2 contains the end point of the range.
INT and WORD only: I, Q, Constants must be integer values for double precision
M, T, G signed integer operations.
IN R, AI, AQ IN contains the value to be compared against the range
INT and WORD only: I, Q, specified by L1 and L2.
M, T, G
Q flow, none Output Q is energized when the value in IN is within the
range specified by L1 and L2, inclusive.

Instruction Set Reference 476

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example
In this example, when the Range function receives power flow from relay %I0001, the
function determines whether the value in %AI001 is within the range 0 to 100.

%R0001 contains the value 100. %R2 contains the value 0.

Figure 316

Output coil %Q0001 is On only if the value presently in %AI0001 is within the range 0 to 100.

IN Value %AI001 Q State %Q0001

<0 OFF
0 — 100 ON
> 100 OFF

23.7 Relay Functions

Normally Open Contact –| |–

Normally Closed Contact –|/|–

Normally Open Coil –( )–

Retentive SET Coil –(SM)–

Retentive RESET Coil –(RM)–

Negated Retentive Coil –(/M)–

Negated Coil –(/)–

Retentive Coil –(M)–

SET Coil –(S)–

RESET Coil –(R)–

Positive Transition Coil –()–

Negative Transition Coil –()–

Vertical Link vert |

Horizontal Link horz –

Continuation Coil –––<+>

Continuation Contact <+>–––

Instruction Set Reference 477

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Each relay contact and coil has one input and one output. Together, they provide logic
flow through the contact or coil.

Input→ ----| |----  Output

23.7.1 Relay Functions Normally open, Normally-closed,

Continuation Contacts
A contact is used to monitor the state of a reference. Whether the contact passes power
flow depends on the state or status of the reference being monitored and on the contact
type. A reference is ON if its state is 1; it is OFF if its state is 0.

Type of Contact Display Contact Passes Power to Right:

Normally Open -| |- When reference is ON.
Normally Closed -|/|- When reference is OFF.
Continuation Contact <+>--- If the preceding continuation coil is set ON.

Normally Open Contact -| |-

A normally open contact acts as a switch that passes power flow if the associated reference
is ON (1).

Normally Closed Contact -|/|-

A normally closed contact acts as a switch that passes power flow if the associated
reference is OFF (0).

Example
The example shows a rung with 10 elements having nicknames from E1 to E10. Coil E10 is
ON when reference E1, E2, E5, E6, and E9 are ON and references E3, E4, E7, and E8 are OFF.

Figure 317

Continuation Coils and Contacts

Continuation coils and continuation contacts are used to continue relay ladder rung logic
beyond the last column. The state of the last executed continuation coil is the flow state
used on the next executed continuation contact. If the flow of logic does not execute a
continuation coil before it executes a continuation contact, the state of the contact is no
flow. There can be only one continuation coil and contact per rung; the continuation contact
must be in column 1, and the continuation coil must be in the last column.

Instruction Set Reference 478

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.7.2 Relay Functions Coils

Coils are used to control discrete references. Conditional logic must be used to control the
flow of power to a coil. Coils cause action directly; they do not pass power flow to the right.
If additional logic in the program should be executed as a result of the coil condition, an
internal reference for the coil, or a continuation coil/contact combination may be used.

Coils are always located at the rightmost position of a line of logic:

Figure 318

References and Coil Checking

When the level of coil checking is set to “single”, you can use a specific %M or %Q reference
with only one Coil, but you can use it with one Set Coil and one Reset Coil simultaneously.
When the level of coil checking is “warn multiple” or “multiple”, each reference can be used
with multiple Coils, Set Coils, and Reset Coils. With multiple usage, a reference could be
turned On by either a Set Coil or a normal Coil and could be turned Off by a Reset Coil or by
a normal Coil.

Power Flow and Retentiveness

The following table summarizes how power flow to different types of coils affects their
reference. The states of retentive coils are saved when power is cycled or when the PLC goes
from Stop to Run mode. The states of non-retentive coils are set to zero when power is
cycled, or the PLC goes from Stop to Run mode.

Type of Coil Symbol Power to Coil Result

Normally Open -( )- ON Sets reference ON, non-retentive.
OFF Sets reference OFF, non-retentive.
Negated -(/)- ON Sets reference OFF, non-retentive.
OFF Sets reference ON, non-retentive.
Retentive -(M)- ON Sets reference ON, retentive.
OFF Sets reference OFF, retentive.
Negated -(/M)- ON Sets reference OFF, retentive.
Retentive OFF Sets reference ON, retentive.
Positive -(P)- OFF to ON If power flow into the coil was OFF the previous
Transition sweep and is On this sweep, sets the coil ON.
Negative -(N)- ON to OFF If power flow into the coil was ON the previous
Transition sweep and is OFF this sweep, sets the coil ON.
SET -(S)- ON to OFF Sets reference ON until reset OFF by ( R ), non-
retentive.
Does not change the coil state, non-retentive.

Instruction Set Reference 479

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Type of Coil Symbol Power to Coil Result

RESET -(R)- ON to OFF Sets reference OFF until set ON by (S), non-
retentive.
Does not change the coil state, non-retentive.
Retentive SET -(SM)- ON to OFF Sets reference ON until reset OFF by (RM),
retentive.
Does not change the coil state.
Retentive -(RM)- ON to OFF Sets reference OFF until set ON by (SM)-,
RESET retentive.
Does not change the coil state.
Continuation ----<+> ON Sets next continuation contact ON.
Coil OFF Sets next continuation contact OFF.

A coil sets a discrete reference ON while it receives power flow. It is non-retentive; therefore,
it cannot be used with system status references (%SA, %SB, %SC, or %G).

Example
In the example, coil E3 is ON when reference E1 is ON and reference E2 is OFF.

Figure 319

Negated Coil
A negated coil sets a discrete reference ON when it does not receive power flow. It is not
retentive, so it cannot be used with system status references (%SA, %SB, %SC, or %G).

Example
In the example, coil E3 is ON when reference E1 is OFF.

Figure 320

Retentive Coil
Like a normally open coil, the retentive coil sets a discrete reference ON while it receives
power flow. The state of the retentive coil is retained across power failure. Therefore, it
cannot be used with references from strictly non-retentive memory (%T).

Instruction Set Reference 480

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Negated Retentive Coil

The negated retentive coil sets a discrete reference ON when it does not receive power flow.
The state of the negated retentive coil is retained across power failure. Therefore, it cannot
be used with references from strictly non-retentive memory (%T).

Positive Transition Coil

If the reference associated with a positive transition coil was OFF , when the coil receives
power flow it is set to ON until the next time the coil is executed. (If the rung containing the
coil is skipped on subsequent sweeps, it will remain ON.) This coil can be used as a one-shot.

Transitional coils can be used with references from either retentive or non-retentive
memory (%Q, %M, %T, %G, %SA, %SB, or %SC).

Negative Transition Coil

If the reference associated with this coil is OFF, when the coil stops receiving power flow the
reference is set to ON until the next time the coil is executed.

Transitional coils can be used with references from either retentive or non-retentive
memory (%Q, %M, %T, %G, %SA, %SB, or %SC).

Example
In the example, when reference E1 goes from OFF to ON, coils E2 and E3 receive power flow,
turning E2 ON for one logic sweep. When E2 goes from ON to OFF, power flow is removed
from E2 and E3, turning coil E3 ON for one sweep.

Figure 321

SET Coil
SET and RESET are non­retentive coils that can be used to keep (“latch”) the state of a
reference either ON or OFF. When a SET coil receives power flow, its reference stays ON
(whether or not the coil itself receives power flow) until the reference is reset by another
coil.

SET coils write an undefined result to the transition bit for the given reference.

RESET Coil
The RESET coil sets a discrete reference OFF if the coil receives power flow. The reference
remains OFF until the reference is set by another coil. The last-solved SET coil or RESET coil
of a pair takes precedence.

RESET coils write an undefined result to the transition bit for the given reference.

Instruction Set Reference 481

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example
In the example, the coil represented by E1 is turned ON whenever reference E2 or E6 is ON.
The coil represented by E1 is turned OFF whenever reference E5 or E3 is ON.

Figure 322

Retentive SET Coil

Retentive SET and RESET coils are similar to SET and RESET coils, but they are retained across
power failure or when the PLC transitions from to Run mode. A retentive SET coil sets a
discrete reference ON if the coil receives power flow. The reference remains ON until reset
by a retentive RESET coil.

Retentive SET coils write an undefined result to the transition bit for the given reference.

Retentive RESET Coil

This coil sets a discrete reference OFF if it receives power flow. The reference remains OFF
until set by a retentive SET coil. The state of this coil is retained across power failure or when
the PLC transitions from Stop to Run mode.

Retentive RESET coils write an undefined result to the transition bit for the given reference.

Instruction Set Reference 482

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.8 Table Functions

The Table functions are used to:

• Copy array data: ARRAY MOVE

• Search for values in an array
The maximum length allowed for these functions is 32,767 for any type.

• Data Types for the Table Functions

Table functions operate on these types of data:

INT Signed integer

DINT Double precision signed integer
BIT 16
Bit data type
BYTE Byte data type
WORD Word data type

23.8.1 Table Functions Array Move

The Array Move function copies a specified number of elements from a source array to a
destination array. When the function receives power flow, it copies the number of elements
specified from the input array, starting at the indexed location. The function then writes the
copied elements to the output array starting with the indexed location.

For bit data, when word-oriented memory is selected for the parameters of the source array
and/or destination array starting address, the least significant bit of the specified word is the
first bit of the array.

The indices in an Array Move instruction are 1-based. In using an Array Move, no element
outside either the source or destination arrays (as specified by their starting address and
length) may be referenced.

The OK output receives power flow unless one of the following occurs:

• Enable is OFF.
• (N + SNX – 1) is greater than (length).
• (N + DNX – 1) is greater than (length).

Figure 323

16
Applies to Array Move only.

Instruction Set Reference 483

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameters for the Array Move Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the operation is
performed.
SR For all: R, AI, AQ SR contains the starting address of the source array.
For INT, BIT, BYTE, WORD: I, Q, For ARRAY_MOVE_ BIT, any reference may be used;
M, T, G, it does not need to be byte aligned.
For BIT, BYTE, WORD: SA, SB, SC
SNX I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, constant SNX contains the index of the source array.
DNX I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, constant DNX contains the index of the destination array.
N I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, constant N provides a count indicator.
ok flow, none OK is energized whenever enable is energized.
DS For all: SA, SB, SC, R, AI, AQ The starting address of the destination array. For
For INT, BIT, BYTE, WORD: I, Q, ARRAY_MOVE_ BIT, any reference may be used; it
M, T, G does not need to be byte aligned.
length The number of elements starting at SR and DS that
make up each array. It is defined as the length of
SR+DS.

Example 1:
In this example, if %R100=3 then %R0003 - %R0007 of the array %R0001 - %R0016 is read
and is written into %R0104 - %R0108 of the array %R0100 - %R0115. (%R001 and %R0100
are declared as type WORD of length 16.)

Figure 324

Instruction Set Reference 484

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example 2:
Using bit memory for SR and DS, %M0011 - %M0017 of the array %M0009 - %M0024 is read
and then written to %Q0026 - %Q0032 of the array %Q0022 - %Q0037. (%M009 and %Q0022
are declared as type BOOL of length 16).

Figure 325

Example 3:
Using word memory, for SR and DS, the third least significant bit of %R0001 through the
second least significant bit of %R0002 of the array containing all 16 bits of %R0001 and four
bits of %R0002 is read and then written into the fifth least significant bit of %R0100 through
the fourth least significant bit of %R0101 of the array containing all 16 bits of %R0100 and
four bits of %R0101. 0001 and %R0100 are declared as type BOOL of length 20).

Figure 326

Instruction Set Reference 485

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.8.2 Table Functions Search for Array Values

Use the Search functions listed below to search for values in an array.

• Search Equal • Equal to a specified value.

• Search Not Equal • Not equal to a specified value.

• Search Greater Than • Greater than a specified value.

• Search Greater Than or Equal • Greater than or equal to a specified value.

• Search Less Than • Less than a specified value.

• Search Less Than or Equal • Less than or equal to a specified value.

When the Search function receives power, it searches the specified array. Searching begins
at the starting address (AR) plus the index value (NX).

Figure 327

The search continues until the array element of the search object (IN) is found or until the
end of the array is reached. If an array element is found, the Found Indication (FD) is set ON
and the Output Index (output NX) is set to the relative position of this element within the
array. If no array element is found before the end of the array is reached, the Found
Indication (FD) is set OFF and the Output Index (output NX) is set to zero.

The valid values for input NX are 0 to (length 1). NX should be set to zero to begin searching
at the first element. This value increments by one at the time of execution. The values of
output NX are 1 to (length). If the value of input NX is out-of-range, (i.e. < 0 or > length), its
value is set to the default value of zero.

Instruction Set Reference 486

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameters of the Search Functions

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is enabled, the search is performed.
AR For all: R, AI, AQ Contains the starting address of the array.
For INT, BYTE, WORD: I, Q,
M, T, G
For BYTE, WORD: S
Input NX I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, Contains the zero-based index into the array at which
constant to begin the search.
IN For all: R, AI, AQ, constant IN contains the object of the search.
For INT, BYTE, WORD: I, Q,
M, T, G
For BYTE, WORD: S
Output NX I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ Holds the one-based position within the array of the
search target.
FD flow, none FD indicates that an array element has been found and
the function was successful.
length 1 to 32,767 bytes or words. The number of elements starting at AR that make up
the array to be searched.

Example 1:
The array AR is defined as memory addresses %R0001 - %R0005. When EN is ON, the portion
of the array between %R0004 and %R0005 is searched for an element whose value is equal
to IN. If %R0001 = 7, %R0002 = 9, %R0003 = 6, %R0004 = 7, %R0005 = 7, and %R0100 = 7,
then the search will begin at %R0004 and conclude at %R0004 when FD is set ON and a 4 is
written to %R0101.

Figure 328

Instruction Set Reference 487

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example 2:
Array AR is defined as memory addresses %AI001 - %AI016. The values of the array elements
are 100, 20, 0, 5, 90, 200, 0, 79, 102, 80, 24, 34, 987, 8, 0, and 500. Initially, %AQ001 is 5.
When EN is ON, each sweep will search the array looking for a match to the IN value of 0.
The first sweep will start searching at %AI006 and find a match at %AI007, so FD is ON and
%AQ001 is 7. The second sweep will start searching at %AI008 and find a match at %AI015,
so FD remains ON and %AQ001 is 15. The next sweep will start at %AI016. Since the end of
the array is reached without a match, FD is set OFF and %AQ001 is set to zero. The next
sweep will start searching at the beginning of the array.

Figure 329

23.9 Timer and Counter Functions

This section describes the timing and counting functions of the Instruction Set. The data
associated with these functions is retentive through power cycles.

• OnDelay Stopwatch Timer

• Off-Delay Timer
• On-Delay Timer
• Up Counter
• Down Counter

23.9.1 Time-Tick Contacts

In addition to the Timer functions of the Instruction Set, the VersaMax PLC has four time-tick
contacts. These contacts can be used to provide regular pulses of power flow to other
program functions. The four time-tick contacts have time durations of 0.01 second, 0.1
second, 1.0 second, and 1 minute.

The state of these contacts does not change during the execution of the sweep. These
contacts provide a pulse having an equal on and off time duration.

The contacts are referenced as T_10MS (0.01 second), T_100MS (0.1 second), T_SEC (1.0
second), and T_MIN (1 minute).

The following timing diagram represents the on/off time duration of these contacts.

Instruction Set Reference 488

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 330

These time-tick contacts represent specific locations in %S memory.

23.9.2 Function Block Data Required for Timers and Counters

Each timer or counter uses three words (registers) of %R memory to store the following
information:

current value (CV) word 1

preset value (PV) word 2
control word word 3

When you enter a timer or counter, you must enter a beginning address for these three
words (registers). Do not use consecutive registers for the 3-word timer/counter blocks.
Timers and counters will not work if you place the current value of a block on top of the
preset for the previous block.

Figure 331

The control word stores the state of the Boolean inputs and outputs of its associated
function block in the following format:

Figure 332

Bits 0 through 11 are used for timer accuracy; not for counters.

If the Preset Value (PV) is not a constant, PV is normally set to a different location than the
second word. Some applications use the second word address for the PV, such as using
%R0102 when the bottom data block starts at %R0101. It is then possible to change the
Preset Value while the timer or counter is running. The first (CV) and third (Control) words
can be read but should not be written, or the function will not work.
Instruction Set Reference 489
User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.9.3 Timer and Counter Functions On Delay Stopwatch Timer

A retentive On-Delay Stopwatch Timer (ONDTR) increments while it receives power flow
and holds its value when power flow stops. Time may be counted in tenths (0.1),
hundredths (0.01), or thousandths (0.001) of a second. The range is 0 to +32,767-time
units. The state of this timer is retentive on power failure; no automatic initialization occurs
at power-up.

When this function first receives power flow, it starts accumulating time (current value).
When this timer is encountered in the ladder logic, its current value is updated.

Figure 333

When the current value equals or exceeds the preset value PV, output Q is energized. As
long as the timer continues to receive power flow, it continues accumulating until the
maximum value is reached. Once the maximum value is reached, it is retained, and output
Q remains energized regardless of the state of the enable input.

If multiple occurrences of the same timer with the same reference address are enabled
during a CPU sweep, the current values of the timers will be the same.

Parameters of the On-Delay Stopwatch Timer Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
address R The function uses three consecutive words (registers) of %R
memory to store the following:
• Current value (CV) = word 1.
• Preset value (PV) = word 2.
• Control word = word 3.
Do not use this address with other instructions.
Careful: Overlapping references cause erratic timer
operation.
enable flow When enable receives power flow, the timer’s current value
increments.
R flow When R receives power flow, it resets the current value to
zero.
PV I ,Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, The Preset Value, which is used when the timer is enabled or
constant, none reset.
Q flow, none Output Q is energized when the current value of the timer is
greater than or equal to the preset value.

Instruction Set Reference 490

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Input/ Choices Description

Output
time tenths (0.1), hundredths Time increment for the low bit of the PV preset and CV
(0.01), or thousandths current value.
(0.001) of seconds

Operation of the On-Delay Timer Function

Figure 334

A. ENABLE goes high; timer starts accumulating

B. Current value reaches preset value PV; Q goes high
C. RESET goes high; Q goes low, accumulated time is reset (CV=0)
D. RESET goes low; timer then starts accumulating again
E. ENABLE goes low; timer stops accumulating. Whatever time has been
accumulated remains.
F. ENABLE goes high again; timer starts accumulating time from the earlier
accumulated value.
G. Current value becomes equal to preset value PV; Q goes high. Timer continues to
accumulate time until ENABLE goes low, RESET goes high or current value becomes
equal to the maximum time
H. ENABLE goes low; timer stops accumulating time.
When power flow to the timer stops, the current value stops incrementing and is retained.
Output Q, if energized, will remain energized. When the function receives power flow again,
the current value again increments, beginning at the retained value. When reset R receives
power flow, the current value is set back to zero and output Q is de-energized unless PV
equals zero.

Instruction Set Reference 491

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example
In the example, a retentive On-Delay Timer is used to create a signal (%Q0011) that turns on
8.0 seconds after %Q0010 turns on, and turns off when %Q0010 turns off.

Figure 335

23.9.4 Timer and Counter Functions On Delay Timer

The On-Delay Timer (TMR) increments while it receives power flow and resets to zero when
power flow stops. Time may be counted in tenths of a second (the default selection),
hundredths of a second, or thousandths of a second. The range is 0 to +32,767-time units.
The state of this timer is retentive on power failure; no automatic initialization occurs at
power-up.

Figure 336

When the On-Delay Timer function receives power flow, the timer starts accumulating time
(current value). The current value is updated when it is encountered in the logic to reflect
the total elapsed time the timer has been enabled since it was last reset.

If multiple occurrences of the same timer with the same reference address are enabled
during a CPU sweep, the current values of the timers will be the same.

This update occurs as long as the enabling logic remains ON. When the current value equals
or exceeds the preset value PV, the function begins passing power flow to the right. The
timer continues accumulating time until the maximum value is reached. When the enabling
parameter transitions from ON to OFF, the timer stops accumulating time, and the current
value is reset to zero.

Instruction Set Reference 492

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameters for the On Delay Timer Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
address R The function uses three consecutive words (registers) of
%R memory to store the following:
• Current value (CV) = word 1.
• Preset value (PV) = word 2.
• Control word = word 3.
Do not use this address with other instructions.
Careful: Overlapping references cause erratic operation of
the timer.
enable flow When enable receives power flow, the timer’s current
value is incremented. When the TMR is not enabled, the
current value is reset to zero and Q is turned off.
PV I Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, PV is the value to copy into the timer’s preset value when
constant, none the timer is enabled or reset.
Q flow, none Output Q is energized when TMR is enabled and the
current value is greater than or equal to the preset value.
time tenths (0.1), hundredths Time increment for the low bit of the PV preset and CV
(0.01), or thousandths current value.
(0.001) of seconds

Operation of the On-Delay Timer Function

Figure 337

A. ENABLE goes high; timer begins accumulating time.

B. Current value reaches preset value PV; Q goes high, and timer continues
accumulating time.

C. ENABLE goes low; Q goes low; timer stops accumulating time and current time is
cleared.

D. ENABLE goes high; timer starts accumulating time.

E. ENABLE goes low before current value reaches preset value PV; Q remains low;
timer stops accumulating time and is cleared to zero (CV=0).

Instruction Set Reference 493

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example
In the example, a delay timer (with address) TMRID is used to control the length of time that
coil is on. This coil has been assigned the Nickname DWELL. When the normally open
(momentary) contact with the Nickname DO_DWL is on, coil DWELL is energized.

The contact of coil DWELL keeps coil DWELL energized (when contact DO_DWL is released),
and also starts the timer TMRID. When TMRID reaches its preset value of one-half second,
coil REL energizes, interrupting the latched-on condition of coil DWELL. The contact DWELL
interrupts power flow to TMRID, resetting its current value and de-energizing coil REL. The
circuit is then ready for another momentary activation of contact DO_DWL.

Figure 338

23.9.5 Timer and Counter Functions Off Delay Timer

The Off-Delay Timer increments while power flow is off, and resets to zero when power flow
is on. Time may be counted in tenths (0.1), hundredths (0.01), or thousandths (0.001) of a
second. The range is 0 to +32,767-time units. The state of this timer is retentive on power
failure; no automatic initialization occurs at power-up.

Figure 339

When the Off-Delay Timer first receives power flow, it passes power to the right, and the
current value (CV) is set to zero. The function uses word 1 as its CV storage location. The
output remains on as long as the function receives power flow. If the function stops
receiving power flow from the left, it continues to pass power to the right, and the timer
starts accumulating time in the current value.

If multiple occurrences of the same timer with the same reference address are enabled
during a CPU sweep, the current values of the timers will be the same.

The Off-Delay Timer does not pass power flow if the preset value is zero or negative.

Each time the function is invoked with the enabling logic set to OFF, the current value is
updated to reflect the elapsed time since the timer was turned off. When the current value
(CV) is equal to the preset value (PV), the function stops passing power flow to the right.
Instruction Set Reference 494
User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

When that occurs, the timer stops accumulating. When the function receives power flow
again, the current value resets to zero.

When the Off-Delay Timer is used in a program block that is not called every sweep, the
timer accumulates time between calls to the program block unless it is reset. This means
that it functions like a timer operating in a program with a much slower sweep than the
timer in the main program block. For program blocks that are inactive for a long time, the
timer should be programmed to allow for this catch-up feature. For example, if a timer in a
program block is reset and the program block is not called (is inactive) for four minutes,
when the program block is called, four minutes of time will already have accumulated. This
time is applied to the timer when enabled, unless the timer is first reset.

Example
In the example, an Off-Delay Timer is used to turn off an output (%Q00001) whenever an
input (%I00001) turns on. The output is turned on again 0.3 seconds after the input goes
off.

Figure 340

Operation of the Off-Delay Timer Function

Figure 341

A. ENABLE and Q both go high; timer is reset (CV = 0).

B. ENABLE goes low; timer starts accumulating time.

C. CV reaches PV; Q goes low, and timer stops accumulating time.

D. ENABLE goes high; timer is reset (CV = 0).

E. ENABLE goes low; timer starts accumulating time.

F. ENABLE goes high; timer is reset (CV = 0).

G. ENABLE goes low; timer begins accumulating time.

H. CV reaches PV; Q goes low, and timer stops accumulating time.

Instruction Set Reference 495

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameters of the Off-Delay Timer Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
address R The function uses three consecutive words (registers) of %R
memory to store the following:
• Current value (CV) = word 1.
• Preset value (PV) = word 2.
• Control word = word 3.
Do not use this address with other instructions.
Careful: Overlapping references cause erratic operation of
the timer.
enable flow When enable receives power flow, the timer’s current
value is reset to 0.
PV I Q, M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, PV is the value to copy into the timer’s preset value when
constant, none the timer is enabled or reset. For a register (%R) OV
reference, the PV parameter is specified as the second
word of the address parameter. For example, an address
parameter of %R0001 would use %R0002 as the PV
parameter.
Q flow, none Output Q is energized when the current value is less than
the preset value. The Q state is retentive on power failure;
no automatic initialization occurs at power-up.
time tenths (0.1), hundredths Time increment for the low bit of the PV preset and CV
(0.01), or thousandths current value.
(0.001) of seconds

23.9.6 Timer and Counter Functions Up Counter

The Up-Counter function counts up to a designated value. The range is 0 to +32,767 counts.
When the Up-Counter reset is ON, the current value of the counter resets to 0. Each time
the enable input transitions from OFF to ON, the current value increments by 1. The current
value can be incremented past the preset value PV. The output is ON whenever the current
value is greater than or equal to the preset value. The state of the CTU is retentive on power
failure; no automatic initialization occurs at power-up.

Figure 342

Instruction Set Reference 496

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameters of the Up-Counter Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
address R The function uses three consecutive words (registers) of %R memory
to store the following:
• Current value (CV) = word 1.
• Preset value (PV) = word 2.
• Control word = word 3.
Do not use this address with another up counter, down counter, or
any other instruction or improper operation will result.
Careful: Overlapping references cause erratic operation of the
counter.
enable flow On a positive transition of enable, the current count is incremented
by one.
R flow When R receives power flow, it resets the current value back to zero.
PV I, Q, M, T, G, R, PV is the value to copy into the counter’s preset value when the
AI, AQ, counter is enabled or reset.
constant, none
Q flow, none Output Q is energized when the current value is greater than or
equal to the preset value.

Example of the Up-Counter Function

In the example, every time input %I0012 transitions from OFF to ON, up counter PRT_CNT
counts up by 1; internal coil %M0001 is energized when 100 parts have been counted. When
%M0001 is ON, the accumulated count is reset to zero.

Figure 343

Instruction Set Reference 497

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

23.9.7 Timer and Counter Functions Down Counter

The Down Counter function counts down from a preset value. The minimum preset value
is zero; the maximum present value is +32,767 counts. The minimum current value is –
32,768. When reset, the current value of the counter is set to the preset value PV. When
the enable input transitions from OFF to ON, the current value is decremented by one. The
output is ON whenever the current value is less than or equal to zero.

The current value of the Down Counter is retentive on power failure; no automatic
initialization occurs at power-up.

Figure 344

Parameters of the Down Counter Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
address R The function uses three consecutive words (registers) of %R memory
to store the following:
• Current value (CV) = word 1.
• Preset value (PV) = word 2.
• Control word = word 3.
Do not use this address with another down counter, up counter, or
any other instruction or improper operation will result.
Careful: Overlapping references will result in erratic counter
operation.
enable flow On a positive transition of enable, the current value is decremented
by one.
R flow When R receives power flow, it resets the current value to the preset
value.
PV I, Q, M, T, G, R, PV is the value to copy into the counter’s preset value when the
AI, AQ, counter is enabled or reset.
constant, none
Q flow, none Output Q is energized when the current value is less than or equal to
zero.

Instruction Set Reference 498

User Manual Chapter 23
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example 1
In the example, the down counter identified as COUNTP counts 500 new parts before
energizing output %Q0005.

Figure 345

Example 2
The following example shows how the PLC can keep track of the number of parts in a
temporary storage area. It uses an up/down counter pair with a shared register for the
accumulated or current value. When parts enter the storage area, the up counter increases
the current value of the parts in storage by 1. When a part leaves the storage area, the down
counter decrements by 1, decreasing the inventory storage value by 1. The two counters
use different register addresses. When a register counts, its current value must be moved
to the current value register of the other counter.

Figure 346

See the pages on Math functions for an example of using the Addition and Subtraction
functions to provide storage tracking.

Instruction Set Reference 499

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 24: Service Request Function

This chapter explains the Service Request (SVCREQ) function, which requests a special PLC
service. It describes SVCREQ parameters for the VersaMax Nano PLC and Micro PLC.

• SVCREQ Function Numbers

• Format of the SVCREQ Function
• SVCREQ 1: Change/Read Constant Sweep Timer
• SVCREQ 2: Read Window Times
• SVCREQ 3: Change Programmer Communications Window Mode
• SVCREQ 4: Change System Communications Window Mode
• SVCREQ 6: Change/Read Number of Words to Checksum
• SVCREQ 7: Read or Change the Time-of-Day Clock
• SVCREQ 8: Reset Watchdog Timer
• SVCREQ 9: Read Sweep Time from Beginning of Sweep
• SVCREQ 10: Read Folder Name
• SVCREQ 11: Read PLC ID
• SVCREQ 13: Shut Down (Stop) PLC
• SVCREQ 14: Clear Fault
• SVCREQ 15: Read Last-Logged Fault Table Entry
• SVCREQ 16: Read Elapsed Time Clock
• SVCREQ 18: Read I/O Override Status
• SVCREQ 23: Read Master Checksum
• SVCREQ 26/30: Interrogate I/O
• SVCREQ 34: Enter Analog Calibration Mode
• SVCREQ 35: Execute Analog Calibration
• SVCREQ 52: Read from Flash
• SVCREQ 53: Write to Flash

Service Request Function 500

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.1 SVCREQ Functions

Each Service Request has its own function number, as listed in the following table.

Function # Description
1 Change/Read Constant Sweep Timer
2 Read Window Times
3 Change Programmer Communications Window Mode and Time
4 Change System Communications Window Mode and Time
5 reserved
6 Change/Read Number of Words to Checksum
7 Change/Read Time-of-Day Clock
8 Reset Watchdog Timer
9 Read Sweep Time from Beginning of Sweep
10 Read Folder Name
11 Read PLC ID
12 reserved
13 Shut Down the PLC
14 Clear Fault Tables
15 Read Last-Logged Fault Table Entry
16 Read Elapsed Time Clock
17 reserved
18 Read I/O Override Status
19-22 reserved
23 Read Master Checksum
26, 30 Interrogate I/O
27, 28 reserved
29 Read Elapsed Power Down Time
31-33 reserved
34 Enter Analog Calibration mode
35 Execute Analog Calibration
36-51 reserved
52 Read from Flash
53 Write to Flash
53-255 reserved

Service Request Function 501

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.2 Format of the SVCREQ Function

The SVCREQ function has three inputs and one output.

Figure 347

When the SVCREQ receives power flow, the PLC is requested to perform the function
number (FNC) indicated. Parameters for the function are located beginning at the reference
given for PARM. This is the beginning of the “parameter block" for the function. The number
of 16-bit references required depends on the SVCREQ function being used.

Parameter blocks may be used as both inputs for the function and the location where data
may be output after the function executes. Therefore, data returned by the function is
accessed at the same location specified for PARM.

The SVCREQ function passes power flow unless an incorrect function number, incorrect
parameters, or out-of-range references are specified. Specific SVCREQ functions have
additional causes for failure.

24.2.1 Parameters of the SVCREQ Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When enable is energized, the service request is performed.
FNC I, Q M, T, G, R, AI, AQ, Contains the constant or reference for the requested service.
constant
PARM I, Q M, T, G, R, AI, AQ Contains the beginning reference for the parameter block for
the requested service.
ok flow, none OK is energized when the function is performed without error.

Example of the SVCREQ Function

In the example, when the enabling input %I0001 is ON, SVCREQ function number 7 is called,
with the parameter block located starting at %R0001. Output coil %Q0001 is set ON if the
operation succeeds.

Figure 348

Service Request Function 502

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.3 SVCREQ 1: Change/Read Constant Sweep

Timer
Use SVCREQ 1 to enable or disable Constant Sweep Time mode, change the length of the
Constant Sweep Time, read whether Constant Sweep Time is currently enabled, or read the
Constant Sweep Time length.

24.3.1 Input Parameter Block for SCVREQ 1

For this function, the parameter block has a length of two words.

24.3.2 Disable Constant Sweep Mode

To disable Constant Sweep mode, enter SVCREQ function #1 with this parameter block:

address 0
address + 1 ignored

24.3.3 Enable Constant Sweep Mode

To enable Constant Sweep mode, enter SVCREQ function #1 with this parameter block:

address 1
address + 1 0 or timer value

Note: If the timer should use a new value, enter it in the second word. If the timer value should not be
changed, enter 0 in the second word. If the timer value does not already exist, entering 0 causes
the function to set the OK output to OFF.

24.3.4 Change the Constant Sweep Time

To change the timer value without changing the selection for sweep mode state, enter
SVCREQ function #1 with this parameter block:

address 2
address + 1 new timer value

24.3.5 Read the Constant Sweep State and Time

To read the current timer state and value without changing either, enter SVCREQ function
#1 with this parameter block:

address 3
address + 1 ignored

Service Request Function 503

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Successful execution will occur, unless:

1. A number other than 0, 1, 2, or 3 is entered as the requested operation:

2. The sweep time value is greater than 500ms (0.5 seconds).
3. Constant sweep time is enabled with no timer value programmed or with an old
value of 0 for the timer.
After the function executes, the function returns the timer state and value in the same
parameter block references:

0 = disabled
address 1 = enabled
address + 1 current timer value

Example of SVCREQ 1
In this example, if contact OV_SWP is set, the Constant Sweep Timer is read, the timer is
increased by two milliseconds, and the new timer value is provided to the CPU. The
parameter block is in local memory at location %R0050. Because the MOVE and ADD
functions require three horizontal contact positions, the example logic uses discrete
internal coil %M00001 as a temporary location to hold the successful result of the first rung
line. On any sweep in which OV_SWP is not set, %M00001 is turned off.

Figure 349

Service Request Function 504

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.4 SVCREQ 2: Read Window Times

SVCREQ 2 can be used to read the times of the programmer communications window and
the system communications window. These windows can operate in Limited or Run to
Completion Mode.

Mode Name Value Description

Limited Mode 0 The execution time of the window is limited to 6ms. The window
terminates when it has no more tasks to complete or after 6ms
elapses.
Run to Completion 2 Regardless of the time assigned to a window, it runs until all tasks
Mode within that window are completed (up to 400ms).

A window is disabled when the time value is zero.

24.4.1 Output Parameter Block for SVCREQ 2

The parameter block has a length of three words:

High Byte Low Byte

address Mode Value in ms Programmer Window
address + 1 Mode Value in ms System Communications Window
address + 2 must be zero must be zero reserved

All parameters are output parameters. It is not necessary to enter values in the parameter
block to program this function.

Example of SVCREQ 2
In the following example, when enabling output %Q00102 is set, the Micro PLC CPU places
the current time values of the windows in the parameter block starting at location %R0010.

Figure 350

Service Request Function 505

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.5 SVCREQ 3: Change Programmer

Communications Window Mode
Use SVCREQ 3 to change the programmer communications window mode (Limited or Run-
to-Completion). The change occurs during the next CPU sweep after the function is called.
The time of the window cannot be changed; it is always 6ms.

SVCREQ 3 passes power flow to the right unless a mode other than 0 (Limited) or 2 (Run-to-
Completion) is selected.

The parameter block has a length of one word.

24.5.1 Changing the Programmer Communications Window

Mode
To change the programmer window, enter SVCREQ 3 with this parameter block:

High Byte Low Byte

address Mode 6

Example of SVCREQ 3
In the following example, when enabling input %I006 goes ON, the programmer
communications window is enabled and assigned a value of 6ms. The parameter block is in
reference memory location %R0051.

Figure 351

24.6 SVCREQ 4: Change System Communications

Window Mode
Use SVCREQ 4 to change the system communications window mode (Limited or Run-to-
Completion). The change occurs during the next CPU sweep after the function is called. The
time of the window cannot be changed; it is always 6ms.

SVCREQ 4 passes power flow to the right unless a mode other than 0 (Limited) or 2 (Run-to-
Completion) is selected.

The parameter block has a length of one word.

Service Request Function 506

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.6.1 Changing the System Communications Window Mode

To change the programmer window, enter SVCREQ 4 with this parameter block:

High Byte Low Byte

address Mode 6

Example of SVCREQ 4
In the following example, when enabling input %I0003 is ON the system communications
window is changed to Run-to-Completion mode. The parameter block is at location
%R0025.

Figure 352

24.7 SVCREQ 6: Change/Read Number of Words to

Checksum
Use SVCREQ 6 to read or change the number of words in the program to be checksummed.
The function is successful unless some number other than 0 or 1 is entered as the requested
operation.

24.7.1 Parameter Block Formats for SVCREQ 6

The parameter block has a length of 2 words. To read the word count, the first word of the
parameter block must contain a zero:

address 0 (read word count)

address + 1 ignored

The function returns the current word count in the second word of the parameter block.

address 0
address + 1 current word count

To change the word count, the first word of the parameter block must contain a one:

address 1 (change word count)

address + 1 new word count (0 to 32)

The PLC will change the number of words to be checksummed to the new value.

Service Request Function 507

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example of SVCREQ 6
In the example, when enabling contact FST_SCN is set, the parameter blocks for the
checksum function are built. Later in the program, if input %I0137 turns on, the SVCREQ
reads the number of words being checksummed. The parameter block for the Read function
is located at %R0150-151. The ADD function adds 32 to the current word count in %R0151
and places the result in %R0153. The parameter block for the Change function is located at
%R00152-153. The second SVCREQ then changes to the new word count specified in
%R0153.

Figure 353

24.8 SVCREQ 7: Read or Change the Time-of-Day

Clock
Use SVCREQ 7 to read or change the time of day clock in the PLC. The data can be either BCD
or ASCII. Either 2-digit-year or 4-digit-year format is available. The function is successful
unless some number other than 0 (read) or 1 (change) is entered for the requested
operation, or an invalid data format is specified, or data is provided in an unexpected format.

24.8.1 Parameter Block Format for SVCREQ 7

For the date/time functions, the length of the parameter block depends on the data format.
The data block is either BCD or ASCII. BCD format requires 6 words; packed ASCII requires
12 words (13 words for 4-digit year). For both data types:

Hours are stored in 24-hour format.

Day of the week is a numeric value from 1 (Sunday) to 7 (Saturday).

2-Digit Year Format 4-Digit Year Format

address 0 = read time and date 0 = read time and date
1 = set time and date 1 = set time and date
address + 1 1 = BCD format 81h = BCD format
3 = packed ASCII format 83h = packed ASCII format
address + 2 to end data data

Service Request Function 508

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Words 3 to the end of the parameter block contain output data returned by a read function,
or new data being supplied by a change function. In both cases, format of these data words
is the same. When reading the date and time, words (address + 2) to the end of the
parameter block are ignored on input.

24.9 SVCREQ 7 Parameter Block Content: BCD

Format
In BCD format, each time and date item occupy one byte, so the parameter block has six
words.

24.9.1 2-Digit Year

The last byte of the sixth word is not used. When setting the date and time, this byte is
ignored; when reading date and time, the function returns 00.

Parameter Block Format: Example:

High Byte: Low Byte Read Date and Time in BCD format
(Sun., July 3, 1998, at 2:45:30 p.m.)
1 = change or address 0 (read)
0 = read
1 (BCD format) address + 1 1 (BCD format)
month year address + 2 07 (July) 98 (year)
hours day of month address + 3 14 (hours) 03 (day)
seconds minutes address + 4 30 (seconds) 45 (minutes)
(null) day of week address + 5 00 06 (Friday)

24.9.2 4-Digit Year

The parameter block has six words. All bytes are used.

Parameter Block Format: Example:

High Byte: Low Byte Read Date and Time in BCD format
(Sun., July 3, 1998, at 2:45:30 p.m.)
1 = change or address 00 00 (read)
0 = read
81h (BCD format, 4-digit) address + 1 00 81h (BCD, 4-digit)
year year address + 2 19 (year) 98 (year)
day of month month address + 3 03 (day) 07 (July)
minutes hours address + 4 45 (minutes) 14 (hours)
day of week seconds address + 5 06 (Friday) 30 (seconds)

Service Request Function 509

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.10 SVCREQ 7 Parameter Block Content: Packed

ASCII Format
In Packed ASCII format, each digit of the time and date items is an ASCII formatted byte.
Spaces and colons are embedded into the data to format it for printing or display. ASCII
format requires 12 words in the parameter block (13 words for 4-digit year).

24.10.1 2-Digit Year

Parameter Block Format: Example:
High Byte Low Byte Read Date and Time in Packed ASCII
Format (Mon, Oct. 5, 1998 at
11:13:00pm)
1 = change or address 0 (read)
0 = read
3 (ASCII format) address + 1 3 (ASCII format)
year year address + 2 38 (8) 39 (9)
month (space) address + 3 31 (1) 20 (space)
(space) month address + 4 20 (space) 30 (0)
day of month day of month address + 5 35 (5) 30 (leading 0)
hours (space) address + 6 31 (1) 20 (space)
: hours address + 7 3A ( : ) 31 (1)
minutes minutes address + 8 33 (3) 31 (1)
seconds : address + 9 30 (0) 3A ( : )
(space) seconds address + 10 20 (space) 30 (0)
day of week day of week address + 11 32 (2: Mon.) 30 (leading 0)

Service Request Function 510

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.10.2 4-Digit Year

Parameter Block Format: Example:
High Byte Low Byte Read Date and Time in Packed
ASCII Format (Mon, Oct. 5,
1998 at 11:13:00pm)
1 = change or address 0 (read)
0 = read
83h (ASCII 4 digit) address + 1 83h (ASCII 4 digit)
year (hundreds) year (thousands) address + 2 39 (9) 31 (1)
year (ones) year (tens) address + 3 38 (8) 39 (9)
month (tens) (space) address + 4 31 (1) 20 (space)
(space) month (ones) address + 5 20 (space) 30 (0)
day of month (ones) day of month (tens) address + 6 35 (5) 30 (leading 0)
hours (tens) (space) address + 7 31 (1) 20 (space)
: (colon) hours (ones) address + 8 3A ( : ) 31 (1)
minutes (ones) minutes (tens) address + 9 33 (3) 31 (1)
seconds (tens) : (colon) address + 10 30 (0) 3A ( : )
(space) seconds (ones) address + 11 20 (space) 30 (0)
day of week (ones) day of week (tens) address + 12 32 (2: Mon.) 30 (leading 0)

Example of SVCREQ 7
In the example, when called for by previous logic, a parameter block for the time-of-day
clock is built. It requests the current date and time, then sets the clock to 12 noon using BCD
format. The parameter block is located at location %R0300. Array NOON has been set up
elsewhere in the program to contain the values 12, 0, and 0. (Array NOON must also contain
the data at %R0300.) BCD format requires six contiguous memory locations for the
parameter block.

Service Request Function 511

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 354

24.11 SVCREQ 8: Reset Watchdog Timer

Use SVCREQ 8 to reset the watchdog timer during the sweep. Ordinarily, when the
watchdog timer expires the PLC shuts down without warning. SVCREQ 8 allows the timer
to keep going during a time-consuming task (for example, while waiting for a response from
a communications line).

CAUTION
Be sure that resetting the watchdog timer does not adversely affect the controlled process.

24.11.1 Parameter Block Format for SVCREQ 8

This function has no associated parameter block.

Example of SVCREQ 8
In this example, power flow through enabling output %Q0027 or input %I1476 or internal
coil %M00010 causes the watchdog timer to be reset.

Figure 355

Service Request Function 512

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.12 SVCREQ 9: Read Sweep Time from Beginning

of Sweep
Use SVCREQ 9 to read the time in milliseconds since the start of the sweep. The data format
is unsigned 16-bit integer.

24.12.1 Output Parameter Block Format for SVCREQ 9

The parameter block is an output parameter block only; it has a length of one word.

address time since start of sweep

Example of SVCREQ 9
In the following example, the elapsed time from the start of the sweep is always read into
location %R0200. If it is greater than 100ms, internal coil %M0200 is turned on.

Figure 356

Service Request Function 513

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.13 SVCREQ 10: Read Folder Name

Use SVCREQ 10 to read the name of the currently executing folder.

24.13.1 Output Parameter Block Format for SVCREQ 10

The output parameter block has a length of four words. It returns eight ASCII characters;
the last is a null character (00h). If the program name has fewer than seven characters, null
characters are added to the end.

Low Byte High Byte

address character 1 character 2
address + 1 character 3 character 4
address + 2 character 5 character 6
address + 3 character 7 00

Example of SVCREQ 10
In this example, when enabling input %I0301 goes OFF, register location %R0099 is loaded
with the value 10, which is the function code for the Read Folder Name function. The
Program Block READ_ID is then called to retrieve the folder name. The parameter block is
located at address %R0100.

Figure 357

Service Request Function 514

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.14 SVCREQ 11: Read PLC ID

Use SVCREQ 11 to read the name of the PLC executing the program.

24.14.1 Output Parameter Block Format for SVCREQ 11

The output parameter block has a length of four words. It returns eight ASCII characters;
the last is a null character (00h). If the PLC ID has fewer than seven characters, null characters
are added to the end.

Low Byte High Byte

address character 1 character 2
address + 1 character 3 character 4
address + 2 character 5 character 6
address + 3 character 7 00

Example of SVCREQ 11
In this example, when enabling input %I0302 goes OFF, register location %R0099 is loaded
with the value 11, which is the function code for the Read PLC ID function. The program
block READ_ID is then called to retrieve the ID. The parameter block is located at address
%R0100.

Figure 358

Service Request Function 515

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.15 SVCREQ 13: Shut Down (Stop) PLC

Use SVCREQ 13 to stop the Micro PLC at the end of the next sweep. All outputs go to the
OFF state at the start of the next PLC sweep. An informational “Shut Down PLC” fault is
placed in the PLC Fault Table. The I/O scan continues as configured.

24.15.1 Parameter Block for SVCREQ 13

This function has no parameter block.

Example of SVCREQ 13
In the example, when %T0001 is set SVCREQ 13 executes. The PARM input is not used.

This example uses a JUMP to the end of the program to force a shutdown if the Shutdown
PLC function executes successfully. This JUMP and LABEL are needed because the transition
to Stop mode does not occur until the end of the sweep in which the function executes.

Figure 359

Service Request Function 516

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.16 SVCREQ 14: Clear Fault

Use SVCREQ 14 to clear either the PLC fault table or the I/O fault table. The SVCREQ output
is set ON unless some number other than 0 or 1 is entered as the requested operation.

24.16.1 Input Parameter Block for SVCREQ 14

For this function, the parameter block has a length of 1 word. It is an input parameter block
only. There is no output parameter block.

0 = clear PLC fault table.

1 = clear I/O fault table.

Example of SVCREQ 14
In the example, when input %I0346 is on and input %I0349 is on, the PLC fault table is
cleared. When input %I0347 is on and input %I0349 is on, the I/O fault table is cleared. When
input %I0348 is on and input %I0349 is on, both are cleared. A positive transition coil should
be used to trigger SVCREQ14.

The parameter block for the PLC fault table is located at %R0500; for the I/O fault table the
parameter block is located at %R0550. Both parameter blocks are set up elsewhere in the
program.

Figure 360

Service Request Function 517

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.17 SVCREQ 15: Read Last-Logged Fault Table

Entry
Use SVCREQ 15 to read the last entry logged in either the PLC fault table or the I/O fault
table. The SVCREQ output is set ON unless some number other than 0 or 1 is entered as the
requested operation or the fault table is empty.

24.17.1 Input Parameter Block for SVCREQ 15

For this function, the parameter block has a length of 22 words. The input parameter block
has this format:

2-Digit Year Format 4-Digit Year Format

address 0 = Read PLC fault table. 8 = Read PLC fault table.
1 = Read I/O fault table. 9 = Read I/O fault table.

The format of the output parameter block depends on whether the function reads data from
the PLC fault table or the I/O fault table.

PLC Fault Table Output Format I/O Fault Table Output Format
High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte
0 1
spare long/short address + 1 memory type long/short
spare spare address + 2 offset
slot rack address + 3 slot rack
task address + 4 block bus
fault action fault group address + 5 point
error code address + 6 fault action fault group
fault specific data address + 7 fault type fault category
address + 8 fault specific data fault description
to
address + 18
minutes seconds address + 19 minutes seconds
day of month hour address + 20 day of month hour

2-Digit Year year month address + 21 year month

Format
or
4-Digit Year spare month address + 21 spare month
Format year address + 22 year

Service Request Function 518

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Long/Short Value
The first byte of word address +1 contains a number that indicates the length of the fault-
specific data in the fault entry. These possible values are:

PLC fault table 00 = 8 bytes (short)

01 = 24 bytes (long)
I/O fault table 02 = 5 bytes (short)
03 = 21 bytes (long)

Example of SVCREQ 15
When inputs %I0250 and %I0251 are both on, the first Move function places a zero (read PLC
fault table) into the parameter block for SVCREQ 15. When input %I0250 is on and input
%I0251 is off, the Move instruction instead places a one (read I/O fault table) in the SVCREQ
parameter block. The parameter block is located at location %R0600.

Figure 361

Service Request Function 519

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.18 SVCREQ 16: Read Elapsed Time Clock

Use SVCREQ 16 to read the system's elapsed time clock. The elapsed time clock measures
the time in seconds since the Micro PLC was powered on.

24.18.1 Output Parameter Block for SVCREQ 16

This function has an output parameter block only. Its length is 3 words.

address seconds from power on (low order)

address + 1 seconds from power on (high order)
address + 2 100 µs ticks

The first two words are the elapsed time in seconds. The last word is the number of 100 µs
ticks in the current second.

Example of SVCREQ 16
In the example, when internal coil %M0233 is on, the SVCREQ with a parameter block
located at %R0127 reads the system's elapsed time clock and sets internal coil %M0234.
When coil %M0233 is off, the SVCREQ with a parameter block at %R0131 reads the elapsed
time clock again.

The subtraction function finds the difference between the first and second readings, which
have been stored in the SVCREQ parameter blocks. The subtraction ignores the hundred
microsecond ticks.

The difference between the two readings is placed in memory location %R0250.

Figure 362

Service Request Function 520

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.19 SVCREQ 18: Read I/O Override Status

Use SVCREQ 18 to check for any overrides in the Micro PLC 's %I and %Q memories.

24.19.1 Output Parameter Block for SVCREQ 18

This function has an output parameter block only. Its length is 1 word.

address 0 = No overrides are set.

1 = Overrides are set.

Example of SVCREQ 18
The following SVCREQ reads the status of I/O overrides memory into location %R1003. The
equality function checks %R1003 to see if it is equal to (the constant) 1. If it is, the equality
function turns on output %T0001.

Figure 363

24.20 SVCREQ 23: Read Master Checksum

Use SVCREQ 23 to read the master checksums of the application program and the
configuration. The SVCREQ output is always ON if the function is enabled.

24.20.1 Output Parameter Block for SVCREQ 23

For this function, the output parameter block has a length of 12 words with this format:

The first two items in the output parameter block indicate when the program and
configuration checksums are valid. (Program checksums may not be valid during a Run
Mode Store.)

address Master Program Checksum Valid (0 = not valid, 1 = valid)

address + 1 Master Configuration Checksum Valid (0 = not valid, 1 = valid)
address + 2 Number of Program Blocks (including _MAIN)
address + 3 Size of User Program in Bytes (DWORD data type)
address + 5 Program Additive Checksum
address + 6 Program CRC Checksum (DWORD data type)
address + 8 Size of Configuration Data in Bytes
address + 9 Configuration Additive Checksum
address + 10 Configuration CRC Checksum (DWORD data type)

Service Request Function 521

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example of SVCREQ 23
In the example, when input %I0251 is ON, the master checksum information is placed into
the parameter block at %R0050 and the output coil (%Q0001) is turned on.

Figure 364

24.21 SVCREQ 26/ SVCREQ 30: Interrogate I/O

Use SVCREQ 26 and SVCREQ30 to check whether the installed modules match the software
configuration. If not, these SVCREQs place appropriate addition, loss, and mismatch faults
in the PLC and/or I/O fault tables. SVCREQ 26 and SVCREQ 30 both perform the same
function.

The more configuration faults there are, the longer it takes these SVCREQs longer to
execute.

These SVCREQs have no parameter block. They always output power flow.

Example of SVCREQ 26
In the example, when input %I0251 is ON, the SVCREQ checks the installed modules and
compares them to the software configuration. Output %Q0001 is turned on after the
SVCREQ is complete.

Figure 365

Service Request Function 522

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.22 SVCREQ 29: Read Elapsed Power Down Time

Use SVCREQ 29 to read the amount of time elapsed between the last power-down and the
most recent power-up. If the watchdog timer expired before power-down, the PLC is not
able to calculate the power down elapsed time, so the time is set to 0.

The SVCREQ output is always ON.

24.22.1 Output Parameter Block for SVCREQ 29

This function has an output parameter block only. The parameter block has a length of 3
words.

address Power-Down Elapsed Seconds (low order)

address + 1 Power-Down Elapsed Seconds (high order)
address + 2 zero

The first two words are the power-down elapsed time in seconds. The last word is always 0.

Example of SVCREQ 29
In the example, when input %I0251 is ON, the Elapsed Power-Down Time is placed into the
parameter block that starts at %R0050. The output coil (%Q0001) is turned on.

Figure 366

24.23 SVCREQ 34: Enter Analog Calibration Mode

The final step of calibrating an analog channel (see the complete process description in
Chapter 5:) consists of storing the calibration values in flash memory. This step requires the
use of two SVCREQ functions, SVCREQ 34 and 35.

SVCREQ 34 places the Micro PLC in calibration mode. When SVCREQ 34 is executed, the PLC
uses default gain and offset so that you can start the calibration process. No parameter
block is needed with SVCREQ 34.

Note: This calibration procedure applies to analog channels on 23-point Micro PLCs only. Software
calibration of Analog Expansions and Nano PLCs is not available.

Service Request Function 523

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example of SVCREQ 34
In the following example, when enabling input %I0251 goes ON, the analog calibration
defaults are restored and output coil %Q0001 is turned on.

Figure 367

24.24 SVCREQ 35: Store Analog Calibration

SVCREQ 35 stores the previously computed analog calibration in the Micro PLC. The
calibration can be stored in either volatile or non-volatile memory.

SVCREQ 35 uses an input parameter block containing the new calibration data and control
data. Contents of the parameter block are shown on the next page. When the SVCREQ is
successfully completed, the new calibration values take effect.

After the SVCREQ function executes, the PLC returns the function status and the number of
tries available to the 2 words of the output parameter block.

Example of SVCREQ 35
In the example, when contact %I0003 is on, the SVCREQ with a parameter block located at
%R0127 stores the analog calibration to the memory type specified in the parameter block
and sets coil %Q00234.

Figure 368

Service Request Function 524

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.24.1 Input Parameter Block for SVCREQ 35

The input parameter block for SVCREQ 35 contains the following 32 input words. For
parameter explanations, refer to Parameter Definitions below.

Address Password (“CA” 4143H)

address + 1 Password (“LB” 424CH)
address + 2 Destination Control: 0 for RAM, 1 for flash
address + 3 Select Control AI Ch 1 Vol: 0: last, 1: new, 2: default, 3: factory
address + 4 Input Channel 1 %AI0018 High Value, Voltage
address + 5 Input Channel 1 %AI0018 Low Value, Voltage
address + 6 Input Channel 1 Meter High Value, Voltage (mV)
address + 7 Input Channel 1 Meter Low Value, Voltage (mV)
address + 8 Select Control AI Ch 1 Cur: 0: last, 1: new, 2: default, 3: factory
address + 9 Input Channel 1 %AI0018 High Value, Current
address + 10 Input Channel 1 %AI0018 Low Value, Current
address + 11 Input Channel 1 Meter High Value, Current (mA)
address + 12 Input Channel 1 Meter Low Value, Current (mA)
address + 13 Select Control AI Ch 2 Vol: 0: last, 1: new, 2: default, 3: factory
address + 14 Input Channel 2 %AI0019 High Value, Voltage
address + 15 Input Channel 2 %AI0019 Low Value, Voltage
address + 16 Input Channel 2-Meter-High Value, Voltage (mV)
address + 17 Input Channel 2 Meter Low Value, Voltage (mV)
address + 18 Select Control AI Ch 2 Cur: 0: last, 1: new, 2: default, 3: factory
address + 19 Input Channel 2 %AI0019 High Value, Current
address + 20 Input Channel 2 %AI0019 Low Value, Current
address + 21 Input Channel 2-Meter-High Value, Current (mA)
address + 22 Input Channel 2 Meter Low Value, Current (mA)
address + 23 Select Control AQ Ch 1 Vol: 0: last, 1: new, 2: default, 3: factory
address + 24 Output Channel 1 %AQ0012 High Value, Voltage
address + 25 Output Channel 1 %AQ0012 Low Value, Voltage
address + 26 Output Channel 1 Meter High Value, Voltage (mV)
address + 27 Output Channel 1 Meter Low Value, Voltage (mV)
address + 28 Select Control AQ Ch 1 Cur: 0: last, 1: new, 2: default, 3: factory
address + 29 Output Channel 1 %AQ0012 High Value, Current
address + 30 Output Channel 1 %AQ0012 Low Value, Current
address + 31 Output Channel 1 Meter High Value, Current (mA)
address + 32 Output Channel 1 Meter Low Value, Current (mA)
address + 33 Status
address + 34 Number of tries available

Service Request Function 525

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.24.2 Output Parameter Block for SVCREQ 35

The output parameter block for SVCREQ 35 contains the following two output words:

address Status
address + 1 Number of tries available

Parameter Definitions
Password (address and address +1) must be CALB. If an invalid password is provided, the
service request returns error 3 in the status word.

Destination Control (at address +2), determines whether to write the constants in flash or
in RAM. You can select the RAM option (0) and calibrate as many times as necessary without
burning the calibration constants into the flash memory. When you are satisfied with the
calibration, you can select the flash option (1) and finalize the calibration. When the flash
option is selected, the calibration data is copied into RAM as well as burned into flash
memory. It is important to issue a SVCREQ with the flash option selected in the Destination
Control parameter field once the desired calibration state is reached. Otherwise, the new
calibration values will be lost when the unit is powered off.

Select Control (address +3). Allows you to calibrate a particular channel in a specific mode.
Four choices are allowed for each channel:

0: Last user calibration. The last calibration in flash is used for the channel and for the mode. (If
no user calibration exists, the last factory calibration is used.)
1: New. The PLC calculates new gain and offset using the values supplied in the next four words.
New calibration value will replace the value in the RAM or flash as determined by the
Destination Control field.
2: Default. If this option is specified, the default calibration value is used.
3: Factory. If this option is specified, the last factory calibration value is used.

Status (address +33). A status word is returned by the service request:

1=Complete 4=Not in calibration mode

2=Out of tries 5=Calibration values checksum bad
3=Invalid password 6=Invalid calibration data

Number of Tries Available (address +34). Indicates the number of tries remaining.

Service Request Function 526

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.25 SVCREQ 52: Read from Flash

This Service Request is available with Release 3.0 and later Micro PLCs.

Service Request 52 reads Reference Variables that were previously written into flash
memory using Service Request 53 and stores the variables in CPU reference memory. Each
execution of Service Request 52 can read:

• 1 to 10 words of %R, %AI, or %AQ reference data.

• 1 to 10 bytes of %I, %Q, %M, %T, or %G reference data.
SVCREQ 52 uses an input parameter block containing the reference memory to be read.
After SVCREQ 52 executes, the PLC returns the function status to the two words of the
output parameter block.

Example of SVCREQ 52
In this example, when enabling input %M0003 goes on, the Service Request reads the flash
memory location specified in the Parameter Block located at %R00040 and places the data
into the intended destination. It then sets coil %M0004.

Figure 369

Service Request Function 527

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.25.1 Input Parameter Block for SVCREQ 52

The input parameter block for SVCREQ 52 contains the following 5 input words.

Address Memory type (number) of the flash memory location of the first byte or word of data
to be read. Numbers are:
Memory Decimal Hex
%I (byte) 16 10
%Q (byte) 18 12
%T (byte) 20 14
%M (byte) 22 16
%G (byte) 56 38
%R (word) 8 08
%AI (word) 10 0A
%AQ (word) 12 0C
address + 1 Offset of the requested data within the memory type in flash memory
address + 2 Length of data to be read, 1 – 10 bytes or words.
address + 3 Memory type of the PLC reference memory type where the requested data should be
placed. See the numbers above.
address + 4 Offset to place the requested data within the requested memory type in PLC reference
memory.
address + 5 Memory type of the PLC reference memory type for the completion status.
See the numbers above. For example, %R1 = memory type 8.
address + 6 Offset in PLC Memory to write completion status (zero based).
For example, %R1 = offset 0.

24.25.2 Status Data for SVCREQ 52

SVCREQ 52 returns one of the following status indications:

Word 0
Hex Dec Status Definition
0x0001 1 Full Success All requested data was successfully read
0x0101 257 Partial Success Less than requested data length was read. Can occur
if all data requested was not present in flash.
0x0102 258 Insufficient Dest Mem Can occur if the PLC reference memory location
specified is not sufficient to store all the data read
from flash
0x0202 514 Invalid Length Length is beyond minimum 1 and maximum 10
0x0302 770 Source/Dest Wrong source or destination reference memory
Mem Wrong specified in the SVCREQ.
Word 1
Number of bytes read

Service Request Function 528

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.26 SVCREQ 53: Write to Flash

This Service Request is available with Release 3.0 and later Micro PLCs.

Service Request 53 stores requested PLC reference data in flash memory. Each execution of
Service Request 53 can write:

• 1 to 10 words of %R, %AI, or %AQ reference data.

• 1 to 10 bytes of %I, %Q, %M, %T, or %G reference data.
SVCREQ 53 uses an input parameter block containing the reference memory requested to
be written. After SVCREQ 53 executes, the PLC returns the function status and the amount
of user flash memory still available to the output parameter block.

Example of SVCREQ 53
In the example, when enabling input %M0003 goes on, the Service Request reads the PLC
memory location specified in the Parameter Block located at %R00040 and writes the data
to flash. It then sets coil %M0004.

Figure 370

Service Request Function 529

User Manual Chapter 24
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

24.26.1 Input Parameter Block for SVCREQ 53

The input parameter block for SVCREQ 53 contains the following 5 input words.

Address Memory type (number) of the PLC memory location of the first byte or word of
data to be written. Numbers are:
Memory Decimal Hex
%I (byte) 16 10
%Q (byte) 18 12
%T (byte) 20 14
%M (byte) 22 16
%G (byte) 56 38
%R (word) 8 08
%AI (word) 10 0A
%AQ (word) 12 0C
address + 1 Offset of the requested data within the memory type in PLC memory
address + 2 Length of data to be read, 1 – 10 bytes or words.
address + 3 Memory type of the PLC reference memory type for the completion status. See
the numbers above. For example, %R1 = memory type 8.
address + 4 Offset in PLC Memory to write completion status (zero based).
For example, %R1 = offset 0.

24.26.2 Status Data for SVCREQ 53

SVCREQ 53 returns one of the following status indications:

Word 1
Hex Dec Status Definition
0x0001 1 Full Success All requested data was successfully written
0x0101 257 Partial Success Less than requested data length was written. Can
occur if some requested data is already in flash.
0x0102 258 Insufficient Flash memory area full, connect with the programmer
Destination Memory and write all data to flash in order to erase and store
latest values.
0x0202 514 Invalid Length Length is beyond minimum 1 and maximum 10
0x0302 770 Source/Dest Wrong source or destination reference memory
Mem Wrong specified in the SVCREQ.
Word 2
Number of bytes written
Word 3
Number of bytes remaining in flash

Service Request Function 530

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 25: Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols

This chapter describes the VersaMax Micro PLC Serial I/O feature, which can be used to
control the read/write activities of one of the Micro PLC ports directly from the application
program.

This chapter also contains instructions for using COMMREQs to configure the CPU serial
ports for SNP, RTU, or Serial I/O protocol.

• Format of the COMMREQ Function

• Configuring Serial Ports Using the COMMREQ Function
— RTU Slave/SNP Slave Operation with a Programmer Attached
— COMMREQ Command Block for Configuring SNP Protocol
— COMMREQ Command Block for Configuring RTU Protocol
— COMMREQ Command Block for Configuring Serial I/O
• Serial I/O COMMREQ Commands
— Initialize Port
— Set Up Input Buffer
— Flush Input Buffer
— Read Port Status
— Write Port Control
— Cancel Operation
— Autodial
— Write Bytes
— Read Bytes
— Read String
Details of RTU and SNP protocol are described in the Serial Communications User’s Manual
(GFK-0582). For additional information about Modbus Master communications, please refer
to the document Modbus RTU Master Communications (GFK-2220).

At higher sweep times, serial communication throughput is less and response times are
larger. As a result of this, a communication request takes longer to complete.

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 531

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.1 Format of the Communication Request

Function
Serial I/O is implemented through the use of Communication Request (COMMREQ)
functions. The operations of the protocol, such as transmitting a character through the
serial port or waiting for an input character, are implemented through the COMMREQ
function block.

The COMMREQ requires that all its command data be placed in the correct order (in a
command block) in PLC memory before it is executed. The COMMREQ should then be
executed by a contact of a one-shot coil to prevent sending the data multiple times. A series
of Block Move (BLKMV) commands should be used to move the words to create a command
block in the Register tables.

The COMMREQ function has three inputs and one output. When the function receives
power flow, a command block of data is sent to the specified module.

Figure 371

25.1.1 Parameters of the COMMREQ Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When the function is energized, the communications request is
performed.
IN R, AI, AQ IN contains the first word of the command block.
SYSID I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, SYSID contains the rack number (most significant byte) and slot
AQ, constant number (least significant byte) of the target device. For the CPU,
SYSID must specify rack/slot 0.
TASK R, AI, AQ, constant TASK specifies the port for which the operation is intended:
task 19 for port 1
task 20 for port 2
FT flow, none FT is energized if an error is detected processing the COMMREQ:
• The specified target address is not present (SYSID).
• The specified task is not valid for the device (TASK).
• The data length is 0.
• The device’s status pointer address (in the command block)
does not exist. (applies only to HSC COMMREQs)

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 532

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.1.2 Command Block for the COMMREQ Function

The Command Block starts at the reference specified in COMMREQ parameter IN. The
length of the Command Block depends on the amount of data sent to the device.

The Command Block contains the data to be communicated to the other device, plus
information related to the execution of the COMMREQ. The Command Block has the
following structure:

address Length (in words)

address + 1 Wait/No Wait Flag
address + 2 Status Pointer Memory
address + 3 Status Pointer Offset
address + 4 Idle Timeout Value
address + 5 Maximum Communication Time
address + 6 to Data Block
address + 133

Example of the COMMREQ Function

In the example, when %M0021 is ON, a Command Block located starting at %R0032 is sent
to port 2 (communications task 20) of the CPU (rack 0, slot 0). If an error occurs processing
the COMMREQ, %Q0110 is set.

Figure 372

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 533

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.2 Configuring Serial Ports Using the COMMREQ

Function
The following tables list the command block values required for setting up a Serial Port for
SNP, RTU, and Serial I/O. All values are in hexadecimal unless otherwise indicated. The
BLKMV commands that are used to create the command block are described in the
example.

25.2.1 Timing
If a port configuration COMMREQ is sent to a serial port that currently has an SNP/SNPX
master (for example, the programmer) connected to it, the serial port configuration
specified by the COMMREQ does not take effect until the Micro PLC detects a loss of the
SNP/SNPX master. This occurs after the configured T3’ times out, once the master
disconnects. The COMMREQ status word for the port configuration COMMREQ is updated
as soon as the CPU verifies that the specified configuration is valid. That means a COMMREQ
Successful value may be returned by the Port Configuration COMMREQ before the specified
configuration is actually installed.

25.2.2 Sending Another COMMREQ to the Same Port

The application program must wait at least 2 seconds after a new serial port protocol is
installed before sending any COMMREQs specific to that protocol to the port. This applies
to a new protocol installed by Storing a new hardware configuration or by a port
configuration COMMREQ. If the port is configured for Serial I/O, this waiting period must
also follow any Stop to Run mode transition of the Micro PLC.

25.2.3 Invalid Port Configurations

COMMREQs to configure protocols for the port(s) of the Micro PLC are limited to the
supported protocols for the given port. Any COMMREQs that request invalid port
configurations will be rejected.

Note: For all Nano and Micro PLC CPUs, care must be taken setting timeouts and message lengths when
operating at 4800 bps or lower. Messages at this rate are longer in duration and may cause
various timeouts within a system. This can become worse on the Micro-64 CPU because the scan
times on this unit are typically slightly longer.

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 534

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.2.4 RTU Slave/SNP Slave Operation with Programmer

Attached
A programmer (an SNP/SNPX master device) can be attached to port 1 or port 2 while RTU
Slave mode is active on the port. For multi-drop connections, the Micro PLC must have been
configured to use an appropriate PLC ID. Note that for a multi-drop SNP connection with the
port currently configured for RTU Slave, the SNP ID associated with the Micro PLC settings
must match the multi-drop ID.

The programmer must use the same serial communications parameters (baud rate, parity,
stop bits, etc.) as the currently active RTU Slave protocol for it to be recognized.

When the Micro PLC recognizes the programmer, the Micro PLC removes the RTU Slave
protocol from the port and installs SNP Slave as the currently active protocol. The SNP ID,
modem turnaround time, and default idle time for this new SNP Slave session are obtained
from the configured Micro PLC settings, not the port 1 or port 2 configurations. Connection
should be established within 12 seconds. When the programmer connection has been
enabled, normal programmer communications can take place. (Failure of the programmer
to establish communications within 12-seconds is treated as a Loss of Programmer
Communications).

The programmer may send a new protocol via configuration or a Serial Port Setup
COMMREQ. (COMMREQs not supported by SNP Slave protocol are rejected). If a new
protocol is received, it will not take effect until the programmer is disconnected.

After the programmer is removed, there is a slight delay (equal to the configured SNP T3’
timeout) before the Micro PLC recognizes its absence. During this time, no messages are
processed on the port. The Micro PLC detects removal of the programmer as an SNP Slave
protocol timeout. Therefore, it is important to be careful when disabling timeouts used by
the SNP Slave protocol.

When the Micro PLC recognizes the disconnect, it reinstalls the RTU Slave protocol, unless a
new protocol has been received. In that case, the Micro PLC installs the new protocol
instead.

Note: If an RTU slave receives a message with length greater than 265 bytes it responds with an error
code 0x03 indicating "Invalid Data Field"

Example
1. Port 1 is running RTU Slave protocol at 9600 baud.
2. A programmer is attached to port 1. The programmer is using 9600 baud.
3. The Micro PLC installs SNP Slave on port 1 and the programmer communicates
normally.
4. The programmer stores a new configuration to port 1. The new configuration sets
the port for SNP Slave at 4800 baud (it will not take effect until the port loses
communications with the programmer).
5. When the Micro PLC loses communications with the programmer, the new
configuration takes effect.

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 535

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.2.5 COMMREQ Command Block for Configuring SNP

Protocol
Values Meaning
Address 10H Data Block Length
Address + 1 0 = No Wait WAIT/NOWAIT Flag
Address + 2 0008 = %R, register memory Status Word Pointer Memory Type
Address + 3 Zero-based number that gives the address Status Word Pointer Offset
of the COMMREQ status word (for
example, a value of 99 gives an address of
100 for the status word)
Address + 4 0 (Only used in Wait/No Wait mode) Idle Timeout Value
Address + 5 0 (Only used in Wait/No Wait mode) Maximum Communication Time
Address + 6 FFF0H Command Word (serial port setup)
Address + 7 0001 Protocol: 1=SNP
Address + 8 0000=Slave, 0001=Master Port Mode
Address + 9 10=175000, 7=38400, 6=19200, 5=9600, Data Rate (bps)
4=4800, 3=2400, 2=1200, 1=600, 0=300
Address + 10 0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even Parity
Address + 11 1 = None Flow Control
Address + 12 0 = None, 1 = 10ms, 2 = 100ms, 3 = 500ms Turnaround Delay
Address + 13 0 = Long, 1 = Medium, 2 = Short, 3 = None Timeout
Address + 14 1 = 8 bits Bits Per Character
Address + 15 0 = 1 Stop Bit, 1 = 2 Stop bits Stop Bits
Address + 16 not used Interface
Address + 17 not used Duplex Mode
Address + 18 user-provided 17
Device identifier bytes 1 and 2
Address + 19 user-provided 17
Device identifier bytes 3 and 4
Address + 20 user-provided 17
Device identifier bytes 5 and 6
Address + 21 user-provided 17
Device identifier bytes 7 and 8

17
The device identifier for SNP Slave ports is packed into words with the least significant character in the least significant byte of the word.
For example, if the first two characters are “A” and “B,” the Address + 18 will contain the hex value 4241.
Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 536
User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.2.6 COMMREQ Command Block for Configuring RTU

Protocol
Values Meaning
First 6 words Reserved for COMMREQ use.
Address + 6 FFF0H Command
Address + 7 3 Protocol: 0003=RTU

Address + 8 0 Port Mode: 0000=Slave

Address + 9 10=175000, 7=38400, Data Rate

6=19200, 5=9600, 4=4800,
3=2400, 2=1200, 1=600,
0=300
Address + 10 0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even Parity
Address + 11 0 = Hardware, 1 = None Flow Control
Address + 12 0-255 (units of 10ms. Turnaround delay. For release 2.02 and later
For example, 10=100ms) CPUs only.
0 for all other CPUs.
Address + 13 not used Timeout
Address + 14 not used Bits per Character
Address + 15 0 = 1, 1 = 2 Stop Bits
Address + 16 not used Interface
Address + 17 0 = 2-wire, 1 = 4-wire Duplex Mode
Address + 18 Station Address (1-247) Device Identifier
Address + 19 - 21 not used Device Identifier

Address + 2218 0 –255 (units of 10ms) Receive to Transmit Delay

Address + 2318 0-255 (units of 10ms) RTS Drop Delay

18
Release 2.02 and later Micro PLC CPUs support Receive to Transmit Delay and RTS Drop Delay functionality for RTU and Serial IO through
the Serial Port Setup COMMREQ. Both of these optional parameters are described in Receive to Transmit Delay and RTS Drop Delay. When
configuring the protocol, these two optional parameters can be added to the port setup COMMREQ. The data block length (Address + 0)
for a COMMREQ that includes the Receive to Transmit Delay and RTS Drop Delay parameters should be 12H, not 10H. Either length (10H
or 12H) is valid for this COMMREQ.
Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 537
User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Receive to Transmit Delay and RTS Drop Delay

Release 2.02 and later Micro PLC CPUs support Receive to Transmit Delay and RTS Drop
Delay functionality for RTU and Serial IO through the Serial Port Setup COMMREQ.

When configuring the protocol, these two optional parameters can be added to the port
setup COMMREQ. The data block length (Address + 0) for a COMMREQ that includes the
Receive to Transmit Delay and RTS Drop Delay parameters should be 12H, not 10H. Either
length (10H or 12H) is valid for this COMMREQ.

Receive to transmit delay - This is the time interval that defines the end of each received
response message. It is measured from the end of the last received character. RTS is off and
the transmitter is silent during this interval. If a new query is ready for transmission, RTS is
asserted no earlier than the end of this interval.

Zero specifies the default, defined as 3.5 character times at the specified data rate,
assuming 11 bits per character.

Data Rate Default (10ms Units) Data Rate Default (10ms Units)
1200 322 19200 21
2400 161 38400 10
4800 80 57600 7
9600 40 115200 3

If the required delay is greater than the default value at the current data rate, increase the
specified value to required delay in 10ms units. If the required delay is less than the default
at the current data rate, no additional delay is necessary.

RTS Drop Delay -This is the time from the end of the last transmitted character to the time
when RTS is turned off (dropped). The RTS Drop Delay is also specified in 10ms units. The
receiver is disabled during transmission and remains disabled during the RTS drop delay
time.

Data Rate Default (10ms Units) Data Rate Default (10ms Units)
1200 92 19200 6
2400 46 38400 3
4800 23 57600 2
9600 12 115200 1

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 538

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.2.7 COMMREQ Command Block for Configuring Serial I/O

Protocol
Values Meaning
First 6 words Reserved for COMMREQ use.
Address + 6 FFF0H Command
Address + 7 0005 Protocol: 0005=Serial IO
Address + 8 0 = Slave Port Mode
Address + 9 10=175000, 7=38400, Data Rate (bps)
6=19200, 5=9600, 4=4800,
3=2400, 2=1200, 1=600, 0=300
Address + 10 0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even Parity
Address + 11 0 = Hardware, 1 = None Flow Control
Address + 12 0-255 (units of 10ms). For Turnaround Delay. For release 2.02 and
example, 10 = 100ms). later CPUs only. 0 for all other CPUs.
Address + 13 0 = Long Timeout
Address + 14 0=7 bits, 1=8 bits Bits per Character
Address + 15 0 = 1 stop bit, 1 = 2 stop bits Stop Bits
Address + 16 must be set to 0 Interface
Address + 17 0 = 2-wire, 1 = 4-wire Duplex Mode
Address + 18—21 not used Device Identifier
Address + 22 19
0-255 (units of 10ms) Receive to transmit delay / RTS Drop Delay

19
Release 2.02 and later Micro PLC CPUs support Receive to Transmit Delay and RTS Drop Delay functionality for RTU and Serial IO through
the Serial Port Setup COMMREQ. Both of these optional parameters are described in Receive to Transmit Delay and RTS Drop Delay. When
configuring the protocol, these two optional parameters can be added to the port setup COMMREQ. The data block length (Address + 0)
for a COMMREQ that includes the Receive to Transmit Delay and RTS Drop Delay parameters should be 12H, not 10H. Either length (10H
or 12H) is valid for this COMMREQ.
Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 539
User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.3 Calling Serial, I/O COMMREQs from the PLC

Sweep
Implementing a serial protocol using Serial I/O COMMREQs may be restricted by the Micro
PLC sweep time. For example, if the protocol requires that a reply to a certain message from
the remote device be initiated within 5ms of receiving the message, this method may not
be successful if the sweep time is 5mS or longer, since timely response is not guaranteed.

When using Serial, I/O protocol with a VersaMax Nano or 14 point Micro PLC, the user switch
must be configured. A Nano PLC requires an external switch connection. When a Nano PLC
or 14-Point Micro PLC is in Run mode, Serial I/O protocol is active; after a Run-to-Stop
transition, the Nano PLC or 14-Point Micro PLC automatically reverts to SNP. An SNP master
device (VersaPro, for instance) is not able to communicate with a Nano PLC or 14-Point
Micro PLC that is configured for Serial I/O when it is in Run mode.

Since the Serial I/O is completely driven by the application program, in STOP mode a port
configured as Serial I/O automatically reverts to SNP slave, to facilitate programmer
communication. Therefore, while in Stop mode, Serial I/O protocol is not active; it is only
active when the PLC is in Run mode.

Calling the Serial, I/O from a Timed Interrupt Block

The protocol can also be implemented from within a timed interrupt block. Whenever the
interrupt block executes, the status of the previous COMMREQ or the status of the port is
queried to determine if the last requested action is complete. It if is, a new port command
can be initiated with a COMMREQ function block.

25.3.1 Compatibility
The COMMREQ function blocks supported by Serial I/O are not supported by other currently
existing protocols (such as SNP slave, SNP master, and RTU slave). Errors are returned if they
are attempted for a port configured for one of those protocols

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 540

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.3.2 Status Word for Serial I/O COMMREQs

A value of 1 is returned in the COMMREQ status word upon successful completion of the
COMMREQ. Any other value returned is an error code where the low byte is a major error
code and the high byte is a minor error code.

Major Error
Description
Code
1 (01h) Successful Completion (the expected completion value in the COMMREQ status word).
12 (0Ch) Local error —Error processing local command. Minor error code identifies the specific error.
1 (01h) Wait-type command is not permitted. Use No-Wait command.
2 (02h) COMMREQ command is not supported.
5 (05h) Error writing COMMREQ status word to PLC memory.
6 (06h) Invalid PLC memory type specified.
7 (07h) Invalid PLC memory offset specified.
8 (08h) Unable to access PLC memory.
12 (0Ch) COMMREQ data block length too small.
14 (0Eh) COMMREQ data is invalid.
13 (0Dh) Remote error — Error processing a remote command. Minor error code identifies the error.
2 (02h) Number of bytes to read exceeds input buffer size, or more than 250 bytes requested to be
written.
3 (03h) COMMREQ data block length is too small. String data is missing or incomplete.
4 (04h) Receive timeout awaiting serial reception of data
8 (08h) Unable to access PLC memory.
12 (0Ch) COMMREQ data block length too small.
48 (30h) Serial output timeout. The port was unable to transmit the string. (Could be missing CTS signal
when the serial port is configured to use hardware flow control.)
50 (32h) COMMREQ timeout. The COMMREQ did not complete within 20-second time limit.
14 (0Eh) Autodial Error — An error occurred while attempting to send a command string to an attached external
modem. The minor error code identifies the specific error.
2 (02h) The modem command string length exceeds end of reference memory type.
3 (03h) COMMREQ Data Block Length too small. Output command string data missing or incomplete.
4 (04h) Serial output timeout. The port was unable to transmit the modem autodial output.
5 (05h) Response was not received from modem. Check modem and cable.
6 (06h) Modem responded with BUSY. Modem is unable to complete the requested connection. The
remote modem is already in use; retry the connection request later.
7 (07h) Modem responded with NO CARRIER. Modem is unable to complete the requested connection.
Check the local and remote modems and the telephone line.
8 (08h) Modem responded with NO DIALTONE. Modem is unable to complete the requested connection.
Check the modem connections and the telephone line.
9 (09h) Modem responded with ERROR. Modem is unable to complete the requested command. Check
the modem command string and modem.

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 541

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Major Error
Description
Code
10 (0Ah) Modem responded with RING; the modem is being called by another modem. Modem is unable
to complete the requested command. Retry the command later.
11 (0Bh) Unknown response from modem. Modem unable to complete the command. Check modem
command string and modem. Response should be CONNECT or OK.
50 (32h) COMMREQ timeout. The COMMREQ did not complete within 20 seconds.

25.4 Serial I/O COMMREQ Commands

The following COMMREQs are used to implement Serial I/O:

• Local COMMREQs - do not receive or transmit data through the serial port.
— Initialize Port (4300)
— Set Up Input Buffer (4301)
— Flush Input buffer (4302)
— Read port status (4303)
— Write port control (4304)
— Cancel Operation (4399)
• Remote COMMREQs - receive and/or transmit data through the serial port.
— Autodial (4400)
— Write bytes (4401)
— Read bytes (4402)
— Read String (4403)

25.4.1 Overlapping COMMREQs

Some of the Serial I/O COMMREQs must complete execution before another COMMREQ can
be processed. Others can be left pending while others are executed.

COMMREQS that Must Complete Execution

• Autodial (4400)
• Initialize Port (4300)
• Set Up Input Buffer (4301)
• Flush Input buffer (4302)
• Read port status (4303)
• Write port control (4304)
• Cancel Operation (4399)
• Serial Port Setup (FFF0)

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 542

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

COMMREQs that Can be Pending While Others Execute

The table below shows whether Write Bytes, Read Bytes and Read String COMMREQs can
be pending when other COMMREQs are executed.

New COMMREQ
Currently- Autodial Write Initialize Set Up Flush Read Write Read Read Cancel Serial
pending (4400) bytes Port Input Input port port bytes String Operation Port
COMMREQs (4401) (4300) Buffer buffer status control (4402) (4403) (4399) Setup
(4301) (4302) (4303) (4304 (FFF0)
Write bytes
No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No
(4401)
Read bytes
No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No
(4402)
Read String
No Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No
(4403)

25.4.2 Initialize Port Function (4300)

This function causes a reset command to be sent to the specified port. It also cancels any
COMMREQ currently in progress and flushes the internal input buffer. RTS is set to
inactive.

Example Command Block for the Initialize Port Function

Value Value Meaning
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
address 0001 0001 Data block length
address +1 0000 0000 NOWAIT mode
address +2 0008 0008 Status word memory type (%R)
address +3 0000 0000 Status word address minus 1 (%R0001)
address +4 0000 0000 Not used
address +5 0000 0000 Not used
address +6 4300 10CC Initialize port command

Operating Notes
Note: COMMREQs that are cancelled due to this command executing do not have their respective
COMMREQ status words updated.

CAUTION
If this COMMREQ is sent when a Write Bytes (4401) COMMREQ is transmitting a string from
a serial port, transmission is halted. The position within the string where the transmission is
halted is indeterminate. In addition, the final character received by the device the Micro PLC
is sending to is also indeterminate.

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 543

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.4.3 Set Up Input Buffer Function (4301)

This function can be used to change the size of the internal memory buffer where input data
will be placed as it is received. By default, the buffer is set to a maximum of 2K bytes. As data
is received from the serial port it is placed in the input buffer. If the buffer becomes full, any
additional data received from the serial port is discarded and the Overflow Error bit in the
Port Status word (See Read Port Status Function) is set.

Retrieving Data from the Buffer

Data can be retrieved from the buffer using the Read String or Read Bytes function. It is not
directly accessible from the application program.

If data is not retrieved from the buffer in a timely fashion, some characters may be lost.

Example Command Block for the Set Up Input Buffer

Function
Value Value(hexadeci Meaning
(decimal) mal)
address 0002 0002 Data block length
address +1 0000 0000 NOWAIT mode
address +2 0008 0008 Status word memory type (%R)
address +3 0000 0000 Status word address minus 1 (%R0001)
address +4 0000 0000 Not used
address +5 0000 0000 Not used
address +6 4301 10CD Setup input buffer command
address +7 0064 0040 Buffer length (in words)

Operating Notes
It is not possible to set the buffer length to zero. If zero is entered as the buffer length, the
buffer size will be set to the 2K bytes default.

If a length greater than 2K bytes is specified, an error is generated.

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 544

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.4.4 Flush Input buffer Function (4302)

This operation empties the input buffer of any characters received through the serial port
but not yet retrieved using a read command. All such characters are lost.

Example Command Block for the Flush Input Buffer Function

Value Value Meaning
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
address 0001 0001 Data block length
address +1 0000 0000 NOWAIT mode
address +2 0008 0008 Status word memory type (%R)
address +3 0000 0000 Status word address minus 1 (%R0001)
address +4 0000 0000 Not used
address +5 0000 0000 Not used
address +6 4302 10CE Flush input buffer command

25.4.5 Read port status Function (4303)

This function returns the current status of the port. The following events can be detected:

1. A read request was initiated previously, and the required number of characters has
now been received or the specified time-out has elapsed.
2. A write request was initiated previously and transmission of the specified number of
characters is complete or a time-out has elapsed.
The status returned by the function indicates the event or events that have completed.
More than one condition can occur simultaneously, if both a read and a write were initiated
previously.

Example Command Block for the Read Port Status Function

Value Value Meaning
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
address 0003 0003 Data block length
address +1 0000 0000 NOWAIT mode
address +2 0008 0008 Status word memory type (%R)
address +3 0000 0000 Status word address minus 1 (%R0001)
address +4 0000 0000 Not used
address +5 0000 0000 Not used
address +6 4303 10CF Read port status command
address +7 0070 0046 Port status memory type (%I)
address +8 0001 0001 Port status memory offset (%I0001)

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 545

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Port Status
The port status consists of a status word and the number of characters in the input buffer
that have not been retrieved by the application (characters which have been received and
are available).

word 1 Port status word (see below)

word 2 Characters available in the input buffer

The Port Status Word can be:

Bit Name Definition Meaning

15 RI Read In Set Read Bytes or Read String invoked
progress Cleared Previous Read bytes or String has timed out, been
canceled, or finished
14 RS Read Success Set Read Bytes or Read String has successfully
completed
Cleared New Read Bytes or Read String invoked
13 RT Read Time- Set Receive timeout occurred during Read Bytes or Read
out String
Cleared New Read Bytes or Read String invoked
12 WI Write In Set New Write Bytes invoked
progress Cleared Previously invoked Write Bytes has timed out, been
canceled, or finished
11 WS Write Set Previously invoked Write Bytes has successfully
Success completed
Cleared New Write Bytes invoked
10 WT Write Time- Set Transmit timeout during Write Bytes
out Cleared New Write Bytes invoked
9 CA Character Set Unread characters are in the buffer
Available Cleared No unread characters in the buffer
8 OF OverFlow Set Overflow error occurred on the serial port or internal
error buffer
Cleared Read Port Status invoked
7 FE Framing Error Set Framing error occurred on the serial port
Cleared Read Port Status invoked
6 PE Parity Error Set Parity error occurred on the serial port
Cleared Read Port Status invoked
5 CT CTS is active Set CTS line on the serial port is active or the serial port
does not have a CTS line
Cleared CTS line on the serial port is not active
4-0 U not used, should be 0

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 546

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.4.6 Write port control Function (4304)

This function forces RTS for the specified port:

Example Command Block for the Write Port Control Function

Value Value Meaning
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
address 0002 0002 Data block length
address +1 0000 0000 NOWAIT mode
address +2 0008 0008 Status word memory type (%R)
address +3 0000 0000 Status word address minus 1 (%R0001)
address +4 0000 0000 Not used
address +5 0000 0000 Not used
address +6 4304 10D0 Write port control command
address +7 xxxx xxxx Port control word

Port Control Word

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RTS U U U U U U U U U U U U U U U

The Port Control Word can be:

15 RTS Commanded state of the RTS output

1 = Activates RTS
0 = Deactivates RTS
0-14 U Unused (should be zero)

Operating Note
For Micro PLC port 2 (RS-485), the RTS signal is also controlled by the transmit driver.
Therefore, control of RTS is dependent on the current state of the transmit driver. If the
transmit driver is not enabled, asserting RTS with the Write Port Control COMMREQ will not
cause RTS to be asserted on the serial line. The state of the transmit driver is controlled by
the protocol and is dependent on the current Duplex Mode of the port. For 2-wire and 4-
wire Duplex Mode, the transmit driver is only enabled during transmitting. Therefore, RTS
on the serial line will only be seen active on port 2 (configured for 2-wire or 4-wire Duplex
Mode) when data is being transmitted. For point-to-point Duplex Mode, the transmit driver
is always enabled. Therefore, in point-to-point Duplex Mode, RTS on the serial line will
always reflect what is chosen with the Write Port Control COMMREQ.

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 547

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.4.7 Cancel COMMREQ Function (4399)

This function cancels the current operations in progress. It can be used to cancel both read
operations and write operations. If a read operation is in progress and there are unprocessed
characters in the input buffer, those characters are left in the input buffer and available for
future reads. The serial port is not reset.

Example Command Block for the Cancel COMMREQ Function

Value Value Meaning
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
address 0002 0002 Data block length
address +1 0000 0000 NOWAIT mode
address +2 0008 0008 Status word memory type (%R)
address +3 0000 0000 Status word address minus 1 (%R0001)
address +4 0000 0000 Not used
address +5 0000 0000 Not used
address +6 4399 112F Cancel operation command
address +7 0001 0001 Transaction type to cancel
1 All operations
2 Read operations
3 Write operations

Operating Notes
This function does not update the status of words of the cancelled COMMREQs.

CAUTION
If this COMMREQ is sent in either Cancel All or Cancel Write mode when a Write Bytes (4401)
COMMREQ is transmitting a string from a serial port, transmission is halted. The position
within the string where the transmission is halted is indeterminate. In addition, the final
character received by the device the Micro PLC is sending to is also indeterminate.

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 548

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.4.8 Autodial Function (4400)

This feature allows the VersaMax Micro PLC to automatically dial a modem and send a
specified byte string.

To implement this feature, the port must be configured for Serial I/O.

For example, pager enunciation can be implemented by three commands, requiring three
COMMREQ command blocks:

• Autodial: 04400 Dials the modem.

(1130h)
• Write Bytes: 04401 Specifies an ASCII string, from 1 to 250 bytes in length, to
(1131h) send from the serial port.
• Autodial: 04400 It is the responsibility of the Micro PLC application
(1130h) program to hang up the phone connection. This is
accomplished by reissuing the autodial command and
sending the hang up command string.

Autodial Command Block

The Autodial command automatically transmits an Escape sequence that follows the Hayes
convention. If you are using a modem that does not support the Hayes convention, you may
be able to use the Write Bytes command to dial the modem.

Examples of commonly used command strings for Hayes-compatible modems are listed
below:

Command String Length Function

ATDP15035559999<CR> 16 (10h) Pulse dial the number 1-503-555-9999
ATDT15035559999<CR> 16 (10h) Tone dial the number 1-503-555-9999
ATDT9,15035559999<CR> 18 (12h) Tone dial using outside line with pause
ATH0<CR> 5 (05h) Hang up the phone
ATZ <CR> 4 (04h) Restore modem configuration to internally saved
values

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 549

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example Autodial Command Block

This example COMMREQ command block dials the number 234-5678 using a Hayes-
compatible modem.

Word Definition Values

1 0009h CUSTOM data block length (includes command string)
2 0000h NOWAIT mode
3 0008h Status word memory type (%R)
4 0000h Status word address minus 1 (Register 1)
5 0000h not used
6 0000h not used
7 04400 (1130h) Autodial command number
8 00030 (001Eh) Modem response timeout (30 seconds)
9 0012 (000Ch) Number of bytes in command string
10 5441h A (41h), T (54h)
11 5444h D (44h), T (54h)
12 3332h Phone number: 2 (32h), 3 (33h)
13 3534h 4 (34h), 5 (35h)
14 3736h 6 (36h), 7 (37h)
15 0D38h 8 (38h) <CR> (0Dh)

25.4.9 Write bytes Function (4401)

This operation can be used to transmit one or more characters to the remote device through
the specified serial port. The character(s) to be transmitted must be in a word reference
memory. They should not be changed until the operation is complete.

Up to 250 characters can be transmitted with a single invocation of this operation. The
status of the operation is not complete until all of the characters have been transmitted or
until a timeout occurs (for example, if hardware flow control is being used and the remote
device never enables the transmission).

Example Command Block for the Write Bytes Function

Value Value Meaning

(decimal) (hexadecima
l)
address 0006 0006 Data block length (includes characters to send)
address +1 0000 0000 NOWAIT mode
address +2 0008 0008 Status word memory type (%R)
address +3 0000 0000 Status word address minus 1 (%R0001)
address +4 0000 0000 Not used
address +5 0000 0000 Not used
address +6 4401 1131 Write bytes command

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 550

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Value Value Meaning

(decimal) (hexadecima
l)
address +7 0030 001E Transmit time-out (30 seconds). See note
below.
address +8 0005 0005 Number of bytes to write
address +9 25960 6568 ‘h’ (68h), ‘e’ (65h)
address +10 27756 6C6C ‘l’ (6Ch), ‘l’ (6Ch)
address +11 0111 006F ‘o’ (6Fh)

Although printable ASCII characters are used in this example, there is no restriction on the
values of the characters that can be transmitted.

Operating Notes
Note: Specifying zero as the Transmit time-out sets the time-out value to the amount of time actually
needed to transmit the data, plus 4 seconds.

CAUTION
If an Initialize Port (4300) COMMEQ is sent or a Cancel Operation (4399) COMMREQ is sent
in either Cancel All or Cancel Write mode while this COMMREQ is transmitting a string from
a serial port, transmission is halted. The position within the string where the transmission
has halted is indeterminate. In addition, the final character received by the device the Micro
PLC is sending to is also indeterminate.

25.4.10 Read bytes Function (4402)

This function causes one or more characters to be read from the specified port. The
characters are read from the internal input buffer and placed in the specified input data area.

The function returns both the number of characters retrieved and the number of
unprocessed characters still in the input buffer. If zero characters of input are requested,
only the number of unprocessed characters in the input buffer is returned.

If insufficient characters are available to satisfy the request and a non-zero value is specified
for the number of characters to read, the status of the operation is not complete until either
sufficient characters have been received or the time-out interval expires. In either of those
conditions, the port status indicates the reason for completion of the read operation. The
status word is not updated until the read operation is complete (either due to timeout or
when all the data has been received).

If the time-out interval is set to zero, the COMMREQ remains pending until it has received
the requested amount of data, or until it is cancelled.

If this COMMREQ fails for any reason, no data is returned to the buffer. Any data that was
already in the buffer remains and can be retrieved with a subsequent read request.

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 551

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example Command Block for the Read Bytes Function

Value Value Meaning
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
address 0005 0005 Data block length
address +1 0000 0000 NOWAIT mode
address +2 0008 0008 Status word memory type (%R)
address +3 0000 0000 Status word address minus 1 (%R0001)
address +4 0000 0000 Not used
address +5 0000 0000 Not used
address +6 4402 1132 Read bytes command
address +7 0030 001E Read time-out (30 seconds)
address +8 0005 0005 Number of bytes to read
address +9 0008 0008 Input data memory type (%R).
address +10 0001 0001 Input data memory address (%R0001)

Return Data Format for the Read Bytes Function

The return data consists of the number of characters actually read, the number of characters
still available in the input buffer after the read is complete (if any), and the actual input
characters.

Address Number of characters actually read

Address + 1 Number of characters still available in the input buffer, if any
Address + 2 first two characters (first character is in the low byte)
Address + 3 third and fourth characters (third character is in the low byte)
Address + n subsequent characters

Operating Note
If the input data memory type parameter is specified to be a word memory type and an
odd number of bytes are actually received, then the high byte of the last word to be
written with the received data is set to zero.

As data is received from the serial port it is placed in the internal input buffer. If the buffer
becomes full, then any additional data received from the serial port is discarded and the
Overflow Error bit in the Port Status word (See Read Port Status Function) is set.

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 552

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

25.4.11 Read String Function (4403)

This function causes characters to be read from the specified port until a specified
terminating character is received. The characters are read from the internal input buffer and
placed in the specified input data area.

The function returns both the number of characters retrieved and the number of
unprocessed characters still in the input buffer. If zero characters of input are requested,
only the number of unprocessed characters in the input buffer is returned.

If the terminating character is not in the input buffer, the status of the operation is not
complete until either the terminating character has been received or the time-out interval
expires. In either of those conditions, the port status indicates the reason for completion of
the read operation.

If the time-out interval is set to zero, the COMMREQ remains pending until it has received
the requested string, terminated by the specified end character.

If this COMMREQ fails for any reason, no data is returned to the buffer. Any data that was
already in the buffer remains and can be retrieved with a subsequent read request.

Example Command Block for the Read String Function

Value Value Meaning
(decimal) (hexadecimal)
address 0005 0005 Data block length
address +1 0000 0000 NOWAIT mode
address +2 0008 0008 Status word memory type (%R)
address +3 0000 0000 Status word address minus 1 (%R0001)
address +4 0000 0000 Not used
address +5 0000 0000 Not used
address +6 4403 1133 Read string command
address +7 0030 001E Read time-out (30 seconds)
address +8 0013 000D Terminating character (carriage return):
must be between 0 and 255 (0xFF),
inclusive
address +9 0008 0008 Input data memory type (%R)
address +10 0001 0001 Input data memory address (%R0001)

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 553

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Return Data Format for the Read String Function

The return data consists of the number of characters actually read, the number of characters
still available in the input buffer after the read is complete (if any), and the actual input
characters:

Address Number of characters actually read

Address + 1 Number of characters still available in the input buffer, if any
Address + 2 first two characters (first character is in the low byte)
Address + 3 third and fourth characters (third character is in the low byte)
Address + n subsequent characters

Operating Note
If the input data memory type parameter is specified to be a word memory type and an odd
number of bytes are actually received, then the high byte of the last word to be written with
the received data is set to zero.

As data is received from the serial port it is placed in the internal input buffer. If the buffer
becomes full, then any additional data received from the serial port is discarded and the
Overflow Error bit in the Port Status word (See Read Port Status Function) is set.

Example
The following Block Move will set up values to perform a serial I/O port configuration. In this
example, port 2 is being configured. The entries of the first Block Move set up the following:

IN1 Length of the data block, which is always16 for a configuration COMMREQ

IN2 Wait/No Wait flag: 0 for No Wait

IN3 Status Word pointer: 8 signifies %R

IN4 Status word pointer offset; this number is zero based, so 0 points to %R1

IN5 Idle timeout value; not used with No Wait mode

IN6 Maximum communication time; not used with No Wait mode

IN7 Command Word; FFF0 hex is the command for serial port setup

In the second Block Move:

IN1 Protocol selector; 5 selects Serial I/O

IN2 Port mode; 0 selects slave mode

IN3 Data rate; 6 selects 19200

IN4 Parity; 1 selects odd

IN5 Flow control; 1 selects none

IN6 Turnaround delay; 0 selects none

IN7 Timeout; 0 selects none

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 554

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

In the third Block Move:

IN1 Bits per character; 1 chooses 8 bits per character

IN2 Stop bits; 0 selects 1 stop bit

IN3 Interface; not used so set to 0

IN4 Duplex mode; 1 selects 4-wire

IN5 – IN7 Not used

Figure 373

%R1 is used as the status word for the COMMREQ. The following rung clears the word before
the COMMREQ is issued:

Figure 374

The following logic issues a COMMREQ for port 2. The SYSID is set to rack 0 slot 1. The TASK
ID of 20 defines port 2. The IN-parameter points to %AI1 which is where all the configuration
data was placed with the Block Move statements. If an error occurs, the bit COMMREQP1bad
(%T6) will be set.

Figure 375

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 555

User Manual Chapter 25
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

The following rung sets the bit COMMREQ Complete (%T7), which keeps the COMMREQ
from being issued more than once and keeps the status from being overwritten.

Figure 376

Serial I/O, SNP & RTU Protocols 556

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 26: PID Function

This chapter describes the PID (Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative) function, which is
used for closed-loop process control. The PID function compares feedback from a process
variable with a desired process set point and updates a Control Variable based on the error.

• Format of the PID Function

• Operation of the PID Function
• Parameter Block for the PID Function
• PID Algorithm Selection
• Determining the Process Characteristics
• Setting Parameters Including Tuning Loop Gains
• Sample PID Call

26.1 Format of the PID Function

The PID function uses PID loop gains and other parameters stored in an array of 40 16 bit
words to solve the PID algorithm at the desired time interval. All parameters are 16-bit
integer words. This allows %AI memory to be used for input Process Variables and %AQ to
be used for output Control Variables.

Figure 377

The PID function does not pass power flow if there is an error in the configurable
parameters. It can be monitored using a temporary coil while modifying data.

PID Function 557

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

26.1.1 Parameters of the PID Function

Input/ Choices Description
Output
enable flow When enabled through a contact, the PID algorithm is performed.
SP I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, The control loop or process set point. Set using process variable
AQ, constant counts, the PID function adjusts the output control variable so that
the process variable matches the set point (zero error).
PV I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, Process Variable input from the process being controlled, often a
AQ %AI input.
MAN flow When energized to 1 (through a contact), the PID block is in
manual mode. If the PID block is on manual off, the PID block is in
automatic mode.
UP flow If energized along with MAN, it adjusts the control variable up by 1
CV per solution.20
DN flow If energized along with MAN, it adjusts the control variable down by
1 CV per solution.20
Address R Location of the PID control block information (user and internal
parameters). Uses 40 %R words that cannot be shared.
ok flow, none OK is energized when the function is performed without error. It is
Off if errors exist.
CV I, Q, M, T, G, R, AI, The control variable output to the process, often a %AQ output.
AQ

As scaled 16 integer numbers, many parameters must be defined in either Process Variable
(PV) counts or units or Control Variable (CV) counts or units. For example, the Set Point (SP)
input must be scaled over the same range as the Process Variable as the PID block calculates
the error by subtracting these two inputs. The Process Variable and Control Variable Counts
may be –32000 or 0 to 32000 matching analog scaling or from 0 to 10000 to display
variables as 0.00% to 100.00%. The Process Variable and Control Variable Counts do not
have to have the same scaling, in which case there will be scale factors included in the PID
gains.

20
Incremented (UP parameter) or decremented (DN parameter) by one (1) per access of the PID function.

PID Function 558

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

26.2 Operation of the PID Function

26.2.1 Automatic Operation
The PID function can be called every sweep by providing power flow to Enable and no power
flow to Manual input contacts. The block compares the current PLC elapsed time clock with
the last PID solution time stored in the internal RefArray. If the difference is greater than the
sample period defined in the third word (%Ref+2) of the RefArray, the PID algorithm is solved
using the time difference. Both the last solution time and Control Variable output are
updated. In Automatic mode, the output Control Variable is placed in the Manual Command
parameter %Ref+13.

26.2.2 Manual Operation

The PID block is placed in Manual mode by providing power flow to both the Enable and
Manual input contacts. The output Control Variable is set from the Manual Command
parameter %Ref+13. If either the UP or DN inputs have power flow, the Manual Command
word is incremented or decremented by one CV count every PID solution. For faster manual
changes of the output Control Variable, it is also possible to add or subtract any CV count
value directly to/from the Manual Command word

The PID block uses the CV Upper and CV Lower Clamp parameters to limit the CV output. If
a positive Minimum Slew Time is defined, it is used to limit the rate of change of the CV
output. If either the CV amplitude or rate limit is exceeded, the value stored in the integrator
is adjusted so that CV is at the limit. This anti-reset windup feature means that even if the
error tried to drive CV above (or below) the clamps for a long period of time, the CV output
will move off the clamp as soon as the error term changes sign.

This operation, with the Manual Command tracking CV in Automatic mode and setting CV
in Manual mode, provides a bumpless transfer between Automatic and Manual modes. The
CV Upper and Lower Clamps and the Minimum Slew Time still apply to the CV output in
Manual mode and the internal value stored in the integrator is updated. This means that if
you were to step the Manual Command in Manual mode, the CV output will not change any
faster than the Minimum Slew Time (Inverse) rate limit and will not go above or below the
CV Upper or CV Lower Clamp limits.

PID Function 559

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

26.2.3 Time Interval for the PID Function

The PID will not execute more often than once every 10 milliseconds. If it is set up to execute
every sweep and the sweep is under 10 ms, the PID function will not run until enough sweeps
have occurred to accumulate an elapsed time of 10 ms. For example, if the sweep time is 9
ms, the PID function executes every other sweep, so the overall elapsed time between
executions is 18 ms. A specific PID function should not be called more than once per sweep.

The longest possible interval between executions is 10.9 minutes. The PID function
compensates for the actual time elapsed since the last execution within 100µS.

The PID algorithm is solved only if the current Micro PLC elapsed time clock is at or later than
the last PID solution time plus the sample period. If the sample period is set to 0, the
function executes each time it is enabled; however, it is restricted to a minimum of 10 ms
as noted above.

26.2.4 Scaling Input and Outputs

All parameters of the PID function are 16 bit integer words for compatibility with 16 bit
analog process variables. Some parameters must be defined in either process variable
counts or units or control variable counts or units.

The set point input must be scaled over the same range as process variable, because the PID
function calculates error by subtracting these two inputs. The process variable and control
variable counts do not have to use the same scaling. Either may be -32000 or 0 to 32000 to
match analog scaling, or from 0 to 10000 to display variables as 0.00% to 100.00%. If the
process and control variables do not use the same scaling, scale factors are included in the
PID gains.

Example of the PID Function

The example shown below includes typical inputs.

Figure 378

PID Function 560

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

26.3 Parameter Block for the PID Function

The parameter block for the PID function occupies 40 words of %R memory. Many of the 40
words are used by the Micro PLC and not configurable. Every PID function call must use a
different 40-word memory area even if all 13 configurable parameters are the same.

The first 13 words of the parameter block must be specified before executing the PID
function. Zeros can be used for most default values. Once suitable PID values have been
chosen, they can be defined as constants in a BLKMOV so they can be changed by the
program as needed.

26.3.1 Internal Parameters in RefArray

The PID function reads 13 parameters and uses the rest of the 40-word RefArray for internal
PID storage. Normally you would not change these values. If you call the PID block in Auto
mode after a long delay, you may want to use SVCREQ 16 to load the current PLC elapsed
time clock into %Ref+23 to update the last PID solution time to avoid a step change on the
integrator. If you have set the Override low bit of the Control Word (%Ref+14) to 1, the next
four bits of the Control Word must be set to control the PID block input contacts, and the
Internal SP and PV must be set as you have taken control of the PID block away from the
ladder logic.

Parameter Low Bit Units Range Description

Address Loop Integer 0 to 255. Optional number of the PID block. It provides a
Number common identification in the PLC with the loop
number defined by an operator interface device.
Address +1 Algorithm - Set by the PLC 1 = ISA algorithm
2 = independent algorithm
Address+2 Sample 10ms 0 (every sweep) The shortest time, in 10mS increments, between
Period to 65535 (10.9 solutions of the PID algorithm. For example, use a 10
Min) At least for a 100mS sample period.
10ms.
Address+3 Deadband + PV Counts 0 to 32000 INT values defining the upper (+) and lower (-)
Address+4 and (+ never Deadband limits in PV Counts. If no Deadband is
Deadband - negative) required, these values must be 0. If the PID Error (SP -
(- never positive) PV) or (PV - SP) is above the (-) value and below the (+)
value, the PID calculations are solved with an Error of
0. If non-zero, the (+) value must greater than 0 and
the (-) value less than 0 or the PID block will not
function.
Leave these at 0 until the PID loop gains are set up or
tuned. A Deadband might be added to avoid small CV
output changes due to variations in error.

PID Function 561

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameter Low Bit Units Range Description

Address+5 Proportional 0.01 CV%/PV% 0 to 327.67% Change in the control variable in CV Counts for a 100
Gain -Kp PV Count change in the Error term. A Kp entered as
(Controller 450 is displayed as 4.50 and results in a Kp*Error/100
gain, Kc, in or 450*Error/100 contribution to the PID Output. Kp
the ISA is generally the first gain set when adjusting a PID loop.
version)
Address+6 Derivative 0.01 seconds 0 to 327.67 sec Change in the control variable in CV Counts if the Error
Gain-Kd or PV changes 1 PV Count every 10ms. Entered as a
time with the low bit indicating 10ms. For example, a
Kd entered as 120 is displayed as 1.20 Sec and results
in a Kd * delta Error/delta time or 120*4/3
contribution to the PID Output if Error was changing
by 4 PV Counts every 30ms. Kd can be used to speed
up a slow loop response but is very sensitive to PV
input noise.
Address+7 Integral Rate- Repeat/1000 0 to 32.767 Change in the control variable in CV Counts if the Error
Ki Sec repeat/sec were a constant 1 PV Count. Displayed as 0.000
Repeats/Sec with an implied decimal point of 3. For
example, a Ki entered as 1400 is displayed as 1.400
Repeats/Sec and results in a Ki * Error * dt or 1400 *
20 * 50/1000 contribution to PID Output for an Error
of 20 PV Counts and a 50ms PLC sweep time (Sample
Period of 0). Ki is usually the second gain set after Kp.
Address+8 CV Bias/ CV Counts -32000 to Number of CV Counts added to the PID Output before
Output 32000 (add to the rate and amplitude clamps. It can be used to set
Offset integrator non-zero CV values if only Kp Proportional gains are
output) used, or for feed forward control of this PID loop
output from another control loop.
Address+9 CV Upper CV Counts -32000 to Number of CV Counts that define the highest and
Address+10 and 32000 lowest value for CV. These values are required. The
Lower (>%Ref+10) Upper Clamp must have a more positive value than the
Clamps Lower Clamp, or the PID block will not work. These are
usually used to define limits based on physical limits
for a CV output. They are also used to scale the Bar
Graph display for CV. The block has anti-reset windup
to modify the integrator value when a CV clamp is
reached.

PID Function 562

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameter Low Bit Units Range Description

Address+11 Minimum Seconds/Full 0 (none) to Minimum number of seconds for the CV output to
Slew Time Travel 32000 sec to move from 0 to full travel of 100% or 32000 CV Counts.
move 32000 CV It is an inverse rate limit on how fast the CV output can
be changed.
If positive, CV cannot change more than 32000 CV
Counts times Delta Time (seconds) divided by
Minimum Slew Time. For example, if the Sample
Period is 2.5 seconds and the Minimum Slew Time is
500 seconds, CV cannot change more than
32000*2.5/500 or 160 CV Counts per PID solution.
The integrator value is adjusted if the CV rate limit is
exceeded. If Minimum Slew Time is 0, there is no CV
rate limit. Set Minimum Slew Time to 0 while tuning or
adjusting PID loop gains.

PID Function 563

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameter Low Bit Units Range Description

Address+12 Config Word Low 6 bits used The low 6 bits of this word are used to modify six
default PID settings. The 10 high-order bits should be
set to 0.
Bit 0: Error Polarity. Setting this bit to 1 modifies the
standard PID Error Term from the normal (SP – PV) to
(PV – SP), reversing the sign of the feedback term. This
is for Reverse Acting controls where the CV must go
down when the PV goes up.
Bit 1: Output Polarity: Setting this bit to 1 inverts the
Output Polarity so that CV is the negative of the
output rather than the normal positive value.
Bit 2: Setting this bit to 1 removes the setpoint from
the Derivative calculation.
Bit 3: Deadband Action: When this bit is 0, no
deadband action is chosen. If the error is within the
deadband limits, the error is to be zero. Otherwise the
error is not affected by the deadband limit. If this bit is
1, the deadband action is chosen. If the error is within
the deadband limits, the error is forced to be zero. If,
however, the error is outside the deadband limits, the
error is reduced by the deadband limit (error = error –
deadband limit).
Bit 4: Anti-reset windup action. When this bit is 0, the
anti-reset windup action uses a reset back calculation.
When the output is clamped, this replaces the
accumulated Y remainder value with whatever value is
necessary to produce the clamped output exactly.
When the bit is 1, this replaces accumulated Y term
with the value of the Y term at the start of the
calculation. In this way, the pre-clamp Y value is held
as long as the output is clamped.
Bit 5: Enable derivative filtering. When this bit is set to
0, no filtering is applied to the derivative term.
When bit 5 is set to 1, a first order filter is applied. This
limits the effects of higher frequency process
disturbances on the derivative term.

PID Function 564

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameter Low Bit Units Range Description

Bit 0 – Bit 5: Remember that the bits are set in
powers of 2.
To set bit 0, add 1 to the Config Word parameter
value.
To set bit 1, add 2.
To set bit 2, add 4.
To set bit 3, add 8.
To set bit 4, add 16.
To set bit 5, add 32.
For example, set Config Word to 0 for default PID
configuration. Add 1 to change the Error Term from
SP - PV to PV - SP, add 2 to change the Output Polarity
from CV = PID Output to CV = – PID Output, or add 4
to change Derivative Action from Error rate of change
to PV rate of change, etc.
Address+13 Manual CV Counts Tracks CV in Set to the current CV output while the PID block is in
Command Auto or Sets CV Automatic mode. When the block is switched to
in Manual Manual mode, this value is used to set the CV output
and the internal value of the integrator within the
Upper and Lower Clamp and Slew Time limits.
Address+14 Control Word Maintained by PLC maintained If the Override low bit is set to 1, this word and other
the PLC, unless unless set internal SP, PV and CV parameters must be used for
Bit 1 is set. otherwise: low remote operation of this PID block (see below). This
bit sets Override allows remote operator interface devices, such as a
if 1. computer, to take control away from the PLC
program.

CAUTION
If you do not want this to happen, make sure
the Control Word is set to 0. If the low bit is 0,
the next 4 bits can be read to track the status
of the PID input contacts as long as the PID
Enable contact has power.

A discrete data structure with the first five bit positions

in the following format:
Bit Word Function Status or External
Value Action if Override bit
set to 1
0 1 Override If 0, monitor block
contacts below. If 1, set
them externally.

PID Function 565

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Parameter Low Bit Units Range Description

1 2 Manual If 1, block is in Manual
/Auto mode; other numbers it
is in Automatic mode.
2 4 Enable Should normally be 1;
otherwise block is never
called.
3 8 UP If 1 and Manual (Bit 1) is
/Raise 1, CV is being
incremented every
solution.
4 16 DN If 1 and Manual (Bit 1) is
/Lower 1, CV is being
incremented every
solution.
Address+15 Internal SP Set and Non- Tracks SP in; must be set externally if
maintained by configurable Override = 1.
the PLC
Address+16 Internal CV “ “ Tracks CV out.
Address+17 Internal PV “ “ Tracks PV in; must be set externally if
Override bit = 1.
Address+18 Output “ “ Signed word value representing the output of the
function block before the optional inversion. If no
output inversion is configured and the output polarity
bit in the control word is set to 0, this value equals the
CV output. If inversion is selected and the output
polarity bit is set to 1, this value equals the negative of
the CV output.
Address+19 Diff Term
Storage
Address+20 Int Term Used internally for storage of intermediate values. Do
Address+21 Storage not write to these locations
Address+22 Slew Term
Storage
Address+23 Clock Internal elapsed time storage (time last PID executed).
to Do not write to these locations
Address+25
Address+26 Y Remainder Holds remainder for integrator division scaling for 0
Storage steady state error.
Address+27 SP, PV Lower PV Counts -32000 to Optional INT values in PV Counts that define high and
Address+28 and Upper 32000 low display values. (Ref +27 must be lower than
Range Ref+28)
Address+29 Reserved N/A Non- 29-34 are reserved for internal use; 35-39 are reserved
to configurable for external use. Do not use these references.
Address+39

PID Function 566

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

26.4 PID Algorithm Selection (PIDISA or PIDIND)

and Gains
The PID block can be programmed selecting either the Independent (PID_IND) term or
standard ISA (PID_ISA) versions of the PID algorithm. The only difference in the algorithms
is how the Integral and Derivative gains are defined.

26.4.1 Error Term

The Independent (PID_IND) term and standard ISA (PID_ISA) versions of the PID algorithm
both calculate the Error Term as:

Error Term (in Normal Mode) = Set Point (SP) – Process Variable (PV)

Error Term in Reverse-Action Mode

The Error Term calculation can be changed to Reverse Action mode:

Error Term (in Reverse Action Mode) = Process Variable (PV) – Set Point (SP)

by setting the Error Term (low bit 0 in the Config Word %Ref+12) to 1.

Effect of the Process Variable on the Control Variable

In Normal mode, the Control Variable (CV) responds to changes in the Process Variable (PV)
by moving in the same direction. In Reverse-Action mode, when the Process Variable goes
up, the Control Variable goes down.

26.4.2 Derivative Term

The Derivative term is the time rate of change of the Error term in the interval since the last
PID solution.

Derivative = ∆Error / Delta time (dt) = (Error – previous Error) / Delta time (dt)
where

Delta time (dt) = Current PLC elapsed time - PLC elapsed time at previous PID solution.
In Normal Mode (without Reverse-Action mode), this is equal to the change in the Error
term.

(Error – previous Error) = (SP – PV) – (previous SP – previous PV)

= (previous PV – PV) – (previous SP – SP)
However, when the Reverse-Action mode bit (bit 0) in the Config Word is set, the sign of the
change in the Error term is reversed.

(Error – previous Error) = (PV – SP) – (previous PV – previous SP)

= (PV – previous PV) – (SP – previous SP)
The change in the Error term depends on changes in both the Set Point and the Process
Variable. If the Set Point is constant, the difference between SP and the previous SP is zero

PID Function 567

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

and has no effect on the output. However, Set Point changes can cause large changes in the
Derivative term and in the output.

Removing Set Point Changes from the Derivative Calculation

Loop stability can be improved by eliminating the effect of Set Point changes on the
Derivative term. Set the third bit (bit 2) of the Config Word to 1 to calculate the derivative
based only on the change in PV.

For bit 2 set in normal mode (bit 0 = 0),

(Error – previous Error) = (previous PV – PV),

and with bit 2 set in Reverse-Action mode (bit 0 = 1),

(Error – previous Error) = (PV – previous PV).

26.4.3 Delta Time

The dt (or Delta Time) is determined by subtracting the last PID solution clock time for this
block from the current PLC elapsed time clock.

dt = Current PLC Elapsed Time clock - PLC Elapsed Time Clock at Last PID
solution
Derivative = (Error - previous Error)/dt or
(PV - previous PV)/dt if 3rd bit of Config Word set to 1

The Independent term PID (PID_IND) algorithm calculates the output as:

PID Output = Kp * Error + Ki * Error * dt + Kd * Derivative + CV Bias

The standard ISA (PID_ISA) algorithm has a different form:

PID Output = Kc * (Error + Error * dt/Ti + Td * Derivative) + CV Bias

where Kc is the controller gain, and Ti is the Integral time and Td is the Derivative time. The
advantage of ISA is that adjusting the Kc changes the contribution for the integral and
derivative terms as well as the proportional one, which may make loop tuning easier. If you
have PID gains in terms or Ti and Td, use

Kp = Kc Ki = Kc/Ti and Kd = Kc/Td

to convert them to use as PID User Parameter inputs.

The CV Bias term above is an additive term separate from the PID components. It may be
required if you are using only Proportional Kp gain and you want the CV to be a non-zero
value when the PV equals the SP and the Error is 0. In this case, set the CV Bias to the desired
CV when the PV is at the SP. CV Bias can also be used for feed forward control where another
PID loop or control algorithm is used to adjust the CV output of this PID loop.

If an Integral Ki gain is used, the CV Bias would normally be 0 as the integrator acts as an
automatic bias. Just start up in Manual mode and use the Manual Command word (%Ref+13)
to set the integrator to the desired CV, then switch to Automatic mode. This also works if Ki

PID Function 568

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

is 0, except the integrator will not be adjusted based on the Error after going into Automatic
mode.

26.4.4 Independent Term Algorithm (PIDIND)

The following diagram shows how the PID algorithms work:

Figure 379

The ISA Algorithm (PIDISA) is similar except the Kp gain is factored out of Ki and Kd so that
the integral gain is Kp * Ki and derivative gain is Kp * Kd. The Error sign, DerivAction and
Polarity are set by bits in the Config Word user parameter.

CV Amplitude and Rate Limits

The block does not send the calculated PID Output directly to CV. Both PID algorithms can
impose amplitude and rate of change limits on the output Control Variable. The maximum
rate of change is determined by dividing the maximum 100% CV value (32000) by the
Minimum Slew Time, if specified as greater than 0. For example, if the Minimum Slew Time
is 100 seconds, the rate limit will be 320 CV counts per second. If the dt solution time was
50 ms, the new CV output cannot change more than 320*50/1000 or 16 CV counts from
the previous CV output.

The CV output is then compared to the CV Upper and CV Lower Clamp values. If either limit
is exceeded, the CV output is set to the clamped value. If either rate or amplitude limits are
exceeded modifying CV, the internal integrator value is adjusted to match the limited value
to avoid reset windup.

Finally, the block checks the Output Polarity (2nd bit of the Config Word %Ref+12) and
changes the sign of the output if the bit is 1.

CV = Clamped PID Output or

- Clamped PID Output if Output Polarity bit set
If the block is in Automatic mode, the final CV is placed in the Manual Command %Ref+13.
If the block is in Manual mode, the PID equation is skipped as CV is set by the Manual
Command, but all the rate and amplitude limits are still checked. That means that the
Manual Command cannot change the output above the CV Upper Clamp or below the CV
Lower Clamps and the output cannot change faster than the Minimum Slew Time allowed.

PID Function 569

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

26.4.5 Sample Period and PID Block Scheduling

The PID block is a digital implementation of an analog control function, so the dt sample
time in the PID Output equation is not the infinitesimally small sample time available with
analog controls. The majority of processes being controlled can be approximated as a gain
with a first or second order lag, possibly with a pure time delay. The PID block sets a CV
output to the process and uses the process feedback PV to determine an Error to adjust the
next CV output. A key process parameter is the total time constant, which is how fast does
the PV respond when the CV is changed. As discussed in the Setting Loop Gains section
below, the total time constant, Tp+Tc, for a first order system is the time required for PV to
reach 63% of its final value when CV is stepped. The PID block will not be able to control a
process unless its Sample Period is well under half the total time constant. Larger Sample
Periods will make it unstable.

The Sample Period should be no bigger than the total time constant divided by 10 (or down
to 5, worst case). For example, if PV seems to reach about 2/3 of its final value in 2 seconds,
the Sample Period should be less than 0.2 seconds, or 0.4 seconds worst case. On the other
hand, the Sample Period should not be too small, such as less than the total time constant
divided by 1000, or the Ki * Error * dt term for the PID integrator will round down to 0. For
example, a very slow process that takes 10 hours or 36000 seconds to reach the 63% level
should have a Sample Period of 40 seconds or longer.

Unless the process is very fast, it is not usually necessary to use a Sample Period of 0 to solve
the PID algorithm every PID sweep. If many PID loops are used with a Sample Period greater
than the sweep time, there may be wide variations in PLC sweep time if many loops end up
solving the algorithm at the same time. The simple solution is to sequence a one or more 1
bits through an array of bits set to 0 that is being used to enable power flow to individual PID
blocks.

PID Function 570

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

26.5 Determining the Process Characteristics

The PID loop gains, Kp, Ki and Kd, are determined by the characteristics of the process being
controlled. Two key questions when setting up a PID loop are:

1. How big is the change in PV when we change CV by a fixed amount, or what is the
open loop gain?
2. How fast does the system respond, or how quickly does PV change after the CV
output is stepped?
Many processes can be approximated by a process gain, first or second order lag and a pure
time delay. In the frequency domain, the transfer function for a first order lag system with a
pure time delay is:

PV(s)/CV(s) = G(s) = K * e **(-Tp s)/(1 + Tc s)

Plotting a step response at time t0 in the time domain provides an open loop unit reaction
curve:

Figure 380

The following process model parameters can be determined from the PV unit reaction
curve:

K Process open loop gain = final change in PV/change in CV at time t0

(Note no subscript on K)
Tp Process or pipeline time delay or dead time after t0 before the process output
PV starts moving
Tc First order Process time constant, time required after Tp for PV to reach 63.2%
of the final PV

Usually the quickest way to measure these parameters is by putting the PID block in Manual
mode and making a small step in CV output, by changing the Manual Command %Ref+13,
and plotting the PV response over time. For slow processes, this can be done manually, but
for faster processes a chart recorder or computer graphic data logging package will help.
The CV step size should be large enough to cause an observable change in PV, but not so
large that it disrupts the process being measured. A good size may be from 2 to 10% of the
difference between the CV Upper and CV Lower Clamp values.

PID Function 571

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

26.6 Setting Parameters Including Tuning Loop

Gains
As all PID parameters are totally dependent on the process being controlled, there are no
predetermined values that will work; however, it is usually simple to find acceptable loop
gain.

1. Set all the User Parameters to 0, then set the CV Upper and CV Lower Clamps to the
highest and lowest CV expected. Set the Sample Period to the estimated process
time constant (above)/10 to 100.
2. Put block in Manual mode and set Manual Command (%Ref+13) at different values
to check if CV can be moved to Upper and Lower Clamp. Record PV value at some
CV point and load it into SP.
3. Set a small gain, such as 100 * Maximum CV/Maximum PV, into Kp and turn off
Manual mode. Step SP by 2 to 10% of the Maximum PV range and observe PV
response. Increase Kp if PV step response is too slow or reduce Kp if PV overshoots
and oscillates without reaching a steady value.
4. Once a Kp is found, start increasing Ki to get overshooting that dampens out to a
steady value in 2 to 3 cycles. This may require reducing Kp. Also try different step
sizes and CV operating points.
5. After suitable Kp and Ki gains are found, try adding Kd to get quicker responses to
input changes providing it doesn't cause oscillations. Kd is often not needed and will
not work with noisy PV.
6. Check gains over different SP operating points and add Deadband and Minimum
Slew Time if needed. Some Reverse Acting processes may need setting Config Word
Error Sign or Polarity bits.

PID Function 572

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

26.6.1 Setting Loop Gains Using the Ziegler and Nichols Tuning
Approach
Once the three process model parameters, K, Tp and Tc, are determined, they can be used
to estimate initial PID loop gains. The following approach provides good response to system
disturbances with gains producing an amplitude ratio of 1/4. The amplitude ratio is the ratio
of the second peak over the first peak in the closed loop response.

1. Calculate the Reaction rate:

R = K/Tc
2. For Proportional control only, calculate Kp as:
Kp = 1/(R * Tp) = Tc/(K * Tp)
For Proportional and Integral control, use:
Kp = 0.9/(R * Tp) = 0.9 * Tc/(K * Tp)
Ki = 0.3 * Kp/Tp

For Proportional, Integral and Derivative control, use:

Kp = G/(R * Tp) where G is from 1.2 to 2.0
Ki = 0.5 * Kp/Tp
Kd = 0.5 * Kp * Tp

3. Check that the Sample Period is in the range

(Tp + Tc)/10 to (Tp + Tc)/1000

26.6.2 The Ideal Tuning Method

The “Ideal Tuning" procedure provides the best response to SP changes, delayed only by the
Tp process delay or dead time.

Kp = 2 * Tc/(3 * K * Tp)
Ki = Tc
Kd = Ki/4 if Derivative term is used

Once initial gains are determined, convert them to integers. Calculate the Process gain K as
a change in input PV Counts divided by the output step change in CV Counts and not in
process PV or CV engineering units. Specify all times in seconds. Once Kp, Ki and Kd are
determined, Kp and Kd can be multiplied by 100 and entered as integer while Ki can be
multiplied by 1000 and entered into the User Parameter %RefArray.

PID Function 573

User Manual Chapter 26
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

26.7 Sample PID Call

The following PID example has a sample period of 100Ms, a Kp gain of .4.00 and a Ki gain of
1.500. The set point is stored in %R0001, the control variable output in %AQ0002, and the
process variable is returned in %AI0003. CV Upper and CV Lower Clamps must be set, in this
case to 20000 and 4000, and an optional small Deadband of +5 and -5 has been included.
The 40-word RefArray starts in %R0100. Normally User Parameters are set in the RefArray,
but %M0006 can be set to reinitialize the 14 words starting at %R0102 (%Ref+2) from
constants stored in logic (a useful technique).

Figure 381

The block can be switched to Manual mode with %M1 so that the Manual Command, %R113,
can be adjusted. Bits %M4 or %M5 can be used to increase or decrease %R113 and the PID
CV and integrator by 1 every 100 ms solution. For faster manual operation, bits %M2 and
%M3 can be used to add or subtract the value in %R2 to/from %R113 every PLC sweep. The
%T1 output is on when the PID is OK.
PID Function 574
User Manual Chapter 27
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Chapter 27: Reading and Writing Data in

Flash Memory
For Release 3.0 and later VersaMax Micro PLCs, two Service Request commands can be used
to read or write flash memory during run time:

• SVCREQ 52: Reads from Flash Memory into Reference Memory

• SVCREQ 53: Writes from Reference Memory into Flash Memory
Chapter 22: gives details of using use these Service Request commands in the application
program.

This chapter describes the Logic-driven Write to Flash feature, and gives application
program examples.

27.1 Logic-Driven Write to Flash

For a VersaMax Micro PLC, one of the configuration choices is whether the CPU will read the
initial values from flash or RAM at power-up. If RAM is the choice, the CPU will read the
reference tables data from its RAM memory at power-up.

If “Read from flash” is the configured choice, the CPU will read previously stored reference
tables from flash memory at power-up. In addition, Release 3.0 and later VersaMax Micro
PLCs (which includes all 20-, 40-, and 64-Point Micro PLCs) will also read from flash all data
that has been stored to flash using Service Request 53. This feature is called “Logic-drive
write to flash”.

The logic-driven flash data area is cleared using the programmer. When storing an
application to the PLC, if “Write All To Flash” is configured, all data that has been written to
flash using Service Request 53 is automatically deleted. The data area can also be cleared by
using the flash-EEPROM tab and selecting Write All Data to Flash. This option is not available
during Run mode due to the time required to erase flash.

27.1.1 Data Quantities

For 20-, 40-, or 64-point Micro PLCs, the flash memory used for the Logic-driven write to
flash feature has a total size of 8192 bytes. Of this, 8 bytes are reserved and cannot be used.
So the maximum available capacity is 8184 bytes. For 14, 23, and 28-point Micro PLCs, the
Logic-driven user flash memory is 64kB (65536 bytes) and the maximum available capacity
is 65528 after 8 bytes are reserved.

Each execution of Service Request 52 or 53 can transfer:

• 1 to 10 words of %R, %AI, or %AQ reference data plus 6 bytes of command data. That
means a 1-word write to flash requires 8 bytes of flash memory, while a 10-word
write to flash requires 26 bytes of flash memory ((10 words X 2 bytes per word) + 6
bytes of command data).

Reading and Writing Data in Flash Memory 575

User Manual Chapter 27
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

• 1 to 10 bytes of %I, %Q, %M, %T, or %G reference data plus 6 bytes of command data.
A 1-byte write to flash requires 7 bytes of flash memory, while a 10-byte write to
flash occupies 16 bytes of flash memory.
Therefore, because each request requires 6 bytes of command data, the most efficient use
of flash is by transferring data in 10-word increments.

27.1.2 If Flash Memory Becomes Full

If Service Request 53 attempts to write more data to flash memory than the maximum
available, a fault is logged in the PLC Fault Table.

Fault Group APPLICATION_FLT 22

Fault Action DIAGNOSTIC 2

Error Code USERFLASH_FULL 204

Error Message Logic Driven Userflash Full

If a Logic Driven Userflash Full fault is logged in the PLC Fault Table, the PLC must be power
cycled.

After power-cycling the PLC, if another Logic Driven Userflash Full fault is logged, the
contents of flash memory must be completely erased by downloading new logic with ‘Write
All To Flash’ selected during download to PLC. After power-cycling the PLC, data can again
be stored in flash until the Logic Driven Userflash Full “fault is logged again.

The same configuration and application program must be stored on RAM and PLC flash to
use this feature. It should not be done with configuration stored with ‘Read from flash’ set
and ladder program on RAM. If the program on RAM calls Service Request 53 to store
reference memory on flash, then the PLC is power-cycled, if the configuration says to read
data from flash, the data will be read but the application program may not be the same one
that called Service Request 53.

27.1.3 Important Note

Service request 53 (Logic driven write to flash) should be performed with caution after an
operation is performed that makes the application in RAM not equal to the application in
flash. The following are few such operations:

• Word for word change or Run Mode store

• Stop mode store of logic to RAM only
• Logic and Registers stored to Flash during Stop mode store, but CPU is configured
to read Logic from RAM and Registers from Flash on power up.
Such operations may make the data stored by Service request 53 incompatible with the
application in flash and hence need to be used carefully.

Reading and Writing Data in Flash Memory 576

User Manual Chapter 27
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example 1: Writing Data to Flash Memory

This example writes 10 continuous bytes from PLC references %G0001 through %G0080 into
flash memory. In this example, the segment selector (56) is for byte access and so are the
offsets and lengths.

Figure 382

Example 2: Reading Data from Flash Memory

This example reads the same 10 continuous bytes from %G0001 through %G0080 from
flash into %G reference memory into the PLC.

Figure 383

Reading and Writing Data in Flash Memory 577

User Manual Chapter 27
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example 3: Writing Over Data in Reference Memories

By changing values, the same logic can be used to write over some data in the same
reference memories.

Figure 384

Results of Example 3
In this example, the status words returned for Service Request begin at PLC reference
%G00321.

Figure 385

Reading and Writing Data in Flash Memory 578

User Manual Chapter 27
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example 4: Multiple Writes and Reads

This four-part example shows how to perform multiple reads and writes on a 64-point CPU.

Example 4, Part 1
The first part of this example:

Writes %R0001 through %R0010 from PLC reference memory to flash. Return Write status
data to PLC references starting at %R0051.

Reads back %R0001 through %R0010 from flash into CPU references %R0061 through
%R0070. It returns status data into PLC references starting at %R0071.

Figure 386

Reading and Writing Data in Flash Memory 579

User Manual Chapter 27
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Results of Example 4, Part 1

Looking at the references used by this part of Example 4:

• %R0051 shows the Write status as 1. That means all data was successfully written.
• %R0052 shows that 10 words of data have been written to flash.
• %R0053 shows the remaining available flash memory as 8158 bytes. Note: The
available memory will be 65518 for 14, 23, or 28-point Micro PLCs.
The Read status references are not shown here.

Figure 387

Example 4, Part 2
The next part of Example 4:

1. Writes the contents of PLC references %R0015 through %R0024 into flash. It returns
Write status data to PLC references starting at %R0081.
2. Reads flash references %R0015 through %R0024 into PLC references %R0091
through %R0100 and returns Read status information to PLC references starting at
%R0101.

Reading and Writing Data in Flash Memory 580

User Manual Chapter 27
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 388

Reading and Writing Data in Flash Memory 581

User Manual Chapter 27
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Results of Example 4, Part 2

For Example 4, Part 2, the Write status references start at %R0081:

• %R0081 shows status as 1 signifying full success (all data written)

• %R0082 shows that 10 words of data have been stored
• %R0083 shows that the available flash memory is 8132
The Read status references, which start at %R101, are not shown here. However, the Write
status references from part 1 of this example, starting at %R0051, are shown.

Figure 389

Example 4, Part 3
This part of Example 4:

1. Writes PLC references %R0008 through %R0017 to flash and returns Write status
data to PLC references starting at %R0111. This single Service Request:
— Overwrites the values in %R0008 through %R0010 that were written in Example
4 Part 1.
— Writes new data into %R0011 through %R0014.
— Overwrites the values in %R0015 through %R0017 that were written in Example
4 Part 2.
2. Reads %R0008 through %R017 from flash into PLC references %R0121 through
%R0130 and returns Read status data to PLC references starting at %R0131.

Reading and Writing Data in Flash Memory 582

User Manual Chapter 27
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Figure 390

Reading and Writing Data in Flash Memory 583

User Manual Chapter 27
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Results of Example 4, Part 3

For Example, 4, Part 3, the Write status references start at %R0111:

• The value in status reference %R0111 is 257 (0x0101). That indicates partial success,
because not all 10 bytes of data were written to flash. Error 257 may occur if some
requested data is already stored in user flash, as was done in this example.
• %R0112 shows that only 7 words of data were stored, not the 10 words requested.
• %R0113 shows that the remaining available flash memory is 8112 bytes.
The Read status references start at %R0131:

• %R0131 shows that the Read Service Request completed successfully.

• %R0132 shows that 10 words of data were read.

Figure 391

Reading and Writing Data in Flash Memory 584

User Manual Chapter 27
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Example 4, Part 4
This part of the example program logic:

1. Reads flash references %R0011 through %R0020 into PLC references %R0141
through %R0150 and returns Read status information to PLC memory starting at
%R0151.
2. Reads flash references %R0021 through %R0030 into PLC references %R0161
through %R0170 and returns Read status information to PLC memory starting at
%R0171.

Figure 392

Reading and Writing Data in Flash Memory 585

User Manual Chapter 27
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Results of Example 4, Part 4

For Example 4, Section 4, the Read status references start at %R0151 and %R0171:

• The value in Read status reference %R0151 is 1. The Read operation was successful.
• %R0152 shows that all 10 words of data were read into PLC memory.
• The value in Read status reference %R0171 is 257 (0x0101). That indicates partial
success, because not all 10 bytes of data were written to flash. That can occur if not
enough memory is available in the selected PLC reference area for the data that has
been read from flash.
• %R0172 shows that only 4 words of data were read.

Figure 393

Reading and Writing Data in Flash Memory 586

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Appendix A: Instruction Timing

This appendix contains tables listing the memory size in bytes and the execution times in
microseconds for each function supported by a VersaMax Nano PLC or Micro PLC.

• Notes on Timing Information

• Typical Execution Times for Boolean Contacts
• Typical Execution Times for Release 4.0 CPUs
• Typical Execution Times for Release 3.8 CPUs
• Typical Execution Times for Release 3.0 CPUs
• Typical Execution Times for Release 2.0 CPUs
• Typical Execution Times for Release 1.1 CPUs
• Typical Execution Times for Release 1.0 CPUs

A-1 Notes on the Timing Information

A-1.1 Execution Times with Function Block Enabled or
Disabled
Two execution times are shown for each type of function block, labeled "enabled" and
"disabled".

For each instance of the function block in the logic program:

• the value in the "enabled" column represents a range of typical contribution times
when the function block receives power flow during that sweep.
• the value in the "disabled" column represents the typical contribution time when the
function block is not receiving power flow during that sweep and/or there is power
flow to reset of the function block.
• All timing values represent typical execution time. Actual execution time may vary
with input and error conditions.

A-1.2 Additional Notes

1. Timers and counters are updated each time they are encountered in the logic; timers
by the amount of time consumed by the last sweep and counters by one count.
2. For bit operation functions, L = the number of bits. For bit position, N = the bit that
is set. For data move functions, N = the number of bits or words. B= the number of
bits shifted more than 1 (that is, not counting the first bit). W = the number of words.
3. Memory size refers to the number of bytes required by the function in a ladder
diagram application program.
4. For table functions, increment is in units of length specified.
5. Enabled time for single length units of type %R, %AI, and %AQ.

Instruction Timing 587

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

6. The DO I/O function block timing represents execution on 8 points (%I0001 to

%I0008).

A-2 Typical Execution Times for Boolean Contacts

Boolean contact execution times for Boolean logic are as follows:

CPU Releases
3.8 3.0 2.0, 1.10 1.07 1.05 1.0
10-point Nano PLCs 1.4 ms/K 1.3 ms/K 1.3 ms/K N/A N/A 1.2 ms/K
14-point Micro PLCs 1.5 ms/K 1.1 ms/K 1.1 ms/K N/A N/A 1.0 ms/K
20-point Micro PLCs 1.7 ms/K N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
23-point Micro PLCs 1.5 ms/K 1.1 ms/K 1.1 ms/K N/A N/A 1.0 ms/K
28-point Micro PLCs 1.5 ms/K 1.1 ms/K 1.1 ms/K N/A 1.0 ms/K 1.0 ms/K
40-point Micro PLCs 1.7 ms/K N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
28-point Micro PLC
with ESCP 1.3 ms/K 1.0 ms/K 1.0 ms/K 1.0 ms/K N/A N/A
(IC200UDD120)
64-point Micro PLC 1.7 ms/K 1.7 ms/K N/A N/A N/A N/A

A-2.1 Sweep Times for Micro-64 CPUs

No expansion units connected = 2.9ms to 3.1ms

With 1 expansion unit = 3.5ms to 3.8ms

With 2 expansion unit = 3.8ms to 4ms

With 3 expansion unit = 4.3ms to 4.5ms

With 4 expansion unit = 4.4ms to 5ms

Instruction Timing 588

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

A-3 Typical Execution Times for Release 4.0 CPUs

The following table details function block timing for Release 4.0, Micro PLCs.

For each instance of a function block, the table shows typical execution times when the
function block is enabled (receiving power flow) or disabled (not receiving power flow).

Execution Time
(Range in µsec.)
20-/40-/64-Point
Group Function Size bytes Enabled Disabled
Timers Off Delay Timer 15 93 63
On Delay Timer 15 97 70
Elapsed Timer 15 70 51
Counters Up Counter 13 64 59
Down Counter 13 59 57
Math Addition (INT) 13 39 9
Addition (DINT) 19 52 9
Addition (REAL) 17 138 9
Subtraction (INT) 13 34 9
Subtraction (DINT) 19 40 9
Subtraction (REAL) 17 153 9
Multiplication (INT) 13 43 9
Multiplication (DINT) 13 33 9
Multiplication (REAL) 17 145 9
Division (INT) 13 58 9
Division (DINT) 19 43 9
Division (REAL) 17 237 9
Modulo Division (INT) 13 57 9
Modulo Division (DINT) 19 59 9
Square Root (INT) 10 55 9
Square Root (DINT) 13 46 9
Square Root (REAL) 11 557 9
Trigonometric SIN (REAL) 11 1534 9
COS (REAL) 11 1630 9
TAN (REAL) 11 2316 12
ASIN (REAL) 11 1638 9
ACOS (REAL) 11 1638 9
ATAN (REAL) 11 951 9
Logarithmic LOG (REAL) 11 1001 9
LN (REAL) 11 915 9

Instruction Timing 589

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time
(Range in µsec.)
20-/40-/64-Point
Group Function Size bytes Enabled Disabled
Exponential Power of e 11 703 9
Power of X 11 368 9
Radian Conv Convert RAD to DEG 11 379 9
Convert DEG to RAD 17 79 9
Relational Equal (INT) 10 35 9
Equal (DINT 16 25 9
Equal (REAL) 14 40 9
Not Equal (INT) 10 22 9
Not Equal (DINT) 16 38 9
Not Equal (REAL) 14 46 9
Greater Than (INT) 10 31 9
Greater Than (DINT) 16 30 9
Greater Than (REAL) 14 41 10
Greater Than/Equal (INT) 10 22 9
Greater Than/Equal (DINT) 16 24 9
Greater Than/Equal (REAL) 14 36 9
Less Than (INT) 10 22 9
Less Than (DINT) 16 24 9
Less Than (REAL) 14 36 9
Less Than/Equal (INT) 10 21 9
Less Than/Equal (DINT) 16 24 9
Less Than/Equal (REAL) 14 40 9
Range (INT) 13 26 9
Range (DINT) 22 29 9
Range (WORD) 13 26 9
Bit Operation Logical AND 13 33 9
Logical OR 13 32 9
Logical Exclusive OR 13 33 9
Logical Invert, NOT 10 28 9
Shift Bit Left 16 204 10
Shift Bit Right 16 139 10
Rotate Bit Left 16 88 9
Rotate Bit Right 16 106 9
Bit Position 13 57 9
Bit Clear 13 57 9
Bit Test 13 35 9

Instruction Timing 590

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time
(Range in µsec.)
20-/40-/64-Point
Group Function Size bytes Enabled Disabled
Bit Set 13 52 9
Mask Compare (WORD) 25 129 9
Mask Compare (DWORD) 25 113 9
Data Move Move (INT) 10 27 9
Move (BOOL) 13 62 9
Move (WORD) 10 26 9
Move (REAL) 13 41 9
Block Move (INT) 28 34 9
Block Move (WORD) 28 34 9
Block Move (REAL) 13 61 11
Block Clear (WORD) 11 59 9
Shift Register (BIT) 16 103 10
Shift Register (WORD) 16 85 10
Bit Sequencer 16 97 93
COMMREQ 13 1035 245
Table Array Move (INT) 22 83 9
Array Move(DINT) 22 71 9
Array Move (BOOL) 22 116 9
Array Move (BYTE) 22 77 9
Array Move (WORD) 22 83 9
Search Equal (INT) 19 70 9
Search Equal (DINT) 22 62 9
Search Equal (BYTE) 19 56 9
Search Equal (WORD) 19 70 9
Search Not Equal (INT) 19 61 9
Search Not Equal (DINT) 22 71 9
Search Not Equal (BYTE) 19 55 9
Search Not Equal (WORD) 19 68 9
Search Greater/Equal (INT) 19 65 9
Search Greater/Equal (DINT) 22 70 9
Search Greater/Equal (BYTE) 19 44 9
Search Greater/Equal (WORD) 19 61 9
Search Greater Than (INT) 19 82 9
Search Greater Than (DINT) 22 82 9
Search Greater Than (BYTE) 19 55 9
Search Greater Than (WORD) 19 70 9

Instruction Timing 591

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time
(Range in µsec.)
20-/40-/64-Point
Group Function Size bytes Enabled Disabled
Search Less Than (INT) 19 66 9
Search Less Than (DINT) 22 78 9
Search Less Than (BYTE) 19 43 9
Search Less Than (WORD) 19 64 9
Search Less/Equal (INT) 19 64 9
Search Less/Equal (DINT) 22 60 9
Search Less/Equal (BYTE) 19 56 9
Search Less/Equal (WORD) 19 64 9
Conversion Convert INT to REAL 10 53 9
Convert REAL to INT 13 766 9
Convert DINT to REAL 13 45 9
Convert REAL to DINT 13 757 9
Convert WORD to REAL 10 35 9
Convert REAL to WORD 13 757 9
Convert BDC to INT 10 40 9
Convert INT to BCD 10 109 9
Convert BCD to REAL 10 47 9
Truncate to INT 13 175 9
Truncate to DINT 13 156 9
Control Call a Subroutine 7 36 7
Do I/O 13 275 9
Service Request #6 10 90 9
Service Request #7 Read 10 426 9
Service Request #7 Write 10 1012 9
Service Request #9 10 145 9
Service Request #14 10 315 9
Service Request #15 10 25 9
Service Request #16 10 162 9
Service Request #18 10 81 9
Service Request #23 10 316 9
Service Request #26, #30 10 510 9
Service Request #29 10 92 9
Service Request #34 10 11 9
Service Request #35 10 19 17
Service Request #52 10 420 9
Service Request #53 10 1082 9

Instruction Timing 592

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time
(Range in µsec.)
20-/40-/64-Point
Group Function Size bytes Enabled Disabled
Nested MCR/ENDMCR 4 5 5
PID-ISA Algorithm 16 236 59
PID-IND Algorithm 16 236 59
Communication MODBUS_TCP_RW 21
41 214 40

A-4 Typical Execution Times for Release 3.8 CPUs

The following table details function block timing for Release 3.8, Micro PLCs.

For each instance of a function block, the table shows typical execution times when the
function block is enabled (receiving power flow) or disabled (not receiving power flow).

Execution Time (Range in µsec.)

per PLC Type
20-/40-/64-Point
Group Function Size bytes Enabled Disabled
Timers Off Delay Timer 15 68-76 49-56
On Delay Timer 15 70-78 55-62
Elapsed Timer 15 69-74 36-42
Counters Up Counter 13 44-51 40-47
Down Counter 13 64-71 62-69
Math Addition (INT) 13 33-38 4-10
Addition (DINT) 19 45-51 4-10
Addition (REAL) 17 134-139 4-10
Subtraction (INT) 13 24-29 3-8
Subtraction (DINT) 19 29-34 3-8
Subtraction (REAL) 17 104-109 3-8
Multiplication (INT) 13 37-42 4-10
Multiplication (DINT) 13 28-33 4-10
Multiplication (REAL) 17 134-139 4-10
Division (INT) 13 54-59 4-10
Division (DINT) 19 42-47 5-10
Division (REAL) 17 220-225 5-10
Modulo Division (INT) 13 45-50 5-10
Modulo Division (DINT) 19 54-60 5-10
Square Root (INT) 10 29-34 3-8
Square Root (DINT) 13 34-39 3-8

21
For the MODBUS_TCP_RW function block, time between Execute ON to busy ON is 720 µSec.

Instruction Timing 593

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (Range in µsec.)

per PLC Type
20-/40-/64-Point
Group Function Size bytes Enabled Disabled
Square Root (REAL) 11 453-459 3-8
Trigonometric SIN (REAL) 11 1142-1148 3-8
COS (REAL) 11 1328-1333 4-10
TAN (REAL) 11 1633-1639 3-8
ASIN (REAL) 11 1633-1639 5-10
ACOS (REAL) 11 1633-1639 4-10
ATAN (REAL) 11 850-856 4-10
Logarithmic LOG (REAL) 11 889-894 5-10
LN (REAL) 11 820-825 4-10
Exponential Power of e 11 618-623 4-10
Power of X 11 339-344 4-10
Radian Conv Convert RAD to DEG 11 347-353 5-10
Convert DEG to RAD 17 78-84 4-10
Relational Equal (INT) 10 25-30 4-10
Equal (DINT 16 19-25 4-10
Equal (REAL) 14 36-41 4-10
Not Equal (INT) 10 17-22 4-10
Not Equal (DINT) 16 33-38 5-10
Not Equal (REAL) 14 45-51 4-10
Greater Than (INT) 10 28-33 4-10
Greater Than (DINT) 16 22-27 4-10
Greater Than (REAL) 14 48-53 4-10
Greater Than/Equal (INT) 10 17-22 4-10
Greater Than/Equal (DINT) 16 19-24 5-10
Greater Than/Equal (REAL) 14 37-42 4-10
Less Than (INT) 10 17-22 4-10
Less Than (DINT) 16 19-24 4-10
Less Than (REAL) 14 37-42 4-10
Less Than/Equal (INT) 10 17-22 4-10
Less Than/Equal (DINT) 16 19-24 4-10
Less Than/Equal (REAL) 14 37-42 5-10
Range (INT) 13 21-26 4-10
Range (DINT) 22 23-29 4-10
Range (WORD) 13 21-26 5-10
Bit Logical AND 13 33-38 4-10
Operation Logical OR 13 34-39 4-10

Instruction Timing 594

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (Range in µsec.)

per PLC Type
20-/40-/64-Point
Group Function Size bytes Enabled Disabled
Logical Exclusive OR 13 28-33 3-8
Logical Invert, NOT 10 29-35 4-10
Shift Bit Left 16 158-164 4-10
Shift Bit Right 16 102-108 4-10
Rotate Bit Left 16 98-103 5-10
Rotate Bit Right 16 88-93 5-10
Bit Position 13 48-53 4-10
Bit Clear 13 51-56 4-10
Bit Test 13 32-37 4-10
Bit Set 13 43-48 4-10
Mask Compare (WORD) 25 122-127 4-9
Mask Compare (DWORD) 25 97-102 4-10
Data Move Move (INT) 10 22-27 5-10
Move (BOOL) 13 53-58 4-10
Move (WORD) 10 22-27 4-10
Move (REAL) 13 31-37 5-10
Block Move (INT) 28 28-34 5-10
Block Move (WORD) 28 28-34 4-10
Block Move (REAL) 13 51-57 4-10
Block Clear (WORD) 11 47-52 4-10
Shift Register (BIT) 16 89-94 4-10
Shift Register (WORD) 16 63-69 4-10
Bit Sequencer 16 82-91 78-87
COMMREQ 13 845 210-215
Table Array Move (INT) 22 74-79 4-10
Array Move(DINT) 22 65-71 4-10
Array Move (BOOL) 22 105-110 4-10
Array Move (BYTE) 22 68-74 4-10
Array Move (WORD) 22 73-79 5-10
Search Equal (INT) 19 60-66 5-10
Search Equal (DINT) 22 61-67 5-10
Search Equal (BYTE) 19 43-48 5-10
Search Equal (WORD) 19 62-67 5-10
Search Not Equal (INT) 19 45-50 3-8
Search Not Equal (DINT) 22 52-58 3-8
Search Not Equal (BYTE) 19 29-35 3-8
Search Not Equal (WORD) 19 45-51 3-8

Instruction Timing 595

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (Range in µsec.)

per PLC Type
20-/40-/64-Point
Group Function Size bytes Enabled Disabled
Search Greater/Equal 19
(INT) 49-54 5-10
Search Greater/Equal 22
(DINT) 51-56 5-10
Search Greater/Equal 19
(BYTE) 48-53 5-10
Search Greater/Equal 19
(WORD) 58-63 5-10
Search Greater Than (INT) 19 51-57 3-8
Search Greater Than 22
(DINT) 54-59 3-8
Search Greater Than 19
(BYTE) 45-50 3-8
Search Greater Than 19
(WORD) 45-50 3-8
Search Less Than (INT) 19 42-47 3-8
Search Less Than (DINT) 22 51-57 3-8
Search Less Than (BYTE) 19 43-49 3-8
Search Less Than (WORD) 19 57-63 3-8
Search Less/Equal (INT) 19 53-58 3-8
Search Less/Equal (DINT) 22 55-60 3-8
Search Less/Equal (BYTE) 19 42-47 3-8
Search Less/Equal 19
(WORD) 44-49 3-8
Conversion Convert INT to REAL 10 33-39 4-10
Convert REAL to INT 13 723-729 4-10
Convert DINT to REAL 13 29-34 4-10
Convert REAL to DINT 13 741-747 5-10
Convert WORD to REAL 10 38-43 4-10
Convert REAL to WORD 13 728-733 4-10
Convert BDC to INT 10 51-56 4-10
Convert INT to BCD 10 107-112 4-10
Convert BCD to REAL 10 51-56 4-10
Truncate to INT 13 149-155 3-8
Truncate to DINT 13 142-147 3-8
Control Call a Subroutine 7 31-36 2-7
Do I/O 13 248-253 5-10
Service Request #6 10 51-56 3-8

Instruction Timing 596

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (Range in µsec.)

per PLC Type
20-/40-/64-Point
Group Function Size bytes Enabled Disabled
Service Request #7 Read 10 296-301 3-9
Service Request #7 Write 10 1372-1378 1-5
Service Request #9 10 82-88 3-8
Service Request #14 10 245-251 3-8
Service Request #15 10 146-151 3-8
Service Request #16 10 71-77 3-8
Service Request #18 10 65-70 3-8
Service Request #23 10 212-217 3-8
Service Request #26, #30 10 323-328 3-8
Service Request #29 10 39-44 3-8
Service Request #34 10 n/a n/a
Service Request #35 10 n/a n/a
Service Request #52 10 364-369 3-8
Service Request #53 10 1012-1016 9
Nested MCR/ENDMCR 4 4 4
PID-ISA Algorithm 16 213-221 46-54
PID-IND Algorithm 16 217-219 52-53

Instruction Timing 597

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

A-5 Typical Execution Times for Release 3.0 CPUs

The following table details function block timing for Release 3.0, Micro PLCs.

For each instance of a function block, the table shows typical execution times when the
function block is enabled (receiving power flow) or disabled (not receiving power flow).

Execution Time (Range in µsec.) per PLC Type

64-Point 14-/23-/28-pt 28-pt ESCP Nano
Size Disable
Group Function Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
bytes d
Timers Off Delay Timer 15 68-76 49-56 64-71 35-41 55-60 31-36 61-67 33-38
On Delay Timer 15 70-78 55-62 79-85 43-49 63-69 37-42 71-76 40-45
Elapsed Timer 15 69-74 36-42 66-71 53-58 49-53 39-43 60-64 49-53
Counters Up Counter 13 44-51 40-47 57-63 54-61 41-46 39-45 53-59 50-55
Down Counter 13 64-71 62-69 48-55 47-53 41-47 39-45 42-48 40-46
Math Addition (INT) 13 33-38 4-10 30-35 4-9 27-31 4-8 28-33 4-8
Addition (DINT) 19 45-51 4-10 41-47 4-9 35-39 4-8 38-43 4-8
Addition (REAL) 17 134-139 4-10 109-114 4-9 87-91 4-8 114-119 4-8
Subtraction (INT) 13 24-29 3-8 26-31 4-9 21-25 3-7 24-29 4-8
Subtraction (DINT) 19 29-34 3-8 31-36 4-9 24-28 3-7 29-33 4-8
Subtraction (REAL) 17 104-109 3-8 125-130 4-9 88-91 3-7 113-117 4-8
Multiplication (INT) 13 37-42 4-10 34-39 4-9 30-34 4-8 31-36 4-8
Multiplication (DINT) 13 28-33 4-10 25-30 4-9 23-27 4-8 23-27 4-8
Multiplication (REAL) 17 134-139 4-10 126-131 4-9 101-104 4-8 106-110 4-8
Division (INT) 13 54-59 4-10 43-48 4-9 37-41 4-8 44-49 4-8
Division (DINT) 19 42-47 5-10 27-32 4-9 25-28 4-8 37-42 4-8
Division (REAL) 17 220-225 5-10 206-211 4-9 165-169 4-8 184-188 4-8
Modulo Division
13 45-50 5-10 43-49 4-9 38-42 4-8 45-50 4-8
(INT)
Modulo Division
19 54-60 5-10 41-46 4-9 36-39 4-8 49-53 4-8
(DINT)
Square Root (INT) 10 29-34 3-8 32-37 4-9 24-28 3-7 29-34 4-8
Square Root (DINT) 13 34-39 3-8 36-42 4-9 30-34 3-7 34-39 4-8
Square Root (REAL) 11 453-459 3-8 498-504 4-9 336-340 3-7 449-454 4-8
Trigonome 1142- 1246-
SIN (REAL) 11 3-8 4-9 869-873 3-7 1131-1135 4-8
tric 1148 1251
1328- 1212-
COS (REAL) 11 4-10 4-9 964-967 4-8 1088-1092 4-8
1333 1217
1633- 1634- 1290-
TAN (REAL) 11 3-8 4-9 3-7 1634-1639 4-8
1639 1639 1293
1633- 1634- 1383-
ASIN (REAL) 11 5-10 4-9 4-8 1581-1586 4-8
1639 1639 1387
1633- 1634- 1354-
ACOS (REAL) 11 4-10 4-9 4-8 1537-1542 4-8
1639 1639 1358
ATAN (REAL) 11 850-856 4-10 782-788 4-9 616-620 4-8 704-709 4-8
LOG (REAL) 11 889-894 5-10 826-831 4-9 650-654 4-8 744-749 4-8

Instruction Timing 598

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (Range in µsec.) per PLC Type

64-Point 14-/23-/28-pt 28-pt ESCP Nano
Size Disable
Group Function Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
bytes d
Logarithmi
LN (REAL) 11 820-825 4-10 757-762 4-9 597-600 4-8 690-694 4-8
c
Exponentia Power of e 11 618-623 4-10 562-568 4-9 442-446 4-8 512-517 4-8
l Power of X 11 339-344 4-10 327-332 4-9 254-258 4-8 294-299 4-8
Radian Convert RAD to DEG 11 347-353 5-10 319-324 4-9 252-256 34-38 295-300 4-8
Conv Convert DEG to RAD 17 78-84 4-10 78-83 4-9 63-67 4-8 75-79 4-8
Relational Equal (INT) 10 25-30 4-10 22-28 4-9 20-24 4-8 21-26 4-8
Equal (DINT 16 19-25 4-10 18-23 4-9 17-20 4-8 16-21 4-8
Equal (REAL) 14 36-41 4-10 31-36 4-9 27-31 4-8 34-39 4-8
Not Equal (INT) 10 17-22 4-10 15-21 4-9 15-18 4-8 14-19 4-8
Not Equal (DINT) 16 33-38 5-10 29-35 4-9 26-29 4-8 28-32 4-8
Not Equal (REAL) 14 45-51 4-10 35-40 4-9 30-34 4-8 35-39 4-8
Greater Than (INT) 10 28-33 4-10 26-31 4-9 22-26 4-8 24-29 4-8
Greater Than (DINT) 16 22-27 4-10 19-25 4-9 18-21 4-8 18-23 4-8
Greater Than (REAL) 14 48-53 4-10 34-39 4-9 30-33 4-8 32-37 4-8
Greater Than/Equal
10 17-22 4-10 16-21 4-9 14-18 4-8 15-19 4-8
(INT)
Greater Than/Equal
16 19-24 5-10 17-23 4-9 16-20 4-8 16-20 4-8
(DINT)
Greater Than/Equal
14 37-42 4-10 34-39 4-9 29-33 4-8 21-26 4-8
(REAL)
Less Than (INT) 10 17-22 4-10 15-21 4-9 14-18 4-8 14-19 4-8
Less Than (DINT) 16 19-24 4-10 17-22 4-9 16-20 4-8 16-20 4-8
Less Than (REAL) 14 37-42 4-10 23-29 4-9 22-25 4-8 22-26 4-8
Less Than/Equal (INT) 10 17-22 4-10 15-21 4-9 15-19 4-8 15-19 4-8
Less Than/Equal
16 19-24 4-10 17-22 4-9 16-20 4-8 16-20 4-8
(DINT)
Less Than/Equal
14 37-42 5-10 24-29 4-9 22-25 4-8 22-26 4-8
(REAL)
Range (INT) 13 21-26 4-10 19-25 4-9 18-22 4-8 18-22 4-8
Range (DINT) 22 23-29 4-10 21-27 4-9 20-24 4-8 20-24 4-8
Range (WORD) 13 21-26 5-10 19-24 4-9 18-21 4-8 18-23 4-8
Bit Logical AND 13 33-38 4-10 31-36 4-9 27-31 4-8 28-32 4-8
Operation Logical OR 13 34-39 4-10 30-35 4-9 27-31 4-8 28-32 4-8
Logical Exclusive OR 13 28-33 3-8 30-35 4-9 23-27 3-7 28-33 4-8
Logical Invert, NOT 10 29-35 4-10 27-32 4-9 24-27 4-8 25-29 4-8
Shift Bit Left 16 158-164 4-10 118-123 5-10 127-131 4-8 161-166 5-9
Shift Bit Right 16 102-108 4-10 113-118 5-10 80-84 4-8 103-107 5-9
Rotate Bit Left 16 98-103 5-10 84-89 4-9 67-71 4-8 76-81 4-8
Rotate Bit Right 16 88-93 5-10 88-93 4-9 71-75 4-8 80-84 4-8
Bit Position 13 48-53 4-10 43-48 4-9 38-41 4-8 40-44 4-8
Bit Clear 13 51-56 4-10 46-52 4-9 34-38 3-7 43-47 4-8

Instruction Timing 599

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (Range in µsec.) per PLC Type

64-Point 14-/23-/28-pt 28-pt ESCP Nano
Size Disable
Group Function Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
bytes d
Bit Test 13 32-37 4-10 29-35 4-9 26-29 4-8 27-32 4-8
Bit Set 13 43-48 4-10 39-44 4-9 34-38 4-8 37-41 4-8
Mask Compare
25 122-127 4-9 108-113 4-9 89-93 3-7 99-104 3-8
(WORD)
Mask Compare
25 97-102 4-10 94-99 3-9 77-81 3-7 80-84 4-8
(DWORD)
Data Move (INT) 10 22-27 5-10 20-25 4-9 18-22 4-8 18-23 4-8
Move Move (BOOL) 13 53-58 4-10 49-54 4-9 42-46 4-8 45-50 4-8
Move (WORD) 10 22-27 4-10 20-25 4-9 18-22 4-8 18-23 4-8
Move (REAL) 13 31-37 5-10 28-33 4-9 26-29 4-8 26-31 4-8
Block Move (INT) 28 28-34 5-10 26-31 4-9 24-27 4-8 24-28 4-8
Block Move (WORD) 28 28-34 4-10 25-31 4-9 24-27 4-8 24-28 4-8
Block Move (REAL) 13 51-57 4-10 47-52 4-9 43-47 4-8 51-55 10-14
Block Clear (WORD) 11 47-52 4-10 43-48 4-9 38-42 4-8 40-45 4-8
Shift Register (BIT) 16 89-94 4-10 95-100 5-10 69-72 4-8 87-92 5-9
Shift Register
16 63-69 4-10 73-78 5-10 54-58 4-8 67-71 5-9
(WORD)
Bit Sequencer 16 82-91 78-87 71-79 67-75 59-65 56-62 73-81 70-77
COMMREQ 13 82-87 16-21 75-80 12-17 62-66 11-15 65-70 16-21
Table Array Move (INT) 22 74-79 4-10 67-72 4-9 58-61 4-8 62-66 4-8
Array Move(DINT) 22 65-71 4-10 60-65 4-9 52-56 4-8 54-58 4-8
Array Move (BOOL) 22 105-110 4-10 90-95 4-9 75-79 4-8 83-87 4-8
Array Move (BYTE) 22 68-74 4-10 63-68 4-9 54-58 4-8 58-62 4-8
Array Move (WORD) 22 73-79 5-10 66-72 4-9 58-61 4-8 62-66 4-8
Search Equal (INT) 19 60-66 5-10 58-63 4-9 49-53 4-8 53-58 4-8
Search Equal (DINT) 22 61-67 5-10 53-58 4-9 45-49 4-8 48-52 4-8
Search Equal (BYTE) 19 43-48 5-10 49-54 4-9 42-46 4-8 45-50 4-8
Search Equal
19 62-67 5-10 58-63 4-9 49-53 4-8 54-58 4-8
(WORD)
Search Not Equal
19 45-50 3-8 59-64 4-9 44-48 3-7 54-59 4-8
(INT)
Search Not Equal
22 52-58 3-8 52-57 4-9 41-44 3-7 48-53 4-8
(DINT)
Search Not Equal
19 29-35 3-8 41-46 4-9 31-35 3-7 38-43 4-8
(BYTE)
Search Not Equal
19 45-51 3-8 59-64 4-9 44-48 3-7 54-59 4-8
(WORD)
Search Greater/
19 49-54 5-10 53-58 4-9 40-44 3-7 49-54 4-8
Equal (INT)
Search Greater/
22 51-56 5-10 54-59 4-9 40-44 3-7 51-55 4-8
Equal (DINT)
Search Greater/
19 48-53 5-10 38-43 4-9 30-34 3-7 34-39 4-8
Equal (BYTE)

Instruction Timing 600

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (Range in µsec.) per PLC Type

64-Point 14-/23-/28-pt 28-pt ESCP Nano
Size Disable
Group Function Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
bytes d
Search Greater/
19 58-63 5-10 50-55 4-9 38-42 3-7 46-50 4-8
Equal (WORD)
Search Greater Than
19 51-57 3-8 55-60 4-9 42-46 3-7 51-56 4-8
(INT)
Search Greater Than
22 54-59 3-8 49-54 4-9 38-41 3-7 46-51 4-8
(DINT)
Search Greater Than
19 45-50 3-8 47-52 4-9 36-40 3-7 44-48 4-8
(BYTE)
Search Greater Than
19 45-50 3-8 49-54 4-9 38-42 3-7 46-51 4-8
(WORD)
Search Less Than
19 42-47 3-8 57-62 4-9 42-46 3-7 53-57 4-8
(INT)
Search Less Than
22 51-57 3-8 66-72 4-9 49-53 3-7 61-66 4-8
(DINT)
Search Less Than
19 43-49 3-8 38-43 4-9 30-33 3-7 36-40 4-8
(BYTE)
Search Less Than
19 57-63 3-8 55-60 4-9 41-45 3-7 50-54 4-8
(WORD)
Search Less/Equal
19 53-58 3-8 55-60 4-9 41-45 3-7 52-56 4-8
(INT)
Search Less/Equal
22 55-60 3-8 58-63 4-9 43-46 3-7 54-58 4-8
(DINT)
Search Less/Equal
19 42-47 3-8 32-37 4-9 25-29 3-7 30-34 4-8
(BYTE)
Search Less/Equal
19 44-49 3-8 42-47 4-9 32-36 3-7 39-43 4-8
(WORD)
Conversion Convert INT to REAL 10 33-39 4-10 34-39 4-9 29-32 4-8 28-33 4-8
Convert REAL to INT 13 723-729 4-10 683-688 4-9 543-547 4-8 629-634 4-8
Convert DINT to REAL 13 29-34 4-10 35-41 4-9 30-34 4-8 25-29 4-8
Convert REAL to DINT 13 741-747 5-10 671-676 4-9 532-535 4-8 610-615 4-8
Convert WORD to
10 38-43 4-10 31-36 4-9 23-27 3-7 26-30 4-8
REAL
Convert REAL to
13 728-733 4-10 666-671 4-9 529-533 4-8 612-616 4-8
WORD
Convert BDC to INT 10 51-56 4-10 29-34 4-9 25-29 4-8 26-31 4-8
Convert INT to BCD 10 107-112 4-10 86-91 4-9 74-78 4-8 78-82 4-8
Convert BCD to REAL 10 51-56 4-10 37-42 4-9 31-35 4-8 47-52 4-8
Truncate to INT 13 149-155 3-8 168-173 4-9 117-121 3-7 148-152 4-8
Truncate to DINT 13 142-147 3-8 161-166 4-9 113-117 3-7 141-145 4-8
Control Call a Subroutine 7 31-36 2-7 28-33 2-7 26-30 2-6 25-29 2-6
Do I/O 13 248-253 5-10 207-212 4-9 166-170 4-8 167-171 4-8
Service Request #6 10 51-56 3-8 59-64 4-9 43-47 3-7 53-57 4-8
Service Request #7
10 296-301 3-9 308-313 4-9 221-225 3-7 0-0 0-0
Read

Instruction Timing 601

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (Range in µsec.) per PLC Type

64-Point 14-/23-/28-pt 28-pt ESCP Nano
Size Disable
Group Function Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
bytes d
Service Request #7 1372-
10 1-5 281-286 1-6 194-198 1-4 0-0 0-0
Write 1378
Service Request #9 10 82-88 3-8 102-107 4-9 72-76 3-7 90-95 4-8
Service Request #14 10 245-251 3-8 258-263 4-9 208-212 4-8 104-109 4-8
Service Request #15 10 146-151 3-8 156-161 4-9 126-130 4-8 132-136 4-8
Service Request #16 10 71-77 3-8 91-96 4-9 74-77 4-8 71-75 4-8
Service Request #18 10 65-70 3-8 67-72 4-9 59-63 4-8 55-59 4-8
Service Request #23 10 212-217 3-8 236-242 4-9 173-177 3-7 207-212 4-8
Service Request #26,
10 323-328 3-8 342-347 4-9 279-283 4-8 293-298 4-8
#30
Service Request #29 10 39-44 3-8 56-61 4-9 47-51 4-8 40-44 4-8
Service Request #34 10 n/a n/a 57-62 4-9 n/a n/a n/a n/a
Service Request #35 10 n/a n/a 494-499 4-9 n/a n/a n/a n/a
Service Request #52 10 364-369 3-8 333-338 4-9 281-285 4-8 n/a n/a
Service Request #53 10 3-4 2-4 3-5 1-5 3-4 2-4 3-4 1-4
Nested
4 213-222 46-55 196-204 42-50 155-162 37-43 191-198 50-57
MCR/ENDMCR
PID-ISA Algorithm 16 213-221 46-54 196-204 42-50 155-161 37-43 191-198 50-58
PID-IND Algorithm 16 82-87 16-21 75-80 12-17 62-66 11-15 65-70 16-21

Instruction Timing 602

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

A-6 Typical Execution Times for Release 2.0 CPUs

The following table details function block timing for Release 2.0, Micro PLCs and Nano PLCs.
PLCs are grouped by similar types: Nano PLCs, 14/23/28 Point Micro PLCs, and 28-Point
Micro PLCS with ESCP.

For each instance of a function block, the table shows typical execution times when the
function block is enabled (receiving power flow) or disabled (not receiving power flow).

Execution Time (Range in µsec.)

Function Enabled Function Disabled
Size 14-/23-/ 28-pt 14-/23- 28-pt
Group Function Nano Nano
(bytes) 28-pt ESCP /28-pt ESCP
Timers Off Delay Timer 15 64-112 54-75 63-93 46-76 39-53 44-67
On Delay Timer 15 63-120 66 - 79 61-100 45-83 40-58 42-71
Elapsed Timer 15 58-114 59-75 56-96 34-75 40-52 32-66
Counters Up Counter 13 67-69 –50-53 89-136 63-64 48-48 47-74
Down Counter 13 47-82 57-63 43-79 39-77 50-60 37-75
Math Addition (INT) 13 30-63 27-45 28-55 6-10 5-8 6-10
Addition (DINT) 19 41-57 35-43 38-54 6-10 5-8 6-10
Addition (REAL) 17 89-121 –77-91 87-118 6-10 5-8 6-10
Subtraction (INT) 13 26-62 24-45 26-55 6-10 5-8 6-10
Subtraction (DINT) 19 36-57 27-44 30-53 6-10 5-8 6-10
Subtraction (REAL) 17 96-112 –83-90 100-117 6-10 5-8 6-9
Multiplication (INT) 13 34-66 30-47 31-57 6-10 5-8 6-10
Multiplication (DINT) 13 25-56 23-44 24-53 6-10 5-8 6-10
Multiplication (REAL) 17 106-149 97-114 109-141 6-10 5-8 6-10
Division (INT) 13 42-77 34-55 39-67 6-10 5-8 6-10
Division (DINT) 19 27-65 28-50 26-61 6-10 5-8 6-10
Division (REAL) 17 187-241 152-186 179-229 6-10 5-8 6-10
Modulo Division (INT) 13 46-86 38-61 40-75 6-10 5-8 6-10
Modulo Division (DINT) 19 41-72 38-55 38-68 6-10 5-8 6-10
Square Root (INT) 10 43-82 38-64 41-79 6-9 5-8 6-10
Square Root (DINT) 13 51-83 34-77 34-96 6-10 5-8 5-10
Square Root (REAL) 11 437-534 351-406 420-506 6-10 5-8 6-10
Trigonometric SIN (REAL) 11 1103-1523 919-1156 1064-1446 6-10 5-8 6-10
COS (REAL) 11 1091-1519 908-1192 1048-1444 6-10 5-8 5-9
TAN (REAL) 11 1691-2256 1370-1708 1622-2144 8-12 5-9 7-10
ASIN (REAL) 11 1528-1638 1274-1479 1507-1639 6-10 5-8 6-10
ACOS (REAL) 11 1528-1639 1220-1442 1507-1638 6-10 5-8 6-9

ATAN (REAL) 11 695-867 564-671 678-822 6-10 5-8 6-10

Instruction Timing 603

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (Range in µsec.)

Function Enabled Function Disabled
Size 14-/23-/ 28-pt 14-/23- 28-pt
Group Function Nano Nano
(bytes) 28-pt ESCP /28-pt ESCP
Logarithmic LOG (REAL) 11 734-926 599-710 709-878 6-10 5-8 6-10
LN (REAL) 11 672-866 555-659 646-821 6-10 5-8 6-10
Exponential Power of e 11 516-623 411-472 497-591 6-10 5-8 6-10
Power of X 11 292-379 226-287 276-359 6-10 5-8 6-10
Radian Conv Convert RAD to DEG 11 288-326 238-252 274-308 6-10 5-8 6-10
Convert DEG to RAD 17 70-100 59-77 66-95 6-10 5-8 6-10
Relational Equal (INT) 10 25-36 21-28 24-34 8-12 7-9 7-11
Equal (DINT 16 21-44 19-34 20-42 8-12 7-9 7-10
Equal (REAL) 14 33-57 29-44 31-54 8-12 7-9 7-11
Not Equal (INT) 10 18-36 17-28 18-34 8-12 7-9 7-11
Not Equal (DINT) 16 32-42 27-32 30-39 8-12 7-9 7-11
Not Equal (REAL) 14 37-57 32-44 34-54 8-12 7-9 7-11
Greater Than (INT) 10 28-36 24-28 27-34 8-12 7-9 7-11
Greater Than (DINT) 16 22-42 20-32 21-40 8-12 7-9 7-11
Greater Than (REAL) 14 37-58 31-44 34-54 8-12 7-9 7-11
Greater Than/Equal
10 19-36 17-28 17-34 8-12 7-9 7-11
(INT)
Greater Than/Equal
16 20-42 19-32 19-39 8-12 7-9 7-11
(DINT)
Greater Than/Equal
14 29-57 32-44 34-54 8-12 7-9 7-11
(REAL)
Less Than (INT) 10 19-36 16-28 18-34 8-12 7-9 7-11
Less Than (DINT) 16 20-42 18-32 19-39 8-12 7-9 7-11
Less Than (REAL) 14 36-58 23-44 24-54 8-12 7-9 7-11
Less Than/Equal (INT) 10 18-36 17-28 17-34 8-12 7-9 7-11
Less Than/Equal (DINT) 16 20-42 18-32 19-39 8-12 7-9 7-11
Less Than/Equal (REAL) 14 26-58 23-44 24-54 8-12 7-9 7-11
Range (INT) 13 22-44 20-34 20-42 8-12 7-9 7-11
Range (DINT) 22 24-51 20-39 22-48 8-12 7-9 7-11
Range (WORD) 13 22-43 20-33 20-41 8-12 7-9 7-11
Bit Logical AND 13 30-55 27-42 29-52 6-10 5-8 6-10
Operation Logical OR 13 30-55 27-42 28-52 6-10 5-8 6-10
Logical Exclusive OR 13 31-55 27-42 28-52 6-10 5-8 6-10
Logical Invert, NOT 10 27-45 24-35 25-43 6-10 5-8 6-10
Shift Bit Left 16 109-130 90-101 102-123 7-11 6-8 7-11
Shift Bit Right 16 108-120 88-93 102-113 7-11 6-8 7-11
Rotate Bit Left 16 77-108 64-83 72-102 6-10 5-8 6-10

Instruction Timing 604

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (Range in µsec.)

Function Enabled Function Disabled
Size 14-/23-/ 28-pt 14-/23- 28-pt
Group Function Nano Nano
(bytes) 28-pt ESCP /28-pt ESCP
Rotate Bit Right 16 82-109 64-71 78-103 6-10 5-8 6-10
Bit Position 13 43-72 36-55 40-68 6-10 5-9 6-10
Bit Clear 13 45-67 38-51 43-63 6-10 5-8 6-10
Bit Test 13 32-54 28-42 29-51 8-12 7-8 7-11
Bit Set 13 38-66 34-50 36-62 6-10 5-8 6-10
Mask Compare (WORD) 25 90-145 83-113 82-137 8-12 7-9 7-11
Mask Compare
25 92-145 77-112 88-137 8-12 7-9 7-11
(DWORD)
Data Move Move (INT) 10 20-42 19-32 19-40 6-10 5-8 6-10
Move (BOOL) 13 47-75 37-47 45-71 6-10 5-8 6-10
Move (WORD) 10 20-42 18-32 19-40 6-10 5-8 6-10
Move (REAL) 13 28-56 26-44 26-53 6-10 5-8 6-10
Block Move (INT) 28 26-58 24-44 24-54 6-10 5-8 6-10
Block Move (WORD) 28 26-58 24-44 24-54 6-10 5-8 6-10
Block Move (REAL) 13 47-108 44-82 46-103 7-10 6-8 7-10
Block Clear (WORD) 11 43-90 38-70 40-85 6-10 5-8 6-9
Shift Register (BIT) 16 92-125 73-98 87-119 7-11 6-9 7-10
Shift Register (WORD) 16 67-111 51-88 65-106 7-11 6-9 7-11
Bit Sequencer 16 111-142 97-140 109-134 86-104 68-107 78-98
COMMREQ 13 616-762 489-541 405-456 6-10 5-8 6-10
Table Array Move (INT) 22 61-106 53-83 57-100 6-10 5-8 6-10
Array Move(DINT) 22 54-95 48-72 51-90 6-10 5-8 6-10
Array Move (BOOL) 22 77-130 67-101 72-123 6-10 5-8 6-10
Array Move (BYTE) 22 58-104 51-79 53-98 6-10 5-8 6-10
Array Move (WORD) 22 62-106 53-83 57-100 6-10 5-8 6-10
Search Equal (INT) 19 51-85 42-66 47-81 8-12 7-10 7-11
Search Equal (DINT) 22 41-81 46-63 38-77 8-12 7-10 7-11
Search Equal (BYTE) 19 50-80 35-62 46-76 8-12 7-9 7-11
Search Equal (WORD) 19 51-85 42-66 48-81 8-12 7-9 7-11
Search Not Equal (INT) 19 64-93 42-72 59-88 8-12 7-9 7-11
Search Not Equal (DINT) 22 67-101 65-80 65-97 8-12 7-9 7-11
Search Not Equal (BYTE) 19 50-80 33-55 42-66 8-12 7-9 7-11
Search Not Equal
19 44-77 38-60 49-73 8-12 6-9 7-11
(WORD)
Search Greater/Equal
19 55-83 49-66 52-80 8-11 7-9 7-11
(INT)

Instruction Timing 605

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (Range in µsec.)

Function Enabled Function Disabled
Size 14-/23-/ 28-pt 14-/23- 28-pt
Group Function Nano Nano
(bytes) 28-pt ESCP /28-pt ESCP
Search Greater/Equal
22 50-81 49-63 47-77 8-12 7-9 7-11
(DINT)
Search Greater/Equal
19 44-80 40-62 43-76 8-12 7-9 7-11
(BYTE)
Search Greater/Equal
19 48-86 40-66 46-81 8-12 7-9 7-11
(WORD)
Search Greater Than
19 56-89 46-72 53-86 8-12 7-9 7-11
(INT)
Search Greater Than
22 57-87 44-69 53-83 8-12 7-9 7-11
(DINT)
Search Greater Than
19 46-93 48-67 44-82 8-12 7-9 7-11
(BYTE)
Search Greater Than
19 55-91 52-72 52-88 8-12 7-9 7-11
(WORD)
Search Less Than (INT) 19 54-78 38-61 50-74 8-12 7-9 7-11
Search Less Than (DINT) 22 66-103 47-80 62-98 8-12 7-9 7-12
Search Less Than (BYTE) 19 40-71 38-55 36-67 8-12 7-9 7-11
Search Less Than
19 43-79 48-61 40-74 8-12 7-9 7-11
(WORD)
Search Less/Equal (INT) 19 43-78 46-61 40-73 8-12 7-9 7-11
Search Less/Equal
22 41-81 48-63 38-77 8-12 7-9 7-11
(DINT)
Search Less/Equal
19 48-71 36-55 45-67 8-12 7-9 7-11
(BYTE)
Search Less/Equal
19 55-78 45-61 60-74 8-12 7-9 7-11
(WORD)
Conversion Convert INT to REAL 10 37-56 29-42 30-52 6-10 5-8 6-10
Convert REAL to INT 13 616-705 507-547 585-668 6-10 5-8 6-10
Convert DINT to REAL 13 37-58 28-44 32-54 6-10 5-8 6-9
Convert REAL to DINT 13 605-695 507-539 567-659 6-10 5-8 6-9
Convert WORD to REAL 10 34-55 28-42 28-52 6-10 5-8 6-10
Convert REAL to WORD 13 607-663 501-513 576-628 6-10 5-8 6-10
Convert BDC to INT 10 28-53 25-40 27-50 6-10 5-8 6-10
Convert INT to BCD 10 80-170 76-130 76-161 6-10 5-8 6-10
Convert BCD to REAL 10 41-68 33-52 33-64 6-10 5-8 6-10
Truncate to INT 13 152-190 134-146 145-179 6-10 5-8 6-10
Truncate to DINT 13 150-181 113-140 137-171 6-10 5-9 6-10
Control Call a Subroutine 7 28-56 27-44 26-52 4-6 3-4 4-5
Do I/O 13 183-206 149-205 168-186 6-10 5-10 6-10

Instruction Timing 606

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (Range in µsec.)

Function Enabled Function Disabled
Size 14-/23-/ 28-pt 14-/23- 28-pt
Group Function Nano Nano
(bytes) 28-pt ESCP /28-pt ESCP
Service Request #6 10 57-71 41-55 53-67 6-12 5-8 6-10
Service Request #7
10 289-42722 236-315 N/A 6-1022 5-8 N/A
Read
Service Request #7
10 519-52022 393-406 N/A 6-1022 5-8 N/A
Write
Service Request #9 10 76-112 65-86 105-123 5-10 5-7 5-9
Service Request #14 10 250-363 199-274 103-149 7-10 5-8 6-10
Service Request #15 10 66-92 65-72 64-87 6-10 5-8 6-10
Service Request #16 10 78-103 64-79 71-97 6-10 5-8 6-10
Service Request #18 10 56-141 52-107 52-133 6-10 5-8 6-10
Service Request #23 10 206-433 186-325 163-210 6-10 5-8 6-10
Service Request #26,
10 269-362 201-283 249-343 6-10 5-8 6-10
#30
Service Request #29 10 48-69 41-53 45-65 6-10 5-8 6-10
Nested MCR/ENDMCR 4 4 3 4 3 3 3
PID-ISA Algorithm 16 166-194 135-149 155-185 50-79 43-61 47-74
PID-IND Algorithm 16 164-194 135-150 155-184 50-80 43-61 47-74

22
Not applicable for 14-Point CPUs.

Instruction Timing 607

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

A-7 Typical Execution Times for Release 1.1 CPUs

Depending upon the application, release 1.1 CPUs show the following estimated
reductions in program execution times when compared with release 1.0 CPUs:
Nano PLCs: 20% - 28%
14-Pt Micro PLCs: 28%
28-Pt Micro PLCs: 28%

The following table details function block timing for a Release 1.1, 28-Point Micro PLC CPU
with ESCP, model IC200UDD120. For each instance of a function block, the table shows
typical execution times when the function block is enabled (receiving power flow) or
disabled (not receiving power flow).

Rel. 1.07 / 1.1 28-Point CPU with ESCP

Size
Group Function Function Enabled Function Disabled
(bytes)
Time, Range (µS) Time, Typical (µS)
Timers Off Delay Timer 15 60 - 70 56
On Delay Timer 15 66 - 77 56
Elapsed Timer 15 62 - 72 50
Counters Up Counter 13 40 - 60 58
Down Counter 13 60 54
Math Addition (INT) 13 30 - 40 7
Addition (DINT) 19 40 9
Addition (REAL) 17 89 - 100 8
Subtraction (INT) 13 30 - 40 6
Subtraction (DINT) 19 30 -40 7
Subtraction (REAL) 17 91 - 100 9
Multiplication (INT) 13 29 - 42 7
Multiplication (DINT) 13 24 - 40 8
Multiplication (REAL) 17 80 - 108 8
Division (INT) 13 40 - 50 6
Division (DINT) 19 31 - 49 10
Division (REAL) 17 150 - 182 9
Modulo Division (INT) 13 48 - 60 7
Modulo Division
19 44 - 51 10
(DINT)
Square Root (INT) 10 39 - 60 7
Square Root (DINT) 13 34 - 74 10
Square Root (REAL) 11 351 - 404 8

Instruction Timing 608

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Rel. 1.07 / 1.1 28-Point CPU with ESCP

Size
Group Function Function Enabled Function Disabled
(bytes)
Time, Range (µS) Time, Typical (µS)
SIN (REAL) 11 898 - 1149 9
COS (REAL) 11 867 - 1155 9
Trigonome TAN (REAL) 11 1138 - 1710 1
tric ASIN (REAL) 11 1242 - 1474 10
ACOS (REAL) 11 1220 - 1435 10
ATAN (REAL) 11 552 - 655 10
Logarithmi LOG (REAL) 11 587 - 697 8
c LN (REAL) 11 545 - 655 8
Power of e 11 407 - 466 10
Exponential
Power of X 17 226 - 283 10
Radian Convert RAD to DEG 11 228 - 246 10
Conversion Convert DEG to RAD 17 65 - 72 9
Relational Equal (INT) 10 20 - 30 10
Equal (DINT) 16 20 - 30 10
Equal (REAL) 14 30 - 40 10
Not Equal (INT) 10 20 - 24 10
Not Equal (DINT) 16 20 - 30 10
Not Equal (REAL) 14 30 - 40 10
Greater Than (INT) 10 20 - 22 10
Greater Than (DINT) 16 20 - 30 10
Greater Than (REAL) 14 40 10
Greater Than/Equal
10 23 - 30 10
(INT)
Greater Than/Equal
(DINT) 16 20 - 30 10
Greater Than/Equal 14 39 - 40 10
(REAL)
Less Than (INT) 10 20 - 22 10
Less Than (DINT) 16 30 10
Less Than (REAL) 14 36 - 40 10
Less Than/Equal (INT) 10 21 - 23 10
Less Than/Equal
(DINT) 16 30 - 40 10
Less Than/Equal 14 40 - 55 10
(REAL)
Range (INT) 13 21 - 30 10
Range (DINT) 22 26 - 38 10
Range (WORD) 13 25 - 30 10
Bit Logical AND 13 36 - 40 4

Instruction Timing 609

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Rel. 1.07 / 1.1 28-Point CPU with ESCP

Size
Group Function Function Enabled Function Disabled
(bytes)
Time, Range (µS) Time, Typical (µS)
Operation Logical OR 13 30 - 40 5
Logical Exclusive OR 13 30 - 40 5
Logical Invert, NOT 10 30 4
Shift Bit Left 16 85 - 96 9
Shift Bit Right 16 90 10
Rotate Bit Left 16 61 - 80 4
Rotate Bit Right 16 70 - 80 5
Bit Position 13 50 4
Bit Clear 13 34 - 50 6
Bit Test 13 30 - 40 10
Bit Set 13 36 - 47 4
Mask Compare
25 80 - 109 10
(WORD)
Mask Compare
25 70 - 106 10
(DWORD)
Data Move Move (INT) 10 27 - 30 4
Move (BOOL) 13 40 - 55 4
Move (WORD) 10 27 - 30 4
Move (REAL) 13 40 4
Block Move (INT) 28 30 - 40 4
Block Move (WORD) 28 30 - 40 4
Block Move (REAL) 13 37 - 83 8
Block Clear (WORD) 11 37 - 65 4
Shift Register (BIT) 16 77 - 93 9
Shift Register (WORD) 16 55 - 83 10
Bit Sequencer 16 92 - 108 83
COMMREQ 13 470 - 485 135
Table Array Move
INT 22 51 - 79 4
DINT 22 50 - 70 4
BOOL 22 70 - 96 5
BYTE 22 46 - 75 5
WORD 22 51 - 79 4
Search Equal
INT 19 46 - 60 10
DINT 22 50 - 60 10
BYTE 19 40 - 60 10
WORD 19 46 - 60 10

Instruction Timing 610

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Rel. 1.07 / 1.1 28-Point CPU with ESCP

Size
Group Function Function Enabled Function Disabled
(bytes)
Time, Range (µS) Time, Typical (µS)
Search Not Equal
INT 19 46 - 68 10
DINT 22 69 - 75 10
BYTE 19 39 - 50 10
WORD 16 47 - 68 10
Search Greater
Than/Equal
INT 19 51 - 60 10
DINT 22 50 - 60 10
BYTE 19 42 - 60 10
WORD 19 46 - 60 10
Search Greater Than
INT 19 50 - 70 10
DINT 22 48 - 65 10
BYTE 19 50 - 61 10
WORD 19 55 - 69 10
Search Less Than
INT 19 40 - 57 10
DINT 22 50 - 75 10
BYTE 19 40 - 50 10
WORD 19 50 - 58 10
Search Less
Than/Equal
INT 19 50 - 58 10
DINT 22 50 - 60 10
BYTE 19 40 - 50 10
WORD 19 50 - 58 10

Instruction Timing 611

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Rel. 1.07 / 1.1 28-Point CPU with ESCP

Size
Group Function Function Enabled Function Disabled
(bytes)
Time, Range (µS) Time, Typical (µS)
Convert INT to REAL
Convert REAL to INT 10 28 - 40 4
Convert DINT to REAL 13 495 - 537 4
Convert REAL to DINT 13 30 - 40 4
Convert WORD to 13 496 - 534 5
REAL 10 30 - 40 3
Conversion Convert REAL to 13 490 - 506 4
WORD 10 30 - 38 4
Convert BDC to INT 10 80 - 124 4
Convert INT to BCD 10 36 - 50 4
Convert BCD to REAL 13 132 - 142 4
Truncate to INT 13 113 - 134 4
Truncate to DINT
Call a Subroutine 7 30 - 40 0
Control Do I/O 13 142 - 144 4
Service Request
#6 10 46 - 50 8
#7 (read) 10 153 - 165 6
#7 (set) 10 384 - 387 5
#9 10 65 - 86 7
#14 10 97 - 125 5
#15 10 66 - 69 4
#16 10 70 - 75 5
#18 10 56 - 103 5
#23 10 183 - 322 4
#26,#30 10 196 - 243 4
#29 10 40 - 50 5
Nested MCR/ENDMCR
4 40 - 50 5
(combined)
PID-ISA Algorithm 16 131 - 149 62
PID-IND Algorithm 16 131 - 150 62

Instruction Timing 612

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

A-8 Typical Execution Times for Release 1.0 CPUs

Execution Time (µsec.)
Size Function Enabled Function Disabled
Group Function
(bytes) Nano PLC Micro PLC Nano PLC Micro PLC
(10 points) (14-, 23-, 28-pt) (10-points) (14-, 23-, 28-pt)
Coils/Relays Coils/Relays 3 1.2ms/K 1.0ms/K
Timers Off Delay Timer 15 95 100 64 70
On Delay Timer 15 100 106 70 73
Elapsed Timer 15 90 99 60 70
Counters Up Counter 13 76 80 70 80
Down Counter 13 77 82 71 80
Math Addition (INT) 13 50 60 10 10
Addition (DINT) 19 50 59 10 10
Addition (REAL) 17 119 127 10 10
Subtraction (INT) 13 50 60 10 10
Subtraction (DINT) 19 50 52 10 10
Subtraction (REAL) 17 119 128 10 10
Multiplication (INT) 13 53 60 10 10
Multiplication (DINT) 13 50 60 10 10
Multiplication (REAL) 17 133 137 10 10
Division (INT) 13 65 70 10 10
Division (DINT) 19 60 60 10 10
Division (REAL) 17 213 223 10 10
Modulo Division (INT) 13 70 80 10 10
Modulo Division (DINT) 19 65 70 10 10
Square Root (INT) 10 80 81 10 10
Square Root (DINT) 13 89 94 10 10
Square Root (REAL) 11 472 491 10 10
SIN (REAL) 11 1337 1399 10 10
COS (REAL) 11 1342 1396 10 10
TAN (REAL) 11 1993 2077 10 20
Trigonometric
ASIN (REAL) 11 1712 1783 10 10
ACOS (REAL) 11 1663 1740 10 10
ATAN (REAL) 11 761 795 10 10
LOG (REAL) 11 814 848 10 10
Logarithmic
LN (REAL) 11 760 790 10 10
Power of e 11 542 569 10 10
Exponential
Power of X 17 332 351 10 10

Radian Convert RAD to DEG 11 289 300 10 10

Conversion Convert DEG to RAD 17 89 97 10 10
Relational Equal (INT) 10 30 40 10 10
Equal (DINT) 16 40 40 10 10
Equal (REAL) 14 50 52 10 10
Not Equal (INT) 10 30 31 10 10

Instruction Timing 613

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (µsec.)

Size Function Enabled Function Disabled
Group Function
(bytes) Nano PLC Micro PLC Nano PLC Micro PLC
(10 points) (14-, 23-, 28-pt) (10-points) (14-, 23-, 28-pt)
Not Equal (DINT) 16 40 40 10 10
Not Equal (REAL) 14 50 51 10 10
Greater Than (INT) 10 30 32 10 10
Greater Than (DINT) 16 40 40 10 10
Greater Than (REAL) 14 50 52 10 10
Greater Than/Equal (INT) 10 30 31 10 10
Greater Than/Equal
(DINT) 16 40 40 10 10
Greater Than/Equal 14 50 55 10 10
(REAL)
Less Than (INT) 10 30 32 10 10
Less Than (DINT) 16 40 40 10 10
Less Than (REAL) 14 50 59 10 10
Less Than/Equal (INT) 10 30 31 10 10
Less Than/Equal (DINT) 16 40 40 10 10
Less Than/Equal (REAL) 14 50 55 10 10
Range (INT) 13 40 40 10 10
Range (DINT) 22 45 50 10 10
Range (WORD) 13 40 40 10 10
Bit Logical AND 13 50 51 10 10
Operation Logical OR 13 50 51 10 10
Logical Exclusive OR 13 50 51 10 10
Logical Invert, NOT 10 40 43 10 10
Shift Bit Left 16 110 118 10 10
Shift Bit Right 16 99 109 10 10
Rotate Bit Left 16 90 99 10 10
Rotate Bit Right 16 89 98 10 10
Bit Position 13 61 70 10 10
Bit Clear 13 60 70 10 10
Bit Test 13 50 52 10 10
Bit Set 13 60 70 10 10
Mask Compare (WORD) 25 129 138 10 10
Mask Compare (DWORD) 25 128 138 10 10
Data Move Move (INT) 10 40 40 10 10
Move (BOOL) 13 79 80 10 10
Move (WORD) 10 40 40 10 10
Move (REAL) 13 50 58 10 10
Block Move (INT) 28 50 52 10 10
Block Move (WORD) 28 50 52 10 10
Block Move (REAL) 13 99 108 10 10
Block Clear (WORD) 11 89 99 10 10
Shift Register (BIT) 16 118 127 10 10

Instruction Timing 614

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (µsec.)

Size Function Enabled Function Disabled
Group Function
(bytes) Nano PLC Micro PLC Nano PLC Micro PLC
(10 points) (14-, 23-, 28-pt) (10-points) (14-, 23-, 28-pt)
Shift Register (WORD) 16 101 109 10 10
Bit Sequencer 16 121 127 89 10
COMMREQ 13 600 590 144 155
Table Array Move
INT 22 98 101 10 10
DINT 22 89 97 10 10
BOOL 22 127 133 10 10
BYTE 22 98 100 10 10
WORD 22 98 101 10 10
Search Equal
INT 19 79 80 10 10
DINT 22 70 80 10 10
BYTE 19 70 80 10 10
WORD 19 79 80 10 10
Search Not Equal
INT 19 86 90 10 10
DINT 22 98 100 10 10
BYTE 19 60 70 10 10
WORD 16 87 90 10 10
Search Greater
Than/Equal
INT 19 80 81 10 10
DINT 22 70 80 10 10
BYTE 19 70 80 10 10
WORD 19 79 80 10 10
Search Greater Than
INT 19 79 90 10 10
DINT 22 79 89 10 10
BYTE 19 79 83 10 10
WORD 19 80 89 10 10
Search Less Than
INT 19 70 78 10 10
DINT 22 90 99 10 10
BYTE 19 60 70 10 10
WORD 19 70 80 10 10
Search Less Than/Equal
INT 19 70 78 10 10
DINT 22 70 80 10 10
BYTE 19 60 70 10 10
WORD 19 70 80 10 10

Instruction Timing 615

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Execution Time (µsec.)

Size Function Enabled Function Disabled
Group Function
(bytes) Nano PLC Micro PLC Nano PLC Micro PLC
(10 points) (14-, 23-, 28-pt) (10-points) (14-, 23-, 28-pt)
Conversion Convert INT to REAL 10 50 51 10 10
Convert REAL to INT 13 50 647 10 10
Convert DINT to REAL 13 50 59 10 10
Convert REAL to DINT 13 611 641 10 10
Convert WORD to REAL 10 50 51 10 10
Convert REAL to WORD 13 583 606 10 10
Convert BDC to INT 10 50 50 10 10
Convert INT to BCD 10 156 166 10 10
Convert BCD to REAL 10 60 70 10 10
Truncate to INT 13 169 179 10 10
Truncate to DINT 13 161 173 10 10
Control Call a Subroutine 7 46 51 10 10
Do I/O 13 173 185 10 10
Service Request
#6 10 70 71 10 10
#7 (read) 10 163 173 10 10
#7 (set) 10 143 150 10 10
#9 10 107 112 10 9
#14 10 157 167 10 10
#15 10 84 90 10 10
#16 10 98 100 10 10
#18 10 134 139 10 10
#23 10 222 476 10 10
#26,#30 10 298 310 10 10
#29 10 69 70 10 10
Nested MCR/ENDMCR
4 3 4 10 10
(combined)
PID-ISA Algorithm 16 188 194 12.8 3.2
PID-IND Algorithm 16 186 195 70 73

Instruction Timing 616

User Manual Appendix B
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Appendix B: Feature Comparison

Information in this appendix is arranged to provide a convenient means of comparing the
capabilities of the VersaMax Micro PLC and the Series 90 Micro PLC.

Operating Differences: Lists ways in which the VersaMax Nano and Micro PLCs operate
differently than earlier PLCs.

Program Functions Supported: This section compares the program functions supported by
VersaMax Nano PLCs and Micro PLCs with functions supported by Series 90 Micro PLCs.

Program References: Compares the program references used by VersaMax and Series 90
Micro PLCs.

B-1 Operating Differences

1. Subroutines are available on the VersaMax Nano and Micros. The maximum of
subroutines is 64 for Micro PLCs and 8 for Nano PLCs.
2. The VersaMax Nano and Micros have several functions that the Series 90 Micro did
not support.
— PID
— Nested JUMP, LABEL, and MCR. Use of JUMP, LABEL, and MCR functions in
Series 90 programs must be changed to nested.
— Scaling
— Floating point data types
— Override capability
3. Word-for-word changes are not allowed by VersaMax Nano & Micro PLCs. The Series
90 Micro allowed word-for-word changes in STOP mode.
4. The VersaMax 14-point Micro PLCs support expansion units; the Series 90 14-point
Micro PLCs did not.
5. When a serial port is configured for RTU slave it will revert to SNP when a
programmer is attached.
6. VersaMax Nano/Micros support Serial I/O protocol.
7. VersaMax 20, 23, 28, 40, and 64 point units feature a time of day clock.
8. The VersaMax Nano and Micros support Break-free SNP communications for greater
compatibility with modems.
9. All VersaMax Nano/Micros support auto-configuration capability.
10. High-Speed Counter/PWM/Pulse Train differences:
— VersaMax Nano/Micro PLCs do not support negative edge triggering for High-
Speed Counter Preload/Strobe inputs. This is different from the Series 90 Micro
PLC.
— VersaMax Nano/Micro PLCs have 4 PTO channels where the Series 90 Micro
PLC had 3 PTO channels.

Feature Comparison 617

User Manual Appendix B
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

— VersaMax Nano/Micro PLCs output for PTO are on Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q5. While
the Series 90 Micro PLCs output PTO on Q1, Q3, Q5. Wiring changes will be
required when a VersaMax Nano/Micro is used to replace a Series 90 PLC.
— The PTO #4 Complete bit is I511 and Start is Q511.
— For VersaMax Micro PLCs and Nano PLCs, the High-Speed Counter PWM and
PTO features use different %AQ settings than in the Series 90 Micro PLC. A
Series 90 Micro PLC folder containing these features will not function properly
if converted directly to a VersaMax Micro PLC folder. The logic which calculates
the %AQ frequencies and/or duty cycles must be changed before being used on
a VersaMax Micro or Nano PLC. Series 90 Micro programs which used the PWM
and PTO features needed to calculate values to put into the %AQ registers,
based on the desired frequency and duty cycle. For the VersaMax Nano and
Micro PLCs, this calculation is not necessary; the frequency and duty cycle must
be input directly into the %AQ registers.
— Frequency limits for the VersaMax HSC/Pulse outputs have been improved

HSC PTO/PWM
Frequency Limits Frequency Limits
Series 90 Micro 19Hz – 5kHz 19Hz - 2kHz
VersaMax
Nano 15Hz – 10kHz 15Hz - 5kHz
Micro 14- point / 28- point 15Hz – 10kHz 15Hz - 5kHz
Micro 20-, 40-, and 64-point 15Hz – 100kHz 15Hz - 65kHz
— For VersaMax Nano and Micro PLCs, the frequency of Pulse Train outputs can
be changed while the Pulse Train is operating. This is different from the Series
90 Micro PLC, which continues at the previous frequency until the start of the
next Pulse Train.
— New COMMREQ for load correction value for pulse train outputs. Sets the
change (in µS) that should be applied to the duty cycle of a Pulse Train output
to compensate for the slow turn-off time of the optical isolator circuit (see
below). The range is 0 to 200µS.
35µS - DC outputs for Nano/ 14-point/ 28point;
02µS - DC outputs for Micro 64-point;
85µS relay outputs for Nano/ 14-point/ 28-point;
10µS relay outputs for micro 64-point.

— HSC/PWM/PTO stops during Store or Clear

— PTO/PWM use enable bits (Q0505 to Q0508). A Series 90 PLC did not use bits
to enable the PTO/PWM. These bits must be enabled for the PTO/PWM feature
to work in the VersaMax Nano/Micros.

Feature Comparison 618

User Manual Appendix B
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

B-2 VersaMax Nano/Micro PWM/Pulse Outputs

Operating parameters for PWM and Pulse Train outputs are specified from the application
program by writing a value to the associated %AQ reference. For VersaMax Nano/Micro
PLCs, you need only to write the desired value to the %AQ reference. Series 90 Micro PLCs
require a mathematical conversion to determine the values to be written to the %AQ
references for PWM frequency, PWM duty cycle, and Pulse Train frequency. Therefore, these
values will be incorrect if you convert a Series 90 Micro application to a VersaMax
Nano/Micro application. You will need to change your application program so that it writes
the correct values to the %AQ references.

B-2.1 %AQ References for PWM

The frequency of the PWM output (15Hz to 5kHz for Nano/14-Point/28-Point;
15Hz – 65kHz for 20-, 40-, and 64-Point) is specified from the application program by
writing a value to the associated Frequency register. The PWM duty cycle (0 to 100%) is
selected using the associated Duty Cycle register. The number of PWM/PTO channels
available varies according to the Nano/Micro model.

Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Description

AQ002 AQ004 AQ006 AQ008 PWM Frequency (15 to 5000): Nano
PWM Frequency (15 to 5000): 14-pt
PWM Frequency (15 to 5000): 28-pt
PWM Frequency (15 to 65000): 64-pt
AQ003 AQ005 AQ007 AQ009 PWM Duty Cycle (0 – 10000)
Q0505 Q0506 Q0507 Q0508 Enable Output

If you don’t know the PWM frequency and duty cycle specified by the Series 90 Micro
application, you can calculate them from the %AQ reference values. See the formulas that
follow.

Feature Comparison 619

User Manual Appendix B
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

B-2.2 %AQ References for Pulse Train

The pulse frequency (15Hz to 5kHz for Nano/14-Point/28-Point; 15Hz – 65kHz for 20-, 40-,
or 64-Point) can be controlled from the application program by writing a value to the
associated Frequency register, as shown below. The number of pulses to be output (0 to
65535) is selected using the associated Number of Pulses register. The number of PWM/PTO
channels available varies according to the Nano/Micro model.

Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Description

AQ123 AQ125 AQ127 AQ121 PWM Frequency (15 to 5000): Nano
PWM Frequency (15 to 5000): 14-pt
PWM Frequency (15 to 5000): 28-pt
PWM Frequency (15 to 65000): 20-/40-/64-pt
AQ124 AQ126 AQ128 AQ122 Number of pulses to send to output (0 to
65535)
Q0505 Q0506 Q0507 Q0508 Enable Output
Q0494 Q0495 Q0496 Q00511 Start Pulse Train
I0494 I0495 I0496 I00511 Pulse Train Complete

If you don’t know the pulse frequency specified by the Series 90 Micro application, you can
calculate them from the %AQ reference values .

Note: Number of Pulses does not require conversion.

B-2.3 Enabling Outputs

The output for a channel must be enabled before its PWM or Pulse Train function can be
used. A PWM or Pulse Train output is enabled from the application program by setting its
Output Enable bit to one. The output is disabled by setting its Output Enable bit to zero.

Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 Output 4 Description

Q0505 Q0506 Q0507 Q0508 Enable Output

B-2.4 Load Correction

PWM duty cycles are configurable and Pulse-train outputs have a nominal duty cycle of 50%,
but the PLC optical isolators skew the duty cycle to something greater than 50%, depending
on temperature and loading due to the output. To compensate for this, the PLC applies load
correction to correct the pulse width (duty cycle) of each pulse. The default Load Correction
is 40µS, which approximates the correction needed for an output tied directly to an input at
50% duty cycle. The Load Correction can be changed within the range 0 to 200µS by sending
the new value in a COMMREQ.

B-2.5 Formulas for Converting Series 90 Micro Frequencies

and Duty Cycles
For additional information about these parameters, refer to the Series 90 Micro User’s
Manual, GFK-1065.

Feature Comparison 620

User Manual Appendix B
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

B-3 Functions Supported

VersaMax Series 90
Function
Nano PLC, Micro PLC Micro PLC
Contacts
Normally Open Contact all all
Normally Closed Contact all all
Continuation Contact <+>– all all
Coils
Normally Open Coil all all
Negated Retentive Coil all all
Negated Coil all all
Retentive Coil all all
SET Coil all all
Retentive SET Coil all all
RESET Coil all all
Retentive RESET Coil all all
Positive Transition Coil all all
Negative Transition Coil all all
Continuation Coil –<+> all all
Links
Horizontal link all all
Vertical link all all
Timers and Counters
Elapsed Timer all all
On-Delay Timer all all
Off-Delay Timer all all
Up Counter all all
Down Counter all all
Math
Addition all all
Addition, double precision all all
Addition, Floating Point all not supported
Subtraction all all
Subtraction, double precision all all
Subtraction, Floating point all not supported
Multiplication all all
Multiplication, double precision all all
Multiplication, floating point all not supported

Feature Comparison 621

User Manual Appendix B
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

VersaMax Series 90
Function
Nano PLC, Micro PLC Micro PLC
Division all all
Division, double precision all all
Division, Floating Point all not supported
Modulo Division all all
Modulo Division, double precision all all
Scaling all not supported
Square Root all all
Power of x all not supported
Power of e all not supported
Trigonometric sine all not supported
Trigonometric cosine all not supported
Trigonometric tangent all not supported
Inverse sine all not supported
Inverse cosine all not supported
Inverse tangent all not supported
Convert to Degrees all not supported
Convert to Radians all not supported
Logarithm, base 10 all not supported
Logarithm, natural all not supported
Square Root, double prec. all all
Relational
Equal all all
Not Equal all all
Less Than or Equal To all all
Greater Than or Equal To all all
Less Than all all
Greater Than all all
Equal, double precision all all
Not Equal, double precision all all
Less Than or Equal To, double precision all all
Greater Than or Equal To, double precision all all
Less Than, double precision all all
Greater Than, double precision all all
Range, signed integer all all
Range, double precision signed integer all all
Range, word all all
Range, double word all all

Feature Comparison 622

User Manual Appendix B
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

VersaMax Series 90
Function
Nano PLC, Micro PLC Micro PLC
Bit Operation
Bit Set all all
Logical AND all all
Bit Clear all all
Logical OR all all
Bit Test all all
Logical Exclusive OR all all
Bit Position all all
Logical Invert all all
Shift Left all all
Shift Right all all
Rotate Left all all
Rotate Right all all
Masked Compare, word all all
Masked Compare, double word all all
Data Move
Multiple Integer Move all all
Constant Block Move, Integer all all
Multiple Bit Move all all
Multiple Word Move all all
Constant Block Move all all
Block Clear all all
Shift Register Word all all
Shift Register Bit all all
Bit Sequencer all all
Communication Request all all
Table Functions
Search equal to all all
Search not equal to all all
Search less than all all
Search less than or equal to all all
Search greater than all all
Search greater than or equal to all all
Array move all all
Conversion
Integer to BCD all all
BCD to integer all all

Feature Comparison 623

User Manual Appendix B
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

VersaMax Series 90
Function
Nano PLC, Micro PLC Micro PLC
Control
Comment all all
End all all
no operation all all
Nested Jump all not supported
Non-Nested Jump not supported All
Nested master control relay all not supported
Target number for jump all all
Nested endmcr all not supported
Master Control Relay (non-nested) not supported all
End Master Control Relay (non-nested) not supported all
Do I/O update all Rel. 3.00
PID-ISA algorithm all all
PID-IND algorithm all all
Service Request all all
Drum Sequencer all all
Communication
Modbus_TCP_RW Micro 20, 40, 64 not supported
Rel. 3.83 and later
Motion
Find Home Micro 20, 40, 64 not supported
Rel. 3.60 and later
Go Home Micro 20, 40, 64 not supported
Rel. 3.60 and later
Jogging Micro 20, 40, 64 not supported
Rel. 3.60 and later
Blending Micro 20, 40, 64 not supported
Rel. 3.60 and later
Stop Motion Micro 20, 40, 64 not supported
Rel. 3.60 and later

Feature Comparison 624

User Manual Appendix B
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

B-4 Program References

The table below compares reference sizes for VersaMax and Series 90 Micro PLCs with
similar numbers of I/O points.

Reference Reference Range VersaMax VersaM VersaMa Series 90 Series 90

Type 10-Point ax x 14-Point 23- and
Nano PLCs 14- 23- and Micro 28-Point
Point 28-Point PLCs Micro
Micro Micro PLCs
PLCs PLCs
User program Not applicable 2K words 9K words 9K words 3K words 6K words
logic
Register %R0001 - %R0256 or 256 words 2K words 256 words 2K words
references %R2048
Discrete %I0001 - %I0512 512 bits
inputs
Discrete %Q0001 - %Q0512 512bits
outputs
Discrete %G0001 - %G1280 1280 bits
global
references
Discrete %M0001 - %M1024 1024 bits
internal coils
Discrete %T0001 - %T0256 256 bits
temporary
coils
System status %S0001 - %S0032 32 bits
references %SA0001 - %SA0032 32 bits
%SB0001 - %SB0032 32 bits
%SC0001 - %SC0032 32 bits
Analog and %AI0001 - %AI0128 128 words
High-Speed
Counter
inputs
Analog %AQ0001 - 128 words
outputs %AQ0128

Feature Comparison 625

User Manual Appendix C
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Appendix C: Battery Backup Options

Backup battery options are available for 20-, 23-, 28-, 40-, and 64-point VersaMax Micro
PLCs. A backup battery protects the RAM memory contents of the PLC when the PLC power
is removed or turned off. The battery also backs up the CPU’s real-time clock.

C-1 CPU Battery Consumption

The battery consumption of the Micro PLC depends on whether the power is on or off and
on the serial number of the Micro PLC. Consumption with the power off is greater at higher
temperatures.

Controller Status Battery Consumption per Hour

Power ON PLCs with serial number prior to 07000069274: 30 µA
PLCs with serial number after 07000069274: 3 µA
Power OFF PLCs with serial number prior to 07000069274:
83 µA @ 70°C
36 µA @ 20°C
PLCs with serial number after 07000069274:
56 µA @ 70°C
9 µA @ 20°C
20-, 40-, and 64-Pt Micro PLCs:
31 µA @ 55°C
3 µA @ 25°C

C-2 Backup Batteries for VersaMax Micro PLCs

Two types of backup battery are available, IC200ACC403 and IC200ACC414.

Part Battery Battery Memory Backup at Memory Backup at

Number Type Capacity 70C (power OFF 20C (power OFF
continuous) continuous)
IC200ACC403 Coin Type 3.0 Vdc @ 3.5 months23 8.1 months23
210mAh 5.2 months24 32.4 months24
IC200ACC414 Cylinder 3.6 Vdc @ 13.2 months23 30.4 months23
Type 790mAh 19.6 months24 121.9 months24

The High Capacity battery (IC200ACC414) is provided with a special battery holder that is
compatible with all 20-, 23-, 28-, 40- and 64-point VersaMax Micro PLCs.

23
Units with serial number prior to 07000069274 (manufactured before November 2002)
24
Units with serial number after 07000069274 (manufactured after November 2002)

Battery Backup Options 626

User Manual Appendix C
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

C-3 Calculating the Life of a Battery

This example compares typical battery longevity for the two types of Micro PLC backup
battery, for VersaMax Micro PLCs with a serial number after 07000069274.

In this example, a machine sits at the OEM facility for 30 days with the battery attached to
the Micro PLC CPU, prior to shipment to the end user. No power is applied.

• CPU battery consumption during 30 days with no power: 40,320 µA:

24 hours x 56 µA per hour = 1,344 x 30 days = 40,320 µA (worst case of 70°C storage
temperature)

After the machine is shipped and installed, the end user maintains power on the machine
24 hours a day but shuts down the machine during the weekends.

• Power ON: 24 hours x 3 µA = 72 µA/day

• Power ON: 5 days x 72 µA = 360 µA/5 days
• Power OFF: 48 hours x 32.5 µA (45°C cabinet temperature) = 1560 µA/weekend
• Total weekly usage: 1,920 µA

C-3.1 For Standard Backup Battery IC200ACC403

Standard Backup Battery has 210,000 µA available. In this example, subtracting the CPU
battery consumption during the 30 days at the OEM facility (40,320, see above), would
leave 169,680 µA still available. Therefore, the battery would last approximately 1.7 years
(88 weeks) at the end-user location before needing replacement:

169,680 divided by 1,920 total weekly usage (see above) = 88 weeks

C-3.2 For High Capacity Battery IC200ACC414

High-capacity Backup Battery has 790,000 µA available. In the example, subtracting the CPU
battery consumption at the OEM facility (40,320) would leave 749,680 µA still available.
Therefore, the battery would last approximately 7.5 years (390 weeks) at the end user
location before needing replacement:

749,680 divided by 1,920 weekly usage (see above) = 390 weeks.

Battery Backup Options 627

User Manual Appendix D
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Appendix D: Input Simulators

This section describes input simulators that can be used to easily turn on or off any DC input
point on a VersaMax Nano PLC or VersaMax Micro PLC.

• IC200ACC450 Input Simulator for DC-powered VersaMax Nano PLCs

• IC200ACC451 Input Simulator for DC-powered VersaMax Micro PLCs and
Expansion Units

D-1 IC200ACC450
Input Simulator for DC-powered VersaMax
Nano PLCs
The six-position DC input simulator connects directly to the input terminals on a VersaMax
Nano PLC. An external connection for the 12Vdc or 24Vdc is required.

Figure 394

D-1.1 Compatibility
Input Simulator IC200ACC450 is compatible with any DC input VersaMax Nano PLC. The
input simulator is not to be used with AC Inputs.

Input Simulators 628

User Manual Appendix D
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

D-1.2 Installation Instructions

WARNING
To avoid a risk of electric shock, turn off power to the VersaMax Nano PLC and disconnect
the main power before attaching the Input Simulator.

1. Loosen all screws on the input terminal block.

2. Insert the Input Simulator as shown above.
3. Tighten all screws on the input terminal block.
4. Turn power on and turn switches on the simulator ON and OFF. The corresponding
LEDs on the VersaMax Nano PLC should light up, showing proper installation. If the
LEDs do not light, power down and recheck the screws to make sure they are tight.

D-2 IC200ACC451
Input Simulator for DC-powered VersaMax
Micro PLCs and Expansion Units
The eight position DC input simulator connects directly to the input terminals of a VersaMax
Micro PLC or Expansion Unit. The connection takes advantage of the 24Vdc provided by the
Micro PLC or Expansion Unit; no external wiring is required.

Figure 395

D-2.1 Compatibility
Input Simulator IC200ACC451 is compatible with any VersaMax DC input:

• 14-point, 23-point, or 28-point Micro PLC

• 14-point or 28-point Expansion Unit
The input simulator is not to be used with AC Inputs.

Input Simulators 629

User Manual Appendix D
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

D-2.2 Installation Instructions

WARNING
To avoid a risk of electric shock, turn off power to the VersaMax Micro PLC or Expansion Unit,
and disconnect the main power before attaching the Input Simulator.

1. Loosen all screws on the input terminal block.

2. Insert the Input Simulator as shown above.
3. Tighten all screws on the input terminal block.
4. Turn power on and turn switches on the simulator ON and OFF. The corresponding
LEDs on the Micro PLC or Expansion Unit should light up, showing proper installation.
If the LEDs do not light, power down and recheck the screws to make sure they are
tight.

Input Simulators 630

User Manual Appendix E
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

Appendix E: Relay Contact Ratings

This section shows relay contact ratings for modules with output relays.

Load Condition Current (Amps)

125Vac P.F. = 1 0.6
P.F. = 0.7 0.4
P.F. = 0.4 0.2
250Vac P.F. = 1 0.9
P.F. = 0.7 0.6
P.F. = 0.4 0.3
30Vdc L/R = 1ms 0.6
L/R = 7mS 0.3
L/R = 15mS 0.15

P.F. = power factor for AC inductive loads

L/R = time constant for DC inductive loads

E-1 125Vac
Figure 396

Relay Contact Ratings 631

User Manual Appendix E
GFK-1645M Dec 2019

E-2 250Vac
Figure 397

E-3 30Vdc
Figure 398

Relay Contact Ratings 632

 USER MANUAL
GFK-1645M
Dec 2019

Technical Support & Contact Information

Home link: http://www.Emerson.com/Industrial-Automation-Controls

Knowledge Base: https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-Automation-Controls/support

Note: If the product is purchased through an Authorized Channel Partner, please contact the seller directly for any support.

Emerson reserves the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of the products mentioned in this manual at any time without
notice. Emerson does not assume responsibility for the selection, use or maintenance of any product. Responsibility for proper selection, use
and maintenance of any Emerson product remains solely with the purchaser.

© 2019 Emerson. All rights reserved.

Emerson Terms and Conditions of Sale are available upon request. The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co.
All other marks are the property of their respective owners.